Hans Berger

Automating
with STEP 7 in
LAD and FBD
51MATIC 57300/400
Programmable Controllers

SIEMENS

HansBerger

Automating with STEP 7 inLAD and FBD

wooer diagram (LAO) "nd function block diagram (FSD) ~re the graphic-<:>rient.. rl
pro9ram min9lan9u a9~ in the prog r~mmi n9 .~oftwaraSTEP 7. Now,n it< fourth
~>dj.lj.orl, this book tntwd uce, in the late,t ver<.ion of STEP 7 w ith new function~.
1\ de,cribe, e lemen ts arld_~pp l icJtion"'lo.. o"" with both SIMATIC 57'100 and
5IMATIC.57400mduding the a pp lications w ilh PROFINET. Speda l lu nciions He
PROF INET 10 , SFC 109 Protect and function bloc~< for fieldbu~ !y<; tems <Ire a lso
<!e.crim.d.
II is 'almed at<lll users 01 51MATIC 57 controllers , First time u se-rs are int""duce d 10
the field of p rogra mmable con1rollers, w h il e advanced USers learn a bmJl ~peci fic
applications of th~SIMATIC 57 automation ,~stem.
SIMATICiSlh e wo rldl.o'li de sta bljsn.e<l au tomMion syrtem for im plementing indus
trial control:systems for madJ;nes, ma n ufact uring plants and industrial pmce,.
Releva nt ope n-loop and dosed-Joop comrol tash Me formulated in various pro,
9ramming langllages with the programming software STl;P7 ,
All programming e xamples found in the book - and ,"ven ~ few extra example' -
~",_available .over tile publishe r'< w eb,ite under Download ....

Contents

Operation pri n~ieje of programmable conl<o l)er,. System overv;'/(; SIMATIC S7

~nr! STE e 7 - (AD ~"'I FRD pro<Jr~mm;n<J laO<Jua<Jes . Data typ"'. Binary and
dig ita l instructions Prog ram seque n ce control User program ,"xewt;on

Ord~r N<>. A19100 153HI951-X_7600

4" edition, 2008

Publicis Corporate Pllblishing

www.publids ..Jelbook~

Automating with
STEP7 in LAD and FBD
Programmable Controllers

51MATIC 57-300/ 40 0
by Hans Berger

4th revised and extended edition, 2008

Publicls Corporate Publishing

HiblioiJ1lphic: information publi.hed by the Ikut""he N.tionalbibliom..k

The Dc-uttehe Narionall';bliom..k liM. this publication in th~ Dnnsch~ Natiooalbibliopfle:
detailed bibliolV"pJ",; data:lre ",... ilablc LIt the lnlCmC1 al hup :l'dnb.d-nb.~.

Th" Jl<OiJ1Imming .,.ample. oO<1OO11lnll" on dc",,";bing III<: L"-O .ne! FBD fUDctioll1 and prO~id'"lI SJM,,-TlC 57
_ ... with progr.mming tip. for wiving speclfio ta.k. with this contron.r.
Tho programming example. gi vell 1ft the book do I",t prot.n<! to be complete w lut;"", or to be "ne u,.hle on
fulu", STEP 7 rolea.." or S7-300/400 ver.;onl. AddilioNll .Ir. mu>t b. talen in order 10 comp ly with 11>0 ",I_
""ani safely "'liIu l"i"" .

,hi.

The luthOO" and pub'is"'" ha vo taken ~at e,,", wi:h an I~x\l and illU>tnltioos in
book. ".".<thel". orrl>t'll
""n """.r be comple'ely avoided. Th" publisher lfId tho author
no [jability. ""anll... oflepl booi fo<
any damap ",.ulling from the use of the pmlil'V".rrunll .xamples.

""".-pi

The aulhor at>d publi.her are ah.",YJ valefu! 10 bear your "'SJIODSO> 10 th~ conlen'" of me book.
PubHcij CorporolC PubliMrina:
P.O. IJ.ox 32<1
0 _91030 Eriangen
E_mail ' publ io;hin g -bools@publioi . de
Inl.""", www.p ub lici .delbooh

ISBN 978-3-89578-297-8
4th edItion. 2008
Ed itOr. Si.m .... "-klkngcselbchaft. Berlin and \h"llch
l'ubli,h..-: I'ubIkil COIJl'O'"'lle Publi.hiog, Erla/li""
C 2008 by Publici. KommunihtionsAIClIturGmbll. OWA. ErI""lIen
Thi. publiclloon and all parts tlterwf an: plttl"'" by copyrillht. All rights ..,..,."ed
Any ux of;1 outoide the striet prm.-;.ions of the copyrigbtl.'" without th., consetll oftht publisher is forbtddon
and ..m incur pt;nallia. This &pplil!1 pankularly 10 ",prot.!l,ICIion. ..... <1!I&tKm. mkmfilmillj or otbcrproc:ouin3.
and 10 6t""'Je or proces.injl: in electlttoic. 1}'1ttm. It al", oppli 10 tho use of ex"""'", from til<: text.
Prinled in Gcmuny

Preface

Preface

The SIMATTC automation sys,em uni,es aJl the

subsystem, of an automation solu.ion under
unifonn system architecture into a homogeneous whole from the field level right up to process controL This TotaHy Integrated Automa_
tion (TIA) concept pennits integrated ~onfil!ur
ing, programming, data management and com_
mun ications within the complete automation
system Fine-tuned communications mechan isms permit hamloniou. interaction \xr.vcen
programmable controllers. visualization systems and d istributed lfOs.
As the basic tool for SIMATlC, STEP 7 handles
the par~onth~sis function for Totally Integrated
Automation. STEP 7 is used to carry out the
configuralion and progranulllng of the
SIMATIC 57, SIMATTC C7 and SIMATIC
WinAC automation systcms. Microsoft \Vindow. has been .el""ted as the operating system.
thus opening up .he world of standard PCs with
the user desktop widely used in the office environment.
For block programming STEP 7 provides programming languages that comply with DL" EN
6 .1131 _3: STL (statement list; an Assembler
like language), LAD (ladder logic; a Tepresentation .imi lar to relay logic di agrams), FUD
(fun ction block diagram) and the S7_SCL
opt ional package (snucrured control language .
a Pascal-like high-level language). Several
optiona l packages supplemcf'llthese languages:
S7-GRAPH (sequential control). S7.HiGraph
(programming wi,h state-transition diagrams)
and CFC (conn~ting blocks; similar to func tion b l""k diagram) . The various methods of
representation allow evcry uSCr to select the
suitable control fUnclion description. Th is

broad adaplabihty in representing th~ control

task \0 be solved significantly simplifies working with STEP 7
This book describes thc LAD and FBD programming languages for S7 -300/400, As a
valuable s"pplement to the language description. and foilowing an introdnction to the 57300/4 00 automation system, il provides valuable and practice-oriented information on the
b asic handling of STEP 7 for the configuration
of StMATIe PLCs, their networking and programming, The description ofthc "basic fune
tions" of a binary control, such as e.g. logic
opcI1llions or storage functions, is panicularly
useful for kginncrs or those convening from
contactor controls to STEP 7. The digital functions explain how digital values are combined;
for example, bask calculations, comparisons or
data type conversion.
The book shows how you can control the program processing (program flow) with LAD and
FBD and design structured programs. In addi tion to the cyclically proce..ed main progrom,
you can also incorpor-lle eventdriven program
sections as well as influence the behavior oftbe
controller at startup and in the event of errors!
faults. The book ~onclud~s with a general over
view of Ihe system functions and the function
sel for LAD and FBD. The COnlcnrs of Ihis
book describe Version 5 .4 Service Pack 3 ofthe
STEP 7 programming software.

Erlangen, May 2008

Hans Berger

The Contents of the Book at a Glance

Overview of the
S 7-300/400 progmnunable
logic controller

Introdncdoll

1 SlJ\L\TIC S7-3IJGI4Q(l
C"",,.,,Uor

I'LC functions
comparahle to a comactor
control sy,tem

Ba.k fun<."I1"ns

Handling numhcN and

digi\al operands

Digita l fUllctioUJ

4 BI ... ,), Lo~k Operation.

9 Cump.ri..,n Function.

A.>.iD, OR.nd fxdus;ve OR

FUDell"".;

Comporjwn Accordu'i 10
Da'" Types INT, DiNT and

Pru~rammabtc

Structure of the Pmgrammahk

Oll\lmll .. (H",dware Componellts of$7_300(400);

N""ting t'uru:lions

Memory Ar"",~
Distributed [10

(PROFIfIUS QP):

5 Memory Functio ns

A;,ign. Sci ODd }l.eset.;

Cooununiu><ioDs (Sutm.t.),

Midlme o.,lp"a;

M.-.Juie Addru8C.;

bdge e,-.Iua"oo:

Add,."..,., A,,,,,,

I:.~.tnple

of a Cooveyor Bolt

Control SY"t<m

2 ST EP 7
SGR... r.
~:

Loot! aoo Trunsfer Functions:

C<)ftfiguring tbe Net""orli:;

Sy,t= Functions for

Data Transfer

3 SI:\-tl\TIC S7
Pm~m

7 'f!moro
Start SIMATIC Timon with
F ive Diffe",nt Ch.,-aotrn.tic.,
Re ~tting and Scannmg;
lEC Timer Function.

Addrc.ing V.. iabli;:"

Coost""; Rcprc .. otation,
Oat. 'r;'PI'; D<:s<ri ption

.-u.nct1on.

FunctiOn>;

~u.ring_ Square_root
hlr3<lion, Exponerrtiatioo,

U:>garitlull5

Data Type C""ve.-.ion;

Complement FOImation

t3 Shift fun<tion.

8 Counto ...

, ProgralnIl1ing C,><k 1I100KSIlrl<l

1)0", Blocks;

Mot~.m.lIcat

Shifting and ROOIIIn<:

Program I'mce"ing;

Blocl{TyJ>e' :

11

12 Com'oT5ign fUDotlon.

LADlFBIf Pru""n &bIOI';

OIJline Mod<: T~tiDgL'LD
ODd FUD Pmg ... m.~

Fou,-fuooion M.lh wilh INT,

DINT aJ>J REAL numb.:rs:

Arc functi<m.;
6 Mow FUDction'

Configurina Stal ions;

Syn,bol Edi"'r;

10 .... rllbmetk FUDCtlUOS

Tri~omctric

P",&rammID~

Ilditiog Projects;

~,

SIMATJC Counter->;
Count up. Count down, SCI,
Reset.nd Sc"" Count""';
IEC CountIT Function,

14 Word Lo~i<
l'r<:>o;:e;sin&
AND, OR and &d""i,'. OR
Worrl Logi<: Operation

The Programming Examples at a Glance

The: pre5CIlt book provides many figureS repre~t iDg the use ofl/lc LAD aod reo J'!TOiI1UIIming languages. All programmini examples
can be downloaded from the publisller', website _w.publicis.deIbooks. There are NoD Iibruiet LAD_ lJ.ook Md FOD_Book.

The libraries LAD_Book and FBD_Book contain dght programs that are ...entillly illustration, of the graphi~al rcprestntation. Two extens;,c cxamples oIIow the propamming of
funcrion$, function blocks and local instances
(Con'cyor Example) and the handling of data
(Message Frame Example). All the uamplcs
contain symbols and comments.

,
~ 8

fa

and Looalln'to"" ...

103

106
FB 101
fB lOS

Fe 4-t

The libraries are supplied in archived fOITII.

Before you ean sum working with them, you
must dearehive the libraries. Select the FlLE_
DEARCUJVE menu item in the SIMATIC Manager and follow the instructions (see also the
REA DME.TXT within the down load files).

To uy the programs out. set up a project corresponding 10 your hardware configuration and
then copy the program. incl uding the symbol
table from the library 10 the project. Now you
can call the example programs, adapt them for
your own purposes aud tcstthem onlin e.

Llbran fBD Book

DUI1)'pu
EXlmples of Definition and Applieatillll

Program Processl n!:

Ex.mples or SFC Calli

fB 101 Elmlentary Data Typt'

fB 102 Complex Data Types
Fn 103 Panomcler Types

fB
FB
FB
FB

Basic FunctiOn!
FUD Reprcs<:nlOlion Examples

Conwyor Enml'l e
Examples ufBasic Functions and Locallnstanc~

Fa
FB
Fa
FB
FB

Fe 11
FC 12
FB 20
Fa 21

1().1
105
106
107
108

Cbapt.r4: Series and Parallel Circuits

Chapttr5:
Chapler6:
Chapter7:
ChapterS:

Memory Fl1IIC1ion<
Mo,. Functi<Kl.'i
Timer Functions
CO\If\ter Functions

120 Chapto:r 20: Main Program

121 Chapt..,. 21: Interrupt ProcesSlnS
122 Chapter 22: Stan_up Char'lC1eristio:s
123 C~aptcr 23: Error Handlins

FB 22

Belt Control
Counter Control

F=<
Con"eyor Belt
Paru Counter

Digltl l FunctIons
fBD Reprnenllotion Examples

:llnulIc Fnm. En mpll'

Data Handling Examples

FB 109
fa]10
FR 111
FB 112
Fa 113
Fa 11 4

UD151 Data Suucture For tltc Frame HelKkr

OUT ~ 2 Data SlIUCture for I Message
Fa SI Genc-rale Message Frame
FBll Sto~ M~ge Frame
FC 51 Tirne-of-day Check
Fe 52 Copy Data A~a witb indirt\:t A dd~ss ing
Gc n c r~1 [umplcs

Chapter 9:
Chapter 10:
Ch.lpter H:
Chapter 12:
ClLapterl3:
Chapter 14:

}'ro~r.m

FBD

Compari:!Oll flmCliOll$
Arithm~tic func(ions
Math FunctiolU
Conversion F"""ions
Shift Func(ions
Word Logic

Flow ContrOl
Examples

Re~sentalion

FB 115
FB 116
Fa 117
FB 118
Fa 119

Cltap(er 15: Slatus Bils

Chapter 16: Jump Funcrions
Chapter 17: Mas((1 Control Rday
Chapter 18: Block F"",tions
Chapto:r 19: Block pll3ffiC(e~

FC 41
FC 42
FC 43
FC ~

R.ange MoniUlr
Limit Value Dc~linn
Compound Intere,t CIJculalion
Doubleword"",i'le Edge E,.. lualion

Automating with STEP 7

- .

..".

......." ,'

O~"'''ting

Th is double page shows the basic proccdure for using the

STEP 7 programming softv.1lI"e.

In the nexi steps. you configure

the hardware and, if applicable.
the communications conne<:tions. Following this, you creale and test the program.

=w-

A utomati ng "jth STE P 7

Start the SIMATIC Manager

ami set up a new proj ect or Op"n
an cx isting proj ect. All the data
for an automation task are
stored in the fonn of objects in
a project. Whcn you set up a
project. yOll create conta iners
for the accumulated data by set_
ting up the required s/alions
with at least the CPUs; then the
containcTll for the user programs arc also created. Vou can
also create a program container
d irect in the projttt.

i"",7~

'"

Cooflgu ra central rack

(select paw-er supply

Use pmject
ass istant

a nd CPU)

~"

Creat.. Pruj..ct

CPU MIh DP ma$ter:

contain",

al~~~rt PROf' I6US

CD

, ,,

tnunstaUOrt

1-

-,

Conf'llU'" expansiofl rack

(proceed 8 S for central

Open Hardware
cbj&e1

"~I

The order for crealing the aUlo_

malion data is not fixed. Only

lhe following general regula_

lion applies: if you want 10 process object s (data), they must
exist; i f YOll want to insen object,. the relevrutl containers
must he available.

.'

proje ct

~",.

rack and CPU

Mark DP m a~t?: I

You can iotcmtpl processing in

a projC\:t at any time and continue again from any locatinn
the next lime you stan the
SIMATI C Manager.

Sa~ e

insert
a ootMr ttatiot1

is ""I up

COOfogUf6
000111 .... s tation

CD
Project structu re

and canpi le

Compiled configuration
data ere located In 11>8
object

Sy~

DB/a

'"

Automaling wi,h STE P 7

...

...

:::~~

u"

u " . ' p~r"m

:f
Slart netwo<l< conffguration

Insert miss;""
objects

commun ica~o ns

Compiete symbol tab le

Incr~~nt81

"

'::;'~

J
Define data structur..
program structure

P"",ram UDTs afld

gk>bal DBs
Program FCslFBs,
ge""rat.. inUance DBs

Se leCllllodule with
"connection capability"
and conllgure connections
with t~" connection table

Program

1
I
I

Single slep

,=1
!

Conf'gure " Iobal data

communicalions

, ,

08~

J p il6
program
source fi les

I,

.-

(j)

Creato
program
source ~ Ies

De~n"

M'

load s)'$tem data

SOU'C<Ioriemed pro-

.!
P",ameterlze CP modu les
ro lovam
Isof(v;.....

fJJ

Switch onl;ne

Gan era!"
rnf...-&nco d ata

~
.
COfTact e'rors , updata
offlin .. database

j Test n,,~t
;

(j)

Compiled connecti<>n data

are Inserted In the
object System Dale

C ompile<! progfam locale"

in the contain .. ' Blocks

Teste<! and n xacutable

program in t he CPU and in
the programming dev"",

"

Cont<111<1

Contents

:Jnmidvctl(ln . . .

S IMATIC S7-31111/41111

1.1

Stru~IUn.:

1. 1.1
1. 1.2
1.1 .3
1.1.4

I.I.S
1.1.6

"

......

rro~nmm"ble Controll~r.

of the Programmable
ContruU.,. . .
Componenu.
S7-300Station.
S7..400 Stati"".
fault-tolerant SThfAllC.
Safely-n:Ltted SIMATTC.
CPU M~mory Arcas.
Distributed 110 .

'"
20

2.2.1
2.2 .2

"
28

2.2.3
1 .2 .4

Creating Projecu .
Managing. Reorgan;~ing and
Ar-chiving .
l>roj ect Versions
C!"""in g and editing tnullipr()je~t~

28
31

2.3

Configuring Stat ion .

!J. I
1.3.2

Introduction _

J5
31

1.3.4

Scn~Ce'i.

Madule Add1X'<;scs.
"
1 4.1
1.4 .2
1.4.3
\.4.4
1.4.S

1.4.6

Sigual Path . . . .
Slo\ Addre~ ..
Logical Add!""s .
ModuJ~ Slart Addu,," .
Diagr>oStie~ Address . .
Acidre!lK'5 for nus Node;;

I.S

Address

\.S.I

U ...."T 0lI1li An:.a

Process Im.gt .
Consistent U ... r Data
Ait M~mori~,

I.S.2

J .5.3
!.S .4

Art:a~

2.1.3

14

J5

Communications
Connections .

I Illllallation
Automation Liern~e Manager
SL"-t.'\TIC Marutgcr .
Proj ects and Libraric~
Multiproja"1s .

""

"
Jl

SubllCt~

2.1 . 1
2.1.2

Editing I"rojects.

Communication .

..

STEP 7 11a,is Package

50fh, a re

2.2

L3

Acruatorl Sensor Interface.

2.1

Pr(lgrammjn~

Ocline ITdp . . . .

Gateways

PR QF""mTO

STEP 7

2. IA
2.1 S
2.1.6

20
20

1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4

\.3.3

PROFUIUS l)P

"

.,
"
"
""
""
"
"

"
"
"'"

Ar",nging Mooule ..
2.3.2 Addr.-ssing Module.
2.3.3 ParnrneterU.ing Module.~
2.3 .4 .!'-etworking Modules ...ilh MPI
2 .3.S Monitoring and Modifying
Modules. . . .

1.3 .1

49

""
"

50
53

""
"
"
""
"
'"

60
60

""

Configurin g the Network ..

'621

2.4.1
2. 4.2

C(lnfi~uring

62

2. 4.3

2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6

the Network View.

Confi guring a Distributed L10
with the Network Cunfigurntion .
Configuring Connections . ..
Gateways
loading the Conne<:lian Oata
Mntchin g Project.;n 3 MultiproJCCt ....

2.5

Creating the S7 I'rogmn .

2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4

Introduction.
Symbol Table .
Pro);I"3ffi Editor.
Rewiring
Addre. s I'riOOty
Refel"l:!l<:c Data .
l.no:uage Setting .

2.S.5
2 .5.6
2.5.7

""
'"

68

'"

70

70
71

"
"

76
77

79

Contents

2.'

Online

2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5

Connecting a PLC
Prote<:ting the User Program
CPU Information .
Loading the User Program into
the CPU
Block Handling

2.7

Testing the Program

2.7.1
27.2
27.3

Diagnosing the Hardware

Detcnnining the Cause of a STOP
Monitoring a nd Modif)'ing
Variabl es .
Forcing Variables
Enabling Peripberal Outputs.
Test and process operation.
LADffBD Program Status.
Mon itoring and Modify;ng Data
Addresses

2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8

Mo d~

3'

Progn.m Process ing .

31.1
3.1.2
3. \.3

Program Proccss ing Methods

Priority Classes
Spe<:ifications for Program
Processing
Block s

3.2.1
3.2 .2
3.2 .3
3.24

Block Types
Block Structu!"<'.
Block Propenies .
Block Interface.

"'
"'82

"

"

86

SIMATI C S7 Pro gram .

'.2

"'

.. ..

3.3

Programming Code Blocks

3.3. !
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7

Open ing Blocks

Block Window .
Overview Window.
Programming Networks .
Addressing.
Editing LAD Elements.
Editing FBD Elements.

3A

Programm ing Dma Blocks .

3.4.1
3.4 .2
3.4.3

C!"<'ating Data Blocks

Types of Data Blocks
Block Windows and Views

80

"

Variables, Constant, and Data

Types

3.5.1

General Remarks Concerni ng

Variables ..
Addressing Variables.
Overview of Data Type.
Elementary Data Types .
Complex Data Types
Parameter Types
User Data Types.

3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.5.7

" 6
'16

'"
'"
'"
,n

120

>28

86
87
88
90
90
90

"

"
"

Basic F llnctions . . . . . .

D'

Binary Logic Ope rMlon .

'"
'"

,.,
4.1.1
4 .1 .2
4 .1.3
4.1. 4
4.1.5

Series and Parallel Circnits (LAD)

NO Contact and NC Contact
Series Circuits.
Parallel Cire"its.
Comb inations of Binary Logic
Operations.
Negating the Result of the Logie
Op~ra\ion

.. . .

94
95

4.2

Binary Logi c Operations (FBD)

4.2 .1

"98

4.2.2

Elementary Binary Logic

Operations ..
Combinations of Bina ry Logic
Operat ions.
Negating the Result of the
Logic Operation .

99

'"

4.2.3

4.3

'"' ,
""
'" ,.,
'"
'"

5. I I

.08

5.1.2

'08

5.1.3

.09

'"
112

'"
'"
'"
'"

,.,

Taking Account of the Sensor

Type-.
M emory Function s.
LAD Coils .
Single Coi l
Set and Reset Coil.
Memory Box
f BD Boxes.

'"

D2
D2

U3

'"
'"
03 '
038

' 39

'"

'"
'"

'42

'"
,44

'"
'"
' 48

5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3

Assign ..
Set and Reset Box .
Memory Box

' .3

Midline Outputs.

' 50

5.3. 1
5 3.2

Midline Outputs in LAD

Midline OutputS in FBD

' 50

"8

'"
U

Contents

'A

Edge Evaluation . . . . . . . .

S.4.1
S.4.2
5.4.3

How Edge Evaluation Worb

Edge EVlIlu.o.Tion in LAD
Edge EvaluaTion in fBD .

"
5.5.1

Binary Sealer

..

5.5.2

Solution in LAD.
So luti(>Il in FilD .

'6

Ellample of a Conveyor Control

Sy~tem.

Mo\"t

6
6. '
6.'

General

6.2 .1
6.2.2
6.2.3

Proc~5ing the MOVE Box .

Movmg Operands . . .
Moving Constants .

6.3

System Functions for Data

Transfer . .

Fun~tlons.

MOVE !)ox

6 .3. 1 ANY Pointer . . . .

6.3.2 Copy Dala Area .
6.3.3 UninlemJptibte Copyi ns of a Duta
A~a ..
6.3.4 Fill Data Area . . .
6.3.S Rcading from load Memory
6.3.6 Writing into Load Memory

7
7. '

Thnrn . . . . . . .

7.1.1

Gclk."T1IllleprescnllUion of
a Timer. . .
Staning a Timer .
Specifying the Duration of Time
RCS<:ltinll A Timet. .
Cheding a Timer .
Sequence of Timer Operations
Timer Box in a Rung (LAO)
Timer IJ.m< in B Logic Cin.:uiT

7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.U
7.1 .6
1.1.7
7. 1.8

Programming a TlITler .

"

IS2

'"
m

lECTnners ..

.. . . .

180

7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3

Pulse Timer SfB 3 TP . . . .

Qn..o..lay Timcr Sfn 4 TON .
OffDelay Tnner SFB 5 TOt'.

'80
'80
'80

Counters .. . . .

18'

Progrll.mm ing" Counler

Seuing and ResellinJ; Counters.

'"'' 85

CounTing

IS'

Checking a Counler.

'"

'" ".. ,
'"
'"
'"

16'
16'

'62
'62

163

R.2
8.3
8A

186
8S1 Up Counter SFO 0 cru
187
8.5.2 Down Counter SfB I CTD.
'"7
8.5.3 Upldown Counter SF8 2 eni D . 187
Part;; Counter Eltampl\! .
'.6
18.
8.'

IEC Counl<TS . . . .

'64
'65
'65

166
166
166
168
168
17'
170

ott)lal .' uoclions .. .. ..

'"

Comparlsoo

"

Process ing a Comp"ri.f<)n

function
.....

'93

!J.2

Description of the Compllri:SOll

Functions . . . . . . . .

'93

Arlt hmetir

' 97

"

10.1

Pnxe~.iog

f unction

Fn n~ltons

19'

Fu n~tl on

an AriThmetic

.....

.. . .

"7

'"

10.2

CalculaTing with Dala Type Jr.'T .

170

10.3

Calculating wilb Oata Type Dt"T 200

'71

10.4

CalculaTing with Dala Type

REAL.

'"
'"

173

II

Mathern.lleul Funcll(mt

11.1

Proc essing 8 Mathematical

function

'00

'"

Pul., Timer .

'"
'"
'"
m

EltteT1ded Pulse Timer .

'76

,\liscdlaneollli Matbmlatlcal
functions . . .

On-Delay Tim.....

177

Con version }'unctlon .

''''
207

Rclcnli\"e On-Delay Timer

'78

Off. Delay Timer . . . .

'"

Procrssing a COO"ersiOD
function

. 207

(FU D) ..

7.'
7.3
7.'
7.5
7.6

'"

7.7

11.2

Trigonometric Functions .

11.3

Arc

11.4

"

12. \

FUIIClioDs. . . . . . . .

20'
21)'

''''

Contents

Conversion of [NT and DrNT

Numbe rs

209

12.3

Conversion of BCD Numbers

2 10

12.4

Conversion of REAL Numbers

210

12.5

Miscellaneous Conversion
Functions ..

Shift Funcdons

'"

Processing 8 Shift Function

m
m

13 .2

Shift

2 15

13.3

Rotate

2 16

"

Word Logic

12.2

. .. ... .

14. I

Processing a Word Logic

Operation.

14.2

Descr iption of the \Vord Logic

Opt:rmions

Program Flow Control

'"
'"
m
220

18. I

Block Functions for Code Blocks

I 8. I I
18.1.2
18.1.3
IS. I .4
IS .l.5
18 .1.1;

B lock Calls' General

Call Box.
CALL CoiL'Box.
B lock End Function.
Temporary Local DOlO
Sialic Local DOlO

DO
DO
238

18.2

Block Functions for Data B locks

2"

18.2. I
18.2.2
18.2.3
18.2 .4

Two Data Block Regislers

2"
Accessing Data Operands .
Opening a Data Block
Special Points in Data Addressj ng

18.3

System Functions for Data

Blocks .

Status Bits . . .

15.1

Descrip!ion of the Slat", Bits

'" "

15.2

Sening ' he S!aIUS BilS

222

15.3

Evaluating the Statu, Bi!,

224

15.4

Using the Binary Result

225

225
15.4. I Scuing !ne Binary Result BR
15.4.2 Main Rung, EN/EKO Mecbanism 225
15.4.3 ENO in the Case of User_wriuen
Blocks .
226

"

Jump F unction .

16.1

Processing a Jump Func!ion .

m
m

16.2

Unconditional Jump

228

16.3

JumpifRLO - I".

229

16.4

Jump ifRLO - "O".

229

"

Ma.ter Control

17. 1

MeR Dependency .

17.2

MCR Area

17 .3

MCR Zone.

'"

17.4

Selling an d ReSClling lIO Bits .

233

R~la y

m
m
232

239
2<0
241

'"
'"'"
2"

18.J.I Creating a Data Block in Work

Memory .
18.3.2 Crcaling a Data Block in Load
Memory .
18.3.3 Deleting a Data Block.
18.3.4 Testing a Dala Block

"

221

'"
m

"

Block Fun ction . . . . . .

\ 9.1

249

2>0

'"'"

m
m
m
m

Block P a rameters .
B lock Parameters in General

19 LI Defining the Block Parameters .

19.1.2 Processing the Block l'aramcK""
19.1.3 Declaration of the Block

253

Paramelcrs

19.1.4 Declaration oftne Function Value

19.1.5 Initializing Block Par"",eters.
19.2

Formal Parameters

'"
'"

19.3

Actual Parameters .

2S3

19.4

"Forwarding" B l<x:k Param eters

260

19.5

F~amplcs

260

19.5 I Conveyor Be l, Example.

19.5 .2 PariS Counter Example
19.5.3 Fe~ E~ample

260
26'
262

Program Processing .

.269

Main Program.

'"
23O

"

20.

Program Organization.

20.1.1 Program Strucrnre.

20.1.2 l'rogram Organi~.ation.

270

'"
"

20.2

Scan Cycle Control

272

20.7

20.2.1 l'roccss IllliIge Up<Jating .

20,2 .2 Scan L-yd~ Monitoring Tim~
20.2.3 M ;n;,num SC/ln C yde Tirll<.',
Rackground SClInning .

272

20.2 .4 Re.<poru;o: TIme .

20.2.5 Stan infonnatil)f1 .

176
276

20.7.1 f~ndan1entals.
20.7.2 1\>.o-Way Data Exchange .
20,i.3 Onc-W.yD"tanchange.
20.7,.1 Tnmsfcning Print Dahl.
20.7.S Control f unttiollll. . .
20.7.6 _\Ionitoring runctions .

20.3

Program f unctioos

20.8

20.3.1
20.3.2
20.3.3
20.304
20 .3.S
20.3.6
20.3.7

Tillie or dsy .
Read Sy'tem Cl"",k
Run-Time Metcr , .
Compressing CPU Memory ,
Waiting and Stapping . . .
Multiprocessing MOlle . . . .
Determinin& the Oil Program
Runtime. .. . . . . . . .
Ct.angin8 program protK1ion .

27K

20.8,1 Basks , . . .
20.8.2 Estah lishing and cleari ~ s
down Co""ect ion~. . . , ,
20.8.3 nata transfcr with TCP "flliv~ or
IS(}...-,n-TCI'
.... ,'
20.8 .4 Dato. transfer with UDP.

20.3.~

2004

Cmnmunication via Distributed

I/O

20.4.1 Addressing PROFI BUS DI'.

20.4.2 Confi~lIrin g I'ROFlBlJS Of'
2004.3 Special F'unct'oru; for
PROI'IRIJS 0 1' . . . . . .
20.4,.1 Addres<ing PROFL"'I:.'T 10 .
20.4.5 Coutigm;ng PROF'l'NET 10.
20.4 .6 Special FuncHons for
PRo.l'1NET 10 .. . .. .
2004 ,7 System !)loeb for Distributed

20.S

27S

2RO

no
282
2K2
2M2
283
286
287
287

292

'"
3"
300

1/0 .

314

Global Dma C<.>mmun; catiw .

320

20 .5.1 Furtdamemalll . . . . . .
20 .S.2 Configuring G O communication
20 .5.3 Syslcm Functions for
GO Communicotion.
20.6

274

S7

l:J"si~

Commuuicatioll .

320
322
324
324

20.6. 1 Sla\ion -lnternal S7 BAJic

Communication
314
20.6.2 Sys\CItl Funcf;Oru; for Slation-internal 57 3 .... ie Commuruealioll .
325
20 .6.3 Slahon- Extcmal S7 FllSic
327
Commnnication .. .. ,
20 .6.4 System Funcf;on~ for Station _Exter_
na l S7 Ra,i o Communication
318

"

20.9

S7 Communication . . .

IE communie,uion ..

DO
DO
332

m
335
335

3"
339

no
341
343
345

PIP c"",",unication with S7-300c 346

20.9 .1 fundsmCfltals.
20.9.2 ASCll driver and 3964(R)
pro<edure
20.9,) RKSI2 ~omputer coupling.

347
. 349

20 .1 0 Config'Jration in RUN . . .

352

20 .10. 1 I'r..paration of Changes in

Con figuration. . . .
20 .1 0.2 ChangeCnnfiguT'/lti(l<l . .
20 10.3 Load Configuration . . . .
20.IOA CiR Synchroniution Time..
2[l.IO ,S I:.ffccts on l'rogram Exe;:ulio"
2[l,10,6 Control CiR Pro<;~ss

'"
352
353

3S3
3S4
354
354

21

Inlcrru pt H a n dlln K

356

21.1

General Remarks .

356

21 .2

Time-of-Day Inttmtpts .

21.2 .1 Handling Tlme-ofDay Interrupts 358

21.2,2 Configuring Time-of-Day
lnt~m,pts with STEP 7 ,
359
21.2.3 S~.tcrn t 'unction! for
Tirne"" f-Vay lntcrrupt~,
359
21.3

Timc-Delay inteTTUpt~

360

21.3 , I Han<iling Time-Dellly lntcrrupu; . 361

21 .3,2 Confi!(uring Timc-IXI~l' lnt~'1TUf't.
" 'ilh STEP 7 . .. .. ,
. 362
21 .),3 Syilt~m FUtlction$ for Tim,,_Iklay
Intcm.lpt~ ,
362

C()nt~nts

2 1.4

Wakhdog

Int~ITl,pts

363

21.4.1 Handling Watchdog IJl\ " rrupt~.

364
21.4 .2 Coniiguring Watchdog Inlcrr"plS
with STEP 7
365
1 1.5

Hardware InteITllpts

365

21.5 . I Generating 8 Hardware Interrupt

365

1 1.5.2 S~rvi"ing Hardware Interrupts .

11.5.3 Configuring Hardware Interrupts
wilh STEP 7

306

2 16

DPVllnterrupts

367

21.7

Multiprocessor Interrupt .

369

21 .8

Synchronou, Cycle Interrupts.

370

367

Proces,ing the Synchronous LYcl~

Interrupts.
370
21 8.2 Isoehrone Updating OfProc~s.,
Image.
2lX3 Configuration of Sync monous
Cydc Interrupts with STEP 7
372

21

~. l

21.9

Handling Interrupl Events

372

21.9. I Di""bling and Enabling inl~rrupts 372

2 1.9 .2 De laying and Enab ling I nl"rrupg 373
21 .9.3 Reading additional Interrupt
Infonnation.
374

"

Starr_up

Char~cteri"tks

12.S

Parameterizing Module"

22 .5.1

Gcn~ral remarks on parameICrizing modules.

22,5,2 System Bloch ror Module
'Paramelerizalion
22.5.3 Blocks for Transm illing Data
Records

393

23.1

Synchronous Errors.

;93

23 .2

S}"chronous Error Handling

395

23. 2 .1 Error F ilters

23.2 .2 Masking Syn~hronous Errors .
23.23 Unmasking Synchronom Errors
23.2.4 Reading the Error Rcgi,\cr
23.2.5 Entering a Subs\i,u{e Value.

'"

23 .3

AsynehrotlOl1< Errors

398

23.4

SY"em Diagnos!ics.

'00

23,4,1 DiagnoSlie 'Event' and

Diagno8{ic Buffer.
23.4.1 Writing User Entries in !he
l)iagnosri~ Huff"r .
lJ,4,3 Evaluat ing O iagno'tic Interrupt;
23,4,4 ReHding the System Stat"s US{.

22 .1.1 Opera{ing Modes .

376

22.1.2 HOLD Mod~ .

22.1.3 D i,abling the Omput Y.odules .
22.1.4 Re,mn Organization Blocks

377
377
377

23.5 .1 Readin g Oil! \Veh infomlation.

23.5 .] Web information

22.2

378

Remarks

Power_Up

22 .2. I STOP

Mod~

Appendl~

no

24.1

Block Protection

22.2.4 Retentivity
22.2.5 Restan Parameterizati<m

24.2

Illdirect Addressing.

of R~'tHn

22 .3 1 START-UP Mode
22.32 Cold Re<ran
12.3 .3 Warm Restan.
22.3.4 Hot Re8{art.

22.4

Ascenaining a Module Addre.s

Pointers: General Rem<ll"k s

A rea l'oi11l~r.
DB Pointcr
ANY Poin!er
24.2.5 "V"riabk" ANY Poinler

383

243

380
380
380

Supplemen{S to Graphk
Progrllmmin1:

378

Typ~,

397

;oJ

;97

400
400
401
403

th~ lV~b S~"ver

22.2.2 Yfemory Resct

2 2 .2.3 Re'toring the fa~!Ory setlings

22 .3

;oJ

Web Server

23.5. 1 Activating

378

379

390

'Error Handling

23.5

G~neml

'88

23

'"
376

22.1

3R6

24.2.1
24. 2.2
24.2,.1
24 .2.4

BrieflJescription of the
-MessHge Frame Example" .

..

4U(i:
.97

'"

"8

'"'
.08
408

"0
410

'"

ConteDts

......

'"
"
m

fun ctio n

16. 1

Bask functions.

26.2

Digital Functions

426

IEC Function Blocks

'"

26.3

Program Flow Control .

'28

25.4

S5S7 Converting BI<xks .

'"
420

25.5

Tl-S7 Converting BI<xks

421

Function Set FIJD .

25.6
2S.7

PID Control BI<xlcs .

27 .1

Basic Functions.

'"

Communication BI<xh .

27 .2

Digital Functions.

258

MisceUanwus Blo ch.

'"
'"
m

"

27 .3

Program Flow Control

25 .9

SIMATIC_NET_CP .

423

Bhxk Librari es . ..

"

25 .1

Organization BI<xks.

25.2

System Function Bl<xks.

25.3

25 .10 Redundant]O (VI)

25. I I Redundant 10 CGP

'"
'"

~t

LAD.

'"

",
429

<3,
m

Indu .. . . . .

433

Abb re,'lations.

'"

IntTOd uction

Introduction

This ponion ofth~ book provides an o,-erview

of the SIMAllC S7 -3()(J/400.
The S7-3 00/400 programmable co ntroUer is
of modular design. The modules with which it
is configured can bc ccnmll (in th~ vicinity of
the CPU) or d i<!rihuted without any special setting' or param eter as, ignmems hsving to be
madc _ In SIMATIC S7 systems , distributed i/O
is an integr,,1 pun of the system . The CPU, with
iv; V.u101l.~ memory a reas, forms the hardware
basi. for proce ssing of the user programs_ A
load memory ~onta iru; the complete user program: the pans o r the program ", levant to it,
ex eculion at any given lime are in a "ori< memory whose short acce<> times arc the prerequis ite for fa st progrrun processing .

T he fir<;t chapter contains an ovcrview o f the

hardware in all S7 -300/4 00 prOb'Tammah lc con
troller. anu the second chapter comains an OVI.-"Tview o r the STEP 7 program mi tlg softwan.: _
The basis for the description is the fun clio n
scope tor STEP 7 Ver<;ion 5. 4 SP3 .
Chapter 3 SIMATIC 37 Program" s erves a, an
introduction to the most importBnt elem ents "I'
an S7 program and shows the programming of
individual bloch in the programming lan gunges LAD nnd FBD . The functio ns and operations of LAD and H:lV atc then described in
the subs~'qucnt cbapters of the book. All th c
description_< arc explained using bric f ~xam
ples_

STEP 7 is the programming wftwarc for S7300/400 and the automation tool is the
31,\tATfC Manager. The SIMATlC M an"gcr is
an application for the Winnov." op"rating systcnts from Microsoft and contains all fLInetion,
need<;"d to set up a project. 'Vhen neces,ary. the
SIMATIC Manager ,tan, add itional tool, . for
example to configun.: , talion" initia liz~ moduks. and 10 write and tcS! pro gra,,,s,

You ionnuiate your automation solntioo in the

STEP 7
I',ogramrmng languages. The
SI I\ IATIC S7 program i. structured , that is to
say. it cons ists of blocks w ith de fLlled functions
that are ~umposed ofnctworks or o lllg". Differe nt priori ty c1as,cs allow a graduated interroptibility Oflhc u.er program currently cxccnt ing _
STEP 7 works w ith variahles of varion, data
types starting with binary variables (dam type
BOOL) through digital v ariables (e .g . data type
TNT or REAL for comp uting tasks) up to complex data type, such as arrays or stmcrure.
(~ombinations ofvs riables of different types to
form a single v ariable).

SIi\lATIC S7_3 00/400

Prol:rammMb lc C o ntruliH
Structure of the prognunmab le co ntrolkr;
distributed 110; communi cat ions; IDmhde
addre"es: operand areas

STEP 7 Pro~~mmlng Sorman

STMATIC Manager; processing 'I proj ect :
cont,guring a stati on; ~onfiguri"g a nctwork; w riting programs (symbol table.
prob'Tdm editor); switching online : testing
pro b",'ms

STi\J ATT C S7 P rogra m

Program processing with priority classes;
program blocks: addressing va riables;
prob,,-amming blo<:ks with LAD and _FBD;
variahles and eon .tams; data types (overview)

SIMATIC S7 3000'4(IO J>rognmmable ControUer

SlMATIC 57-300/400 Programmable Controller

Structu re of Ihe Programmable

1.1

Controller
1.1.1

Compo nen t.

The SfMATIC S7_3001400 is modular progNlmmable controlieT comprising me following

componet"':

> Racks
AcootnlllOdate the modules and oonnect
them to each other
~

1.1.2

Central proce$,ing unit (CPU)

St~ and pr""e..." the USef progrnm

Centnllzcd configuration

Interra"" modules (L"-1s);

Connect the- TIIcki 10 ODe another

I>

Signal modul~ (S'-1s);

Adapt the 'ignals from the system 10 the
internal signalleve1 or control actuators ... ia
digital and analoa: sianals

> Function modules (FMs);

E~ecutc

complex or time-en tical processes

illdq>end01ltJy of the CPU
Communication. p~ (CPs)
Establi.h the oonn~ion to subsidiary n<"I_

worb

(.ubnCI~)

> Subnna
Connecl programmable conlroller5 to eacb
other or to other dcviccJ
A programmable controller (or station) may
com;stofseveral racks. whkh are linked toone
another via bm cable,. The pOwer sU;lply. CPU
and VO modules (5\-1,. FMs a&d CPs) are
pluaac:d into me central rack. If th= is not
enough room in the cenlnl! rack for the LO
modul"" Of if you ,,"ant some or 111 1,0 mod.lIes
to be 5CJHIrate from the ccnlTlll reck. expansion
rach are .... ailable which Ire Connecl<:d 10 the
centro l rack via interface module!< (Figure l.l).

20

The .... cks connc<:t ll>e modules with two buses:

the 110 bus (or P btu) and the communication
bUI (or K bu.). The liO bus is designed for
high-spi:cd ex change c>f input and output signals. 1M comrnUniClltion bUi for the exchange
of l"lie amounts of data. The communication
bll$ conne<:\!j the CPU and the programming
de"'lce interface (MPI) with function modu les
and communications prt>ccNOB.

Power supply (PS);

Provide!< me internal supply vollag~s

t>

t>

It II . Iso possible 1000nn~ di,mibuted 1/0 to a

l!anon (Ie<: Chapter 1.2.1 PROFlBIJS OF).

57300 Statlnn

In an 57.300 controller. I.! many as 8110 mod

ules can be pluggffi in lO the central rack..
Should this slllg.le-tier configuraltOll prove
in,ufficinll. you ha,., rv.o opIiOlls for control
lers equipped with a CPU 3D or higher.
tv,o-tier configuration (wilh 1M 365 up to
I meter l>etween rad,s) or

I>

,\

A configuration of up to four tiers (with 1M

360 and Lvi J61 up to 10 mctm between
TIIcb)

You can <>pc:nIte a maximum of 8 modules in a

TIIck. TM Dumherofmodules maybe: limited by
the maximam permissible c = t per rack..
whIch is 1.2 A.
The modules all' linked to one anOther ... ia a
backplane bm. which combines the fUDctiuns
of the P and K buses .
lura l bUl u\l,menl
A special feature regardina: configuration is the
uSC of the FM 356 application module. An 1':>.1
356 IS able to split~ a modules backplane bu<
and to tllte o\"er control of the- remaining mO(\.
ules in the split-off'"local bus legmen'" it""lf.
The limilll!;oO$ mentioned ,beve regarding the

I. I Struct ure of the Prugrammable Controller

Modular configuration

Four-tier contigural;on
wilh 1M 3()ti ""d [~j 361

of aD S7-300 Stati"n

Two-t i. , ,,,,,f'gur.non
WI'" l.\t 3M

Modul a r con fiaura tion

of aD S7-JOO . tation
], ' ... "",,,I CQO.wli ,,,,,~ .
N 460- 1

w_

1.\1 %()'l
1.\1 <60-<

1:-.< .{,ll

Loc. l "'1llI"
up'u 5m
witt""" ~ V
tr:.rwniMiOIl
(l\t46 j-{))

R omot<; ",ng<

"PlO 100m
witboul 5 V

.... ''<In;'';on
(1M 461 ])

Romot< rang.
up (oWO m
""I00U' ~ V

'Oln.m i" ion

(1M 461 4)

R
"""". rangefur
up
10 WO tll

S5 oxpan>ion uni"
(IM 314)

F ; ~u",

1.1 Iiordware Conillt(uMion for S7 ]()()/ 400

Loco! r><Li<
","'l.lrn~ i th

5V

"""""',>Coo

(N 46\ 1)

I Sn.tATIC S1_300/400 Pro&rvmmabk ControUII'f

number of modules and the )lOwer consumption

~I!<O apply in (hi, case.
S.andard CPU,
~ staDdard CPUs an.: Qvail abk in vern""s
lhat difft:r with regard 10 memory capacity and
proeeuing speed They IlUllle from the small
o:jl" CPU 312 for lower-t"nd applicalions with
moderate proce'<.<ing speed ~uin.:rncnts, up 10
\~C CPU 3\9-3 P:\/O P "im ilS larjlc rrogram
memory 8ml high pro<.:es~ini performance r"r
CroSl-~OC{or aulom,l1ion tasks, Equipped " im
lhe ",IC\lant interfa~~$, some CPUs can be us~
for central control of the distributed !lO via
I'KOFTBUS and I'ROFINET. A micro memory
~ard (MMC) is ~uired for o~l'Il1ing the .t.I\IIdard CPU, - ..s with all inno,"'ted S7-300CPUs. Th;" medium opeDS up Dew applicali.,,"
~ibililies compared to the pm.iously u,ed
memory card(,;ee Chapt<;1" 1.1.6 '"CPU Memory
Areas").

The now dis<:omin ued CPU ) 18 can be replaced by the CPU, 3 17 and 319,

packUIIC that is inlegrated in the SIMATIC

MaMb'l:T afu:r installation.
The Technology Cl'U . have u I'ROFIBU S DP
i(1tcrface that allow. opcrutioll liS DP master or
DP sla,c_ The Ll'U. an: uJed fur Cf(>M-SCCIOT
IIUlomation tasks in series mcch~nical equipment manufacrure. special medtanical equipment manuf....1urc. and planl building.
F.nu(~

Cl'U5

The CPUs 3xxF an: u,;ed in production plant.

with increa,ed safety requirements. The relevu,ut PROF lBliS and PROflNET interfaces al
low the QPC11I{;On of s.al~ty_related distributcd Ii
o u~in.a the PROFhiafe bus profile (see "S7
0151ribu[(:d SafC1y~ under 1.I.S ~Safety-related
SIMATle'). Standard modules for normal apphcalion' can be uxd parallel to safety-"'Iated
~ration ..

SIPLUS S7_300

The SIPLUS product family offcfti CPU, and

module, based on the S7-300 tha' can be use d
environmenlS. With hori~.ont~1 iostallalion, you have lID extended tem~rarure range
of _lSoC to~, lncy ha"e inc",a.ed immunity 10 vibration and shock. and they JT>I the
incrc:a.<ed requi..,mellls for humidity, condensa
lion and frttring. Please note the I.tthnical da1a
for the module concerned. SeleCl~ types oft.bc
SIPlUS product mnge are "vuiluble on request
for use on rolling stock in aceurJancc w ith EN
SOISS "Railway applications - [lIectronic
~uipmenl used on rolling ~1<>ck ~.
til harsh

Compllet CPU.

'''e )"-" C CPU. permit C<>IISIJUcuon of com

pact mini programmable CUDlrOIlLT>. Ikperlding on me vcr;ion. they alrtady contain:

~

I>

In\cgral liOs
Digital and analofl inputs/outputS
Integral technoi<JiY function,

Counting. mCaliurcmCIl1, control. po,itiooing

I>

Integnol communic~lions in'crfaccs

PROF1BljS OF masU:T Of slave, poim;.,..
point coupling (PIP)

Thc technological function.s u.rc ~)">tem block.!

which use the onbo..rd 110 oflhe CPU.
T~~hnology

CP Us

Tbc C PUs }xxT combiM open_loop c01ltrol

fU[IC'\ioru; ",-im muple motion control function,.
The open_loop control component i, dcsigned
ai in a standard CPU. 11 IS o;Q(Ifiilln:d, parametcri~ nnd progr.1mmed \I~mg STEP 7_ The
technology objects and th~ IlIOtion conlrOl com
pooncnt require the oplional 57-Technology

1.\ .3

S7-400 Sta lion

Ctnrrallzed eonlieunli()n
The conlrOiler me\( for the S7-400 i$ available
in the \... Rl (18 slots), U R2 (9 stol~) aod CR3 (4
sh)ts) vcrnions. UR I and UR2 can al.o be used
as expansion r~cb_ The power supply and the
CPU a lo;O occupy slots in !he rack<. possihly
evm tWo or more per module. If necess.ary. the
number of slots available CM ~ inc",ascd
usina e~J'ans;on "",ks: L"'R I and cR I ha"e 18
s\o!$ each, UR2 and ER2 have 9 ta.eh.
The 1M 460-1 and 1M 461-1 in!erf.cc modules
m~e it pmsible 10 haveonc exPMlion rack ptr

I I Stnlcture oflhe Programmable Conlroller

intcrface up to I.~ meters from the cenlral rack.

including the 5 V "'pply voltage. In addition . a,
many a, four expansion racks Can be operated
up to 5 meters away u.ing 1,,1 460-0 and I~
41i1_0 interface modules . And fL nally, 1M 46O .}
Bnd 1M 461} or 1M 460-4 and 41i1_4 interface
modules can be used to operate
many a, four
expansion racks at a distance of up to 100 or
600 meters away.

a.

A maximum of21 expansion racks can be con nected to II central ra~k. To distinguish bem'een
racks. you set th~ number of the rack On the
coding switch of the receiving 1M.
The backplane bus consists of II para1lel P bus
and a serial K bus. Expansion racb ERI and
ERl arc de,'igncd for ",imple'" signal modu les
which generate no hardware interrupts. do not
have to be supplied with 24 V voltage via the P
bus, require no back-up voltage. and have no K
bus connection. The K bus is in racks URI.
UR2 and CRl either when these rackS are used
as central racks or expansion rach with the
numbers I to 6.
Segmented rack
A s!",cial feature is the segtn""ted rack CR2.
The rack can accommodate m'o CPU, with a
sh"",d power supply while keeping them functionally separate . The t",o CPUs ~an =change
data with one another v ia the K bus. but have
completely separate P buses for their own signal modules.
1\1ultiproccssor mode

In an S7_400, as many as four speCIally

designed CPUs in a suitable rack can take part
in multiprocessor mode. Each module in this
station is assigl1ed to only one CPU, both with
its address and its interrupts. See Chapters
20.3 .6 "Multiprocessing Mode"' and 21.7 "'.\1ultiproce5sor Interrupt"' for more details.
Connecting SlftlATIC SS module.
The 1M 463 -2 interface module allows you to
connect 55 expansion unit' (EG 183U. EG
185U. EG 186U as well as ER 7012 and ER
701-3) to an S7-400. and also allow, ~ emral
ized expan.,ion of the expans ion units. An 1M
314;n the S5 expansion unit hand les the link .

You can op~rate all analog and digital modules

a llowed in these expansion units. An S7-400
can accommodate as many as four 1M 463 -2
interface modules: as many as four S5 expansion units can be con n~cted in a distributed configuration to each of an 1M 4632'8 two interface,.

1.1..1

Fault_tolerant SnlATIC

Two des igns of SlIvtATIC S7 fault-tolerant

automation systems are avai lable for applications with high fault tolcrance d~mands for
machines and processes: ,ofh-vare redundancy
,md 57400HlFH.
Software redundancy
Us ing SIMATTC S7-3001400 standard components. you can establi,h a software-based
redundam system with a master station controlling the process and a standby Slation asswning
comrol in the event of the maSter failing.
fa u lt tolerance through software redundancy i,
suitable for slow processes because transfer to
the standby station can require several second s
Mpending on the configuration of the program mable controllers. The process signals are "fro
~en"' during this lime . The slandby stalion then
continues opcr~tion with the data last valid in
the master stati on.
Red undancy of the input/oulput modules is
implemented with distributed VO (ETIOOM
w ith L\1 153} interface module for redundant
PROFlBUS DP). Tbe optional "Software
Redun dancy" software is available for configuring.
fault -tolerant SIMATIC S7-400H
The SIMATIC S7-400H is a fa"lt-tok""'t programmable controller with redundant contiguration comprising two central rack!!, each w ith
an 11 CPU and a synchronizmion module for
data comparison via fiber oplic eablc. Both
controllers operate in "hot standby" mode; in
the event of a fault. the intacl controller
assumeS o!",ration a lone via automalic bumpless tTanskr. The U R2-H mounting rack with
1\\'0 times nine s lots makes it possible to establish a fault -tolerant ,ystem in a single mOllnting
rack.

I SIMATIC S7_.;OO/400 Programmable Ccmtroller

The 110 can have normal availability (singlecharmel,

single- sided
configuration)
or
enhanced ava ilabil ity (single--channd .witched
eontiguration with ET200M). Communication
is ~arried out over a simple or a redundant b"s.
The user program is the same as that fo r a nonredundant COI)(roller; the redundancy function
i, handled e"elu ,ively by the hardware and is
invisible to the user. The ,oftware package
required for configuralion is indu ded in STEP
7 VS .3 and laler. The siandard library Red",,dUtll fa already supplied contains bloch for
supporting lh" redundant 110.

l.l .S

Safely-related SIMATIC

Failsafe automat ion systems control proce"es

in which the saie state can be achieved by dire<;t
swi tching off. They arc u!<Cd in p lants with
incr,",sed safety requirements. T he ""fety
requjr<.:m~'11ts achievable with SIMATIC S 7 are :
Safety Integrity Level SIL I III SIL 3 according
to lEe 61508, Rc,!uin:mcnt Category A K I to
AK 6 according to DTN V 19250 (DIN V VOE
0801 ) and Category I to 4 accord ing to EN 954L
The safelY functions are located as appropriate
in the saf~ty_related user program in a correspondingly designed CPU (f-CPU) and in the
f31lsafe inputs and outputs (F-modu\es and F_
.ubmodules, sec "Fai lsafe I/O").
The ""fcty technology with F-C PU and f-rnodu les (for the safety_re lated p lant component.)
c an be int,,!,'mled in an S7-30014OO P LC in
additi on to the standard application .
Safety-related communi cat ion using PROF!BUS DP applies thc specially developed
PROFlJ:l US protl\ e PROFhafe . Th is permi!>
transmi",ion of the user data of safety functions
with in the standard data ttlegram .
SlMA.TTC S7 provide, two systems for implemelllation of "Safety In'egrated" ; S7 D is tributed Safety and S7 FIFH Systems .
87 Distributed Safety
S7 f)istrihuted Safety is a failsafe autorruotion
system mainly for appl ications with mach ine
controls (for protect ion of mach ine. Hnd personnel ) and in the process industry.

F_CPUs cUlTently available arc the CPUs 315F2DP and 3 17f-2D P for S7-300, the CP U 41 1iF2 for S7-4OO, and the basic muduk IMI5 1- FI
CPU for ET2ooS. The Fmodul e. and f-sub
modules are connected to S7-400 u.ing PROI'!
B US DP with the safety_relevant profile
PROFlSafe . U,e o f F- modules in the controller
rack is additionally possible w ith S7-300.
STEP 7 w ith th e optional S7 Distributed Safety
package is necessary fo r configuration and progranuning of the failsafe system . The safetyrelevam scction of the program is programmed
u,ing F_LAD or F-PBD with a limited operation set and fewer data types oomparcd to the
basi c lan guages. If a fault is dete<:tcd in the
""fety program, the F-CPU eme", the operating
,tate STOP.
The option package also contain , a block
library fo r the safety program with failsafe
blocks and templatc .
S7 F/FH Systems
S7 Fff H Systems is a failsafe automation sys
tem ba.ed on S7_400 with main applications in
th . process industry.
S7 F/FH Systems is based on the S7_400 automation system . The F-modules and F-submodu les arcc conne<;ted to S 7400 using PROI'TBUS
DP and the safety- relevant profile PROFISate.
With S7-400F, a failsafe uWr program can be
i n~orporated into the standard Uscr program . Tn
addition to failsate ty. tl><: S7-400FH also provides increas.d availabil ity. If a Mtected f"ui(
results in " STOP of the master CPU, a switch
is made w ith(mt feedback to the CPU running
\tl hot standby mode (""c ].1.4 " Fault-to ler",,!
SIMATlC").
Con fLguration is carried out using the standard
applications of STEP 7, V5 .1 and later. The
option package 'S7 F Systems" is required for
paramctcrL,ation of the failsafe signal modules
and for programming o f the ""fetyrelevant
program components, p lus Ih <: option package
"eFC", VS.O SP3 and later. thc option package
. $7 -SCL" V 5.0 and later and - for the fa ult-tolemnt funclion, the option package "S7 H System," V5 .1 and later.
Spc~ial

library

f unction blocks from the supplied Fbe called and interconnected using

~<Ul

I. I Structure of the Programmable Controll~'r

efC (Continuous Function Chan). In addit ion

to functions for pro.:rmnming safety functioru.
they abo contain functions for Crror d.le<;tion
and re'ronse . In the event of faulls and failures.
thi. guarantees that !he faihaf. system is hdd
in a safe statc or is transfe'TT<:u to a saf~ ,tatc. If
a fault is dctcctcd in th c safCIY prograP1. the
bilsak ~om""nent of the plan' i< ,witched off,
wherca__ the remaining pan cominue, to oper
a'e.

uratioru), and fmther projc~l-specijic d" ta ,uch

as symboltahle, and comments.

An f_mntime license must b~ pre,em on each

CPU to peTIllit opt''''tion of an S7-400f/fH.
fail;afc ,ignal module, (F.modulcs) ar~
r<:q\J ired for ,afety operatio" . and are operated
in the ET200M disrribU1~d VO station.

T he cpe s have a slot for a plug-in ",,,mory .,"b"wdu/e. The load memory, or pans thereof. is

"ailsafc 110
1b~ fai lsate signal modul es (F-modules) are
require<! for ,afe'y <)p<..--ration in lhe failsafe ,ystem,. Fail safery i. achieved with the ;t\legral
",fely fu,,"tioru and appropriate wiring of th"
serums and acl\ill.ton;.

The F_module, can also he used in standard

appl ications with incre"sed diagnostics require
ments . The F-moduk" can ]:x; "Pe--ratcd in
redundant mode to incr~ase the availability
hoth in standard and ,aferyoperation with 57 Ff
FH 'yOlem,. The failsafe 110 is a,ai lable in vat,om versIOns:
.,. The fa ilsafe signal modules of 57 -300
de,ign ar~ us"d in the ET200M distribu1ed
VO slalion or ec-ntrally toge'!he--r "ilh lhe
CPU 3 15f_2DP
>

The fJil",fe power and elc"tronics moo"les

arc \J>I'd in the ET2005 distributed liO station. lor whieh the 1:>1 151.FICPU basic
module is also available as a f"ibafe CPU.

\>

Fail,afe PROfIBU5 DP standard , I ay~s can

also be used with S7 Dimibuted Safet)".

1.1.6

Tne Qnlin~ dafa "o",ist of the mer pwgram and

the system data on the C PU, and are ac com m<Jdoted in tw<) areas, namely load memory and
work memory. A.i>o presenl in addition arc the
'ySlcm memory and """ibly a back up mem"'"y.

Th. 110 moduks contain memories for lhe signal state oIrhe inputs and outpu18.

located hom: (sce " Physical design of CI' U

memory" later). T he memory submodule is

dcsigned as a m"",ory card (57-400 CPU,) or
a, a micro memorv c,.,-d (S7_300 CPU. and
ET 200 CPUs d~rivcd from these) . The finnwarc "f !he CPU operating ,yst~m can also be
updated using the memory s"bmodule.
i\I. m o~

card

T he memory module for the S7-4OO CPU. is

the memory card (MC). There arc two 'ype' of
memory card . RAM eards an d flash EPROM
e..,-ds.

IfYl>" want \<) expand load memory only, use a

RAM card . A RAM card allows you Il> modify
th~ entire user program onlinc. This i. nece,sary, for c,ample, wh~n t~"ting and staning up
l arg~r program,. R."l"" memory cards 10""' their
conte'll t$ ""e"II unplugged.
I t you wan t to prote~1 your user program, includmg configuration data and moouk paramete",
against po\<-,,' failure following testing and
,tarting up even without a backup battery, uSC a
fla,b. EPROM card . In this ca.,e, load the ~~,ti re
program offi incom" the flash EPROM card with
the card plugged into the programming device .
With th~ ", levant CPUs, you can also load lhe
program ""line w ith the memory card plugged
into the CPU.

C PU l\-Iem ory Areas

Figure 1.2 shows the m emory area, in the programming device, the CPU and the ' ignal modu les whicl1 are important for )"our program
The programming dcviee conMins the offl;ne
data . These consist "f'hc usc' program (program code and user data), the syst~m data (e .g.
hardware, nen.,.ork and inte rconn~C1ion coniig-

.\licro

m. mo~'

card

T he memory suhmooule for the n.w~"I 57 -300

CPU s i8 a m icm memory card (MMC). The
data on the :>fMC are ,aved non-volatile , but
c"n he n:ad, writtcn andddeled as w ith a RAM.
This re'rome penn it ' dJia backup without a
batler),.

I SIMATIC 57-3001400

-....

Hardware

Sym~
.~

P~le

Canlrolkr

System

r -f--ff d.ta t>k>cks

I

(contlguration

dataonlinel

+ll<.

Arcnive<l
(compressed)
~data

r ". compl~t6 proj6cr

dllrll can btJ ioadfHj in
rhfJ archIVed stat. kim
".,. CPU'~ load """""Y.
If """ssaiY. ltMly"""
be_lOthe

Paru

01".,. hlgllNghred

'""

.,... """ IN PfjratnftIei1z9d In CtIn.In CPUs.

InllRUp!

momc:wy _

PleNa nolO. "".,. _

syslfNn

memotY~.

commotl ph.,.;c.l
memotY
1ft

.re.

1ncre.S& '.Il'. In IhI!

$}'$Iem memo.y rowns

In redlJClion

TIm ... funclion$

in tI>e

""'" """""

do'*" on
_-..d.

ptOgT1ImmIfIf/

.JIe,

FI",,,, U CPU Memnry A"'~.

The complete load memory is p~sent on tile

MMG. meaning thlIt an MMC is al""ays
requirW ror op=l.1ioo. The MMC can be used
IS a portable memory medium for user programs or finn....= upd;!tel. Using special sY'tern functions you C3n ",ad or write data block!;
on the MMC from the ~ prognun, for exam_
ple to ,."ad recipes from tile M\fC or 10 create a
measured-value arcbive 00 lh~ MMC Bnd to
provide it witb data.

I..oMd memo ry
The rntm user program. Including configuration data (system dati). is in the load memory.
The U ""," program is 11 ...ay~ Initially transferred
from the programmina device 10 the load mem_
ory. a nd from !hcre 10 Ille work mrnlory. The

program in Ihe load memory is not processed as

the eootrol program.

If a CPU does not ba~e. micro mo;mory card.

the load memory is designed as I memory integnlted in tI:re CPU or as a plua-in memory caro.
II ~.n be designed as a RAM or ROM.
Ifload mrnlOTY consists of flit inlq.ratcd RAM
or " RAl\-1 memory card. a blrckup banery is
required in order to 1c.C<.1' the ~cr prognlIIl
retrnlh~. Where load memory i~ i1npl~memed
.1 intcgnlted EE PROM, as a plug-in flasb
EPROM memory card or as micro memory
can!. the CPU ~an be opettled without bancry

backup.
From STEP 7 VS.l onwards, lind with appropriately designed CPUs. you Can save the com-

1. I Strucrure of the Programmable Controller

p lete project data as a compressed aRhiv... file

in the load memory (sec Chapter 2.2 .2 "Managing, Reorganizing and Archiving").
Work

m~rn ory

Work memory is designed in the fonn of highspeed RAM fully integrated in the CPU. The
operating system of the CPU copies the pro_
gram code "relevant to execution"' and the user
data into the work memory. "Relevant"' is a
characteristic of the existing objects and does
not mean lhal a particular code block will necessarily be called and executed . The "'actual"'
control program is executed in the work mem-

NY
Depending on the product, the work memory
can be designed either as 8 corrdaled a~a or
divided according to program and data m emOries, where the laner can also be divided into
retcutive and non-retentive memories.
Whcn uploading the user program into the programming device, tbc blocks arc fetched from
the load memory, supplemented by tbe a~tual
values of thc data operands from the work memory (further infonnation can be found in Sections
2.6.4 "Loading the User Program into the CPU"
and 2.6.5 "Block Handling"').
Sy't~m

memory

System memory contains the addresses (vari_

able s) that you a ~Ces, in your program. The
a ddresses Qre combined into arcas (addre ss
areas) containing a CPU-specific number of
addresses. Addresses may be, for example ,
inpms used to scan the signal stBtes of mom en_
tary-contact switche, and limit switches, and
outpUtS thaI you can use to control contactors
and lamps.
Tbe system memory on a CPU contain, the following address areas:
". Inputs (I)
Inputs are an image ("process image"') of
the digital input modules.
o

Outputs (Q)
Outputs are an image ("process image") of
the digital output modules .
Bit memories (M)
Store< ofinfonnation accessible throughout
the whole program from any poinL

o Timers (T)
Timers arc locations used to implement
waiting and monitoring times.

o Counters (Z)
Counters are soJhvare-levcllocations, which
can be used for up and down counting.

o Temporary local daIS (L)

Loc atiODS used as dynatJlic intenncdiate
buffers during block processing. Th~ temporsry loca l data are locatccl in the L stack,
wh ich the CPU occupies dynamically during program execunon .
The lett~'TS enclosed in parentheses ...,present
the abbreviations to be used for Ihe d ifferent
add...,sses when wriling programs . You may
a lso assign a symbol 10 e ach variable and then
use the symbol in p lace of the address identifier.
The sy.tem memory also contain! buffers for
conununieation jobs and system messages
(di agnostics buffer) . The sile of these data buffers. as well as thc size of the process image and
the L stack, are parameterizable on certain
CPUs.
Phy.ical de.ign of C PU memory
The physi~al de.ign oftbe load m"",ory is d ifferent for the ,"ariou~ types of CPU (F igure
1.3).
The CPUs w itb micro memory card do not have
an integrated load memory. A micro memory
card mu<;t always be inserted to permit operalion. The load memory on the micro m emory
card reacts as if it contains RAM and ROM
components . The program is transmitted and
teSied completely nonnally in the RAM, Bnd
then written into the ROM by means ofa menu
comma nd following the test. Retentivity of the
user program is achieved w ith Ihe micro mcmDry card .
With Ihe CPU 3 17. pan of the work memory
can be used for retentive data bl ocks. The rest
of the work memory (complete memory less
...,tentive data quantity) Can be used for the pro-gram code and the non_retentive data.
The integrated RAM load memory with the S7400 CPUs is designed for small programs and
for modificalion of individual b locks ifthe load
m emory is a flash EPROM memory card. If the
complete control program is larger than the

I $IMATIC S73OO/400 Programmab le Controller

51 300 and ET CPUs without adju stabl a deUt retentiv ity

Micro me

card

iC"'"'-____________--,_______-,Work m emory
Program codl>
Use< data

l oad mamory
RAM and RO M

System memory

57300 and ET CPU. w ith adjustable data ret.ntlvlty

Micro "'.,,"
ca r<l

,C,'", '--_____________________
Work. mamolY
Prog ram code
User data

Loadma mory
RAM and ROM

Sy"em memory

non-ret&ntive
Us-erdata
fele~tive

5 7-400 CPU
M&m
CI'lrd

C'"

Load memory
AAM

load memory

RAM

Load memory
FEPROM

Work memory
Program code

Systam ..... mory

Work memory
Use r data

Figu .... \.3 Phy<ical Design ofepe Memory

integrated load memo!)', you require a RA"I

memory card for te>t i~g. The test ed progrllm i,
then transmitted by the programmi ng device 10
a Tlash EPROM memory card which you insert
into the CPU for operalion.
The work memory of S7400 cre, is divided
into two pans: one part ,av~' the program code.
the other th e user data. Th e system and work
memories itt the S7-4OO CPUs constirnte one
(physical) unit. If, for example. the jLze of the
pfoI'~ss image change,. this has effects 011 the
size of the work memory.

DF use, the PROFlliUS imbnctwork for daTa

tnm omi,s ion. PROFTNET 10 The Industrial
Ethernet subnetwork (for f""he, information,
see Chapt~ 1.3,2 "Subnels'J.

1.2.1

PROFIBUS DF

PRO FlBU S Dr provides a standardized interfaee for transferring predominantly binary pro
CO" data b etween an "interface module" in the
(c eIltral) progranunabl e conlrol!er and the field
devices. This "int"face module" is called The
DF maoter and The field devices are the Df

,h,cs.

1.2

Distrib uted VO

Distri buted VO refers to modules cor.nected via

PROFlB US Dr or PROFTNET 10, PROF/RL'S

The DP maSter and all the slaves it control.

form a D P maSter system. There can be up 10 32
'lations in one .egmen t and up to 127 stations
in the entire nemork A DP master can control
a number of DP , laveo spec ific to it.el f. You

1.2 Disuibtne<! I/O

can also connect programming devicu to the

I'ROFlBUS DP network as well as. for tumpit. ,Jev;ces tor human machine interface,
1iT200 de\kts or SIMATIC SS DP ,la\",s.

PROFIB US OP is usually opc,.,ucd Q8 a "mono

lnllSl~r syslem". thaI is. one Dr mnster conlrols
severnl DJ' .I~~e~. Tbe Di' maSter is the on ly
tTU<.ter on tbe bus. with Ihe exception of a lemporarily a\"~il .. bk PJUb'nWlIlliny dtvicc (dllanOSI;CS and $("",,;ce device). The DP ma~ler and
the Of' slal'e~ L\Silned to il form a DP IlUblc-r
system (Figure 1.4).
You can al>iQ install several DP mastCT syslrms
on one PROFlHUS .uhnel (multi mast .... s~.
tern). Howe' er, IlIi< ine,..,aS("S the ""~iX>nse lime
in indIVidual eaoe. hccause when a OP !1U\su,.r
has initilllucd "its" or slaves. the access !'igh\.<
fall to the " ex t DP masler that in tun, initializes
"il ." or .<Iaves. elc.
You can n.-dUCt Ihe response rime ira OP master system contains only a few OP sla\,("5. SinCe
II i~ possible 10 opcrau: ~c"~TaI Di' IILIIS\("f$ in
o~ S7 stalion. you can distribute the OP sllt'-es
nfa slation o'-~-r >c'~,.,.1 Df' mailer '~Slcm$. In
multiprocessor m<><k. eve')' CPU has its OWII
Dr maSTer s)'Stems,

S7 ".floa "ltb DP ",,".r,

IlP mastu
Th~ DP master is the IOCtive node on th~ PROFlBUS n~".vorL It exchanges cyclic data with
"11'" OP slaves. A 01' master can be

c>

A CPU wilh int~grnl DP IIlltster interface or

plug-in im~rtace submooule (c.g. CPU 31 ~2DP. CPU 4 17)

t>

An interlace module in colijunction wilh a

CPU (e.g. 1M 467)

to

A CP in conjunction with R CPU (e.g. C P

3425. CP 443 -5)

The,.., are "Class I ma<tcn" for data exchange

'" proceso op"rntion and "CIIO$$ 2 maSTers" for
<ef\~c~ and diagnostics (e.j. a pNgTIlIDmiag
de"ic~)"

or .I~H'
The OP .Ial'es are!h~ passive nodes on PROF!nus. in SL\1ATlC S7, B distinction is made
bem'c~'Il

:>

Compacl DP slaves
They behave like a sing le modtllc lowards
the pr maSlcr

> Mod\dar Of' sla"""

Th~y comprise severnl moo.lulcs (submodules)
t>

Tntelligent Dr 5Ia,"("<
They contain a tnnJl'ol progr-am lhal
trois The lower_level (o",n) mndules

COfI-

c=-~., .w.

<-8. Io--r 200Et

[)rlL)r

PROflBUSDP
DP"..

'I

DPRSnlC
link

DPAS-ln~

LiDk

50",,! roD1I1;""

Fillurt 1.4 Comron<n'" of 3 PROFIBUS Of' Masltt SY'l<.m III lin RS4~~ sCiln.m.

9,.. "'-'pr>tflu ... ~b

Ii.... dioJII"'lk.

I SIMATTC S7 3()(1!4()(1 Programmable Con""lIcr

Compact PROFfBUS DP slaw,s

Examples of 01' slaves includ e the ET200B
(vers;on w ith digil,,1 input/output modules or
analog inputioutpU! modulc~; degree of protee
tion II' 20; max . data transfer ra!e 12 Mb itls).
the ET200c (rugged construction IT' 66/67; dif
ferent variant. w ith digita l inputs/outpUtS and
analog inputs!outruts: data transfer Ta!e 1.5
Mbit/s or 12 Mb it/s) and the ET200LSC (di
crete modularity with freely combinable digital
input/outpu t modules and analog inputloutput
modules; degree o f protection IT' 20; data tra~S'
fer rate 1.5 Mbitlsl The bus gateways such as
DP/AS . i link behave like a compact slave on
PROFl BUS DJ'.

Modular PROFIBUS DP Jlave.,

The ET200M is an example of a madular DJ'
slave. The design corresponds to an S7300 sla
lion with DrN rail. power supply, Th-f 153 '1l!e rface module instead of the CPU and w ith up 10
R , ignal moouln (SMs) Or function modules
(FM'l , The data transfer cate is 9.6 kbitls to 12
Mbitls.
The ET200M can al.o be de,igned with (.lcli,'e
bus modules if the DJ' master is an S 7.400 sta
lion. This means that the S7 300 input/output
module. can be pl ugged in and removed during
operation under power. Opera tion of the
remaining madules continues. The mod ules no
longer ha,e to be plugged in without gaps,
The ET200M ~an b( used with the 11>.1 153-3
interface module as a slave in a redundon, bus,
The 1M 1533 has rnro connec tions, one for the
1lT' master in the master station and une fN the
DI' master in the standby station.

jntclligo:rll PROFfBUS DP slaws

Eumplcs of intelligent DP slavcs arc CP Us
with an intcgral DP (slave) interface, or an 57
300 station with the CP 342 -5 communications
processor. Equally, an ET200pro station with
the 1M 154-g PN /DI' CPU interface N an
ET200S station w ith the 1M 1517 CPU inter.
face module can be operated as intell igent DP
slaves .
RS 485 '""p e ater
The RS 4S5 rel"'ater combines two bus seg
ments in a PROFIBU S subnet,vnrk. As a resu!!.

the number of stations ""d the cKponsion orthe

suhnem-'ork can be increased.
The repeater provides 'ignal regeneration and
d.etrical i.olation. It can be operat.-d at trans m ission rme, up to 12 Mbit/s. including 4545
kbitls [orPROFIBUS PA.
The RS 485 is nO! eonfigur~-J; it need only be
considered when calculating the bu. parame
ters,
Dl a gn ostles rep ea t er
Using a diagnostics I~pca t er. you can detennine
the topology and carry outl ine diagnostics in a
PROFlfIUS segment (RS 485 copper cable)
during runtime. The diagnostics r~-peater pro-vide, s ignal cc!!yn~mtion and electrical i,olation of the Con1)ccted segment s. The maximum
segment length is 100 m in cach case; (~e (rans
mission rate can be between 9.6 kbivs and 12
Mbitls.
The diagnostic. repealer has connection. fOT
three bu. ,egment s. The cable from the DP
mas!cr is connected to the infeed tenn inals of
bu , ,egmcot DII. The two other connections
DP2 and DP3 contain the test circuit, for deter
mination of thc topology and line d iagnostics
on the eonne<:ted bus segments. Up to 9 funher
diagnos tics repeater, can be e01)ne<;ted in
series.
Tbe diagnostics repe ater is handled like a DP
sl ave in tbe mast~r system . In the event of a
fault. it sends thc dctennined diagnostic, data
to the DP master, These are the topology of the
b us segment (sta!ions and cable lengths). the
contents of the segm ent diagnostics buffers
(last ten event, w ith fault in[unoation, location
and cau,e) and the ,tatistics data (statement on
quality of bus ,ystem). In additi(m, the diagnos.
tics repeat~r proviM, monitoring functions for
isochronc mode.
Thc diagnostics data can be fetched and also
graphicall y displayed hy a programmi ng device
w ith STEP 7 \/5 .2 or later. Line diagnostics i.
triggered from the USer program by the system
funclion SFC 103 DP _TOPOL. and read us ing
SFC 59 RD REC Or SfB 52 RDREC. In order
to set the clock on Ihe diagnostics re~at eI. you
read the CPU time using the system function

1.2 Distributed lfO

S FC I READ_CL K Rnd transmit it using SFC

$8 \VR_REC or SFB 53 WRREC.

> A CPU with integral PROflNET interface

The {hasno~tic. repeater is configured and

parameterized using STEP 7. A GSD file is
available for opemtion on non-S~tAT!C ma.-

t>

A CP module in conjunction with a CPU

(e.g. CP 343-1 )

10

dl" i e~

,=.

1.2.2

(e.lI . CPU 317-21'1'0101')

Th( 10 de,ices arc the passi,c stations 011 !he

PROFCIlET.in the case of SIMATIC S7. these
can be the modular 1/0 devices such a~

PROFIN ET 10

PROFINET [0 offers a itandardizro interface

for transmi .. ion of mainly binary proces> data
betwe~n an 'imerfaee module in the (cemrnl)
proilranunablc comroller and the field devices
uiinlllndustrial Ethernet . This "interface mod
ule' is referred to as lhe 10 controller and the
field deVIces as 10 deviccs. The 10 courroller
with all the 10 devices oonrrollcd by ;1 constirute a PROFINET 10 syslem.

ET200M. ET200S and ET200pm. The gateways PK'PN coupler. IE/PB link and IEiAS -i
link nre 1l1so 10 d~vices.
10 su pHviSQr

10 supervisors arc dc\ ices for paramc'erization, Startup, diagnostics. and human machine
imcrfacing, e.g. progmmming devi""s or HMJ
de,ices.

PRonz., I::T 10 system

A I'ROFINET 10 "ystcm comprises th~ 10 con_

troller in the cemral stalion and the 10 devices

(field devices) nsigned to it. The Industrial
Ethernet subuet connectina them clm also bc
shared by other sUitions and applications (Figure 1.5).

10 controller
The 10 controller is the BCtive station on Ihe
PROFr'lET. It exchanges data cyclically with
'its' 10 devices. An [0 controller Can be:

IE/ PR linJ.

1.2.3

Actuator/Sensor

lnlHrac~

The Actuator/Sensor interface (AS-i) ;s

II ne tworking system for the lowcst process level in

automation plantS in accordance with ,he international standard EN 30295. An AS-i master
controls up 10 62 AS-i sla"es vi. a 2-wiT(: AS-i
cable ,bal carries both the contfQl signals and
the supply voLUIge. (figure 1.6).

One AS-i ""gment can be up \0 100 m in length:

in combination with T(:pcatcrs and e",tension
plugs. a maximum e",pansion of 600 m can b(:
achieved.

I SIMATIC S7-300/400 Programmable Conuoller

"

Indy,niol Etheme,

PROFmUSDP

~
- link

ASi
IE/AS-;
li"k

AS-i a<tu.""

B;""'Y actuators
a nd n<Ol'S
",';'0 ASiAS IC

AS-i .emo,

AS-i d"tributor

runhc:r AS;
do,'ioc,

Binary "motor<
000 S=or<
without ASiASIC

FIgure 1,6 Connecting the ASi bu, 'ystcm to SII>lATiC S7

With "ASlnterface SafelY at Work", you can
safety sensors such"" em. rgencY-<Jft'
switches, door contact switches, or ",fety light
arrays direct to the AS_i network up lD Category
4 in accordance with F.'I9541 Or SlL3 inaccor
dance with mc 61508. This requires safe ASi
slaves for connecting th~ ,afcty smoors and a
safety monitor that combines the safe inPUIS with
parame1erizable logi~ and ~nsures safe shut.
down.
~onne~1

ASi master
Standard ASi masters can control up lD 31
standard ASi , lave, with a maximum cycle
lime 01'5 ms. In the ca, e of extended ASi mas
lers, tllC quantity structur. increases 10 a maxi.
mum of 62 AS-i slaves Wilh an extended ad
dress area Wi lh a maximum cycle time of 10
ms. Slave, with an extonded address area occupy one address in pair,; if standard slaves al"<'
operated on an extended master. they each oc
cupy one addrc>s ,

The AS-I ma~lcr CP 3432 is used in an S7300

station or in an ET200M stalion. It supports tho
foUowing ASi slavc-s:
c>

""

Standard slaves
Slav~"

wilh extendcd addre"ing mod . (AlB

slaves)
"" Analog slaves to slave profile 7.3 or 7.4

Inslandard mode,lh<' CP 3432 behaves li ke an l'

o module: It occupies 16 input bytes and 16 out

put bytes in the analog aililress area (from 128 upwards). Upto 31 standard slaves or 62 A/B slaves
CilaV"" with ~xtendcd aJdross area) Can be op,:",t
ed on the CP 343 -2. The ASi Sla'"C8 are paramc
teri<ed wi1h default valllC' stored in the CPo
In exle"ded mod~, the full range of functions in
accordance with the ASi master spc~ification
is available. If you use the Fe bl""k suppl ied,
maSter calls can he made fwm the user program
in addiTion to standard mode (transfer of parameters during operal;on, checking of 1he desired!
.~lUal configurati on, test and diagnoslics) ,
AS I slin'e.
AS; ,lave, can be bu.-enabled ,ensors and aC
mator. with ASi AS ICs, or they can he AS;
modul ~s. You ~Onnecl ,ensors and actuators
with AS; ASICs to a passive module. Convon
tional sen,ors and actuators can be connected to
an acti,'e module.
ASi ., laves ar~ available in the standard ,'~rsion
with One standard sla,'c oc~upying one of the
maximum of ) I possible addresses. The user
program handles the standard slaves lil:e h;nary
input> and outputs.
AS; slave> with eXTe nded addressing mode
(AlB slaves) ""cupy an address in pairs so that
up 10 62 slave, can be operated 00 one maSler.

L2 Distribmed I/O

"A slaves" arc treated like standard slaves. and

"1:1 slaves" arc addressed via data records. AS-;
AlB slaves can al80 a~quire and transfer analog
"alues

1.2.4

Gateway.

Gateways allow data exdmn gc k tween device, on different subnets, and the forwarding of
configuration and parameterization in fonna_
tion beyond subnet boundaries (Figure 1.7).
Conn.-cring two PROFIBUS .ubncts
The Dl'lDP coupler (Version 2) conne<:ts m'O
PROFIB US suboets to ~ach other, allowing you
to exchange data berorecn the DP ma,ter'; , Both
"ubnel< arc i,olated and can be operated at different data tram fer rates up to a maxim,un of 12
Mbi t/s , In hath .ubnets. the DPtDP coupler is
as<igned to the relevant DP master as a DP
slave with a freely sckctable node address in
each case.
The maximum size of the transfer memory is
244 bytes of input data and 244 b;1CS of outp ut
data, divisible into a maximum of 16 areas.lnp.,l areas in one ,ubnct must correspond to output areas in another. Up to 128 bytes can be
tm,nsferred consi,lently, If the s ide w;th the input data fails, the correspond ing OUlpUt data on
lhe other side is tnaintained at its la't value
The DPIDP conpl~r is configured and parameterized with STEP 7. A GSD tile i, available for
operation on non-S iemens masters.

Connecting PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS PA

10

PROFlBUS PA (Praces. Automation) is a b.,<

systcm for proce" engineering, halh for intrinsically-safc areas (Ex area Zone I). e .g. in the
chem ical industry, as "ell as for non-intrinsically_,afe area< such as in the food and beverages industry,
The protocol for PROFIBUS PA i, based on the
standard EN 50170. Volume 2 (PROFlBUS
DP), and lhe transmission technology is based
on IEC 115H-2.
There are two methods of linking PROFIBUS
DP and PROFIBFS PA:
I>

DP/PA coupler. when PROFIBUS DP can

be operated at 45 .45 kbitls

I>

DP/PA link which converts the dala transfer

ralC' of PROFlBUS DP to lhe data tramfer
rate of PROFlBUS PA

The DP/l'A coupkr enables connection of PA

field devices (() I'ROFlBUS DP. On PROFl BUS DP. the DPIPA coup ler is a DP slave that
i, op<rntcd at 45.45 kbitls. Up to 31 PA field de" ices can k connected to One DPIPA coupler.
The field devices fonn a PRQFlB US PA segment with a data transfer rate of 31.25 kbilis
All PROFlBUS PA segment. wgetlJcr fonn a
.hared PROFIFHJS PA bus system.
The DPIPA coup ler i. available in two veT<ions :
a non_Ex version with up to 400 mA output curren! and"n Ex version with up to 100 mA OUlPUI current.

PN.'?N ""uple'

TfJPB
link

Serial <oM<Clio"
FiIlU~

1.7 Gateway.

33

I SI\lATIC S7_300/400 Programmable Cuntroller

The DP/PA link enables the connection of I'A
field devices to PROFlBUS OF with data tranSfer rates belwccn 9.6 kbitls and 12 jl,fbitls . A
DI'/I'A link comprises an J),.j 157 interface
module and up to 5 DP/PA ~cmplers that a1"<'
connected to each other via SIMATlC S7 bus
connectors . It maps the bus system consisting
of all PROFlBUS FA segments to a PROFI BUS DP slave. A max imum of 31 PA fie ld devices can be connected per OP/PA linl..

link suppon, the procedures 3964R and free

ASCII protocol.

SIMATIC POM (process De\~ce .\bnager,

pre" iously SIPROM) is a cross-vendor too l for
paramet~rization, startup and diagnostics of in _
telligent field devices with PROFlBUS PA or
HART functionality. The DOL (Device Description Language) is available for parameter_
izing HART transducers (Highway Address able Remole Transducers).

The data transfer rale on PROFIBUS 01' can be

up 10 12 Mbitls: RS 232C can be operated at up
to 38.4 );bitl, wi th no pati ty_even or odd pati ty,
8 d ata bilS, and I stop bit.

From STEP 7 V5.1 SP3, the control technology

modules arc parameterized with the Hardware
Configuration; you must then no longer use SIMATICPOM.
Connecti ng PROFIBUS 01' to the
AS-I Ule rfate
A DPfAS-Int~ rf:lce link "'Dable, the connection
of PROfiBUS OJ' to the AS-Interface. On
PROFIBUS OP, the link is a modular OP slave
with a data Il1Insfer rate of up 10 12 .Mbitls in degree of protection lP 20. On the AS-Interface. it
is an AS-i master that controls the AS-; slaVe!; ,
The link is available in the vers ions DPIAS_i
Link 20 and DPIAS-j Link Advanced. The following AS-; slaves cao ~ c011lwlled :
t>

Standard .bves. AS-i aMlol! slaves

t>

Slaves with extended a<klre"sing mode (AlB

slaves)

t>

Slaves with data transfer mechanIsms in accordance with AS_i spe<: ificalion V3 .0 (DP!
AS-i Link Advanced)

C onnect ion of PROFlBCS j)p to a .erial

interface
The PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link is a converter be!v.'een an RS 232C (\'.24) interface and
PROFIBUS DP. Devices wi th an RS 2J2C inl<.>tface can be connected 10 PROFIBUS OP
with the OPIRS 232C li nk. The DP/ RS 232C

The PROFlBUS OPfRS 232C linl< is connected

to the dovice via a poinl-lo_point connection.
Conwrsion to the PROFIBUS OP protocol
takes place in the PROFIBUS OPfRS 232C
link . The dala is transferred con,istently in both
di1"<'ction<. Up 10 224 bytes of user data can be
tnmsfe=d per message frame.

Connecllng two PROFlNET su bnets

With the PN/PN Cou ple r, you connect two
Ethernet subncts to each other in order to ex_
etlangc dam between the 10 controllers of both
subne\S . The", is galvanic isolationlxtv..ccn the
subnets.
The PN/P:"oI Coupler is a 120-mm-wide module
tbat ii installed on a OrN rail. The subnets are
connected using RJ45 connectors. Two connections with internal switch functi on are available
for each suboe!.
From the "ie''''point of the relevant 10 control
ler, the PNIPN Coupler i, an 10 device in its
own PROFlNET 10 system. Both JO devices
are linked by a data transfer area wim 256 input
bytes and 256 output bytes, divisible into a
maximum of 16 area,. Input areas in one subtlet
must correspond to output areas in another
The PNfDP Coupler is cont1gured and paranlC_
terized with STEP 7. A GSOML file is available for other con ilguring tools.
Connection of PROFINET TO to
PROnBl'S 01'
You can connect the Industrial Etherne t subnetworks and PROFIBUS using the lEfJ'B link
Pl\'IO. If you use PROFINET 10. me IE/ PB
link PNlO takes over the role of a proxy for the
DP slaves on lhe PROflBUS. An JO controlkr
can access 01' slave, just like 10 devices us ing
the IEIPB link. In standard mode, the lElPB
link i, tran,parent for PO/OP communications
and S7 routing ~twecn subnetworks.

1.3 Communications

The IF.JPB link PNIO is a double-width modul~

ofS7-3oo dcsign. The IEIPB link is connected
to Indusnial Eth~rnet via an S-contact RJ4S
socket. and to PROFIBUS via a 9-contact SUBD sockct .
The IE/PB link is configured usins ST EP 7 as
an 10 device lO which a DP master system is
connected. When switching on, the subordinale
Dr slaves are also provided with the configuration data from the 10 controller.
Please note that limitations exist on the PROF!_
BUS DP following an IElPB link. For example.
you cannot connect a DPIPA link, the DP segment does not have CIR capability. and isoch rone mode cannot be configured.

1.3

Communications

Communi cations _ data exchange betwe~"I1 progranunable modules - is an integral component

of SlMAT1C 57. A lmost all communications
functions are handled via the opernting system.
You can exchange data without any additio nal
hardware and w ith j ust one connecting cable
between the two CPUs. If you use CP modules.
you can achieve powerful network links and the
facihty of linking to non-Siemens systems.
SfMATIC NET is the umbrella term for
SIMATIC communica1ions. It represents information exchange between progrnmmable conrrollers and between programmable controllers
and human machine intcrface devices. There
are various communications paths available
depending On performance requiremcms .

Conn .. cting PROFlNET 10 to the

AS_Interface
I.J.!

Introduction

An IE/A S-i link enables the connec tion of

PROFIN ET 10 to the AS-Interface. On PROF!NET 10, the link is an 10 device. On the AS-Interfacc. it is an AS_i mosier thai controls the
AS-i slaves. The 10 controller can aCCe" the
individual binary and analog values of the AS i slaves directly.

The most significant communications objects

are initially SIMATIC stations Or non_Siemens
devices between which you want to exchangc
data . You require modules with communications capability here. With SIMATIC 57. all
CPUs have an MPI interface over which they
can handle communications.

Connection to PROF/NET is made via twO

RJ45 connectors with internal switch function.
The AS_lntcrfacc bus is conne<:tcd to 4-pin
plug-in screw-type contacts

In addition. there arc communications proccssors (CPs) available that enable data e"change
at highcr throughput rates ~nd with different
protocols. You must link these modules via nct _
..... orks. ,\ network is the hardware connection
between communication nodes.

The link is avail~ble in the versions single master

~nd double master (in accordance with AS-Interface sp:ification V3.0) for the connection
of up to 62 AS-i slaves in each case and imcgra l
analog value transfer. The following AS-i sla\'es
can be controlled,
to

Standard slaves. AS-i analog slaves

to

Slaves with extended addressing mode (AlB

slav~s )

p.

Slaves with data mmsfer mechanisms in accordance with AS-i specification V3.0

The IE/AS-i link is configurcd and parameterized with STEP 7. A GSDML file is avajiable
for othcr configuring tools.

Data is exchanged via a conn ection in aCcordance wilh a specifi c eXe<:U1ion plan Ccommunications ,crvice) which is based, among other
things . on a specific coordination procedu:
(" protoCor). S7 connection i5 the standard
between S7 modules with communications
capability. for example .
Using an S7 connection, f igure 1.8 shows thc
objects involvcd in conunun ication between
rv.o stations. The uSCr program of the left_hand
station contains the data to be lransmined in a
data block (DB) . The conunun;cations function
in the example is a system function block
(SFB) . Assign the parameter RD with a pointer
to the data to be sent. and trigger the transmission from the program. The communications

1 SIMATIC S7-300/400 Programmable Controller

5 1MATIC 57 station
CPU

5 1MATIC 57 station

User
program

System
memory

Received
data

Connection
ID

Communications
function

Bus interface
of the module
5ubnet

System
memory

CP
Operating
system

Connection
resources
Con'lec:.tiQD

Figure 1.8 Data Exchange Between Two SIMATIC S7 Stations

function is additionally assigned a connection

ID with which the used connection is specified.
The connection occupies a connection resource
in the CPU's system memory. The data are
transmitted e .g . to a CP module in another station via the module's bus interface. Connection
resources are used in both the CP module and
CPU. Because of the connection ill (and the
configured connection path) the communications function in the receiver station "recognizes" the data addressed to it, and writes them
into the data block of the user program by
means of the pointer in parameter RD .

Communications serv ice

A communications service determines how the

data are exchanged between communications

nodes and how the data are to be handled. It is
based on a protocol that describes , amongst
other things, the coordination procedure
between the communications nodes .
Th e services mostly used with SIMATIC are:
PG communications, OP communications, S7
basic communications, S7 communications,
global data communications, PtP communications, S5-compatible communications (SENDI
RECEIVE interface).

N etwork
A network is a connection between sev eral
devices for the purpose of communication . It

comprises one or more identical or different

subnets linked together.
Subnet
In a subnet, all the communications nodes are
linked via a hardware connection w ith uniform
physical characteristics and transmission
parameters, such as the data transfer rate, and
they exchange data via a shared transmission
procedure. SIMATIC recognizes MFI, PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet and point-to-point
connection (PTP) as subnets.

36

Connection
A connection defines the communications rela-

tionships between two communications nodes.

It is the logical assignment of two nodes for

ex ecuting a specific communications service

and also contains special properties such as the
connection type (dynamic, static) and how it is
established.
SIMATIC recognizes the following connection
types : S7 connection, S7 connection (fault-tolerant), point-to-point connection, FMS and
FDL connections , ISO transport connection,
ISO-on-T CP and TCP connections, UDP conn ection and e-mail connection.

1.3 Communicat ions

Communicatiun~

function!

The communications functions are the u,er program's intenaee to the communications sen'ice
For SIMATIC S7 - internal communications. the
communications functions are integrated in the
operating system of the CPU and they arc
called via system blocks. Loadable blocks are
ava ilable for communication with non-Siemens
devices via communications processors
O v.. rvl" w of communications objects
Table 1.1 shows the relationships ~tween subnet', modules wil h communications capability
and communications services. In addition to the
commun ications services shown, POtOP com munications is also possible via MPL PROFlBUS and Industri al Ethern~1 subnets.
1.3.2

Sub nelS

Subnet' are communications paths with the

same physical characteristics and the same
communication~ procedure. Subnets arc the
central objects for communication in the
SIMATIC Manager.
The subnets differ in their perfonnance capability ;
t>

MPI
Low_cost method of networking a few
SIMATlC devices with small data volume,.

t>

PROFTBUS
High -speed e"change of small and mid range volumes of data. used primarily with
distributed 110.

t>

t>

Industrial Ethernet
Communications between computers and
programmable controllers for high_'peed
e"change of large volumes of data, also
used with d istributed II0s (PROFC'lET 10).
Poim-to-poim (PTP)
Serial link between two communications
partners with special protocols.

From STEP 7 Y5. you can use a programming

device to reach SIMATIC S7 stations via subnets. for the purposes of, say, programming or
parametcri"ing. The gateways between the subnelS must ~ located in an S7 station with "routing capabi lity".

l\ fP 1

Every CPU with SlMAT1C S7 has an " interface

with multipoint capability" (multipoint interface. or MP!) . It enables establi.hment of subnets in which CPUs. human machine interface
devices and programmmg devices can
e"change data w ith each othur. Data e"change
is handled via a Siemens proprictary p rotocol.
The ma"inuUl1 number of nodes on the MPI
network is 32 . Each node has access to the bus
for a specific length of time and may send data
frames. After this time, it passes the access
rights to the next node ("token passing acceSS
procedure).
As transmission medium. MPI useS either a
shiel ded twi'ted_pair cable o r a glass or plastic
fl~r-optic cable. The ma"imum cable length in
" bus segment with non_electrically_isolated
interfaces i, up to 50 m depending un the transmission rate. and up to 1000 m with e lectrically
isolated imerfaces. This can be increa,ed by
inserting RS485 repeaters (up to 1100 m) or
optical link modules (up to'" 100 kIn). The data
transfer ratc ;s usually 187.5 kbit!s.
Ove r an MPI subnet. you can exchange data
between CPUs with global dam communi cations. sllIlion -c" temal S7 basic communications or S7 communications. No additioual
module. arc required.
PROFIBUS
PROFlBUS stands for Process Field Bus" and
is a vendor_independent standard complying
with lEe 61158/EN 50170 for universal autOmat ion (PROFlBUS DP and PRO FIBUS FMS)
and for process automation aceording 10 lEe
61158-2 (PROFIBUS PAl.
The ma"imum number of node, in a PROFT BUS network is 127. where the network is
divided into segment.s wi th up to 32 nodes . A
distinction is made between active and passive
nodes. An active node receives access rightS to
Ihe bus for a specific length of time and Olay
send data frames . After this timc. il passes the
access rights to the ne"t node ("token passing"
aCCeSS proccdnre).lfpassive nodes (slaves) are
assigned to an aClive node (master). the master
c"ccutes data e"change with the slaves
assigned to it while it is in possession of the

37

1 SIMATiC S 7_300/400 Programmab le Controller

T_bl. 1.1 Communication,Objec"

SfC call'

"
BUS

Dr interrace

(DP ma,ter Of DP ,lave)

SFB/SFC call,.

.,

CP 443 - ~

- --

Industrial

Station_internal 57 basic commun icati ons

CP )42_3: PROfIDUS DP VO
CP 433 _5 Ext.: PROFIBUS UP VI

~xl...,d.d

H.,.dwarc conliguflItion,
SF BiS FC call.,

FMS int'-TIace
CPU, with

PROFINET 10
(10 controller)

"

CP44.11
TCP/lP and C OP.

CP343-11T
57
cr 4431 Advanced
CP443 -1 1T

tah le,

38

1.3 Communicalioll5
access rights. A passive node <;\oxs not receive
access righls
The PROFIBUS network CRn al!l<) be physi~ally
designed a.s an electrical network, optical nelwork or wireles couplina with various trans_
mission rates. The length ofa Sejmcttt depend.
on the tranSmission ratc. ~ elcctrical network
can be configured with a linear or!reC topology.
11 uSC!! shielded. rw;,\ed two-wire cBble
(RS485 inlerfaee). The transmission rate can be
~djuS!cd in steps from 9.6 kbitlS 10 !2 Mbiti,
(31.25 kbitls with PROflBUS PAl.
The oplieal network L1ses eilher plastic. PCF or
lila" fiber-optic cables. 11 is suitable for large
distanccs, provides electtical iSOlation. and is
insen~ilive 10 electromaanetic inlerferences.
The transmission ntte can be adju<1cd in <1epS
from 9.6 kbitl. 10 12 Mbits. When using <>pli
cal link module. (OLMs), design:< arc possible
wilh linear. ring or Star topologies. An OL:vI
also provides the connection hClweC11 cltrical
and optical networb wilh a mixed design. A
co~t-opt itllized version is the design a.~ a linear
structure with integral interface and optical bus
Icnninal (OST).
lising the PROFTRU5 infrared link module
(ILM). sinille or several PROFIBUS sla,''''' or
I~gments can be provided wnh a wireless con_
nection to PROnSU5 slu,cs. The maximum
transmission rate of \.S Mb,,,s and Ihe ma.ximom rangc of IS til mean. ,hat commUniCalion
i~ possible with moving parts,
You implemcm connection of distribUlCd VO
via D PROFIBUS subnetwork; the relevant
PROHBL'S DP communic"ions service is
implicit. You can ~ eitherCPUs with integral
or plug-in DP master, or the rele~ant CPs. You
cpn also nperate station-internal 57 basic com_
munications or S7 communications via this net_
work.
You Can transfer data with PROFffiUS FMS
and PROFIBU5 FDL us ina the relevant CPs.
There are loadable blocks (F\15 interface nr
SEND/RECEIVE interface) available as the
interface 10 the user proaram).
I nduSlrlal Et hernel
Industrial E,hemet is the Jubnet for connecting
complllcrs and programmable control lers, with

tlte focus 00 the industrial area. defined by the

intc-mational standard IEEE 802.3/802.3u. The
standard IEEE 802.11 alb/gib defines the con_
ne<:tion to wireless local area nel\>fOrks
(WLANs) and Industrial Wir.,]ess LAN.
(lWLA1'>s).
The number ofst8tionl networked using Induslrial Elhernet is unlimited; up to 1014 stations
arc penni.sible per segment. Sdore accessin&.
each nodc check-< to ee If anolher node is curremly tran,mining, !fthi. illhe case. the node
waia for a mndorn time before attempting
another access (C5MA/CD acces. procedure).
All nodes have eq ual acce~.~ rillhts ,
The pbysical connections on Industrial Ethernet consist of point-Io-point conncctions
bc1ween communication nodes. Eacb node is
connected wilh precisely one paMer_ To enablc
&e"eral nodes to communicatc with eacb othC'!".
Ihey arc conntcd to a dtstnbutnr' (swilch or
hub) Iha, has scveral conncctions.
A .,..-ITCh is an active bus elemcnl that regener_
Rtes signals, prioritizes them, and distribul<:s
them only to Ihose devicc~ thai are connected to
it. A h"b Kdjusts to thc lowest datu transfer rate
at the ~onnttlions, and forwards all signals
unpriOliti ...ed to all conne<:ted dcvices.

The n~tworlt" can be confiaured as a linear. star.

ITCC or ring topology. The dala tramlfer rates Ill"<:>
10 \'fuitls, 100 Mbitl$ (FRS! Ethernet) or 1000
Mbitfs (Gigabit Ethernet, not on I'KOFrt.'ET),
Industrial Ethernet can be ph)'~ically designed
as nn electrical n~"1",otk. oplical nctwork or
" 'ireleu network. FutConnccl TWisted Pai!"$
(FC TP) "ith RJ45 connections. or 1ndu.~triaJ
Twisted Pai!"$ (ITP) with sub-D connections are
available fOf implcmcnlina Ihe electrical cablina. Fiber optic (FO) cabling Can consi" of
alass fiber. peF or POF. It ofT~n galvanic isolation, is impervious to elei.:.romagnetic influences, and is suilable for long distaJlccs. Wireless .ransmission uses the frequcn cics 2.4 GHz
and 5 GHz with data transfer rates up to 54
Mbitll (dcpending on the national approvals),
You can cxchange dala with 57 and IE communications via Industrial ElMnIe{ and utilize the
S7 fUDCtions. With appmpriaICly designed
modules. you can also establish ISO trnnspnn
connCCtions. ISO-on-TCP connc~ t ions. TCP,
UDP and e-mail connections,

"

I SIMATIC S,_300/400 Programmable Controller

PROFII'I,'ET

AS- I nt~rface

PROFINET i~ the open InduslIial Ethernet

slanJard of PROFillUS International (PNO) _
PROFINET use, the Industrial Ethernel subnet
a, the physical medium for data trmsmission,
taking into ac~ ounl the requirements of indClStrial autolllillion . For examp le. PROFINET
offer. a real_time (RT) response for eommWlication:; with field devices. and isochronou,
real_time (IR1) transmission for motion control
appl ications. Compatibilily with TCFlll' and
the IT '1anda~ of Industrial Ethernet are
retained.

The AS-Inlerfacc (.duatorlscnsOf interface ,

AS -i) networks the "ppropriately designed
binary S<;"tlsors and actuators in accordance w ith
tbc A S-lmcrface specification lEe TG 178.
The AS-Interlace docs not appear in the
SIMATIC Manager as a suimel, ""Iy the AS -I
master is configured with the hardware configuration or wi th the network conliguration_

Siemens applies PROFlNl:T to two automation

cOllcepts:
~

Component Based Auramalian (CllA) uses

PROFINET for ~ommunicat ion bem-'e~n
control unit, as components in di,uibuted
systems . Th~ configl!Talion tool lS
SIMATIC iMap_

PROFfNET 10 lISes PROFINET to transmit

data to and from field d~Yices (dimibuu:d
110). "Ibc con fi guralion tool is SIMATiC
STEP 7 .

Point_to-poiut

eonn~eti"D

A poiut-IO-point connection (PTP) enables dala

uchangc via a serial link. A point_to_poinl CO llnection i< handled by the SI.MATIC Manager "s
a .nbnet and configurc<1 ,imilurly.
The tran"nission medium is an electri(al cable
with int~'tfac e_dependent assignment. RS 232C
( V.24), 20 mA (TTY) and RS 4221485 are available a, interlace,. The data transfer rate is in the
range 300 b it,,). tu 19.2 kbith with a 20 rnA
interface or 76.8 kbit/s v.;th RS 232C and RS
42214~5. Th~ cahle length depends on \he physical interface and the dIlta transfer rate: it is 10
m with RS 232C, 1000 m w ith a 20 mA interfuee at 9.6 kbitl. and 1200 with RS 4221485 at
19.2 kbitls_
3964 (R), RK 512, printer drivCl"S and an ASCn
driver"", ""ai iable as protoco ls (proc cdur<").
Ib e latter enabling definition of a u,er_spec ific
procedure.

The transmission medium is an unshielded

twisted_pair cab k that ,upplics th e actuators
and sensors with both data and power (power
s upply r"'1 uircd). Netvwrk range can be up l<>
600 m with repeaters and extension p lugs The
data transfer rate is set at 167 kbitls .

A maSter ""nlrots up to 62 slaves thro ugh

cycli c scann ing and w gmlmntee' " defined
""pense "me.

1.3.3

Communication s ServlcO/"S

Data exchange over \he "ubnets i, control led by

different communications servic e, - dq>cnding
on the connection sdcetcJ. The services are
provi ded by the CPU ,>r CP modules _ In addi
lion to communications wilh ficld devices
(PROFIDUS DP, PROFlI:IUS PA <HId PROFl/'>.'ET 10, so:.: Chapler 1.2. I "I'ROflI:lUS DP "
and t. 2.2 --PROFINET 10"), the service, listed
be low arc available depending on the mooule
u>ed.

J'G communication .
1'G communicalions i, used to exdlllnge data
between an engineering station and a SIMATIC
sta tion . II i. used. for example, by a programming device in online mode 10 C"Xe<:U1e the
function, "Moni tor variables" or " Read diagnostics buff~r" or to load user programs . The
~ommuni ca tions functioru required for PC;
commun ication, arC integrated in the operating
system of the SIMATIC mooules . PG communications Can be c."'e<:uted over the MPl,
PRO FIBUS and InJu,mal Ethernet subnets. By
applying S7 routing, the PG communications
'''III aho be used beyond , uhneK

1.3 Communications

OP communic ation>
OP con>m"nkations i~ us~d to ~xchallg-e data
between an operator stat ion and H S!MATIC
statim' , For example, .1 io "sed by an HMI
oe~iec for opcmtion ~n,j monitori!\g. or 10 read
and Wrile variablcs. Tbe eomml.micatio!\s functions requircd for OP commll!\;cation~ are im,,gn.tcd 'n the opcratina system of the SL\{ATIC
modules. O P communicauons can be excculcd
overthc Ml'1, PROFlB US and l ndu~tri"l F ibernel ",hocts.
S7

bY~lc

communicatIons

S7 \)asic eOmJl\oni<Hlion~ i~ an e,em-conlrollcd .oeMc" forexchanging ~mal1 volume, of

oata he\v.ecn " CPU and a module in the same
SIMATlC station ("statiouintemaJ"') or
between a CPU and " m<..M.lule ,n a different
S I'\1ATlC station rstalion-<:=xlemal"). The con
nections are established dynnn>icaUy when
required. The communicillion~ fun ctions
rO'l"i,...'<1 for th" S7 basic communicati ons are
integrated in the opcratina sy.tem of the CPU,
c,g. you triggcr thc data traM fer in the user pro
Iron! by mca!\S of system funetio'" SfC. StatiOll.internal S7 basic communications is necuted ov~r PROI'I HUS, .lJItion-c:xt~m81 oyer
'\1 PI.

conlanee wi ,h RYC 793.1S0-<Jo-TCP in accor' .... nee with RFC 1006. ur UOP in accordance
WI th RfC 768 . Th~ C(Jmmunication functions
are luadablc runction h locks (fH~) containeo in
the Smmh",J Ubra'Y of STt::!' 7 under Comm,,
tliClllimr Block. The function blocks are c"lIed
in the main program and they control eO'.mC'CItOn buildup ""d c1"ardown as ",ell a, <!ala
transfer,
Glohal dara

communk,.tlon~

Global data communi~ation. enahles e~~hange

of~mal1 volumes ofdalli between s~veral CPUs
with out ~dditional proirammin.: overhead in
the user pro.:".m. Transfer Clm he cyclic or
evenl.dri>'cn. The commulU~ali,)ns function.
I'C'qUlred an: inregrated tn the openti".: system
of the CPt:. Global <lala communicarions is
only poII~iblc ov~-r rhe MPI bu. or th" K bus.
PIP C(lmmllnicatioDS

I'll' commun ications (poi~t.to point connection) \Tnnsfe~ data o,~r. ~crial intCTfa~e. e,g.
hem-'een a SIVIATIC slition and a printer. Thc
cummunications functionti requi red arc intcb'1'llted in th~ operating sy.tem. e.g. as system
fW'lction blocks SFB. Olla uchan.:" is prn;siblc
tHing various tJaru<fer procedurn.

S7 cn mmuuic"tion,

SS-i:(lmpatible

S7 ~('mmunicati(m";' an cvenl ..controlled service for exchanging laracr v()lume, of data

bc!We~n CPU modllles with c()!\trol and lIl<mi.
toring funeti()n, . Th~ connections are .\.iuic.
and ~rc programmed using ST EP 7. The commUnication. furn.-tiuru. required fO'l" S7 communieanons arc cuh~-r integl1l1led In Ih~ o~ ...tinll
~}'$Icm of ti>e CPt: ($}ostem function blocks
S FB) 0>" they are loadable function block>; (FB).
S7 ""(Immunic,tion. can be: c~ccutcd o,er the
Ml'l, PROFlBUS anrll.ndu>tri~1 Elhe rnet subnel s.

S!.compaliblc C<Jrnmun ications is an eveplconlrQll ed se,""ie,," for dUh' tr"nsfer tx.--tw","n

SI\.1 ATIC "ations and non.SIMATlC station.,
The connections are shuie, Ind areprogratnntCO
tHing STEP 7. The C(Jmmuo ications functions
are usu~lly load"blc functioD5 FC with wbich
you can control the transfer from the user pmIIl"rn. nata are ...,m aDd rccei""d OYcT the
SlN"DIRECEIV E intcrfllce. and data can be
fetched and written over thc rRTCllfWRl T [l
int erfucc (S7 is a passive p"nner) . S5 -cQrnpatible ~ommunicati0n~ Cull be implcm~nted witb
Industrial Ethernet usmg the Tel', ISO on TC I',
lSO tl1lnsport and UOI' connectio,,~, and with
PROrlBUS using FDL

fF: communlcatlon
WiLh "'Optn eommuruclttion via lndu5lrial Eth,,",cl (IE communicatiOn fO'l" shon). you tJ<tmfer data b<.-tween tv."\) devices connC'Cted to the
Ethernel SlIhnel. Communication can be implemented using the protocols Tel' nativc in 8C-

~omm"nICltl ... n.

Slanda r d co mmunk,.,loM

Standard communicatiuns n~l'$ standardized,

wndor-indc~ndent protocol, for m<la transf...,..

41

I SI.MATIC S7-3001400 Programmable COnlroller

PROF'lBU S F'MS (Fie1dbus Mc:....ge Specification) provides services for the programbaicd, device-indcpcndctlt ttansfer of suuccured variables (FMS variables) in accordance
with EN 50170 Volume 2. Oam exchange is
carried QUI using &tatic FMS connections over a
PROFIBUS subnel. The communications functi on' arc loodable function blocks FB with
which you COllirol the transfcr from the user
program.

Using an IT communications processor,

S tMATle station;" linked to the IT ~'Hfl"'unl
ullo n . Tnmsfer over Industrial Ethernet comprises POIOP/S7 communications IIDd S5~om
patible CQmmunieations (S END'RECE lVE)
with the ISO, TCM P and lIFD U1lrI~port protocols. It is additionally possible to use SMTP
(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) for e-maH!,
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) for
ItCcen using Web browsers, and FTP (File
Transfer Protocol) for program -controlled data
nchRnitc with devices from diffcll'nl operating
systems.
1.3.4

Co nnections

A connection is either dynalnic or slolic

depending on the communications service
selecled. Dynamic connections are DOl configured; their buildup Or c1eardo""." is e' ent-dri\ClI
('"Communications via non-configun.:d connections"). There can only ever be one non-conftiured connection to a communications pamer
Stalic oonnections a~ configured in Ihe conneclion table: they are built up at Stl<rtup and
remain throughout the entire program execution ("communications via configured connection~"). Several connecl ions caD t>e established
in parallel \0 onc communication, partner. You
use a "Connec!ion type" to select the desircd
communicat ions service in the nct","OrIc configuration (see Chapter 2_4 -"Configwmg the N~

w<>ri<..,.

You do n()I need to configure connections ",'im

the ~twork configuflnion fOJ global data communic.tions and PIWFlBUS DP or forS7 basic
communications in the case of S1 fu~tions.
Vou define the communications partl1CN for
IIlobal datK communications in Inc global data
table: in the case of PROFIBUS DP and S1

basic communications, you define the panncrs

via the node addresses.

Conn ecrloo resoon ...

Each connection requires connection I\.'$OUI"I:CS
on the participating communications partner
for Ihe en d point of the connection or Ihe tran_
sition point in a CP modulc. If, for example. S7
functions 8re executed via a bus interface orlhe
CPU, a connection is aSlligncd in Ihe CPU: the
i;IIIlC functions via the M P! interfaco of the CP
occupy one connection in the CP and one eonncclion in the CPU_
Each CPU bas a specific Dumber of pos:sible
tOnnectiorul_ Limitations and rules CJlist rcgard_
ing the use of connection rt'SOUl"CCS. For eltampie, not evCTY connection rc5OUt"a! can be u.sed
for every type ofCQnne<:tion. One connection is
reserved for a progranuning device Bnd one
connection for an or (these cannot be used for
any other purpose).
Connection resources arc also required temporarily for the "non-configull'd connectiolU" in
57 basic communications.

1.4
1.4. 1

Module AddrcsSf.'S
Signal Pat h

When you wiTC your machine or plant, you

determine wltich signals all' connected whert'
on the programmable comrol1er CFigun: 1.9).
An input signal, for example the signal from
momentary_contact switch +l tPOI- S lO. the o ne
for "Switch motor on". is run 10 nn input modul . wh.r~ it i, connecled to a specific lenninai.
Thi~ terminal has an "address" called the 110
addrcs. (for instance byte S, bit 2).
SefOR every program execulion Slart. the CPU
then amomatically copies the sianal to the proeen input image, where it i5 then accessed t i an
"input" address (I 5.2. for example)_ The
cxprcs.ion "[ 5_2" is the absolute addrt'Sl.
You can now give this input a name by "$ign_
IDit an alphanumeric symbol coITcsponding to
Ihis input signal (such as "Switch motor on") to
the absolmc address in thc symbol table. The

1.4 Module

" HPOI . L
_SIO ( ..

,~,

.,

,,-

modulo

~'

Byten

.,
"'

.,

-,
._.

.,..

. .".

Process-image

1234 56 7

,
Byf1I

n~ I

A~

i:

----

11
-+

.,...

.""

Abso"'t"

~".

start add", . .

",,",a

U.", P

.... m (LAD)
~ s_ c "

on mo lor"

!"11m IFBDl
USII'
~ S ... ;tc:h on motor"

II

15.2

II

,,~

-:::0-:::0-

I'lgu,,' 1.9

Co",,!ution ""<",,,,,n Modul. Add.r<: . AbwlU1e Add, nd Symbolic Add, ...

(P.,h of a Signal from Sonso< 10 s.canll;lIi III the Pmg""n)
eltpl"C$$;on "Switch motor 00" is the symbolic
addro:ss.
1.4.2

S lo t A ddress

Every slot bas a fi xed uddress in the progra mmable controller (an S7 stalion). This slot
addreu cons;",s of the number of the mounting
rack pnd the number of the slot. A module ;s
uniquely described using the slot address
("geographical addressl.
If the module contains interface cprds. each of
these cards is also a~sii"cd a submodu1e
add ress. In this way, each binary nnd analog

signal and eac h serial connection in tbe system

hlu liS own unique addres~.
Correspondingly, dislribuled UO modules also
have a "geographical address". In this case, the
number Of me DP master sys tem or the PR O F! /'-'TIT 10 system and the station nutnl:>er replace
the rack number.
You u~e STEP 7'5 "Hardware Configuration"
tool 10 plan !.be hardware configuration of an S7
station as pcT the physitallOClltioo ofthc modules. Thi s tool also makes it Jl'O'Isible 10 set Ihe
module start addresses and paramet"ri'!e me
modulcs (see Chapter 2.3 '"Co nfiguring Stations").

I SIMATIC 57_3001400 Programmab le Controller

1.4,3

1.4.4

Logical Addu"

The logical addn:ss correspond, to the absolute

address, U is also referred to as the user data
address. for you uSe this aJJrc,s to access the
user data of the input/output modules in the
user program, either via thc process image
(inputs I and outpulS 0) or direclly Qn \.be modules (peripheral inruts PI and reripheral outputs PQ) , The range of logical addresses comm~'IlCCS a t 7.cro and ends at an up!>"r limit ,pecifIC to I.hc CPU
With digital mooules, the individua l signals (the
individual bil<) a", combined into bWlChe, of g,
rererred to as bytes. Modules exist with one . two
or four bytes. These bytes have the relative
addres"'s 0, L 2 and 3, addressing of the byte,
commences at the modules stan address. E.umpie: wi!h a digital modnle with four byles and the
,tar! address 8, the individual bytes with
add"",,,,s 8, 9. 10 and 11
addressed , Witb
analog m<>dules, Ihe individlllli analog <ignals
(voltages. cur",nts) are referred to as "channels",
each of\vhich requires two byte,. Derending on
Iheir design, analog modules cmt with 2. 4. S or
16 channels wrt'Csponding to an address range
of4.l;.16or32bytes.

Usitlg Ihe hardware configw-ation, you a,sign a

logical addrc",~'S to each byte ora us<:d module.
The address'" a"" assigned as standard starting
at ~cro, but you call change the proposed
add","" The logical addresse, ohhe individual
modnles mll", not overlap. Th~ logical
addresses are defined sqmralcly for \.be input
and QUlput module.', so that an inpnt byte can
have the same number as an output byte,
The user data or Ihe distributed 110 an: also
addressed in hyles using 3 logical address. In
onkr to guaram"" an unambiguous a"ignmcnt
of all user data of a CPU (or more exactly: all
u",r data on a P bus), the logical aJd",sscs of Ihe
distribuled 110 must not overlap with Ihe logical
addresses of the central module<;
It i. usually the case thaI the digital modules arc

assigned ac"ording to addrcsses in the process

image so Ihat thcir .,i gnal <latuses are automatically updaled and they can be add"""ed u,ing
the address area, "Input" and "Output". Analog
modules . FM modules and CP modules are
assigned an address which is nO! w ithin the process un age.

Module St art Add res.

n'e module start address is the smallest logkal

(user data) add,e",e, of a module : it idcmifi"s
the relative byte zero of the modu le , The fol_
lowing module bytes are then assigned succcs,iv ely with addrcsses .
In the case o f m ixed modules containing inpu1
and output f""ge, . the lower range start address
is defined as !hc module star! address . If Ihe
inpot and output range, have the same start
addn:. u<;c Ihe input address ,

Using th e hardware wnfigurm ion. you determi ne the position ortbc US<.T data addresses in
the address volumc or !he CPU by defining Ihe
modul~ "an addressc . The lowest logical
addre" is also Ihe moduk .tart address for Ihe
modules of the distributed JIO and even for the
virtual siNS in the tIlIn.fer memory of an intel _
ligent DP , lave
The modules ,tan addrcss is used in many cases
to identify a module. Other than thi', it has no
'peeial meaning ,

104.5

D I"gn ostics Addrc ..

Appropriately equipped modules can ,upply

diagnostics data that you can evaluate in your
program. If ccntrali/.ed moduks have a user
data address (module start address), you accesS
1he module via thi, addre.s when reading !he
dia"'1l0Sli ~s data. If the modules have no USer
data addn:s> (e.g. power supplies), or if they are
part of Ihe distrib uted VO. thm' is a diagnosti cs
add""" for this purpose.
The diagnostics address is alw,"ys an address in
Ihe 110 input arca and oC~1,!pics one byte. The
mer data length of th is address is zero; if it i,
located in the process image, as is pennillcd, il
is not taken into account by th~ CPU whCl1
updating \.be pro<:css imag e.
STEP 7 automatically ""signs the diagnostics
address counting down from the highest possible 110 addres,. You can change the diagnostics
addre~< with \.be Hardware Configurdtion funeIton
The diagnost ics data can only he read w ith speci al system functions: accessing this add,..,,,s
Wilh load "8Iemcnl, has no effect (see also
Chapler 20.4 "Communicati()ll via Distributed
VO").

1.4.6

i\dd...,sscs ror

Ru~

"odes

MI'I
Module. that arc nodes on aD M l'l ne t,,"or\:
(CPUs. FMs an d CP S) also have an " '11'1
addren. This address is decish'e ror !he link 10
programming devices. human machine interface devices and for glob.al data communicalionl.
I'l~asc nOle lhat with older revision levels ofthc
57_300 CPU . !he FM and C I' modules oper.
aled in Ihe .arne Slat;on receive Hn MPI address
derived fro m the MPI addrc~s of the CPU. In
the case of newer S7-300 CPUs. the MPI
addre.sc, of FM aod CP mndulc~ in thc ,ame
sialion can he detennined independently oflhe
MPI address o f the CPU.
VKOf'lBUS DP
EliCh 01' lItation (e.g. Dr maSter. DP slave. progTanuning device) on the I'ROFIBUS also has
a node Md dre~s (station number) with which it
can be unambiguously add resS\:d on thc bu s,
I'ROFn<'ETIO
Staliom on the Industrial E.thcrnct havc a faelory-SCt MAC . dd",~, ",hich is unique world_
wide. An II' ad d l"fi~ is addillonally reqoired
for identification on the bus. and ,s configurcd
for the 10 cOlltroller. Thc II' addresses for the
10 dc"icc~ are deri ved from thc ll' addr~ss of
the 10 cOntrol ler. The 10 comrollcr (thc ,n terfdce) an d each 10 device i~ additionally
assigned a dl"'"jce na nw. The 10 device IS
addressed by the user program by m~anS of a
dC" lcc number (stalion numbcT).

I>

Ibe L Stack. (sec Chapler III.I.S " Temporary

Local Data")

To this are added the code an d data bloch with

the block.local variabl e~, depending Oil the user
program.
1.5.1

User Data

A~a

In SlMATIC S7. each module can havc two

areas: a user dala ar~a. wbich can be
directly addressed with Load and Transfer
Stalemems. and a syslem dala area for trallsfer_
rillg data records.
addrcs~

\\'hen modules are access~"<J. iI makes no diff""TenCe wh"ther they are in 11I~k.s with centralized
configuration o r uS<."<:I as distributed YO. All
modules occupy the ~me (logical) add~s
space.
A module's user data propcTtie! depend on the
module type. In the case o f sill nal modules.
they nrc either digital or Bnalog input/output
~igllll l s. and in th~ ~HSC offu nctio n modules and
COllununications processoN>. Ihey might. Inr
uarnple. be conlro! or Rtatus infonn ation. The
"olume of user daQl
modu lc-Hpeei fic. There
are modules tha! occopy onc. t .... o. four or more
b>,es in this ...-ea. Addressing ah'1IY. begins at
rcl~thc byte O. The address o f byte 0 iJ the
module <tan address: it i~ 5tipu lated in the coofiauration table.

'S

The user data represent the VO address area.

divided . depend ing on Ih e dir<:ctiot! oftrnnsf~T,
inlO peripheral input. (1' Is) and periph".,-al OUIpulS (PQ5). If the us"r data arc in the area of the
process imag ..... the CPU automat ically hand les
Ihe rrunsfcrs when updatinillhe process images.
Pe rlphcra l lnpurs

1.5

A ddress Areas

The address areag available in every programmable cuntrolkr are

!>

the peripberal inpulS and outpul'o

I;>

Ihe process input image and the process out_

put image

!>

Ibe bit memory area

I>

Ihe timer and eounler funclions (scc Chaplers 7 '""Timers" and 8 "Counlers"')

You use the peripheral input (PI) address area

when you read from Ihe user dala area on input
modu l c~. Part of'he PI ad dress area Icad. to the
proces' image . This part alwuys l>cg in. at I/O
addreu 0; the leogth of the an;a is CPU-specific.
Wilh a Direct liO Read Opcllllion, you cllll
acce$~ the modules whose intcrfaces do not
lead to the proces< Input image (fOT instance
nnalog input modules). The signal stateS of
modu les that lead to Ihc proees. inpm image
can also be r~ad with a Direct Rcad operation.

I SIMATTC 57}00/400 Programmable Controll..-

The momentary signal states of the input bit ,

an: then ,ca nned. Please note that thi' 'ignal

st"le may differ from the rdevant lnPuts in the
prOCe>S image ,in~c the proc~S5 input im"g~ is
ur<ioted at The beginning of The program ,caD.
Peripheral inputs may oceupy the saf"e ab,,,"
lute addre>ses a, peripheral outputs .

Pcrlpbc"aloutpuIS
You u,e the peripheral outpUT (PQ) addre,s area
whe"Jl you wriTe vnlu~s to the u'er data a~a on
an OU(plit module. Pan of the PQ add~8s area
leads TO Tbe process image. This part always
begi ns at 1/0 address 0; the le ngth of lhe area is
CPU_specific.
With a Dire<:T I/O Write operaT ion. you can
a~cess modules whose inK'Iface, do not lead to
the process outpul image (su~h as analog output
modules). 1bc sig,;al states of modules ~on'
trolled by th~ process outr\lt im:.g~ ~an also be
dir""lly aITcctcd. The signal statcs of the outpu1
bils th~n change immediately. Please nOte tha1:'
Dirc~t I/O Write operation also upd ates the sig
nal S!.a\ CS of (he ~levant modules in the process
output image! Thm. there is no di fTercnce
betwcen the rrocess OUtpUT image and the sig.
nal S!~tc~ on the output module .

additional memory area sitnilarto the bit m=OIy area. Thi, appl ies both for the process input
image and the process OUtpUT image.

On suitably oquirped CPUs. say. the CPU 417.

tile size of the proce-s image can be parameterized. If you enlarge the proc~ss image, you
reduce the size of The wOIk memory accord
ingly. Followin g a change 00 the ,iu oftl'c pro
cess image, the epe c"~eute, ini\iali zatioll of
the workmcmory, with the same effe<:t as acold
t~ S \art

Inp uts
An input is an image of thc corresponding bit
on" digiml input moduk. SC>UIJling an inp ut is
th~ same as .canning the bit on 1he module
it,clf. PriOI to program C~CCllli on in every program cycle. the CPU'~ operating sy'tem copie,
the , ignal ,tate from the module to the proce"
inpUT Image.
Th~ use of a proce.s input image has many
adv "mages:

<> Inputs can be scarmed and linked bil by bil

(liO bits cannot be dircctly adilie,,,,d).
I>

Peripheral OUtpUT' em re",rve the some obsolute addr~sse s as peripheral input'.

1.5.2

Process Image

The process image contain! the image of \.he

digital input and digital outpUt mooul." and is
thus divid~d into proce" input image and proce," OUTput image . The process input image 1.'
ac~e"ed via (he addre', area for inputs (1), the
procCICS O\J (PUI image v ia the addrC:ls arca for
Oll(PUlS (Q). A. a rule, t h~ machine or process
i, ~on(roned via the input' and outputs .
The pr,x".. image ean be divided into suhs idiary proce" images that can be urJa,Ied either
a uOOmatically or v ia the user pmgram. Please
r<feT 00 Charter 20.2. 1 "Proce>s lmag: Updating" for more details.
On the S73UO CI'U, and. from IO/9 ~. "1'0 on
S7--400 CP Us, you can usc (hu addusses ofth.
proce>s imagc not occupied by modules as

Scanning an input i, much faster lha"

acce>s in g an inp ut module (for cx~mple.
you avoid the transient rce"vcI)' 1ime o n the
lIO bu" and {he system memury rc,ponse
times are ,'horTer (han the module's response
times). The pmgram i, therefore CKC<:UTCd
that much mo~ quickly.

,. The signal State of an input i, \.he ,arne

throughout the em ire pro"'ram cycle (the,""
is data cons i,tency throughout a program
cycle). When a bi : on an input module
change;;, Th e changc in the signal ;;tate i.'
trans ferred TO thc inpu t at the ,tart of lhe
next program cycle.
"

lnplll, can ab o be set and re.et becaus e they

are localed in random access memory. DigiTal input mod ules can only be rcad . Inputs
can be set during debugging or startup to
sim ulate ,Cn,OI Slates, thus sinlplifying program tes ting.

"Ib~,;e

advantage, arc offset by an increased

progwm re'pome time (please also refer to
Chapto: 20 .2.4 '"Re;;ponsc Time").

1.5 Address Area.

Outputs
An outpu t is an image of the corrc'p,mding bit
on a digi tal output module. Setting an output is
the same as setting the bit on the output module
it self. The cpe's operatin g system copies the
signal state from the process output im age to
the module .
The use of a pn)l:e" output unage has many
advantages:
~

Outputs can be set and reset bit by b it (direc\

addressing of L10 bits is not possible).

SeUin g an output is much fasler th an acc e ssing an output module (for example . you
avoid the tramiem reeove.-y time on the L10
bus. and the system memory response times
are ;;horter than the modulc response times).
The program is there fore e~eeuted that
mu~h more quickly

II. multiple s ignal state change at an oU!put

during a program cycle does not affect the
b i\ on the output module. It is the signal
state of the ou!put at the end of lhe program
cycle that is transferred 10 the module .

"

Outputs can a lso be scanned because they

are located in random access mcmory.
While;t is possible to write to digilal output
modules. it is not poss ib le to read them. The
scalming and linking of thc outputs makes
additional storage uf thc oU!put bit to be
scanned unnecessary.

These advantages are offset by an increased

program response time. C hapter 20.2.4
"Respon se Time" describe~ how a programmable con troller'~ response time comes a!>out.

1.~ .3

Consistent User Data

Data cons istency m eans that data can be han d led ill a b lock. Transfcr ofa data block m ust
not be interrupted. and it is not perm issibl e for
the data source or target to be changed from the
other end duritlg a transmissi on e ither. For
examp lc. if you transfer four bytes ind iv idually.
the Jransmirting program can b e interrupted by
a program of h igkr prioritybctwccn each byte.
and this progr.un cuu ld change Ihe data in the
souree or target arca.

In th e case of direct access to user dala (loading

and lransterring), the d ata are rcad and wriltt:n
as b yte. won! or doublcword. The load and
tmns f~,. instruetiolli<. upon which the MOVE
!>ox w ith LADIFBD and the as~ignmcnt ofvariabIe s w ith elementary data types w ith SCl_ are
ba;;ed. arc desi gned as interruptible . J f you w ish
to transfer a data b lock wilh morc than four
bytes w ithout interruption belween system
memory and work memory. usc the systcm
fu nction SFC g I L'BLKlVlOV.
Data tran sfer betwcen a DP slave and DP master is cons istent for a complele slavc cven ife.g.
the tran<fer area for an intellig~n t DP slave i,
di" ided into several consistent blocks. Data
cons istency with internode communication is
the same as with direct a~~CSS (I -, 2- and 4- byte
consistency). This similarly appli es to data
transfer between 10 controller and 10 devic es
on Ihe PROFTNF.T 10.
When configuring stations of the distribut~-d
VO w ith three or more than four bytes of user
data, you Can specify th e con.istent user data
"reas. T hese areas are tran, ferred consistent 10
the parameteri~ed target area (e.g. data area in
wo rk memory or proc ess image) u,ing the system functions SFC 14 DPRJ} DAT and SFC 15
DPWR DII.T.
P lease note that the "normal" updating of proc ess image. can be interrupt.. d folluwing each
transmi tted doubleword. An exception wilh
newcr CPUs is tile ,ransfer of user data blocks
for dimibUled 110 using a partia l procc~. image
if the u s", data b locks can be configured as consi"ent using the hardware configuration . You
can also influence th~sc data blo.:;ks in the process image using a direc t access. but you could
also possibly d~"roy the data consistency.
C PU-specific data apply to the maximum size
ofa consistent ar.. a for data transfer with global
data communications. S7 ba s ic communication, and S7 comnmnications through thc op"rming system (s~e Tcchnical spec ification< in
the C PU man llal).
D iagno"ic. data and parameters are always
transferred consi ~tell1ly in data records (e .g.
d,agnosucs data ",nh the SfC 13 DPM RM DG
or SFH 54 RALRM. or parameter data tran.ferre..! \0 and from m odules w ilh the SFB 52
RDREC and SfB 53 WRREC) .

I SIMATTC S7-300/400 Programmable Controller

1.5.4

Bit Memories

The area called bit memories holds what could

be ..,garded "" the controllers "auxiliary wntaetors", !:lit memories arc used primarily for
storing binary signal states . Thc bilS in this arca
can be lTeatcd as outputs, but arc not ".xternalizoo", Bil mcmori~'S are located in the CPU's
system memory area. and is thcrefo.., available
at all times. The number ofbilS in bit memories
is CPU-specific ,
Bit memories are used to store intennediate
results that are valid beyond block \xlUndaries
and are processed in more than one block.
Beside, the data in global data blocks. the following are also available for storing intcnnediate results

o Temporary local data, which are available in

all blocks but valid for the Current block call
only. and

o Static local data. which arc available only in

function blocks but valid o'"cr multiple
block calls.

CPU i~ parameterized. Please rer.,- to Chapter

21,1.4 "Retentivity" for additional infonnation.
Clock

m~m .. rics

Many procedures in the controller require a

periodic signal. Such a signal can be imple.
mented using timers (clock pulse generator).
watchdog interrupts (time-controlled program
execution). or simply by us ing clock memories.
Clock mClllorics consist of bits wbose signal
smles change periodically with a mark-tospac~
ralio of I : I. The bits are combined into a byte,
and correspond to lixed f..,quencies (Figure
1.10). You spedfy the numb<:rofc1ock memory
b its when you parameterize the CPU. Please
Dote that (he updating of clock memories is
asynchronous to cxution of the main program

Clock memory byte

17 1 6 1 5

j41 3 1z l tlol

I 10H~

5 Hz (fllcke<lng light)
2.5 Hz (fast ~as hi ng light)

Retentin bit memories

Part of bit memories may be designated "reten
tive"'. which me""s that the bits in that pan of
bit memories relain their signal state, e,en
under off-circuit conditions. Retentivity always
begins w ith mcmorybyte 0 and end, at the des
ignated location . Retet\\i vity is S<:t when tbe

,",

, ,25 Hz (nuh ing light)

, "'

0.625 Hz (slow flash ing light)

0.5 Hz
F lgur~

1.1n Contents of the Clo<k MclYl{lty Byte

2 STEP 7 Programming Software

2.1

STEP 7 Programming Software

STEP 7 Basis Package

Thi s chapter describes the STEP 7 basic package, Ver;ion 5.4 SP3, Wh i!c Ihe fIrst chap ter
presented an overview o f Ihe properties of the
pTOgmmmable controller, this chapter tells you
how to sel th~se pTOpenies ,
The. basic package contains the statement list
(STL), ladder logic (LAD) and function block
d iagr4tn (FBD) programming languagc"_ Tn
addition to the basic package, optio n packages
such as S7-SCL (Structured Control Language), 57 -GRAPH (sequence p lanning) and
S7-H iGraph (>tate-trans it; on diagram) are a lso
available .

2 .1 .1

ImTaliution

STEP 7 VS.4 is a n_bit application whi ch executes with MS Windows 2000 Profe>sional
with SP4, MS Windows XI' Professional with
S1'2, MS Windows ServcT 2003 S1'2 standard
edition as workstation computer or MS Win_

dows Vista 32-Bil Ultimate and Business. MS

Intemcl Explorer V6 .0 <JC high~T is requi",d
under all op"rating 'ystems You require
administrator privileges in order to in'tall
STEP 7, and yo" m"st be registered at least as
a main "ser in order to work with STEP 7.

who.e size must be at lea S! twice lha! of the

mllln memory.
You should ensure lhere is sullic icnt memory
on the drive contain ing YOllr pr<Jjcct data. The
memory requirements may increase for cenain
operations. such as copyi ng a pmjed.ifthere is
in.uffic ie nt space for the 'wap-ou.] file, eIT<JI"
such 'IS program crash.s may occur, You are
recommended not to Slore th e proje~t uala on
the drive containing the Wind<Jws s wap_out
fi le.
The SETUP program on the CD is used for
instaUation, Of STEP 7 is already factoryinStalled on the programmi ng device , In addilion to STEP 7, the CD also includes, in/a alia,
tb e AUl<Jmation L icense Manager (see Chapter
2. 1.2 "Automalion license Manager") and lhe
STEP 7 electron ic manuals with Acrobat
Reader.
A n MI'l interface is needed for tho <Jn line eonnceti<Jn t<J a programmable c ontroller. The programm ing dellkes have the multipoint inter_
face already bui lt in. but rc, musl be "'trofined
witb an M1'I modu le. If you want to usc I'C
memory cards OT micro memory cards , you will
n eed a pronuner.

Ify<JU wish to w ork rapidly with STEP 7 or pm_

Cess large projects. e .g , w ith sev~ral hundred
modu le s, you should uSe a pmgrarruning dCllke
or PC with up_to_date ptoeessing power.

STEP 7 VS h as multi _user capabilil y, thaI is, a

project tbat is stored, say, on a cen lral ""rver
can be ediled simultan~<Jusly from several
workstation . You make the necessary scllings
in tbe Windows Control .Pan el with th~
"SL"-1ATIC Workstation" program. In tbe dial<Jg 00,.. that appears, you can parameterize the
w"rkstat;on as a s ingle_u.er system Or a multi mer system witb the protocols used,

STEP 7 V5.4 <Jceupies approximately 650 I<J

900 Mfl ou the hard disk depending 011 the
,e<Jpc of installat ion and the number of installed
languages . A swap_out fi le is 81.0 needed.

Dein"allation of STEP 7 is carried OUl wi th the

setup program or in the usual manner for MS
Windows u,ing the "Software-' program in lhe
Windows Control Panel.

2 STEP 7 Programming Softw=

2.1.2

Autum.llon LIcense Manager

A license (right of usc) is required to operate

STEP 7. This consists of the certificate of

license and the electronic licen;;~ key. The
licCIlse key is provided on the license key disk
or a USB stick.
A license key ~an be present on the license key
disk. on a USB stick and on local or networked
hard disks. A license key wi\] only function if it
is present on a hard disk with write acce"" You
use the A"wmalion License Manger to transfer
and administer the license keys . Tn.tallation of
the Automatic License Manager is a requirement for operating STEP 7, You can insmll the
Automation License Manager together with
STEP 7 or on its own.

Thc type of license key is defined in the ccrtificate of liC<.'tlse:

'" Single License
This license is applicable for an unlimited
time. and perrni"ible on anyone computer.
~

Floating License
This liccnse is applicable for an unlimited
time. and provided for procurement yia a
network .

(>

Trial License
This license i, limitcd to 14 days. or to a certain number of days starting with ils in itial
use , It can be used for testing and val idation.

(>

Upgrade License
This li cense permits upgrading of an authorization/license key from a previous version
to the current vLTsion.

During installation of STEP 7, licensing will be

requested if an appropriate license key is not
yet pre~nt on the hard disk You can also cany
out licensing at a later point in time,
The license key is saved on the hard disk in specially identified bl""ks. To prevent unintentional destruction of Ihe licen'" key. please
observe the lnfonnation on the handling of
license keys proYided in Ihe help functionofthe
Automation License Manager

2.1.3

SII\-IATIC M.nager

The SIMAflC Manager is the main 1001

STEP 7: you will find its icon in Windows ,

III

The STMATlC Manager is started by doubleclicking on its icon.

When first started. the project Wi7-&rd is displayed. This can be used for simple creation of
new projects. You can deactivate it with the
check box "Display Wizard on starting the
SIMATlC Manager" since it can also be called.
if r",<uired. via the menu command Ftu; ~
"NEW PROJECT" WIZARD
Programming begins wilh opening or creating a
"project". The example projects supplied are a
good ba> is for familiarization.
When you open example project ZEnO I_09_
STEP7_ Zcbra with Fn.E ~ OP~N, you will see
the split project window: on the left is the snu clUre of me open object (the object hierarchy), and
on the ngbt is the selected objo<-1 , Clicking on the
box conta ining a plm sign in the left window displays additional levels of the stlUerure: sek'Cting
an object in the left half of the window displays
it, cOntCnts in the right halfof the window (Fig-

ure2.1).
Under the SlMAT1C Manager. you work with
the objects in the STEP 7 world. These "Iogica\"' objects correspond to "rear' objects in your
plant. A proj~ct contains th.. entire plant. a sta
tion corresponds to a programmable controller.
A projed may contain sewrnl station. con nected to one another. for example. via an MPI
,ublleL A Slation contains a CPU, and the CPU
contains a program. in our case all S7 program,
Th is program. in tllID. is a "container" for other
objects, g<lch as thc object Blocks, which contains, among othcr things. the compi led blocks.
The STEP 7 object' are connected to one
another v ia a tree structure. Figure 2.2 shows
the most important parts of the tree slIUcrure
(the "main branch'". a. it were) when you are
working with the STEP 7 basic package for S7

application s in offiine view. The objects shown

;n bold type are containers for other objects.
All objcc15 in the Fi!!lIrc nre avuHable to YOll in
th e omine view. These Ire Ihe object;; thaI are
on the programming device's hard disk . If YOllr
programming device is onlinc on I CPU (normallya I'LC u'Tllet system), you cln switch 10
the onlinc vicw by wlccllng VIEW ~ ():.,"1.I1'<1"i.
This option displays yel another projCCt window containing the obj"""t~ on the destination
device; the objects shown in iulies in the FigUre are then no 10ngC!" included.

You can sec from the title bar of the aClive

project window whether you lire working
omine or online. Forele8rer dIfferentiation. Ihe
title bar and Ihe window title elUl be sct to a different color Ihan the om,nc w;ndow. For this
purpose. select OI'TlONS ~ CUSTOl>l1ZE and
modifY the entries in Ihe Vicw tab.
Select OPTtOSS ~ CUSTOl>1t.Zt: to chan!! .. Ihc
SIMATIC Manager's basic scnings. such as Ihe
scssioll languagQ, the archive program and thc
",oragc location for projccts and librari es, and
eonfigurinllthc archive program.

Edi ling sequl"nce.

The following applies for the general edit; n!! of
object"
To selec, an objecl mCanS to click on it <.>nee
with the mouse 50 that it is highlighted (this is
pos~iblc in both halves <>fthe project window).
To name a .. object meallS to click on the name
of the ""lected object (a frame will PI'r>eat
around the name and you can change the name
In the window) or select the menu item EPlT ~
OBI1'= PIlOI'ERTlliS and clliinge the name: in
Ihe dialog box. Willi some o bjeclS sucll as
CPU, you can only change the npme willi the
relevant tool (application), in this case with lhe
Hardware Configuralion.
To open Oil objecl. doublc-click on thai objeC"l.
Iflhe object is a container for other objecl5, the
SIMATIC Manager d isplays Ihe contents oflhe
object in the right half of the window. If the
object i. on the low.".t bierarchical level. Ihe
STh-lATiC \1anager stans the approprilite tool
f.". editing the object (for instancc. doublcclicking on a block starts the editor. allowing
the block 10 be editcd ).
In thi. book. the menu itcmii in th~ standard
menU bar al thc top of the window are describ<.:d

2 STEP 7 PruWummins Software

Con, aine, fo, aU dabl of. programmable conlrolier

MPI P I P PROFI8US,

Sub""'t

e",,,,,jo< tlle ne,wQrk pamm01C,",

Industrial EthlImet

"'tting f",. ,ul",,"

(fiu\"'ionan,;e~

Cont.l"or for.U d ota of

"n,.,; k software)

fl,. SI.\lATIC 3001400 slatlon

Confogura tk><> table

C<><\Iains \he "'{)n!igumtlon <Iota lOt the

,m.,,,,,, ""d the p.mmel"" t?r

,~.

mooules
Con<ol"", for tI,c ,0,,",co<lo," '.bl_

. ,,~

lb. u r prugr.m

OmUli", the dc!i nition. of <1'<'

>rnmun i <.,;on. wnno<;' ions ,
he''''''''''' DOd., in a network

Connectloos

Cootaimr for aU dato of the "5Or p"'gr.m

""'!If\IDC"'' '

Symbol table

Co"'.in~r

for tbe

Con", i"" the

of'rm""l,
(- n.me,) to the ab""luio addI ....,s
of ;;lobol dat.
pro~r.m

.onrco.
C"",.i~ 'he S<>un;" for \he
mer program (~., for STl ailtl
SeL progra,ns)

Source programs

Contain.. for the compiled

pJ'()~ram

User program:
OrgantzaliOrJ bfocI<s
FUl'ICtion blocks
FUl'ICliC'(ls
Data bk>cl<$

Data types

and

. o nll~nratio n

Cont.in 'h comrilO<! <00< ."d

11K ohta

('on ... i" 'he d.!1"jti<m, Qf

u,e::- d.>ta l)'pe"

th~

System lurlctlnns
System functlons blocks

C"","i~

System data blocks

Contain the """'piled daut roc

tho configurntioo Ubie

Variable table$

Co"tain the vari.ble, foc rrwWt(>o";'\j1

' be ~.Il intorf""" for

blocks ,n\egtllled in tho Cl'l)

t~e

2nd modif0nlr

not ."'Iln." to any h.rdw ....

",ilh ,h. """'e ltrue"'" as

an S7 progrom ,hat i, '",igm>.1

'0 hard,,=c

(The undcriinMt objects arc on ly ptesent in the omine data llllOnagemenL)

F igure Z,Z Object Hiera",hy in a STEP i Project

$y,te>n

2.1 STEP 7 !Jui. l'ackage

II~ "Ixro.lor sequence.. Programmers experienced in the usc of the op<:rator interface usc the
icon~ from the toolbar. The u~c of thc riRhi
mf)uS~ blmolf is very dfeelive. Clicking on "n
object uncc with the right muu,;c bunon screcn~
II menu sho ..... ing the Cll""nt editing options.

tion blocks in colijl1nelion with program

conversion)
:. Tl-S7 Convening Rlock~
Contains addhiolial loadable nmctions a nd
function blocks for the TI-S7 converter

> IEC Function Blocks

2. 1.4

Proj ~cn

Contains loadable functions for editing variables of Ihe eomple~ data types PATE_
AND_TL\l Bnd STRING

and lib ra ries

In STEP 7. the "main objects" althe lop of the

object hier-ITchy an: projects and libraries.
Stuning with STEP 7 V~.2, ~ou can combine
projCCt~ and libraries into Ilmhiproj<xts (see
Chapler 2.1.5 Mulliprojects').

I'roJecu are used for the

t>

Communication Blocks
Conta ins loadable functions for controllin g
CI' mo<lules

1>

'ii.celianffiUS Block<
C.IIntains block!; for time SUtmping and time
synchronization

~y~teftUl.lic

storing of
dilla and programs needed for solving an automalion task. E5Sentially, these arc
I>

Ihe halth"are configuratioo data.

I>

Ihe parameterization dala for the modules.

I>

the configuring dala for communicatiot\ via

networks,

t>

the programs (code and data. symbols.

souKes).

The objects in a project life arn.nged hi...-archi_

cally. The opening of. project is the: AAt step
in editing all (subordmate) obje<:ts "hich Ihat
object contains. The following sections discuss
how 10 cditthe<e objC<::ts.
Ll/)rar/e.f an: used for storing reusable progrnm

components. Librarics an.: u'lIlttlized hierarchi~all)'. They may contain STEP 7 pwgmms
which in tum may conmin a USer program (a
coolo.iner for compiled hlocks), container f.llr
source progrnms. and a symbol table_ With the
exception.llf online connecti.llns (DD debugging
plbsiblc). Ihe crealion ofa proiflUll or proiJ1lm
.celien in a library provides the same function_
alily as in an objecl.
As suppl ied, STEP 7 V5 provides the Slmidard
Library containing thc followini: prollTams:

> PID Control Blocks

Cont.ltlns loadablc function
clOS<.'d -loop centrol
t>

block!; for

OrganJ~ation Block,
Contains the templatcs feT the organization
block. (es<enlially the variable declarotion
for the stan in formation)

Yeu will lind an <"'en'iew of the con,ents of

these librarics in Chl!.pu:r 2S "l:ilock Libraries-.
Should )'OU. f.llr c~amplc. pUKhase lID 57 module with standard blocks. the associated installalion progIaIll instails the sllIndard blocks 8.'l a
library on the hard disk. You Can then copy
these blocks from the library 10 your project. A
\ibmry is opened with FILl! -+ OrLO.."': , and can
then be cdited in the same WHy as a project. You
can BI~ creatc y.llur .IIWI'I lohraries.
The m=" ;'CTTl FILl! -+ N~w gencn.. c. a new
obJC<:1 al the top of the objcet hio:rarehy (project,
library). The location in the directory structure
wbe'" Ihc SThiATIC Manager is t.ll create a
project Dr library must be specifi..d under the
menu item OI'T10S~ -+ CUSTOMt7.ll Dr in lhe
"Ncw dialog" ho~

(>

System f unction Blocks

Contains tho: call inl~-rf.c<:s of thc .ystem
blocks for offline pro8fllmming integrated
m the C[,U

The 'I'SfoR T menu is us..d 10 add new obj~''''s 10

c~isting ones (such .s adding a new block 10 a
progr~m). Before doing so, however, you muSI
firsl select the object ~vnUliner in whieh you
want 10 insenthc ncw object from the left half
oftbe SIMATIC Manager wind.llw.

I>

S5-S7 Convening Blocks

Contain.,; loadabl~ functiom fo, the S51S7
convertcr (replacement of S5 standard fune_

You eopy obj~"C1 conlainers and .IIbjects with

EDrr -+ COpy and EOIT -+ PASTE or. as is usnal
willI Wind",.... by dragging the sc lceled object

2 STEP 7 Programming Software

with the mouse from onc window and dropping

it in another. Please note that you cannot undo
deletion of an object Or an object container in
the SI"1ATIC Manager.

2.1.5

Mult ip roject.

In a multiproj ect. proj ..><:IS and librari es arc

combined in an entity. The mult iprojccl allow,
pruc~"sing o f communicat ions conncdiOnl;
such as 57 connections between the projects. A
mulliproject can then be handled almo.t like a
s ing le project. Limitations : stations comlccled
together by means of direc t data exchange
("internode communication") or through global
data communication must be P,,",SCnI in the

Tests & troubleshooting, as wel l as SIMAT IC

on the Internet
Hap ---> CON1EXT-S E..';STTTVE HELP F I provides context-sensitive help, i.e. if you p re ss
Fl, you ge t irl fonnatiorl cOrlcerning an object
selected by th~ mouse or concerning the current
error message.

In the symbol bar, then: is a b utton with arl

arrOw and a questiorl mark . If you di ~k on this
bulton, a questiorl mark is added to the mOuse
poin ter. With this " Help " m OU8e pointer. you
c an now click on an o bj e ct on the scre.:rl, e ,g . a
symbol or a menu command, arld you wi ll gCt
the associated online help.

"arne project,
In a muitiproject. it is possible to carry out paralld processing of ind ividu al projects by vari_

ous

cmployc~s

without problem . The individ

ual projects can be pre,em in different dire<:tories in a networked environment . The croSsproj ect fu nctions, such as thc match ing of ,ub networks and connection.<, are then carn ed oUi
centrally when processing the multiptoj:t, In
the case of central SlOrage on a s erver, only th ~
operaling systems MS W indows 2000 Server
and MS Windows Server 2003 are pcnn;llcd
It is a ls o advantageous to create a muitiproject
if yo " wish to make th e individual proj ects
sm aller and clearer.

2.1.6

Online Help

The SI"tATi C Manager's online help provi des

infonnation you need during your programming se ss ion without the need to refer to hardcopy manuals. You can sele<ot the top ics you
need infonnation on by <~lecrin g the HELl'
menu, The online help option OETT ING
START ED , for instance, provides a brid summary on how to use the S IMATIC Manager.
H EL P ---> CO:-'OEN TS ,tarts the central STE P 7

Help function from any application. This contains all the bosic knowledge, If you click on
the -'Home" symbol in the menu bar (start
page), you will be provid ed with an introdu~
tion to the centra l topi~s of STEP 7: Starting
with STEP 7. Confi guring & programm irlg.

2.2

E d i ting Projects

\Vhen you sct up a project, you create "coma irl erg'" for the rcsuitirlg data, therl you generate the
data and fill these containers , .'Ionnally. you
cr~ate a project w ith the rel e vant hardware.
configuro the hardware, or at Icast the CPU, arld
receive in return containers for the user program. However, you can also PUl an S7 program d irectly into the project conmirler withom
involving any hardware at all ).jete that irlitial izing o f tho modules (address modificatiorls.
CPU settings, c on fi guring COrlnections) is po ssible only with the H ardware Configuratiorl
tool
We strongly recomm end that the entire proj ect
editing process be carried out using the
SIMATIC Manager. Creating, copying or deleting dire~\Ori es or files as well as changing
name< (') witb the Wirldows ExplOl"<'r within
th e Slmcture o f a project carl cause problems
with the SI1>tATIC M anager,

2.2. 1

C r eating P rojects

Project "izard
The STEP 7 Wizard helps you irl crcatirlg a new
projecl . You specify the CPU us ed and the w izard c reates for you a p roject with an 57 station
an d the s c1ecl ed C PU as we ll a.\ an S7 program
container, a SOurce comainer and a b lock cot)tainer w ith th e selected orgarl izatiOrl block...

2.2 Edilinll J>roje<:ls

''''cw plI.orrcr WIZNW.

the hanlwa~ configuration. the open station

no" al$O shows the CPU .

CrT.Unlt a

When it configuTl:s the CPU. the StMATIC

Manager also c~ate s an S7 program with all
obj~ls. The project StruCture is now ~ornpl etc.

You

~Iart

Ibe

proj~1

proj~et

wi zard using fILE .....

"ilh th e 57 stllll"n

If you ,,'anI 10 ~r~ale a project "",an<lally'. Ihis

OUllincs tbe nessary ICI;ons for you.
You will find general infonnalion on oper.lIor
enlri~ for objCCl edillng in Chaplet 2.1.3
"SIMATIC Managd' .
s~clion

C....aring a "e"'proj'",,1
5d~1 F u.E ..... NEW. enter a name in the dialog
box. change the type and siorage lor;&l;on if
n~e$~pl)'.
and confinn with "OK" or
RETURN,
/nsenil'R a nrw station in II,,, project
S~ICCI

the proj~t and insert .. suuion wilh

I:-SERT ..... STATIO:- ..... Sl\IATIC 300 ST,\TIO:(in Ibis CaR an 57-3(0).
Confi!,.",rill!:" ~1"tjQlI

Click on the plus box next to the project in Ihe

lell half of the proj~t ""ndow and .elKt the
statio,,: the Sf'iATIC Manager display, the
Ilardwan:: object in the ri~t hal r of the wmdow.
Doubl eelicking on H"",/wur-e starts the Hardware Con tlguntlion 1<>(11. with which you edit
Ihe ,"nfiguration tables.
If the module catalog is nOI OD the scree". call
it up wilh VIEW ----> CATALOO.
You begin cunfiguring by selecting the rail with
tbe mouse, fur instance under "SJ,\L\T1C 300"
and "RACK 300". "holding" it, d'dggini it \0
tile free ponion in the upper luM of the $talion
"-;nd",,, and " Iening it go" (drug & drop). You
tllen oce .. table rcpreSt.'Uling the SIOI8 01\ thc
mil.
Next. "clect tile requi~d modules from (he
module ~~talog and, using the pro<:~'<Iun::
descrilxd above. drag and drop them in thc
appropriatc $IOts. To enable funbcT OOllinl of
tile proje<;l Strw;ture. a 5tation requires at le35t
one CPU, for instance t h~ CPU 314 in slot 1.
You can Rdd al1 othcr modules later. Editing of
lbe hardware configuration i8 di,;cussed ;n
<iel8il i" Ch~pter 2.3 -Conllguring Slations".
SIO~ and compile the station. th= clo", and
rerum to Ihe SlMAT1 C Manager. In addition 10

17.....;ns Ihe com"n/! o/IM S7 program

Open the CPU; in the right half of the proj~'C1
",indo"- you ,,;11 sec the symbols for the S7
prog"am and for the connection whle.
~n the 57 program: the SIMATIC "1anager
displays tbe .ymbol. for the compil ed user program (tbe compiit,d blocks). the container fO<'
the source prognrnu. and the symbol tablc in
[he right balfofthc window.

Open the user "rogrnm (Bloch); the SIMATIC

Mannier d i~plays the symbols for the compiled
configuration data (Syslem dalo) and Btl emply
orvanizsllOD blor;k for the main program (OB
I) in the ngh! halfofthe window.
Ed/ring user progr"''' objects
We have now arrived at !he lowest level of the
object hierarchy. The first lime: 08 I is ol,,:ned.
the window with the objcct properties is displayed and the editor newed 10 edit the program In the organi~ation block is opened. You
add anotber em pty block for incremental editin g by opening lN~[RT ..... S7 BlOCK -+
(Blocb must be highliahted) and scl~ting the
requi~d hlock type from the lisl provided.

\\1I<:n opened. the .s)'~I"'m dmo object shows a

list o f uvuila ble system dnla blocks. You receive
The compiled con fi guration datu. Thes~ fy stem
data blocks are editW via the llarm."r;: ohject
in th~ eomai""r .varlo". You can lfIIlUlfc-r SJ'~
lem dala to the CPU with PlC ----> DOw:-rwlill
and paramcterize the C PU in this way.
The objCi container 5oll":"" is empty. With
Snurc~ selected , you can ~elecl I'<SIlII.T ..... 57
SOI'T\\AItE ..... STL SOLlI.CI! IU irl,ert an empty
.0\lfCC text file or you CIlD select lNS(Jt T ---->
E.'Cl FR'iAL SouRCE to 1JltlI.rer a source leKt file
created, <ay, with another editor in ASCII format \0 the 5olirce< container.
Crutlng. proJeCI without pn S7 ftlllon
If you wish. yoo can create a program witbou\
first having 10 confillu~ a station. To do 50,
generate the cont ainer for your provarn your-

2 STF.P 7 PruIlTII.mmin, Soft",'.",

~I[ Sele<:tthe projcetllmll!'~l1ernte an 57 progrnm with Il-SER1 ..... I'1\OO~M ..... 57-PROU1\A.\1, UndCT Ihis S7 program, Ihe SIMATIC
Manag~r ereat~ the objecl contairICMI So"rce,~
and Bloc-la, Blocks eOD ... ill5 un empty OB I ,

CITa lin g a library

You can also ~.te program under a library.
for in~tat>l.'<.: if you "ani \0 usc it more than
once. In thi~ way. the standard program i~
a1",-a)'S avsilable and y"" can copy it enti: or
in part into your current program.
Please Dote Ihut yuu ell!llWt ~tabli~h online
coMCCtiuos in ~ libnuy. which mean~ Ihat ynu
cun debug a STIlP 7 program only wilhin a
project.
2.2.2

J\lanwglnll'
An:bJvlnS(

~t'()IIIYnl/.lnw

The SIMATIC MRnager

and

ma;ntain~

a list of all

known "main object~". arrangcd I,ccording to

user proje<:ts, Hbrurin, example projects ~Tld
multiproject . You in.t,,)\ the examrle rroject<
""d Ihe srand~rd tibr ..ric~ in conjunc tion wjtb
STEP 7 and you install the u~er proje<:ts, th~
muhiprojeets and your own libraries yourself.
When yuu c~ccute FI\.F ..... MANM;E, Ibe
SIMAllC Manager ~how.' you ~ Jist of all
k.nown projecl5 and libraries wilb nHme und
path. You Can then deletc from the li~t projects
or librnrie~ y"" no lonll~r want to d isplay
("Hide') or include in Ihc list new pl"ojcs and
libraries ("Display").
When il executes f ILE ..... RJ:.oRnANlZE. Ihe
SIMATIC M IUlaIll"f c1imin~teli thc saps created
by dd~-tions and opl;m;n:s dat.a memory similarly to the way a deftagmen ... tion propm
optimiz~ the: da ... memory on the hard di.le.
Tbe rcorgani~ation can take some time.
d"pcncling on the dat& mo,'crnerus involved.
You can al.o archive a project or library (Fu_"
.... A R('HlVF;). In this case. the STMATIC Manag~r

storc$ the selected object (the project or

library dire<:tory wilh all subdirectories and
tiles) in compTl:ued fonn ;n an =biv" file.

From STEP 7 VS.4 SPJ, Ih e archive prolP"am

PKZip VS.6 CLI is supplied for arch ivin8 and
dearcb iving proj~"CtS ~nd libraries (the archive

progrnm ARJ.cxe is not suitable for MS Wi n00"'" Vista). You can ulso open A RJ archives
....i'h PKZip V8.6 CU.
Projecr.. and libraries cannot be edited in tbe
"",hi>'w (compressed) st~tc. You can unpack
an archiv~d object "~th Fll.E ..... RI1UEVE and
then you can edit it further. The rctrieved
objccts ~TC automatically ac<.:cplcd mto Ibe
project or libmry management ~tem.
You make the .-.cUing. fot archiving and retriev_
ing on the .. ATChi,...... tab undCO' OPTIONS -+
CL'STO~I1Zr;; e.g. setling the tarset d irectory for
archiving and rclrie .. ing or ''Generate arch ive
palh aU1omatically~ (then no addilional specificatinns are rc-quircd when archiving hceause
the DIme o f the archive file is genernted from
Ihe pmjecI name) .
Anbivlng a project in the CPU
With the "Ppro priatcly de, igned CPU . you

~"n

'l<>Ie " project in archived (comp ..... . ed) form in

the load m~'lllory of the CPU, \hat j,. Oil th~

memory card. Tn this way. you ~a" save all
pIOj~ct data ~ircd for full eXe<:u tion of the
uSeT P"Opam, such as ~y mb[)b or !IO"rce fole~,
direct at the machine or plant. If it i>e<:omel
oe<:e ..ary to modify [)T supplemenT the progT'dIIl, y[)U load the locally Stored data QtlIO the
h~Td di 'k, correct the uscr progr:om, a nd ss .. e
the up_to_date ptoj<:C1 data aKai n 10 the CPU.
loading lhe proje<:1 data onto a memory
~3rd or micro memory .ard plugged into tho:
CPU, open the proje<:t, mule the CI'U and
scle<:t PLC ..... SA\'E TO fo.IDlORY CARD. In the
reverse direction, lransfer the siored data ~k
to the progrnmming device with PI.C .....
RFTltTl'vJ; t'ROM MEMORY C.o.RD_ l'1ease note
Iha' when you write to a memory card plugged
into the CPU, the entire eontenL~ o f tbe load
memory IlR" ",TitlC1l 10 the CPU. including the
.' Y"tcm data and the user P"'l7"m .
\\"h~n

Tfyou ,,"ant 10 fetch back thc projcctda ... SIOred

on Ihe CPU without ereatinK a projecl on the

hard d isk, <ekel the n:lcvam CPU with PLC ....

DISPLAY A=SS!9lE NODi'S . If the memory
canl i, plugged imo the module rttt..-ptacle of
the pro wamming device . .-.c lcct tb" memory
card wilh Fn.[ ..... S7 Mf.MORY CARD ..... OPIlN
before tran.ferring.

2.2 Editing Pmjo:<:l$

2.2.3

Proj eCf Version s

Since STEP 7 VS has become availabk. Iberc

are three diffc['l:ru "ersiolt5 of SL\fAT1C
pmjetts. STEP 7 VI creales version 1 projO"Cts.
ST EP 7 V2 creal ~s version 2 projects, and
STEP 7 V3!V4IVS.O can be used to create and
edit both v.... ion 2 and '~I'$ion 3 projects. Wilb
STEP 7 (rom venion VS .I . you C~n create and
ed it V3 projectS and V3 libraries.
If you IuIvc a vcrsion I project. you can couvert

Up to STEP 7 Ven;ion 5.3 you can comCTt a V I

proj.ct to II V2 project with FlU, -+ OrEN \11::11.510N I PROJI:CT . With fILE

-+ OPEN. you can

open a V2 project and oonvert il iO a V3 project.

I! is DOL possible to ereate a V2 project OT save

a project as a V2 project.
2.1..1

C fi!ltlng a nd cd ll ing m u l1iproj ...... "

u.ing Fn.E -+ NIoW you can crente a new mulliproj....,t in Ibe SIMAT1C Manager in which
~Muhiproj....,f'

it into a """,ion 2 projett with F1L -+ OI'D>

you <elect

VliRS10'l I I'ROJECf. Thc project StruCture ...ith

th e programs, Ihe comp iled version I bloch ,
the STL soun::c programs. Ihe symbol tabl e and
tIM> hard"llrc c<miiauralion remain unchanged.

101100". With the multiproj....,t Klectoo. you can

then gcnc1"Btc a new project or a DCW library in
the mulLiproject noing Fn.E -+ Ml:U1 PROlt:CT
-+ CREATE IN ~1ULTU'ROIECT. You Can pmSII
the OC\\ Iy crealed project or libnlry a. described
in the previous ~haplen , Using FILIo -+ MU1.TI_
PROJECT -+ INSEII.T INfO MULTIPROJECI' you
can incorponlle exiSlin~ projecl~ Ind libniries

YOll Clln create and edit venion 2 pmjects wilh

STEP 7 versions V2, V3, V4 and V5,O (Figure
1.3). STEP 7 V5.1 works only with "crsion 3
proj""lS .

Os the t)'1X' in the dia.

into the mUhiprojccl.

"

2 STEP 7 I'rogrammini:C Software

You can a l$O chminate projecl' and libnLri;:s

agam from the mulliprojccl: marl: I~ projeclS;
library. 8f1d !It'lect Fn.1i ---.. hluLnPROffiCT-+
Rl:.MOVI! fROM MUlll1'ROJECT. The project ot
library is nOI deleted in Ihis process.
Usi n.: f lU: -+ M UlT1PRO]ECl -+ ADm~T
PROJECTS you can stan a wizard which .Iupfl<ln$
you in the matching of CTO""proj ect CO r1ll eClions and when comb ining s"bnets (Chapler
2.4 .6 'M alching Pr"j CC15 in a M ulliproject").
You can identifY One "fth;: libraries in u multiprojcct as the "ma.lter dala library' \Ising FlU:
-+ MUl1U'ROJ~l"T -+ DF.rn-"EASMASTHt DATA
1.IlIRARY. Tbi:i contains., fot example, the commoo blockll of the pmjects in this mul[iproj"t.
This libnory must th~n only tOlltain one singJ;:
S7pro~.

The mCflU cOlIlllllllllls FILE __ SAVt:AS. FILE-+

Rr.oRClA).,'flF, FR.b -+ k iANAGE and FILE -+
ARCHIVIl can also be u>ed on a muhiproject.
and runction as wilh a sing:le project (~cc t:huptcr 2.2.2 "Managing, Reorganizing: and
Mhiving'). In the same manner. archived mult iprojl~tJ can be transferred to the load m~mory
ofa ~orrcspond ingly desigocd CPU, Then: ar~
limitalions when archiving a multiprojecl
whose comPQII;:ln~ are di stributed among nelwort drives.

2.3

Cunfiguring Stations

You UiIC the Hardwatt ConfigumfJon 1001 to

plan your programmabl~ controllers configuralion. Configurin.: is carried out umine without
connection 10 the CPU. You can also use th is
1001 to addrc~~ and param~teri~~ the modules.
You can Cl'eale Lhe hardware oonfigurntion at
the planning stagc or you can wait umil the
hardware has already ret.'Il installed.
You stan the hardwlll'e confill"f8.tion by sdectiug lhe ~tat;on and then EDIT ..... 01'9' OIlJ~CT
or by oouhle-clicking 0fI the HanlHv~ ubi""
in the opened container SIMA TIC JO(M()() Sta
lion. You make t~ basic sening.< of Ib\; Iw'tlware configuration wiLh OPTIONS -+ CUSTOM\.L1l.

Whrm configuring has berm completed, ST ....

nON -+ CONSJSTer-'t"Y CHECK will show you

wheth~ your <:limes well' free of e lTOrs. STAllOS ..... SAVE stores t~ configuration "'bl.-.;
with all parameter lWIignm~nl data in yoor
project on the hard diu.

STATION --> SAVE o\l'o"D CO~II'Iu! I\Ot only saves

hut al<o compi le [he oonfiguratiOn tables and
store~ thc ~ompikd data in the $y.'u,m dma
object ill the ottline conta iner 8/(>ck.<, Aficr
compilinl!, you can tr;msfer the config\\ralion
data to 8 CPU with PLC -+ L>oWr-LOAl.l. The
r>bje~t Sy~rem dam in th~ online contaiocl
81ucks n:presents the current confi.:unllion dala
otI thc CPU. You can '"return th~"SC rJ~tH [0 the
hard diu with PLC __ UPLOAtI.
You uport the data oftbe h.ardW8I"C cunfiguralion ....ith STATION .... t:.xI'ORT. STEP 7 then
creates a file in ASCII format that contains the
configuration dala and parameterization data of
tl1.e modules. You can cl1.OOlSC between a texl
fonnat that conta;'l. Ihe daLII in 'readable'
English. charncters, Or a comp8l'1 format with
hexadecim al data. You can also impon Ii cOlTespondingly structured ASCII filc.
Ch N:k sum
Hardware Configuration g~"fICT'\Itu Ii
via a cOlTCCtly compiled ~tat'otI and
~to~s it in the ~ySlem data. Identical system
~"Onfigurations have the samc checksum so that
you can. for example, easily cumpare an online
conJigUllition ".'!h an offline configuration.
The

ch~lcl;um

The checksum i. a property of the S,"SIcm daln

To read the ch~"<:ksllm. Opel'lthe Blocks

obj~(.

cuntain~r in the S7 proa:ram. IOelect the Sy.otem

dara objcct and open it with EL:lIT -+ OPE.."I
OWlCT.

The user program also has an appropriate

checbum , You can fi nd thi~ alons with the
checbum of the system data in Ib.t properti~~
o f Bloch: select the BlQCb container and then
EDJT -+ ORJECT PR01>F.ltTII:.S on the "Check~um5"mb.

St illon ... indow

When oproed. the Hardwa~ Configuration
displays Iht .tation window and the hardware
call1iog (Figure 2.4). F.n1"'l!e or maximizc the
.1ation wimlow 10 facilitate editing. In t~
"'PIX'r section, it displays thc 57 slati ons in Ihc

2.3 Confil/Uring Stations

Hi" ....

l.~

Example of. Sta';<ln Window in the Hanh, ..... ConfiI\Jra,ion

form of tables (one 1"" mOUntinll rack) that are

<:onnected together via iOlcnace modules when
severnl mounting rach are uS! Wben distrib.
uted UO is conne<:ted, tbe confillur"t.ion of the
Dr master system or the PROFINET TO sy'"
te'n ;s specified. with Ihe OP ~lation' and TO
devices represented in Ihe fonn of symbols.
The lower section of the station window sho",~
Ihe configuration table that gives a d~tailed
view of th<: rack or OP slave selected in the
upper "",ction.

InSlalllnl b udwan <lpd.tn

\\1m Omo'~ -+ ISS'fAll II W UPDA"ffiS you
con update components for the hanlwan: callllog. In the followinJl: dialog.~. Klcct whether
}Oll wish to download the update from the
Internet or copy it from a CD , Enter the Tntemct
address 8nd the save path , By clicking the
Inslall" bunon, the Hardware Confi gurntion
transfers me data into the hardwan: catalog.

Product SU ppOM inform ation

H a rdWlI rt u tal"g

You can faue the hardware catalog in and out

with VllW ----jo CATA1.OO. 11 conta ins all avail_
able mO<lnting rach, modules and intm"ce
~uhmodulcs known 10 STEP 7. With OPTIU~S
-+ EDIT CATALOG PRO~tlE, you CKn compile
your ow'o hardware catalog that sllows only the
modules you waDI to ",or\< wilh - in the stJUC:tun: you select. Ry double-clicking on the lille
bar, you can "dock" the hardware catalog onto
the right edge of the station window or release
it again,

With HELP -+ PRODUCT !';VPI'OIlT u,"FORM.<.you can display infonnat;on from the
[mernet for tbe sckctcd module. You muSI fint
enllblc this function with OPTIO"S -+ CUSTOMII I and set a valid Intcrnet addre8s. Thc
selected module can be in the hardwan: catalog
Of already in the configun:d rack.

TlON

Co nn gur.tloD t.ble
The Hardware Confilllll'lllion 10Ql works with
tables that tach represent an S7 station (a
mounting r~ck), a DP stalion o r an 10 device. A

2 5TF:P 1 Proll",mming Soft"......,

C(lnfigurafion tahle shows Ibc: slots with tbe
modules ammg<:d in the slotJ; or the propeT1ie~
of the modul" such as Ibc:ir addn:ss<:s Ind
ordcrnumbcrs. A double-click on a module hne
opens the properties window oethe module and
allows Jnl1Imeter1zation of the module.

properties for \bf; n::le'"lInt rnQdules in the

tab. If )'<IU deselect the option
~Sysu:m default" in \his lab for S1-300 modules. you can ehanKe the module liddTCllscs.
When dning so, pl.,ase ob$crve the add\"C!lsing
rules for S7-300 ami S7-400 syStems as well as
the addressing capacity of the indi~idua\ mod~Addn::s>cs~

u\ c~.

2.J. I

Arrlnglng Mod ules

You begin configurin g by s<; lcctinii and "holding" the rail from the module catalog. for
instanc~ under "S!MATIC 300" and "RACK
300". wit h the mouse, dragging it 10 the upper
half of the 'fation window, and dropping i1 anywhen:: in that window (drag & drop), An empty
eontigun.tion table is screened for \bf; central
rack. NCOICI, 5Clce1 the required module! !Tom
the module eafalog and, in the manner
o:k:seribed above, drag and drop them in the
appropriate ,10\5. The perrni>sih!e slolll have _
g~n background. A "No Parking" symbol
te ll s you cannot drop the sdcc\cd modu le at the
intcnded ,lot.
You can abo mark the slot to be equ ipped. and
sclt(:t IN5~Il.T -+ INSERT OBJECT. In a popup
window, !he Hardware Configuration then
shows you a ll modules penni.sihle for thi, slot.
from which you can selC'Ct otIC.
In the case of!ingle-tler S7-300 stations, slot 3
remains empty; it is reserved for the immaee
module 10 the expansion mck,
You can generate the eonfigunt.tion table for
another nck hy dragging the scle<:ted raclr:: from
the e8talo& and dropping it in the sumon ,,'indow. In S1-400 systems, a non- int~onflCeted
nick (or more precisely: the relevant rei"e
interfnce module) is assigned an interface via
the "Link" tab in the Pro!>"rt;" s window of a
Send 1M (select module and EDIT -+ OS/ECT
PROPERTlI:S).

The llmonscment of distributed 1,0 stations is

ckseribed in Chapter 20.4 "Communication ~ia
Distributed 110".

2.J.2

AddTf'Mlne. Module.

When ammging modules. the Hardware Configuration tool automatically assips a module
~tart address. You can view this addn::ss in the
lower half of the stalion window in the object

Then:: are modu les that have both inputs "nd

outpUtS for which you enn (thwn.:t ically)
reserve different start addresses. Howc~cr.
ple~ note carefully the spec ial information
pro~idcd in the product manuals; the large
majority offunct:ion and communications modules n::quin:: tbc same start address for inputs
and outputs.
When assigning the module Still address on the
57-400, you can also make the USii"TnCDt \0 a
subsidiary process image. If there i. more than
nne CPU in Ihe central I'llck. multiprocessor
mode i. automati cally ~et and you must assign
the module to a CPU .
With VTEw -+ ADDRr.SS OV IlIl.VtllW. you get a
window containing all the module ~ddres,cs
currently in us., fOT the CPU !eleeted.
Modules on the MP[ bus or eommunicalions
bus ha"e anMPI addn:s~. You may also change
this address. Note. howe,.,r, that the neW MP!
addre .. bornes effective as $OOTI as the oonfiguration data are transf=ed to the CPU.
Symbols for USCr d ata add F"flSCS
[0 the Hardw,.,-e Cnnfigul'llllon 1001, you o;:a.n
ItSsign to the input. and outputS symools
(name.) th.t an:: transferred to the Symbol
Table.

After you have arranged and addressed the digitsl and analog modulu, you save the station
data. Then you >clect th~ module (line) and
EDIT -+ SYMBOLS. In tlte window that !hen
OpenS, you <:an assign a symbol. a data type ami
a OOmm=t to the absolute address for each
channel (bit-by-hil foc digital modules and
word-by-woo-d for analog modules).
The "Add Symbol"" button enten the absolute
addresses as symbols in piKe of the &Iolute
address" without symbols. The MApply" bu!ton trans fers the .ymools inlO the Symbol
Tablc . "OK"' also closes the dialo& box.

2.3 Configuring Stauon.

2.3.3

I'n. m ~terldnlt

Modul""

When you p8!"lUTlCCleritt a module. you define

ilS propen;H. It is necc"",ry to parnmeleriu a
module only whcn you Want to change Ihe
default parameters. A requirement for parametcriution is thatlhe module is I<)<;at...:! in a configumtioo t.able.
Double-did; on the module in the <,;onfigl.lTlllion table or !le1ccttbc module Bnd then EDlT-+
OIlJECT PROPERTIES. Several tabs with tht
~pecifiable parameters for this module are displayed in the dialog box. W~n you use Ihis
metbod 10 paramCleri7.e a CPU. you arc ,pecitying lite run characteristics of )'Our uSet" pro-

,= .

Some modules allow)'ou to liet their parameters

at runtime da tile U5Cr prolj:nuJ1 with the system
functions (5 Chapter 22.S.2 "System Blocks
f.,.. Module Parametcri:vmon").

their MPI addtnscs. If you do nol want to

assiJl11 a name yourself. you can, for <o~ample,
ebange the d~faul( identifier from ''CPU
:ux(l)"" 10 "C PU:ux(n)" where "n" is equ"lto
the MP! address
When uliigning the MI'l address. please also
take inlo accounl me possibility of connecting a
programminll device or openttor panel (O r) to
the MPI n"""oB at a later date for seTvice or
mainteMn~c put"f'OSCs. You ~hould connect pcrmanently iru;talled prollrnnuninll devices or
OPs direCT 10 the MI'l networK; for plugi n
dC"icn via a spur line. there is an M P! connector with a heavygaullc threaded-joint soekeL
Tip: reser.. c addTess 0 for a scrvicc prognmtming dcvice, address I for a serviee 01' and
address 2 for a replacement CPU (COTTespo nd.
to the dcfault addr~S5eli).

!.3.~

2.3.4

Networking Mndules wllhMPI

You define the nodes for the MP! snbsidiary

(su.lmcl) with the Module Propenics. Selectlhe

CPU. or the MPI interlace card if the CPU il

equipped wilh nne. in Ihe confIguration table
and open it wi!h EDIT -+ OIlJECT PROrERTlF~.
The dialog box thai then appc= containli the
"Propenics" button in the "Interfacc" box orthe
"General" \.lib. If you dicit 00 Ih .. button yoo
arc I8k~n to another dialog bo~ with a "PPrtlmt ter" tab where you can find Ihe suitable ~ubnet .
Th is i$ al so an opponunity to ,et the MPI
address lhal you have provided for this CPU.
Please nole that on older S7-300 CPUs. FMs or
CPs wilh MP! eOOrICCllOO automatically
receivc an MI'l addres. derived from the CPU.
The highest MPI address mUSt be grealer than
or <.-qualto Ille highest hlP! address usignc<.l in
the subnel (take accounl of automatic as .. ,n
ment ofF~b and CPs!). II must have the same
value for all nodes in the subm1.
Tip: if you hav<o se veral stal;ons with the same
!ypC of CPUs. assign different names (identifi
e.... ) to Ille crus in the d,iferem ,talions. They
aU ban Ihe name ~CPU:ux( I )~ as default iIO in
the subnel they can only be differentialcd by

i\l cmitorinlil and Modifying

l\tudul~

Wilh the Hardware ConfigUntlion , you Can

carry o ut a wiring checK of the macbine or 1'1"",
,,';thOUI the u,er progntm. A fC"qum.mcnt for
this is that the programming device is con"ecl...:! (0 st.alion (mime) and Ihe configuration h~~ be~n saved. ~ompiled and loaded inlo
the CPU. Now you can nddrcss every digilal
and analog module. Select a module Rnd then
plC -+ MONITOR/MODIfY. andsetlhe Monitor
and Modify opentting modes and Ihe trigger
eondll;ons.
Wilh Ihe "'Status Value" bUllon . the Hardware
Configura!iQII shows you the signal stales or the
values o f the module channels. The "Modify
Value" buttoo ",ritcs the value specified ;n the
Modify V.lue column 10 tlH: module.
If t~e "'110 Display" chl'CKbox is active, the
peripheral inputs/output. (modu le memory) are
disp layed instead ofthe i"puts/outputs (process
image). "The "Enable p~Tlph. Outputs" chl'Ckbox revoke. !he OUtpUl d..able of the outpul
modules If tbe CPU !I in STOP mode (see
Chapter 2.7.5 "Enablinl! P""";pheral Outputs").
You can find olher methods of monitorinl! and
modifying inputs and Qutpuli in Chapters 2.7.3
'l\.1Q11iloring "nd Modifying Variables" and
2.7.4 "Forcing Variables".

"

2 STEP 1

2.4

Pro~1IlIIlinB

Software

Confil:urlng Ihe :'Iiet".-ork

ba~it ror ~onununicalion, ,,';!h S1MAT1C

is the nc:tw9r1<ina of t~ 57 stiuions, The
Il'qui~ objccts are the subnets and the modules with communications capability in the sta(ions. You can create new subnc15 and stalionJ

The

wit h the S IMAT tC Manager within the project

biuBrc hy. You (hen add the modules with communications capability (CPU. and CPs) USing
the Hardwa~ Configuration 1001; at the same
lime. you I15sign the communication, interfaces
of these modules to a subnet. You Ihen define
the communications relatioRJIbips bnwo
these module, theconnedions - wilh the Network Configuration 1001 in the connection
lable.
The Network Configuration tool allows graphical representation and documentation of lhe
CQn fiillrcd networks and \heir nooe" You can

also croate all !I(X;cssary ,ubnets and stalions

wi lh the Network Configuration tool; then you
nS3 ign th e stati ons to the subncts and pdr~mc'
teri7C Lhe node propenies of Ibe modules with
communications capability,
You can proceed as folio.,...,. to define the com
nllmications relationships via Ihe networkina
confi&uration tool:

NETWORK --> SAVE "''<'5 an incomplete Net""ork Configuration. You can cheek the con!isteney of a Network Configun.tion with NET
WORK --> CONSISTE..'-JCY CUECK, You c1~ the
Network Configuratioo with NETWORK -->
SA VI! A."D COMPIlE.
!'Jdwor k window
To start the Network COnfiaUrtllion, you must
have create d a project. Toa;etber with Ihe
project, the 51l\IATIC Manlger automatically
creates an MPI .subncl.
A double-click on thi5 or anyOlher subnet staru
th.e Network Configunlion. You can also reach
the Net,,'Ork Configuration ir you open the
Connectioru object in the C I' U container.

In the upper section, the NetwoO: Con figun..

tlon window shows all previously Cfated ~ub
nets and stations (nodes) in the project with the
configur~d connections (Figure 2.5) ,
The cOIU'e<: !ion table is displayed ;n the lower
sec tion oflhe window if n module with "communicalionscapabilityH, e.g. an 57-400 CPU, i5
selected in the upper section of the window.
A second window displays the network object

ca"log with a selection of the available

S!)-lATiC lations, subnets and DP stations.
You can rade the catalog in and out with Vlf'w
-+ CATALOG and you can "dock'" it onlO the
ri&ht edge of tbe network wLOOow(doubledick
on the title bar). With VIEw _ ZOOM II", VII,,,,
..... ZooM O UT and VlliW _ ZOO:.t f ACTOR ....
you ca'l adjust the clarity of tile graphical representat;on,

f>

Open the M I'l subnet created 11$ scandard in

the projCCt cootaincr (ifit is DO Innaer IvailIble, 8imply create a ne'" suhnet willI
1l"5ERT _ SUII:>CIET).

c>

Use the :-"elwo"" Configuration 1001 to C~

ate the necessary . talions and - if required funher sl.lbnets.

po

Open the station. and provide them with Ihe

modules with commun icalion! capability.

2.4.1

po

Connect the modules with the relevanl subnelS.

StI~cIIO I:

I>

Adapt the ne\Work parame1C1"!1. if DeIBry.

c>

Oefine the commuoication connections in

Ihe connection lable, ifrequiTed.

You can .lso configure global data communications wilhin the Net ....ork Configu"'tion: $Clect
the MPI liubnet and then r.ele<:t Opno:-;s ...
O~ft:-'I! Gl.olIAl DATA (see Chpter 20,j"Global Data Communication").

Configuring th e ,,",f two rk

lind

arran glnlllh~

VI~w

(omponentl

You begin the ~etwork Configuration by

nlectina; I suboel that you selftl in the cataloa;
,,;tb the mouse, hold and draa; to the network
window. The suboel is represented in the win
dow as II bnrizontal line. Impermissible polIi_
tions are mdicatcd wilb II "prohibitcd" sign on
Ibe moUse pointer.
You proceed in the !>ame way fOf th~ d~sireG
stat ions. at fi !"$1 without connect.on to the sub-

.,

..
.
r:=0i-:. i ;;;;;;'
'..-..
.. ...........

lor ... .. .,.

m ",-

,-

-\""

".....

..... . ... ...... -0

-';;' ''.1._

.. "'
"

..l _~ "

. .J _

net. Tbe stations arc ,till "empty" , A doubl~

elicit un a stallOD opens the Hardware Configu
ratinn tool allowinll you to configure 1lI0 SIIUon
or a1 least the module(s) with nelwurk conn~c
lioD. Save the station and rerum In the Net ..... ork
Configuration_

Th e interface of a module .... ith communi.:a[;Olu; ~apabil;!y is represemed in the Nem'orl<

Confiaur;r.lion as a small box undcr the module
vicw, Click on this box, hold and dlllg ill<) the
...,!evaot subneL The conncction In the saboel is

-.

" :::11'_
"
--'''
...1<'_
-, -",,,,,,,

--

. .1 -""'''''
.
. >'0 J _

>-

is=-

represemcd as ... ,erticall ine.

p~

......

in exactly the s.ame way wilh aU other

You Can move cnated subnels and S!arions in

the network window. Tn this way, >'00 ean al..,

represent your hardware cun figu!'\Ition visually_

Under cenain cin:wrutances. you itl a clea ......
and ~ con.paCl ImmgC11l<'nt If you t't'duce
reprosc me<l subnet lenaths with VIEW .....
REDUCW SU II:'>"ET tl:.....Gnts.

S.-n ina; cO nlrnllniu lion. propenies

A nOT C"'3.;n8 th~ graphic~1 view. you parame
terize the 'lIbnel>: select the subne~ and then
EDIT ..... OBJECT PROPERTIES . The properties

window that then appcan; indudes Ihe S7 ~ub

net 10 in the "GenenoJ" tab. The !D consislS of
IwO hexadedllllli numbers. the project number
and Ihe ,ubn~1 number. You n:quin: th is S7 ~ub
net 10 if YOIl Want \0 go online wnh the pro~rnmmmg device" "hout suitable projecl in
omer to reach other nodes via the subne!. You
set the netv.'orlr; propct1;C$ in the "Network Set
linlfl"lab. e.g. the data transfer m lc Or the high
est node addr<."is.
When y"u s"I<:<:1 Ibe network connection of a
tlo<k. you Can define the network. propcnies o f
the node "';Ih EDIT ..... OI!JEC"T PROPI:RTIES.
e,g. , Ihe node address MId the subnet it is connected to. Dr YOII can create a new SlIhnc!.
On Ihe "lnll:-rlaces" tab o f lhc station propcnies,
you can sec an overview of all modules with

2 STEP 7 prognomming Softw.,..,

communications capability. wilh Ihc nodc

addresses and the subnel types US4..t
You define !he moduk properties of the node!o
in I similar way (with the same operalor inputs
D.S in the I r ard"'~re Configuratiun 1001).

2.4.2

ConfigurIng alli>clribu led 110 wltll

fhe Network ConfiguratIon

You can only connect an intelligent OP ,lave to

a suboct if you bav~ previously en::nled it (see
Cllapler 20.4.2 "Configuring PROFlHUS
OP"). In Ihe n~...rk object catalog. you can
find the type of imel1iilcnt 01' IiIn,"C under
"A lready created slations; drug it. with the OP
master sclcct~d. to the network window and fill
out the properties windOW that then uppcnl"'l (as
in the Hardware Configuratiol1toolj.

You can aloo use the Network Conligur~lion to)

configun: the distributed 1/0 with PROF"rRUS
OP or PROFNET 10. Sclcrt VlEw ..... WITH DP
SLJ\vLVl O D vrclOs 10 display or Iilde 01.11 Oi>
slaves and 10 devicC"S in the neN"Ork view.

Wi!h VIEW ..... 111G11I. JOIlT ..... YfA~Tr.R SYS"nM.

you emphasize the assignment of the node. ofa
Df' master system; l1rst, you ulcel the master
or II slave o[this master system. With VltW .....
REJ\RR~""GE, the OP slavcs life a!<5igned optically to their OP mast~.....

PROF'IBUS OP

I-'ROHNl:T 10

You require the follow,ng in ullier to configure

a OP maRter ~y.tem :

In order to configure a PROF INET 10 ~YMcm.

yuu reqUIre :

I>

i\ PROFIBUS subnel (i f not already avuil-

Kblc, drug th~ PROFlBUS subn~t frotn Ihe

nelwurk ubjed ~atalog to the network window),
I>

A Dj> m"stcr in a stalion (if nOI aJrclldy

available. drag thc stalion from Ihc nctwork
object ealalog 10 the network window. open
the 51ation and select a DP master wilb the
HardWllre Configuration 1001, either inlegr.lled in the CPU or 8.. an autonomous
mooule).

I>

The:

<;OfIn~"Ction from the OP mastcr to the

PROFmuS suhnet (~ithcr select the subnct
in Ihe Hardwan:: Configuratiun 1001 or ehek
on the network connection lU!he OP ma.<ter
in rhe Network ContigUflltion, "hold" nnd
drng to the PROFm"L-S nClv.ork).

In Ihe network window, seleC1 the Dr ma!Oter 10

whicll Ihe dave is 10 ~ assigned. find the OP
sllOve in the network object calalog under
"P ROFmUS UP" and the relevant suiH>lItlilog.
d!":lg it to the network window and fill 01.11 the
propcnies window thaI "ppea",.
Yo u panuneteru:e the 01' slave by ~~I~C1iDg it
and then !lel~cting J:;J)fT ..... OrEN OBJECT. Th~
Hardwanl Configunuion is started. Now you
can ~et the user data addresses or. in the case of
modular lilaves. select the lIO modules (~e
Chnpter 2.3 "Contiguring Stat ions).

"

I>

An Industrial Ethernet subnet (i f not already

available. drag Ihe Industri al Ethcrnet subnct from the network object catalog to Ihe
nctwork window)

An [0 controller in a sllItion (if not already

available, drag the stalion from the netwOTk
obj~"Ct catalog to the network window. opctl
the station. and .'II~t lID 10 controller with
Ihe Hardware ConCigurnlion 1001. either
intcgrated in the CPl: or liS nn autonomous
module)

I>

The connC<:tion from thc 10 controller to the

Industrial Fth~=et subncI (either already
selccl the 'UbnCI in the lIardware Configuration 1001. or click un the nerv.'or\( eonnec_
lion 10 the 10 contruller in the Network
Configuralion, "hold" und drag 10 the Indus_
tria l Ethernet network

In the nClwurk window, SCkct the J() controller

10 which the 10 device ;$ to be assigned. Find
Ihe 10 de,'ice in !he network obje<.:t catalog
under PROFi}.'ET 10" and the relennl .ub-

catalog. drag it to the network window and fi ll

out the properties window that appears.
You parameterizc the 10 device by selecting it
and then selecting EDIT ..... Opo; OIlJECT. The
HndwlU"C Configuratiun ;$ staned. Now you
can ""I the user data tt<.ldresse~ or the 1/ 0 modules (sec Chapter 2.3 "Confi guring Station.").

2.4 Configuring the Network

With VIEW ---> Hl(.ID.1GHT ---> PROFiNET 10
5\'STL\1. you emphasize the assignment of the
nodes of a PROFINET 10 system; rUSt, you
select the 10 controller or an 10 devic~, \Vith
VlliW ---> REARRA:-';C,E, the 10 devices are
assigned optically to their 10 controller.

2.4.3

Co nti,"u ring Connecnons

Connections describe the communicati(ms rdation,hips between m'o devices . Connection.'

must be configured if
"' you wam to establish S7 communkations
bem'een two SIMATlC S7 d~v i ccs ("Com
munication via configur~d connections'') or
t>

the communications
SI"'lATlC 57 device ,

panner

i,

not

Note: you do not require a configured connection for di",ct online conncc tion of a programming device to the MPI network for program ming Or debugging. Jf you wam to reach oth",
nodcs arranged in O!her conne<:ted subnet' w ith
the programming device, you mu~t configure
th e cotlllcction of the programming device: in
the Network Object Catalog. sdcct the PGIPC
object undcr Stations by double cl icki ng, open
PGIPC in the network window by double
clicking. and ,eleclthe intcrface and assign it 10
a .ubnet,
Conn~"t lon tabl~

The commnnications connUlioru; arC config

ured in the cotlllection tahle. Requin:mcnt : you
have creat~d a project with all ,lations thai are
to exchange dam with each other, and YOll have
,"s igned Ihe module. with commun ications
capability 10 a ,ubtlet,
Thc object Connecrio",,' in the CPU containcr
repre,ents the connection lable. A doubleclick
on Connections starts the Nem'ork Configura-

Tabt e 2.1 Conneclion Table Example

P~rtners

tion in the Same way as a double-click on a subnet;n the project con~,incr ,

To configure the conncction" select e .g. an S7400 CP U in the Nem'ork Contigurm ion , In thc
\0"('1' section of the nem'ork w indow, you get
the connection table (Table 2, I: ifit is not visi ble, place the mouSe pointer on the lowcr cdge
of the "'i ndow until it changos sbapc and then
drag the w indow edge up), You enter a new
communication connection with \r-;SERT --->
KI\\' CON"E.'IO:-'; or by double -clicking on an
empty line .
You cre3l~ a connection for each "active CPU.
Please note that you cannot creatc a connection
table for an S7-300 CPU; 57-.100 CPUs can
otlly be "passive" panncrs in an 57 connection,
In the "'New Cotlllection" window, you selcct
tbe eommunkation~ partner ;tl 'he "Station"
and "Modulc"' dialog boxcs (Figure 2.6); the
.Italion and th e module mu~t already exist. You
also detennine the connection type in tbis window.
If you want to Set more connection properties,
activate the cheek 00" "Before inserting' disp lay propenies".
The connection table contains all data of the
configured connections, To be able to display
this clearly, usc V IEW ---> 0l'TlMT7 F COLlJM"I
WIDTII and VIEW ---> DISPLAY COl=S and
select the information you arc interested in.
ConnectIon

[l)

The nnmber of possiblc connections is CPU

'pecific, STEP 7 define, a connection 10 for
every eOtlllection and for every partner. You
require this ~pecificatioll when you u,c communications b locks in your program.
You ean modify the 10CQIID (the connection ID
of the currently opencd module). This is nece,-

2 STEP 7 progralDming Sofu... rc

Ii

j ,

,1

"""'~ I

L>o4~f"'_ ~--~~

f -

r
;C'

..

,,

""";11

TI :

I'

~ '~obI"'~~_

.r

Sont _ _ _ _

,I

,,,,,,p,,-,
l_",toI

,co< "".

~d

~~~

r,-'",-rawo;;:."

'I

I
1

1
1
- -- --

-~
~

t"iRu 2.6 ConfLguriog CommWlicatioru Connoclioru

.ary if you have a lready programmed commu

n icali on < blocks and you want to u<e lhe local
[D ,;pecified there for the ~onnection
You enter the new local 10 as a hexadecimal
number. it must be within the following value
ranges, depending on (he connection type . nd
m ust not already be assigned,
t>

Value

rang~

for S7 connections:

00011><, to OFPP h<.,

t>

Value rang~ for S7 connections with load

able S7 communications (S7-300) :
0001"". to 008F hex

f>

Valuc range for PIP connection>:

10rxlt,., to 1400 he ,

You cbange the partner II) by going to the ~on

nection table of the partner CPU and changing
(what is then) the local 10: sel~""t lhe conne ction line and then EDIT ..... OBJECT PROP 5RTlIS
If STEP 7 does nOl enter a partner TO, it is a
one-way connection (sec below) .

.. IJ

Partne,.,.
lbis column disp lays the connection partner. If
you want to re>crvc a connection resource without naming a panncr device . ~"Ilter "nspedfied" in the dialog box u nder Station
In a on e-way connectlun. "ornmunkation can
only be initiated from one partner; ~x ,unple : S7
conmmnication. between an S7-400 and S7300 CPU. Even without S7 communications
function, 1n the S7-300-CPU, data can be
exchanged by an S7_400 CPU with SFB 14
GET and SPB 15 PUT. In the S7_300, no user
program run. for this communication but the
data c.~chan;;e is handled by th. operati ng <;ys-

"m

A one-way connection is configured in the connection table of the "active'" CPU Only the n
does STEP 7 a.;;ign a "Lo~allD . You also loa d
this c0nne~tion only in the local station.
Wi th a two_way cunn~ction, both partners Can
asS lmle communicat ion actively: e.g. two S7400 CPU s with the comnmnication,; functions
SFB 8 SE:'>ID and SFB 9 BRCV.

2.4 Confi!! .... ring the Networi<

Vou configure a TWo-way connection only once
for one of the IWO panners. STEP 7 then assigns
a "LocaIIO" and a "Panner 10" and vcncno1c.l
the conneetion data for both staUon~. You mu~t
load each ""nncr " ';Ih ils own cOMection table.
Co"n lion lype
The ST EP 7 BlI!l;c Package provides you "'ilh
the following connc.:t;on f)-pcs;n Ihe Net"ork
Configuration:
PIP connc.:! lu n. approved for Ihe ~ubnel PTP
(J964(R) and RK 512 procedures) with S7
communicalion~. A PIP (poinl-to-point) eODneclion i. a $Crial conneclion belween IWO I"'nne"'_ These can be IWO S IMATIC 57 device~
wilh Ihe relevllnt lDleTface! or CPs. or a
SIMATI C 57 device Imd a non-Siemens devicc.
e.g. It printer or a barcode rcadCT.

57 connectlon , approved for Ihe s. . bne\s MPI.

PROFIB U5 and Industrin l Etllenlel Wilh S7
communic ation. All 57 conneClion is the connIXlioll between SIMAT IC S7 dcvices and call
include pro!;l"'lmming devices and human
machine inlerface devices, Datil arc exchallged
via Ihe S7 "ollllection, or progl1lmming amI
control functions arc ex....:uted.
F.ult_tol .. ranl 57 ~on n eellon . approved for
the subn~1s PRO Fl J:jUS and Industrial Ethernet
wilh 57 communication s. A fault-toleTant 57
eOM IXtion ;$ mllde betwn fauh-Ioleram
S IMATIC 57 devices and il can also be utablishM 10 an appropriately equ.pped PC.
The software componenl "51MATIC NC~l",
which is pari of STEP 7. ;5 a\,II;I.ble for
p .... m<'le riz[n C Ps. Vou have conneclion
types available for selection: fMS eonn"":lion.
FOL eonllection. ISO Inln~pon eonneClion,
ISO-on- Tel' "oMection. TCP eonneclion_
UO P connection and I'-maii "onn"":lion.
AClive

con n~e!ion

bu il du p

I'rior 10 the actual data transfer. Ih" eonneclion

m LlS' be buill up (initialized). Iflhc con nection
pann~rs have thi~ capability. you specifY here
w hich device is 10 eSlabl;~ h th" conneclion. Vou
do this wilh the check box "E~.abl; sh an aCI;ve
conneclion" in Ih" properties window o f Ihe
conn~""lioll (select the connection and thcll
EDIT ~ Gilmer PROPIlRTlFS).

S"ndlnlil operu!n!: n. l"

me~.a lilrs

ConnlXlion ""nne", wilh a configured twOw"Y cOMterion can exclumge operating ~Iate
messages. Iflhe local nO<ic is to send il5 operaling stal~ m~<;;ages. aClivate the ,levanl ehc:ck
bo", in me propenics wiodow oflhe cOMeclion.
In the uSCr program of me panncr C PU. Ihese
messalil"s can be receIVed wilh SFB 23 USTA-

TUS.
Con ne ctio n pa lh
As th~ connecl;on palh hc propenie~ window
ofm~

COMIXlion displays the end points oflhe

connection and me subnets ov~r which Ihe oonnect;on runS. If mere are sevet1l1 5ubnet~ for
Sdeclion. 5TEP 7 selects Ihem in Ihe o rder
Industrial Ethernel belo' Indust,;al Ethernet!
TCP-ll' before MPI before I'ROFJllUS.

The stalion and the CPU ovCr which the con

nCClion runs are displayed as the e tld points of
Ih e connlXlion T he modules wilh communica_
lions capability are listed under Interface.
specifying Ihe rack number ""d the sIN. lfboth
CPUs are located ill the same rnck (e.g. 57-400
CPU. in multiprocessor mode), Ihc display box
shows "PLC-intemal".
Vou will Ih~n sec the MPI add,u or PROF Inus address of the node: ullder "SubnCI" and
,\ddrcss.
Cu nn t loo5

b~tween

proj e<:u

For dina c"(change belween tWO 57 modul..,~

belonging 10 difTCTCIlI 5IMATIC projects. you
enlC" ,m~peeified" for connection panner in
Ihe conneclion table (in me local stalion in both
projects).
I' lea"" ensure Ihal Ihc eonneclion data ag'c in
bolh projects (STEP 7 docs not (:heck .his).
After ""ving and (:ompiling. you luad Ihe COnnection dina inlo Ihe local stalion in el1l; h
project.

If a project is 10 subsequently become pan ofa

mulliprojeCI. snd if .he connection panncr is
also within a projecl oflhe multiprojcct. select
"In unl<1lown proj ect"' as the c,,"nectio" panncr. and enter an ullambiguous eom' cel;OIl
name (reference) ill the propeni"5 window.

"

2 STEP 7 Progranuning Software

Connection to n on-S1 st ations

Within a project, you can also speeiry stati ons
other than S 7 stations as connection partners:
I>

Oth~,. Slation, (non-Siemens device, and

also S7 stati ons in anom ...,. project)

I>

Programmi ng devices/PC.

I>

SIMATIC S5 station,

A rt:qtrircm<:m for configuring the conne ction i,

that the non-S 7 station exists as an obje~t in the
proj ect container an d you have connectcd the
non-S7 station to the ",levant subnet in the ,tarion properties (e ,g. select the station in the Network Con figuration, sdect Eun --. O!lJElT
PROPIiRTlFS and COtlllect the station with the
desircd subnet on the "Interfaces" tab)

2.4.4

G8tew.y~

If the programmmg dcvi~c is ~onnected 10 a

<ubnet. it can reach all othcr nlxlos on this subnet. t"or example, [rom one connection poinl,
you can progmm and debug all S7 stations ~on
nectcd 10 an MJ'I ncnvork If anoth~r subncI
such as a PROFIBUS subnet is connected 10 an
S7 station, thc programm ing d~vicc can also
rea<:h thc Slations on the other subnet . The
requiremcnt fm thi, is tha t the station with the
subnct trans ition h as routing capab ility. th at is,
it will channel the transf~m.:d message frame..
When the network configuralion is compiled,
routing tables containing all the necessary
in fornmtion arc automat ically gcncrat~d for the
stations with .uhnel lransitions . Al l acc ess ih le
cOlIUllunications partner< mmt ~ configured in
a piant n~lwork wilhin an S7 rmjecl and must
~ supplied with th~ "knowledge" of wh ich .tatioru; can bcrcached via which suhnets an d subnel transilions.

If you want to re"ch allnodcs in a subnet with

a programming dcvice from One connection
point . you must configun.: the comlection point,
You etller a '-placeholder", a PG/PC station
rrom the Network Objc~t Catalog in th e network contiguration at the relevant subne!. YOl<
contigu", a PG/PC station on every subn~.., to
whi ch you want to ~onnCCI a programming
devic e.
During operation , you connect the programming d~vice to the subn~1 and .dect PLC --.

ASSIGN PG/PC. This aJarlS the interfaces of

the programming device to the conftgured settings for the subne!. Before disconne c1ing thc
programm ing device again from the subncl,
select PLC --. CA"S"CEL l'G/PC AsslU~"

If you go online with a programming device

th"t doe s nO! contain the right project. you
require the S7 ,ubnet ID for network acee".
The S7 subnet IV ~()mprises "'m numbers: Ihc
pT<>ject nllm lK'T an d the subnetnllmber. Y,m can
ohtain th e <uhnel 10 in thc nctwoTk conftgura_
tion by ,electing the <uhncr an d thcn EDIT --->
OIlJECT PROPERTIES on I he "Gencra1" tah.

1.4.5

Loading th~ Connection Data

To activate the c"nncctions, you must load the

conncction lable into the PLC following saving
and compiling (all connection ta bles into all
'active'" CPUs) ,
Requiremelll: Yon are in Ihc network wi ndow
and Ihe connection table is visible , The prograrruning device is a t\Ode or the s uhnet over
which the connection data arc 10 be loaded into
Ihc modu les with conununication. capability,
All subnct nodes have been assigned unique
node addr~sscs. The modules to which connection data are to be transrem.:d arc in thc STOP
mode.
With PLC ---> Oov.'}.'LOAVTOCURRENT PROJECT
---> . ,, ' you transfer the <:onncction and configuralion data 10 thc accessible modules. Depen ding on which ohjeci is sc1~ctcd and which m enu
conunand is selted. you ~an ~hoosc between
the following
---> SIoLIClloU STATIONS

--->

SELIoCTED AND PART'<ER STA TIONS

--->

S TATIONS 01\- TI lE SUH""ET

--. S ElECTED CO"'N"lTTIONS

--. CONNECTIONS AND

GATEWAYS

In order to delete all connections of a programmahle module. load an empty connection lab le
into Ihe as<ociated module.
TI, e compiled connection data ar~ also a component part of the System d<Jla in th~ Blocks
contain~L Transfer of Ihe systcm dala and the
subsequem slartup of the CPUs clTcctively al<o

2.4 O m figuring the Network

tmnsf<.-n th .... Cf>nnecti on data to the mod ules

",ith communica tions capability_
F or online operation via iYfP L a programm"'g
dtwi~c r~ql1lre~ no additional h ardware . If you
~onneet a PC to a network Or if you connec t a
p rogramming device to an Ethernet o r PROFl_
B U S network, you require th .... relevant int.... rFace module. You parameterize the module
w ilh the appli cation " Sening the PGIPC Interfa~c" in th e \Vindows Control Panel.

2 .4.6

-"la t ching ['roj ect . In a l\ l ultlprojec t

Wben opening a multiproject with the Network

Conligurat ion tool, a window is displayed with
the projec15 present in the muJt iprojcct. You
a l,o o btain this window i f you open a projec t
included in a multiprojcct and select VlE\\ ---->
MIILTlPROJE<:'"T. The window d i"play< the

p rojects present in the mu lti p roject and thc

cro,-,-projcct subnets which have a lr.... ady ~n
combined , Select a project for flmher pr<><:essing by double d ick in., (Fig"rc 2,7) _
Proj ects usually contain communications con nec tions between thc in dividual statio ns. If
projects are combined into " muJtiproj~et, or if
Hn e.~ istiI\g prujcd is indudtd inUl the mult i~
proj ect . these connections c all be combincd a nd
matched
If you ,eket VlloW ----> CROSS-PROJECT NETWORK VIEW in an opened project that belongs 10
a multiprojcet, you will see an overview of a ll
stations ofthe mu ltiproject and the current connections. In th e cross-project network view.
yon cannot make any change, to the projec ts.
Sckcting VIEW ----t CROSS-PROJECT NETWOR K
VIEW " g a in exits the multi proj ect vicw.

~~p-

:..:l'""'""''''''
... _"""'
, "
.- ,",,-,, '""I
"' . ,......""a"
....""
'"~tAO

'"

,,", eo~

... ::!iiI'"'" """"-, , ...., l:..bo<b

=~ 0'0 '-"'-'
'; if ~"" - c_"
II CP>J"<C-lQr'
'; III s,.... 'OC3X(.l)
SC
" "'_OC""
'"' ~A"

,..'" i '''---''''

t""", ...... ,,_~""

c.""",,,, ,..."-"",,

L"",-, __'..M_"""
cv..... ""'~".

8'""""""""_

,I M_
~

.r-.

F ig u c. 2. 7 Mu l1 iproje<ot in the Network Con fig uration tooJ

!fu. __

{_

"It:m:\)

tw ,,,e, Of'

3-1

1" __

...:.~.J.
__ t,

2 STEP 7 PToiramming Software

5 uhne t~

Com bining

The MPI. PROFIRUS and IndusniBI Ethernet

subnelSarc combined togelhcr first. A p=<'qui.ilc ill that the subnel8 10 be combino:d ha,'e the
same subnel 10. Wim the subtlel seleclo:d. you
can set thcse in the Network Configuration tool
using EmT ~ OllmCT PKOPERT!S.
With F ILl; ~ MUU1PROJECT ~ ADJUST
PROJECTS you CDn ClIlI 8 wi""ro fDr mn open
multiproject in the S IMATIC Ma".ger which
supporn you wMn matcbing. In the N~'1,.-ork
Configurntion fool. you obtain the dialoi win_
dow with EDIT ~ MERGF.Jut.,'MERGJ; SLfJ"ETWORKS

...

You ,elect the type of subnet. ~\ick the Exe

cutc" bulton. and obtain the suOOe" of the
selected l)lpe "",:>ent in the multiproje.:t. You can
now select indIvidual suOOe!' of~ projects. and
combine in U CTOIIs-pmject suboet. You CIIlI use
tbe same dialog 10 eliminate sublWts from the
ero&~-pmje<..'1 sub""l.
Several cross-project .ubnc13 of the same type
can be created in ~ multiproject. The properties
of the cro-project sulme! arc ru.'1ennined by
the fint .u~t added or by thc subnet sdecto:d
wilh the "Select" bullon. Use ~OK" or-Applyto acknow'tcdie the ""nings_ Subnct$ ..... h,ch are
pan ofa cross-projCCt .ubne! B~ idenlifie<J by a
different symbol in the SIMATIC Manager.
C o n,bln lng

~unn~~tlon .

The connC<'tions configurt"<J in slOal", proj~cts

which lead to a partner in another proj1 ean be
combined 10 a muiliprojccl. If you select the
pann~r "In unknown project"" when configuring conneclionl in II smgl'" proje~t in Ihe win_
do ..... "Insert new conn""'ti",," . you can subsequently enter a conneclion nam", (reference) in
the window "Propenies - S7 connection". Con_
nections in diffen:nt projO"Cts with the same
connO"Clioo names CIUl be comhined autom,,,i.
cally_
In Ihe SIMATI C MBltagcr, Ibis is cMmed out by
the w izard for project malch ing if you cl ick
"Combine connO"Ctions" and E~ecule. Connections a~ Ihen combined which have identi cal connO"Ction names (reference).
In the Ne","-ork Configuration 1001. you ean also
combine conne<:lion' willt "unspecified" part_

ners. Select EDtT ~ M ~RGE CONNECftONS to

oblB;n a dialog box with all configured eonnections. SelecI One connection in each oftbc Window$ "Connections .....11hout conne<:lion part_
ner" and "Possible connection partners" and
cltck "Assign". The aMigned coonections a~
li.lted in the bonum window "Assigned conncelions" . Use "MCl"ic" 10 then combine the Con_
nections. The cOOllections arc assigned the
properties of the I<)<:al mooule of the current ly
opened project. You ean mooity thc connection
properties wben combintng.
Con ngu rl ng croS5- projt<:t eonnectio ns
Followi ng the combinalion o f ",bnet~. crossproject conn~-Clions can be confi gured . The proeo:durc ;s the SIIITIe PS for project_inlernal con_
n.,.,.-tion$" extcndo:d by specification of tbe:
project atllie connection panner.
You can tcst a nct ..... ork configurati on in the
m~ltiprojec l for comrn<Jictions with N ETW'ORK
~ CHEC K CROSS-pII.OJl:cr (:O;';SISTK'!CV.

2.S
2.5.1

C r ealing th e S 7 P rogram
IntrOdu ctin n

The U.'ICt program is crealed under the object S7

Progrom_ You ean flS.!:ii" this ohjecl in lhe

projecl blerarchy ofa CPU or you CBlt c~atc it

iDltcpendently of a CPU. It conlllins the object
S)""'/><)/5 and Ih~ containcrs SOI<Ifi'.l" and BloclcJ
(Figure 2.8) .

With Ine ri'm ental program crealion, you ~nt~r

th c program d ir~et block-by-block. t:nnies are
checked im tncdimely fOT synta;>t. At the same
time. the block is compiled as ;t is saved and
lhen slo~d in the containCT Blocks. With incrcmenta! programming. you can alS() ~dit blocks
online in the CPU. even during operation.
I IlC~mCl1tal programming is P<lssibl~ in all the
balIie languagC"'l.
In tnc caSC of sou" ~ .... ri cnfcd pro&fBlll ere
ulion. you wme one or mor~ prolP"lUJl sooree"
a nd store these in the container Suurces . Progmtn ,o ...rees are ASC U text tiles that contain
Inc program .lat~mcnts for on~ oT more bloch,
po~sibly eVCD for the emire program . Yoo compile these sources and you gCi the compiled
blockll in the contai ...... Blocks. SOUrce-ori(111ed
prugnltn creation is used in STL and SCL: you
cannot use soun:c-ori(11led PTOlPl'mming wi,h
LAD or f 13 D. but programs created with LAD
OT fB I) can ~ stored as KlUree l11es.
T ho .~i gnal Slatcs or th e values of nddresses arc
I'roc:..o:t.~d '" th~ ~t()~a",. i\n ~~.. ,~. ,<:>'
e:<ampl<:, the input 11.0 (ab,wluw "'Jdrcsy;ng).
Wilh the help of the Syn.bo l T. b k under the
object Symbols. you can alisip a symbol (an
alphanumeric name. e.g. "Swilch motor on") to
an ISddrc$S and then access it wilh this nam.,
("y",bollc addT"C.Jsing). In Ih~ properties of th~
omine ohjcct container Bladt_f. you .<l"'C"ity
whether in the event of a chanac in the Symbol
Tu blc the absolute addre~~ or the ~ymbol is to
be defioitive for the already compi led blocks
when next s.. >'oo (address priority) ,

2.5.2 S)' mbol'h ble

In Ihe control program, you work with
addresses; Ih<: ., ....e inputs, outpUIS. limcrs,
bl ocks. You cao assign absolUle addresses (e.g.
11.0) or symbolic addr~,scs (e,g. Start signal).
Symbolic adJn; , sinl! usc. nameS instead of the
ftbsolutc address. You c.n mmke your program
euier to n:ad by using meaninaful names
In symbolic addressing. a dIstinction is made
between local symbols and Jlluhul ~ymbo1<. A
local symbol i. known only in the block in
which it bas been d.,fined. Youcan u.-.c the same
local .ymbol' in different block . for different
purposcs . A global symbol is known through_

out Ihe enlin; progrtlm and has the Same ",,"an_

ing in.11 blocks. You deline global symbols in
the symbol table (obj ~cl Sy",I,,,I. in the contain<''1"S7 Program).
A gloNI symbol starts with an alpha chm"cte,
and can be up to 24 characters lona:. A global
symbol cBn also comain splICes. spcci.d chame_
ICTII and narional characters such as the umlaut.
Exce ptioru; to this an: the characters oo...,A.
FF""Aand the inverted commas ("). You must
enclose symbols w ith special charaete", in
invened commas when proafa1l1ming , In Ihe
compiled block, the program edilor d isplays all
global ~ymbols in inverted commas. The symbol cOmment can ~ up to 80 churnetcrs long ,

In the symbol table you can assign RPm"" to the

following a<kJn,,;ses and objeclS:
po

lnplns I, OUtpUIS Q, pcnpheral inpulll PI and

pcriphCT1l1 outpulS PQ

to

Memory hits M. t,mef funclio"" T and

coumer functions C

to

Code blocks OU~, FBs. FCs. SfCs. SFTh

and dam blocks DBs

to

User data types UDn

;>

Vanable table VAT

DaTa addresses in the data blocks are included

amonll the local " ddresse~: the 8ti.1OCi",ed symbols are defined in the dcelHrolion $<.."<:tion of the
data block in 'he case of 1I1obat dnm blocks Hnd
in thc declaration sec lion of tile function block
in the case of instance datil btoc~$.
When creating an S7 ProflUll, the SIMATIC
Manager also cr.;:alCS an empty symbol table
5)71,bols, YOll open this and can then deline the
atobal symbols and assign them 10 absolute
addresses (t'igure 2.9). Tho:n: e~n be only one
singl~ symbol table in an 57 program.
The dUla type i8 part of the deli <l ilion of a symbol. II defines 'pific propcnie! of Ihe d ata
~hind the symbol. essc",i~JI)' the represenlat;o n of the dala con!ent~. For example, the darn
Type BOOL identifies. bmary ~'ariab\c and the
dat. type Th;, designates a digital variable
who~ COntents represent ~ l6-bit imeger.
Please R!f~'1" to Cbapter 3.S "Variable.., Constants lind Data Types". it comains a detailed
deS(ripl ion o f the data Iypes,

"

2 ST IiJ> 1 J>rogrammi.ng Soil ...."""

""
""
"

""
""
""

"N
"N
0

""
"

~'''' """""" .. Io, PO_

..."""'''''1[
....,,......,

,"

'.J
' .1

"" ....,.""l

II.-

~ ..

'...- ..

,_,od

'00. r.. " ....... ,at .,...",

La ....... " " ".... t ..

R...... ,.10 '''''' ....

.....".<t_.'
N....... .,1 .. "

~,

~
~
~
~

.. n

With incremental programming. you ~f~ale the

1<)'mbol lable b~fo", .,m.,ring th~ prugrum; you
call DIS!) ,dd or COlT<:<:t individual symbols dur
illg rrovam illput, III the ca.,. of source-ori
<,:med programm ing, th ~ complete .ymbol table
",u~1 be IVlilable w h..., th~ prognun &OlIree IS
,"""opi lcd.

Impu rtlni,:, Hportlng

Symbc l t"bles can be imported and cX",,"cd.
" Export ed' m~all!< a file is ~reated wi III th~ con
1ent~ o f your symbollab le. You can ""I~~t here
either the ~ntire symbcl table. a rub ..."! hmit~
by filters or only selected line,_ For the dma for
m it you cau ehno~ be-iwtttl pun: ASC II 161
(exumtton ' .88C), $C'quc-nlial a>..ignmenl lisl
(*.S4"<1), SYbll;m 1l1"~ Fomtat ( .~f for
Mierowft AC(:Css) ~n<l Data Interchange Format (,dif tOr Mi<--rosoft Excel). You can edit
m e exportw file with a suitable editor_ Yuu~..n
" Iso impurt a s),n bol table available in oDe of
the fOmlb\S named above.

72

' dol' . 0 -So..

.,,

, "
0
0
;

EOII'

"
".,
"
,

, "..,
0
0
0

0, ....,,, on ~ "",,,0,, ." ..

"""'''l' ... ". po~',," , .". , t 1ft ."" ..
E.JIO """''!Y '"' '" "" ... " .o,! ," ~ .. ''''''or
~, .. '"JO d "",,,", ,, .o, .... '"II' "'""1."1 ..

"

... , ' ...

Swc<. c. bel" """,arlo; ""'.,......, .

""0boO! mo'" ... """,... "'" 2

,.." , ... """ ... '"" ,.,.,..,.,. "", 1
C.

;W"''' ''' """ ... '0< ""''''J'' .,"

"...., .... "'''' '0' "",., ...

Sprd a l obj <'t'l propertie.

Wilh ~DlT ..... SI'ECIAL ORl~T PROl'fRTtES .....

.. you ,..,t atlributcs for each symbol in the

symbol cabl.,. The<c "tuibutes Or properties are
u.cd 'n the follnwing:

I>

Httman mach in ~ inlerface

monitoring wilh WinCe

fuTlclion~

I>

Configuring-me"agc~

po

Configuring commun;ClI.ti<>TI~
NCM software

po

Control al contact ",-ith inputs aDd bit memori~s in the program ed,tOr

usin.:

for

lhe

\lrf:n' -+ COLUl-INS R , 0, M. C, CC males lhc

settU:lI.' ,!sible_ Witb OntONS -+ CI:l'OmMrl.!;,
you can ,.-pecity ,..heth<-"!" ()(" nut the special
object properties are to be copied und you ean
define heh"v;orwbcn importing ~ymbol~.

1.5.3

r ......gnun

t~d ltor

iO<,.....,lJ1ental programming; however, you can

enter new symbo ls or change symbols during
pn>!lnlm input.

For ~"'Rtjng the user pro&"Pnl. the SHoP 7

I3nsic P""kagecontains a progmm ed itor tor the
LAD. FA D and STL pmgrammin& language .
You program incrementally wuh LIID and
FDD . Wt i~, you eoter an e~ecutable block
di ........,t; Figure 2.10 shows Ihe possihle "Clions
ror this.
If you usc .ymbolie add~sing foc global
.ddreS1e~.
the symbol' ,mill already Ix:
.. ~si8ned to "n absolute address io the case of

LAD 'FBD bloch can be decompih,d, Le. a

relldable block can be c""at~'U again from the
Me7 code without an oftlioc database (you can
read any block from a CPU using a prognommina device without the asso.:;ated project). In
...!diuon. an STL proglllm sou",,, ~&n be ereal~d
from any compiled block .

I
~ .------------',,,,"",,,,'"""",,
'",.
Source

..

."'

O1fttne

r ----"""'''''".':)

Import "x,-mal SOuroo

~
InBlocI<s
the PO

programming

Ontlne

FI~ur~

L__

'~!.=~
::o:)

1.10 Writing rftlirorn! " t!h the I-A[)fHl[) Ed",.>,.

BlodCs

2 STEP 1 t>rogramming Software

SCMr1lng t he program editor
y"" reach ,he program ~ditor whom Y"" open a
block in the SIMATIC Manag~r, ~ .&. byoouble
clickin!! un the Mutomatically generated symbol
orth~ Oraaoi7.8tioo block OR I, Ot via tbe Will
dows 'Dskbar with START --> STM"'l"IC - I STEP
7 --> LAD. STL. FBD - PROGRAMMINU S7
BLOCKS.

You can customi:z~ th~ prol"'nje~ or the program editor with OJ'nONS --> CUSTOMl7F.. On
th ~ "&ii,or" lah. >!CicCI thc prupcnies with
which a new block is 10 be g~neratl and di ....
played. ~...,h liS the ~"T<:ation langullge. pres<:lcction for commeots, aod symbols.

The Ol'<"vi<'",s winduw Shows the pro~..,.am ele.

ments and Ihe call structure. If;1 is nOI visible.
display il on the screen u.ing VIEW --> OVER.
VIEWS.

The Details window can be displayed or sup'

pressed usmg VIEw --> D t:.TA.lLS. It contains Ihe
follo,,';ng \.abs:
Do

Prog r am whor window

Funher window~ can be di""layed within the
window of the program editor: the bluck win
dow, lbo: Vcrails and Overviews window~, and
the window with Ihe AS regislct!< ( f igure 2.11).

. . ,..
'"''
'

.--

_-

.... __..
.- ~....,..
~

Ft~urc

The block window is automatically displayed

wben openillg a block and contains me block
interface at the fOp. i.e. the bluck pllrumeleno as
well a~ Ihe sUllic and dynamic local dllla. You
can program the bluck in the bottom program
area. The block window aod the contcl\lS arc
dellCribed in Chapter 3.3.2 '"Illock Window".

2.' I F..urnp]. of e<i i(or window

I: error
ConUIlm; the errol'S foun<l in the bloclt:bylhe
pmgram c<litor, e.g. fol1owilli <;olnpilmioll.
With OPTIONS - I (''uSTOMI7.1l in tbe
"Sources" tab you can SCI whethe r warning.
arc also \0 be displayed.

- .-........-. -- ._.-.~.,

2: Info
Contains information on the currently
.~electcd ad<lress.

SIMATl C Maoager provides an omine and an

online Win dow: the one is d i.l;nguishcd from
the olhel by Ihe labeling in Ihe litle bar.

3: Cross-references
Contains the references ofaddresscs present
in the current network (see Chapter 1.~6
~Refcratce Data").

4: Address info
Contams the symbol mfonnation of the
!Oddresses present in the current network
(see Chap.er 1.~.2 "Symbol Table"). You
can edit e"istinl! symbols hcre. an d nC\'.
ones, and oh<erve the addre status.

In the omine window, you edit the blocks righT

in Ih~ PO database. lfyou are in Ihe edilor. you
can SIO .... a modified block Tn Ihe OmiDe database with FILE -+ SAVe and " 'lnsfCT it 10 !he
CPL with PLC -+ lJOWNLOAD. [f you ....'alI1 10
Ia"C the opened block undeT another numbcror
in R diffc .... nt project. or if you want 10 lransfcr
il 10 II library or to another CPU, use the menu
command flU: -> SAVE AS.

I>

5: Modify
Conlains an empty table of variables in
"'hich you can enterlheaddrcssc5 10 be: con1r01led (sec Chapter 2.7.3 "Moniloring and
Modifying Variables'').

po

6: Diaanoslies
Cnntain~" list with lite exis''''iI moni.orinil
functions for process dialilnOSlics using .he
S7-?O[A G option , package.

po

7: Comparison
Contains the re.ults of a previously implemenn:d block comparison (sec Chapler
"Comparing blocks").

You can dock or undock the Oveni"...... and

Dewil... windows at Ihe edge of lite edi.or win_
dow by double cliclcing the respee.ive .itle bar.
The PLC ,...giner comem... window shows the
content. of the CPU rCiliSlcrs (accumulators.
address regislers and Oil reaislers).
IneNmeDI. ] programmln ~
Wilh inc .... mental programming. you edil the
blocks both in the offiine Ind online 8/ocb
COIllainer. The editor ehecks your entries in the
incremental mode as $OOn as you have terminaTed a network When the block is closed iT is
immediaTely compiled. so thai only error-fTce
block s ca n be saved.
On Ihe "Block" lab under OI'TlONS -> Cusl'OMt;,:!', you .el automatic updaling of Ih~ .... f~
erence data wben saving a block.
The bl~ks can he edlled bolh offline in the programming device', dallbase and online in the
CPU. generally referred 10 as lhe "programmable Conlrolle ... . or PLC. For Ibis purpose. the

With the menu conunbnd FILE -+ STUIili REA.!).

Ot-.L L. in the program edilor. you can save a
"T1leprotecle<l CDpy of the currently opened
(arid saved) block in anOlher block cODIlliner.
To edtl " block in the CPU. open Iltat block in
the onlinc window. This I.... nsfen the block
from Ihe C PU to the Proiramming device so
Ihal II C$n be ediled. You Can wrile the edilcd
block back 10 the CPU with PLC -> DOWNLOAD. If the CPU is in RUN mode . the CP U
will process Ihe edited block in the nc,,1 program SCan eyc1e . If you want 10 .ave a block
that you edited onlil"\C in Ihe ominc database as
",ell. you ean do so with FI1.1i ...... SAVE.
\Vilh incremental prognrnmina. you cao exc~
cUle all proaramming functions wilh one
c.~cepTion: i f you want 10 provide block protection (KNOW_HOW_PROTI!CT). you can
only do Ihis via a program Source file (soc
Chapler 24 . 1 "Slock Prolection ror more
detailed information on this \<>pic).
ChaPler 2.6.4 Loadinll the U!;Cr Pro~..-am into
Ihe CPU' lind Cbaptc!" 2.6.5 ~I:llock Handling'
COOIBm fuTther information on onlil"\C programmmi. Chapler 3.3 "Programming Code
Blocks" and Chapler 3.4 "Programming Data
8lo<"ks" show you how 10 enlcr a LADlFBD
block.
D~~Qmpliation

When Ihe program edilor opens a compilod

block, il carries oUl a "de~ompilalion" into the
LAO'FBO .... prescntanon. It uscs Ihe program
components nOt .... I""amlo c)(eculion in lhe PO
dala management in order to d isplay e.3- sym~
bois. comments and jump labels.lflhe information from Ihe PG data m~nag~ment is missing

2 STEI' 7 Prot!:ramming Softw,"",

durina 1M de<.-ompilation. the ednor uses
replacement symbols.
Nelwort<.s which cannoI be dccompiled in LAD Of'
FB D are displayed in STL
UpdMtlo g vr .:e n c rMllng Soure., fli es
On the "Sow-ces" tab under OPTION S -+ CUSTOMt7.E. you ,,~n sek"t the option "Gener.te
souree alltomatically" SO that when you save an
(incrementally c reated) block, the proiJ1llrl
souree file is updated or creat~d. if it does !lOt
already e~i~l.
You can derive the name of a IlCw source tile
from the absolute address or the symbolic
address. The addn!'sscs can be tnln~fCl'T'Cd in
absolule or symbolic fonn to the SOW"Ce file.
With the "E:<ec;ute" button. you selcct. III the
subsequenl dialog bo:<. the bloch fn)n1 ",hich
you want to generate a program source file.
With FILl! -+ GIlNfRATE SOURCE you can p ro
duce ASCII source files from compiled blocks,
First insert a Sow"es comaincr under the object
S7 progmnt , Whcn generating the sou""c, 11t'S1
enter the stnrage location an,! the name of the
source in the dispLayed dialog box, ~nd subsequently SCICCllhe blocks.
You can cxport SO~ files from the project by
sdectina EOIT -+ ExPORT SoURCE in the
SIMATIC Manager. You ca.o then fllnher pro
cess these ASCII files with another tUt editor.
for example. Source files can also be imported
back into the Sow'Ces container witb I:o.:SCRT-+
EXn,IlNAL SOOKCI!.
If you generate a source file from a blocklhat
yOU have ~Teatcd wilh LAD or fl3D. you can
generale a LAD or Fl3D block agkin from this
sou",e file , You ~ompile the sou",c file by
opening it in the SIMATIC Manager "'ilh II
double.dick allll by then selecting Fit I> ....
COMrtU! in the program edilor. An STL block
is created in the Blocks container. You opc'n thi~
block and switch to your usual repre~nl&lion
wilh Vt\lW -+ LAD or VIEw -+ fBD. After5lv.
ing. the block n!'tlIins this propeny.
If you sele<:ted tbe selling "Addresses - Symbolic" when creating the 50urce file. you
require a complete symbol table for compiling
the sourec file. In this w~y, you can specify dif
ferent absolute addresses in the symbol table

76

and. after compilation. you end up with a proiI'lII with. for example. different inputs and
outputs. This allows you 10 adapl the program
10 a diffeI'O'nt hardware configuralion. For this
purpo;;e, it is best to "lore tbcse JOUI"CC files
(which are independent of the hardware
addressing) in II library, for example.
C ompMrlng hlock s
The block comparison cnables you to find the
differences between twO blocks. -[be block$ c an
be pr<:~cnt in different projects. in different target systems (CPUs). or in one pffljcci and One
I&!el .ystem.
Use Ihe program editor to compar<: the OJ>CIled
block witb the same block in the CPU or in tile
project by using OPTIONS -+ COMPAKB ON-I
OFFUl'.'E 1'A1lTNER. The resolt is displayed in the
detail ar<:3 of the editor window in the tab "..,:
Comparison".
Mark tMe Blocks object in the SIMATIC Man _
ager. or only the b locks to be compared. and
selecl OPTIONS -+ COMPARF. flLOCKS , The
comparison is carried out either between the
online and omine data managcment (ONUNFJ
omine) Or hetv,-een two proj~-.;:ts (Path I/ Path2).
\Vhen comparing the complele prog",m .... hicb can also includc tables of variable!! and
user dala types (UDTs) - you can inoorponlle
the system data. Wh-en using "ExC'Cute oodc
comparison ~, tbe prog ...m code of the bloc"," is
~ompll1ed in addition. even orblock~ wilh dif.
fercm generation language!!,
The ~omparison includes all dala of ~ block.
\lven its time stamp for progmm code and imerface. If you wish to know whcth~r the progT'Jrn
code is identical independem of the block prop
cnies, eomp ar<: lh~ ehcrksurn of the block. To
do this. select the "Details" button in the re5UllS
window ofthc b luck comparison.

2.5.4

Rewiring

The R""'iring function allows you to r<:1'1"""

addres.<cs in individually compiled blocks or in
the emire user flIViTaIlI. For example. you can
replace input bilS I 0.0 10 I 0,7 with input bits I
16.0 to I 16.7. Permissible addrcsscs are inpulS,
outputS, memory bits. timers and counters as
well as functions fC. and function block!; FBs ,

In the SL\tATIC Manag(:r, you scle<:t the

objects in ",hich ynu wish lD carry OUI !he
",wmng: seleel " smgle block, a group of
blocks by holdina: Ctrl and c1kldna: with the
mouse, or the emire Blocks user prognn",
O PTIONS -jo R..t,wuu take. you 10 II table III
which you cun ~'l1 t"r the o ld addresses to ~
replaced lind tbe new addresses, When you confirm wilb "OK", Ih c SIMATTC Manager Ihen
exchnn!!cS the add resses.
When "re"iring" bloch, change .he numbe ..
",f the bLocks fif5t and then execute rewiring
that changes lhe calb c~spondingl y. If you
"rewire" I function block. its instance da\.ll
block iI automatically assigned lD me rewired
funclion block: the dala block number " 00.
changed.
Following n;wirina, an info file shows you in
wbich block changes were made, and IIow
many.
The refer~nce dala arc no lon gcr LIp-to-date 1'01lowinl,l rewiring. and mu,l be regenerated.
Please notc that "rewiring" only takes place in
the compiled block.: a pWgraIn wurce. if
present, is not m<.><lificd.
Funher pOSsible meth<.>ds ",f rewiring are:
eo-

With compiled block.., Y"'u can also usc the

Addren prioriry function.

I>

lflh,m: is a pmgntm source file with symbolic addre.~siog. you change the absolute
addresses in the symbol mble. F"'llowing the
compilation. you get aD "unwired" program.

2.~.~

Addrc~.

Priority

In the prop4T1ies wind",w ",f the ominc object

CODminer Blad:.: on lh~ '"Address priority'" tab,
you can .~t whcthcr lhe Ilhs<.>luI~ Itdd"'S$ or the
~y,"bol i, 10 bave pri",ricy for already saved
blockJ ....ben they are displayed and saved again
follo"'II1g a change I", tbe symbollable Qr 10 tbe
declarati",n o r .s~;gnmCflI Qf global data block .
The def~ult i, "AbwlulC value has prionty"
(the s~me behavior as in the previ"'U5 STEP 7
wMlions). This dd~ult means thm when a
cban!!~ is milk in the symbol table. Ihe absolu te address i~ remined ;0 the prograll1 ulld the

s)'mOOI changes accordingly. If "Symbol bas

priority" i. set. the absolute address ebanges
and the symbol is retained.
Example:
The symbol table contains the fo1l0 .... inll:

I 1.D

'Lt mit _a~ttth_up'

'Limit_switCh_down"

1. 1

In the program of an already compiled bl<:x: k,

input I 1.0 i, """nned:
I 1 . 0 "LUnie_ _ itdo_up"

Tflhe Il!isignments fQr inputs I 1.0 and I 1.1 are

!lOW changed in the symbol table to:
1 1. 0 '!..imit_a.dtch_doown"
1 1 . 1 'Ltmdt_cwitch_ up'
and the already c"'mpil~d block is rtad OUl, then
Ihe progmm e",ma;M

11.1 " LUni t __itc"_up'

if "S)-mbol has priori ty"' is ~et . and if" i\ Mo lute

value has priority";s ~et . the proil's," contaius
I 1.0

"Limit_ awitch_down"

If. as a result of a change in 'he symbol labk,

then: is nQ longer any assignment t>o:twcen an
ab>.<.>lute address and a symbol, Ihe 5tntemeot
... il1 c",main the absolute addrcss ,f ,. Absol ute
value has pri",rity- i. set (even with symbolic
display bc<:ause the symbol would, of course.
be missiog); if"Symool has priority" i~ 5<:t. the
Statemem i. rejected as ~'1TQT"Cd (beca use Ihe
mandat<.>ry absolute address is missing).
If "Symbol has pri"'rity" is set. increm~... ta lly
programmed b!a<: ks with ~ymbol;~ addressing
WIll retain {heir symbols in {he even! of a
~han8c to the <ymbol table . [n this way. all
already programmed block can be "rewin:d" by
changing 1he address "ssianmen!.

Pleaoe nme that this "rcwirina" does nm occur

Ilutumatically bc<:all,<e the already compiled
blocks confaio [he executable MC7 code of lbc
Statements .... ith abwlute addresses. The "baoge
is QnJy madc in the rele'"l1nt bl<.>ek - following
11K- "'\c''3.0t messagc- after it bas been opened
and ~yed agaio.
W order to carry outlhe change in thC complete
block folder. select EOIT -jo CIIECK BLOCl(
CONSISTENCY with the Blocks object mark .. d.

"

2 STEP 7 I'fn&nn\ming Sotl~

2.5.6

Reference

0.,.

As ~ supplement '0 Ihe program itself. 'he

SIMATIC Manager 5hows you Ihe refcn:nee
data. ,,hieh you "lUI usc the hasis for 'oncelions or lests. Thew refc-rence data mdude Ihe
following:

Cross referencc~
po Assignment (Tnpul. Oulput, Bit Memory.
Timers, Counle~)
po Program structure
po Unused symbol.
I> AddresSd without symbols

compiling a program source file or when 5IIving

an in,rememally WTiIl\!"I1 block.
Please note thaI the refcl"e11cc data are only
avail able .... hen the dala are managed omine;
tb<e offline n;fereoce dala ~ displayed e'C"II if
tbe function is called m a block opened online.

po

To generale n;f<;11;nce dam. sclect the Block<

object a nd Ihc menu command OPTIONS -+
REfERDlCE DATA ~ DISPLAY. The representa
lion of the ref=~"" data can be chlllliCd .pe,itieally for each worl:: window with VlFW -->
FILTER; you can save the scningo for IllIer editing by selecting WINOOW --> SA VE ARRANGIOME"". You can di.play and view several h,ti at
the same time (Figure 2.12).
With OPTIONS _ CUSTOMIZE ill Ihe pmj,'J1Im
editor. specify on the Blo,,".s" tab whethc-r or
nOl the referen<:e data are 10 be updaled when

C r oss r t fc ....'IIce.
The cross-reference list shows the Uj.C of the
ad~. and blocks in Ihe user program. II
inclU<k, lhe absolute addR"Ss, Ihe symbol (if
any). the block in .....hich the addn-ss was used,
how it wu used (read or write) and th~ posi_
tions of usc of the addre.s. Click On a ~ol umn
header 10 sort the table by ~olumn comenl~.

Eon _ Go To -> LOCl<TION wilh the position

marked or. double click On the position starts
the pTOifam editor and displays the addmr5 in
the programmed enVlTOnment.

The tross-reference list shows the addresses

you s~le<:ted with VIEW _l'n,TER (for inSlance
bit memory). STEP 7 thtu u.es the filter saved
8. "Standard" e~ny time it opens the cross.reference hSI.

---- ..

"

2 .5 Creating ' he S7 Program

Advantage." the cross re ferences show you

whether thc rcf<:renccd addre.ses were also
s ~anncd or re,et. They also show you in which
h locks addresses are used (possibly more than
o nce).
A s.]gnmen n
T he I1Q/ M reference list shows which b ilS in
address arC", I, Q and M arC assigned in the
program . One byte, hroken down into bits.
appears on e ach linc. Also shown is whether
access is by byte. word. or doublcword . Th<: TI
C reference list shows the timers and counter.
"sed in the program . Ten timers or counters are
d ispJaye<:l on a line.
Advantage: the Ii" ,hows you whether certain
a ddress areas were (improperly) assigned or
where there aTe still addresses ava ilable.
Program

. tru ct ur~

T he progr"'n stn,cnlre shows the call hierarchy

of the b lo<:ks in " user program. You can determ ine Ihe >t3rt object for the cal1 hierarchy from
"selection list . 'Vith VU;w ---> FIT.TfR you have
a choice belWeenlWo dilt'e rent views in the prog ram structure ;
The Call sfn,etur-e ,hows all nesting levels of
the b lock calls. You control the display ofnes!ing le,-"I, w ith the "+.. and "- '. boxes. T he
requiremenls fo, Icmpomry loca l data are
shown for one block or for the emire path up 10
the assoc iated b lock. W ilh the block selected.
change m ing E DIT -) 00 TO -. Loc~no:-: to
the block c all, or open the b lock using EDIT -)
Go TO ---> BLOCK ADDRESS.
The display 'IS Dependency 5tn,erllre shows
two ca ll levels. The blo<:k:; are shown
(indented) in which the block poit,on on the
left is called.
Advantage: Which blocks '"ere used~ \\'e re all
p rogramme d blo<:ks c alled"! What are the
blocks ' temporary Io<:al dma requirements? 1;;
the specified local data rcquir~mcnt per priority
d ass (pcr organizat ion h Inc k) .ufflcicnt?
Unu. ~d S ~'mbol s

This li,t shows all addresses which have symbol table allocations but wc.,-e not used in the

prob'lam. The list shows ilic ~ymbol, th e

address. the <lata type. an d th e COnm1~"IIt [rom
the s y"Il1bol table .
Advantage: were the addre sses in the list inadver1ently fOIgonen when the p rogra m was
being wriuen? Or are they perhaps superfluo us .
and not real ly necded?
Add,'esse s "I tho u l sy mbol
Thi, list shows all the addresses u sed in the program to which no symbols were allo<: ated. The
list iliows these a ddresses and how ollen they
were us~d.
Advantag e: were addresses u sed inadverte ntly
(by a~cidcnt. or ~c a u,e of a typin g "rror)?
2.5 .7

Langua ;;: .. St'tti ng

STEP 7 otTers sev.,.-a\ mcthod, of working with

dilTerentlanguages:
<> The langua ge or the opC1"aling syslem
(character set)
<> The STEP 7 language
<> The language for comments and di'play rex t

The se"ings ofrhe different languagcs are indep~ndent o f each other.

l .a ngu a ge ' cl1lng s In rhc nperat in;;: .y.t em
You use tile Windows ~ontrol pane l to se lect thc
characler set with wh ich you want to w ork under \"indow,. You can find thc ehamct"r selS
le'ted with the mult i- language ve rsion ( M UI
"ersion) and the restriction. wbcn operatin g
with S TF I' 7 in the currt:nt Readme tile or in ilie
STEP 7 11elp under Seni"g up ami cditing th e
project"".
Proj~ct

lan gua;;:e

The project language is the lan g ll3ge that is set

in the W indows eontro l panel w he n the projecl
is created. T he SIMATIC Manag er ind icates the
language in which the selected project or the sclected Iibrllry has been erealcd in E D IT ---> O n JECT PROpeRTIES. "Not yer de tl ned" means you
can me the project or the library lan guage- neu trally, e .g. in multiproj e~ts. These are alw ay s
language-neutral. In language- neutral proj eclS
or libraries . only characters of the ASCIJ chara cter set can ~ used (2Ahc, to 7F hox )' You can

2 S'I'EP 7 Programming Software

find additional informalion in th~ STEP 7 Kelp

lIn der "Settin g LIp and editing the project".
STf~P

7 langu 3\:c

Thc S<.'Ssion language of tht: SlMATlC M"nag~r

that \kfines. for e~,~np l c, til, m~IllJ "ames "",I the
error mes""gc,;, is called the STEP 7 language.
Y01..l ""t this language in the SIJ\1ATIC Man;'g~'
on the "Langu ag~" !:ob with OI'TIO~S ...,. C usTOMJ/.I-~ 'The languages installed w ith STEP 7 are
offered for ",Ie",tion llndt.-r "Nationall"nguag<:" .
On this mb you also set the programming Illllemoolcs, that is, the language in whi~h STI' 7 uses th~ op<.="d, and operation<. e.g,"to. I" (II!'.')
input for Engliili), or " U E"' (for German).
j\-'I ultllingual Commcnn a nd Di.play Texn
Comments and display texts can be multilingual. You hav~ entered the lext> in tbe original
laJlb",age, rueh as English, and you "'an ( (0 generate a German ve"ion of your program. To do
so , ~xpon tb~ desired texts or text type,. Thc
e~p<Jrt I1le" a .c.v tile that you can edh ",ilh
Microsoft E~ecl, for example. You can elller
the tran,lation for each texl. You ;mpon \h~ fin_
ished tran,lation table back into your proj ect ,
Now you can ,w itch belween the language"
Yo" can do this with several1anguages

mation on the e~ported types of t""t, and any

~rrors whkh ba ve occufT~d ,
Open the export tjle(.) w ith th e FILE ...,. OPFN
dialog box in Mi~mwfl Ex cel (not by doo.h\eclicking) , The e~p<Jned tc~ts arc di<played in
the flr.ll ~Ollllllll and yo\: can translate the te~l'
in the second co lum",
You ~an t<:tch tbe trans lated texts baek '" lhe
project with Ol'lIONS ...,. MANA{",E MULTlLlNGliAL TEXTS ...,. TMJ'OKT. A log file provides
information about the imponed te~t. and any
error; that may have occurred.
Please note that the name of the import fik
m o" not b~ ehanged ' ince there is a direct relation between ,hi, and the text type. conto ined in
the fi!~.

Sdecling and ddel;Jlg a language

Wilh OPTtONS ----> LAl':GUAGE FOR DISPLAY DJ::_

VTr:E~ in the SThtAI1C Manager, you ,elect the
languagc" available i~ your projc~1.. and Y"'" ""t
the standard language tor the di.play tenn inal, .

You Can change to all ; mj)Ort~d languages in lhe

SIMAnC Manager w ith OPTlOKS ----> MANAC[
MULTlLlNCUAL TVx rs ...,. CHA~'G LANGUAGI': . The language ohange is ~xeeuted for
the objec," (blocks, ,ymbol tab le) tor which the
relevant text< have b.-en imported . Thi. information i, contained in the log file , Y"u Can
make funher .etlings. e.g. tbe --taking over" of
multi lin gua l comments when copying a b lock,
Il.,ing OV t'IONS ...,. MAI"AGE MULTiLINGUAL
TExTS"'" SJOTTINGS I'OR CO),L"-ti:Nl M"NAGJ:"""'T. You can delete the illlp<Jned language
again with O PTTONS ----> -"1ANAGl' MLIl.m.lNGUAl TEXIS --,> DELETE LANGUAGI'.

Exporting mId impmti,,!; /exls

'fable 2.2

Select the obj c~t in the STMATIC Managercon

mining the comment. you wamto translate, c .g.
the symbol wblc, the blvd; ~ontainer, . e ,eml
blocb or a 8ing1c block. S~IC<:t OPTIONS ---->
MANAGE M{;LTllt~GU AL TEXTS ----> EXPORT. In
the dialog window ,hI (hcn appears, emer th~
storage location oflhe ~xport fik and thc "'rg~t
bngunge, Sclect the text types that you want to
translate (Table 2 ,2) ,
A separa te file is generated for every t..xt type,
e.g. th~ fiJc SymbolCommcnl.CSv for the com ment. from the symbol table. E~i"t in g e~port
tiles can be expand~(L A log file provide s infor-

Tnt type, uf tho rran,1ated tens (se lection)

titl

itt

2.6 Online Mode

2.6

O nline Mnde

You creme the hardware confill"notion and the

"ser prugr6m Olllhe proarammina device. generally IVf"."..,d to as the engineering system
(ES). rhe S7 program is stored offiine on the
hard disk here. also in compiled fOOTI.
To transfer the progrdUl to the CPU. yo" must
connect tbe prognunminll devicc '0 thc CPU.
You establish an onlinc' connection. You cM
uSe this eotUlection to det~nnjnc the operaling
ItHtC of tbe CPU and the ~ssiiln\X1 modules . t.e.,
you can CHrty out diagnostics func!iolts .

2.6.1

C onn.,.,tinga FI.C

Thc eQnf>C"Ction between the progmmmiog

doviee, MPI in!~.,.faee Il!Id Ihc CPU's MPI
interface is the mechanical requtrement for an
online connection. The conncc1ion is unique
when B CPU is the only progu.mmahle module
c()l!nt~d. !ftllere arc severa! CPUs in th~ M1'l
subncl. each CPU mu,t be assigoed a unique
nadc Ilumber (\1PI addreSll). You set the -"11'1
addlV~ when you initiHlizc Ihe CPU. Rcfore
linkmg all the CPUs to One netwon:. connect
the pru$1"&mming device 10 only one CPU 8
time .nd trnnsfer the Syslem f)Qlo object from
Ihe oftline US<."T pmgram Blacks Or direct with
Ihe Hardware Configuration e;litor using the
menu command PLC -+ IX)w.'LOAl> . Thi.
"ssigns a CP U its own special MP I addres s
("uaming) along with the other prop~rties.

The MI'l address of a C PU in tl:e MPI network

can be chMged at any lime by mmsferri;g a
new paramet~ dala record conlllit"l1nl! the no'w
MPI add",,,,, to the C PU. Note carefully: the
new MPI ~ddres s takes effect immediately.
While the progranuning device adju.l. immediately tothe new address. you mu." adapt other
arrliea(hm~. such as global d~ta communicalions. to the !!ew MPI addrc5S .
The MI'I parameters are retained in Ihe CPU
eVen .ncr a memory rescl. The CPU can thus
be 1OddreS5ed evcn al\cr a memory reset.
A programming devicc Can alway~ be opernted
o nline on a CPU. even with a module-indcpcn"'~nt program and even thoullh nu project has
been Set up.

If "" prQj~ct has be~n . et up , you establish Ihe

~onneclion to the CPU with PLC -+ DISPLAY

AC'C[SSJDLE NODES. This seree!!s a project

window with the structure Ac{)t!fslble Node..

_ \.ladule (MPI=nf" _ Online User Program
(Sloehr. When you sde<:t the /If,xl"le objecl.
you may utili,..c the online functions, ~uc b ""
dunging the optr,uional ~Iarus and checking
the m<XIulc Status. Selecting the BIQCh object
dtsplays tbe blocks in the CPU's "set" mem"ry.
You Can then edit (modify. delete. insert) individual blO<.:ks.
You can fetch back the ~y.(cm da t~ from a con
nected CPU for the purpo~c of, say. cominuing
10 WoR: On th~ basis of the e~i~ting configu""
lion. without having the relcv"'" project in the
proinunming device daUl !IllInaaernem 5)'8lCm.
Cn:atc. new projeet in the SIMATIC :\1l1nager,
.elCCl the projeet and then PLC -+ U I'LOAD
S"rATlO __ TO Pc. After spe~ifying the desired
CPt; in the dialog box Ihat Lhen appear><, the
online system data are louded O!\lO the hard
disk.
lflhere i~ II CP1:_i nd~prnd~nl pTOKram in the
project window. create lhe as.tociated online
project window. l!several CI'lJI arc connected
to the MPI ""d actessible, .' el""'t EDIT -+
OElJFCT PRoPJ:RTlES with the online S7 pr0gram IICleeted and ""t the number of the mountinll rack and the CPU's slol on the "Addre,"n
Module mb.
If you scle<;t the S7 Program in the online win
dow .. U the online functions 1<> the cotmect<.-d
CPU..,... ""allable lO you. Bloefu show. the
bloch located in the CPU's u5Cfmemory_ lfthe
blocks in the offiine pro8fllm agn.;c with lh"
blocks in the online program you can edit the
blocu in the user memury with 100 infonnation
from the data manag~ment ~y5tem of the pro.
i1rnmming devic e (symb<:>lie address, com
menrs).
\Vh",n you switch II CI'U-.SJjKn~d p rogram
inlo online mode using VIEw -+ OSLlNl:, you
Clm carry OuL program modifielllions just as you
would in a CPU-independent program. In addilion. it it now "",""ible for you to e<mfigure th"
SIMATIC station. Lhat io. 10 sel C PU parame_
ICI"lI and address and paramelerize modules.

2.6.2

I'rottctl 0l:

th~ (;.~r

P rogra m

Wilt. aPl'ropriatc/y equipped CPUs. access to

the U1t\:r progrnm ean he protected with II pllh'
word. Evcry<>nc in pooSCl'sion of the password
has unresUicted access to the userpl'<J~:rnm. for
tho ..... who do not know the pas,word, ~(". can
defi ne J p ....ll~tion levels. You set th. ~rr>tec
t;on level' with the "ProteClioo" l" b of the
Hllrdwur~ COllfigllmti(}ll tool when pannnctCT_
,,,,;nll: Ihe C PU,
The acc eS!l ~r ivilege using the ~"".word applln
"",,llhe S IMAT IC Manager has hem exite" or
the password p'<>''''''ion cancdod again us,nj
Pl e -+ At"('fS!> IlI{;HTS -+ CA."ICEL.
"rot~lion

le,'e l , : mode sd.,.,ror s .. itch

TIli' protection level i~ sel HI def~u!! (WJ!l::out

"".sword). With CPt). with a keylock ~wil~h,
prol~tion level 1 i. used tn set protection of th.
usc, l"'lIlTK'" by the mode selector switch on
die fro tH of the CPU. Tn the }{UKP and STOP
"",itions, you have unrestrictcd acceSS to the
uSCT program; in th e RUN position , only n:!ld
lIecen via th~ programming device is possible.
IJllhis po:lilion, you can also rernO\-c the keylock 6witell,." , h.at the mode c..., nO longer be
ctlangl.'d via the ~wi'eb.

You can bypass prmection via the I:eylock

switch RUN ~irion by selecting the OptiOn
Iot cmovallic with Jl'I.~swonr. e.g. if the Cl'U,
and with il the I:eylocl: switch, are nO! easIly
""",",nible Of "'" located lit a di.tanee.
lflhe mode ~el ee'or ,wi,eh is d.:.igned as B toggl e sw ilCll, protection level 1 m ean5 &0 limiTati on in aetCi! to the user pn>gram.
With th~ system function SFC 109 PROTECT,
Ihe wri te prol~""lion (pn,tcetion level 2) Cion be
switched on pnd off via the pmgr~m in protection level I (Sfi: Chapter 20.3 .8 "Chan;:in propm protl,dion'").
ProTection Icvd 2:

1\";t~ prol~tlloD

At thi~ prutection level, the user proiO'IT! ~1ltI

o nly he read, reganlle of Ihe position of the
kcy lo>ek swilch.

f'1"tK~ elion

lenl 3: rfl"3dl .. rite protec tion

1\"0 access to the """program, regardl""", orthe

keylocl: .witch posi lion. Exception' reading <>f
diagnostics bttifer and moniloring of va nab Ie.
in tabl ... i.< pos>ible in every prolection level.
I'a~'word

p r ntettiun

If you ,elect protection [cH I 2 or 3 or protec_

t ion 1.".c1 2 with "RemovlIble with pas~w"rd",
you will be prompted to defmc ~ pa ssword. The
l"'s~word can be up 10 II characIC1"$ 10011".
Tfyou try to access a u><:t: program thai is protled "~th a pas'<Word, ),ou will be prompled to
enter the pass"ord. Befon; ~ct'Ssmg a pro1~"Ct"" CP U, you can ~t..o enter ,he pII~~word via
PlC --jo Aross RlGlITS ..... Snup. F irst, sdt
th .. relevant CPU or lhe S7 program.
Tn Ihe "Rr)[~T P ~5'WOrd. diulog 0011, you can
sel"<'f the o~tion -Use p,u~wnrd b defa"lt for
nil pro""" ",, modules" to gCI Deee~~ to /III modu l.. ~ ~mlCClcd with the ~m~ password.
I '''s~word "eee,s authorizatioll n:m uins ;n fOTCe
u~ti l the lasl S7 a~~l i"al;On ha~ been t.. nni_

'Ulled.

Every'm<: in posses"on of Ihe password has

lInreltricted 3ecc~s 10 the U$C1" proP"' in the
CPl; "'!I...-dJes. of the protection le\"el ~ and
~gardlt'Ss of Ihe keylock pOlo;"""'
2.6 ..1

C P U inform a l ;"n

In online tnO<, Ihe CPU infomuuion listed

below is availabl e to you. The menu command..
~ re screened when you have ""I~...,t~"" a modu le
(in on line mode and without a project) {" $7
prollrum (;n the online project window).
~

PLC -+ DlA(j"uSTIC/S~lTl!<.Q
--jo H..... RDWARE DlAo:.;orncs
(Ott Chapter 2 .7 . 1 "l)iagnOlling the Hard_

WII!"C"')
--jo

MOOULr; INFo\t.\(A not.!

Gene<1l1 information (such as ~rsion), diag_

no"ic~ huffer, memory (CU"""I map of
work mC"lllOry and load m emory, ""m pres~ion), cycle time (length of lhe last, longut,
Bod shonesl program cycle). timing ,y~lem
IJ)<0pi!rtie s of the CPU clock. dock syn _
chronization, run-time mctcr), perfOnrulllCe

2.6 Onl ine Mode

dala (available organi:~.n ion bJ(X;kli aDd sy.Icm blocks. sizes orlb" address arcu), communicat ivn (data lransfer rnt~ nnd CO mmnnical10n links). ,lack, in STOr stat ~
(B stack. I Slack, and L sTack)

-+ OrEIl.ATI:'G MODE
of the eUlTl:D1 operallng mode (foc
instance RUt>. o C STOP). mooific;aTion of
the oP='ting mode
[), ~play

-+ CLf.ARlRES ET
Rcs.clting oflhe CPU in STOP mode

-+

S ~r

Tn'lE Of DAY

Setting of the internal CPU doc k and . 1n

Ihe enhanced dialolt - me diffetcnce from a
lime ZOne
~

:>

PLC -+ CPU MF_'i.~AC.F_~

Rrporllng of asynchronous system crTOT!i
and or user-defined mCSSl.lgel GenCf9ted in
the program will SFC '2 WR t.:S/I.tSG,
SFC 18 AJ.ARM s. src 17 ALAFU.I_SQ,
SFC 108 ALARM D and SFC 107
ALARM DQ.
PLC -+ iJlSI'l.AY FOR.CF VAL1ffi~, PLC
MO:-fTOR./Momry VAR.IABlES

-+

(see Chaplers 2.7.3 "Monitoring aDd ~odi

fyinK Variable." and 2.7.4 ~Fordna Vari_
a ble$")

2.6.4

Lnadlng Ihe (JStr Pro!:rilm Into

the C P U

In the CIS(: ofa RAM load memory (integnlcd

in the CPU, a. a memory card o r micro mcmo'Y
card). you transfer a compl et e user program by
"WilChlllltl: thc CPU to Ihe STOI' Slate, performing memory ..."ct and trnnsferrin\!lhe user prognorn. Tbe configuration dala are aJ.o U-dUBferred.
If you only WaDI to cbange the eonfigur.llion
dalill (CPU propc!1ies, the cOllfigured connlX'tion~, GD cOnuDunicaTions, module parameTers. and 50 on). you n~ed only load Ihc System
Data obi ""t into the CPU (sclect thC objeCT and
transfer it with menu command I'LC -+ DOWl>!I.OAV). The parameters for tho CPU go imo
cireci immediately; The CPU lransfers Ihe
parllmCTcrs for the remaining ,nodule. 10 those
modules during "tartup.
Plo:asc nOle thaT The enlire: L"Onfigurdtion i.
loaded ooto the PLC witll the Sys/I'''' data
object . If )'ou I.\l'O: PLC -+ DOWN r.oAD in an
application. e.g. in global daTU communications. only (hc data ediTed Ily the Hpp l icaTion an:
transfcm:d.
NOIe: ~r:lect PLC --;. SAvt: TO MIS..I,tQRY CAKl)
to 10Hd lhe compressed arohive Ii Ir: (s.ee Chapt.c1
2.2.2 "Managing, R.eorxanizi nll and AIl::lliving-).
The project in Tbe archive file cannot be ediled
direct either "ith the programming d evice or
"om thr: CPU.
2. 6 .~

Bl ock Han dlin jt

When you U"lIn,fer your user progrnm (compiled blocks IUld configuralion dUla) to the
CPU. il is loaded into the CPU'S load 111<':1110ry.
r hy"i<,:alLy, load memory Can be I memory inTeinlled in the CPU. a memory card. or a micro
memory card (set' Cbapler 1.1.6 "CPU M ~mo'Y

1"rllMfcrrhl K bl".,k.

Area~ ).

You transfer individual blocks to the CPU b y

selectin\! them in the omine window and selecting PLC -+ Do"'NJ.OA" With Ihc offline and
online windows C>pCned al the ~ame lime. you
can also drag the block! wilh Ihe mouse from
one window and drop them in tile otb~"1".

Wilh a micro memory card or 8 flaSh EPROM

mcmo'Y cord you can wrile die card ill th .. programm in g device and usc il as d3ta m~dium .
You plug the can! into the CPI) in the off-circuit
STale: 00 power up follow ina memory re'<'I. the
rcle\"8n l dala of the card a~ transferred to the
work mcn>O'Y of{b~ CPt.:. With Ipproprialely
equ,pped CPUs. you can also OVCTWnle a fln.>h
EPRO\1 memory carn or a miero memory card
if il il plugged inlo!.he C PU. but only wiTh The
entire program.

In the eil."" of a R.AJ>.t IODd memory. yol.\ can

HI$O modIfY. delete o r reload indi vidual bLocks
in adduio" to =ferring Ihe entire program
online.

Special ~an:: is needed whcn transferring ind i

vidulll bloch during opr:ralion. I f blocks thai
Bre: OOt avaiLable in Thr: C PU memory arc called
w;lhin a block.. you mUSI firsl load the "I",,'crle,"er' blocu. This also applies ror data bl(X;ks
whose au dr\;sscs Hrc used in the loaded block".

2 STEP 1 Prujlrlln,m;ng Suftwate:

You load Ihe highesl le,er block last. Then.
prov;d~-d it is ",,1100. it will be ex ecuted immediately in Ihe ne"{ program cyele.
Modlfyln!,:: or delellng blocks online
Ynu can edit bloch incrementally wilh STL in
the online u~er program (on the CPU) in ~xa cI Jy
the 8ante way as in the offline mer proW.. ,n.
With a pro:,:rammint: dc,icc connected online
to the CPU. you can read. modify or d~lele
blocks in Ihe load memory.
If the RAM eomp<mcnl of the load m~mO\)' is
I~e Cfl()u~ II) acoommodate the C<lmplCie
IW'I" program and also the modified blocks. you
can edit bloch ""ithoUllimilation.
Iflhe user program i. sa,ed on II nll.5b. EPROM
memory ""rd, you Can cdil the blocks asll)na as
the RAM eom('>Onem of the load memory i~
!Drge enough 10 accommodate the modiliod
blod.s. Dwino; rumime, the modified blocks in
the RAM nrc ~a]jd. Ih ose in the FEPROM IS
invalid. rlea.e nOlO Ihat you must I""d Ihe original blook.s again from the FEPROM into Ihe
work mcmory following an overa!1 reset 0.'''.on-burrered ~wilchin8 on.
If you U'"' II micro memory card such ... C.Il.
wi lh the compact CPUs. all bl""ks in the load
memory are oon_volatile. You can modify indiv idwd blocl<s online. nnd tbese hlock:l Mall!
tbtti r ehl<ngClr e,cn fo llo"<IDg an 0........... 11 re~ct or
non-buffered $witehing on. Dckted block. are
then no longer e xi"ent.
In Lm.,rmuental prollnlIIllIling mod~, )lvu ~Hn
mooify bloch< independent of one another in
th~ oillinc data management on the programming devioe and in tbe online data manugement
on \~e CPU. However, [fonline MId omin~ uHla
man-asconent divcrge, it may n:sol! in t~e ed,tM
being unablc to di~play the additional informatio n of the omine database: !bese dina can thom
be lusl (~ymboJje idenlifiers.ju.:np labcl~, ~om
tn~'ltS. uwr dllllt lypcti).
Blocks thaI have been modified online are I>e.<t
stored oftline o n the hard disk to avoid dma
iIl<.'Oll~i>lell<.'y (c.t:. a time ,tamp conflict
when the i"teTraee of the called block is later
than the program in the calling block).

The following ,till applies CVo:tl if you "or:k

online: with FlLE ---+ SAVE you $ave the eUf'"l"Cnt
block in the offline uscrprogrnm in the PO data
manaw:ement; with PLC _ DOW/,>WAV yOlJ
v,..rite the block back into the user memory ROO
the CPU.
Comp .... soing
W~om

you load a new or modified block into

the CPU. the cru plac~ the block in load
memory and IransfcnI the relevanl data to worl<
memory. If tbere is already a block with the
same number, this "old b lock" is dedared
invalid (following a prompt for confirmation)
and the new block "added on at the end' in
memory. Even a deleted block i8 only"
declared invalid. not actually ~mo"ed from
memoryThis result, in &Ilf>" in user mcmO!")' whi ch
increasinw:ly r.-duee the amount of memory still
availahle. Th~se gap' Can be filled on ly by the
CompreH function. When you eompre$s in
RUN mode. the blo<;b currently heini c"ecUled are not relocated; only in STOP mode can
you truly achk~c compres.'ion withoul g"p".
The eurrctJt memory allocation ~an be di s_
plnyed in percenl with the menu eommand PLC
_

DIAG:<osnclS[;1"1l1'oG ..... MOPULIl Jl'."1'OR-

\.tATIO". On the -Memory \.lib. The dialog 00"

"",eh then appean also ha.ii a bunon for pre\"enti~e eompressiOD.

You can initiate ",-'ent_driven compre~ing p<.'r

pmgram wilh th~ c a ll SFC 25 COMl'RESS.
0018

b locks olTIineiulIllnc

I)urino:: programming. you ~~sign tile dam

addrc,"cs in a data b lock wilh I' default value
and an initial ~alue (see a lso Chapter 3.4 .. f'ro.grnmming Data Blocks'). If a datM block is
loaded into the CPU. the imtial valUe!! ftre traM_
r=cd to load memory and subsequentlY to
work memory, ... here they become ....'ua1 values. Every value change made to a <!alii address
p<.:r program corrcspond~ 10 a change to the
aClual ,a.lue in the work memO\)' (Figure 2.13).
You ean upload thc actual val ues gl'nCrlltCd in
lhe ... ork memory from a programmed (loaded)
data bluck into the offlinc d" ln management by
opening thc dnta block On 1in~ ""d transferring it

2.6 Online Mode

If a spoci.1 .",n ".lue

.. "'" p"'f-rammod.
!he del...... "
is usN

""we

IMiaI value
When dnwnk"dWjj; '"

lh~

rpu.

lhe .an v.luo f\, ' ","" f< "",~

from !he .>11]'''0 data manall"mrnl ... 1<>&4

!l_d . .

""""Dry.

mory

bluc~ _
...-.r h....,
UNlJ"Kl:.D zrrrib"",.
!he ...... vahle is .....~ '"

If ''''' do..
~

rl

I
'1 ' ' ' ;
I

Who" tra"'f=;~8 til<

""I".e bIo<t ,,., rho omi ....

dar.~,

-~
WW;O',".C~;;;;'m'o;;;;.;------- / '

"aj"" ;.

""""

'.

,.".,ao:rUaJ

rbo: ""'"

~"'...,. Tho >tart , . ,,,,, '"

the ~ m<:m<><)' i, 1101'
inn' .... <'Od by !lr..

Initial vaIu ..

~[t..;.. .... ,

:"~2l"~~..:'~~
... ilEAl) DRr _
WRIT .DDL
i1

Adua/ ~ a lu"

in the

pro~m editor 10 the oftline data management using FILE ---} SAVE. TIK: nameS of lhe
vari~bles and !.he data tyPCs sa~ed in the offline
dala manaijcment are 'hen rers ined. If yo"
upload Ibe onl ine dma b lock in the SIMATI C
Manager n.ing I' LC ---} UPI .OAD TO PO or by
dragging Ihe d~la block from Ihe online win.
dow to the omine ""i ndow in the offline dalD
onanagemem. 'he descriptiotl of Ihc addresoes.
such as c.g. the Mme of the variables or the dala
Iypc, i. 1000t .

lfyou upload a data block from the CPU back

iOI<> the omine data management . the actual
~alucs pre".;nl in the work me mory are
imported mta tbe omine data management as
inil ial ~a lues . This does not change Ihe initial
values in the load m~mory. Following an ovcra ll r~sel or nUD-buff,,-rcd switching on, and
" ' hen nsinll a nuh EP ROM memory card or a
m icro memory card, the (old) initial valu~s
PTCScnl in the load memory are import~..J ;",0
Ihe work mCDlOry as (new) actual valuc~.

SIT 5<

..

'1"110: O\UI , ~tu. bt<;"",,,.

'he ""uol ,' atll~ in rho: work

mo"w'~. The actual ,.~""
;"11>< ""I ... madiO..l by
<hoc (1Jtt _",n.

If you wish to import the Bernal ~"lue.~ into the

load memory when nsmg a RAM load memOf'Y
or a mi~'TO rmmory eard. l<>ad lhe data b lock
from the CPU into the prolll1'mminll d cvice alld
then haek again into thc CPU. CPUs wilh mi~ro
mem ory <.:fiTd provi de the syst~'1n functiun ~FC
84 WRIT_ DilL with which you clln directly
write actual w lues in\{) the load memory. Wilh
correspondingly d~;gned c ruS, you can InInsfer the complele eonlems <>f t~ work memory
into the ROM comp<:>nenl of Ihe load memory
using PLC ~ COpy RAM TO ROM.
A wna b lock gel]enltcd with tbe property

Unlinked is Dot IJaIIllfcrTed 10 "..or!< memory; il

remains in load memory. A data hlock wit h Ih is
property can only be read with SFC 20 BL KMaYor - with corrCSp<)nd in8l y des igned
CPUs-with SFC 83 READ_OB L.
III incrementa] programming mode, you ean
create dala block'l direClly;n the work ~mory
of the CPU. It is recommerldable to a lso ..,ve

2 STEP 7 Programm inl! S()i'tv"are

Ihe.e blocks
been ~rcalcd.

oftlin~

immediately Ihey have

With the system f\ln~li()ns SFC 22 CR.AT_

DB. SI'C 85 CREA DB and SFC 82 CRT'A_
DB L you can genemtc dara b locks during runtime where Ihe d escriplion of lhe addre",~ s,
5uch a.s the "am~ of the v ariah le and Ihe type of
da la, arc missing. When re ading with the pm_
gramming device , a I:IYTE field with" name
and in dex assigned by the program editor is
th ercfore d i,playe d.Ifyou tr~nsfer such a dam
block to Ihe om ine data management, this duelaral io n is imponcd . If the data b lock has Ihe
property Un/inked, th ~ ini ti~l valu~8 from Ihe
lo~d memo ry are imponed into th~ oftline data
manag~ment as neW ,m lial valu~s . otherwis e
th~ aelual "alllC' from the work m <:ruory. Wh~"I1
tran sferring to the offiine daw managemenL Ih e
e hed,,;um of thc (offiine) pmgram is ch anged ,

2_7

Testing th e P rogram

After e "lablishing a conneclion t() a CI'U and

loading the user progr"m, you can lest (debug)
the program as a whole or in pan, such as ind ividu al b loch _ You initialize the varia bles w ith
<i g nals an d v alucs, c.g. with thc h elp of s imula tor module, and evaluate Ihe infoffilat ion
rel 11med b y your program. If Ihe CPU goes 10
the STOP state a, a r ~ su l l of an error. you can
get sUPP<lf"\ in finding the cau,e of th~ error
from the CP U information mnoug othcr th ings_
Extcnshe p rograms are debugged in sc~t io=.
ff, for e xample, you only want to debug one
h lock, load this block into the CPU and call it in
OB I. t fOH 1 is organized is in s ueh a w ay Ihat
the program can b e debugged sec tion hy 8cClion
"'hOln beginning to e nd". y ou can select the
bl ock s or program section;; for debugginl! by
u sing ju m p fu nctions to s kip those calls or progI""dlII ,~~ tions thaI arc not to bc deb ugged ,
W ith the S7 PLCSL\1 optiona l softwa re . yon
can simulate a CPU on the p ro ..:nmuning device
a nd so debug your program w ithout ad d itional
hardw"rc_

thc h elp of Ihe function "'Diagnose Hardware ".

Yon co nnec t the pml.""mming device t() th~
MPI bu s and stan the SIMATlC :\1anagcr.
!fthc project as socia led w ith the plan! configu_
ra tion i s a vailable in the progra.tmniT1S device
databa_,e. open th c online project w in dow with
V IEW ..... O'NLrnT. Olh~rwisc , ,e lect P LC --->
D ISPL .... y A CCfSSlllLE NODES in the SLvlAT IC
M a nager, and s ~k~\ the CPU .
Now you can gel a q ui~k overview of the fauity
modu les w ith PLC --> DIAGNOST Ic/SETTI NG .....
HAlW WARE DIAGNOSTICS (default In the
SIMATIC Manager lInrl .,,- O J'nONS ----> ClJsTO)'flZE in Ih~ tab "Vie,,~'). If the quick overview i. dc.elcc led, you are provided with the
detailed d iagnostics in fonnation of all nl{>d"I~s ,
l fyuu ar~ in the lIard"'arc Configu ration tool ,
8e1ect Ihe onl i n ~ vicw u,ing VlLW -lo ON LL, E,
You ~'lll now d isplay the existing di agno"ties
information for the sele cted module ""ing PLC
-lo MODIiLr. Jl','FOR.'I,fATlO,,.

2. 7_2

D ctcnninlnR t h e Ca u se of a STOP

If the CPU gCK""S 10 STO P because of an CfTor,

th e liThI m ~a.sure to tak e in order In d etermine
the re~son for the STOP is to ou tput the d iag nosti~s buffer. TIle CPU enters all m essages in
Ihe di agnostic buITer, including the rea s on for a
STO P and the e rrol";<; w hich led to iI,
To OUlpUl the d iagnostic buffer, switch th e PO
to onlin ~, select an S7 program, and choo8e the
"D ia gnostics BulT~r'- tab with the menu commami PLC --> D IAGNOSnc/S FTTDIG ..... MODULE INFORMATION. The last event (Ihe one with
the number I) is the Cause of the STOP. for
instanc e '"STOP because programming efror
OB not lo ad~d - . n , e error which led to the
STOP is described in the pre ce d ing me"~ge ,
for c .... amplc "FC not Inaded" , By ~licki " g on
the me~sagc n umber, you can screen an add it iona l com m e n! in Ihe ne.~ t lower display field .
lftbe message re lates to a programming error in
a block, yo" Can opcn and edit that b lock with
th e "Open Bl ock" button.
STOP is. for exa m ple. ~ p rogramming eITor. you Can asecna in the surround ing ,: ,n:umst ance s with the " Stacks" lab_
\\'hen yo u open "Slach"". you will ,ee the B
sl a~ k ( b lock stack) , w hiCh s hows you Ihe call

If the cause

2. 7.1

D iagn os ing

t h~

H a rdwa "e

In the event of a r""It , yo" ean fetch the diagnostics informalinn nf th c fanlty modu les with

ofth~

2.7 TOI-tinathePrognm
path ()f ..U n()n_t~nnillated blocks up to the
block contain in g t~e interrupt point. U.e th,, ']
~ I ack' button to 8creClI the interrupt stack,
which ~how. you the COntentS of the CPU regist~T!l (accumulators. address r.:ais:er. data
block "'ii'ler, stalUs word) at thc in'"Tnlpt
point at the inst.ant the error occurred. Tbc L
s\.IIck (local data stack) shows
block's temporary local data. which YOII sclC<.'t in the 11
slack by clic king with the molls.:.

me

Plellse note tha\ YOll can only modify d.!ta

"ddre es iI tbe wrile protection for the data
hlock i~ switched off, i. e. the block l' rop"ny Dfl
Is ""t"II~_"ml~ckd in Ihe AS ill n01 nClivatcJ.
Opcl"\I.nds in data hlod..:s with Ihe block propert y
Unlmked cannot be monitored since the." data
blocks are located in the load memory on the
micro memory card. A one-off updale takes
plan who:n lh" data block is opcIled online.

Caution. Y"u mus'

s'al~.1

2.7.3

,\lonllorinl: and

/ll o d lf~ ln l:

VarIab le.

One exceUc[}\ resource fordebugging user prc>i, the monitoring and modif)"ing ofvari_
Bble~ with VAT ~"ariable table". Sigm" Slates or
values of "ariabl~ of dementllI)" data types can
be displayed. !fyou have aeees. to the uscrprc>pm. you can also modify variables, i.c.
cllilnge the .igllal state or usign new values .

gr.tm~

FI Ku r" l.U Variable Tahl. Eumpl"

etW'", '/lUi no dongerou..

Can ",sullfrom mmlifjj/lk mrl"b/e.. !

Cru tltl]:t a va rl a hle rabk

For monitoriog and modifyinll variable.., you
mu~t C~a!e a VAT variable table containing the
unables and the as.<ocll'llCd data fOflT1alS. You
can gmtra!e up 10 2SS variable u.bl~. (VAT 1 10
VAT 2SS) and ...,sign them names. Toc m.ax imum !ize of a ,ariable table is 1024 lines wilh
up to 2~S characters (Figure 2.14).

You can g~ncnll" a VAT oftline by $"le~linl:: Ihe

p"'lP""m Hh..ks ...,<1 Ihen l.>'SCRT ..... S7
BLOCK ..... VI\IUNlU! TtillLL. and you cltn ,en~-r~IC Iln unn..mcd VAT online by selecl ing S'
Program and 5<'1ec1illg PLC ..... MO~tTOpJ
M oolI'Y VI\!UI\IlLeS.
US/,,-r

YO LI Can ~ t">ee i fy the va riahl"" with e ith er nbsoIm e or symbolic addresse s and cl,,><>se tbe dUTU
type (di~play lonnal) wilh which a varigbl~ is 10
be disp lltyed and mod ifi ed (wilh ViI::" .....
Sr:L[CT DlSnAY FORMAT or by clicking the
ri,hl muu~ bUlion dircclly on the Disp lay fl'rmat").
Usc COmnlenl lines 10 b";\,C specIfic sce,ion~ l'f
the table _ header. You may also stipula'e which
columns are to be displayed.. You can c hange
variable ordi~pby rommt or add or ddele line~
al any tilllC. You ~\'e Ihe variable table in Ihe
HIOl"b object con"'iner wilh TAB!..!; ..... SI\V.
E~tllbU5 hl nlt

a u oulin e eon n ectiun

To operate a va ri able table th'" has been ~rcatcd

otUine, switch ilouliue wilh PLC...., CONl<o1::CT
To ........ online. Yuu must switch each individ_
WI.! VAT o n linc and you can clear down Ihe coonection "gain with PLC --} DlsaJ'>."NF.CI.

\ Ion;turi nx ,a rt. h le...

SelC<."t fhe :\Ionilor funetioD wilh Ihe menu
con,mand V-'lUAlIUl ..... M OKITOI(. The vari_
abl .... in the VAT"", updated in accordancc wilb
the specified triS8C1" condition.. Pcnnanenl
mor.ilofill g a llows you to follow change . in Ihe
values on the """,cn. The v ..1ue. lire disp layed
in Ihe daTa fon n at which YOLl .et in the 'D i'play
formal" column. The ESC key temlinales n p~r
",~nent mo.::lllor fWlctinn.
VAlUABLE ... ACTIV ... re M OD tr:v Vi\LU':S
the monitor values on",c only and
immediutely w;lhout regard '0 'he specified
trigger ~"OIldition8.
update~

) Iod if)ina; , .. rlab l...

Use VAIUABL(' ''' MODifY \0 ,ransfcrthc ~pcc
ir.~d "aluc~ 10 the CPU ,kpendent on the trigg~r
conditions . Enl~"T v alues only in Ihe Ih,e. eonI" inin, the variab les you want In ,,.,od if'y. You
can c ~pand th e commentary for a ,-a1u, .... ith
'Ir or w id , V>UUAlII.Il ..... MOllifY VAI.UIO AS
COM-'lL"'; th~,c values arc nOl laiL"TI iuto
accounl for modificat ion. YOII must define Ihe
\"alu~s in the da la fOlTlllll which you sci in ,he
Display rurmat" column. Only Ihe value5 visible on 'taning ,ilc modifY fU'lOtion BTl: modified. The t:SC key t~rrninate~ a permanent mod_
If)' function.

,l:.

In Ihe variable table .elect V... IUAlILE ..... TlI.Klou to " tthe Trigg:~r point and the tri;:;:cr CODd1tiQn~ $Cpamlciy for mon itoring and modify_
in g. The trigger point is the poiot "t which the
CP U rends vu lLles from th e system memory or
wri lC$ values II) Inc system memory. You 'P""'if)' w h ethcr read ing and writing is to lake plnce
ODCC or pt:riodically.

VAaIABLI: ..... Al.11V...

MODtFY VI\LL~
ttnn.sfen Ihe modifY values <lnly on<'e and
IIIIIDCdiatcly. withom ~\,;ard to thc ~pcdfied
trigger condi ,;uru;.

2 .7.4

Forci ng VwrlllbJ u

Wilh appropriately e<juippt:d crus. you can

specify tixed value. for certain variable . 1bc
uscr prol7"'ll can no lon,er change the,,", value.
("[ordng). Forcing is pe"n;~s;ble in any CP U
openlling 'lat~ and i~ exenned imnledi .. lely.

If monitoring and modifying hav~ tbe 5IIme

triggcr Condit;01l~, monitoring is carried OUI
bc r(l1"C modifying. If you selecl the uigser f"l'Omt
"Sta" o f cycle' for modifYing, Ihe variables are
modified afl~r updaling of the procCi. inPUt
image itOO heron: eallin!,:: O F! I. If you selccII"e
trigger point "End of cycle for In<>D..itoring. the
~lal US vMill"" MTC displayed after lerminalion of
013 I a nd before OUlPUI of 'he proces~ OUtllUI

The starting point fur forcing i< a "ariJ.bJc table

(VAT). Create II VAT, cDtcr the addfa<c~ (0 be
forc~d and establish II. conne~liun 10 the CPU.
You can open a window containing the fOl\:"
,'ailles by sel ~cting VAltJ..'\DL[ ..... DlsPI .... y

Lm:,;:c .

FOR.ce V ... L1WS.

Call1ton: yt1U must eTUurt! Ihul no dang~'TOu"

..fOft:.S can result from fOlrmg l"Oriuhl.,.,,!

2.7 Tesrillll the Pl'Oj:Jtw

If there are aLre-.ody force "alu~s active in the
CPU. these "'"" indkated in the force window in
bold type. You can nOw transfer some or aU
ad dTC5!<es from the variable table to th" for.::e
window or enter new add",,,ses. You foa'"C 'he
e()nten1~ of a toree wind ow ,n II VAT with
TABLE -+ SAVIi AS .
The followina address area. ca n he provided
with II fOTCe value :
t>

Inputll (preens image)

[S7-300 ami S7-4001

t>

OutputS Q (proces5 image)

[S7300 nnd S7-400]

t>

,''''';phernl inputs PI
[57-400]

t>

Peripheral outputs PQ
[S7-400)

:>

Memory hi t ~ M
)S7-400]

You stan Ihe for~c job with VARlABU! -+

FOR.CIi. The CPU accepts the force valL.lC' and
p"'mut~ no mo,e changes to the lorc<:d

addrcs!<eS.
While the foree function u. aclive, the foUo,," ina
"""liel:

Fcm:ioll is also deleled by memory n:$et Or by a

P""'CT failure if the CPU is not battery-backed.
When forcing is tenninated. the lIdd rdlsc.
retllin the forcc vlIlues until o,"crwritten by
~itbcr the user program Of the ~y~tem program .
Forcing;' dYcdivc only on 110 lIssigncd to a
CPU. If. following TCstan. forced peri ph... ral
inp"ts and outputs a re no longer "SlJ igned (c.g.
a~ a resu lt of r~pa mmetcri:Ging). eh ... relevant
peripheral inputs and outputs an.: no lODger
for.::ed.
E rro r h andling
Tfth... aeCCS5 width when reading is greae~"T than
Ille force width (c.g. forced byte in a wOt"d), the
unforced component of the address value ill
read as usual. If a synchroni~al1oo error ""'CUIS
here (pc,",c"" <.>T arca lcogth CITOJ") tt.c "'error substitllle valuc" specified by th~ user progr..m o r
by th~ CPU is read or the CPU goe!l CO STOP.
rf, when writing. the access wideh is gre"tcr
Ihan Ihe force width (c.g . forced byte in a
word). the =forced comp'".,e,,! of tlte udd rcss
vuhl~ is "'ritten to as u<un1. An ~""mlred w rite
acc~ss leave. the toreed componem of the
address urrchanged. i.e. ~he wrice prutcction is
DOl reVOked by ,lte ~ynchmni:allion crror.

All read acce.~ to a forced addre,,~ via the

user T'rogram (e.g. load) and via the systcm
T'rogrwn ("11. vpdatmg of the prace".
image) always yield the force value.

Loading forced pcripheml inpul.>l yields 11K

force value. Ifthe acc::ess width D(:TC-e!I w ith ehe
forc::e width. input mooulcs that have fniled u r
hD'... not (yet) been plugged in can be
""rqllll(;ed" by .. fOTCe value.

'" On tIrcS7-400, alJ ...rit"It(X'"";;~ 10 II ~

IKIdres5 viu the US~"T progmm (c.g . Iransfer)
a nd via thc syst~'" program (c.g. via SrCI)
re ,uain w ithout effec t O n the S7300. the
uscr program Cnn ovelWrite the force val_
UC$.

T hc inpor I in <be pr.....,,,,,,, imag.: belo"ging ro,.

fOr<:~d peripheral input PI is not forced; it i~ not
preas~i l>Dcd and can sti ll he overwTitl~n. \Vhen
updating lhe process 'mnge. the i'l["Iul receives
!.hc for.::~ value of the peripheral innut.

t>

Forcing on eh~ S7-300 corresponds co cydic

modifying: aftcr the process input image ha~
been updated, th ... CPU o,..,rwrites the inpuUl
with the force value: before the pr<>ees, outpul
image is OUtput, th~ C P U oWf'nites the oucputs
wieh ehe force valuc.
NUl,,: lorclng is '101 lerminaled by du.,inK III...
lorce w;nuowor Ihl! , ... rlab/e /able. or by b1V'Qkinc tit", ccmnrfcm 10 tit.. CPU! Yo" "m, only
ddele olorr:ejvb w;th VA'ITARtE -+ STOP FOJi;C",,0.

"so-

When forcing peripheral outputs PQ. the

c;"ted Output Q in the pf""'CS~ imag~ is not
updaled and n<ll forced (fon:ing is only cITe<:the "cxternally" to 'he mooule oulpuL~). The
outputS Q are rctained and can be overwritten;
reading the outputs yields Ihc wri"~n vlllue (no,
the forc~ value). If an output module is forccc.l
and if Ibis module fails or is "'moved. it will
recei,"e Ibe force value again immediately on
",connection.
Thc Output modules OUtpUI tii!!na! STate "'Q'" or
th~ substitute valu e with thc OD signa l (uisaltle

89

2 STEP 7 Programming: Sofuvare

output module, at STOP, HOLD o r REST>\RT)

- even if the peripheral outputs are forced
(excc~ption: analog module, wilham 00 evalu_
ation continuc [0 output [he forcc value). If the
00 5ignal i. deactivated, thc force va lue
becomes effective again.

If, in STOP mod~, the function En"blc PQ is

activated, the force value s a l,o become effective in STOP mode (due 10 deactivation of the
00 signal). When Enable PQ is term inatcd, [hc
modules are set back to the "safe" state (_;gnal
,tat~ "0" or ~ub.ti lutc v alue): th e force valuc
becomes eff""tiv~ again at the transition to

RUN.
2.7.5

Enabling Peripheral Output.,

Itl STOP mode, the oUlpm modllks are normally disabled by the 00 s ignal; Wi lh th e
Enable peripheral oUlputs [unct ion . you can
d~act;vate the on signal 00 lhat you can modify
the outpm module. ev." at CPU STOP. Modi_
fying i. earried am via a variable mhle. Only
the peripheral ompms ass ign ed to a CPU are
modified. Pos,ihle apr>lic3Iion : wiring test of
the oUlr>m lit STOP and without US~r program.

Camion: you mil'" e'".,m' that no daflRcmu.<

stales am re~u/l jr"m e""bling the paiphera/
oulp",,.'
Create a variable table and enter th~ peripheral
outpul<, (l'Q) ami the modify value, . Swi tch thc
variable table online with PLC -.> CONl-.'ECT 10
-.> ... and stop Ihe CPU ifne~essary, e.g . with
PLC -.> OPEItATlNG MO DE and "STOP"

tion to REST ART and deactivated again at the

transition to RUN.

2 .7.6

Test and process operation

The rceording Df the program ,tarns infmmation re quircs additional cxecmion time in the
proo:r.un cycle. For this reason, you can choose
two opcrating modes for debugging purposes:
tes[ mode and process mode . In test ",odi!, all
dchugging functions can be uscd Wilhout nostricllOll. You wo"ld selcct thi" for examp le, 10
deblJll blocks w ithout conn~ction to the system,
b~~ao,e this can s ignificantly increase the cy_
clic cxe~ution time . 1n pmces.< mode, care is
tak~n 10 keep the inercase in eycle time 10 a
minimum and th i< usults in debugging re'tric_
lion" e.g. Ihe starns display with progranlloops
i, aborted at the return po int. n~bul':;:ing :,nd
,tep-by-~{ep program execmiC>ll cannot be per_
fonned in process operat ion.
Test mode is set in lh~ factory on the 57-300
C PUs . You can sct lest or p race .. mooe 0"
these CPU s with thc Hardware Connguration
on the "I'rotcction"tah . Following thi . the configurlltion mu,t be compiled again and downl()aded to the C P U.
The process mode is set in the factory on the
S7-400 CPu s. You ean change the operating
mode online w ith th e "Pwb'l'anl E-ditor. DEBUG
-.> OPERATION .. displays the set operating
modc and offers the facil ity of changing this on line.

You deactivate tho OD signal V"'-PlARL E -.>

E~ABLE PERII'HEKAL OUTP\JTS: the module
output" now have 'ignal state "0" or the substinne value or force value . You mod ify the
JX'Iipheral ootputs with VAlUAll L E -.> ACT!VATE MODIFY VALUES. Yo" ~"" chan ge the
modify value and modify again .

\\,ith the Pmgram status function, Ihe progrllm

edito r provick:s an additional tcst melhod [or the
u,er program. The editor shows you th~ binary
signal flow and digim l value, w ith in a network.

You can ,witch the fun~tion off agai{l by "clceting VARlAlILt: -.> NAilLE PERIPHERAL O UTPUTS again, or by pressing the ESC key. The
00 "ignal is then active again. the modu le ou tputs au set to "0" ,md the substitute v al"" Or Ihe
foree value i, re,c!.

The block whose rrogram you want to de bug is

in thc CPU's u,er memory and is called and
ed ited th ~r~. Open this block, for example by
dOllb le -cl icking on it in lhe SIMATlC M,mager" onlmc w indow. Thc editor is stancd and
shows the' program in the block .

If STOP is exited while "enah le peripheral outputs' is 5till active , all p"ripheral inputs arc
deleted, the 00 signal is activllled at ilie transi-

SeieClth e network you want to debug. Activate

the Program Statl," function with DEBUG -.>
_\1UNlTUR. '-low you ~an see the binary . ignal

2.7.7

LADfFBO Progrum

St atu~

'2 .7 Tcstin& Ihe Program

E . . .
.........
.........

.........
,...... .

"

" --"

" --"
"--'

..-......
.-......
. -- ~.

".--0'

....
.j

.,

>

." . ..

'..
..
0

"._......

.,

.,.,'

" ' lU..., 2. 15 LADfFBD prtrif1l'" StUUt

now ,n the bl"",k window and you can follow

the changes in it (Figure 2 .! ~). You de tine the
reprcscntnlion (e.g . color) in the proiram editor
with OPTtONS -> CUSTOMIZE on the "LADI
FBD" tab. You can de acliv"e the PrOiram Sla tuS function again by selectinlil: D EBUG -. MON
lTOR agai n.
You SCI Ihe trigger conditions With D EBt.:G ->
CALL ENVlRO)<MENT with debug mode
switched on (see chapler 2.7.6 "Test and pmcess ope-ration"). You requir<: thil sc ning if me
block 10 be debogged ;s cu lled mOre Ihan once
in your program. You can inil iute statl.,s record.
ing eilher by specifying the caU pa th (deter
n"ned from Ihe: reference dala or manually) or
b y milki ng il dependem on Ihe opened data
bloc:ks w~n calling the bloc:k 10 ~ debugged.
[f you do not set the call env'ronment. you
monilor the bloc:k when it is cailed for Ibc tirst
time.

l\ l odl~'[ng

addressfi

YOll can modify addre.~es in the program 8,ams

function. If the address is of dala type BOaL.
mark il and selec! DEBuq -+ MODIFY ADDRESS
TO 0 o r DEB UG -+ MODIFY AOUM.(SS TO I. With
a different data iyp<". ..,leet Dr.sUG -+ MODifY
ADDRESS, and = t .... the modified va luc for the
marked address in the dia log box displaycd_

Opera tio ns on Ihe

~onta~1

In Ihe Prollram Starns function, you cDn directly

mo-d ify b in..f"y input. and bit me mories in the
user prOjp"llm by mcan~ ofa button. The fo!lowin" prerequi.ites exist for thi S funClion;
~

In Ihe symbol table. yo u 115silln Ihe inputs

and bi t memorieJ with the B"ribute CC
(Control at Contact, $ee "Spo..-cial object
propenie. in C hapter 2.5.2 "Symbol
Tnble).

2 STEP 7 Programming SoftW2lJe

.. You have enabled operatioJ\!S on the contact
in the program editor using OPTIo!'S -+
CUSTOMIZE on the MG<:11CTaZ" tab.
.. YOI,I arc online in the program 51al1,l5 with
OF.Il UG -+ MONffOR and additionally sele<:t
OfJIUa -+ CONTROL AT co:-"rACT.
The symbols and addresses of the binal)' inpuIJ
and bit memories arc d isp layed n hl,lnons
which you Can acc ~ss using Ihe mouse.
Addresses programmed "" NO conta(:U or
addresses with scanning for signalstarus 'Z
Ihen delivCT lhe address status 'T'; addrt"s~s
projrBmn ..."d lOS NC contacts or a.dd~sses with
scanning for signaZ status '11' deli"er the slarus
.1)'. when accessed_ You can I,Ise lhe CtrllSIrJI
key and the mou"," to selcct several add~sscs
and 10 access them simultaneously when oper.
ating on the COntacl. You deselC'Ct the operands
in the .same manner.
Monitoring and Modlfyln!:
Addrcnes

2.7.11

I)~ t.

If the vHriHblcs to be debugged are present in

data hlocks, you can also view and modify them
di re<:tly. Se1ectthe data block in the SfMATrc
Manag<cr and selC'Ct EOIT -+ OPE!" OBJECT.
With STE P 7 V5.2 and later. you will be uked
in the default sctting whether you wish to open
the data bLock using the program editor or lISing
the application Parameter assignment for data
bLocks
M

Switch lhe data vicw on in the program editor

using VIEW -+ DATA VIEW. and ...,lcct DEBI,O

92

_Mo=R.

YOI,I Can now

VICW

the .~Iual val-

u"" in tbe wor!< memory. and alS(! SC1 (modify)

them if =iuired. U.ing PLC -+ DOWNLOAD.
download Ibe modified BoCI\1aI values into the
work m~mol)'. or usc FILE -+ SAVE to impon
Ihe modified values into the omine data management (first switched off OBBUO -+ MON ITOR).

Using Parameter assiillment for dnt~ blocks'

you Can directly view and modify Ihc actual
values in the work memory of the C PU. You
Can also view the actual values here lIlling
DEIlIJO -+ MONITOR. and you Can also adjllllt
them. U'illg PlC -+ DOWNLOAD PARAMETER
SETlTh'G DATA you have lhe possibility for only
wriling the actual values into the work memOf}',
and nOithe complete data block. Uling DATA
BLOCK -+ SAVE you can impon Ihe data block
into the omine data management.
The advantag e of Ihe appli,ation Parameter
assignment for data blocks' i5 to be fOl,lnd in the
poSSibility for displaying and panunetcri>:ing
data bloch in the pllr1lmeterization vlew_ Prerequisite : the sy.t"," 8t1ribute $7_t""'},parum
(1lInologica\ functions) ;5 SC1. Mnd a parame_
terizatIon desktop is avai lahle, e.g. from an
option package_ Figure 2.16 $hOWl! compari.
SOD hetween panuneterizalion vicw and data
view Wling an example of the iMta...:c data
block for the controller function block FB 58
TCONT_CP from lite standard library PID
Comrol Blocks_ Its para meterization desktop is
supplied together with STI,P 7.

2.7 Tdtina the Proj.rarn

-'.-

--"'-

,-

..----

---.
-.,...
----- . -

......... v_.

,.,..

,III

'-

"

3 SlMATIC S1 Program

SIMATIC S7 Program

This chapu:r ~hows you the srrucrur~ of lhe u~cr

proJIT~"' (or th~ SIMATIC &7 -300/400 CPU,
starring from lhe diflb-cnl priority c1a~~s (pro8111m ucculioll types) via lhe eo"'ron ....! part.
of & user prowam (hlockll) right up lu the ,,.rif\hlcs atld dat~ lyp"". The focu.< of this chapter
is the descriplion of block prugrammins .",.iLb
LAD and r RO. Following lhi.:I i, a dCliCripuUll
uf the dalll IYJICS.

You dcfine lhe structure of the us .... prorm

ri&ht bad:: al lhe de8ign phase when y()u .11.;op1
the teclmological and fWl~tiunal C(lndiliOn:.; it
;~ deci~ivc for program creation . program test
and ~l"rtup. To achieve eflect ive prugramming.
it is therefore nece~sary to d"'Ole '~;al &ll.ent;on to Ihe pmgr:am stTU<.'turc.

3.1

Program Processin!::

Tile ovendl program for a CPU consists ()f the

operating system and Ihe user progfll.m.
Tho operating .ystem is the totality of all
imtrucHon! ond declaralion' wh ich comrol the
5y~tem re,nUTCe' and the processes u,;nQthc sc
rc,wurc.::s, and includes ,uch thi ngs as dala
b>l<:kup in tne C,"""l1t ufa power tailur". the actio
~ .. liou of priority daSS<.'s. and ." , on. The orer
at;ug system is a ~omponenl of the CPU I()
",.hich you, a~ u~er, have no wme access. HOw ever, yOll can rclOild the OJ><"I31ing sy.tem from
a m<.TOOty card. for instance in the event of a
pmgt1lm update.
The Us('T program is thc total ity o f all instn1Ction~ Hnd ded,Il<llioru; for sigllal proce.~sing,
through .. lIich a plant (process) is affect~d in
accordance with Inc <icfined contmlt,"s!..

3.1. 1

P rollr am

l'roc.~ssj n lll\ftlhods

The o.1.'ieT pTUgram may be comj>Of;Cd of 1'1"0gram sections which Ih~ CI'U processt'S in
dCpol'ndet1ce OIl cmain e""TIts. Such an event
might be the Starl of the .ulomal;on sys1em, an
tnlerrupl, ot detection ofa program errot (Figure 3.\). Thc programs .\located to the e venu
arc divi ded into priority clllllses. which determine the program p~iDg ortkr (mulUIII
inlerrupubility) ",hCll ""venl.l "',.. nI5 oc"ur.
Tbe !owc<I_priority prognun is the main pm~ which is proce~~cd cyclicall y hy the
CPU. All other event, can interrupt Ihe main
program al any I""mion. the CP U then execute,
tl:e as",ciatcd interrupt .~rvi~e routine or errnr

-.

hand ling routine and rer~n\s 10 the muin pm-

A specific organi~ation block (OB) is allocaled

10 each even\. The urgani1.&liOl1 bhxk.s rcprcseal the priority classes in Ihe Ui .... prognom.
When an e,...,1t uceutS. the CPU invukc the
aWilloo UIg!ll1i7.alion block. An UIW"lizalion
block i~ a part of a u.er pTOjlnil.m ",hicb yUIJ
your<el rm.aY"Tite.
Before Ihe CPU begin. procH,;ng IN: ",ain
progrdm, it ~xecutcs a .tarrup rom;Tle. Tlli< routine Can be trigg.red by .wiTching On tile !llni,,~
power. by actuating the mode ~w itch illl the
CPU's front punel. or vi~ the programm ing
device. Prognm p,uce..iug following exu_
lion nf the Slartup routine .lWDYS slart! al Ihe
heginnina: of the main prullfUm in the case of a
cold resrart or wann restan; in S1-1-OO S)'lIem .
it is abo pnssiblc tu resume the program Kan at
the point al ",hich it was inu:nupted (hOI
reslart).

The main program is in orgamzat,on block OR

I. u'h ich the CPU alway. procH.oe~. The Sill"
ofthe u~er progrnm i, identical 10 Ihe first nCI,,"orlc ill OIl l. Airer 08 I ha been proce<sed
(end of program). the CPU r(turns to the oper-

Pow. on

L /

I C,..

SI~nup

""""m

~
~
M al ...

<lnletTUpt>-

'""""'"

<Faull>

in(ellupl

OperaUng

I
Error ha ndllnq

g,am

~-

p ro_

I
IntorrupturoAee

routine

)
,

.~"'m

FIlM .. 3. 1 Mnhod. or Prnct.-.<ing the U-= PToi<"J"

atinj system on.! , "fter calling fOT Ihe execution

of v ariou~ operating 'Y'icrn function., ,uell as
th e t,pd a!i ng of the proc"" images, il once
~gai n calls OU I.
Evcntl wbich can intervene in the program om:
inl('ffilptS and elTOrs. [nferrupu can come from
the pn)Cus (bardware interrupti) Of from the
C PU (watchdog ;nt",",,-plS.. timcof-day inl~"T'
ruplS. CI"',). A. far ...-ron are concemed. I
d istinction ;s made bctwe= synchronou~ and

inlcrrupl tim! was

I!~ncrated

\)eCltU:IC a module

was bdng replaced.

A

~ynchronou.

error is a n error C(I llSI'd by pro-

gram pnxcssin g, such as acceuing a non"")I;sI~nl address or a data type: eonversioll error. The
rype ami number of r<:rorded evcms and the

asscx:;alo:-<i o'llanizalion blocks are CPU-specific; nol every C PU clUl handle all possib le
STEP 7 ,,"enl'!.

asynchronou. errors.
An asynchronous error is an error which ,g
independent of the p rognun ..,an, for eKamplc

failure of Ih~ p<lwcr to an cxpan.ion unil or an

J. I .2

P r] " r lly

Cla.~lfl

Table 3.1Ii.l. Ihe availab le SIMAT IC S 7 organization blocks, cach wilh il~ priority. In Solne

3 SIMATIC S7 Program

priority classes, you can change the assigned

priority when you parameterize the CPU. The
Table shows the lowest and highest possible
priority classes; each CPU has a different low!
high range; a specific CPU occupies a section
of this overview.

warm restart, hot restart); monitoring of

Ready signals or modu le parameterization:
maximum amount oftime which may elarsc
before a warm restart
f>

Organization block OB 90 (background processing) executes alternately with organization

block OB I , and can. like OB I. be interrupted
by all o ther interrupts and errors.
The startup routine may be in organization
block OS 100 (wann restan), OB 101 (hot
reslan) or OB 102 (cold reslart), and has priority 27. Asynchronous errors occurring in the
startup routine have priority class 28. Diagnostic interrupts arc regarded as asynchronous
e rrors.

> Retenti"e Memory

Numb-er of relent;ye memory bytes. timers
and counters; spec ification of retentive
areaS for data blocks
(>

You detenni ne wh ich of the available priority

classes you want to use when you parameterize
the CPU. Unu,ed priority classes (organi2ation
blocks) must be assigned priority 0

3.1.3

Spccificatiotu for Progra m

Processing

The CPU's operating system normally uses

default parameters . You can change these
defaults when you parameterize the CPU (in the
Hardware object) to customize the system to
suit your particular requirement<. You can
change the pa .... metcrs at any time .
Every CPU has its own specific number of
parameter settings. The following list provides
an overview of311 STEP 7 parameters and their
mo,t important settings.
f>

Geneml
Name of CPU, plant identifier, location 10.
scllings for MPI interface (if the interface is
not combined with DP). comment

f>

Startup
Speci!ies the type o f <lartup (cold restart .

96

Memory
max . nwnber of lemporary local data in the
priority dasses (organ ization blocks): max
size Oflhe L stack and numberofconununi cations jobs

f>

Interrupts
Specification of the priOrily for bardwarc
interrupts. time-delay interrupts. a.<yn chronous errors and D?VI interrupts; assignment ofpanial process images with process
and time dclay interrupts

f>

Time-of- Day Interrupts

Specification of the priority and assignmems of partial process images: spec ification of tbe start time and periodic ity

f>

Cyclic Interrupts
Specification of the priority, tlte lime cycle
and the phase offset: assignment of pania]
process images

I>

Synehl"(lnoi.l~

cycle interrupl<
Specification of the priority: a.signmcnt of
DP maSler system and partial process
images

c>

Diagnostics/Clock
Spec ification of the system diagnost ics;
type and interval for clock synchronization,
correction factor

The relevant organizalion blocks must be programmed for all priority classes used; otherwisc the CPU will invoke OB 85 "Program Proce,sing Error" or go to STOP.
For each priority class sclcrled, temporary local
data (L stack) must be available in sumcient
volumcs (sec Chapler 18.1 .5 ""Temporary Local
Data" for more details).

Cycle/Clock ~femory
Enable/disable cyclic updating of the process image: spec ification of the cycle monitoring time and minimum cycle time :
amount of cycle lime, in percent, for communication: numbt."f of the clock memory
byte: size ofthc process images

(>

(>

Prolection
Spec ification of the protection level; defining a pa<sword; setting o f process or debug
mode
MU]licomputing
Specification o f the CPU number

3.\ PmgramProcessing

T~bl~ 3.1

SJMATJC S7

O,gan i z.tiOI~',"'~
:::"''-------------T---';;;;;;;;'--Modifiable .

,
,

,.

0"

modulos

16 to 2J

Wi th ... tu>. update

PROFlBVS DrY I
"

,or mOOe

tech no1_

"Co,. ' ~ I

In the c""" "f lo., of redundar>ey "'"'",.,

OB

~5

OB

~8

toOB ~4, g6.g7

:~~c c. c

2 to 26
2 to 28
2 to 26

"'"

1n th e C05e

ORRI

"
"

26 2)
2 5 2)
25 )
'

Sloer",' .

failure,

No

2 <026
24 to 26
No

'"

N"

"

the em::>'"

t>

integrate<! function
Ac tivation and parameterization of the imegrated functions

On startup. m~ CPU puts th e user parameters

into effeet in p la<:e of the defaults , and they
rem ai n in force until changed.

t>

Communication,
Definition of ~o"nection reSourceS

Proll:rllm

"" Web
Activation of the Wcb 8crYer, language se_
lection

len ~.'th,

memory requi,-., menls

Th e memory requirements ofa compile<! block

ar~ listed in the block properties . If you "elect
the bh'>cK in the SIMATIC Manager, and then
seleet the " ".neral _ Part T tab us ing E DIT -j.

3 SL\IATIC 57 Program

OIUEc r I'ROPERTII!S, you will Ix: pruvid;;d wilh

the load and work memory n:'Iuiremcms for
this block.

tied by the systt= function

DilL.

The length of the uocr progrRm i.' li>ted in the

propert;"" of tile offline BloeM conta in er
(selecl Bloch and EnlT ~ OBll'CT PROPERCIES). On the "Blocks~ lab you will find the
data " Size in ..."OJk memory" anod "Si7e in load
memory".

MOdule ill

NOle that the configuralion data y<tcm data

hlocks) arc missing in the value for th~ load
memury. The SIMATIC Manug~'f shows you
h l "c k~ in the demi\ vicw with the container
open (displayed as table), and the memory
TIuirements in \he staru~ line (bottom right in
window) with the Sy.'lcm dOIQ object selectro_
With the progrnmming device switelxd online.
the cunen l ottupation o f the CP U memory is
sho"'-n by Ihe SI;\lATIC Managcr under PLC .....
DJAONOSTI,/SE'lTI-"O

M ODUll

I-" fOK."t~

noy.;, " Memory" tab.

Chccuum
The progt1lDI editor grnerates a eheel<sum for
all blocks of the u,;c,r program, and stores il in
Iltc objc(:t properties of th" B/oc/rs comaincr.
l\knlical program~ have !he sarno:; ch~"Cksum,
",ach change in the program al so changes the
ch<x:ksum. A checksum i.~ al~o g~e"'ted trnm
Ihe system d"ta. You can view the cheeksu"" in
the SIMATIC Manager with the Bloch con
ta iner .ckeK-d and EOIT - t OUIECT PRonR

"\05.
The c1l<:cksu m oflhe uscr prugnun is genemlcd
from the program code and Ih'" default and ini.
lial vai u"'5 of the data blocks. The writing of
dotta add",.,"" in the won memory ("ct~al \ 111ues) does not ch....nge the checksum. Th~ checksum i ~ only adapted when the data blocl.<. are
uploaded to the "mine data management, when
the actual va lues become the ini tial values. Th;~
al90 81'(llies to the data blocks aeneratcd by a
~ySlem function.
If a data block gcnerRled by S}'Slem functions i~
"'"tlen or d eleled. Ihe "'hecksum ;s nol
changed. The checksum is adapted i f a pro
&mmm~-d (loaded) diIla block i. deleted. or if
Ihe inilial values in the loud memory me modi

'"

S ~'C

84 \'lR1T_

Innov.I~...J

S7-CPU" PROflBUS DPYI slaves

and PROfL'I ET 10 de'~ces am :mppnn funclions for idenlifica.tion &. maimen= (I&M
f\uu:uons). For example. you can provide a ~t.a
tion wilh a higher.level itelll desillnatiou and ft
1(>(&lioll lD and evaluate it laler in the program.
The higher.level ilem designalion ;s used to
i.l entify parts of the plant un i 'lU~ Iy a~~ording 10
their function . The locati on 10 is part o/' tlte
it em designation and de~Titx:s, rur cxample,
the precise localion of. S IMATIC ocvicc with_
iII pruc<:ss pl""t.
To emer the 1&1,,1 data, ~elecl the module in the
Hardware Configunuion, Ilten select EDIT .....
QnJECT PROPERnF.S, and then - wi lh an appropriately design:d module yuu can enter the
higher-level ilem dc~il:lnU liun lind the location
lOon !h~ "General" lab or tbe "Identification"
lab, In online modi:, you se lect the module and
C~n then exchange the I&M dau. oclween of
fline dloa managemCIlI anoJ th~ module with
PLC ..... DoWNLOAD I-IOI)I.:U' IDB'Tlf1CAnO"l
or J>LC ..... UPLOAD MOOt..LE IDE:YIlflU,nO:-l
TOrG.
To anal)?e the r&M dala, us~ SFC 51 RD
SVSST 10 read Ihe system st,ttu . lisl with the
iy.t~m status list ID l6#OIIC Index 16#0003
for Ihe hiiher-leve! item <ksign~thm IUId Index
16li0009 for the location 10.

3.2

Blocks

You can d ivide your prQllntm inlo a:s many s~c

l iuno as yO\1 wanllO iu ortl~r tu m ilk" il easier to

read and u.ndersmnd. The STEP 7 prowamming

laD!'U~g~ upport this by providing the neceSsary funetiuns. Each program seclion should be
!<elf-<':oDlained. and should have a lechnological
OT functional ~is. The<e program sections an:
refcrred 10 as "mocks". A block is a section of
n UMr proif\lm "hieh is ddhwd by it;! functi on.
~ lruCt U'" or intended purpose,

3.2 Aloc ks

3.2.1

Rlo ck TYI'es

STEP 7 provides d ifferent typt".' o f blocks for

dilTe rent tasks:
>

[>

I>

Uoer blocks
Bloch conta ining user program a nd u ser
data
Sy,tem block<
Rlnch containi ng system program and sys tem data
Standard blocks
Turnk ey, off-the-melfblocks, such a, driv_
ers for FMs and CPS

Us~r

bloc k s

In extensive an d complex program" <'struclllring" (dividing) of the program ink> bloch i,

recoI!1Tl1cn dcd, and in part necessary. YOLl may
choose among different typ~s of blocks.
depending on your application:

Orx""izar;oll Moe,,",' (OBs)

FunCiion.I' (Fe's)

Functions nre used w program freque ntl y recurring o r comp lex automati on functio"". They
can be param~lcrizcd. and rctum a val"c (cal led
the funct io n ,alue) to the calli n g blu"'::. Th e
function value is optional, in addi tion to th e
function value , f"nct ,ons m"y a lso have o ther
output parameters . Functions do not store intor
mation, and have no a ssig n ed data block.

Da ra blocks (DBs)
These blocks contain your program's data. Fly
programming the data b locks. you dctennine in
whic h form ~he data w ill be savcd (;n which
bl oc k. in what ortl~T, and in whm data type ).
There are two way" ofu,i"g data block s: as global data bl o~ks and as instance d"ta blocks . A
globa l data b lock is, so to sp~a k . a " frcc" data
block in the user program. and is nO! allocated
10 a "ode block. An instance data block , how_
e,"er. is a,s igned to a func tion hlock. a nd ,tores
part of that fun Clion block's local data .

Thesc bloch serve as the interface between

operatillg .yo>tem a nd user program. The CPU',
op<-'nning systcm calls the organ i ~ation blo~b
whcn spec ific events occur. for example in the
eve nt of a hardware or timc-of-day interrupt.
The ma in prOgrdm is in o rgan;7.ation blo~k 08
I. Thc other <ftganization b locks have petlnanen tly assigned nutnben; based on the event.
they arc ~al1cd to handle.

The number of blocks per block type and the

length of the hlocks is CPU_dependent. The
nllITlber or o rganization block s, and their block
number.,. are fixed ; they an.: assigned hy the
CPU', openoting system . Within the specitl cd
range. you can a"ign the b lock numbers of the
other block typ~s yourse lf. You also have the
option o f assigning cvcry block a name (a 'ymbol) vi" the symbo l table, then referencing each
block by the mun e a>signed to it.

FUllction blocks (FE .)

Sy.tem h loeks

These b locks are parts of thc progrnm w hose

System bloch arc compon cnt~ of the operating

sy5lem . 1b ey can conta in programs (system
functions (SFC,) or system fun~1:ion blocks
(SFBs)) or dala (system dma blocks (SDFls)).
System blocks make a ncmtbcr of important
sy>lem fu nction s acces. ib le to y ou , such as
man ipula~i ng the internal CPU dock, or various cotnmu" ' ~"tions f"n~'ti ons.

calls can be programmed v ia blo~k parameters .

They have a v ariab le memory which is 10~atcd
in a data b lock. This tlata block i, pemlanently
a ll ocated to the functiol1 block. or, to be more
precise to the function block call. it is even possible to a<sign a dirr~rent dma b loc k (w ith the
same data 'inlCture but conta ining different
v alues) 10 ea ch function b lo"k call. Such a p ermanently assigned data block is ca!letl an
in stanc e data block. and the combination or
fund ion hlock call ,md instanc e data b lock is
referred to as a call in stance, or "inst ance" for
short. Function bloc.ks Can ,,-Iso save th e ir variab les in thc instance data bloc k of lhe call ing
f"nction b lock: tbi8 i8 referred to as a " local
instance"

You can call SFCs anti SF8s, bu~ you cannot

mo dify them. nor can you program the m yourse lf. The blocks themselves do not reserve
spaec in uSer mcmory; only the block: calls and
(h" inSlance d ata blocks oftb e SFB . are in user
memory.
SDBs contain information on such thing' a s the
configuration of the automat ion system or the

3 SI"tATlC S7 Program
Table 3.2 Numher range, lOr sy" e m dat> bl,)(,k,

, overwrite.

ti

II

coofig-

"

e .g . a,., ign mont of logical

"

"

,
rOT HIf and

parameten""tio" of the modules. STE'P 7 itself

and manages the., e block s. You. how~vcr, dClenni ue their contents, for instance
when you configure the stations . As a ru le,
SOBs are located in load memory. You cannot
Ol"'n SDB" and ean only read them from your
program u,ing speeialsy stcm bloch. e ,g. when
rmramelerizing modules.
gencrat~.,;

Double cl ick the System bloch ohject in the

Blocks container to d isplay a list of current syslem data blocks generaled by the Hardware
Configuralion to<J1 (in the offline container) Or
present on the Cl'V (in the online contain~'T).
Table 3.2 shows an ovcrvicw of the numbering
,}'Stem for ,ystcm <lata bloch.

Chapter 25 "Block Librarics" con tain s an over

view of the ,tandard b lock s s"p phed in the
Standard Library.

3.2.2

Block Structun.

Essentially, code blocks consisl of three pan,

(F igure 3,2):
""

Th~ block header,

wh ich contain, the block propcnie., such a s
the block nam~

;>

The declaration se<:tion,

in which the block-local v:ariablcs arc
d~darcd. tha t is, defined

t>

The program <e<:tion,

which contains the program and program
COnll1lentaty

Standard blocks

A data b lock is similarly structured:

In addition to lhe functions and funClion blocks

you crealC yourselt~ off-the -shelfhlocks (called
"standard blocks" ) are a lso available. They can
eilher be obtained on a .' torage medium or ~re
contained in li braries deli,' ered ~s pan of the
STEP 7 package (for example lEe function;;, or
functions for (he S51S7 eotwcner).

""

1>

n,e block header contains lhc b lock properti~s

1>

The dedaration ,ecliotl cOlllains the dcfilli(ions of the block-local va ri ables, in this
case lhc data addrcsse, Wilh data type specifi cation

3.2 Block!;.

;"",,,,,,-,,,,o,,:,,.,,",,,..,,m,.,"", , OO~..~"".,m,m""',",,___~

...

Logic b lock , sourc"-orl"nt ,,d p rogram ming

Block type Address

Block head9.

Blockfleader

name, Data type:_ In~;aliz . ~on:

name. Darn type'. In;!;alizatTon:

PrOfJrlIm

BEGIN
Program

END_Block Type

Data block. In"",m"ntal prog r8m ming

Data block, .ource-orlented prog ra m m'"g

Block I>c"dcr

S TRUCT

Decl6relion
Address

INama
J

-,-

''''

In itia l value

"!!me , Data
name: Data

t ype:~
tyP": ~

...

InrualizBtiQn:
Initialization;

END STRUCT

..
.~

Fi ~n ,..,

l>

DATA_BLOCK Aadress
BJock h9lJder

BEG IN

name

END_DATA_BLOCK

.~

Initializa tion;

II
i

II:

3.2 StructUTC ofa Olock

The initialization <""lion, in which initial

values can be sp~cified for indi vidual data
addresse"

Tn incremen tal programming. the declaration

St:ction and the initia]'>alion ,ection are comh ined_ You de line the data addrc>ses and their
data types in the declaration v;.ow" , anJ you
~an i1lilialize each data address ind ividually in
the "data view".

3 .2 .3

Block Properties

The block properties. or attrib ules. an.: conta; "ed

in the block header. You can view and moJify
th,"" b lock pmrc1'1ics with the me tm command
EDn --jo OWRT PROPERTIES ill the S I"'lATIC
Manager when th~ bl()~k i~ selected. or w ith
Fn.r. --jo PROPl'RTJES ill the l'rogram Editor
(Figure 3.3).

w,

3 SIMATIC S7 Program

,-....-~

(RIO<

ji5;-'
Ifij .~ ..... _ ,"_. f~ ""' _"""

G"' od ~ '-""'

,,-p,",

' ~991(1lll " '''''

', I211l ... ""UW ....

,-

~O_

"'""-"""
"'.... w_

_ _ ~ "" ....c
rr 0____
' ~ ~"'"_
r

W", " ",,",

"General - Pftrt I" tab

Under Nume. this tab con rain s the block '. absolute address with block type and number, as
we ll as the symbolic name and symbol comment from the symbol1able.
In the caSe of function blockJ;, an indicat ion next
to the name shows whNher the block has a multi instance capability. lIthe m,dli_inS'(Jnce ""pilbili!y is switched on, '''hich is nonnally the cas~,
you can call the block as a local instance. and can
al", call further function blocks with multiinstance capability with in it as local instances .
You can deselect the multi-inslu" ce capubility
when creating the function block; with a .oure eoriented program input, Ihe keY"'ord for deselecting is CODE_VERSION I . The advantage of
" function block "without multi-instance capa
bility" is the unlimited application of instance
data during indirect addressing, whieh is only of
significance with STL progranuning.
The tab also shows Ihe crearion language oftbe
block (which you set wh~n crealing the block),

'"

and the memory locations of the block and the

proj ttt.
The program witor SaVeS the creation or modi
fication date of the block in two time stamps:
these are the block pararnC!ers and Ihe 'tatic
local data for the progr.m code and Ihe interface. Note thaI Ih~ modification date of the
interfac e must be equal 10 or smaller (ol der)
than the mod ification date of the program code
in the calling blo<:k. If thIS is not the case, the
program editor si gnals a "time 'lamp conflict"
d uring output oflhe calling block.

The ,ommen t d isplayed consists of th~ block

title and the block COrruncnt wh ich you entered
when programm ing Ihe block.
"General _ Parr 2" tab

Thc N am e (Header) displayed on this tab is Ihe

block narnc; il is not idemical to the symbol
address. Diff~n:m blocks can have the Same
name. Us ing Family you Can assign a conunon
feat ure (0 a group of block s. The block name

3.2 Blocks

and family an: displayed when insening blocks

if you sc lecllhe block in the dialoll; window of
the prollram element caTa log. u..e Author to
cnt~r the namc ofthc block's crelltor, The namc,
family and author may have up to dht chameICrs cach. commencing with a leller. The letters.
d igits and the underline characler arc: permissible. The Venion is ente~ wllh N 'O 2-dig;t
numbers from 0 to 15.
The len~h dala slwwthe memory allocation for
the block in byte~'
~

Loc1l1 dam: allocalion in the local data stack

(temporary local data)

Me 7: size of the block (code only)

Load memory requi.rcment

\Vork memory requirement

A block occupies InOI"I: space in the load memory 8ince the data 001 rc:levant 10 processing arc:
oaved here in ~ddition.

The Klto",-how proleCli(m Huribute is used for

block protection. If a block iH know-how.protected. the program in th at block can not be
viewed, primed out or modified. The Editor
shows only the block hcaderand the declaration
table with Ihe block pammeters. You can assign
\his aunbute during sourcc-oncrlled inpul orthc
block with the key",oro K.,-':OW _HOW_PROTECT, When you do th is to a block, no onc can
view the oompi\oo version of that hlock. not
even you (make sure you keep the sou...:e file in
n safe place!) ,
Th" att ribute DB is w.-ile-profeCfl'd in Ihl! PLC
is an aUribute for data blockionly. II means that
you ean only read that d ata block in your prog"un. Output of an error mcssalle pre"CTlts the
overwnting of the data in that data block _The
write protection applies (() lhe data re1C"llIIt to
processinll (aclual values) in work memory; the
dala in load memory (inilial "alues) can be o'-crwritten e"cn iflhe data block is write_prot~cted.
Th is write protection fearure mu.t not be confused wilh block protection, A data block with
block prote<,:tion can be read out and ..... ritlen 10
in the user program, bUI ils data ean no longer
be ... ie .....e<.! wilh a programming or operalor
monitoring device. The attribu:e DB is ..rill!'
pro/eeIM;n Ihe PLC is switcbC<l off ..... standard.
bUI Cilil be changoo 01 any time lIsi~ the pr0gram OOitor. The kC)word with wun::eoriented

program inpul for switching on the write prot"""lioo is READ_Ol'o."Ly'

The block header of any staodl.rd block which
comes from Sieme"" conluins the S/(Jndaro
block anribute,
Data blocks can be assigned the Unlinked
attribute. Such dala block5 are only present in
load memory, and are not relevanl 10 processing. Since their data are nOt locale<! in work
memory. direct acccs~ is no longer possible_
Data in load memory can be read U$ing sY$tem
functions and - if the load memory is a micro
memory card - also written, DMit blocks with
the Unlinked attribute are ~uitable for record ing
data which arC only rarely Hec,,~sed. e.g. recipes
or archi,,, . This attribule is switched off lIS
standard. but Can be clumg! at any time u.ing
the program editor_ The keyv.oord with .ou!'CConented program inpul for switching on this
ftltribu\~

is

UNL~KED.

The No" ,-,:tailt attribute means "nan-tctentive"

and is assillned to CPUs dnigned for this for
dat;! blocks. If Non reral" is s ..... itched 00 . Ihe
d ahl block Ir.msfef!! the initial vBlun from load
memory ro WorK m~mory in the ev~nt of a
power ofton and with a RIY.-l-STOP transition
(response as wilh a cold restart). If Non ",wi"
is switched off. the corresponding data block
th~rc:fore being ...:u:n!i~". il retains illl actual
vRllIe$ ,n the Client ofa power oft7on Bnd with a
RUN-STOP transition (response a~ w ith a
wann reStllft). This attribute is switc hed off as
.tandard. bUI ~an be changed at any timc using
the program editor. Th~ hyword with .ou...:eonented program input for switc hing on this
attribute is NON RETAtN .
Blocks saved in the Program Edilor w ilh the
menu oommand FILE -+ STORE READ-O"\"LY
for reference purposes. for ell ample, receive the
block property iJkJck read-on!),. These can be
all eodc blocks. data blocks, and U!ICr-detlned
data typcs , Tbis property can only be se t with
thc Program Editor. and thcre i~ "0 keyv.'ord for
source-oriented progT'll.mminS for this purpo.e.

"Calls" la b
This tab shows a list orall blocks called in this
block with tbc lime stamp$ for the c;ode and the
interfaee. With in.lance dala hloch, the basic
function hloc k is shown here togeth~r wilb Ihe

.0)

3 Sl\lATlC S7

Jl'ro&nm

loc81 instances (function blocks) call"" in thi,

in each case with the time stamp:; for
code and interface_
in!tan~( ,

~ Atlrlb .. u.~

tab

Blocb may ha"e ~y~tem ~llributeS. System

auribulell rontrol and coc:m:iirulte functions
betw~n applications, for example in the
SIM i\.TIC PCS 7 control s)'Sttm.

Howe,.. r, Ihe interface connict generally

as a "time stamp conniet" caD alw
have other caUSe'_ It aIM) occuu if a calll or
referenced block is younger than the calling
block. Example. of the OCCUT1"'CnCe of time
stamp connim indude the followilli '
descri~

po

TIle inttTrace of a called block is younger

Iban the code of the .alhng block.

po

The inl,rrfiJce inilialuation does not agrtt

,,;Ih the block internee.

3,1.4

Block In tufacc

The declaration table cont.aiM the interFace of

the block 10 the rest of the pman.rn_ It consim
of the block paramCters (input. ou!pUt and in.
OUI parametcn) and al", - in Ibe case of~
lion bInds - the .Ianc local dalll.. The temporary local data, wbich. do not baSically belong 10
the block interface, are also bandied at this
point. The block interface is defined. in the
intcrfa.e window when prognomming the
block, and i. initiali~ed with variab les when the
block i. called (~ce Chapter 19 "Block Par.uneIen;").
The Program Editor checks that the block

I>

A func:tion block ;5 younger Iban its

instlnce data block (the in stance data block
is generall from the interfuce d:scription
of the function block and should thO'Iefore
be }'ounger than orlhe ~me age as the function block).

> A 1()C1I1 ;n.1III is younger than the calling

instance (affect. function blocb).

> A user data type UDT is )'OWIgCf than th.

block who:se ">riables an declared with the
UDT: Ihi~ can b<: any block including a data
block or OIlother UDT.

Con'Kling innlid block

<.II~

paramder initialization in the caUed block

agrees with the interface of the <:&BI block.
The Editor uS<:> the time stamp for ws: the
interface of the caBed block must be oldtT than
th e code i'l the caUina block, thilt is. lhe Lost
interface modifi c~tion 1l1u!t h~\"e been made
prior to integration of the bl..""k. The Program
Editor updates the interface hme stamp when
the 'lUmber of parameters chanlles GT ".hen a
dlrta type or a default value changes.

Tbc Program Editor ~uppons you in different

rna Mers in fmding and CQJTtlng in~a1id block
calls. Sc-e the next s<C"licm r(lt" how 10 check the
bloc\' ronsistmey in a complete program
("Checking block eonsisten<:y'l

TIm", , la mp .,... met

"'hen cbanglog the name and type.

You can ch""k bloc>:: ,ails which ba\"~ b~come

invalid witb the bl..""k opelt (wilh the Cllisor at
~hc invalid block nil) using the menu com !II&Ild Eon ...... BLOCK CALL ...... UPDATE. Block
calls can berome iD\"lLtd follo"ini insertion,

dtlC1ioo or shifting of block paramelers, or

A time stamp conflict tXC1.tR whnr. the interlac.

of the c .. lled block hal a later Ume jtamp than

the code of the calling block. You "ill notice a
time ~I ru.np conflict ifyOll open an alC<"ady ~om_
piled block again. The f'T()aram Editor then
indicate:; the incorrect block call m red. A time
,;t.atnp conflict can be caused. for ""ample, if
you modify the in!erU5 of blocks thaI ~
Ilready ealled in orh.,. blocks, (It" if you com_
bine blocks from different programs into a n""
program, or if you ~ompilc a !lion of tM
nvcnt.ll program with ~ sourcc file.

""

With EDIT ...... BLOCK CAU. ...... CHAl<GE TO

.\ !t:LT1~STAl'CL CAI~ and "orr ...... BtOCK
CAI.t ...... CIIA:<GI TO FBIDB CALL you transfer

calls from function blocks imo local inst~nce

calls or inlO calls "'ith data block. following
mO<i,fiCBl10fl of the block calls_ you m""l regeneraie the associate.:! instance data blocks.
A f.lJ\her p<.>S'iibility i. provided by the menu
command FD...E ...... ClIECK AND UPDATh
ACCE~S."The

in,-ahd block callI in an opened

bhxk iICC thrn updated orpresCnted for modification.

Ch~cldng

hloek consistency

11'e Program Editor only itldi calC8 a ti me stamp

confli~t when you open a block containing a
time 'tamp conflict , If y ou want 10 chcd:: an
entire pmgram, you can u,e the function
<'Check blod.:: consi stency'" in the SI.\1/ITIC
'vfanager an. This purges a majority o f interface
conilic," and direct, you to the program loca.
tion, thaI re<Juire editing,

To earry out a con,isteney check, sdcct the

Blocks container in the SIMATIC Ivlanager and
!h~n EOIT --> CIlLCK BLOCl< CO,SISTfSCY, lfa
call tr~ e is not displayed in the " indo",- e .g.
bec~l1SC

lhe pTogram ha, been compiled u ,ing

version of STEP 7, .elecI PROGRAM
--> COMP I ~E in this w indow,
an

earli~r

I' lca,c note that after check ing the b lock ~on8is"
t~n cy, the instance data bloch and thc dam
bloch g~nemted from the UDT are assigned
t he initial value, aga in in the compiled pro"

""m,

The Program Editor displays the progre<s and

resu lt of the consistency ch~",~ in the output
w indow (VII, w --> ERRORS A'ill WARNINGS).
"lbe e ons;s t~'ncy check CaJI]101 be nscd on progr~m s in li braries,

Thc dependencies in th~ case o f call ~d or referenced blo~b are displayed in the fonn ofa tree
d i"gram (t'igure 3. 4) , You can choo, c bctw~en
the following two representations:

'"",,''''L
..'001 [ot
"""I
' [DO ~l

.
."
~,

... _do',,- [<>0 """I

....u ..... [1>1'_]

"0"""""

~o

'

_",",,' [M ' _J
..... . "oj' [:0""'1

(0'

"'I

'(~[""

,'

."

",

- . """-" I'" '''",I

"~;:~ [''''I

'i'

0 0.,
'" Q '"""
:;c.

..

," [C<'-I
~'-I

:eo &t~ ]

o oCat"Ol '"," -"""..,.l"'l[""I

.Q o"",COt ...........
_
L>"'l
_

0 ""

COl'

"."..,..' [1'' '....1

... "-'""'"""' 1''''1

...... :=1

a """ _1....""' .. _

-I

o CO!

0 "'"

.,....,.,. I'" ' ''.-1

.p". . . '
'w[RO)
.F"......'

~o..o'r_'''''''''[MO)
_

.P". . . ' [nol

.".......""... ' :""']

( "' ~ l

ot'" ('" """'~l

OI' !"I':

Fi~Dr~

3.4 Exomplc of!h< Repr< oon"'tic" of the 'Check Block Consistency" [kp<ndcnde,

]1)5

T10e reft;thcr lree vie w displaYllt~ e lJepe nden.

a similar wily !o the progn.m Slrutlure:
Oft rM left are the tallin& bloch. funher 10 II>c
rigtu an; the blocks tailed in the blocks on tl>c
lel't Example: inSl:lncc DB 20iFB 20 ill tallffi
in O B I and local in.'lIlnccs FB 21 and FE 22
are callffi in FB 20.

vided with the propr;nles window o f the

block. On me "Genenol _ Part I" tab. sclect
the number of the block under Name and the
language "LA!)" or "FRO". You can entCT
rhe remaining anribulC1l11ler.

aa1 ...

The dependency tree view di,'plays the depcndcn<:: ics starting from all called or rderencffi
blnc b. Thcy arc located in the left_lIftrnl tol umn. and the calling blocks arc ilStffi 10 tne
ri&ht or thi5. bample: FE 22 stores its data in
instance DB 201FB 20 that is tallffi in 08 L It
alo;o has its own DB 29 and it iscal1ffi a, a local
inStancc in FB 20.
The dC lcnnincd infonnation is displayed in
compact form by symbols. An e~chllnation
marl:, for example. indicates thaI the obj~"Ct
cllused a time Slamp conflict. A whue cross on
a red background Ind,cates that the ~SlXiated
block must be recompiled.
If you select a block in the tree diagram orin the
..,utpot window. you can edit it witn eDTT -+
O PEN oBJ!cr, e.g, COJ1"C'Ct an incorreCI call.

Programming Code Blocks

J,J

Chapler 2.5 "Creating Ihe S7 Program" contains an introduClion lO program creation and I<>
operating the program editor.

3.J.l

ap.,nln g Blocks

You begin block program'mnll by oflemng a

bloc k. Open an exisling block either by doublecli cking on the block in the SIMATIC Man_
ager " project window or by ",lectinfj FU_E .....
OrEN in the program ffiitor.

Irroo open. compilffi block in the Rlocks contai...,.., e.g. by doubledocking. it i$ open for
incremental programming. This is the case borh
with omine and ol1line progmmming.
'f lhe ~Iock doc~ 110! yet exist. you can grnerale
it ;11 the following ways:
t>

In the SI MATIC Manager by selecting the

81.,.,h ohJt to rhe left half of the project

",-indo,," and generating a ncW block with

ll'o."SERl -+ S7 aLOCK -+ .
You are pro-

'06

t>

1n the Edilor "'ith menu command FILE -+

NI:\\. which displays a dialog box in which

you can enter thc d~sirffi bloc k untler objecl

Aft~r clo.ing the dialog box you can
program the comeDl~ ofthc block. The Pmgram Editor uses the language set on the
'"Create BlocI<'" lab uDder Omoss -+ Cus-

nom".

TO\fl7'F.

You can e!ltcr the in f<1rmntion for the block

huder when yo" generate \he block or you can
omtcr the block anributes later in the Editor by
open,ng the block and selecting lhe menu com'
mand FILE -+ PIUJl'ERTII:.'1.

3.3.2

m oc k Windo"

The progmm ed itor shows th e variab le decl am

tion table (block param~!ers and local data) and
Ihe program ....indow (code and comrmnts) for
an opened code block.. The pro~ elemenls
cannol be additionally dlsplayffi in lhe n"~..._
,ie'" "indow (Figure l.S).
Va rl.blr declaralion tahl e
The variable declaration table i~ in \ h<; wir.t.low
abovc llle progrom window. If il is DOl visihlc.
posilWn thc moll.'" poinlcr 10 the upper line of
demarcalion for the prQgnIm window. dick on

the left mou~c bunon wilen the mou.., poimer

chnwc5 ils form. and pull down . You will sec
Ihe over"iew of the types <.>fvariah1c on the !efl .
and Ihe variable declaTll.ll..,n table on the right .
which is wbere you define Ihe bloc k_lncal "Bri_
abks (see Table 3.3).

In order to declare a "ariMbk, sekcl il5 type;n

the left area. and filJ in the uoblc on the righl.

of variable can be programmffi
in c\Cry kind of code block. If yo ,) do nol usc II
variable Iype , Ihe cnrr<:~potlding line remain!
emply.

,",01 ~"cry type

The declaration for a variable consists of the

name. the data type. a dt-fault >"alue, if any. and
a "ariable commeDl (opIiorul). Notall variablC1
~an be 85signffi a dcfuult value (for instance, il

3.3 Progro.mming Code B loch

'jo"

_n'"" ,,,' __ ~.~ . ' '''' .... , ...".. .......

..

,~"

,....
,-,.
,-,
,~

-......_.,.....
..... ,. ._.
.w._._... h.' _

....--.0_,

,_.
"... .

_ _ _ _ _ ... _

___

. ~_.

M __

., ... _ . }

~- - " ......""

t ]litu ....

3.~

:3

l:JIampl" of .,. Op..ned I AD Block

is nOI possible fm t"mpomry local dam). The

default values for funct;on~...,d funttion blocks
are described in detail in Chapter 19 Block.
Pllmmc1crs'".

BOOL Or BYTE variable at B byt" boundary

and II variable o f anolhCT datB type at a word
boundary (begi nning a1 a byte with an even
address).

The ard"r of the declarations ill tade b locks is

fixed (u ~hawn in Ih" tnbl ... abo\"e). while the
oruCT within n variable 1)'1'" is arbitrary. You
can $8\'" rOOm in ~mory by bundlIng biruuy
variables into blocks
o r 16 and BYTE ,'ariabies inlO pairs. 111" Edilor S!O~ a (new)

In the program window,)'Qu will see uepcnding on thc Ednor'. dcfauh Serling' the fields
for Ihe block li lk and the block commen! anu,

ors

Table 3 .3 Variable Type. in the

O~d.rarion S.~llO"

Vatl""l. Type
Input pat:amete",

Oed. .... ti""

OutP"t peramet"'"'

OUT
J.1'. _O UT
STAT

In-aw parameters

St.l ic 1<>Ca 1data

Temporary local da ..
Fune<ion ~ alue

P" .. ibk io moo .. Typ<'

"

"""

RETUR..'1

K
K
K

08

,e
,e

,.,.
,.
,.
,.

'"'

3 SL\tATIC S1 Pr<)f'l'II

if il i, Ihe first I>('twork.

th~ fi~lds

for tbe nl:l-

wort: tide. the network cmnm~n:. and the fkld

to.. the prognm entry. in the program SCCIion 01
~ode

block. you control the di'l'lay of comand ~ymbo ls with the tllffi ....-ommunds
VI !!W ~ DISPLAY WrIll. You call chan~e the
~ ; ze of the display w ith \IJ.Iow ..... ZOO'l I);,
V IEW - ) ZOOM on ,md VJ..Io'1 ~ ZOO\! r ",C-

..

ment~

'"'
O"frvl~"

JJ.3
The

ov~rvie\\'

clement

Window

window contains :ho: program

owd the call rnue=

~PtIllO

If the ov~rv,eW window is nol visible.. feteb it

onlO Ihe sclft'n with Vl:Ew ~ OVEIl\J..Io\\S or
w;lh INSI:.RT

r J)(iR.\ M U.ME"oiS .

Tllc o~'cr\';ewlI arc p~senlcd in a S..-pal1lle window which you can ""dock- at the Mil" of the
.-..I ilor window and also relea,., .eain (doubledick in nch c85e on the title bar of lhe oHTview window) .

automatically. brginning with 1. Each

block can accommodate up 10
nL'1"ork$.
Yo:! may gi"c each network a nelwori<. IIlle and
a nelwon: cornmenl Durina ed,tina. you can
KIr ea, b lI"twor~ drrcctly wil h the Illenu
COJlUn~nd l:'DlT ~ Go To --; ....
,,~

To enler the prob'fam code. cI iCKoncc below Ihe

window for the n<;!wllrk comment, or. if Y"u
have <;(1 "Oi'play witb C"mments", click OnCe
h<:Jo" the ,haded area ror nC'1work comment,.
YOII ... ill SCe a framed emply ... indo.... You can
begin C'IIlering yom PIDIlram 8n)"b= within
thi~ ,,'indl.lw. The chapters heJo" sbow you
"'hat a LAO e = t path or an FRD IOllie operation looks like.
You program a new

n~N..ori<

l"1:TI'oORK. Tbe Editor then

" 'ith L'SERT

,"~c-n, In

network behind the curremly selected network.

Program dCmcn l$ catalog

The prollnlm clemenl~ call1l,,,,!,' suppon s prog"""unini in LAD and FRO b} pro"idinllthc
available graphic el~m~nl5 (Fign~ 3.$). You
caD dnlg all program elnn=ts into the proJll1lm
windOW u~inlllhc mou;;;:.
In addidon, ;I!;,;UI the block.> already loc.ted In
th~

omine JJlocL conlain~'T. as well as the

aln.:ady-programmed multi -iru.hmcc5 and the
svail abl~ Jibrarie$. Dy dickina, with Ihe right
rna U-le buttoo 00 n block or a bl<><;k I)pc. )'OU
cao select wh~Iher the bloch are 10 be ""'rted
aocording to Iype ~ntl numbct or accordini 1()
Ih~ block family.
Callstru,lurr
'The call struclUre shm,", th~ block Ilicrnrcby ID
the cumnt user prog:rnm. You are ,ho"'D the
call .:t1V;ronIllI..'Ill of the currenliy ~ned block
toge~r with the blocks used.

JJ.4

Pro~rammln~

l\"crn'orkt

You can divide a LAOIFBO pmgram intO networks which each repres~nt a eurnnl p~th or s
logie oporul ion . The Editor numbers the nct-

'""

eml"ly

FI"u ~ 3.~

Pro!!"", !':l<m<"" C .tal,,~ fu, LA!) and )"fIll

3.3 PmgraTlltning Code Bloch

You need nO! terminate a hlock wilh a speeial

statemem, simply 'lOp making emries. How"
ever, you ~a" program a last (empty) n~t"'ork
w ith the title "Block End", providing an easily
seen v isual end of the block (an adYamage, particularly in the CaSe of ~x~ept ionally long
blocks).

window). A dialog box appears automatically

and he re you replace the dummy characters
with valid cntrie" Th~ network templat~ is
in.wned af1.er the "elccted network.

In the Program Editor, you cat! create new

b locks, or open and edit exi,ting blocks w ithout having to change back to lh~ SlMATTC
Managcr.

The add",>scs used in th~ pwgram, such as

inputs and outputs or bit m"morics, are
addressed in absolute or symbolic mode.

3.3.5

A ddres . ing

Absolut e
J'\etwork templates
JuS\ as you store blocks in a library to reuse

them in other progmlll', you also savo network

tempTat~' in order to copy th ~m "gain and again
in, fur example, other blocks.
To savenctwork templatcs, creale a library ~on
!aining at least on" S7 pwgram and Iho So"r-ces
container.
You program the networks that you wanl to use

as templates quite '"normally" in (any) block.

Then you replace the addresses thm are to
chang~ with the dummy chara~tcr; %00 to
%99 . You can also vary the netwo,k titl e and
the network ~omrnem in this way.
The dllmmy characters ""placing the addr"sses
are p,,,semed in red because a block cann!)! be
stored in thi, form , ']'00. is not sib'tlificant
b~eause following saving of the network temp!ate(s), th i, block can b e rejected (dose the
block without saving).
After cnt<;ring the dummy ~baracters, mark th"
nelWurk by cl icking on thc network number at
top left before the network title . You can also
combine severnl n etworks to form one tem plate; hold down the en-I key while you dick on
further nctwork numbers.
Now sele~t EDIT ~ CREATE NETWORK TEMPLATE. In the dialog box that th~D appears, you
Can assign meaningful comm"nt< to the network and all the dummy character. . In 1he next
dialog box, you a>sign a name for the n~twork
template and you define lhe ,torage location
(Sm<l"<'cs container in a library).
Tryou want 10 us~ Ihe n etwork tempiat'", open
the rele\'ant library in the Program Elements
Catalog and th ~n select the desired network
templa1e (double-click or drag to the Ed itor

~~ dr","inl:

Absolute addressing reference" addre:;s.,s and

block paramet..-n; with the addr~'s Tn and the
bitlbytc address. If there arc three red question
marb in the network in th ~ p la ce of addressc"
and parameters, you must repla ce this character
string w ith valid addresses. If there are three
black poin1/;, rep1ac~'IIlem is optionaL
The Program Editor che~ks that the dala types
of the a<ldrcsses and parameters are corr"c!.
You ean deactivate somc of these type ebcch
(in thc Program Editor under OPTiONS ~ CosTO MIZE. "LADIFBD" tab, "Type ehcek for
addrcs>cs" option).
Syml>ollc addressing
If you want to use symboli~ names tor globa l
op~>r.mds in incremental programming, these
names must already be as,igned to absol ute
address", in the Symbol Table. While entering
the program with th~ Program Editor, you can
call up the Symbol Tab le for cditing w ith
OpnoNs ...", S'0-IBOL TAlIL and then you ~an
change symbols or cm~r new symbols ,

Yon ~~tiv~IC display of the 5)'mbol addre~~e~

w ith VIEW --} D!SPU. Y WTTll ~ SYMBOLIC
Rb~I1ESFO.--r,.,T!ON. The menu poim Vrliw ~
DISPLAY ViTTl! ~ SYMBOL INfORMATION provides, for each netv.'ork, a list of the symbol-toabsolute-address assignments for e ach symbol
used in the network.
Whi le entering the 'ymbois, you can view a list
of all the 'ymbols in the symbol table with
INSCI(T ~ SYl\-HlOL (0' right mouse click am!
INSLRT SYMllOL) and you can then transfer one
of the 'ymbob with a click of the mouse. The
list i, disphLyed aUlomatically if y"u have sct
Vn;.w ~ DISPLAY WITH ~ SThffiOL SELECTIOX

""

'>DolATIC 57 l'roi""m

](" symbol is nOi yet iru;luded in the symbol

tIIl*_)OU Can scle<:t EDIT -+ SnlBOl.S. make
1111: a.tgnnICnt 10 the absolute D<i<;lress, and pos.. ~ also assiifl a symbol comment This sym
boDIlStocn transferred to the symbol table "'ben
~d;ekOK.

y(RI can a1so edil the symbols in Regi ster "4:

Add~i5 info" in the Detai ls window. Ifthe columns with Ibe symbol and the ,)"nlbol comment
.are not disp layed. fetch them by chcking with
!be n\lht mou~ butlon on the addrc .. table ~nd
DlSPLA Y COLt.r.o.ll'S (Ol'iOFf).

If tIK- ProIl'1'P' Editor opens a compiled block.

".:.ani... OUt "decompiling" 10 the LAD or FBD
.-etbod of ~pr~ntation. In do1na so. it usel
11K non-<:"il.'CutioorcleVllllt program sectIOns lD
.. e offline data management. in order. for
anple. 10 ~prncnt symbols . con:unents and
jWJ1p labels. Irlhe mrotm""on from the offline
data lUllIIagement ,y$1em is mi.sina, the Pr0gram Editor uses ~ub;;titule symbols .

1'' _

3.3.6

1"lIIli- begins OIl the left JIO"er rail. You selecl

the location in the nJlIj! at whieh }'O\I wlnl 10
insen an dement. then you select the program
elnnents you WlInt
I>

.... ;tIt

tile COIT<'Sponding function key (for

example F2 for a nonnally open (NO) contaCt),

;. with 'he corresponding bUllon on the function b ar or

;. from the Program Elements CalalOIL (with

il<>"5ERT -+ PROGRA.'1 EJ.L\tENTS or VI[w-+
OVEJt\'l.Ews).

You terminate a rung ....'jth. coil or. bolt .

Most program elements m~t be ISSigned memory locauoD.'i (v.riable~). The eliieSI "'1)' to do
this is to rtnt arrange all prognun elements. and
then label them.

Con tac lS
Binary arldIe-sse, ""eh as inputS are scanned
u.ioa comacts . The scanned silPla l statcs at"<:
combined a, ~ording to th~ ~rmngemem of Ihc
comacts in a serial or paral1e11ayoUI.

E ditIng LAO Ekmeon

Prollunlmlna In lI:e ner.1

The prn]U1lm CQlUi;;ts of individllll.l LAD de~I.'I arranged in ..,ries or parallel to one
aoothl"r. PTopmrnina of a current p;>1h. or

"Current flo,,';;'" through I n",,",,,,Jlly open conif the scanned binary address ha. siiDDl
mte '"I"' (the contact is activated) "C"Urrent

1at:1

Colt,
Si:nJ>1< coil
C~:I

c",,,..,t . . itlo .".,.,;.1 1\.0"",.",

(e.". ncgouonJ
BoUI

_.......

S<and:ard boxeo ... "houl EN..'I'''O

Ie-.. tim ... ...:! 0.,...,1<, fuDct;om)

"'11b "'I'P1clr.tWy
IItfICh<ttl (~.II. set, use<. ~II<'

...... 1"."0<10< jump functioo)

--jNOTj--

SIu.dttrd b<to... wttb E/>. ''0

( .... ari<lllMtic ""'-1

S PULSE

: ''" ,
Flilun ). 7

'"

" 1=
'CD
e-

I:>c~mpl tj;

of LAD Program Elemcn"

Block bo~ ..
(~ ... I"w1ctiI>It block ""U.)

D'm

.,

.,
in3

eo"

'"0

3_3 Propmmina; Code Block$

" . lwo~k

an

. .,

~ ...

"

~.rt.

pa,u

r.~ay

h~v ..

to ' Oy.

, . . ~he<l tn .. or."

- ... u ..

{p -

.....

<>f

tn. bal t , "< noy or. r ... dy

o~

u.<> .... l .

p.

i."'~ .~.

'Mhultl

110w~ Ihrough a nomtolly c1os~d contoct if Ih",

!/Canned binary addn:ss has si lP'ai stale ''0.. (thc
eontaCI is nol aClivaled). You can al.o scan slaIUS bi lS or negale the re~ull of the Jollie operation (NOT conlaCl).

Colis
Coils an: ,,-~ed to control binary addresses_ ruch
as Outputs. A .imple coil Sels the binary
add,....SCI when Cu.tn:nl flows in Ihe coil, and
rCIICIS it when power no lonaer 110wo.
There ace coils with addit ionnllBbels, such a,
Sct and RC8Cl coi),. which serve a special fune__
lion. You can aIm use coils to control limeTS
and counters, cal! blocb witlioul paramelers.
execule j umps in the program. and so on_

Bole.
rc-prcsenl LAD elements with complex
functiono. STEP 7 provides standard boxcs
of two difkrenl types, w,thm.1l ENIENO mech_
anism (.uch as memory functions, limer and
COllmer functions. comparison boxes). and ,"'i lh
ENIENO (such as MOVE, arithmelic and malh
functions. data type con'crsions). When you
call code blocks (FCs. FB s. SfC. and SFBs).
LAD allO rcpr-esen15 Ihc tailS as boxes wilh
EJ>;IF.NO. LAD al.., provides an "CII1p1y box
in wbicb you can CntCr Ihc desircd funClion
when programming,
Bo~<:lI

Layout

re~t dctions

T he LAP edilor sets ufl a network according to

thc main rung principle. Th is is Ihe uppermost branch, which hegins di~tly on Ihe left
power .....il and muSt terminate with a coil or 8
bo~. All LAP elemcnts can be localed in Ihi~
nmg. In parallel branchc!l wh ich do not begin
On Ihe left power rail. Ihere are somelimes
restrictions in the choice of program elemenls.
A ddilional n:s,rielions dictate Ihal no LAD elc_
rnenl may be 'shorl-circuited wilh an empty"
parallel branch, and thaI no power" may flow
IhrouJlh an element from right to left (a parallel
branch musl be closed to the branch in which it
wu O!"'ned). Any further ru lcl app lying 10 Ih ..
layout of special LAD elemcnt~ Ilff discu ssed
in tbe rcleva", Chapl<:T5.

'Vhen LL.ina

'"
po

bo,,~

as program demenls. you

program a single box per networi<

po

arrana;c hoxcs in T brancht~ ;n branches thaI

Start"t Ihe left power n,i l

po

arranl!~ boxes in series by switc hing Ihe

RNO outPUI of one bo~ 10 the EN input of
the follo,,""ing box

:>

SWileh boxes in parallel in b... nc~. on ,he

left power rail via its eNO OUlpul

With Ihe arrangemenl of the boxes, you evaluale the signal slates oflhe ENO outputs: if you

'"

3 5lMATIC 57 Program

terminate the UNO outputs "~th a "oil, "pow~ r

flows in to th~ "OJI if a ll Ihe boxe-, ha,-e all b~~n
p rocessed without errors in the "a,e of ~ri ....
con ncelion, or if one of the Ix,,-.. es has be..n processed without errors in the cas~ of paran~l
"onnection (see also Chapter 15.4 U.ing th~
Binary Re~ulf').

3 .3 . 7

Editin;:; HJD

Pr<>gramminl.: in gener al
T he program consists of indivi dnal progrllDl
elem ent. that ar~ connected togcther via th~
b ina ry sign al fl ow to form logic operation, or
ncm-'ork s_ You begin programming a lo gI c
opcl"ation by sel ecting the programm ing elements on the !eEl of the logic operat ion

with the functio ll key,

(e_g_ F2 for the Al'-"D function),

!>

via thc m enu

OpCra!lOn .
b"xe~

A NI) B ox) or

You control bmary addrcsses ,,, eh as outputs

w ith simple box~, . Simple boxes g~n ~rally
have only one input and may have an additional

from thc Program TIlcmcnts Catalog

(with INSERT ~ PROGRA.\! J::U::lI.Jr.-rS or

Th~re

)ah~L

YOll tcnninate a b inary logic opcr"tion in the

simp le't case "'~t h an ass ign box .

Binary fu nction.

}\;jd ftu-",'i<m.
.: ORfuo"ion.
l!~:,l o.<i".--O R

fu,Id;OO

Nega'io>~ or""'D
o.nd ,..,sul, of
lli~ logic

"1" ""-'''''''

are simpk

box~,

for controll ing a binary

an edg~. controlling timer
and C()unt~r addre,se, . calling block> without
parameters, cxecuting j umps in the program,
aud so OIL
addr~,s _ ~ya)ua!ing

V tEW ~ OVERVIEWS) .

fUll ction s

The scanning o f an addrc" Can be neg"ted so

that ,can 1':>1111 "i -- can be oblained for , lat " ,
"0" of the address . You can abo Scan smtus bits
or th e result ()f a logk operation within a logic

Sim ple

(L~ShRT ~ FBI) LA"UUA{;F ELE.'-!~_"rS ~

!>

Hin~ [ )'

You sCan the binary addresse, men as inputs

and combine th~ >canned signa l stat es u,ing the
binary functions AND. OR an d cx c\usi'-e OR
E3Ch binary i~pul of a bo_~ also >can s tn e bi~ary
address at the inp ul.

U~menn

"

.\!lost program clements must be as< igned mem ory iocation, (nriables). The eas iest way 10 do
thi s is 10 first ammge all program clem en ts,
th~n lahelthcrn .

Slmp!e bo x..

L
L
mR
L
>.,

~."""

8 inary operand

fl..ct;

--l

='=c-<l!~

","'=ti""

Counter o p-eraoo

tltr.... ..00
Ju"'<r t'>noli"""

(;('.<\1",1

--1

CO

ju,,:p !"n~'w=.
,,,,,,,,or =!to] ",loy, <le_

Complu box
S ~Qdan:I bo,~whh<>u' l'I\! n~O

_ (~,!!.\ir"","~uJ " U"n~ 1"""t;'-"'

""_'">

SuotI.,.,r
wilt EN_'EXO
(t.:,: mtbm<.-ti<> f!(...clioo>}

fll<d. "OXO,
(~ IO.

tunc,;"" hlock calls)

Time"- ad<:lress

DB.m

S PU LSE

, eo

S 1'\1

81

BCD
Q

Fil:ur. 3 .9 Exampk, ufFBD PrugnmElement.

"

=
-

in '
in2

out,
oul2

,"0

f-

3.4 Prognunming Data U I()<;k.

~ o. ~

' E>'

R.,.o"."

". "

1-

"
",

"B u ie u" _
"/II{a u ltl"
fl~ur e

-0

Compkx boxes represent program elements

with compkx funnion. ST EP 7 provides
"standard boxes' in f\<.'o version.!:

"

L.

3.10 Exampk of an FBD Ketwork in "3.Dimcru;onal" Rep,"s<nt.>tio n

Comple" boxes

~,

wit hout EKIENO mechilflism (,neh as

memory functions, timers an d ~ O\lntcrs,
~omparison boxes) and

example, you cannot arran ge edge evaluation.

and call boxes following a T branch . Any fiorth er rules applying to the layo ut of special F"BD
el emen ls are di>c,usse<i in the relevant ehapteTh.
When us ing boxe, as program elements, you

""progrnm a single box pe, netw ork

;>

witb ENIENO (suc h as MOVE. arilhmetic

and maTh funed<Jns, data type conversion),

!>

arrange boxes in T branches in branches thaI

stan at the left power rail

If Y<JU call code blocks (Fe s, FBs, SFCs and

SFBs), FB D also repre,ents the "all, a, boxes
with EN/ENO.

!>

arrange boxes in .eries by switching the

END outpUl of one box to the EN inpUl of
the following box

!>

AND or OR boxes via the END output.

FBD also l'ro~ides an "empty box" ill " h ieb

you can enter the desired function "'hen pro"
gramming
LaJout

restri~d o n.

The FB D editor Sets " p a network from le ft to

right and from tk top down. f rom 'he Idt, th~
inputS lead to the functions and the outputs exit
to Ihe right ,

In Ihe case of boxes switched in >eries. you can

control their process ing as a group (see also
Chapter 15.4 --Using the Binary Resul1")_ You
ev aluate the error mC5sag~S o f tho;.- boxe~ by
combining th~ E~O oulpUlS: ANDing of the
ENO outpUls is fulfilled if all boxes have been
proc essed w ithou t error, and ORing of the ENO
output$ is fulfilled if one of the boxes has been
proee".d without error,

A logic opcratio ~ always bas a ''1erminating

funct ion" _In il~ ,impl e,! fonn, this is an assignm ent of Ihe result of the logie operation 10 a
binary address,

3.4

With the he lp ofa T branch of a l(}gic o pera tion,

you can program funher '"'l cnninating functio~s- ' for a logic operation ("multip le outp,,"'),
Following a T bran ch howeve-t, Ihc selection of
programmab le el ~ments is ,estricted, for

Chapt"'" 2 .5 "Creating the S7 Program" gives

an introducl ion to progT"4m creation and the uS"
of the program edi tor. Data b locks are progmmm ed in the same way in LAD and FBD, .'

Programming Data B loc ks

3 SI).IATIC S7 Prugnun
3.4.1

CTnlTing Data Blocks

t>

You be!,;in block programming by openiD&

block. either with a double-click on the block in
the project window Qf thc SL\tATIC Manager
orb)' "'Iceting FILl:! ...... OPEN in the e,wor, Iftbe
block doe s not yet exist , create it as foI1Q"~:
t>

t>

In the SIMATIC Manager: ,elec t the obje.:t

BloeM in th~ lefl-band ponion oftbe proje.:t
windvw and crcat~ a new d~ta block with
IN snRT - t S7 BLOC,,- ...... DATA BLOCK. YOIl
lICe the properties window of the block,
SpecifY the number and Typt o f Ihe <illta
block on the "G~"1lCTll I
Pan r' tab (I
Chapler 3.4.2 MTypes of Dl\", Bloc~M).
Instance DBMand DB o f ~ pc n onJybc
"1led iffurn:uon bloc~ FB. S)"S[cm function blocks SFS or user dal~ rypes UD T are
present in Ihe blod,: contaioer. You can also
enler the ~maining block properties lale!".
In Ihc program editor: "'ilh FILE ...... NEW.
you get a dia log OOX in which you ~lIn en ter
Ih", d<;.;rcd block 'md~r Object name". In
the dialog window New data block' which
i ! 5ub.'e.:juc nt ly displayed. you arc requested
10 defi~ the ~-pc of data block (s<'C Chapter
3.4.2 Types of Data Blocks"). After clo!inll
the dialog box, you can program th" bloc~
contenls.

Dala block referencing a user-<iefined dalll

\)1'<". or 'ODB of ty~.'
Creation as a data block of user dam type; in
thiJ; "".e th~ dam .Iruettlrc is used whi"h
you h."e declared when prollrAmmil\g Ihe
c;:<I!Tespondiog user dam type t:DT.

I>

'Data block referenc ing a functi()T1 bl""k'

or In<tancc OS"

Cf(;lIti011 as an instance dala block; hcre, Ih~

data " ruct u<c tbat you h",.. declari when
programming \M relevant function block is
frnnsfC"TTed_
Wheo creating a data block on the basil of a
U$er data \)'P". you simultaneously defme the
u rn on whicb it is based; I.e. the liDT mUil\
already ha>'~ been presIIIlt io the block: ton miner. The S3me applies 10 !heereat;on ofa data
block" ilh ""signcd function block.

3.4.3

Hlock WIndows and Vie""

You Cln till out the h~adcr of:> block as you ereIte it or you can add the block propcnk! .t II
laler point. You proJOllUIllater addition [0 [he
block header in the editor by selecting FILE ...
PROPIlRTTfS while the block is opI:D.

When opeoing a dSla block whon lIrueture is

ba<ed 0<1 a user data type or a (5y.le.,,,) funclion
block. you will ~ ash"d in the slnndnrd sen ing
"hether you ,,-i5b to o pen the data block using
the pmgram editor or the application Paramelerization of data blocks'. The parameter " iew
prt,ents tbe data nlues arouped thnologically. and permits more con>enien! parameterization (...., Ch.aplcr 2.1.8 ~onj:oring and
"'lodif~"U1g Data Addf(;s~s,. The datH ~ie"'s
are d~riboo b<:low.

3.4.2

The propam editor pmvide:; t"" vic,," for programming (cresling) dMa blocks:

Types of Dat a BI""k.

Whcn crcati ng a new data block . you ar ~

requested to defme ito; type, \Vhcn crcat,,,!!
using lhc 5lMATIC Manager. you Set the type
in the ,eleclion box of Ihe propc"rues window;
when creating wilh the program editor. by
cU<;king one o f lhe options offered in [he '':'lew
dHta blocL " window.
A ditre~nltalion i. made hc:tv.ecn tllrH typeS
of data block depeoding on their erellion and
applition;
I>

u.

MDatll block Or Sha~d OS'

Creation
global data block.; ~ou decla~
the data addre",es wheo programminij: thc
dHtn block in this CH.C

'"

;;. Tbe d eclaration view is used 10 define the

llats structure for global daUt bl<.><;n, as "c 11
~_~ Ihc de fault values.
eo You Can handle the online v.luc! in Ihe data
>k

".

Eacb ' -.e" presents a table conlPining the abso1u1~ data add.... se. in sequence. tM n8Jt>C' and
clara 1)-ptS. the initial values aDd corruncnts (Fig_
~ 3.11). The data >->cw eODtatnS an additional
column with the actual 'aluc.
If you oprn a data block from Ihe omine data
management, you arc provided with Ih~ oftline
" '11"10,,, "'nh "hieh you cao edit Ihe d~IH in the
pmgrammin g device. !fyou open a data block

3.4 Programming Data Bloch

F j~U T~

3.11 Eumplc or on Orene<:! [)"" 1310";' (Dednration Vie"-")

which i. present in the CPU "s u, ermemory. th~

editor di,p l~y" the online window wi th whi ch
you can edit the data val ues on the CPU.

Offlin e w indow
You I,"C the dec laration view for input;; w ith
global data b locks You dcdare th~ data
addr~sses in th is view; you definc lh~ s~"uencc
of data add[\;\S~s. assign a na me and data type
to each data address . and Can "dditional1y em er
a conuuem. Each data add .. e<s lS ass igned a
deb.ult va lu e . This i, Z<'ro. the smallC8l value or
empty d~pcnding on the data type . You ca n
modify the ddau lt v~ luc in the initia l v alu e col-

"=.
The data "dtlrc>se, "nd the d~fauh values are
already dcfincd for data blocks which [\f~
derived from a user dam type or from a fundion
hlock. They are obtained from the declaration

of the user J"t.~ type or from the

th~ fundion block.

d~cI "r~tion

of

The data view additi onally "hows th e ""tual

value colwnn. The default values from the initi al vo lue column arc entcred as standard in this
co lumn . In the data "jew. YO Ll can enter a d ift" ren! in itial value for the load m emory and thus
an act l!ai value for the ",'ork memory (F igure

3.12).
The possibility wh ich exim for assigning indi vidual default value. to ea ch data block is parti cularl y im portant for the data b locks derived
fmm a Ll..ier data typ<: or from a function b lock.
t'or example, if you generatc severnl instance
data blo<.:ks o f a function block, all dala b locks
have th~ defau lt value sct in the function b lock .
In the data view, you can m>w iT1 dividllally
as sign other values to various dam addresses for
each in.tan ce .

115

3 SIMATIC S7 Program

view

In the offline win<1ow,

y ou roit the ,"'''' in ,~c
ofllin.< data ~lOna~<m<,, 1.

In Iho vtiliJ,. "ind<>,".

Y"~ monitor the da", in

the CPU'. won: memOlY

U,eHTT --+ SAVE

1<' wri t. ll ,. aotual

'[ ~~efam! va,IU.BT.-.:

..

':~

Initial

~alu"

I'

to write tho &rual val ue

;"to the load m em o,),

val". imo t h<

offline dato .

an" won: memo,),.

- lr-~,c,c,C,"C,~.~"C'"~.-'J .. _:I;;:~ACO~'C"'.~'C"~.C'"-"

OHli n. dato< in the prog ramming davlce

Load memory

Wo rk m"mory

Hgur e 3.12 Data SLo!"a!F wilh Incremental PrognlIrnniIl8

Online w indow
You usually usc the on line window to view the
actual dam valu~s ;1) \he Ll'er m emory. H(lw_
ever, you C"n also u,e ;t to generate d ata hloch.
The initial value column;n the dec laration ,~ew
show. \b e init; a l va lu e from the oftlin e data
m anagement or thc ini\ia l ,'alue from the load
memory if tb~ omine project a'.,oc iated with
the CPU program is n ot av ailable _ The acnml
value column ;n the dma view d is plays the
a~tual value from thc work memory. W ith E VIl'
---> I N TTIAUZE DATA BLOCK you
requ~s t the
~d Ltor to re place a ll actual value, hy the in itial
values agai n.

defau lt valu e, and th e oaluc in the ''':tual val ue

colunm a , the initi al value inlo the omine data
man"g~m~nt.

Kote that the comple te inform "tion ~o n cenl i ng

data addresses, such as e.s- lh~ name, is only
p resent in the amine data management. 11 i"
nx:ommendah lc to also write the d ata bloch
g~ llerated in the CPU'. user memory into th~
offline data lIllIllagem ent so th aI data consi, tc ncy is rcl"incd (Chapter 2 .6 .5 "Block Handling" u nde r "D~ta block> offiille/olllin~").

'''ill

Wh<.-,,! wri \i ng hack with PLC ---> DOWNLOAD.

you write the ,"a lu~ in the i1~tui11 ,"i11ue column
into the work mem ory_ You arc there fore able
10 use the progmmrning device 10 inilu~ncc \he
values of data addres,es during rrogram eXecution. ThO' yaluc in th e ;n itial v alue column is
rej ected.
Wh~n w rilin g hack with FlL_
t: ---> SAYE . you
write the value in the initia l value ~oJumn "'" the

'"

3.5

Variables, Constants and

Data Types
3.5.1

Generul R~mal"l<.~ Con c<'rnin g

Variab les

A ,' ariable i, a value with a >pc,:ili e format

(Figure 3.13). Simple variable. c o ns ist of aa
address (such as input 5 .2) and a data typ;; (su~ h
as BOOL for a bi nary value) . The addres" in

3 .5 Variable., Con.."nt. and Dam Types

(Urn, comprise, an addtess identitier (wch as J
for input) and an ahsolute stomgc location
(such '" 5.2 for byt~ 5, bit 2). You Can also ref_
~n;nce an addre" or a variables ymbolically by
aigning the address a namc (a symbol) in th~
,ymbo l table.

compon~nt
,, ~Iues

of an array consisting of 30 11'T

into the accumulator and furth~r proccss

il).
Constants a~ used to pres et variable> to a fIxed
value . Th ~ constant is given " spe~ifi~ prefIx
depcnding On the data type .

A hi t of data type BOOL is refe rred to a s a

binary add,.".,., (or hinll'Y operand). Ad d,..."es
comprising one. two or four hy:cs "If vari ~bJ e~
with th~ relevan1 dala type, are called <ii;:i'''/

opcr"nd,'
Variablcs. whkh you decl are within a b lock. are
to a. (block-) loca l variables _ These
include the block paramel<:rs. the static and
temp orary loc"1 dam . even the dara addresses in
global dara b locks . When th ese var i abl e~ are of
an e lementary data typc, they cau also be
a cces.ed as operan d., (for instane~ s tat i~ lo~a1
data as UJ op~rands, temporary local data as L
opcratlds. and data in g loba l da:a b locks as DB
operands).
r~ferrcd

Local variahl~<, h owcv~r, ~an "Iso ~ ot complex data typ<> (such as stnlC111res or arrays).
Variables wit~ th~,e data type, reqllire m On!
than 32 b its . s(' thal \h~y can no longer, for
example, be loaded int0 the accumula tor. And
for t h~ ,arne reason, they cannot h(: addrC"S,ed
with "normal" ' STL <ta\cm~n" . T he!"e are special functions for handling (hese variab les, w ch
as the IEC fun~tions, wh ich are pJ"<'widcd "-~ "standard library with STEP 7 (you can generate
vari ables of com plex data type in block parametcrs orthe <am~ data type).

or

If variables
complex data type contain com
pon,,'ms of e lementary data type, the<e componems can be treat ~d as (hough they were separate variables (for example, \lOll ~an load a

01"".

A v>0a..u;, """sis"
""d",u and ,1>8 da,~ 'J'P"Hi J~.><>d 'y""'xJ;Cd#y,

Va_ia ble

3 .5.2

Address;n!,: Va riables

Wh~n

ad dressing variables, you may choo.e

betwcen absolmc "ddr~ssing and ,yntbolic
addres sing
[>

[>

Abso lute
addre" ing
uses
numcri~al
addresses beginning with zero for c,,,,h
addre,s area.
Symbolic addre,sing u.;;es alphanumeric
natllCS, which you yourself dcfmc in the
symbo l table for gtobal addr~.'es or in the
declaration
section
for
block-loe,,1
addr~sses .

Ab so lute addressin!;: of variables

Variable. of ckm~'lItary dat a type can be referenc ed by absolnte addresses_
TI,e ab sol ute at!dr~ ss of an input or output is
computed from Ihe module Slart addre ss, which
you ,ct or had set in the configu",tion table and
the type o f s ignal ~onncction OIl \k module_A
d istinction is m"de bC lwccn bi nary ~ignal~ and
ana log signal<
Bina ry I'ign'l/S

A binary signal conta ins one b it of in formal ion.

Example, of binary signals are the input signa ls
fro m limit ~witchc~, momentary_contacl
switches and 'he like whieh lead 10 digital input
modules. and output ,ignal. which control
lamp', contactors , and the like v ia digi1aloutput
modu l e~_

Ana/"K .l'iKna/s

Add ress .. 081" 1yP'"

Address klenHfier

Fl~ ur.

..

Memof")' location

3.t3 Structure of a VMl.b J~

An analog signa l contains 16 bils of inionnalion . An analog s ignal corresponds to a "~han.

ncl", which is mapP"d in th~ con!rol ler as a
word (2 by tes) (sec below). Analog input signals (such a< voltages from resi,t,once 1hcrmom~"1~Tll) arc carried to analog input moo uJe<,
d igi tized, ant! lllad ~ available to (he controller
as 16 information bits. Conversely. 16 bit~ of

J S(/>'tAflC 57 Program

mfonnation can control an indicalOr via an analog output module, where the infomlaaou is
cun ,'~ned into an analog value (such as a cur_
rent),
T he information width of a signal also c~
sponds to the infonnation width of the "ariabl~
in whieh the signal is slOred and processed . The
infonnal ion width ~nd the inlcrprclation (lflb~
informat ion (fo r ;n;;tanc~ the positionsl
weight), taken tog~t her. produce the data typo
of the variable, Binary signals an: store d in
variable, "f data type BOOL analog signals in
vaTiable, of data type L'\T.
The only determining factor fo' the addres.>ing
of variables i~ the information w idth. In STEP
7, th~-re are four w idth" which can be acce".d
wilh absolute addressing'
t>

1 bit

t>

8 bit,

Data type BOOL

Data type BYTE or anmh~r dala
type with I; b its

t>

t>

16bit s

DatatYP<'WORDoranothndata

32 bits

VAriables of data type WORD com;;"t of two

bytes (a word). They ha>e as absolute addre,s
Ihe address idemifl~r and th~ number of the
low-order byte of th~ word containing the variabl e, The address idcntiflcr "' s\1pplemented by
a \\', Example,'
IW.t

Input word no . 4 :
cOnla;"'; bytes 4 and 5

QW 20 Oulpllt word no . 20;

contains byle, 20 and 21
Variables uf <.!ata type DWORD consi" offo ur
b'1C~ (a doubkword). They have as ahsolute
address the ~dd,"ss id~ntifior and Ih e nw nbeI of
the lo\\-orJer byte o f the word containing lh~
variab le. Th e address identif,er is S\1pplem~nt.d by a D. Examples:

Data type DWORD Or another

dala Iype "ith 32 bil'

QD

Output doubt.word nO. 24:

contain, byle' no . 24, 25, 26 and 27

Q 16.4

Output b it no. 4 in byte no. 16

Variabl e, of data type BYTE ha"e as abwlUlc

address the address identifier and tt.c number of

OW, 26

QW24
,

"I

os

.. 1
07 ."
.. ,07 ..
25
OS26
CB27

2~

Addr.,ses for the data area include Ihe data

b lo~k, Examples :

DB lODBX 2.0
Data bit 2,0 in dnta block DB 10
DB II.DBB 14
D~la byle \ 4 in data bloc\:: DB 11
DB 20 .DBW 20
Data word 20 in dala block DB 20
DB n.DBD 10
Dam doubleword 10 in data block DB 22
Addi'ional in fonnati'", on addressing ' he data
area call be fOllnd in ChapIe. 18.2.2 "Acces>ing

QD, 2"

QW2S

F11:IlN 3.1.t
Byte Co ntent! in Woru.; and Double" ",,<is

''"

QB 18 Output byte no. 18

Input dOllble"ord no. 8:

conlains b)~es 8, 9. 10 and 1I

Input bit no. 0 in byte no

OB 24

inpm b)1e no. 2

ID g

I 1.0

ill 2

l)'pC w ith 16 bit,

Variable, of data typo BOOL are rdcrenccd , ia

an address identifier, a hyte n ",mber, and ~ scp=ted by a dedtnal point - a bit numb ....... Num bering of the byte s begms at zero fo r nch
addre,s area, lbe upper limil is CPU-specific.
The bils ar<; numbered from I) to 1.
Examples:

the byte containinR the vari able . n ,e addre"

iMmifier is supplememed by" B, EX3mplcs;

0= Openmds"
Symbolic addrc"in g of variables
SymooJic addressing uscs a name (called a
symbol) in place o f an absolute address, You
you,selr choose mi.> name. Sueh a name millt
begin with a letter aud may comprise up to 24

3. ~

characters. A key\vord is nol permissible as "

symhoL
There is no difference between u pp"r-case and
10wCT-ca,~ leners when <.--nlering a symbol.
During the output, Ihe ~ditor applics thc notation defincd d uring declaration oflhc sYInbol.
The nam~, Or symbol, must b e ~110C31ed to an
absolute addr~s,. A. di st inction " made
betwecn glo bal <ymbol8 and symbols thm ar~
local 10 a block

Variables, Con Slan ts and Data Types

leading 'if'. Whcn tb c Edito r cannot distinguish a local symbol from an address, you In ..... t
p rece,j(; the symbol wilh a .. #" eharncte r during
inpnL
Local symbols are available onl y in the pro--gramrning device database (in thc omin e con_
tainer Blocks). Iflhis infonnation is missing on
dccmnp ilatin", the Edit"r in~crt.~ a s"bslimtc
symbol.
Udnll symhol names

G lobal symbo!.
You may assi!{T\ names in the symbol tabl e to
Ihe fo llowing objccts:
r>

])a13 b locks and codc b lo<:ks

r>

Inputs. outputs, peripheral

periph<.-"TaJ OUlp"ts

r>

Memory bi ls, timet> ',nd eo"mer.;

r>

User data type5

r>

Variable tables

mputs

and

A g looaJ symbol may also include spaces . special characters and counIty_sp~citk charaelers
such a" thc umja,,(. Exceptions to this rule are
the characters OOh~-' and Ft'ho' and th~ quotation
mark ("). \vllen using symbols contaiJ,ing special ch aractt-rs, you mu.<t put the symbo ls in
quotation marks in thc program, In comp iled
blocks. th~ STL Ed itnr a lways shows global
symbols in quotation mark>.

You can us c g lobal symbols throughout the p rogram; each such "ymbo l m1.lS l be uniq ue within
a program ,
EditinK imponing and nportinB of glohal
symbols ar~ d~scrib~d in Chapter 2 .5 .2 Symbol Table",
Btock_local symbols
T hc names tbr the local da'a a rc spec ified in the
dec laration seelion of th e relevant b lock. These
names m ay contain only le n ers, digi's and the
unde rline character (no umlauts').
Local "ymbols are valid only within a block.
The 8ame symbol (Ihe 83me variab le name)
may b e used in " differ.-nt context in another
bl ock. The Edil-Or shows local symbols with a

If you us~ symbolic n ames while pwgramming

w ith th~ inc r~menta l Editor. th cy m ll.t have
already been alloca ted t o absolute addre.se "
YOli also have thc option of cnleriag new symbolic names in the symbol18ble duri ng proj,r ram
input , You <:<ill subsequently ~ont;nue program
input w ith the new ,ymboli c name ,
TfYO li eon'piic .. "O lireC I~XI file geaerated c.g ,
[rom LADfFflD blocks . the complete assignnlent o f symbo lic name~ to absolute addresscs
is only made avai labl e during the compi b,t ion.

In the case of arrays. the indivi du al c omponents

ar~ a<:cessed via the array name and a 8ubscri pt.
for example MS ERI ES[1J for Ihe fi rst compone nt. In L A D and F13 D . the index is a constant
INT valuc ,
Itl :<tructures, caeh sub identi!1er is separated
from th e preceding subidentifier by " dc~ imal
p"in l> ro r insrance FRAM.E.H EADER .CNUM.
Component.< of ",er data lypeS a..., address~d
exactly like structures
J)atlllldd~ess~s

Symbolic addre.sing of data uscs complete

ad dre s>ing including the dat;, bk><; k. Example:
the data b lm;k with th~ symbolic address
/l,-fVALUES com>1ins the variahles MYALUF 1,
YiVALUE2 and M TI ME. These variables can
b e a,Wr~ssed a, fo llows:
"MVALUE5" . ' 1 \ , = 1"NVALUES".MVAInE 2
" MVAL1.rES" .'1T!Y.E
Pl~ asc refcr to Ch apter I ~,1.2 "Accessing D ata
Opcrnnds for further in formation on addressing of data.

'"

3 SIMATIC S7 Program
Table 3.4 Divi,ion oftht 0... T)Ipc.

J.!.J

(n bits)

O,tni.w o rD llal)'ptl

You ~an find example. of the d~d"nltion and

ust of vanabks of an data \'I'\~$ in I~ hbrn.ri"",
"LAO_Book" and " FRO Sook" undenhe pro-

Da\a \~ ,\i'llU\a\.e me cn:!.!amris\ics of data

ell5enlial1y the repr~>;cnlalion orthe COntenl, of

grDm "Data Types" program that yon can

download from Ih<: pub lisher's Website (<ee
~ge 8).

a variable. and the permissible rangco. STEP 7

provide!! predefined dala types. which you can
c<>",bin~ in.o u_= dIt", !ype>O.

The da\a ')"\'ItS lIt avai\ab\t on a ,\oba\ basis

3.S,4

~~~~i&..~~~\.J...\\~~~~
"~";he-;;;;;e"1:llI'"i;:P;:,.

dallllypu

> CompLex datil

typeS

data type.
:> Parameter types
I>

a word or a doubleword.
Tlble 3.6 mow,; the elementary data type. _For
m~IlY data type,. there are tWO con,(8nt r~pr.
sentutions tnal you can use equally (e.g. Tuv\ Elf
or Til). The lable contains \1M: minimum value
for a dalll type in the upper line and the maximum value in Ih~ lower hne.

lj5Cf

O llra tioD of eleme ntary da,a types

Table 3.4 ~hOW5 the pro~rties of Ih.,. d>.ta

Iype das5<'s.
Table 3.5 E.uOlplcs of O.::l.nuion >ad Initial V.luo
, [

Dalalpn

f...u.~<u"~~"'<:&.~~(..'"~'"I:t.'\....,,~

Depending on stru~IU", and application. Ibe

data types with STEP 7 are classified as foilows:

I11o---....."'['<~tttenmry

EI~mtntary

""

Table 3.~ shows some elUlmplcs urthe declara(ion of v8riable. of elementary dala ~s.

3 ,5 Variables. Con,tant" a"d Data Types

TabJ~

J 6 O"erview ofElem<:ntary Data T)1>C'

tJata 1)l'"

( Widlh)

Dc,s cription

Bxampie for C<>nstJhl Notation

"OOC

( 1 bit)

Bit

FALSE

BYTE

(8 b its)

TRUE
8-bit

b~xade<'imal

CHAR

(8 bits)

WO=

(16 bits)

()'w

BiI' [6R1Xl, 16#00

BilINiFF, 16/!f1'

number

ch ara,tcr (A Se!!)

16-bithexaJe<lllla.l
tlum bcr

16bil b inary number

Printable chanoclcc, q!:. 'X

WII16'1oooo,INiOOOll
W~l61ifffF, J6!iFFFF
2"OOOO_ooooJII)()(}_ OOOO
""llr l 1111 111 1 Illl

Count ,alue.
3 ,let'.de. BCD

DWOIW

(32 h its)

Two g_hit u(1,igned

dccim~l numbc'n;

B II(O,O)

32-bit he~adecjm. l
number

D WJJ16"OOOO_ OOOO, 161iOOOO 0000

DWII 16 t1 frfF]FFF,16li' FHPJFFF

32-bi' binary number

UII(255,25~)

2'iOOOO_0000_ .,_0000_0000

l ll llll 11 11

(16bilS)

111 1 l ill

Fuuc Sbit un,ilP'eJ

LI#(O,O,O,O)

dedmal numbers

BiI(255.255.H5,2~5)

Fixed.point numocr

32768
~32

767

(32 b il.)

Fixed.point numbt'f

LII-2 147 ~83 MS t )

lll+2 14 7483 647')

(32 b i!

float;ng-poim "umbe"<'

'. -I.23 4567E+02 2)

in exponential rt'pY'C<rntation
12 3.4567")

a, de<:iII1al cumbcr
SSTJME

(16 bits)

TIME

(32 biLS)

nme value in
S L~lAl'lC format
Time

"alu~

in lEe fo. -

mat

;4),,,,

SST
SST!MEif2 h46m30.
TiP'-24d20h.l 1m23.64 7m.
n",lEN24d20b,llm23.&47m.
T#--24 .855D4d
nMEII 24g~5 i34d

DI" I ~JO.(JI-O 1
DATf-'1'2168- 12-3 1
TIME 01' DAY

(32 bits)

Time of day

TODJoOO:OO :OO
1L\-lE OF DAY~23 : 5~:59.999

1) "Lit" may be "mtlled ,[the numocc 1> outsld~ tho L"l number rang.
I)

for value r.mg~

>C'C

text

3 SIMATIC S7 Program

Na"", is the identifier for a block-local variable

(liT' to 24 chara~t~r', aJphanumcri~ and underscore only). YO ll em er the associated data n'","
in the Type column.
With the cxception orthe temporary local data
and h lock parnmeten o f functions. you ~an
assign a t> initial vallie to the v"riable,. Use th~
' yntax suitable for the data type for this PUTpose. Commen fs are optional.

BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORIl, CHAR

A variab le of data lype BOOr. ""prc>cDI, a b it
valuc (for cxample input I I.O). Variab les with
data types BYTE , WORD and DWORD are b it
.trings comprising 8, 16 and 32 bit,. respe~
lively. The individual bilS are not cvaluated.

CHAR
A , -arinble wnh data Iype CHAR (character)

r .. seryes one byte. Data typ.- CHAR repuseuts

a 5ingk ehameter in Asc n format. Example:

""N.

Yon can us .. any printable cbaractcr in apo,troph .. , . Some spec ial characters rcquireuse or the
notat ion ~hown in Tabl .. 3.7. Example : 'SS'
represcnl. a dollar 'ign in ASCI! code.
Tabl. 3.7 Sp<X'ial ChaIl!.ct<,.. fur CHAR
CHAR

H~

n...,ription

",

4
2 """

Doll.r sign
Apostrophe

"00

L in~

Sl or $1

17h....,.

fel {lf)

Special fon n s of the,e data types are the Bel)

numbers and the count ~s l1<ed in c<)IIjundion
with counter funCTions, as well as data type
CHAR, which represen ts "" A SCll character.

SP or Sp

BCV n~mlx,r,'

The (l. IOVE function aUows you to us~ lWO or

tom ASCli characters enclosed in apostrophes
~, " sp~'Ciai form of data type Cl lA.R for writin;::
AScn charaCl<:rs in a variable.

BC!) numb<:rs hs'-e no ,pecial identifier. Sim ply enter a BCD number "ith the data typ .. 16#
(hexadecimal) and use only digit> 0 to 9.

BCD number' occu r in coded processing of

time value, and counts and in conjunction wi th
conversion functions . D ata tyJ>C S5TTM1, " i,
">cd to specify a time value for 'tarring a timer
(.ec below), data type 1611 or C# for ,pe~ifying
a count vallie. A C # count value is a BCD nuInber between 000 and ')')') . wh .. rehy the sign is
always O.
As a rule , lICD numbers have no sign. In conju nction with the conversion functions. the 'ign
of a BCD number is stored in the leflmo>!
(h ighe't) decade, so that there is on~ lcss
decade for the number.
Wilen a BCD numhcr h in a 16-bil w<mllhe
sign is in the uppermost Meade. whe",hy only
bit position 15 is ",levant. Sign.l1 state "0"
IDCan, that the number is po5iti\'e. Si!!ll"i state
,. ," 'tands for a ncgati"" numbcr. The sib'll has
no afleet on t.b e comeot\ nf the jod i' idual
decade " An cquival .. ot a>signment appli .. s for
a 32-bjt word.
The availab le value range is 0 to 999 fo r a 16bit BCD number and 0 to '" 9 999 999 for a 32bit number.

OC

No,.. page (rt)

SII. or Sr

mJ~.

Camaie re"'m (LK)

S'T '" $t

09."

'hb,,]alo[

T"T

A variable w ith data type INT io; ,tored as an

iut .'!e, (16-b il tixed-point "umb.. r). Data type
L"'T ba.s uo special identifier.
A ,"sriabl .. with data t ype Th'T T"<:"""'-'" one
word. The , ignal ,tate, of bi ts 0 to 14 r ep res ~"l
the digit p",itioru; of the number; the signal
, w e of h it 15 represents lhe si),,'Il (S) . Signal
state ""0" mean, that thc numlx:r is po;;itive . sig nal state ' 1"" that il is negati' e, A ne gative num
ber i, repre,ell1ed as two', compl.. ment. The
permissible number range is

from - 32 767 (7FIT"",)

to -31 768 (8000ocJ.
DL"T
A va riable v.ith data type DINT is stored a< an
int ..",~r (32 -b it fixed_point number) , An int eger
is stored as a DL"I T variable wh .. n it .. xceed, 32
767 of falls bJow 32 761> or when the number
i, pr~c ed.-d by type id .. ntificr L# .

3.5 Variables, Constants an,1 Data Ty)'('s

BCD number, 3

Data typ" CHAR

.".

dee~d

0 \

,
ASCI! Cod.

S;gl1

BCD num""r, 7 deeadu

Byte m

28127

Bytem+2

Byte m+1

24 123

"

Bytn m+3

20 [ HI

Sign

15 14 ...

Om type INT

D~'" typ"

OINT

3130 ...
1S 1
D~UI

2302

"'.

11> 15 _

d ;;

..2'"12'" ..

... 2'2' 1'1 :

Iyp" REAL

3130 .

... 0 '"

... 2322

Data type S5TIME

15 14

D~"'ty""DATE

1514 .

... 0

,, 'n !)

'I','"c,'".',''''.-,------------,~;'-""~~I
,

3130...

I5I2302",...

':: '

Data type TIME

.16 15

'~"I~",
.'

"

... 6 "
" .

Data type TIME_Of _DAY

3130

... 1615 ...

, 0

Sign

3 SIMAnc S1 ProJ!I3:n

A variable with da.~ type DiNT re,erYCS one

doublewoml. Th.o: signal <ta.cs of bus 0 to 30
represent .I>e digit posi.ioru; ofrl>e number. ~
sign is s.o;n-ed in bi t 31. Bit 31 is ''0'' for a POSI.ive and "1" for a n.. gati ..... nnmOO. NegallH
numbers aN:> stored as two', complement. The
number 11l"],:c il
from .,.2 147483647 (7FfF t 'FFF box )
to -214 7 483648 (8000

~J.

REA L
A variable ofdaU-type REAL represents. fra~

lion. and ;5 ~w..ed liS an-bit flrnning-poim

numb<."T. An i ... tllC1" 1~ ,tore<! as a REAL v&ri.ble when you add. decimal poinl.nd II z~-ro.

In exponc:rJ! ",pret:ntalioJ!, you can prcde tbe

or " E" with an imeger number or frlle.ion
",ilh Seven relevant digil$ and a sign. The diglls
that follow the "e" or "F' reprcsem the exp<>nent to b .. sc 10. STEP 7 handle. the conversion
orthe REAL variabl.. into the internal representati on of a floating_point nnm""'.
~e"

REAL variables are divid ed ;nt" numbers.

which can be represented witb comple.e aCeurney (''nonnah1.w noating-pointnumbers) and
thos.e witb limited accuracy ("!lenOT\lllilind"
floaTing-po.ot numbers).
The ,..lac range ofa nonnalizcd fl""tinapoin.
number lies between,
3.402 823 X 10-l8. 0 - 1.1 15494 X lO-l8

'0'

.. 1.401 198 X I~~ to "'!.l73 494 X ]()_Ja

n 'e S 7-300 CPLis Cannol ca!cula.e wi.h denarllIali:tffl float ing_point numben. Th e bit pnttern
of a denOlmali zed numlxr is in1el"Jlll'tcd ~~ a
1.ero.lfa rcsuh falls w;thin .his ranilc, it is rep
resented a. zero. and ,tatu. bit. OV Bnd OS arc
~et (l\crflow).
A \"ariahle of data type REAL consists .nler_
nallyoftrnee components. namely the s'iln. tbe
S-bit c~poncru to base 2 0Uld the 23-bit man
tina. The sign ma~ assume the '"lItue -0.' (posili,e) 01" , (oe!!a.i,e). Beron" the exponen. i~
stored. I constant value (bias. -I 27) is added 10
it SO that it sbows a "~Iue ... nse of from 0 10
255. Tbe mantissa repre"""IS .he fnoctional portion of tl>.- number. The inteaer ponion or the
manti,sa i, ,,01 sa' cd. as it is either always I (in
the ca~ ofnonna lized floating-point numbers)
o. alway' 0 (in the ea,e of d~'I1<mnal i 7.cd no~t
ingpoint tmm~rs). Table 3.8 shows the int er_
IIBI ranl;c ofa domiog- poinl number.

SHL\l
A \"ariablewith dara I)'pt: S5TIME is used in the
bB~IC iani'Ja!!C"S STL, LAD and FBD to ~et tbe
Slil.1ATIC timers. It n::ser.o:.I one l6-bit word
with I + ] decades.
The lime i, spcciJied in bours. minuteii. sccond.$

and milliseconds. STEP 7 handles convc ... ion

'"
i

A dc-normalized floating-pomt number may be

in the followin!! range:
LIn 494 x 10- 31 to -1.401 298 )( 10"'"

1.17S 494 X 10 U to -30402 823 X 10-;8

in to imernal repre5enta.ion. Internal

Tabl .. 3.M Ronge Limi" of a Floatini'Poilll Numboc r

Sign

0
0
0
0

'"

F.... ponent

Mano.>:I

Dc..::ripuotl

'"
'"

Not equal to 0

1'01 " '~hd IOooti"".po"" nurnl>er

- infmitc
Po.ili,. _li,,~d foatlnll _poinl oumber

0
0
0
0
I ... 2S4

'"
'"

..

. 2~4

""'-

Noc cqual 100

0
1'01 equal In 0

Arb",..f")'
Not equ.al to (I

1'o.ith-e don:or!n.l,,'ed tloatina-poun number

~

,=
II'"'pli"" dcDomIahzed floatm&-poinl number
1\'pri'" nonnati2ed fioaUJIa-point Dumber
infinite

1\Ot . ,-..ljd floa,ina-poinl IIUml=

1'q)1l'$C11-

3.5 Variables. Constants and Data Type,

talion is a, BCD numher in th e rang~ ()()() to

999 . Th .. tim e interval can a>sum.. the follow ing v"lu~s; 10 m. (OOO() ), 100 ms (0001), I <
(0010). and 10 s (0011 ) . The duration is the
product oftim~ interval and time value.
Examples;

a decima l point, may be omitted

S5TIMEII'500ms
S5T#2h46m 30.

3.5.5

(- 005 0t,eJ
(- 3999 h<.J

DATE
A va,iable with data (ypc DATE is stored in a
word as an un< igned
d_po int n um~r. The
~ont~'T1t' of th .. variabl.. correspond to tae num ber of days since 0 I .0 1 ,1990 . I ts repres~lHnti o n
shows the year, month and day, separated from
on~ another by a hyphen. Example"

t"". .

DATE#1990-D 1_0 1
0 #2168-12 -31

(- OODOj,e, )
( = FF62 tcx)

Tll\lE

A variable wilh dala type TIME reserves on~

doublewo rd, Its representalion contain, the
;tlfommtion for day s (d) , hO UTS (b), min u~es
(m) , ,eeond, ) and mi ll i, cc o'M d;; (ms).
wherehy individual items of this in fonnmion
may be omiucd . Th e contents o f the "ariab le
are interpreted in mi llisecond. (ms) and .,ore<!
as a signed 32bit fixed- poim number Examp les:
TLMT.!l24d20h3 1m23s64 7ms
(- 7H'F_ FFFF h<> )
TlM Ei/Om <
(- ()()()O _ OOOO~e,J
T#---24d20h 31 m23s64gms
(- 8()(I(:U )()o)I\oxl
A "decimal r~'Pr~,untat ion" is also possible for

TIME. e.g. T IMEII2.25h or Tlt2,25h. bM mpies:

TlME#O ,Oh

(- OOOO_OOOOt,.,,,l

T IME#24 .l!55 134d

(- 7FFF JFF Fh)

E ~ample"

TIME at' DAY#OO:OO :OO (- OOOO_ODOO b,,)

TOD#23:5 9: 59.999
(- 0526_ 5BFFn.:,)
Comple:.

D~ta

Types

STEP 7 de fines the following Four complex

da!a type s '
t>

DATE

A~ D

TlM r

Da! .. and lim e (BCD-coded)

t>

STRING
Lnaraeter string with up to 254

Chaf3Cl~TS

> ARRAY
A rray variab le (combination of variables of
the sam e type)
t>

STRUC T
Stnleture variable (~ombit1atioll of variables
of d i{ferct1l types)

Tk data type, arc pre-deli ned, with me length

o f the data type STRTKG (characwr stting) and
the combination and size of (he data tyre'
A RR.".Y and STRUCT (s!r.uolUre) being
dd" w(i r.y (he US~T,
You can declare variables of complex dma
types only in global dam b tock . in instan~e
data b locks, a s temporary local data or as b lod<
p a r amet ~r s

Vari ahle, of comp lex data types ~an only be

applied at b lock parameters a. complet.. variable.,
There are TEC functions for proce"ing variah les of data types DT and STRTN(,~ e ,g.
extract ion o f the d"tc an d conversion to the
DATE rcprcscnUl ~ion or comhining two charactcr strin g' to one variab le. Thes~ me functions
are load able standard FC b locks that you ca"
find in the Stan dard Ubmry under the lEe
Hmclio" Blocks program.

TarE_O t' _DAY

A variable of data type TIME_OF_DAY

rCSC1"\'es one doubluword . It contains thu n~lln
ber of milli s~~ond,; since th " d ay bcg,m (O:OD
o 'clock) in the form of an uns igned fixcd_poim
Ilumbcr. I!s r.... pre'emation contai ns the information for hours, m inu tes and s econds, "~'Pa
rated by a eol0l1 The m illiseconds, which follow the second, and a", <epa rated from them by

DATE_ A;\'T) _ lTME

The data typc DATF._ AND_TIME represents a
tim e cons isting of the date and the time of day.
Yon can also us e the abbrn ia tion DT in place
o f DATE ANn TTM'E.
The individua l componems of a DT variable are
A Se n coded (Figure), 16).

125

3 SIMATlC S7

Tabl~ 3 .~

PrO~'Tam

lOxampl or the Dcda"'tion of DT \ 'mable< ~n d STRL'IG Va".hk,

STRll'OG
The dat. type STR Ih"G represents a character
~haracten;. Yo"
.pecify the maximum p<.:rmissib lc numlx.'T of
character< in square bmckcts foHo"ing the keyword STRING

.tring consisting of up to 25 4

Th ig speci fication ~"n abo be omitte<:l; the Edi(or th~n uses" kngm of 2$4 byICs. In (he ca:;c
of function , FCs. th ~ Ed itor doe, not permit
specification of the !cnh'lh or it demand:; me
standard length of 254. 1\ variabk of d"T~ type
S TRI NG oc~upks I\l/() byt~s more of memory
than th~ d,.,darcd maximum I~ngtb..
Prc-ass;gnm~nt i, ~aniod OUt wilh ASCllcoded characters be(ween single invcflcd com_
mas or w im a prdixed dollar , ign in th~ ca<~ of
cenain characters (see data typ~ CHAR)

If th e initial Of pre-assig ned value is ,hortCT

than the declar.u maxinmm lenglh . (he remaining charactCT localion, life not reserved. \Vhen
a ,'ariahl~ of data type STRING lS post- proonly the currently re.,erved chilra~t~ r
locations are taken into consid~ration. It i, abo
~~>sed.

pos~i blc

w ddin~ an empty string" a~ the in i_

tial value . Figure 3. t 6 show, the stntCl<l re o f a

STRTI\G variable.

Data type ARR."..Y r~pres ~nt' an array or fidd

compn$;ng a ftJ<td number of elements of the
same data rypc .
You

,p~ cify

the range offield indices in , quare

following the data typ" ARRAY. The
,alu c (lU 1he le n must be less than Of

brack~l'
in; (i~!

a.too form8t STRING

o.ta format DT
Yur

o bi$ 99

B),".e

Byte n+1

Month

1 bis 12

8 y"" n+1

AC".llall.. ""th

Byte ..,.2

0"

1 bi$31

By:e n+2

tstcltua01e-

Hc ur

O bis 23

Byte n+3

2r..d ::I>ar;ocer

Minute

Ob is 59

Byte ...

..

Second

Obis 59

Byte n.m+1

mrn <;haracte r

"'

Obis 999

8;'('~

..

Byte n+3

I"e,~~

n+4

Byte 0+5

~yte n+6
j3YteI1+7

I Wee kday

W""k<]ay _ from 1 - Sunday

to 7 - S"tl",hy

Flgu rc 3.16 Structure of . DT and a STR NG \"aria":"

'"

Maxlmurl l<>nglh

...

',m"
Maximum
leflgllT

3.5 Variablell. Constant, lIN! lla.1.& l'ypes

Nam.
MOA". v.1.
WO
Re~h

Typo

Inilla l V.lu<

ARRAY[l .24 )
RIOAL
ARRAY]-I0,.101
TIlI.fE OF_DAY
ARRAY(1. 14.1. 4)

0.4. I~. II

0.6. 3.0)

Comrnoms

Amoy ,-ari.ble with 24 REA L clemenTs

21 (TODII01UO:OO)

Ton arno.y ,,~'h 21 d""''-""li

%(1...-0)

T,,"O-<hmcn..ional..moy with 96 okmC"D1i

2 (...).1 (-b")

Th'o-d;mom;onal ",.,..y with 4 element.

OW

"'"'.

ARRAY fl .V.AI
CHAR

equal 10 the final value on the righl. BOlh indiC<;~ are TNT numbers in the NI"lIc - 32.7i>R to
+32.767. A field can lIa'., up !O 6 dimensions
.,ach of " ,IIO!!e I imi1S are separated by D= 1 .

Th., datD Iype of the individual field componems i. located in the line under the da,a l}-peARRAY. All dDta Iype. c~CCpt ARRAY are per
mi . sible: it can also be a use r data Iype,

PNt_as,<lgnment
AI IIIe declanttion SUllie, yOll can pre_a"' gn
values 10 ;ndi\-id'-'3.1 field components (nol as 1
block pIIr.rnle-ter in rollClioD. as an i",ool
pantmeler in a fun<:tion bl""k or as _ lemporary
variable). The d ata Iype of the pre.assignment
value must match the dala Iype O!"lhc !ic!d.
You do not require to preassign ull field com
ponenls: if Ihe nlImher of preassianment VIII
ues is less than the number offield components,
onl), Ihe fi.,;1 componen1~ liN pn."-".sil!l1ed. The
number of preassignment vMlu<:s musl 1>01 he
~atcr than !he number of fie ld COmpoD~nlS.
The p,.., .... ssignment values are each Separaled
by a eomma. Multiple pre-assignme!l1 with Ihe
SlIme vlIlue, is specified wilhin round brockelS
w;lh a preceding rcp<: lilion faCtOf.

ter ir Ihc bloc k parameter is or Ihe ... me data

I)'pe: as the components.

If lhe indi ~id'-'3.1 ficld compom:lIls ..,.., of elemenlary data types. you can process them ""~th
"norma\"' LAD or fBD functions.
A field componenl is IIcresscd will> lhe field
name ami an index in square bracke ls. The
ind ~l( is a tiJ<ed value in LAD!ll1d FBD and ~an
DOl be moditied al rumim~ (no variable index.
ins ponible).

Mlllrl-dim"n.<irma/ jidd< or arrays

Fields can have up 10 6 dimetlJiions_ Multi
dimcn~'onal fields are analogou~ loone-<lim",,sional tields. At the d<,.~laralion stage. the
tanges of the dimcn,;<ms ate written in sqUIITC
brackets, each separated b)' ~ comma ,
Structllre

or the variables

An ARRAY variable always ix"n! at a word

boundary. that is. at a bytc ",ill> an e veo address.
ARRAY ,ariabl"" oceup)' the mcmO<y up to the
next ","ord boundary.

Application

Component. of data t)'pe nOOL hellin in lhe

leaST silP'i lkanl hil; cOmponenlll ...r data type
BYTE and CHAR begin in Ih~ righth.,nd byte.
Th~ individual componenlS are lisled in order.

You can appl)' a field as a complele variable al

b lock panmCICN of data type ARRAY with Il>e
same Structure or al a block panuneu,r of data
Iype A.."-"Y. F O'f example. you can copy lh<o conlentS of a field vanable usinSthe .~ystem func_
tiun SFC 10 BLKMOV. You can also specify
individuallielu components at a block p"ntmc-

In multi-dimcnsional fields. Ihc compotlcnlS

..,.., slored line_wise (dimerulionwise) statting
"lib Ihe first dimension. With btl IUld byte componcnll. a new dimens;,," always 5t;u"\S in the
neXT byte. and "ilh componenls of other data
type new dimen.ion alwlI)'$ starts in Ihe nexl
word (;n lh~ nex, even byt~),

3 SIMATlC $7 Pn>gnun
Ta bl .. J.1I hJ.ampl .. ofD""lariul! .
Name
MotC",u

""

Off

0.1.)'

maxSpu<I

T,~

1,,111. 1V.lut

'''U~

"'''''
'00'

SSTI\IJ:
,,~

END_ST RUCT

FALSE

TI<U,
S5TL\IE ~ Ss

"'00

STR UCT
Th~ d~ta ~

STRUCT represeD~' data SUUC

lun: oomiSling of II. fixed number of components Ihal can each be ofa diff=1 dna I)~.
You specity the individual structure ~ompo
"ents aDd their cia", 1)'}lC5 under the ]inc with
lhe variable name and the key"ord STRUCT.
All .lat. typel' can be used including othet
siruciures,

At the declaration stage, you Can ~-l5sign

values 10 the individual structure componrnl$
(nol.., a blo<;k paramcterm a function. as an to
(lut parameter in II funnion blOf;k or (IS a temporary variable). The data type. of the pre-assign.
ment "alues must match the cia ... types of the
components.

C,mmnl
Simple ,lnI<:tun: ,~able with 4 componmb
Vto:iAbk :-ll>ICont.Dn oftyl'< BOOL
Van.ble Mo,cont.Dff of typ: BOOL
Van.ble )o.lo.co ~'- Delay of type SSnM E
V"".bk :\lo!Cont_ m,,~SP<'e<l of type lNT

$m<efllrc of t~e '"Qrillble~

A STRUCT ,'mabIe alwlYS bc:iW II word

boundary. thaI is. at a byte with an eH1'
addre:Js; following thi;" the indi"idlUll components are ~8!<:<I m the memory in the order of
tltcir dedllltiOn. STRUCT "lriab!C!$ o<;cupY
Ibe memory up to the oe't word bowldary

Componcrm of data tylX BOOL bellin in Ihe

least signifkam bit; components of data type
BYTE and CHAR begin in the right-hand byte
Components of other data t)lpl:s be:gm 8t a word
boundary.
A nested structure is a strotture a, a component
ofanother stroclUn'. A nesting depth of up to 6
,tructures is possib le. All componenlS can be:
accessed indi'~dually with "normal" LAD or
fBD functions pr",~ded tbey .re of elementary
data type_ The individual names arc eac:h ,cpa-

nlted by dOL

3. 5.6

Application
You can apply a comple,e variable at block
parameters ofd.ta type STRUCTwith the same
Sln lctull' or 8t a block parameter of data Iype
ANY. For example, you can copy the contents
ofa STR Ucr variable with the syst ~m function
SFC 20 RLKMOY. Yo" can a lso speetly an
indIVidual smlCture component at a block
parameter if the block parameter is of the nme
data Iype., Ihe componem.
If the individual stru= eomponeDts Ire of
elementary data type':!l. you can Pf'X~ lbem
witb -normal" LAO or- FBD functions.
A JtnJCtUre oomponmt IS accessed ,,~th the
nrw:tUfC name and the component name separaIl:<! by. dot .

Pa rameter T~l'"

Para.nmerrypes are data I)~s forblock paramo

etCI"$ (Table 3.12). The Icnt.h s~ifications in
Ihe Tahle refer to the memory teuircments for
block parameters fOf function block!. You can
abo use TllitR and COUNTER in the symt>ol
table as data I)lpI:S for timers aud counters.
3.5.1

Unr Data Type,

A uscr data type (UDn corresponds to. S\nICnne (cOl::lb:rwion of COmpoo~'1l1ll of IIDY data
,ype) "ith global "wdity. You can U$C a USC1'
data type ifa data
occun fteuenlly in
your prop;un or you WIlDt \0 ISStgn I name to _
data stntcture.

UDTs have global validity; i.e .. once dec lared.

they Can be "sed in all blocks. UDTs can be

3.5 Variables, Constants and Data Type"

Table 3, 12

OnTvi~w

of P.""n.,., Typo,

n",n\>ct (tM~ ab,olute a<klres8 UDTn) under

"Namc" You Can also enter the other block
attributes later.

addrc ssed symbolically; you as,ign the absolute address in the symhol tab le, The data type
of'a UDT (in the symbol table) is identical w ith
the absolute address.
If you want to give a varia ble the data ,(rucrnrc
ddincd in the UDT assign the 001' to il at declaration like a ''normal'' data typc , Thc 001'
can be abso lu\ely addre,sed (UDT 0 to UDT
65,535) or symbolically addressed.
You can also define a UDT for an entire claw
type. When progrmnmins the dala block. you
",sign this UDT to the block as a dala ,tNeN,."
The example "Mes:lag~ l'rame Data" in Chapter 24, 3 "'Bricf Description of the "Message
Frame E:<ample'''' ,hows yon how 10 work wilh
user data types ,
Creating (lOTs
You can create a user data type usi"g th~
SIl\1AflC Manag~r or also the program edifor:
to>

In the STh-fATIC Manager: select the Blocks

object in the 1<:1, pan of the proj en window,
and create a new UDT ",ing iNShRT"'" S7
BLOCK ..... DATA T....PL You an: th~-n provided with the attribute, window of the data
type . On the "General _ Pan I" tab, emerthe

L>

In the program editor: use FILE -) NIlW to

obtain a Jialog bo:< in whieh you can enter
the dcsired data type (the absolute address
UDTn) under "Obj~C( namc".

You can fill in the block header immedia\~ l y

when c1'cating the data typ~, Or enter the
auribut~' later. With tbe data lype open. you
can program subsequent e:<ten,ions in the program ~Jitor "sing FILE .... PROPIl~T!ES .
A double-click on data type UDT" in the
SIi\1ATlC Manager opens a dcclantlion table
Ihat looks exa~ tly like the declaration lahle of a
data block. A lroT is programmed in e xactly
the same way as a dmn b lock, with individual
lines [or Name, Type. Initial value and Com menK The only diffcn:ncc is lhal .witching to
the data view is nO! possihle. (With a UllT, you
do not create any variables but only a collection
of dala type,; for thi, reason, there can be no
aClu.a1 "alue, here),

The initial va lue, you program in the UDT a",

tra1)sf~11'ed to \h~ variables 3\ dec laration.

Bas~Functio",

Basic Functions

Thi, OIeClion of the book describe. !bose functions of the LAD and FBD proi"'TDIDinS lang uages which r~fl'sent a ~~rtlIin '"basic functionality", The,e funclion~ s ilo'" you to pro
gr.lln a PLC on the basis of contactor or relay
~ontrols.

In a ladder diagram (LAD), Ille onang:erocnt of

the COntactS in H r ics and para Ud cirelli.,
detemurt<:5 the combiru.Di\ of binary sig""l
s-.te5. In a function block diasnm(FBD), boxes
analoi\Olli to d.'Ctronic $witchtllg system, repfl"
$CDtthe b oolean fu nction s AKD and OR.

In ChapteT 5 Ml\.femory FunclionC you ",ill

fmd .. programming e:otample for the binary
lo~k o!><,,,,tions and memory functions. and in
Chapter 8 "CounterJ", an example for lime!'!;
and COunters. In both oasts, Ih e e:otumplc is in all
FC function without block pflnimeleo_ You will
find the same examples is function bloc""
(FBs) with block parameters in Chapter I~
"'Block Parameters"'.

TI,e mrmory functions hold Onto an RLO >0

that it can, for example. be scanned and processed further in another ~ oflh., program_
'Ote mo" e fUl\ crio ns arc used 10 ",,,,chanKc the
values of individual opcran<b md "ariablo:< or
10 copy entire dala areas.
The timing relay. in comactQl" control syslenu
arc timers in prosrammahle controllers. The
time!'> integrated in the CPU allow you, for
uan'plc. to proa:ram waiting and monilOrinS
ti mes.

Finally. the co un lers can count up twd down in

Ihe range 0 to 999.
This seclion of the book describes the funenon.
(or tbe oJX:r .. nd are'" for inputs, OUtputs. and
memory bits_ Inputs and outputs arc the link 10
the process or plant. The memory hi" corre_
'pond 10 a""iliary con!aclOrs wh ich <Ior(
b inary S\a{C~_ The subsequetl\ sections or thc
book describe the relDllinUlIl OJl'CnIld 8m1<, on
whIch you can .Iso u"., binary lo~k Essen_
tially. these are the data bilS in global data
bloch as w(l1 as Ihe lemporary and S1ali~ local
data hits.

''0

Bina ry Logi~ O Pf nllons

Stnes and parallel circuits (LAD), AND,
OR and exclusive OR functions (FBD):
negauon: lakino: account o f the sensor

,,'"

,
,

M~mory ru nelions
LAD coil!;; FBD hollOt'; midline outpuu;
edge (\"iuauOl1; cOII~eyor bel! example

"IOH funellons
1'>IO VE box, system !'unctions for IDO\ ing

do.
Tim ~n

S1.artmg 5 different kinds of timer. resetnng and s.eannini I timer. IEC liIn.ers

Counton
Setlwg a coumer, up md down counlin&;
resetting and .scannmg a counter, lEe
cOunters; fud eXlllnpic

4 Binary Logic Operations

Binary Logic Operations

4.1

Series a nd Parallel Circ uits (LAD)

Binary signal state< are combineu in LAD

through series and paralle l connection of contacts, Series connection corresponus to an AND
function anu parallel cOllllec ti on to an OR function. You use lhc COntacts to check the signal
states of the following b inary operands:
m~mory

t>

Input and output bits,

t>

Tim"", and counters

t>

Global data bilS

to>

Tcmporary Io<;al dala bit.>

I>

Static local data bits

I>

LAD has tWO kinds of eonta~t1; for scanning bit

operands: the NO contact and tbe NC contact,

bils

Starns bits (evaluation of calculation

suits)

,,0 <on'.ct
r~-

You can reference an operand via a contact using

eith~'T an absolute or a symbolic addr~'Ss, LAD
uscs onlyNO comacts (scan for signal state " 1")
and 'NC contact'; (scan for signal stme "IT) ,
A rung may consist of a single ~omaCl, but it
rru,y also consist o f a large number of contact.
cmmected togethe,. A rung must always b<: terminated, for example witb a coil Thc coil controls B binary operand with tbe RLO (the
"power flow") of the rung .

The example, shown in this chapter ~a n be'

found in fun cti on blo<;k FB 104 of the "B a, ic
Functions" program in the "LA L) _ Hook"
library that you can download from the publisher's Website (_ee page 8).
For incremental programming, you w ill find
clemen\s for binary logic operations in the
Program El~ment Catalog (with VLEW -4
OVERVlfWS lCtrl -KJ or with I~SERT -4 PROGRAM ELEML'<TS) under "Bit Logic" .
th~

4.L.1

ically a_ possible to "contact c losed". " power

flowing", and "coil energized" , If "power" i,
flowing al B point in the ladder diagram, this
moans thlll the bit logic combination applies up
to this point ; the result of the logic operati""
(R LO) is " I ", If "power" is 110wing in a single
coil. the coil i< encrgi~cd: the asso<;iated b inary
openmd then carries signal state T.

1"0 C ontac t and /li e Contact

In order to expla in the bit logic combinations in

a ladder diagram, we will refer below a, graph-

'-';C contao.

Bin ary operand

- I I If-Binary opeI';md

-I.1f--

N ormull}' open (NO) contact

A normally open contact ~OtTe5pon u~ \0 a "",an
for signal <late" I ". If thc s~anned binary operand has signal , ta te "I ". the NO contact is acti""ted, so it closes and "power flows" ,

The cxample in Figure 4.1 (l~ft side) s hows

sensor Sl conneClcd to input I 1.0 and scanned
by an NO COntact, If sensor SI is open, input I
1.0 is "0" and no pow~r flows through the NO
contact. Contactor KI. controlled by output Q
4.0, does not ,witch on .
If sensor S I is now activated, input I 1.0 ha<
signal statc "T', Power flows from tbe left
pow~r rail through the NO contact into the coil,
and ~onta~tor K I, which is conne~ted to output
Q 4,0. is aClivated ,
Th ~ 'NO contact ",ans the input for s ignal state
"1" and th~n c1o'e~. regardless of whcthcr the
sensOr al the input is an NO or NC contact.

/Ii ormally closed (/liC) con tMct

Power flows through an NC contact if the

binary operand ha, thc signal state "0"', If tbe

'"

4 Binary Logic Operatiolt'l

Mode of opfrat1o . of tliO contact

,I

"

"

~H-r~

Figure

~ .I

,I

SM''''

octivat.d

'0'

--

"
'"

' 0'

"

,,<>do of &!l .,.tion of ~C contact

,, ~

oc Wa'~d

"
'0'

r-w-r}- H+--ri- Ht-r}"

" '

'"

' 0

NO Con",", and r--C Contoc",

signal state is "I ", an NC cOma" "open." and

the now ofp<)W"," i, interrupted.

SCt to "I ". In all otber case" no pmvcr flows and

tile (Jpcrand Coill is reset to "0"",

!n the example in Figure 4.1 (right 'ide), power

tlow" through the NC ~ontac t if sensor S2 is not
dosed (input I I , I has , ignal ,tate 'il"). Power
al.o flows in the coil and energizes comaClC>r
KlatoutpuI Q 4 ,1 .

"C"twork 2 shows a serie, circuit w ith one NC

contact. Power tlows through an NC contact if
the associated opcmnd bas signal state " 0" (that
is. (he NC contact is not activated). $0 jXlwer
on ly I1,JWs thmugb the ,erie, circuit in the e xampl~ if the operand ConltlCt4 has signal state "I""
and the operand ConmcI5 has .i g-nal >!ate "0""

Ifs~nsor S2 i, now actiwted. input! 1,1 has ,ig

nal state ' T ' and t~ N'C contact opens. Thc
pow~r flow is intcrrupted and contsctC>r Kl
relcases.

The NC comact checks the input for Slt:llal stale

"0" and then ..,mains closed, regardless of
whelher the senSOr at thc inPUt is an NO or NC
contact (also see Chapter 4 .3 "Taking Acc ount
of the Sensor Type") ,

4.1.2

Series Circuit'

Tn series circuits , two or more contact, are connected in series , Power n(J"s through a series
circuit when all C<lnlacts are closed.
Figure 4.2 shows a typical ,erie, circuit. In netwMk I, the seri es circuit bas ,hr.econtac,,; any
binary ()per~nd, can be scanned. All c(}mllcts
are N O conIac\>, If the aswc iatNi operand, all
have signal Slate "I " (that is. if the '\10 COntaCtS
are activated), p<)\\er flows through the rung to
the coil. The operand controlled by the coil is

-l .1.3

Parallel Cireui"

\hen tv.o or more contacts are arran~ ed one

under the olhe" we refer to a parallel d rcuit
Power flow, through a parallel circuit if one of
the contacts is closed.
Figu:-e ".2 shows a typi ca l parallcl circuit. In
n et" ork 3, the parallel circuit consists of three
contac!>: any binary operands can be scanned.
All cont~cts are NO contact" If one o f the opera.nds has signal 5!atC " I", power flows through
th . rung t(J lh ~ coiL The operand ~oDrrollNi by
lb. toil is $elto "I"", If all operands s<:ann cd
haw s ignal statc "0", no power flows to the coil
and the operand Coil3;s resct to "0"
Ne!" ork 4 shows a parallel circuil w ith one NC
contatt . Power flows througb an NC contao if
the associated (Jp~ra"d is "0", that is , p<)wer
flo"s through Ihe series circuil in the example
if the (Jp orand Contacr4 has signal stalC "1" m
the operand ConractJ has s ignal , tate "0".

4.1 Snies and Parallel Circuits (LAO)

SerI....ntctlop
NlICWOl1< 1
tact1

""".~

II

"""~,

II

( }--I

C.",.,,,
Coo_",

I
I

Contaclt5

f1

C."
( }--I

Contact4
ContactS

COO,

~,

,....n.,.on._
No...,.'
C.-,

"""_

""")

Contact3
Colt3

N,twork ..
Contact4

J~t5
I I

CO"

LAD. you can ,I..., program a brancb in l~

middle or lhe nmll (for an e~ample. see figure
4.3 network 8). You thell gel a jXlralid brallch
tliat does Ilot begin at the left power rail. u~ of
LAD proifDm elements i. restricted to thi s parallel branch: your altention i, drawn to this in
the rcl~V8nt chapters.
An open" paralle l circuil is called a Tbrallch.

( }--I

Contact4

ContaC1S

co.

I
I

I
I

I
I

Coo.",

Contact3

I
Cl

Coltl
Nelwork 2
tllC14

"""~,

CoO'

I
I

I
I

I
I

I
I

Co nn fctlng se ries cin:u; ts in PUlIUC'

Instead of COD lac IS. you can also alTllngo smell

eircuils one under the other. fiSIlre 4.3 , hows
two examples. In network S. power flows inl.O
the coil if Contact! and Cmi/act] 8r.:= clo~d or
if Ccmlllcd and Conf(J,"f4 Me closed. In the
lower rung (~etwork 6), power flows if
ContactS or Con/ac/(j alld Con/oc/ l or
Contoct() are dosed.
CCl nnr(tinK pa raUtl clrcultl In urltll

4. 1.4

Combln.t1nns of Binary Logk

Optr.lio n~

You can combine series and parallel circuitS.

fOT example. by RlTllnginll several series circu!ls
in parallel or several pan.llel circuits in s",nd.
You can ~ombine series and parallel circuits
even when both types are complex in nnNre
(f igure 4.3).

Instead of (ontacts. you can also amonie parallel dftuits in series. figw-e 4.3 shows twO
examplle"5. In net\\OTk 7. power flows into the
coil if dther ComClctl or Con/CleO and eilher
Confaef] or Comact4 ..re closed. To ollow
power to flow in the lower e.umple (network
8), COlI/aefS. ContCIctO and either COlllact6 or
COli/aeO must be clostd.

.. Binaty tA&ic Opennionll

P .-.JId "' ..,110.

N_ _ 5

t""'

I
."".on
I

~h.r leo

"""'"'"

~r- I

-~.

"""""'
""""'"
I

"""-

"""n.."Io

"""""'
I

CO.

( )-----1

"'")-----1
,

Strlt. a .... dom ..r ... ~ <UMflIoD.

II""'
Con~r4 I
-_.
fl'" I ~: I Ii"
N_....k7

Co-_

4. 1.5

l\"l'11.a,in& Ihe RlMIult or,he Logic

Ope rallo n

The l\"OT COnlacl llfgaleS the RLO. You can use

this COOIaCI. for c:ltample. 10 rv.n a HTles cir<;;1it
negated 10 a coil (Figure 4.4 NfI"oR: 9). Po"cr

will then only now in'o ,he cOil if wrc is DO

JIO""cr in the r-:OT contact. tha i is. if ei!her
COnlaN} <IT Conlocl2 is o~n (Ke the FifUre in
the adjaCC1lt pulse diagram).

The same applil:;l by analogy for nel"ort 10. in

which a NOT con'ac' il insened after a paraUd
cireuil. Here. CoillO is SCI ,fnelther o f the con,acts i~ closed.

You can insen NOT in~lead of anoth"" comacl

inlO a branch that begins .t the left power flOil.
Insening a NOT comact in a paNnel bnrnch
,hal begin~ in the middle of a rong is nOI permissible.

,"

CoO'

( )-----1

CcWIO

( )-----1

4.2

Binary' Logic Operations (F BO)

In fBD. the logIC opennions performed on

binary signal stalO'S take.1>c form of Al\"D. OR
and Exclusi.-e OR functions. The operands
wbose signal S13IO'S you wanlto scan and combine "'" wTineo a1 tbe inputs oftbesc functions.
You can SCan the following operand.:
:>

Input and output bi". memory bits

(discussed in this SCC1Ion)

:>

Timers and counters

I>

Global data bus

I>

Temporary local data

I>

Static local data bits

Status bits ((valuation o f calculation

bil~

re"ult~)

E,ttY binary operand Can be addressed absoIUI~ly o. symbolically_ Wh~n <canning a binary

4. 2 Binary Logic Operations (FBD)

NOT CU Dta ~'

(n.~ a t<

Roul, oflh< 10::1< 0 <cation)

N"twotil 9

Co~taC!1

Contact1
Co<tIi>ct2

r-nf--~II

Coil9

INOTrl---<(

)--I

Coil9

N"twori( 10

-<

Coill0

Contact4

FI~ u c"

Contact4

4.4 Exomplcs ofa NOT Contact

In FBD, you PWIlflUIl one binary logic cireuit

p"r nenNork. The logic circuit may consist of
on ly one or of a vcry luge nnmber o f in tercon_
ncc!~d functions , A logic cirenil. or logic op;:ta1ion, mu st always be lenn inated, for example
wilh an assign ,tmement, Thc assign controls a
bin aryorerand with tho ",sult of the logic operation.
Thc examples sh own in Ihis chapter Can be
fOllnd in Hmet ion block FB 104 of the "Basic
FunClion5" program In the "FBD_Book'"
library that you ean download from the publishers Website (sec page 8) .
For incremental programming, you "'illtind the
elemenr; for binary logic Qpel1llions b. th~ Program Element Catalog (VIEw -4 OVERVTEWS
[ClTl - K] Or with iNSERT ----> PROGRAM ELE).fB.'Ts) unMr "Bit Logic".
Ele rnen l ary Binary Logle Operation s

FBD uses the binary function s AND, OR, and

Exclusive OR. All functions may (theoretically) havc any num));;;r o ffunction inputs, If an
inpmleads dir~ctly to th~ function element, the
sign al stale of the orcran d leanned i, u,ed
directly in lhe logic opcrntion: if the input has a
negation ~hara eler (a circle). the sib'llal sta1 e of

Contact3

Co~1 0

operan d, or wi thin a binary logic circuit, you

can negate the result of the logic operation with
the negstion symbol (which i, a circle) ,

4.2.1

..

OO.~ct3 NOT~I__________ ( )--I

1.

,,!

I
I

Contact2

.I

thc scan.ned operand is negated prior to exec lltion of the logic operation (see below).

OR

fu~ct!on

~XOR

Exo!m;w_OR
fUDe';""

Th e numkr of binary ftmctions anu the scope of

a b inary function are theorel ically unlimited: in
practice. however, limits are Sd by the length of
a block 01' Ih~ size of the CPU's main memory.

Scanning And u,il:ning signal states

Before the binary functions perform logic operation, on signal states, they scan the binary
operands SliMe function inpllt~. An op<rand can

be Ica nned for " I" or "0". lf scanned for "I",

Ihe function inpu\ leads directly to the box, A
;;can for " 0" is re cognizable by Ihe n~gation
character at lhe function input.
CbL fo<
.j~nol ll .t . "

I"

Cb k for
';~D .. I.!a!.

"0"

----1~
----1L_

A sean for "I" produces a scan I\;stdt of" !"

" ,hen the SIgnal slate of Ihe binary operand
seallIled is " I "; it prodllce, a scan result of "0"
whcn the s;gnal slale of the binary opemnd is

4 Binary

Logi~

()p<:ratiuns

Ch""k fM .lgDal.I ... "1"

,, -\1

" "
"'

11 .0

Function box

fI~~""

4.5

S c ~nniDg

C bd.: fo r . ignal "at< "0"

,I

s.n."..
-~

~,..l

" '
11.0

-,Fun ction box

"

.....,,, -\1

&.01.01

..clN.",d

" .,'

'"

'"-,-

!t.1

"

Function box

Function bo"

for Signal Stat. " 1" . nd 'V '

"0". A scan for signal state "0" negat ~, lh~ ,can

re,uh. that is, the ,ean result i, " I" when the
s tatus ofthe binary operand ,canneJ is "0"', The
binary functions combine Ih~ sa", I<,s,dl.
which is. at it wcrt:. the rnult appt:ed '"direclly"
to th e box. As far as fun~tionality is concerned.
th~se 1WO m~thoos ofscsnnin g binary operarnl>
allow you to treat NO conlacls and NC contac ts
identically.

Here all example : "0" IS applied to !he input

module for a non-activated NO contact (Figure
4 .5). A scan for ' ignal ,late 'T' forwards this
smlus to a funct ion oox. T" effect the same for
an N C contact, you have 10 ,can an input wilb
an NC contact for signal state " 0" (mu>! includ.
a c ircle for negation), The signal state " 1-applied to th c input module for a non-acti,ate<;i
NC contact i. then ~onvened into ,ignal slate
'"0" at the function bo"
If you now activate bolb th~ NO and XC contacts. Ihe function bo" will show signa l 51at.
'"1"' in both cases. Additional infoImation can
be fo und in Chaptcr4.3 "Taki ng A~ "Junl o f the
Sensor Typ""').
You ntust always co::mcct the output of a b inary
in the simple,,;! case, sirup ly conn""t
tbe O" tpUl to an A"ign box (also see Chapter 5
"'Memory Functions '). With Ihis r ~sul! of tt,e
logic operation, yo" c an also , (an a timor, . ",eo
cute a digital operali"n. call a b lock. and", on.
The nellt cbapter p rovide, all thc information
you need.
fun~lion ;

To assign the signa l "t~tc " f a binary operand

oJirttlly to another biruuy operand wit.llOU\ per_
forming any additi onal logic "peralions. for
nample to connect an input directly 10 an out-

uo

,I

put. Ibe AND function is nonnally used,

although it would also be possible to use an OR
or E,cl~s j \'C OR,
S , an ...-jtb~"t
l<>'Jk UP ~ t~liOD

8.
I
I
{:Jc:}-----["~'E"":J

ir.put ---j

Simply sekct the AND function, conn~cling

only one function input aod removing tbe other,
A"l) function

Th e A};TI function combines tv.-o b inary states

with one "nother and produce. an RLO of "I"'
when ooth Slatos (both .can resulls) arC "1". If
the AND function ha, seyer.. t input'. the scan
results of all input' must be .. , " for tbe collecti, e RLO 10 be "'1 -- . In all (}\h~r ca,~" th~ Ah'D
function produces an RLO o f "O" at its funct ion
ontput.
Figure 4.6 shows an ~xample of an AND f uncrion. In 1\et\1.-nrk 1, the AND function has three
inPlOtS. each oj' which can be connected to any
binary operanJ . All operands are scanned for
si gnal ,tate "'I '", SO lhat the signal state of the
operand, is directly ANnOO. lfall the operands
thaI were scanned h ave a si gnal state 01" ' 1", the
ANTI function ,~IS th e operand Olllpllll to .. ,"
"ia the A ssign box (sec nex t clwpter) . In all
olher cases, tho Al'-.'D condition is nOt fulfilled
and op-."'1"and O,I/putl i, res~ : to "0" .
Nen~otk 2 shuw\ 3n AND function w ith a
negated input . Negation of tho inp ut i. indic'a'cc1 by a eirde . The .can remit for a negal~d

42 Binary Logic Ope ration. (FBD)

A.",' n fu nction

Netwllrl< 1

Inputl

Inputl

Input3

Outp<Jtl

l"l'ut3

Inp<J 14
InputS

==d , ~ OutPUt2

',I

"
,

Input4
Input5
Outpul2

InpUl l

I
I

I
I

OR fu"<tlon

I Network 3
Input l

~""

OI.ltpul3

InpuO

Inputl
Outp"O

Network 4

I nput4 ~

> I

l"put5

Input4
OU\j)IJt4

I
I

Input2

In;:>ut2 -

E ~du. i, . _O R

Outpotl
Network 2

-' 1 ..

Irwu t2

Input2 -

.....

,<
I

I
I

I
I

""""

,,

Outpul4

I\tncr1on
,

Netwllrk 5

Inp"tl
Inpull
Network 6

Input4
Inp ul5

I'i~ur.

,~

~o...lPUt5

=:d. xoe ~OUtput6

Input t

Input4

I
I

,I

, 1 ','

Input5
Outpu\15

Input2
Outpu l5

mi

4.6 Exa mples of Binory f unction:;

opcranu is " I .. wh~n thi s operand is "0'", that i"

th e Al\'D condition in the exa mple i;; fulfilled
when the operaodlnput4 is '" I'" and the operand
/ Ilpu rj is '"0 ",
OR function
Th e O R functio n combin ~s two b insry ~ignal
,tates and relu rns ,m RLO of ' T ' w h en one of
Ihese statc; (ooe of lhe scan results) i , "1 ", If
d,e O R fu nction has several inp uts , Ihe scsn
re , u lt of only one inpm n eed be " 1.. in order for

the result o f t~C logic op~ralio n (RLO ) 10 be

" 1'", Thc O R function ,<,turns an !{LO of " 0 "
when Ihe scan result, of all inpU1S are "0'" ,
Figure 4, 6 sh ows ao e xample o f an OR function, In ' ktwork 3, the O R functi on has three
inpllts: each of these inputs may be connected
10 any binary operand . All op~rands art;
scanned for signal s tate "1 ", SO th at the . ign al
, tate of the operands is d l,<,c tly O Re<! , If on e or
mor~ of the operands scan ned h ave signal Slat~
.' \ ' .. th e neX t ,tatCme 'H set, th ~ operand

137

 Binary Logic Opt-nliom

Outpull 10 "I ". If 1111 of Ihe open1n<!s scanned

have signal Stall.' '"()". Ihe OR condition is nol
fu ltilled and oJ'Crand OWl"" I is reset 10 '"0" .

ii "']"' when that operand i. ''0''. IhaT is. 'he

Exclusive O R condition In the ex.unpl~ is ful.

filled " hen bOlh inp Ut op.,mnds hav~ the sMIle
signlll SllIte.

Nelwork 4 sho"'" lin OR funclion with a

negated input. Negation is I"<'pr=!ed by a circle. The scan resuh of. nCJ>IIu,u operand is ~I ~
wben thaI operand is '-o~, IIIaI is. the O R coDdi_
li(," in the example is fulfilled ,,-brn !be oper'
and /flpUl 4 b~s II .ignal Sgle of"!" or Ibe operand J"pl<l5 1Ia~ II .ignll\ ~tale of'O".

You Can aoo program an l:ac1usi"e OR func{ion " 'jth _

than two inPUl5, in ",hi~h case
the exclt.t>i'e OR condiuon is fullined (in the.ea.;c o f I direct <;can) when an une\~D number
of the ope"mds ...-.umed rove. SCan n:suIt nf

Eadu.lve OR fu nction

~.2 . 2

The Exciu,ivc OR funclion combi nes 1"0

binary states w;lh one anolher and I"<'ntms an
RLO of "1 ~ ,,'~n t~ IWO Slates (scan result.)
are not the same. and RLO ~O~ "-hm lbe Iwo
st~tes (scan re.uhs) an: ,dentieal.
Fillll"" 4 .6 shows an anmple of an Exclusi,'c
OR funCTion. In z.,ctwork S. two inpulS, both of
which are , canned fOI slgnnl ,tate '"I". lea<l1O
Ih e Exclusi ve OR fun<:ti(ln. If <.Jnly One <.Jf the
opcmnd, scanned is "1 .., the ExcllL~i, e OR e()n
dilion is fulfilled and the oJ'Cmnd o..lputl is sel
10 "1", If both Operandi lire "1" or ''0''. opmond
011'1"'11 i. 1"<'5el iO ''0''
\;"C\Wor\c: 6 silo"" an Exdus,,~ OR function
"'ith a negated inpUT. N"ea;<I;()n is rep~ed
by' circle. lbe scan n:.ultofa negatedopera.nd

--I ~.

Combin~tlo nl

QU can casily combine binary function. with

one another. For ins!!lnce. ~'Ou ean combine
SCHllIi A.."' 0 functinns inTO one OR fuOCTion or
"HI OR functions intO one F"clUS;"c OR funclion. The number offunttions per 10iliC opcm'
lion (per network) ~ theoretically unlimited.
The u.;c Q( a "Tbraneh" in Ii loic operation
gives you additional options. at1(}wing you 10
prnjp1llll mon.- than one output per logic operan<)ll (.ce Chapler 5.2 "'Fl:lD 1:Ioxc~").
You can link me output of one blIW)' function
with the iOPUl of another binary function in
ordet-IO implcm<:nt complex bmary I~ic operations. Figure -t.; prm'id6 a nwnber ofexmnpies.

lnpout1

,""'"
Inpout3

'OR
OU:pu\8

,..,...,

.., I

Inpu!7

~,~

of Sinn)" Lo"k

O p~r"llon l

4.3 TakinJl ACOOWI! o f me Sens<>.-1'ype

NAND fUn crioD

N. twork 7

Input!

~ """"

'""'"
r.l><1lo.

..,

N. I _ 8

Input4

Inpul6

I
I

I
I

rqIOl'1cd.

Network 10: You can link arbiuary function

inputs with binary funetion$. fQT example you
ciln place an h clm; .." O R function in front of
the second input of an AND fuoction
Network II: Using the negation symbol. you
negate the RLO. eVen belwe,," binary funclion!, for instl nce you can negate the RLO o f
an O R function and use II as input 10 an t\l'.'J)
function.
N~Bting t he Res uh
Logic Operation

oft h ~

The circle at the inpul err output of a function

symbo l negales the =uh o f lhe logic operation.
You Can use negation
~

to !.Can a binary operand. whicb is equiva_

lent to scanning for signnl slate " 0" (sce
abo,e).

to

beru'ecn two binary functions (which is

equivalent to nc=gating the =ult oftbe logic
operation). or

""'~W -,

NetWork 9: You are monitoring the limit

switches at the ends of an X axis and a Y axi .
These limit switches may not be actuated in
pairs; otherwise. limil swileh error will be

4.2.3

I
I

0''''''''
Input5

"""",W

'-"

Input5
Input6

Input3

I
I

Input2

Input2

NOR

InpY I1

at !be output ofa binary function (for exam

pic if you wanl to set Of reset a binary operand wben the condi tion is not fulflllcd, that
i" wh en RLO . MO"),

A nellation may not immediatel y fo llo w a T-

branch .
Figurt 4_ 8 shows a NAN D fun cti oll (an AND
function witb negated out put) and a NOR function (an OR function with neaated output) , The
RLO of a NAND func=tion is ''0'' only when all
inpulS have a signal state ofMI", A N OR fu nelion ~tums an RLO of"l " o nly wlKcD oonc o f
Ihe ;nput5 has a signal state of "I",

4.3

Ta kin g A cco un l of th e
S enso r Type

Wheo scann ing a Sensor in a userprogtam. you

must lake account of whetber the sensor i5 an
NO eOO~1 or an NC contacl, Depending on !be
SCI'I:IOr type, there i. a different siinal stale al
the relevant InpUI when the sensor is lICIiv.. tcd:
"I " for liD NO contact and "0" for an NC co nlaC!, The CPU has no meanS of dctermining
w~ Clher an inp ut is occu pied by all NO contact
or by an NC contact, II can only detect signal
stute "I" or signal state "0".
Prognomm ing wit h LAD
lfyou ~trucrurc the program in such a way that
you wam ~ scan ~sult of I" when " SCIlsor is
actIVated in order to combine thaI SoCBD ~su lt
fuMher, you mu" scan the input differe ntly for
different kinds of sensOfil. NO cOntacts and NC
M

4 Hi"ary Logic Operations

,
, , ;'

Cu. 2: On. ~o contaN ond un.l'C <un(.

"''',,,''ed
,
,- t )

(; .., I : Bo,h .. n.on a ... 1'0 <on'uf!

->

" "
0

Bolh Hn"""" actlv. ,to<i

So1/) Ufl;o",

~5j

" .,. .,.

M

-., , . lr
" .,." 0

,
."" "".,.

-7

HH'H HHH'H H H1HH4H H1HH4H

4

.,.

0
Con"'ctor

"
~-jllu" 4.~ T~kjng

oontact~

arc

plcl<8 up

"

.,.

"

Conr. ctor
pict. up

"

Account of tho Se""'I Tn'" (LAD)

a~aiJablc

10 you for this purpos~.

An KO comaCl rerurn "1" if 'Me ,cann~d input

is al.o " I ". An NC co ntact return;; "1 -- if !bc
,canned input is " 0". In this way. you ~au al,o

directly scan input' that are to trigger acli, ities

when they are "0"' (z~'TO-acti"e input<) and sub'equcmly re-galc the scan n:suit.
The ~xampJ" in Figure 4.9 shov., programming
depcndent on the sensor type . In (he fint "a,e,
IwO NO contacts are connected (0 thc programmable controller. ant! in the second case one NO
contact and one t\' C ""uta<;t . In both cas .... '. B
conta~Wr conneclcd 10 m OlUput i, to p ick u p it
both , enwn; are ac!iva!cd_ If an NO contact is
aC liva(ed, (he sig nal ,tale at the input i, "I"', and
Ihis is scanned with an NO contact so thaI power
~aO now wh .... n the nsor is acti, -ated. If bolh
NO contacts a ro a~1:ivareJ, power flows throngh
the nmg to the coil and the ~ontactor pich up
Ifan NC ~on1 aCI is aCllvatcd, Ihe .ignal sta(e al
the inp "l is " 0 " In order (0 have power flow in
Ihis e"l'e when the ,en,or i, activated, th~ result
Il1U';I be scanned with an NC conlaCt. There
fore, in (he second ca,e, an NO contact and an
NC contact mn,1 be connected in series 10 make
th .... contac(o r pick up w hen botM senson; are
activated.
Programmin g with FRD
If you "u-u~tun; Ihe progrnm in ,uch a way that
you wa nt a scan result of "I" when a sensor is

ac tivated in order to ~ombine IMat <can remit

fimher. you mllSt scan !.he in put dift-"re nrly fo r
diffcrent kind. of <enSOr:>. An r-:O contact produces signal state "1" when activated. and i,
scanner! dircedy when activalion "I' (h~ sen>Or
is 10 produce ft S<:an result of " t "_ An NC contact ,etums 'i~nal stalC "0" wh.... n 3clivaled ; if
yon want a scan r~sult of" ]-- when the::-:C eOnta~, is activaled. it mu,( be ncgaled, th""
scanner\. In this way. you can also scan inpm,
that are (0 (rigger acti vi ti~s even w hen (hey
Mm'e a signal stale of ' -0'" (zero_act ive inpnt,)
and further comhinc the scan reSllh_

The example in Fig ure 4 .10 shows sensor typede p"ndent programmint:. In the first C"SC, two
1"0 COma<:l, are e01lllect<XIIO the programmable controller, and in the <econd ea,e one 1'0
contact and one NC contact. In b<)1h en_Ie " a
C(lntaClOr eonne<:t~d to an outpnt i, to pi ck up if
hoth " '''wrs ar~ a<:ti" ated_ If an 1'-'0 contact is
aClivated. (he signa! St at e at Ihe inpnt is " I ", and
this is scanned directly so that the scan resu lt is
" 1'" "hen the sensor i< ac li "al~d . If bolb NO
contacl.'S an; acti\cated, and Al\'i) condition i.
fuJfill<XI and the colllaclOr picb up.
Ifan l'C contact is act iva(cd, !.he signal Slate a(
th~ input is '"0--. In order (0 obtain a , can rcsuJ(
,,[ "I" , the inpnt mUSI be negated Wh~fl
seanned. In the second case, you n~~d an AND
func!ion with on.... direct and 0"<: negated ;"I',n
in order for the e'-'nt:<~lO r to pi ck up w hen both
sensors are acrivaled

4.3 Takinj;; Account of the Sen_ Type

----

c.", I : 8Gt~ "'....... . .. ]\iO r ..n'",!>

E-s~

,I

'"

"

"0"

~I

E-s~

7)
H

"'
I

1.~

"--J

&
Q

"

4 .~

...

" "'"

"

&
0 4.2

'"

"'

,- T

E-s~

"".~

"

->

'to

" "'" " "'

"0"

...

" '"

"

11.5

&

0".3
"

------...,-

c.", 1 : One ~O <o ...u .mel .. lie NC r.n._..

A
&

0 .3

"

"'

" Coo

-~

Fljtu .... 4.10 Taking Aerow" of1h< SeruorT)-pe ( ~ FBD)

'"

Memory Functions

5.1

LAD C olis

In & l&<!der diHllrwn (LAD), the memory functioIU are u~ ;n c"njunction with s"ries and
""mllel circuits in order to influenc", the siiJIpJ
sate.< of the biImry op.....mds .... ith the aid oflbe
n:sult of the logic o!"'rntion (R LO) lIen",rated in
the C PU.

'1lH: following memory functions are 8Y'Bilable

~ The single coil as an Ds>ignmcni of the RLO
1>

The coil, Sand R '" individually proi!mmmed Inemory function.

1>

T he boxes RS and SR as memory functions

1>

The midlinc output, as

1>

The coil5 P DOd N as

power flow

1>

The boxes P~S and l>."EG ... ..die nalua lions of opC'l'ilnds

inl.<:rmcC; at~ buff~rs

cdg~

c,calwl\ions ofllle

II! Ihe co;!. The n01Cfion of the , ingle coil

d"P"llds on the Masler Conrrol Relay(MCR}: If
the ~1CR is activated. sian"l Slale 0' is
n.<~;8ncd to me binary operand loc~ted o,cr tbe
coil.
SJmpl~C"'1

Ifpo .... er flow, inlo ilic coil. Ihc opeT11nd is ~t:

,fthere is no pow..... Ihc operand IS re~~t (t"iI.'Un:
5.1 Ntlworir.: 1)_ Wil.b a NOT COn!~C1 before The
coil. you re"",r.' e me function (Network 2).
YOtl ClO1 nl<a direct the po,,"cr flow in(() !;evcral
coi ls simulmnC<"lusly by ammging the coils in
parallel with the help of a T-bT"II.nch (NetworK
3). All opcrdlld. '!",citied OVCr the coils
rupond in the same way.l:p 10 16 coil~ can be
cODne<:led in parallel.

~ di~_

You ~;m armnge funher eonIPCT~ in ~ries and

I'arallcl eircuits after the T-bran<:h and befo~
the co;1 C'/etwor\l:: 4).

You can usc tbe memory fimctiQllli d.,scribed in

Sec Chapter 4.1 Series 1OI1d Parallel Cirruits

(LADr, for fiInhCT c1Ulmple~ ()flbe single coil.

!hi, chapl<.T;n conjunction with all binary o~r

ands. There are restriction.> when using tempo-

5.1.2

Midhne outputs and edg'" ",valuano!lS

clI$~

in ~tHii in sub'eqn"'nt chapt"'rs.

rary local data hir. a. edge

m~mory

bus.

TI,,~

examples shown in this ch apter arc found

in function blocK 105 of the "B asic Func tiOll.>

prolP1lln in the LAD_Book" libmry thai >Qt,

can downJOiw frQm the publisher's Web~itc (see
pagc H).
For incrcmL"fIlal programming. yQU ....ill lind
the program elements for me memOfy funCTions
in the proaram element ca1.ll10& {with VIEw ~
OVI!RVII:WS [CI,I - K] or with L'iS[RT ..... PIW(lRAM EL~\'(Il'iT!\) under "Bit L01! i~".

5.1.1

Slnll'eCotl

The single coil as terminator o f a I\IIlg assiil15

Ihe power flow directly to the operand located

'"

Set and Re.et Cull

Set and resct coils also lenninate a "mg. These

coils only become "'live when power floWS

through Ihem.
Binary QPerand

i')
Binary operand

(.)
If pow.... fio",s in til", sel COIL the operv.nd O'CT
the coil is set to signal '!lllt . I' If J'IOV.CT flo"'$
in the /"eSC"< coil the oJm"llnd o'er the Coil is
!\:..cl to signal state 0'. If thcre is 00 power in
the SCt or l ese, coil, tbe binary operand remains
unaffectc<! (l-igu,.., 5.1, Networks ~ I1lld 6).

5.1 LAOCo",s

SIll> J. coli

,..rwork ,
laCn

Ii I
I I~I
I

"'"
1 )--I

Contact1

Coil1

CoII2

Contact1

N_ork2

INOTI

1 )--I

Col 12

I
I

n
n

I
I

-,

I C

N_twork 3

~_:~tet2

Coo"'"
{",)--I CoO,

N_rwork"

l lil

~
H

Coo<od.

II

Ulet '

"""

~ "'.
1')--1

,teet2
I

N_lwork 1

""""'"
H """
I
I

CO"

"-11I.U~

Coil1

c.".",

.,..,..,
I
""'"
oj
I """""
CO.

c~li10
$)--1

Co'19

Coil11

CoillO
Coi l11

I
I

ConlaCl1

"'"
'J

I,

c.,,~,

(0)--1 CoO,

)--I

Coo"""
CoilS

CO"

CoO<

N_orkll

n
n

Coll3

I
--,
I

I
I

5. 1 Sin,l. Coil. SCI and Rc= Coil

The function of the set and reset ooils depends

on the Master Colllrol Relay. If the MCR is IctiVlt"~l. the binary o!",rand 0\'''''' the coil is not
affected.

u~mple "'"8JlII restal'l). on the opeTllnd usod

(for example SlaTic local daTa). and o n the oeItings io Ibe CPU (for uample fCtentive eh.alrsc-

Plea~ note that the operand used with a set or

resel coil ;$ usually reset al STartup (complete
TCSlal'l) . In SIX...:;al cases. \he signal stale ;5
fCtai ned: This dep<:nds on Ihe ,lal'lUp mode (for

You can a""" ge several "I and reset coils in

any combioation and logelher w ith single coilo
in Ihe .ame JUng (Ke\work 7). To achieve elarilY in your programming, il is advisable \0

teri~tics).

'"

5 Memo,), Functions

)V"oup the set and reset coils affecting an oprrand together in puin;, and to u,c them only once
in each ca,e. You should aho a void additionally
controlling tM"Se opera"ds with a s ing le "oi l.
A, with the . ingle coil. you can also arrange
contact, after the bran~h and before a sel Jnd
reset coil.
5.1.3

;\-tcmor y Box

P1eas~ nole that the operand u8cd with a memo ry fuu"ti,m at startup (complete restsrt) i. usu a lly reset. In special cuse,. the signal 'tate ofa
m emory box is retain ed . Th is depen ds on the
'tatnlp mode (for example warn, re.tart). on Ihe
operand used (for example "alic local data),
nnd on Ihe s~t1 i ngs in th~ CP U (for instance
retentive char~Cleris tic.,,) .

S R memory fu n rtlon

The functions of the s~t and ,.."et eoil are 'urnmarized in the box of a memory fun ct ion. The
common binary opcI1lIld is localed m'e< the
box. Input S of the box corresponds here 10 the
sel coil, input It to thc rcsut "oil. The s ignal
state of the binary opC1"and as,igned 10 the
memory function is at o(jtput Q urthe memory
function.
There are two version, of the memory fiUlclion:
As Sit box (res~1 pnority) and ItS box (set priority). Apart from tbe labeling, the boxes "Iso
di m .... from each other in the arrnngGmc"T] t of the
Sand R inputs .
Binary oparand

R S ho ("

,"
,
"",

"

ill the SR memory box, Ihe reset input has pri-

ority. Re'~1 p riority means thal thc mcmory

function is Or r~mains resct if power 1I0w~
" s imultaneously" in Ihe set input and the re,el
input. The TCS~t inPUI ruB priority over the sel
input (Figure 5.2, N~twork 8).
B ecause the , tatcments are ex~cllted in
''''1ucnce, the CPU initially .cts the m~rnory
operand hecame the Sl1 inpltl is processed fi",l ,
bUI resels il again Whl"l1 it process e, th~ re,ct
input . The memoryopl-rand remains ""set whil~
the rest of thu program is proccssed.
Ifthc

m~."...ory op~rand

is an output, this bricf

only u.h, pbce in the proce ss-image
output table, snd Ihe (exlernal) output on the
r .. le,ant output module r~mains unafTe<otcd.
The CPU does nO! transfcr Inc process_image
output table to Ih~ output modules uotilth" e nd
o f th~ pro"'T"~m ~yc1e .
~"tli t1g

The memory fu nction w ilh r~Sel priorily is the

"normal" forn, of the mem ory fllU~tj(>n, "i ncc
th~ reset ~tat~ (,ignal slate ''0'') i~ nom, ally Ihe
,afer or Ie'S hazaniou s State .
R S mom ory function

A m emory function is sct (or, mor~ precisdy,

Ihe b inary op<.-rand ovcr Ihe mcmory box;, ,~-t)
if the sel input ha, . ignal state " 1" and th~ ro:sct
inpu.t hss signsl Mate '"0". A mcmor~ fllIlction
is resel if there i, a "'I"' at the resel input snd a
"0" al Ihe sel input. Signal >late "0" at bOlh
inputs has no effec t On thc memory function. If
bolh input' are '')"' at the t>aIIl~ time . Ihe two
memory functions respond diiI~"Iently, the SR
memory function is resCt and the RS m emory
function i. ",,\.
The function ofthe m emory box depend, on the
Ma,ter Controll{c1ay. Ifthc M CR i, active . Ihe
binary operand of s mcmory bo" is no lon ger
s fTecINl.

'"

Tn Ih c RS memury box, the . et input ha s prior

ity. SCI priority means thaI the memory function
i~ or remains ,cl if power 1I0w< "'simultaneou<ly" in the ,et input and Ihe resel input.
The sel input thm has priority over th e r,""ct
inpu t (figure 5.2 Network 9).
In accordance w ith Ihc ,e'llJcmial exe~utjon o r
Ihe instruction" Ihe CPU r~scts the memory
operand wilh the reset inp ut first procusscd . bUI
th en sel, il again when proc,," ,ing the "et input.
T he memory operand remain, set whik \he rest
of the program i, processed.
If the memory operand is an OlJtput, this bricf
n:M:lling lak~S plac e only in th c proc cs<-imsge

5.1 LAD Coils

Ne twork a
Contactl

Conlactl

D
i

Contact2
Memory1
Ne twork 9

Cont"ct3
C<m~'

Memory2

fE'

Network

'""

'"

WI

I
0

=
I

.1

r:cn
I

, ,,',

,
Coil1 2

)--I
,
,

I
N etwork

"

Coll13

..

M. mury rl!ootion ,,-i,b latchln

If Network

:'[j~"
C~:14

Conlact2

Coil14

( )--I

V1

CO il:15

..

..

"

."".

Network 13

[j"""

T"

12

Coil1 5
Contact4

- - ( )--I

"
. . ... _....

'"

5 Memory Functions

outp Llt table. and the (external) output on the

rele vant output module is not atle<:ted. The
C P U doe, not transfcr the proce,s_image output
table to the output modules until the end of the
program cyd~,
S~t

priority is the exception when using th~

mem ory function , It is m.d. for example. in Ihe
implementation o f a f~ult message bufrer ifthe
still current fault message at the set input i> to
co nti nue to set the memory func(ioo d..spile an
ac knowledgement at lhe reset input
Mem ory functio n wit hin

r ung

You can also p lace Ii memory box within a mng ,

C omacts can be connectcd in series and in para llel both at the inputs and at the output (Fig"'"
5.2 Network 10) , It is also possible to lea'.., the
second input ofa memory lx>x unswitched. You
can a lso connect several memory boxes logethe r
within one rung , You can arrange the memory
boxes in series or in parallel (Ndwork II),
You Can locate a memory function after" T
branch orin a branch that starts at the let, power
ra il
Mem ory functiu n "lth (atching
In a re lay logic diagram.

th ~

memory function
is Lls~ally implem emed by latching the output
to be controlled , 1bis method can also be u,ed
when programming in ladder logic. However. it
has the d is advantage. when compared wit;" Ihe
memory box, th~t the mC1llory function is not
immediately recogn izahle .

Net\1:orks 12 and 13 in Figure 5.2 ,how both

Iype, of memory function, set priority and reset
priority. using latch ing . The principle of latching is a simple one , The binary openmd con[rolled w ith the coil is scanned. and this scan
(the conta ct of the coi I") is connecled in parallel to Ihe set condition. If G." "act f close,.
CoHN energiz es and closes the contact parallel
to Contacli. If Contact I now opens again.
Coil14 rcmains cnergi7.cd. CoON d~energi ~es
if Conta~,t2 opens . If signal i;tstc "1" is p"ent
at both Can/acl] and COn/acl], power does not
flo w into the coil (reset priority). This situation
looks different in the lower network : If signal
. tate " I" is present at both Conlac/3 and
COn/acI4 . power flo"'s into ilie coil (set priority) .

'"

5.2

FBO Boxes

in FBD . the m emory boxes are used in conj unction with binary lo~,;e opemtions in ord~,. to
intlue nce the 5ignal states of binary Op"Tands
with the aid of the result of the logic operation
(RlO) generated in the CPU.
Available memory functions arc
:>

The a>sign box for dynamic "outro!

.. The boKt'S set ,md re,et as individually projlI'mnme-d mcmory functions

.. The boxes KS and SR as full_fl edge-d memOly functioDS

.. The midline output box as intermediate

buffer
1>

The boxes P and N as edge evaluations of

the re5ult oflhe logic operation

.. The boxes POS and NEG as edge ev"lu"tions of operands

The boxes for midline outputS and edge evaluatioru; are dis-cussed in delai! in subsequent
cbapters
You can lISC the memory funclions described in
this chapter in conjunction w ith all binary operands, There ar~ restrictions when using temporary local data bits as edge memory b its.
The examples shown in th is chapter arc fOlind
in r\lnction block YB 105 of the "Ba,ic Functions" ptojll'9.m in the "FBD _Book' libra,'y Ihat
you can download from the pubhshds Web , ite
(se~ page 8).

For incremental programmmg. you w ill ftnd

th~

programelemems forthe memory functions

in the program dement catalog (with VIEW -->
OVERVIEWS [Ctrl _ KJ or with INSERT --> Pro()RA.~I EL E.M.ENTS) under "Bit Logi c"

~U . !

A SSign

n ,Ca5sign box as tenninator o f a rung assigns

the result of the logic op<:rution directly to the
operand adjacent to the box. If the RLO is ' 1"
at the inp UI of the assign box . the binary operand is sel: if the Rl.O is "0", Ihe oper.md is
rese t, The function of (be assign box depen ds
on the 1\'!aslC[ Control Relay (MeR): If Ihe

5.2 FBD Box",

MeR is activated. signal state "0" i, assib"'cd to

the b inary operand over the box .
6ina ry oper~r>d

-l

A muober of example., in Fig ure 5.3 explain

how the "" ign box works _
Nelwork t : Th~ '-'P~rand Outpull dir~~dy
assumes the signal state of the operand Inputl.
Network 2: You can use negation to reverse the
function of the assign bo,, _

A"ilIn

Network 3. You can d irect the RLO to ",veml

boxes simultaneously by in,crting aT-branch
and arranging the bo"e.' \~ith the relevant opec~mis ODe below the othec ("multiple output") .
All orerands oV~c Ihe box~ , respond in the
<ame way_
N etwork 4: You can in,en binary fuocl;ons
between Ihe T-bratleh anu th~ lc-'TIllinating box.
thu, expanding a logic operation by additional
[unction boxes .
You w ill find adu ilional examples for th e ,,"s ign
box in Chapter 4_2 "Flinary Logic Orerations
{FBD)".

..

Network I

Ou!p~ t l

I I

Inputl
Network :l

OlJlpUt:l

Input1

q I

Network 3

OutputS

Input2

L>H

Ne twork 4
Input3

9,L

Outputl

O ~tput5

O~\put:l

, "" n,

Input2

r=J

Output3

CJ

OutputS

NetworkS

I~

=
r:=J
,

[7]i

Inpu!2

"

Ocotpua

.,

Output7

OutputS

Oulput9
R

OutputlO
Oulput11

Inpu\3

I ,

I
I

Input4

Outputll

"""".

OUtputtO

Output1t
Fil:u~

CJ

Inpull

Output7

Inr()12

. "'"twork 7
Input! _
Input4

Output4

- I

CJ

Input3

OUlpUt7

....

Inpvtl

S<t and ...1

I"putl

CJ

,
r:l'

Oulput6

Network 5

O~tp~t4

OulputS

Inpu\4

l"Putl

5.3 Ass;!!". Set and Reset (Hl D )

'"

S Memof)' Fun~Iio~
~ . 1.2

S ~I

and Rent Box

ScI Rnd reset boxes alro terminate a logk oper.

alion. These boxes are a<,:tiv~I~d only woen the
rc~ult

is

o f the 10llie operati on going into th .. box

~I".

S.2.J

M em or y 8 0x

The functio n, of the set and reset boxc s arc:

~ummarized in tbe box of n memory function.
The common bioary openmd is 100aled o,'er the
bo" Input S of the box corresponds bere \{)!hc
set box. and inpul R 10 the reset box. The SignBI
mile of the binary opmInd as~ianed 10 the
mC'lllOl"y function i. at OUtpU! Q of Ibe memOf)'
funclion,

If Ihe RLO going inlO th~ $\:1 'oo~ is "I". Inc

operand over the 'oox i~,scl to sianal ,tate "1".
I r the RLO going inlo Ihe reset 'oox i, "I ". the
operand o,-er tbe 'oox i5 Kt to signa.l 5tIIte ~O",
If the RLO going into the "' or fe.! bo" i~ "'0",
the binary operand remains unaffected. The
function of the """ and reset boxes depends on
th~ Mas!el Control Relay. If th\: MCR ;~ ",ti.
vated, the bmary operand OVer the box i. not

RfrC ~led_

Fillure 5. 3 shoW1 'C\leTIIJ ~xamplcs of bow the

sct and ",,,,,t boxes work..
Network 3: The opeJand 0ulpuI7 i, sel "'h<n
the operand lnpu'l is "1". 0u1pt<17 remain. SCt
wh<n l"pUll rctums to '1J1&I S\.ate ''0'',

There are two 'e!"Sion s of the memory fu nction:

As SR box (resel priority) and as RS box (.",
prion!)). Apar1 from Ihe labeling. the boxes
also differ from .... ch other in tbe arrangement
of the S and R inpUIS.

re~et

Network 7: You can Rmnge severa l set and

boxes in any combinati oo aDd loge!her
with a,ssign boxes in the >lme box after a T
branch. A. with the assign box. you can a l.o
pr.:lgram binary functions after the T-branch
and befOTt' a sel and reSCI box.

A memory function is KI (or. more precisely,

the blIlary operand o>"er tb.. memory box is set)
when the sc. inpul is "\ """lbe resct inpul is
''0''. A memory functi on is reset when Ihe reset
input is " \ " and the set inpul is "0". S i~nal state
"0" at both inPUI;; has nO dfe.:1 on the memory
functiOn. If both inpulS haH signal ,tate "'\"
si.."nultaneously, Ibe twO memory funC1ions
respond di(ftTCIIdy' the SR memory function i!
reset and the RS memory funC1ion IS SCl

To lICb.icve clarity in your programming, il i5

advi ,able 10 JOI"OUJ'! Ihe SCI and re"'" bo",es
Bfflinl( an operand in pairs, and 10 uSC them
only oncc in each ca~c. You sho uld al.., avoid
controlling these operands '.nth an assign bo".

The functioo of the memory box d~s on the

Mas!er Control RelAY. If the MCR is lIC1ive, the
binary operand of" memo!), 'oox is no longer
affecled .

Please note that the operand ust<i wilh a sel or

box is usually rc:set on sWlUp (cold re.tan
or "'ann restart), In ~ial cases. the sijplal
stale is reeained. This depends on the ~tarh.lp
!11(lde <for instance hot TC:S!an). on rhe operand
used (for e.~ampk StaUe 1~a1 data), and OD the
5ettinw:s in !he CPU (.uch as retrnti\ e "bamete,.
iolics) .

Please note thaI the operand used with a memory function i. normally reSCI on startup (cold
1"H".AI1 oc wann restart). 10 spce:ial cases, tbe
signal 51alO of .. mCTl>O')' oox is retained. Thi~
<lepcnds OIl the ~1lUtUp mode (fOT imU'lnce hot
restlll). on the <>pennd used (for example stalic
local da! a). and "n the serungs in the CPU (such
as n:'temive charaC1erislic.).

Network 6: The opel1lnd OurpUlllS reset'" hen

the operand lrtpu,2 i$ "I". 0u'put7 remaim
resel when lnp.<l2 rerurns to signal Slate ''0''.

re>ll:t

...

SH: me,nory funCllon

In the SR memory box , Ih..: r~.ct input has priority. Reset priority means tbnt the memory
func tion i. n. remains reset iflbe RLO is 'T al
trn: 111.1 W>d resci inputs M~i mu!laI:twusl)- . The
reset input Chen has priority o"er the sct input
(Fi8U~ j.4, I\etwork 8).

"etwo'" 8
In put1

Be.:au..e Ihe s!atemenl ~ are e~oxuted 10

seqllcnce, th CPU lirst .ets Ihe memory Op<:Tand b<:"HU~C the sel i"l'ut i~ I'roccs~ed r.rnt, hut
~sets it again when it prO<:e5~e~ the reset inrul.
The memnry op"rand remains reset wbile Ibe
re~ of the program ~ processt'd.
If the memory operand is an OUlput. this brief
ienmg take~ plac<: only in the proc:ess,image

Inpull

---I'

.~O

OUtputl2
InpU!3

In ....!'"
OUlpUt13

Inp(lt4

"

"
,

,
"

~,
t tjlu re

~.4

Momory

Function. (FRO)

'"

5 Memory fu ncti<>n.
OUlput lable, and th e (ex temal) output on the
relevant o utput module r~main, unaffected.
The CPU does not trans fer the process,image
output table to the output modules until the ~nd
of the program cycle.
The memory fllnc tion w ith reset priority is the
"normal" fonn o f the memory function. as the
reset state (signal stale "0") is usually the safer
or less hazardous state .

RS rncm(lry functiou
ill the RS memory box. the set inpul has prior,
ity. Set priority m e aIlS tbm the memory function
is or remains sct if the RLO is '"1'" at Ihe sCt and

reset inputs "~imul laneously" The set input

th~"Il has priority over the re ,et input (Figure
5.4. Netwo rk 9).
Bccau"e ,he statcments are e~ecut\!'d tn
sequence . the CPU initially reSets the memory
operand be~a "sc the reset input IS pr<><:eiSed
first. then .et;; it again when the set input is pr0cessed. The memory operand remains ,et while
the rest of the program is processed .

If the memory op~rand is an output . this bricf

resetting t>ikes placc only in the process, image
outplll table, and th e (external) output on th e
relevant o utput module is not atl"ected. Tb<:
CPU doesnol trans fer the proce",imagc OUlput
table to the output m odule, umil th~ cnd of th e
program ~ycle .
Set prio rity is tbe ex<:eption rather than the rule.
Set priority is used. for exampk, in the imple,
mentation of a fault m~"age buffer if lh. still
curren! fault message at the Set input is to cOn'
tinue to set the m<:lDory function despilc aT)
acknowle,lgem=t at the reset inpul.

5.3

M .idl io c

Ou t puts

lI.1idline outpms are imennediate binary buffers

in a ladder diagrJ.m or function block d iagram.
The RLO valid at the mi dline QutP\l\ is sto~d in
the opernnd o'er the midline outplll. This op er,
and can be scanne d again at another point in (hc
program, allowing you to also post,proces~ the
R LO valid a: midline outpUl elsewhere in the
progrMlL
TI,e following b inary operands aTe suitable for
iruermediate storage of binary results:
[>

You can use lempo",r)" local data b its if you

only require thc in t ermeui~te resu lt w ithi n
the b lock. All code blocks h ave temporary
local da\.a

[>

Static local data bits are available only with,

in a fnnetio " blud:. , th ey Ston' th~ signa l
, tme Ufitiltbey are reu sed, evcn beyond the
block ooundaries.

[>

Momoty bits at"<; available globally in a

fixed CPU,sp;: cific quantity; tor darity of
programming, try to avo id nl"ltiple use of
memory bilS (the same memory b its for dii~
fcrent tasks).

[>

Data bits in g lobal data blocks are also

available throughout the entire program, but
befo re they at"<; used require the rdevant da,
ta block to be opened (even if imp li ed
tbro"gh mas> "ddres.ing).

The function of the midline output dep;:nds on

th~ .\1aster Control Re lay. If the MCR is acti,
vated. the b inary opcran d adja~ent to the m idline output is a.signed , ignal statc "0". The
RLO is then "0 " following the m id line output
(that is. there is nu lunger a "flow o fpuw er").
Note: You can replacc th e "sCTatchpad m~m,
used wilh STEP 5 by the tem porary local
data anlilab lc in e'ery block .
OJy~

Memory functiun wIthin a lo gic op eration

You can a lso place ~ memory box within" logic
operntton Binary functions can be programme d both at the inputs and at the outpUt
(Fi gure 5.4, Networks 10 and 1 1). It is al.>o pos,
sihle to leave thc second input ofa memory box
unconnected. 'Within a logic operation . you can
a lso interconnect several memory boxes. Tbe
rn~'illory boxes may be placed one behind thc
other or u nder one another after a T, branch.

~.3.1

"lid line Outputs in LAD

A midline output i. a single coil within a rung.

The RLO valid up to th lS point (the power that
flows in the rung at this point) is stor.-d in the
binary opemnd Over the midline output. Th~
midline output itselfha, no clTect on tbe power
flow.

5.3 Midline OUlp uts

Binary ope"",.d

(. )
You can scan the binary operand Over the mid line OUtpUI al an"thcr p<lint in the program wi th
NO aod NC contacts. Several m idl ine outputs
can ~ progrnnuned in <me nmg.
You can place a midline output in a branch that
stansatthe le ft power rail . However, il must nO!
~ located directly at the power Tail. A midline
output may also foHow a T-bmnch. hut may 00(
tcrrninat~ a rung; the _ingle c"i l is availabk for
thi. purpose.
Figure 5.5 shows an example of how an in ter_
mediate re,ult is slnred in a midline output. The
!{LO from thc cirellit fOlmed by Cumaer/,
Con/actJ. ConluCl4 and Comacl5 i. stored in

}l i dUD~ outp~b

midline output MidC oulf. If thc con d ition of

the logic opcTation i, fulfilled (power Ilows in
thc m idline output) and if Contac/3 is c losed.
Coill6 i, energized. The J.lLO stored is u,ed in
t\.,o ways in the next network. On the one hand.
a ch""k i, made to .ee if Ihe condition of the
logic op<:ration WlIS fulfilled and the bit logic
combination m ade with Call1aCl6, and on the
other hand 3 check is mHd e 10 set' ifthc condition oftb e logic opera,ion WaS no, fulfilled an d
a bit com bination made with Conlael7.

5.3.2

i\lldlin~

O u tputs in F B D

A midline output is an a"ign box within a logic

operation. The RLO valid up In Ih is point is
stored in the midline output over the midline
outpUl box

(LAD)

Netwo-rk 15 Midline outp uts (2)

Midl"OOI: :'__-.:~~I3ct6

>-M--jidll~1
Ml d tln ~

CoilH

~I-ict-'~I------i(

)--I

ou' uti (HID)

Network 12 Midline ""t puts (1)

"

"
"

"

Inpv~ _

,.,

Input2
Inpul3
Input4

&

Midline!

Inpul5

"

3I

I'" I

M""oo' 1 " I ---f'"

, ~". ~
Midline!
&

Input?

Figuc< S.S Midline Outputs

OutputH

I I

,
Oulpol16

5 Memory Function,

.... klline ""tp~'

Binary op ... and

---4

11

I--

You can ~heck the b inary operand over the mid~

lin e output at auother point in the program. Several midline oulp ,IIS mayb~ programmed in one
logic operation. A midline oU!put box must nOI
tenninate a logic operation; tbc assign box is
.vailable for this purpose.
Networl<, 12 and 13 in Figure 5.5 illus!rntc how
an intermedi ate r. sull is stored in a m idline ou'pUI. T he RLO from the c i",uit formed by
InpurJ , Input2, {"pur3 and Inpm4 is stored in
midline output Midl_ourl. If the condition of
the logic operntion is fulfilled and if the signal
stme uf lnput5 is "I". Olllp",16 is activaled.
Tbe ,tored RLO is us~d in t" 0 ",a)lS in the nex!
network. O n the one hand. a cbeck is made 10
S"e if the condition of the logic operation was
fulfilled and the bit logic combination made
with {npIll6, and on the oth~r hand a ,heck is
made to sec if the condition ufthe logic operation was not fulfille<i and a bit logic combina_
tion made with 1"1'''17.

5.4
5.4.1

Edge Evaluation
How Edge Ev.lua tlon Works

With an edge evaluation, yo ... de'eet the change

in a signal Slate, a signal edge. An edg~ is posi livc (ri,ing) w hen the signal change, from "0"
to "I". The oppos ite is re ferred to as a n~gati\' e
(falling) ~d ge .
In a ~ircuit diagram. the equh'alent of an edge
evaluation is the pulse ~"ntact ekmen1. If th is
pulse ~ontact d ement emils a pulse when the
Tclay is switched on, this corresponds to 'he rising edgc. !\ p uls e from the puis. contact . lement
On switching off co=sponds 10 a falling edge.
Delc~tion of a signal edge (change in a signal
state) i. implemented in the progr6m. The CPU
compares the CUrrctlt RLO (Ih. ,,",suit of an
input ch k. for example) w ith a .lOrod RLO. If
the two si gnal staleS are different. a signal edge
is present.

The stored RLO is located in an "edge memory

bit" (it does not neces.arily havc to be a mem-

'"

ory bit). This mu,1 be an operand whose signal

state must be avai lable when the edge evaluation is again encoum~"'ed (in the next program
c ycl e), and which i, not used elsewhere in the
program. Memory bits . data bits in global dala
b10cb, and static local data bits in funct ion
b locks acc all suitable as operunds.
The e<ige memory b it stored the "old" RLO
with which the CPU last proce,"ed the edge
c,-aluation. If a signal edge is now present, that
i~. if the eu=nt RLO differs from the signal
stme oftbe edge memory bil. the CPU corrects
the 5ign~ 1 state of the edge memory b it by
a~signillg il tl1e "value" of the "new" RLO .
\Vh~n the ed g~ evaluation is n~xt processe<l
(usually in the next program cycle), the signal
Slate of the edge memory bit is the same as that
ofthe current RLO (if this has not change in the
meantime), and Ihe CPU no longer de t e~1S an
edge.

A detected edge is indicated by the RLO after

edge t' al ... ation . If the CPU detects a signal
edg~. it sels the RLO to " I " after edgo evaluation (power then flows). If there is no si gnal
edge, th" RLO is "0".
Signal ,tate "I" after an edge evaluation Ihere f",re means "edge detected". Signal state " 1" i,
present only b riefly, usually only for the length
of one program cycle. Since the CPU does no!
deleet an edge in 'he next cycle (if the "input
RLO" of the edge c,'aluation docs not ~hange),
it "''' the RLO back to "0" after edge evalua_
tion.
P le..,e note Ihe perfonname characteristic, of
tbe e<ige O\slualion when the CPU is switched
on. If no edg~ is to be detected, the RL O prior
to edge e,'aluation must bt; identical to Ihe signal state of th e edge memory bit when the CPU
is switched On. Under certain circumstances.
Ihe edge memory bit must be reset in the stan up rourine (depending on the requirc<l perfor
mance and on the operand used).
5.4.1

Edgt ["aluation in LAD

The LAD programming Iangnage provides four

differenl elements for edge evaluation (see F igme 5. 6).

5.4 Edge Evaluation

Edge memory b<1

P""ili"" od~e 1~
tb. I"'''"' flo..-

--4('Jf--

l\"egaUvo edge in
th o p<lWfl" no"

--4(NJf--

Edgo memory bit

I'Mirin ..I~
..lon ,,!,onll

Ememllil2 if the series circuit con<iSling of

Comuc/4 and ContuaJ interrupts the power
110w,
You may program an edge evaluati<>n with coil
a fte' a T-bmnch or in a bmnch that slans 81 the
left power raiL It must nO! be placed directly at
the l.. ft power raiL
E d ge evaluation uf a n operand

Edge memory M
N<l:"",eodG"
ora" "p<rand

- LM-'",_ --'
operand

NEG
0 -

Edge mC1]tory bil - , "

,,-,',"'--_0

Youc.n pro<:css the RLO dire<:t ly following an

edge evaluation . Ihat is to say. store it with a
"ct coil, combine it wi th down"ream comacts.
or "ore it in a bina ry operand (a so-called
"pulse memory bit"). You usc a p uhe memory
bit when Ihe RLO from the edge e valwuion is
10 be used els~wh">re in the progr"m: it is . '" to
speak. the intermediale buffer for a detected
eJg~ (the J'!llise contacl eletn ~'11t in me circnit
diagram), Operands suitable a< impulse mem ory bil are memory bits, data bits in global dam
b locks, and lcmpomry and static local data bits.
l:dce evalnation in the !,ower flow
An edge evaluatiun in the powu flow is indi cated by a coil lhat contain, a P (for positive,
rising edge) or an N (fot n egative, falling edge).
Above me coil i, an edge tn=ory hit, a binary
operand, in which the "old" RLO from the preceding edge evaluation is stored , An edge eval
uation like thi, ,ktecIs a change in the pow~"
flow from "rower flowing" to "rower nnl 11 0W
ing" and vice verla.
The example in Figure 5. 9 shows B rositive
and a negative edge evaluatiou in Network 16.
II' the parallel circuit consisting of Contacl!
and Contact] is fulfilled, the edge cval u~tion
~mit, a brief puIs .
wi th EmemBil[. If
COnlu,/2 is closed at th i' instant, J.kmory7 i,
oet. Memory7 i, ruset again by a pulse from

LAD represents the edge evaluation of an operand using a box. Above the box i, the operand
whos~ signal state change i, 10 hoe evaluak><1.
The edge memory bit !hal Slore' the "old" signal stale from the prcceding program eydc is
loe8led at input M _BIT
With the unlabeled input and the ontput Q, the
edge evalnation i. "inserted" in the rung
instead of a contact. If pow<'J n<>ws inlo the
unlabeled inp ut. output Q emil.< a pulse at an
e dge; ifno power 110w, in this input , outp ut Q
i.< a lso always ,e ,et . Yon can arrange Ihi' edge
ev~!u"tion in place of any contacl. even in "
parallel bran~h that docs not beg in at the k fl
po"cr rai l.
t 'igurc 5.9 shows the usC of an edge evalnation
of an operand in Nelwork 17. The edge ev,,]ua-

tion in the upper branch emits a p ulse if ' he

operand Contact1 change, its signal stale Irom
"W 10 "1" (positi,'c edge). This puhe sets
M emotyO The edge evaluation is always
~'Oabled by the direct connection of the llnlabeled inpul to the left power raiL The power
cdge evaluation j, enab led by Contacll. If it is
enahled with "I" allhi, input, it emits a pu lse if
the binary operand Contact3 eh'mg~s its "ignal
stale from "I" l<> "0" (nes"'i vc cdge).

5.4.3

Edge Ev"l,,"t;on in FBD

The FBD programming language provides four

differ..,,! dements for edge evaluation (see Figun: 5.7).

The RLO afler an edge cvaluation can be

dirc'Ctly procCSl;ed r<>r e~amplc stored with a set
box, combined. with subsequent binary funclions. or assigned to a binary uperand (a socalled "pulse memory bil"). A pu lse memory
bit is used when Ihe RLO from the edge evaluation is to he proees.ed ~lsev.h~-rc in 'he program: it is. 3' it were , the intermediate bulf~'T

'"

S Memory Funclion'

...... ,h~ ......

or,h* RLO
N"l!oll>'. <><Ix_
..r,loe IU,()

P... I, I>" odx.

or. n " ,,*rud

"'" """"""
----4
p

E<l9ft memory till

----4

I--

Binary op&falld

Ed~ m..-nory bit ~ M ~~$ 0 ~

J'I'~oI"N

<>f." .,........d

E,;g....."""'Y bn

".,.,,-~

~ M ~~G 0 ~

Ibe 00>; is Ihe opmutd "'hose signal .ale

clLange i. 10 be evalualed. The ~dge lTIC'mory bil
Ihal holds the ~old" signal its.'e from Ihe last
proa:ram cycle is 1000ated I t input M BIT. OUIpUI Q i~ "I' "hen tbe CPU detects a signal stale
chmoge in Ibe operand.
Network 15 ;n Figure 5.9 edgc eVBluation o f an
operand , Upper edge evalua tion ros .. milS a
pul ~e when opcr:lnd /"pml aces from "0" to
"I" (pos";"e edge). This pulse ~u Me"'ory!.
Lower edge evaluation NEG em;" a pu l",
when bmary opct1ItId ,,,pm) goes from "J " 10
''0'' (negali"e edg e). This pul~ re~ISM<,mory}
when operand '"pul! i. >OJ".

5.5
ror B dele<:led edge. Operands suitllble as pulse
memory bil~ are memory bi.s, daa bits in glob al data blocks, and .emp orary and s.a.ie IOCkl
d ata bit~.
An edge evalualion is nol permilted after a Tbranch,
Ed"e e... lulltl(m or . he RLO
An edge evalua.ion of the RLO is indica.ed by
a box
con.ains a P (for posili~e, ri:ii"ll
edge) or an N (or negalive, falling edje).
Above lhe IxIx is the edge memory bit, a binlUY
operand conalning Ihe ""old"" RLO from the
p rt:vioul cy<:le. An edge e"lIlualion like this
de.ccrs a c hange of lhe RLO within a logic circuit from RLO "1"10 RLO "()" and Vice versa.

.ha.

The example in Network 14 of Figure 5.9

shows a positive nnd a negalive ed"e ev"IUII l ion. When the OR function eonsiSlina: of
' npUl' and btpuO is fulfilled" the edge evalUIItion cmib M hnef pulse with EmemBIIf. [f
' nput! i$ "I" al this insant. M<,mory/ is
~t_Memory' is rt:set again by pulse from
m<'mBil! wh<:n!l.e AND function comprising
Jnp"t~ and InputS is no longer fulfilled.

Ed"e .--I uatlon of an opera nd

The edge evaluation of an operand is 1000ated at
we beginninj of a b inary logie operation. O,~

".

Blo ary Scale r

A hinlll")' scaler bas One input Bnd one output. If

.hc .illnal a. th .. input of the binary .scaler
c hanges its Stale. for example from "0" 10 "I",
Ihe ou.pu. also changes its siJPla l ~Ia.c (f igure
5,8). This (new) signal Slate is retained untillhe
neXI, in our ~ xample pos;Ii~e, siJlllal state
change , Only then does IhI: siJPUlI state oflhe
OUtpul change again. This means Ihal half .he
.npUt frequency appears at the outpUt of Ihe
bi"",")' $Caler.

-I,
I

Output

5.5.1

SOIUlion In LAD

There are many different ways of soh ing ' hi s

task. Iwo of"'hich 3rt: presented below.
The firsl solulioo uses mC1110ry functiotu (Figure 5.W, ~elwork!; 18 and 19). If the signal
SIIle ofille operand Input_' is "I". the operand
O"lpul_ ' is set (the operand MemoIY_'IS s till
resel). If the signal Stale of the opcnnd 'nplll_'
changes to "'0"", Memot)'_' is also sct (O",p"I_ '
is no,,' "I,. If Input_l is''\"' lhe ne>;1 lime
arouud, Outp",_ l is re>K'l again (Ue",oryj is

S.S

Ilin~ry

S.caler

\"'''""'::::::=~,,:-:==:::~~=::-:'':====-:=~==::-~
I EdJl' ."OI"'110~.~'i
Edll~
(I,.
7
'. ",.two", t 8

ConlaCt"l

11--1 1

I--""'-Ii~"'---"
Con!acI4

. dluallon In

Edg9 meroory bi l

(p)
Con(act!i

powor now

Me

Con:.C12

1f--1'

Edge """""'Y b.t2

1)--1 - - - IIII-- ---(N)------i!!R_

1"" "_ f7 !~. ....Iu. tion of an Opol,*nd
1-1

SR

0
.-J

.'. ,I

01-- - -1

,.

Network 15 d~ .vatuatlon of an ~'* ""

..

now l~). If Inplllj is once again . 'O~.

Alemo'Y_1 IS reset (.ince Outpul_ I i, 00'" also
re~el) . Now the ba$ic 5ta1~ bas heen n:a~~cd
again .. lier twO input puis<:. and one output
pul.e.

The .e<."(md SOlution uses the i.lotclling function

(NetwQrks 20 and 21 ) eomm<)Q on ell:uil diaII1""rn . The principle is the .ame as in the tlrsl
seotution c~cept thaI Ihe r,,,e1 condition - as is
usual will! latching . is "zero "ctive-.

'"

N_ork It Binary scaler wllh mamory bo. .a (2 )

~m

- -'

NittWork 20 Binary scaler wilh Ialch!ng function (1 )

"-'-'
( }--I

I :~F--'-~-In'~: I
""twor1< 21

BInary scal ar with 1. lchfr\ll function (2)

f-_'_"
11L~'~___-l"'"e-C__
' r-______________Momo
~( ~

,--_M--1e~ry_2

1-'-,!""'-'i=1
n~wr'

S. IO llinary Scaler E>.llIilpl ... (LAD)

5.5.2

SnlU IJo n In FBD

Th~

are many ditT=1 ways of sol,"in, Ihis

of"hich are prescnled ~Jow.

IlLSk , IWO

Thc firsl solulion useS memory functions (Fiau re S.ll. Networks 16 and 17). If tbc sign.1
Siale of the operand InpllI is "1", lbe opt!1lnd
0 1<11'''/ is SC I (th e operand MemOly is slill re~t).
If th e ~i gna l ~tatc "fthe openmd Inpll/ changes
10 "0''. Memory is also set (Ompu/ is now T1.
ff Inpul is "J" the ne,,' .ime around. OlilPlil i~
rescI ag.. in (M..mOry is now 'T'). If b'pul ii
once ",am ''0'', M"",,,,)' is reset (since OUtplll
i~ now also ~set). Now Ibe basic stale Iu.5 ~
reached again after Iwo input pu[,.e5 and one

OUlput pul~.
The S<."COnd solu.ion uses an edge C'o... lualion of
the operafld Inpu! (Figl.lrC 5, I J. l'eIWon:s 18 10
20 ). Ifno edge i. detected at l"pulO. the RLO IS
"0" fol lowing edge ~",'alualion and Ihc jllmp

'"

instn.tClion JC>i is e"C"CUIW (you ""iI! find

dct3.ile<l descriptions of the jump Qpe:rIIliOU$ in
Chapter 16 "Jump Functions"),

III our eumple. the jump label is called -bifl

and i. in N~IW'ork 20. It i~ bere that the program
M

<can is resumed if no edge is dCI~ted. The

actual binary scaler is in Network 19: If
O"lpWO is " 0". ;1 is sct; if il i~ "I", it i~ rc~CI.
This oeN. ork is proccsse<l on ly when an edge is
,klccled al IllP"tO. In ~ssence. every tltne an
edg~ i. d~lecled al1npu/O, Ou/P'U() dmoges its
signal rulle.

5.6

Example of II Con' e,'o r Co nt ro l

System

Thc following ""ample of a functionally

cxtre",~Jy simple cooveyor bell controllYltem
illustrate, Ihe u.o.c ofbioary logic operations and

bample ()f a C onveyor Control

j.~

BIn.ry >._ler (Um)

..

.Netwol1l 16 Binary acal8r w ith mA mory bous (1 )

Input

Me mory
,,~

,-

~'M

'R

0-

,
,

,~,

-.
....
- .',.

".'~

Network 18

:"".'
-. .::
:'.'.-

'R

OUIPUI

. ',"

'. ~ ':.1

Binary scaler with memo!), boxes (2)

Memo

",.,.,

..

.~

-- Mo~"
, Network 17

S y ~\C'ITI

--

.. dg.... v alu..tion (1)

-"

19 Binary s caler with e dg e ltValuation (2)

OUlflutO
OUl putO

-<!

&

'.::

.~.

Network 20 (next n ..twor1l with jum p I. bel)

~
fieurc

~.Il

... ",.,
...
-.-.-;.'
-- ..... .
';' I

I - I

..
.-'
,.

.....
..'
~~t

.. I

.:":'"~

Bin ary

S c al~"T

Exomple. (FBD)

be lt' (end_of.belt) sen;;ors no longer det~ts

memory functions in conjunction with inputs .

OUlpUI< and memory b it>.
Functiouul de.triptlo n
?arts are to be transported by conveyor beh.
nne craIe or pallel per belt. Th~ es'~ntial n.m~
lioll' are ,.. fol lows :

t h~m.

The example is programmed wilh input', outputS, and memory b it', and may be progranUlled in any b lock at an~ location. In th is
cas." a fundion ",i'hout function value wa.~
ch()sen as block

> When Ihe bell is empty. the controller req uests mOI~ pans by ;:;suing the "ready_
load'" .ignal (ready to load)
0>

\Vben the "Starl" sigl1a l is issued, the hell

st~rts up and Iransports the pan,

I>

Atth~ ~nd

po

of the conveyor helt. an "end_oI _

~lt" ' sensor (for instance a light harrier) de Ic~ts the pans. at which poim the bell motor
swit ches off and trigger' The "'readyJcm"
8ignal (ready I() remove)
When the c ontinue" ' ignal is issued, Ihe
pan, are lran sponed f unher lltlti) the '"end-

Si::n 3ts. symbols

.'\. fe w additional signals ,upr!em~"T1 t the function al;ty of the conv~yor belt ~ontrol system:
0>

Basic_ ,1
Set' the controller to the basic <late

t>

Mati on
Swit~hes lh~

belt on. ,..,gardless of condi-

ti (ln~

t>

! Stop
SIOP< the conveyor as lon g as the "0" sign,,!

'"

5 Memory functions

is p,-.,sent (an /'-' C comact a, sensor,

active")
i>

"z~ro

Light~bartier1

The pans have reached thc end of tbe belt

!>

fM"fauh l
Fault signal from the belt motor (e .g. motor
protection :;witc h); designed a, "zero ac
tive'" signsl so tbat, for e,,"mple . wire
break also produces a fault signal

We wanl <ymbolic addrc"ing, that is, the oper

ands arc given names which We then usc 10
write the program. Before entering the pro-gram. we create a symboltabk (Table 5.1) cOntaining the inputs, outputs, m~mory bits , and
blocks.

Program for LAD

The c.~amplc is loc ated in a function b lock lhat
you call in organization block OB I (,elected
from the Program Elements Catalog "Fe
Blocks'') for proccs.ing in a CPU.

Here. the e"amp le is programmed" ilh memory

boxes. In Chapter 19 "Block Param~t'-"rs", the
;;amc example is shown using latches. The pro

gram in this Coapter can be found in a functian

b lock witb block pammeters which can also be
called as often as needed (for seven l conveyor
belts).
When programming. the g loba l symbols can
,,1>0 be used without qU()\3tion marks provided
they do not contain any $p'-""ial Charac ters . If"
symbol doe, contain a spc~ i al eharaNer (SUCh
as an umlaut or a space), it must be placed in
quotation marh. In th~ compiled block, the edi
tor indicates all global ,ymbols by selling them
in quotation marks .
Figure 5.1l show s the program for tb e conv~yar control sy~tcm (functio[] block FC 11 )
under "Conveyor Example" in the "LAD~
Book" library that you can download from th~
publish ers W~bsite ~e pag~ 8).

Prnl:ram for F'BI)

The

e.~ample

is located in a

fun~tion

Tabt.S.1

"
I .. .

,,'

it

'"

which you

call in organization block OB 1 (from the Pro

gram Element' Catalog "Fe Blocks") for pT<>'
ccssing in a CPU.

iti .

3.6 Example ofa Conveyor Control Sy stem

fC 11 Co"vo)nr <o~tr oJ ' )."""

Networ1< 1

L<tdP'"~

N.twork 2 PBrts

(,

to re"""1o

, "
...i,
I :'......,'...,",'.
,
.', ...,
Q

EM- Rem- ?

Remo.e

"M

(,

'o-",move

~ _Lo~_N

'~,

rud~

.- "

.....
. .' ,.
. '".
~

Basic_51

,~,';

IMfalfl!1

RemovQ

N etwor~

Belt F."d~ to load

R"ad\

I:

EM_Rem_~

,~~

Continu"

(,

a""ic.J '
,
,

'00'

,
,

EM_ Loa

Ie

wload

, "

,
Q

..

...

.. .,..."

.. ....
.... .. ...':'-'!..
..
,;.;.
,

lMfauH!

:.~r.:

."

:'01".

' .', '.!-'~

'

Netwerk 5 Controll taR molor

'""

,;"~

'':1:;

..

M,

,"

" ;:c':
._.0"

.. '. ".:.'..."..
,. II:

Fig .. ..., 5.12 Sample Conveyor Cuntrol Systom (LAD)

In Chapter 19 "Block Parameter," , t:te .ame

example is 8hown 11,;ng la\chcs. The prognull
in lh; s Chapter can be fOlmd ;n a funCl;on block
with block panun~te", which can al,o be c "lled
38 often as nccd~d (for ,cvcml conveyor belt').

Wkn programming, t1:e glob" l ,ymbols can

,,1'0 be u.'-'<l without q Lwtati on mark; providd
they do not co ntain any 'p"c;al charactC1"S _ If a
symbol does colltain " opecial character (such

a, "" L!1nlau, or a ,p~ce), jt mmt be plH~eu ill

quotation marks, In the compiled b lock. the editor indicates all global symbols by setting them
in quotation marh_
Figure 5.13 shows lhe c ircu it diagram fOT the
COM"eyor control sys,em (function block Fe
I I ) nf the Conveyor .LUilllple" p rogram in lhe
"FBD_ tlook " libra,y that you can down load
rrom the publisher', Website (see page 8)_

'"

M~>mQry FunCl ion~

f'C 11 Com',

'Or

oonlNI .,'".",

Network 1 loood port.

..,

'""

light_ barrie r 1
Baslc_",
IMfaull l
Network 2

Pam ready to remov..

load
Lig~t_barrier1

BaSic_ 51
IMfau!tl

--<

..,

~
~

Network 3 Remove parts

l oad
Remove
BaSic_ 51

Re~dy ~

..,

IMfau~ l

Network "

Belt reedy 10 load

Remove
Beslc_",

load
/Mfault 1

..,

..,

..,

,
,

""""ve

oe

Reedy to load

oe

Network 5 Controlling the belt motor

Remove
Load
Man on
ISlop

IMfau~l

Figure S. 13 Sampl e COIweyor Control System (FBD)

,w

B,, ~

moll

6 Move Fundions

Move Functions

The LAD and FBD programming languages

provide the following: move function.:
~

MOVE box
Copy orerands and vari"blos with elemen.
tary data lyres

"

SI'C 20 BLKMOV
Copy dat~ arca

SFC 21 FILL
Fill data a...,a

t>

SFC 8 1 UllLKMOV

The SFes ar<- 'yst<:m fun<:tions from the "tandard library Standard Library in lhe System
Fun~liun

6.1

SFC R3 READ_ DBL

Read data area from load m~mory

SFC!l4 WRIT DBL

\Vri IC dala area into load memory

[>

System memory
?wcess-I"",ge mput
~r><I output t..t>tcs
:' ait memory

General

You use the move fun<:uon;; w copy information bct"'~cn the system memory. the USer
memory. and the user dmH are" of the moollies
(l'igure 6.1) . Information is trans ferred via a
CPU_internal n:gister that fu nclion, as int.<:nncdime storage. This register is called accumulator 1. Moving informat ion from memory to
accumulator 1 is referred to as 'loading and
moving from acc"m"lat.or I t.o memory is
<:aUed lransferring" The MOVE box contains

Unintemlptible copying of daw area

[>

Bloch prob'l"anl .

Wor!<. memory

and

counter..

D~ta In
data blocks

,,-

Constants. pointer~

TUllO ....

Modules
Peripherat
inputs

1
MOVE

r' Process~ma~a.t""'llt

'I

.. -.

and output tabtes

l' Bit memory

"System memory
Fl~urc

Data in
,;"t8 btocks

st;oct<

Wotk memory

Peripheral
outputs
ModutM

6.1 Momory Att .. tUT Loadi ng a.tld Tnm,fe.rring

'"

6 Move f unctions

both trnnsfcr paths. It mOveS information at

inpul IN to accumulator 1 (load) and immediald y followin g Ihis fro m accumulator I 10 !he
operand at the output (tran<fer)

6.2
6.2.1

MOVE Box

FBD representahon

ProC l/"Sslng the M O VE B ox

Representation
In addition to I~C enable input EN and the
enable outp ut ENO . the MOVE box has an
input IN and an Qutput OUT. At the input IN
and the output OUT. you can apply all digital
operand. and digital variahks of e icmentary
data type (except BOClL). T he variables at
input TN and output OUT can have different
dala types.
The bits in the data fonnats are discn ssed in
detail in Chapter 3.5 Variables, ConStants and
Data Types' .

For incremental prQ~ammin g. you will find

the MOVE box in the Program Element Catalog (wi!h VIEW -t OVERVIEWS [Clrl - KJ or
with iNSERT -t P ROG RA.>.t ELE.\!E}."TS ) under
'Move.

MOVe

'"
"

,"0

mIT

MOVE

'"
"

0", ~

," 0

Different op erand wIdth s

The operand wi dths (byte. word. doubleword)
at the input and the output of the MOVE bo x
may Hry. If the operand at the input is Iess
than at the output, it is moved to the output
operand right-j ustifi ed and is p"dd~d at the left
with zeroe5. If the input operand is "greater"
than the output operand. only that part o f the
input operand on the right that fits ioto the out pUt operand i~ moved
Figure 6. 2 explains thi, . A byte or word at the
input is loaded rightj ustified into accumulator

InpUl lN

, ,.)

01,

(n+l )

01,

,
I"

24 123

(n+2 )

01,

(n+3)

'"

01,

(n+1 l

,.>

'"
, ,.>'"

*,

16 115

,.)
~

0[7

01Doubleword n
01

01By... n
01

,.)
~

'"

(n+l )

Word n

Bu"',
Accumulator 1

01B yte 0
01

,''--_~'C')':c_~oJlc'_--'''c'_'c)_...::ll''--_'c'c':'') _ coJIC'_--"c..C'JI_....::JOI Dou bleword n

OutPUt OUT

Figure 6.2 Moving Different Operand \\idths

'"

f--

6.2 MOVE Box

I and the ...,mainder ili padded wilh

z~roes.

byte or a word at OUlpu! OUT j~ mnove<J right-

justit1ed from accumulator L

Fun~tI"n

Thl' MOVE box m oves Ih~ ;n fomlltion of th~

opcnuuJ al input IN 10 Ih~ ~d at output
om. Th~ MOVE box only move~ information
w h~n the coable inpUI is "I ~ or is unused. and
when Ihe master colum] relay is dUncf\Pzed.
J f EN - "1" and the MCR i. ~'1lergizw, zero i.
wr;lIcn 10 output OUT. Wilh "0" ut the enable
inpu l. Ihe operand at output OUT is unaft~cted .
MOVTi dne~ nOI1"C{XJr! errors.

.=

IF EN
"I" or not wired
THEN
ENO:'" 1
IF MeR e nabled
ELSE
THEN
OUT ;- 0
OUT ,-IN

ELSE

You c~n connCCI MOVE boxes in :<tri..,;. In

doing so, lb.e ENO output of the p receding box
lcad~ 10 the EN input orthe following box..
If you arrnnge scveflll MOVE boxes in one
nono: (pafllll~1 at thc Icfl power rai l and then
~<.)(tlinuinJ; in series the boxes in Ihe uppcrmO~1 branch are proce~scd tirst. frnm Icft to
righl. and then the boxes in The parallel branch
from left tn nabt, etc.
You CDn fInd examples of the mO~e fUDCtioos in
the: ''In>-ic Functinn.~ proa:ram (FR 1(6) orlbe
"LAD_ Book" library thaI you can dnwnload
from the publi~hcr's Wcb>;ile ( _ pai:" 1:1).

MOVE bl'" In a logic circuit (FBI

ENO := ' 0

Enmplt
The cor"en!! o f input "ord l W 0 arc mm'wto
ml:TllOl)'

can conneCI MO VE boxe~ in parallcl. When

connecting boxcs in parollel. you require a coil
10 I<.-rminale the rung. , r yo ~ hav~ nOI provided
for C!TOr e;-Hh,ation, a<sign B "dummy" operand
to Ihe coil, for exampl~ a t~mporary local data
hit.

word MW 60.

If~ou w~m In process the MOVE box in dcpt.'Ddence on specific conditi ons, you can program
binary logic ci",uits before Ihe F.N inpul. You
caD conutc1the ENO output wllh bi nary inputs
of olh..". u""tio"-,,; fm instance. you can arrnng~
MOVT' boxes in series, ",hcf'cby the "NO ou1put oflbe preceding bo" lew 10 Ihe EN input
of tlw; followin g boA.

\.AD ... p......,talion '

FN and ENO need nOI 1:><: w'",d.

'M"OO,V
7.,'1

f-- ---I EN ENOf----1

,w 0-l'e''--'OU''"'. r- MW '"
c,V;"'"
r

You can find examples oflbe move functions in

the "BIl!Sic Functions" progrum (FI3 1(0) of the
"l.N)_l:Iook library lhool you CIUl downlood
from the publ1shcr's Websi\(: (...", page S).

FBD re-pr4I5OOtation

MOVE

EN

OUT -

MW60

6.2.2

and in paral -

ehapltt, you can als.o move limer and coumer

value. (~ce Chapte r 7 "Timers" a.nd Chapter 8
"Counters") . Ch apl~r 18 .2 " Bl ock Functions
for Data Bloch", deab with using data oper
ands.

M o \ing Opt"noodl

In addition to the operanJ,j mention<,d in thi s

MOVl;

bn ~

In .. run," (LAD)

You can arrnng'" contact:. in

~ne,

lel before input EN and "fter OUTput Ef>.O.

The MOVE box mu~1 only be placed in a
~h that lcads directly to lbc ldi power rail.
Th i$ bo1tnch can al .... ba\-e Conl&CIS before the
inf'!Ul EN atld it need nol be the lOP hranch. With
Ihe direct COIUlect,on 10 the left power rail you

" to\i ng Inpu ts

IDo
IWu
IDo

Movin g an input byte

Mo"ing an input word
Moving all input doublc\\'ord

'"

lOJiTlg iwm the pmces!i image or tramfen+" g

the pr,,"cs. image of Itw input>; is al,o pN'",i ..ible for all CPU, with tbe S7-300 and for
til" ncwer CPU. "";11t lite S7-400 in the ease of
the inpul bytes which lire nol JIfC>'<."n1 as an inpul
module.
l<l

Muv i n~

QB"

QW"
QD"

outpun
Movinll: lin ,)UIPUI b}1 '
Moving "" OUlp~t ,,"ord
Movi ng au output doublewoHI

Loading from the p"",e~~ image or traru;~rring

to the process image afthe oUlpu:s is alS'l pern,i.sible for all CpU. with the S7-300 and for
!he ""'Wei" cpu. with the S7-400 in th~ ca5e of
the oulpul bytes wllkb lin: not p""wnl a~ an OUlPUI module.

The peripheral o u~p"IS (PO:;) M!"C u,ed for transrers to the 110, Only those add,,,>,,,, cnn be
ac~~"""d Ihal are also OCCUPIed by IJO mooules.
Transferring to IJO moo.luJ". \hat have a procen_image OUTpuT table sImultaneously updates
tbat proce<s-image output table, so there i. no
diffuenee beTween idmlicaUy addns,ed ouT_
pu!:> and peripbe!'\ll outpUts.
1\10,lnll hit memnry

MD.
MWn

Movi"S a memol)' byte

Moving n memory word
M,,"in!j: a m~.,..,ory doubteword

Mno

Moving from and to !he bit memory ""Idre~ a"'3

,. 1I1,,a,.~ permi<siblc. since lite ".-bole bit mem"ry;s in !he CPU. Please rIOte here the diif<.T,:nee
iD b .. mctDOfY ""'" "i~c on the ~arious CPUs_

Moving from tho 110

Moving a local data byte
Moving: a local <1"1# "un.!
Moving a l<xal dnla doubleword

LH II

I'lD n
PIWn

Pro "
O'Q. "
PQWn

PQl) "

wading a

~ripheal

input byte
Loading a pc,;phcl'lI.l inpul word
Loading II periphen>! input
double"ord

Transrerrlllt! 10. peripheral inpuI

"",

Transferring to. peripberal oull'ul

wem!
Tmnsf.rrirw 10 a peripheral OUlpUl

doublev.ord
Wb ..." moving in the 1'0 area you cau ao;ces~'
diifere", cqx:rand.s depending On the dinxliou
oflbe move. You 'p<.>Ct/)' LO inputs (Ph) al the
IN inPUI of the MOV!:: bo~, "",I 1 0 output~
(PQs) at The OCT output.
When moving from the I 0 to memol''' (loading). the inpul modules ate acee ..ed as p<.T1phl-ra l inputs (Ph) , Only Ihe &\"ailahle modules
may be addreued_ Plc,,!~ DOl. tlml diTC<:1 landing from the IJO modules Can mOye a diJfcrcn!
~lIlue than loading from Ih" input>; oelhe module "'ith the samc Iddrt.ss. While the .ilP'a!
StUC5 of th~ inpuTS COlTCspunds I<> th" ,alucs II
the sWl of the I'fOStanl cycle (wben the CPU
updaTed the pTOee$._ image). the value. loaded
din.."tl)" from the VO module. ITO the current
,'aluc>.

".

LWn

LD.

MO'ing from and 10 the l Slack l_< alw,"ys

.now~-d PiuS(: nOle lhe informaTion in C1wo.pl('f
18.1.5 '"Temporary L ....... "J D.I#~.

6.2.3

;\ \'(/\'inll Con f tunt$

You may specify ~ons tanl va lu es onl y a t Ihe It'

inPUt oflh e .\ 10\'E oox .
\ lo,1nK constanlS 01 d~mNltary dala

Iyp~

A fu<;<l value, or conwuu. can be =fC1'T'Cd 10

An operunQ To ~l!hallCe cl~ril), thi~ constaD!
no be tnlnsfc,.n:d in ,me o r ie,..,raJ dirrerem
formats. In Chapter ),So4 " FI~mC'fltary Dat"
lyP<-s. )OU" llJ rmd an overview ofallthe di f_
ferent forma", . ,\11 c, m<tunl< thaI can be mo,cd
us ing the MOVE box belon~ 10 th~ ~Iem.ntal)'
dald Iy!'-"S 'Eumple$:

Moymll a 2-dijCit hexadecimal

number

-1000

MO"m~

' .0

~Io'ing

SST- 2s

MO'-mil: an 55 Illner
Mo~mg a Time of day

TOO"g ,30

an I"'T ntJl'llber
a REAL DUmbcr

6.3 System function. for Data Transfer

J\.I(lving pointu.
Pointers are a special fOlro of con<tan! used for
calculating addr<:SSCS in .tandard blocks . You
can uSC the MO VE box to ,Wr<: these pointers
in operands.
P III.O

Movin g an area-internal rointcr

P;'tM2. I

Moving an ar<:a-<:rossing pointer

6 .3

System Functio ns for

Data Transfer
The lollowing system functions arc available
for data transfer

If you use a variable w ith comhined data type,

i\ must only be a '"complete' variable; oompo-

nenB of a variable (e.g. individual field or

sITUcmrc component') are not permissible . You
can usc tbe ANY point~r \0 define an area with
absolute addre s< (sec Chapter 6 .3 I "ANY
Po inte,).
ANY parameter" Ith t he St'C 83 and 84
The system functi on, SFC 83 READ_DBL and
SfC 84 WRlT_DBL !Jan,mit dum be\ween data
bloch present in the load and work memories .
Complete data blocks or pam of data blocks arc
pen nissiblc as actual block par<IIII~"\crs
SltCBLK and D STBLK.. With symbol ic
a<idre,>.ing, only 'completc' variables are
accepted whicb are present in one data b lock;
inilividual field <.>r structure compon~"Il\l; aTC not
permi"ib le . Use the ANY pointer to speci/)' an
absolute addressed area .

t>

SFC 20 BLKMOV
Copy data area

t>

SFC 21 FILL
F ill data area

t>

SFC 81 UBLKMOV
UnintcITUptible copying of a data area

6.3_1

t>

SFC 83 RF.AD_ DI:IL

Read tram load m emory

t>

SFC 84 WRIT_ DilL

Writc into load memory

You require 'he ANY pointer when you want to

.pec ify an ab.,olutc-addrc"",..d operand area as
block parameter ofryre ANY. The general format of the ANY pointer is as follows :

A,'1Y I'ointer

P#[DataBiock]Opcrand Type Quantity

Examples:

ANY parameter f(lr the SFC. 20, 2J an d 81

These ,yst"'" functi on" each possess two
parameters of data type Ah'Y Crable 6.1) . You
can conned (in principle) any orerand. any
variable or any absolutc addressed area.

P#MI6 .0 BYTE 8
Area of 8 byres beginning with MB 16
P#DJll !.rHIX30.0 INT 12
Area of 12 ..... ord, in DB 11 beginning
with DBB 30

Thble6.! Panunctc-rsfurSFC20.21 and 8 1

SFC .

'"

"
"'

.. ._. . . .
'

Paramc',r
SRCBLK
}1FT VAL

Iliaralion

Data TlP<'

to~t""ts, I~ripti"n

INPUT
RETUR1';

ANY

~ource

~,

I)STIlU<

OUTPUT

,,~

BVAL

~m

ANY

Error inlorrnati on
Dc" ination to which data are to be copied
Source area to be C'upi<Xl

RET VAL

RETURi\'

I.'lT

liCK

OUTPUT

AN!'"

SRCIlI.K

INPU T
RETURl"
OU1T'UT

ANY

~,

VAC

DSTlJLK

on
ANY

orc. from which data arc t(} be copied

Error informatiun
D,"ination to w~ ie~ t~. wurcc "rca is to be
copie<! (mcl"w"{I: multipk: oopie,)
S""rce orea trum whicb do'o an' to be copie<!
Error infomlati on
Do"ination to which daUl are to he copiod

'"

Mov~

Function.

Pil1l8.0 WORD I
Input "'oro IW 18

1'#11.0 BOOL 1
Inpul I

Example (Figure 6.3, SeN"orir; 4): Starting with

memory b}1e M S 64, 16 bytes are to be copied
to dala block DR 124 suning from DBB O.

(.0

U ninterruptlbl e Copylni of
Data A rea

Plealie note that the operand addJ"e,ss in the

ANY pointer must al ..... ays be a bit add~ss.

6.3.3

It mllk~, ~ense to 'p"cify a constant ANY

pointer when you ..... ant to acceSS a data area for
which you have not declared variables. In prineiple. you t1Ul assign variables Or o)leTBnds to
an ANY pIU1Imeter. For example, PIIII.O
UOOL I' iii identical to'l 1.0' or the rele...ant
symbolic addres .

SY$tem function SFC 81 UBLKMOV copies

the content, of a source a~a (pa rameter
SRC Fl LK) 10 a dCitination a~a (parameter
DSTBLK) in the direction of ascending
addres,es (incrtmenta.lIy). The copy funclion i.
unintermptibk. crntmll the polSibtlity of
increa""d res~ limes 10 imenupt . A mni mum of512 b)1<:S can be copied.

6J.2

Copy Da ta

A ~a

The sYStem function SFC 20 BLJO,-IOV cop,es

'he conten\5 of a soure. area (parameTer
SLCULK) 10 II destination area (parameter
DSTnLK) in the direction of ascC"lldinll
addre s&C1I (incremental).

The follo ..... ing actual parameters may be

assigned:
c>

Any variables from the openmd areu for inpUIS (I). oulpulS (Q), bil memory (~t), IJ1d
da\.a blocks (variables from global da\.a
blocks and from instance dau blocks)

I>

Variables from the temporary local da\.a

(special cireUl11$tances govern the use of dat8 type ANY)

I>

Absolute-addressed data area" .....hieh require specification of an A."'lY pointer

You cannOl use SFC 20 10 copy limef$ or

coun ters, to copy information from Of 10 the
modules (operand area Pl. or to copy system
data blockS (SDBs) .
In the eaS<: of inpulS and outputs. the speci fi ed
area i, copied regardkss of "hetheT or nmlhe
addrt'$Ses aclUally ret"""'nce !npm or outpUt
modules. Ifthe CPU does nO! possess Sf"C 8J
READ_DilL. you ~an also specify. vlIriable or
an ana from a data. block in the load memory as
the $OUn:e ana.
Source area and destination area may nOI O\'or_
lap. I f the source area a nd the destination area
are of different lengths. the transfer is completed only up 10 the length oftbe shoner ofthc
twO areas.

'"

The following actual partlllKten may be

liD cd :
I> Any vatiables from the operand areu for input~ (I). outputs (Q). bit memoty (M), and
data blocks (variabks from global data
blocks Or from instancc dala blocks)

> Variables from the temporary local data

(spec ia l ein:umstances 1I0vem the use of data type ANY)

>

Absolute_addres~d dati. areas ...... hieh reqUIre specification o fan ANY pointer

Sf"C 81 cannot be u""d \0 copy li.mrs or

counters. to ropy information from or 10 the
modules (opcnmd area Pl. Or to copy system
dall blocl<s(SDSs)ordaUl blocks in load mem
ory(data. blocks programmed "ith Ihe keyword
(,iIl",ketf).

In Ihe case ofmpuis and outpulS. the speci lled

arca is copied regardless of whether their
a ddre,>es ~fcrence input or OUtpuI modules.
Source area and de"ination area may not overlap. If the source area and Ihe destination area
are of different length" the trarufer is completed ollly up to the length oftbe shoner oflbe
\Vo'O

areas.

6.3 A

flU Dala Aru

System fullction SFC 21 FILL copies a specified, alue (source area) to B memo\)' area (dC'Slin,li on a~a) as often as required 10 fully overwrite the de>lination area . The transfer j, made
in Ihe direction of a>cendlOg addresses (inerc-

6.3 System Functions for Data Transfer

SHtom functlon. ror

d~' a

I ...."'r.. (LAD)

Network 4. Exampl e for SFC 20 BLKMOV

"'O

1--------1'"
PIIM 84 .0 BYTE 16 -

S FC 20

SRCSL K

R ET_VAL

f- FW 82

L ____C'O'o'c'~'e'''f-- P' IIOB I24 .D8XQ ,Q BYTE 16

N.twOrk 5 Example lor SFC 21 F'_'""~-,,,;C;;------'

ntact3
r
SFC 2 1

f---------1'"
P#M 80.0 BYTE 1 -

s ." .,. function. for dot"

N. work 4.

Exa mple

rr~",r<r

f- FW 84
Bl K f- P#OB I 24.DSXI6.0 BYTE 16

eYAL

RET_VAL

(FBD)

lorSFC 20 B=',',.,o,',O,,-,;;-__,
r

"Input2" -

SFC 20

EN

PIiM 64,0 BYTE 16 -

SRCBL K

RE T_VAL
D STB LK

f--

""".'

FW82

f- PIIDS I24.DBXO .0 BYTE 16

E NO

Network 5 Exampl. for SFC 21 Fill

-r=CC-o'o'CCo,"'-----,
"'nput3' P#M 80.0 BYTE I -

Figu re 6.3

Exompl~.

EN
BYAL

RET_VAL
BLK

f- FW84

I- Pll'DBI2"DBX18.0 BYTE 16

for SFC 20 RLK1>tOV .nd SFC 2 1 FrLL

mentally). The following actual

may be assigned:

paramet~rs

"" Any variables from the operand areaS for inputs (I). outputs (Ql, bit memory (M), anI!
dala b locks (variables from global dato
b locks and from instance data blocks)
"" Ab.oluteaddressed data areas, requmng
,pecifi~ation of an A:'iY pointer
"" Variab les from the temporary local data of
data type Al\Y (special circum.'tances ap_
ply)

SFC 21 cannot be u8ed to co py timers or

counters, to copy information from or to the
modules (operand area Pl, or system data
blocks (SOBs) ,
In the case of inputs and outp uts, the speci fied
area is copied regardless of whether the
addrc" es actuall y referenc e input or output
modules
Source area and destination area may not overlap_ The destination area is alway, fu lly overwri nen, even when the source area is longer
than the destination area Or when the length of

'"

till: deStination area is not pn integer multip!e o f

!h~ length oflh. S<,lur~c area.
Example (Figure 6.3, N elwork 5): The contentS
(If memory byte :\lli 80 is 10 b. copiffi 16 rimes
(0 dala block DB 124, heginning DBB 16,
6.3.5

RcadlnE frum l .old Mf mory

The S)'>ll~-m function SFC 83 READ_DRL

read. d,,1.11 from" dala block pr..em ill load
m~mory, and wrile~ Ibem ;"110 II data block
preBent in work mcm()TY, TI,. Conlenl> of Ihe
read data block are not chtln!'e", The " lock
p"r.meter< arc <k!ICribed in Tabk 6.2 .
The sySlcm funclion SFC 83 READ_ DRL
"penlles ill ""y"ch.ronoullnode : you trigger <he
read prucC50S with _i.gnal ~<ale ''I'' on parnmClcr
RQ. You may only lCCes! <be read and "ril1cn
data areas again when the BUSY plInunel('f has
returned 10 Ihe signal ~tM le "0".
A dala hlock is "sUlI!ly rresem rwice iu the ".er
memory of a CPT.:: once in load m emmy ""dIh~ parr rele"anl to proc;:ssinl!: - in work melD_
ory. lfa dat.a block has the altrib",lc Unlinh>d, it
is only pn.$<'nt in lmod memory (Figure 6.4).
The StC 83 READ DDL only ream alue~
from Load m~-mnry. The initial value5 of me
dala C>penInds - wbleh may difT..,- from the
IeNal value~ in wor~ memory - ar~ pr<>cnt
Iter~ (see also CItaPler 2.6.S "BLock Handling"
lmdo;-r '" D ata b lock< oftliue/onlinc '") ,
Complete data block~, e.~. nn 100 or "Redpc
I'", variables from dal.l blocks, Or an abwlute

16.

addrts>~-d data area can be ~pi:Cjf;cd as A.'-Y

pointer<;, e.l. P#DB1OO,DBXI6,O nYTE 64, in
lhe parnmeters SRCBLK ,md n STD LK.

lIthe souree area is smaller than the target area,

tht: <O\lr"U area i< written complw.:ly infO the t.aT~< area. The <~m"inin~ byt<,:$ of the IaJKeI area
are not changed l fthc !lUTee area is lar&er than
I~ UIl\'<.:1 area, Ihe target area is wrinm compll'tely; the Il'maining bytes of till: 'IOUl<'C an:a
~ ignored.
~,j.6

Writin g ioto Load j\.Iemor},

The i)litem function SFC 84 WRIT _DBL run.

dala from a data block present ;" work memory,
and wri\cl; them intO a dall block p1'CSC111 in
load memory. Th" COllu:nI~ or lh~ read dala
block""" nol ebangoo. The block Jll'ram~:e",
~ de;.cribed in Table 6.2 .
The ~Y>'I~m function SFC R4 WRIT_DEL operales in asynchrooous mock you lriggcrthe read
proce~~ with ,ignsl !tnte "I" on paramet~r
R EQ. You Illay only "C"CSS Ih~ I"I'kd and writlcn
dlla!lre"" aga ;~ whcn lhe BUSY pamm~tcr ha.
mumC(j 10 the signal SIale "0".
A o:bt~ block i. rn.ua.lLy pll'5em twice in the us...mt:JT>()ry of a CPU: once in load memory and lhe pan relennt to proceS~lni - in work memory.lh d" ... block has the anrihute U,,/inJ:l'd, il
is only pr<;~nt in INd memory (fi!o:Ure 6.4).
Tho; SfC R4 WRIT DilL only !\Cad., value.
from work memory. The inil;,,1 value. of the
data openll1ds - which may diffe< fr"m the
o,IUIII , al""s in load memory _ aT<: pr.:<~m her~

6.3 Sy"em FunclioM for Data TfUlSf....

UH' memO<)' of a CPU

Load ",.

WorI< m .m

---- -~
-I
--'. -1 :-...::::
~
.
08 11

~-

DB 11

~~I

A "normal " <!all block e",.ted u''''11 th~ P'<>grImminll

devicc i. p.esml tv.; .. in ' be CPL". u"'"' m~' il i.
com~l.tely pt ...,,\t in lood mommy, and lhe data ,.t.ti ,.
10 prc-:.S$inS or. pre=t in the work memory. i .. the
data with which lh. Pr<li1"'lJn worh.

DB 12
\oj>

''01

"'''

""'01

'" "
",,.,,

).

0813

-,
--'

A datI t>tock ere-aled U,inll the propnm1n& devlCC 000

,,;th l~ s(lnbut~ (/nli~W is only "",oem in the CPU',
load memory. Thi. data block doe> no< occupy .... y opacc
in ....
memory.

"'k

A data blk crealed u>1II11 the SFC 82 CRF. ... DaL. i.

prne!ll tn!oad m=><><)' and if u..li1l1:~ i.IIOIIC1".. ted
.00 in w~'k m<nlOf)'. A data blk ptet.enl in ""'"'
rno"""Y i,lbe template ac<:ordinll to which the " .... ""ta
block is c, ,ed.

DB~

. ,

------DB 14

;-~I

... dall blk cfealo<1 U.inll the SFC 22 CRE ...T_l)fI

ur SfC 8S CREA_DB i. only pre"""t in ,I>.. CPU'.
,,'on: memo, y

(lee also Chap' .... 2.6.5 "Blocl: Handling" under

"Oala blocks offitoelodine"").
ContplL"1c data blocb . g. DB 200 or "Archive
I"", variables from da\.o blocks, or an a~lule
addrcncd da1a area can be specified D$ AKY
pOinters, c.lI. PIIDB200 ,DBXO.O WORD 4. in
the p~rnmcte" SRCBl K and DSTBLK ,
[fthe SQ urce Rre~ is smaller than the targM arell.
the IO~1"Cf: are. i$ written completely into the 1.9.rget area. Tbe remaininll bytes of the target area
ore nol changed. If the ""urce ""'" ;.. IA/'ier than

the tatyeI area. the large! area is ..TitlC11 com

plt-Iely; tho: mnainmg ~ of lbe soun;e area
are ia;non:d
Please OOIC: if you wrile imo a data bIO<.:I: in
load memory (if the initial values arc changed),
you change the checksum of the uier progra'''.

Please also 001: thaI the load memory usuully

only permits a limited number of writ e opera
tion! for pny.icai rcawn . Too frequent writing .
e.g, cyclic. limit.> the .ervicc life of the load
~moiY.

'"

7 Timers

Timers

The timers allow software implementat;on of

tim ing sequences such as waiting and monitoring time,. the mea,uring of inler>aI" or th~
generating ofpul,e,

cum.' " time value, whi~b you can fetch from

'he timer in eith~T bina!)' or BCD code .

The following timer types an; available,

7.1

'" Pulse timers

Programming a Timl'r

Extended pulse timer;

(>

On-delay timers

7.1.1

(>

Retenti,'e on_delay tim","

(>

OfT_delay timers

You can perform lhe following <.>peralioru; on a

tim er:

You can program a timer complete as box or

using: individual program e lement>. When you
start a timer, you sJX'dfy \he type of timer )vu
want it to be and how long it should run: you
can also rusct a limer. A limer is ~b;;ckcd by
4uerying its <lat us ("T;m~T running'') or the

Tlmorbn'
( i n 'h~ .x,mpl.' pulse timor)

LAD .repr.. s.ntation

feD

rcpwsentation;

r""", 0 1"'....00

,
='"e

S~P ULSE

Kame

,w

'-

D",a Type Doscription

B~c

Sta n inpu'

S5TLME

t mro,ion of linK- 'I"'cification

"
"BCO
" ,=,
R

" r=

Bm
a

B~'

Ro.<t input

WORD

Curren' time ,.,.I"e in binary

WORD

Curren' ,ime ,-,u uo in BCD

Timer .tatu,

Gcn~ral

Rep reseutado n ofa

Tim~r

:>

Start a timer "'itb specification of the lime

"

!l.c,,:t a tim<-r

-,. Cbeck (binary) limer sl8lUs

::>

Cbeck (di!<i tal) limer valuG in binary

""

Ch~c k

(d igi"'l) time value in BCD

The box ior a ' imer contains the coherent repre,enta,ion of all timer vperalions in the fo rm of
funct ion inputs and func'ion vUlput, (Figure
7.1), Above the box i, the absolme 0.- ,ymbolic
a ddre of 'he timer. In the bo". as a header, is
the timer mode (S PULSE mean, "S tart pulse
limer") . Assignments f or th" S and TW inp uts
are mmullltory, ",bi le ~ssigt\mtnts [Or th e other
inputS and outputs 21X' vptional
Indhidusl program elcmenh in LAD
You can also program a timer using individual
program ckf1)~ nts (Figure 7.2). The t;mer is
,hen stmt ed via a coil. The timer mode is in the
coi l (SP - start pulse 'imer). and below the evil
i~ 'he ,,,Iuc, in SHIl'.'fE fmmm. defining the
duration. To reSe, a timer. usc \hc reset coil, and
us. an NO or NC eont " cl to check the Slams of
the t;mn. Fina lly. you ean ,,,ore the current lime
va lue . in bins,), in a word opcr~nd using tbe
"JOVE bo" ,

7.1

~inllaTi.mcr

...

"""", ,,,

Stan u-.- by Of>'if,-ioa: ~

( ...... coil " 'id> lim. mock)

----{SPri

""""""

R.... rim.,
(I ..... roil)

TImer Dl*and

--{R}---l

Ch"d limor 1100UI

TImer operarld

TIme< operllrld

II

("0000'..". NC """,""")
Road lime at binory ....1""
(MOVE 1>0>:)

~l ,ure

7.2 Individual Elemen .. of. Timer (LAD)

MOVE

--'"

- 'N
'N

'NO

OUT

Digital

opet1Ind

In d lvld u l l p rog ra m elemenu In }" BD

For incremental programming, you wilt find

You can also program a timer using individual

prOllram element' (Figure ;.3). The timer is

the limen; in Ihe Program Elemenl Catuloll

(wilh ViEW ..... O VERVIEWS [CIt! - K ] or Il'o"SeJl,T
..... PROGRAM ELE.\IENTS) under 'Timers"",

then ~ta" ed vin a simple box cornainin& the

timer mode (SP - start pulse limer). Below the
'ooll is the value. in S~ T!ME fonnal. defimng
the duration. To resct a 1imcr, uSC the reset 'ooll.
You ean scan the SlalUS ofa timerdir~tly OT in
ne,aled form wilb any binary ;npln. Finally.
you can $tore the current time vabe. in binary.
in word operand Wiing the MOVE 'ooll.

7.1.2

Sf. rting,. TImer

A limer stans when the result of the logic oper_

allOn (RiO) c hllIIie5 before thc itart input or
before the rum coillbox. Such. si&IIB1 c hanl!<'
is always requ~ to stan I timer. In the cascof
In off-delay limer. the RLO mUst cllange from

s..rt timer by .peciryina limo

(...rt ooil wi'" Llm. rno:xIo)

TImer op&ralld

Duration

--i

Cboook Llmer .......

(d....,. or IICpICd biuty iopuI)

--'"
TImer opII"'nd

11....:1 ""'" tiS bt....,. ,...100

(MOVE bo.)

~"P"Iand

7.:l Incli"d",11 hl.menu ofo Tim.r (FBD)

,","-r operand
R

Reid tIn><r
(reset coil)

F I~nr.

~ TV "

=:d

Me"
0"' t- DigtIaI opet8nd

ON

'N

' NO

Ti",~""

" I" to 'W '; all "Iher tim~..,; .llan when

goes from .'{)" to "I".

Ib~

Rl. O

You e .... shin. limer in on~ of five diff",,.,,nl

mode. (fig ure 7.4). There is. h",' C' er. nO poinl
il\ (, . ing any Irvcn timer in "'. ore Ihan nne

mOO,
7,1.3

Spe<:Jf)1 ng Ihe Du n don

ofTIID~

Tb,' limer ,wopls the value bdow Ibe coil!bo .

or the v:tluc 111 ;npul TV as me duml.on. You
(~n $p:cil'y Ihe durat;on as COD>taol. L. word
operand, n. as vKri~bl . oflype SjTJME.

Spc<:i/ying Ihe durol;on u.t Constant

SH lMEl# lOs
S5T1!lm I Om~

DU!"lItion of lOs
Dunmon of 1 miD .... 10 ms

""c-

The dU,...~l;"n;1 .pc<;ifled in hours, minules,

omb and rnilli"ccolK!J. Th", range exICO<.J, from
SSTL\1Ell'I OrtIS 10 Sj'l"ThfElf'.h46mirI3o.I {which
corn--sponds Il> 9990 'j. )ntcnnediate valu~'"S are
roun ded l>ff In 10 II". Ynu Can u,e 551'1ME '" l>'
SSTII' lO idcmify II constant.

SIHCI/Y;"K lire " .. ration (f$ Ql"'rand or '-orioble

MW20

Won! ""erand comai!1ing the

duration
Variable o f dala ty~ SSTIME

T he yaluc;n the word OJX'.and mUSI corre'pond

to data type SSTL"'1F (sec " Structure of the
dumtioo of time "tlue", btlo""),

""
"
"S],,-xr
~

\0 r.tart the-

"",or os

Pvil< ,;"""
i!l<tcndcd pul ..

"

Ot,deloy tun<r

"

R.... nti'e
OlI-dd.y \"'10'

M
S_OFFO'J

on:.!<l'

S_ODT

172

ImeIrullly, the dunltion i> composed of the time

\lIlue and the lime base: durat;on - time "1I1ue
>< lime base. Thc dunuion is the tim~ durini
which a timer i, "cti",-, ("timer running"), The
lim~ ,,.Iu~ rcpn:scnts the numl:><..... of cydcs for
"'hich (he timeri;; 10 run. Th'" time base dcfine~
Ihe in'e...."ol al which the CPU i! to cbange the
time ",,1\10 (Figure 7.5).
You can,.]>o build up I dural1l)11 ohime right in

a ",,,r<! oJX'nmd. The .I maller the time ha,c, the

mo,"" ~ccuralC the mct .... 1J uration. f or c~nmpl~.
if you" lnt 10 implement" ,luraIion of one second,

)'OIl

c1llt make one Df tbrc(: specificalions:

Durotion - 20()] I>:~

J)uratiOD - IOIO""~
OurohOD - 0100t,,,,,

Timc

~~

Timcb>o~e

100m.
TIme base 10 It1$

Th. lasl 01 Ihese is the prcfcmd

ca,e.

on~

;" this

When Slan ing II timer, the CPU ,dop!!; the pro!!rammcd (ime valuc , The opernlin;:: .ystem
upd1IU Ihe timers at fi"ed irltcrvab and indepcndendy of the uscr program, thai is. il de..:remenb lhe I1me va!ue of "II active lllJ'IeB as per
the lime b",e v,'hcn 3 timer rcachc. zero. it has
run d""",. Th~ CPU then ",",s th~ timer St~lL!S
(oi1O"1I1 state "0" or"' 1~. dependiDi on the mode.

&art .!gnal

F 1:=3

PULSE

S_OOTS

Struct ure of the <lun do n nf time >lIlu e

I"".,

b 1----=1

I=-- '

F- r

Th\4I vel ..... In ace

riffle base In Bee

0.0\ s

'-0.1.
2. 1
3. 10.

Flit"'.

7.~ o..criplion of the

!JUI in

oh~

DlII'Ol;OO

or "typc", of timer) and drops nn funher activilies "nhlthe limer i~ !'CStancd. If)'Qu specify:l
dunuion of zero (0 ms or W.l6aOOOO) when
Slllrting" lim ...., the limer rt'mams .ctiv~ unlil
lhc CPU has processed Ike Urn.,.,. and discov_
ered Ihat the time has elapsed.
Timers are updated Bsynchronously 10 the progrom ""an. As a rosull. it it possible thai lhe
time sta rns at the beginning of a cycle is different tllan al the end of the cycle. If you usc Ihe
timers a1 only One point in lhe program and in
the suggested order (5 ~low). \he as)'nelLIe>nous updating will prevent the O<,:~ulTCl1ce of
malfunctions.
7.1 .4

R... crtingA Timer

LAD: A limer is reSe! when power flows in the

resct inpul or in the reset coi l (when the RLO i.
","), As long as the limer remai ns I'l:SCI. a scan
with an NO oontacl Mil return ''()'' and a scan
with an NC contact will return -I ~.
FB[): A timer is reset when a MI~ is present at
the reset input As IODi ., the timer remain.<
reset, a dIrect scan of the timer StaTUs will reTUm
''0'' and a negated ~CB n will return "I" .

Reffttini of a timer Jel' Ih8t timeT and the time

base l<> zero, The R in put at the timer box need
not be wired,

7. 1.5

C h..:king a Tlmtr

C hN k.lni Ib timer sta tu, (LAD)

The timer staCUS i. found It outpul Q of the
limer oox, You C3n also check t~ limer status
with an NO contact (corresponds to output Q)

o r with an l\T contact, The resultS of a check

with an XO contact or with OUtpul Q differ
according to the type of timer (~the descriplion of the timer ty~s. below), All is Ihe case
,uth inpulll. for example. I check ""th an N'C
C011l11Ct produces exactly the opp<)'>ite cbcck
resuh as the one produced by a che<k with an
XO coma.1. Output Q need not be used at the
timeT 00"
Chec k.lng the timer

~lRtUI

( FI:I[

TnI' timeT s:atus is aVll.ilable at output Q of lbc

timer box. You can alS<) check the timer ,!DIUS
with, binary function input (com:sp<.lIIding to
output Q). The remits of' timer d .eck depc:l1d
on the type of timer invol\'ed (8 the dC'SCription of the timer ty~. below). Output Q need
not he used at the timer box ,

C h ecking the time v.Jue

OUI]NIS BJ and BCD provide the timer's time
valU( m binary (AI) 01' bioary-coded decimal
(BCD). It i. the value 'Umllt at the time oft~
'hecJc. (if the timer i. acnve. the time: value ~
counted from (he set value down towards zero),
The value is slored in the spe<:ificd operand
(tmnsfer as wi1h a MOV E oox) , You do not
need to use lhese outputs at the limer box,

Direct checki"g ofa time Wi/lie

The time

~'alue

is "'8ilable in binary-coded

dlJIWIl. and can be ~trievw;n this form from

the timeT. In.oo doing, the lime bru<c is lost and
i. rq,laced with "O~. The \'8luc COTI'CCsponds 10

a positive Dumber !II N T fannat. Plea", note: it

il the lime value thaI i. checked. oot the duT3.-

7 TIm .....

t;on! You can also program direct checking ofa

time value with the MOVE box .

diately reset. The subsequent timer check wilt

fail to dett !he f""l that the timer was started.

Coded c/.cck;"g of a lime value

You can also retrieve the binary time valu~ in
"coded" form from t h~ timer, In this case. both
the time value and the time base arc available in
binary-coded decimaL The BCD value is structured in the same way as for the specification of
a time value (see above).
7_1.6

Sequ ence of Timer Operations

'When you program a timer, you do not need to

use all the operation> available for it. You need
use only the operations required to exeeute a
particular function . Nonnally. these are the
operations for starting a timer and for checking
the timer status.

7.1.7

Timer Box In a Rung ( LAD )

You can cOnnect conta~ts in series and in parallel before the Start input and the reset input as
well as after OUtput Q.
The timer box itself may be located after a Tbranch and in a braoch that is dire<otly connected to the left pow~r rail. This branch can
also have contacts before th~ start input aod it
need not b~ the uppermost branch .
You can find further examples of the rcpr~.en
tation and a!Tangement of timers in the Ba,ic
Functions" program (FB 107) o f the LAD_
Book" library that you can download from the
publisher's W~bs;te (see page 8).

In order for a timer to behave", described in

th is Chapter. it is advisable to obsCI'Ve Ihe fol

lowing ordcr when progranuning with individual program elemenl~:
1>

Start the timer

1>

Reset the timer

1>

Check the time value or the duration

1>

Check the timer statu,

Omit unnecessary clements when programming . If you observe Ihe order shown abc,,'e
Illld the timer is started and reset simultaneously", the timer will start but will be imme-

'"

7.1.8

Ti mer Bo,", In a L-ogjc Cir cuit (f BD)

You can program b inary functions and memory

functions before the start input and the resct
input!i'l well as after output Q.
The timer box and the individual e lements for
starting and resetting the timer may also be pro_
grammed after aT-branch.
You can find further examples for the repres,:nlalion and arrangement oftimcrs in the Basic
Fum,tioru;'" program (FB 107) of the FBD_
Book' library thaI you can download fTom the
publi.sMr's Website (sec page 8).

7,2 Pu)""Tuner

7.2

Pulse Timer

SIArling a

puls~

much longcr the limer would have run

had it not been prc-maturely inlcnuptcd.

timor

ReHnlng pulse limer

The diagram in Figure 7,6 descri~5 the charac

teristics of a timer when it tS staned as pulse

timer and when il is ~t. The <kscription
applies tf you o~ .... c the order sltown in Chapter 7. 1.6 "Scquence ofTimcr OpcntlOns" wilen
programming with individual elements (starting ~rorc rescning ~fQre cheekina).

<D

When the signal st~I" al the timer's ,Iart

inpul changes from "0'" 10 .')"' (positiye
edge). the timer is started. It runs for Ihc
prolilrammed dunl1ion loll long as the si gnal state althe stan input is "1 ~. Output Q
supplies signal "at" 'T' as long as lhe
IImcr runs.
With the stan VlIlue as Ihe staning poinl.
thc time value is counled down loward zero as per the lime base.

The resening of a pu4<c time hM. 'l.alie effect.

and takes priority over the Slanina of a timer
(Figu .... 7.6).

Sigu.al.nate ~I~ al the reset input ohn ac\h'c timer resets that timer. Oulput Q is
then "0". The rime v.lue and the time
base arC alw set 10 zero. If the ,igna] stalc
81 Ihe ""el input g~s from '" ]" to ~O"
while the signal stille al !he sel input is
sllli "I ". the limer remains unaffected.

Signal Slale "I" at Ihe reset inPUI of an in.eli\'e timer has no cffect.

(J)

If ~ signal state at the ~pn input g0e5

from "0" to " J"' (posilive edge) while the
rcsel5iillal is slill presenl. the limer staru
bUI is immediately "<'set (.hown by a line
in the diagram). If the timer slatu. ched
was programmed after the reset. the brie f
Starti!lg of the timer doos not affect !he
cbeck.

If the signal.tate at the timer's start input

changes 10 '"0" before lhe lime hali
elapsed, !he timer 510)"15. Output Q tben
iii"'" to "'0-'. lbc time v.lue shows how

<D

,1

SIgnal state at

<l>

~ '-,

\he SUlrt InplJl

Slgne l .tate at
I ha Ruel inp ul

,I ,

I~d<n!>:>n

I
n

I
I

f lau .. '.6 &h:tvion.l Cb.ratlmllic. ",hell Slanillj and ROK1Iln8 _ Put.., Tun ...

7 Timen

7.3

"hh Ihe prognunm<:d lime \lIluc (the tim_

er IS ""retriggcred"). It can be ~slaned any
number nfl imes witbmIl finol elupsing.

Exte nd ed Pulse Timer

Sf.rlhl&.n

~:<I ~nd~d "nl.~

l imn

The diagram in Figure 7.7 ~nbes the belLa,'ioml charnc"tC";~licl "f Ihe IUn<:T .ncr il i.
>Iartcd nnd wh en il i. re<;et. The do<;cripliun
applies if you obs<';C'o'e Ihe urder ~hown in CharI"'" 7 ,1.6 ""Sequence ofllmer ~rions" when
pr~nuning " 'ith individual clements (tllIn_
ing befon: rescuing befon; checking).

Reutt!.n .: Mn

00 SIgnal stale "1" II the timcr'~ re.;et input

"hile the timer is n.nming resets the lim<:T.
A chc-ck for .illnlt .tate "1" (Iimer stal\ll')
retUrns a cllc-ck result of "Q" for a n:~et
timf;!". Th~ lime \"l'I!ue and Ihe time base
lite also reset LO 7em.

the si,,'flill "ale ~ I Ihe timers Slurl

input goc~ from ""0" 10 ' "\"' (posilin
edge). the timer i~ slarted. It runs for thc
I'fUKfl'mmeu d1l11ltion. c, en " hen the si&Dlil , tale at ll1e sIan input chan!,es back 10
"0". A che<::k fur , ign.,\ StlW,' ""I"" (IUncr
Slalus) rew.ns a .hc.:: k result of .. ,"" os
long as Ille lime-r i, runninG'

A "I" at the n:;Ct inpm of an

a.

SigrwIltate
1tI.. Start Input

Signal ,18 1<' 81

the A.aHllnp \ll

""" """'""
(iI"\temsl)

T imer status
(check 10< "1 -)

" -1 - -

-"

,0
I
I

I I
1 PtogrIJIr)ItMd dunIJon

no

DO
/
I

"

r- r---.

lim_

If the signal ~lllle "t the start input ~oc.'$

from -0-- w "1" (po:o!iti"e cd"...,) while Ihe
rest! ~igna! i. presenl , th. limer is started
bUI is inunedial~ ly rcset (indical~d by H
Hne in the dia gram). If Ihe limer s"'luS
cbeek is programmed after Ihe "'>cI. the
brief staninJI of the lim .... ~ nol aff~'CI
the timc"T clled:.

If the signal stule a. the stan wpul goes

from "il" 10 ""I" (positive edge) " hill' tb~
Timer is running . hc timer is reSl3r1ed

. ,

; nactiv~

er hll.~ no e ffe<:l.

Wilh Ihe slsn valu. a.< slanmg poinl. the

li me value is c" <,,,led down IUI"am. uro
us JX"T Ihe lime base .

p ub e l imn

Thc resenin g of an extended pulse lin.e-r ha. ~

'tanc dfcci. and take. prinrity o\'~r Ihe srnnin&
ofa limer (fib'UrC 7.7).

0& When

u l~Dd \'d

I
I

.;-'i

0 I, 0 I,
,
IP P I
,
/

I p
, I
10
I

I
I

I~
/

,
I

7.4 On-nday Timer

7.4

lim e value shows the amount of lime still

On-Delay Timer

r~ m" m mg ,

St.rting a n on-delay

tim~r

The diagram in Figure 7 ,g de>cri~s the beh",'i"ral characterist ic, of th~ timer aft~r it is
slarted and Wh~D i\ i~ m;~t, Th~ d~'~Iip\ioD
applie. if Y"u oh<eF>'e the "mer sh own m Chapter 7.1.<5 "Sequence of Timer Operation," wh=
programming with indiv idual elements (starting ~fore rc;eUing be rore "h."king),

CD

When the si,,'11al stalC a\ \h e timer's Slart

input changes from "0" to " I " (posi!in
e<lge), the ti mer is started. It run, for th e
programmed dur"tion, Checks for sign" l
state ' 1" return a ehc"k res ult of "1 .. when
the tim e has duly elapsed and signal ,me
"I " is slill pre,ont at the start input (ondelay) ,
\"'i lh lhe sIan valuu as ,t.rung point, the
lime v,<l ue is counted down {,,"ard, zero
as per the time b ose.

(2)

If \he s ignal state at the Hart in put chang.,

tium " I" 1C> "0"" while th~ timer is running. the timer SlOp" . A check for si gn al
state ' T ' (tirn ~, statu,) always remms "
che~k result o f " I"" in such cases , The

Rescttinl;:: aD

OD -dcJu~'

timer

The ,"""erring of an on-delay lim~r ha, a ,talic

~ff~ct. and takc. priority ovcr the starting of the
l im~r (FiJlur~ 7.~) ,

Q);6l Signal ,tate " I -. at the resc{ input reset,

th~ timer wh"u,er i{ is running or not . A
check lor signal s!Ole "I" (timer , taru,)
then rctums a check result of "0" , ev~n
whe'n {he limer is n<>l running and si gna l
stale " 1";\ still present at the start input
Tim~ " alue and time base arc als-<> set to
uro
A change in the , ignal statc a\ the reset input from ""I " to ''0'' ",h , lc , igna! ,tate ' "I "
i, still pre'~m at {he start inpu1 !"" no effe<: t on the timer.

If the signal Slme at th~ , tart input goes

from "0" w " I" (positive ~dg~) while Ihe
r~,el signal i, prc&ent, the timer SUtTh, but
i~ immediately re.,el (i ndic at~d hy a line
in tho diogram). Ifth~ timer siarn., che~k
is programmed aIler {he ,"""el, The brief
SIarting of the {imer does not aff~cl the
check.

Sig na l state at
the Start in~t
Sil/nal state at
{he Reset input

-, : ..
...

TImer running
( i n l~r nal )

-. , :J'.,

Timer status
(d1eck fer ' j ' )

P'OIll'!'l mmed d"I'!'ltion

7 Time"

7.5

Retentive On-Delay Timer

Tfth~ sig nal stal~ al tlle <taIl in pul changes

from "0" to "I" (positive edge) while the
limer is running . the timer restarts w ith
Ihe progranuned time value (the timer is
",triggered). It can be restarted any
number of limes witham firsl having to
run d"wn.

Sta rting a retellli\"C on- dela,' rimer

The diagram in Figurc 7.9 des ~ ribcs the hehav.
ioml Characte risrics of the timer after it i,
started and when it is reset. The d~s,:ription
applies if you oh<erv~ th~ order shown in Chap
tcr 7.1 .6 "Sequcn~~ ofTim cr Opera\ions" wh e t!
prognunJlling with individua l dements (Statt.
ing before re scning before ch"'-'king).

Of)

Re,ctting a rctcntiYc on .delay timol'

The reselling of a rctemive on-d elay timer ha. a
static e ffec t, and lakes priority over the starting
of the timer (Figure 7.9).

Wh~n

the s ignal state at thc timers Slart

input goes from "0" to "1" (po, iti,~
edge), \he timer i, started. It rul)S for the
programmed dmmion, C\"~"ll when thc ,ig'
nal state at the smn input change. back to
''0'' . When th~ time ha< elapsed. a check
fo r si gn al state '" I" (timer statu,) returns a
check rcsult of ,. J" ,..,gardJe" of the sig nal stale a l Ih~ Start inp"l. A check resull
of "'0" is not rernmed until the limer has
been res~1, regardless of the signal :;Iate at
the <Ian input. With the staIl value as
slartin" point. the lim e value i ~ counted
down towards zero as per th~ time ha<~.

0
Signal stale al
Ih" Start inpul

i 'l
I
I

S ignal stat.. ,,,

the Reset input
T imer running
(intemal)
Ttmer status
(check/or " t ")

"
rl--j
H
o I
I
I,
,
,
ID
I
I

I
0

00 Signa l ,tat~

"1" al thc re,et input Tesets

th e timer, regard less of the s ignal <tate at
the ,Ian inpm. A eheek for signa l stal e
"j . (timer slams) then return.' a che<:k result of "0". The time value and the lime
bas~ arc al,o ",t to zero.

If the , i~'Ilal state at the start input goes

fr(>m "0" to "1 " (pos itive edge) while the
I\."sd signal is present, the limer ,tam;, bul
is immediately r,,,ot (indicated by a line
in the diagram). Tr the tim~r statu< check
is programmed aftcr the reset. the brief
starting of the timer ha, no effe<:1 on the
check.

n
D

iI
I

In" "II

p'l

I 0

I
I

I
I

I I
0

D 0,
,

I I

PM;Jt8mmftd dum /ion

Figure 7. 9 Bohavioral Characteri<tks "hen Startiog and R ~. ottinl1 an R<tenrin On-I).lay Ti mer

7.6 OfICDclay Timor

7.6

Off-Delay Timer

staned onl y when there is a ocgalivc ,,,Ige

at the stan input

Starlin): an off_delay d mer

Resetting a n off-del ay Ilme r

The diagram in Figure 7.10 d~scribes the

behavioral characteristics o f the timer after it is
started and when it is reset . The description
appli~s i r you observe the order shown in Chapter 7.1.6 "Sequence of Timer Operati"n," when
prognlIIlIIling wilh individual element. (,tart_
ing before reselling before checking) .

The resetting of an off-delay timer has a static

effect. and takes priority over the starting ufthe
timer (Figure 7.10),

G:xl.J The

timer starts when the ,ignal state at

the timer's start input changes from " 1" to
"0" (negalive edge) . It mm for the programmed dumtion. Checks for signal
state "1" (timer Statu.) return a check result o f " 1" w hen Ihe signal stale at Ihe
stan input is " I .. or whet! the limer is running (off-delay).

(@S ignalstate ' l at thestart iopu(andalthe

reSCI input reSets the timer's binary o utput
(a check for signal state . \ .. (timer status)
then returns a check result of "O). If the
si gna l Slatc at the reset input now ~hange '
back to "0", the timer's output once agaio
goesto "l ,

(D

Wit MIhe start val ue as staning point. the

time value is counted down towards zero
as per Ihe time base,

IflMe signal statc at IMe start input change,

from "0" to "I " (po,itive edge) "'hile the
timer is running, Ihe timer ;s reSet. It is re-

Signal state at
the Start inpUt

r'I

Sig na l state al
the Resel input

Time r ru nni"l)
(intoma lj
Time r status
(check 10<

-" j

I
I

,.

h r

If the signal state at the slart input goc.

from" I " to "0" (negative ~ dge) while the
resel signal is pre sent. the timer starts, hut
is immediately reset (indicaled by a line
in the diagram). The check for signal state
" 1" (timer status) then rctums a cb~'Ck reo
sult of"O" ,

I I

In

I
I I

r'l

nl

P~m_d

Signal state "]"' at Ihe timer's reset input

whi le th~ timer is running resets Ihe timer.
The check remit of 8 check for signal
'tale" j" (timer status) is then 'ir'. Time
value and time hase are also .,etto zero ,

I D I

n
I

dUr&tlOn

Figu ", 7.10 Behavioral Charaoteri" ie. when Slattin g and Reninl!" .n Off Delay T,mer

7 Timers

7.7

lEe Timers

Th~ IEC timcT'< a,.., integrated in the CPU's

op;.;rating system as sy,tem function bloch
(SFB~),

The full"wmg timeN are avai lable on ,ome

CPUs :

r- SFB J TP
Pulse timer
~

SFR 4 TON
On_deby timer

SFB 5 TOT'
OfT-delay timer

7. 7.2

You wilt fin d examples tor the calt in funclion

block I'B 107 ofthe "B a,i~ runctions" p rogram
in the " LAO Book" ami "FBD Book"librarie,
that you can download from tb~ publi ,her's
Website (,c~ p ~ge 8)

P ulse Timer SFB 3 TP

IEC ti me, SFB:3 TP has theparametNs list ed in

Table 7. 1,
When the RLO at the timers stan in pUl goes
fwm " 0" to" I", the timer is starred, It 111Il> for
the programmed duration. r~gardless of any
sub"'quent changes in the RLO at the stan
io ptl1. The signal Slate at OUlpUt Q i, " 1. ~s luni
as the timer is Tunning
Tloble 7. 1 l'aram<ters for the TEe TlIllers

~.~",;~ D ooclaratioo

Ue"" ripliG1l

~''',~'.

PT
RP

ET

INPUT
INPUT

TL"ID

OUTPL'T
OUTPl'T

TlME

On-Oolay Timer SFB" TON

~harac t~Tis

T he,e SFBs arc c"llcd with an in,rance data

block or uS<."d as I<><: al in813nce~ in a fun <:tion
block. Yo u will fit>d the imerfacc dcscripli on
for offline programming in the standard library
with the name Siandard Library un der the program Svslem Funclion Blocks ,

TN

To rein itialize the timer, , imply start it with PT

'" TOO.,
Tim e'r SHt 3 Tl' is active in START and RUN
mode . It i. reset (initialize<J) when a cold "tan
i. executed.

Figure 7 ,11 sbows the b<:havioral

tic, ,,[these timers

7.7. 1

Outp ut .10'1 supplies the durati on o f time fur outp ut Q. "fhi, duration begins at TOOs and en d, at
th~ set durati on PT, When PT has dap~cd, ET
remain' , et to the elapsed tim e until input IN
goes back to " .T. If input TN goes to "0" before
PT elapses, output ET goes to T#O. the instant
PT d ap'cs .

S,~rt

input

Pulse knl(th or
delay durat100
Timer >taWS
Elop=:i timo

Th e IEC timer SFB 4 TON has

listed in Table 7. 1,

th ~

paramNe!'s

Th~ tim ~r stan< when the RLO at its , tan input

changes from "0" to "I ". Tt runs for th e programmed durJlion, Output Q ;;how. s ignnl swte
" I" wh en the time has elapsed an d a. long as
the si gn~) state at th~ ,t<m input remains at " I ".
Iflhe RLO at th e stan input changes from "I"
to "0" before th~ time has Tun out, the limN i"
n;set. Th e next positive edge '""<tan, the timer.

Output ET ,uppli'" the duration "ftime for the

timer. This duration b eg in' at T#Os atld ends at
,c1 duration PT, When PT h as elapsed, ET
remains ,cl Io the e lapsed time until inp ut IN
c hwges b3Ck to ''0''. If input IN go,,, ID "0"
before PT e lapse8, output ET immediatdy goes
1D T,.o(ts,
To
~

r"inil i ali~c th~

limer, simply start it with PT

TItD"

SfB 4 TON is adiv~ in START and R UN

mode. II is T~set on a cold sinn.

7.7.3

Off_Delay Timer S,r B 5 TOI'

Th~

TEe timer SF'B 5 TOF hu, the parame ters

listed in Tabl~ 7 1
Th~

signal Slate at output Q is " )" when the

KLO a( the limds stan input change, from "0"
to " I" . The tim~T is staned wh~nthe RLO at the
,Ian input ch~ng~s back 1D "0' , Output Q
retains . igItal ,tate "1" as long as the limer ru n .
Output Q is reset w hen t;, e (ime h ao clap,ed. If
\he RLO ,01 the stan inp ut goes back to " I"

7.7 lEe Timers

.__ t ___

Signa l slat.. at
the Stan inp ut IN
Tim.., status a
ol SFB3TP
Tim er statu. a
of SFB 4 TON

, hr

,
I

tl

,
,

f:

rI

Tim er statu. Q
of SFB 5 TOF

'-

- ,-

,-

t Prrx;ramm<>d duration
Fi ~ur<

,. , I

7.11 n.haiQra! Ch"",,teru.t iol of !he TEe Tir.lcr.

before the time ha.' elapsed, Ihe time. i. resc"

and output Q remain, at <>\".

before PT has clap >cd, output ET

S""s to T#Ck .

Output ET supplies the duration "ftime for (he

limer. This duration begins at T#O. and ends a!
set dur"tioD "PT. WhCt1 PT has elapsed. ET
remain , Sel tn (he elapsed tim " until input IN
c han&~s b ack to "1". If in put IN goes tn '" I"

Tn rein itial i z~ the limer. sim ply art the timer

with PT = T#O,.

;m medi a t~ly

Sfl:l 5 TOF i8 active in SD\RT and RL"N mode.

II i, re,~t on a cold -"art.

'"

8 Counters

Counters

Countcrs allow you to use th~ CPU to perform

counting ta.,h. The counters Can coull! bDlh up
and down. The counting range extends over
three decades (OOO to 999). The counters a,...
located in the CPU', system memory: the number of counters is CPU-specific.

CBU Tl '<C

S_CUD

=,
=,

I>

Set counter. specifying the count value

'>

Count up

FBD representation

ev
,
=
"Kar.lC

Oat>. Type Description

OU

'OOC
BOOC
'OOC

OD

,y

WORD

Booc

I>

Reset cOlUlter

I>

Check (binary) counter status

RP

I>

Check (digital) coum in binary

FIgure 8.1 COUllter III

I>

Check (d ig ital) coum in binary-coded

decimal

of a counler as box

A coumerbox contains the coherent representa tion of all counting operations in the form of
function inputs and function outputs (Figure
8 .1 ). Over the box is the absolute Or symbolic
address or lhe coul\ter. In the box, as header. is
the counter type (S_CUD stands for "up_down
counter"). An assignment is mandatory for the
first input (CU in the example) is mandatory:

'"

WORD

BOOc

WORD

=
-

Counter 0 . "
SCUD
00

ey
ey 'CD

Repres~nlat[on

Oy
CV_BCD

'"
,
=

> Count down

CO

00

,y

Programming II Counter

You can perfonD the followin g operations on a

coumer:

C ounter op ... and

LAD ",presentation

You Can program a counter complct~ as box or

using individual program clemel\ts. You Can scI
the coum to a specific initial valu e or reset it.
and you can coum up and down. The counter is
scanned by checking the COunter Status (zero or
non-zcro count value) or the cUITem count.
which you can retrieve in either binary or
hinary_coded decimal.

8.1

box

(inltte eutnple: updown countc:r)

Cy
CV_ BCD
Q

=
-

Up COlmt input

Down Count input

Set inP<i'
Pre"t v"luc
Reset input
Current nlue in bin"')'
Cum""t Ya[ue in BCD
Cou:,t.". statuS
Bo.~

R<p.resentallOn

assignments for aU other inputS and outpUtS are

oplioIlllI.
Counter boxes are available in thl"C(' versions:
up-dowI\ COuDler (S_ CUD). up counter only
(S_ CU). and do .... n wunte r only (S_CD). The
d iffC'nces in functionality are e~plained
below
For incremental programming, you can find the
counters in the Program Element Catalog (with
VIEw ...... OVERVU'WS [Crr[ _ K ] or I"ISERT ......
PROGRA.\t ELEME~' rS) under Counters.

8.1

Prugr~mming aCmlll!er

C"unt "J> funetlon

CoUnteroperami

(wunt ur ooil)

---{W)--l

Coon! 00"" fun< tion

(COunL down coil)

Counta< o...,...,.,,:L

Sct = lcr with ,-Ill,," uf cum;nt oount

(""t counle>" "eM) with c.-.un,)

Coo,,"'r ope"',,!,!

R<t Cco.Ultcr
(rcM:t coil)

Courrter operand

(1)<4

---{co)--l
---{~)--I
Count VlI1u.

---{R)--j

t""""" ".ru,

COLmta, """",00

Counter ope"",d

II

(NO """""'t, NC contact)

R""d coun L.. bi nary valu<

MOVE

( MOVE box)

CountS< op""md
Figur~

'"
"

'"0
0"'

Digital operand'

8.2 Individua l Ilictn""" "fa C " untor (LAD)

R~pn:"entall'... of a couot.'r u'in~ indhidual

elemenl< (LAD)

You ean also program a counter using indi vidual elemem, (figure 8.2).
Setting and counting mc then done via coik
The set eo un tc-r ooi I contains the counting operation (S C - Set Counter); below th~ coil. in
WORD formal. is the <.:ount va lue to be u,.d to
sd th~ emmler.
In the coil. for count ing. CU stands for count
up and CD stand s for count down . U<e the rCSI't
coil to reset a counter a nd an NO o rNC ooman
to ch~ck the status of" counter.
Finally. you Can tTan.f,T tlte current count, in
binary. with the MOVE box
Counter bus i.o. M run~ (LAD)
You can arrange contact> in ,.,ries and in parallel ~fore the counter inplll', the stan input and
th e reset input as well as a[kr OL/tp ut Q.
The counter box maybe 1,laced af\~r a T_branrh
ur in a branch that is directly conn~cted to the
I~f\ J>Ower rail. This branch may also havc con-

tacts before the inputs and need not he the

uppcrmo,t branch.
You can find flU1h~r ..,.amples of the repTcscntat;on and =ngcmcnt of ~ountcrs in the
"'Rasic Function," program (FB lOS) of the
"'LAD_ Book" library that you can downluad
from the publi'her's Website (sec page 8).
Represen tation of a counter usill~ illdi~idulll
~J~m~"L' (l'II U)

You can also program a counter u sing individual elements (Figure ~.J).
Setting and ~"unti.o.g are then done Vi3 simple
lxl_<~S. The set COu"t~T box contains the countin s operation (SC = Set Counter); at inpLlt PV i.
tlte count valu~, in WORD format, is the count
valuc to be w;ed to gct tlt c countcr.
In the boxes for countins . CU stand. fur coun t
up and CO stands for count down. Use the reset
bo.~ 10 ,""sct 3 counler and a direct or negatcd
bin ary function input to check tbe status of a
counter.

Finally. you can tr..", k r the current count, in

binary, with the MOVE box .

'"'

S Counle"

,
Counter ope<a nd
--1 CO ,
Counter opo;a n<!

Count up r"",tion
(cuun' up coil)

--1

Count d,,",'n ruuc, i""

(couo' cIowo coi l)
S ct 0"000'0< with valuo of current count
(set cuunter coil w ith count)

C"

Coomer op9ran<i
c oum value

Re",' counter
("""" coil)

~ PV SC

Coullt..,,- operand

--1

Chee ~ counte, .tatu'

(d ir"'t or nC"tc-..J binary inpu')

CoI.l nte, "pe ran<!

Count".. o.p<j,and

Read oount .. binary v.lue

(M O VE box)

COtlfl!", operam:!

MOVE
0 ",

'"
'"

==:d
r-

f-

Oigital operand

'"0

Fi\:u .... 8 .3 Individua l F I. men" "f a Counter (FIID)

Connt{"r box in

logic ci,-.,u it (V8D)

You can arrange binary fun~tion' and memory

fun ctioll' ~ fore 1he counter inpU(s, 1he start
in put and the reset inp ul as "el l as after oolput
Q.
Thc counter box and the individual e lements for
counti ng, settin g a countcr and resetting a
counter may also bc pla~ed afler aT-branch.
You can fmd rut1her examples of the represen tation and arrangement oI counters in the
"Ba"i ~ Function s" program (FB 108) of the
'"FR D_ Book'" library that you can download
fom' the pub lisher" Web , ile ('co pago 8).

{he coon1~r to it, initial count. down conn lin g,

and checking lh~ "oumer stalU,.
Tn order that a counter's behavioral characteristics ~ as descrihcd in th is chapler, it is adv isab le to ob,erve the fnllowing ordcr when pm gramming with individual program dements:
I>

Count (up or dnwl1 in any ordcr)

I>

S~\

[>

Re>er conntcr

!>

Check count

I>

Check countcr ,tatu,

cOunter

When p rogramming a cou nter. you do not need

to use all I ~~ operation_ available for that
COlm!cr, The operations requ ired to carry oUi
the desi red functi" ", ore enough,

Omit any ind ividua l e lements that are not

required , if countiug , setting. and resett ing of
thc emmtor take place "simultaneously" when
the op<:ralion, arc progranun ed in tbe urdC'"
shown, tbe Count will flfSt be changed accordingly before being reset by the re set operation
wbicb follows. Tbe ,ubsequ~nt cheCk will
therefor~ ,h"w a count of zero and counter statuS "0".

For cxampk , to program a dmvn COumer, you

need only program_ the operations for setting

If counting and ,etting takc place "si mu ltaneou,ly" when the operati ons are pmgranun ed

Sequence of co unt in g

'"

op ~ra tlon s

M.2 Selling and Resetting Counters

in the order shown, the count will fi t sl be

c~anged accordingly before being set to the
programmed count value. which it will reta in
for the remainder of the cycle.

contact will return a check resu lt of "" 1". Reset_

ting a counter sets its count to "zero", The
counter box's R input ne~ not be connected.

The order of the operations for up and down

count ing is not sign ificant.

R e~ettin g

8.2

Setting and R ese tt in g C ounters

Settin g countH.
A counter is sct when the RLO changcs from
to '"1" bcfore set input S or before the .et
coi l or set box, A positive edgc is a lways
required to sci a counter,

cou n t ers (FB D)

A cOunter is reset when a ""I" is present atlhe

reSet input. Then a direci scan of the counter
status will return "0" and a negated scan will
return ""I"' , Reselting a counter sets its count 10
"ze ro"' . The counter box's R input need not be
connected.

""{l"

" Set counter"" means that the counler is SCI to a

stnning value. The va lue may have a range of
from 0 to 999 .
S p eci fyIn g t h e conn t I' alue
When a counter is set" it aSSUmes the value at
input PV or the value be low the set coil or sCI
box as count value. You may specify the couni
value as constant, word operand. or variable of
type WORD.

8.3

Coun ting

The counting freque ncy of a eount~.,. ;s determined by the execution time of your progmm!
To be able 10 count . the CPU must detect a
change in the State oflhe input puhe, that is, an
input pulse (or a space) must be present for at
least one program cycle. Thus, the loug~'" the
program execution time. the lower the counti ng
frequency.

Speci!5'j"g the COllm \'a/ll" os COnStom

U p c ou nti ng

C#l00
W#16#0 100

A counter is counted up whcn the RLO changes

Count value 100

Count value 100

The count value comprises three decades in the

range 000 to 999. Only positive BCD values are
pcnll issibl~; the counter cannot proce ss negative values. You can use C# or Wll 1611 to identi fy a constant (in conjunction with decimal
digits only).

Speci!5'j"g the coum value as operand or ,""ri_

able
MW 56

Word operand containing the

Count value
""Count value!"' Variable of type WORD

from "O"to "1"lJ.efore the up count input CU or

at the up count coil or box. A POSilive edge is
always required for up counting.
In up counting, each positive edgc incremeuts
the count by one unit until it reaches Ihe upper
range limit of 999. Each additional positive
edge for up counting then has nO furth ~.,. eITect.
There is no carry.
D own co u nting

Resetti ng counte rs (L A D )

A counter is counted down wilen t~c RLO

changes from ""0'" to "1" before down count
input CD Or at the down count coil or box. A
positive edge IS a lways required for down
counting.

A counter is resel when poWeT flow. in Ihe reset

input or in the reset coi l (wben RLO ""I'" is
present) , When this is tbe case. checking the
counter with an NO contact will resuh in a
check result of "0". and checking with an NC

In down counting. each pos itive edge decrements the cOunt by one unit until it reaches the
lower range limit of O. Each subsequent posit;ve edge for down counting then has no further
effect. There are no negative counts,

'"'

8 Counters

Di(f<'rl'nl cnunler boxes

The Editor
boxe.:

pr\>"idc~

three dIfferent couDler

Up/down counter

made ., a;lable by this operation i~ lh e one

which is current at the time the cbeck iJ made .
The "aloe ~ 5Iored in the spec;fled OjX:TlInd
(transfer as " ith a MOVE box). You nocd nO!
.,,i!ch tb"", nutputs at lhe counter box.

Up counler

ll<:>WD countcr
These coumer be:>:e. difTeT only in Ihc Iype and
numlx,. OfCOIlnler inputs. Whereas S_CUD ha~
inputs fOT both eounl;ng directiOtU, S eu has
on'y the up COllnt mput and S_CD only the
down count input.
You mIL'! .. I w~y~ connect the 1i!'11 U:P\lI of ..
COllnter be:>:. If you do nol collllOC, the second
;lIPLlt (S CD) o n S cun, Ihi , 00:>: wi ll lah on
the same chBracleri~lics as S_CU.

DI1'eCI eh<'<"king of the

"""m

The COUIlt i. a vailnble In binary, Bnd can be

fetched from the counter in this furm.. The value
correspond.. In K pasn; ... number in DJT format Dire<."1 ched:i1l ofa counl can also be progm:nmed with. MOVE box.

Cod<,d d ,,,d-;n8 <>{llle counl

You can also fctcb the binary count from the

in "coded" form. The binary-coded
deeunal (BCD) valuc i~ slTUcNrffi in the ~
";,y as for srecifying Ihe count (sec abo\'e).
C01.J"IleT

8.4

Checking a Counter

Chccklnj;\ the

count~r

,talUs ( I.AD)

11,c counter "Tatus i. al OUlpul Q ofthc "ollnler

box. Yon can also check !he counter statu." ith
an NO colllaeT (COfTCS.pooding :0 OUtput Q) or
an N'C COIlUOel.
Qu tput Q iJ "1" (power n ows from the OIlTJlut)
when the ~um;nl count is i'"C"lcr thnn :zero,
Output Q i ,~ "0" if Ihc C"ITent count i~ equnlto
zero. O\IlpuI Q does nol need 10 be connected at
the CO\lnto;-r box.

C b N"kinll: the counler

~IMtU1

8,5

I EC COUill t rs

The IEC count= Iffe integrated in the CPU

operat"'& ~y'1em a~ system func tion bloc~
(SI'85). The folluwing CO\Jnl~n; are ava ilable in
Ihe appropriate Cl'Us;
~

SFROCTU
UpcounlCT

:>

SFB I CTD
Do"'n Cnunter

(FUrl)

The counter ~I~ I U~ is at output Q uf lhe cour.I~T

00:>:. You c~n al ~o check the coun ter "ants
directly (correspond . to OUlpul Q ) wilh a birutry
function input, OT;n negated form.
Output Q is "1- wben tb~ current count ;s
great .... than 7.ero. Output Q is "()" "h~n tbe cur
n:nl count i~ equal In ~~ro. OutPUt Q ne.:<inol
be cnnncc\C<I at ,he counter h<J~.

.,.. SFB 2 CruD

l:pldown cuunter
Vou eau call these SFB, with an in' tanee dMta
block OJ" use thern lOS local inst.;wccs in a function block.
You will find the tm~"'face de""ript1On fOT
offi lnc pro;:rarnminll on stan dard library Slandard Lihrary under Ihe .sYstem F,are/ion 810.:1:.$

program.
Ch ..ddnll'h~ fUUDI valu r (L,\J) aDd FRD)

OU' PUI8 cV .. nd CV_BCD malo: Ihe counler's

current count availablc in bmary (CV) or in
binary-cO<lw <iedrnnl (BCD). The count va lue

Yuu will f",d samp le calls in function block FB

108 of tbe "Basi~ fUDClions" program in the
"LA D_ Book" and "FBD_Book" libmie~ thaI
.'00 can downlOftd from the publishc-r's Weh.ile
(see page 8).

8,5 IEC Counters

8.5.1

Up Coumer SFB 0 CTU

lEe counter SFB 0 CTU has the parameters

listed iJ, Table S, I , When the sisnal state at up
count input CU changes from "0" 10 .. \" (positive edge), the current count is incr<:mented by
I and shown at output Cv. On the I1rst call
(with signal state " 0" at reset input R ). the ~ounl
corresponds to the default value at input pv.
Whcn tbe count reaches the upper limit of
32767. it is no longer incremented. and C U has
no cffe~1.
The count value is resel lO ~ero when Ihe signal
slate at r<:set input R is "' I", As long as input R
i< "I", a positive edge at CU has no effect, O utpul Q i. "1 ,. when the value at CV is greater
than or equal to the value at pv.
SFB 0 CTU executes in START and RUN
mode . It is n;set on a cold ,tan,

8.!;'2

Down Counter S}"B I CTD

ICC counter SFB I CTD has the parameters

listed in Table 8,1. When the signal state at
down coun t input CD goes from "0" to "1"
(positive edge). the C"rrem eo ...n! is decrementcd by I and shown at output Cv. On the
firs t call (wi th s ignal state " 0" at load input
LOAD), the CoUnt corresponds to the default
"aluc at input pv. When the curren! conn!
reaches the lower limit of -32768. it i. no
lo nger de~remented and CD has no effect.

The conn! is set to default value PV when load

input LOAD is " I", As long as input LOAD i~
" I " . " positi ve edge at inpnt CD has no effect.
Outpnt Q is "1" when the valne at CV is less
than or equal t<1 zero.

SFfI I

crn

exccutcs in START and RUN

mode . It is reset on a cold s tart.

11.5,3

Up/do wn C<1untcr Sn3 2 CTUD

lEe counter SFB 2 CT UD h as the paramcters

listed in Table 8. 1.
When the s ignal s tate at up count input CU
changes from "0" to " 1" (positive edge), the
count is incremented by I and s hown at output
CV, If the signa l state at down count input CD
changes from "0" to "I"' (positive edge), the
count is decremented by I and shown at output
Cv. Ifboth inputs show a positive edge, the current count remains unchang~d,

If the emn:nt count r~aches th~ upper limit of

32767. it is no lon ger incremented when there
i, a positive edge at count up input Co. CU thcn
has nO further effect. If the currcnt count
rcach~s the lowcr limit of 3276R. it is nO
l ong~r decremented when there is a positive
edge at down connt input CD. CD thcn has no
e ffe~t.

The count is sct to default val"e PV when load

input LOAD is "I'", As long as load input
LOAD is " In, positive signal cdges at the twO
count inputs have no effect

Table 8.1 P3nmetor< for the lEe Counter<

,;

"

g Counters

The count i, reset to uro when re.,et input R is

"1". A~ long as input R is T. positive si!>Dal
edges at the two cOunt inp uts and signal ~tate
"I" at load input LOAD have no effect.
Output Q U is "1 " when the value at CV is
greater than or ~"<Iual to the "alue at PV.
Omput QD is "1" when the value at CV is les,
than or equal to zero.
SFD 2 CTUD cx~"<:uteS in START and RUN
mode. tt;S TCse! on a cold stan .

8.6

Parts Coun ter Exam plt'

The examples illustrates the usc of timeN and

counters. It is program med w ith inputs. ompms
and memory bits so that it can be programmed
at any point in any b lock . At this poi~t. a function witho"l block parameters is used: the timer.; and counters arc represented by complete
boxes. You will fwd the same example progmmmcd as a function block with block param_
eters aod with individual clements in Chapter
19 "mock Parameters",

Function des crtpt lon

Pans are transported on a conveyor bell. A light
barrier detects and counts thc pat1s . After a set
number. the counter sends the Finished 'ignal.
The cOunter i. equipped with a monitoring eircu;t. If the s ignal StalC oflhe light barrier does
not change w ithin a spec ;fied amount of time,
the monitor sends a signal.
The Set input pass~s the starting "a lue (the
number 10 be counted) to the counter. A posi_
th'e edge at the li ght barri er decrements the
counter by one unit. When a value of zero is
reached, lhe countCI>< sends the Finished signal.
Prerequis ite is that Ihe parts be arranged singly
(at intervals) on the belt
The Set ioput also SetS the Active signaL T he
controHer manito" a signal state change at the
light barrier in the active .tme only. Wh en
COUll1ing is finished and thc last connted item
has exited the light barrier. Ac!il'e is reset.
In the active state. a positi,c edgc at the light
barrieT starts the timer with the tim e value
Dur(1tion 1 ('"Dura I") as retenti,'e pulse timer. If
the timer', start input is processed with "0" in
the ne;<t cycle, it .till cont inues to run , A new
po,iti,. edge "",triggers" the timer. th,t is.

T_ht.8.2 S)'mbol Table for the I'.n, Coon,..,. Examp le

8.6
rCSlan$ il. Th~ nexl positive edge to res.an th~
timer i~ generated when the light balTier signals
a !legnt iv~ edge . The timer is Ihen staned with
the time va lue DI/ralion] ("Dura2'). I f the hght
banier is now eo'ere<! for a period of .ime
eJCedi na Durul or free for a period of rime
e xceeding Dura]. thc limer TUns down and signal F,wff. The lim time II j, activaled. 'he
limer il ~tarted wilh .he lime value D"ral.
S llI n. ", sym bols

The Sel signal aClivales Ihe CountU and . he

monitor. Th e light barrier comrol.~ the counter,
Ihe Uc'I\~ .I a.e, ""lcclion of the time value . and
Ihe Slan ing (rctriggering) o f the mo",,,,ring
lime vi .. posilive and n~galive edgC!!.
Evalull!ion of ,iIc posi.iv" and neaalive edge of
the h g}1! barrier is required often. and temporary local data arc suitable as scnnehpad
memory. Temporary local dalB are block -local
variables: Ih ey arc declared in the blocks (not in
Ihe symbol mble) . In the example. the pulse
memorybils used for edge evaluation are stored
in temporary local data. (The edge memory bits
requ ire their si gnal sta'e" in the nexI cycle as
well. a nd mustlbe..,fore nol be tempo"'ry local
data.)

P."" CouJller fua.mpl~

We wanl symbolic addressing. Ihat is. the operands are assigned namc~ which arc then used
for progranuning. Betore ent~.,.;"g Ihe program,
we create It symbol table (Tpb le 8.2) containin ll
the inputs, outputs, mentory bi,s, timers,
COUnters. and bloch.
!' roarl m
The prolP1'm is located in a function lhal you
caU to the CPU in 0'1l3niza.ion bl""k OB I
(tclec ted fro m the Progmm Illcmento enalog
underFe Blocks").
During programminll, the a lobal ~ymbols can
KI..o be u,ed with<>ut quotation ma"" provided
Ibey do not contain any special ChaJ1lClcrs . If a
symbol contains a special c haracler (an Umiaul
(lr a ~pace. for instance), il mu.~1 be placed in
qU(lIHli<>n marks. In Ihe C(lmpiled block, the
Edilor sho~ a ll g lobal symoo ls wilh quotalion
mllrks
Fillurc ~ . 4 lind Figure 8.S show~ the program
for the pans counter (Function Fe 12). You can
find this program in the Conveyor Example
pr<!ltf"8.m of .he "LAD_8ook and "FBD_
Book libraries , hat you can download from li>c
publishcr"s Wcbsile (sec page 8).

'"

x Counters

fR'

Network 1 Counter cont,ol

"'""'
S_ CD

lbarr1

Finished

CO

Quanllty -

""'"-'
N4twork2

'" "
EM_ l B_ N

"

( )---j

NOTI

~,

c' tCV_BC D

I-

,
~

""
~

Netwol1< 3 Select duration

MOVE

lbarrl
Du," 1
lba,,1
Dura 2

N_o,k4

'"'" '"0
'"
'"
00;

)---j
III Durali<ln

MOVE

'"0
00;

~
~

'M"

#t BOOl

""

III

D u,~ tlon

I"

c'

#I Duration

IR
Fi\:ur. 8.4

Pro~nmi""

fuample for a PlUb Coun{o. {l..AD)

8.6 Pam Counter Example

Fe 12

e" un '~r

t on",,1

Network 1 Counter control

Count

Lbarrt 5..,t -

CD

cv-

QuantltY:-=t';V~...:O:V
::,'o'-9J-=_-<i':'":"M='j
Ackr>owl
R
Q
_
Network 2 Activate monitoring

Dural

Lbarrl -<j"
Dura2
Network 4

,.

-b_-''''J------~L_J-'[~~J

Monitoring circuit

Active
Figure 8.5 Prognunrning Example for a Pons Counter (FBD)

'"

Dilila] fUDctio""

Digital Functions

The digilal funCliuns procns digital values pre.

dominantly with Ihe data types INT, OINT and
REAL, ~nd thus extend !he functionality oflhe
PLC.
TIle c(l nlpu l50n fu n.... llo ns fonn a binary U"sult
from the comparison of two values. They lake
acrount of the data types u\'T. DINT and

REAL.
Vou l.ISC lhe a rilhmNk fu nctions 10 make cal.
culations in your program. All the basic arith.
melic functions in data types INT. DINT and
REAL aU" avail ab le.

09

Com pariso n F u nctl ons

Comparison for equal to. nOI equal 10,
grealCT than. greale.- Ihan or equal to. less
Ihan. and less Ihan or equal 10

The m athem atica l fu ncd ons extend the calcu-

10

A rithmelic F unCII(lns
Basic arilhmetic functions with data types
INT. DINT and REAL

II

i" blh .... m atlc hl F un ctio n,

Trigonometric funelion,; ;n"o:\"sc lrigon.....
m"'lric functions: squaring. squ~.rool
eXU"8ctioll, cxponentiation. and '\lia.
mh""

12

Con""" ion Fu nc tionl

Conn'\"l;ion from l>o'TID INT to BCD and
,'ice ,.....1"~a: con"ersion from DINT to REAL and vice, et$II with d, fferenl fonDS of
rounding: one's complemenl. negation.
and absolutc ."alue gcnerution

IJ

Shift Fu nc tio ns
Shifting 10 left and right, by word and
doubkword, shifting with correct sign:
roulling 10 left and right

14

Word L ogic
A}.'D. OR. exdU$i\'e OR; word and d oub1eword combinations

lati cm possibilities beyond the basic ari thmetic

to include. for example, trigonOmet.
ric functions.
funclion~

Before and after p<'rfonnina; calculations. you

adaptlhe digital values to the desired data typo:
using the con,tnlo n fun .... tions .
T ht . hlft fun .... Uo u. allow juslificaLion of lhe
contcnlS ora variable by shifting to the right or
left.
Wi!h " 'o rd l\lik. you mask digital '"llues by
targetina; individual bils and ..... lting them 10 "I"
or "0".
The digital logic opc:ralions work mainly Wilh
values slored in data blocks. Thesc can be glo.
bal data blocks Or inslanee data block s if slat;c
local datll are used. Chapter 18.2. "Block Func.
lions for Data Blocks". shows how to handle
data blocn and gives the methods of address.
ing dIIt. operands.

192

9 Comparison Fuoction.

Comparison Functions

The comparison fum:lIOIlll cOtnplll'e t"o digital

variables of data type INT. DINT or REAL for
equ;ol to. not ~quallO. gr~at~r than gr~at"r than
or equ~l t(l , I~," thllIl, Or less than or ~qual to.
Th~ comparison rC"Uil is then a"ailabl e os
binary va lu~ (Table ~.1).

9.1

Proce5sing 11 C lilUplIrison Function

Co,nl'Arl'OD .... ,
(," eumpl<; """,pariSO" for equo!

to C-T)

LAO 'OpAls"ntation:

CMPnl

='"''"'

CMP_al

- 'N'
'N'

compan~n

performed (CMP -I. for imt.anl'e.

for th~ compari.on of tWO IN,. numbers
for equal to) .

~tunds

You cnn arrange a comparator in a rung in plac e

of a conta~t. The unlabclod input and lhc unla
~led output establish the conne<otion 10 the
other (binary) progrdIIl clcmems.

The "alue, to be compa~d are pt Inputs IN I

and I>I2111Jd the cornpari~n re~uh is the output.
A su~ccssful comparison is equivalent to a
elo.ed Contact ("pow ..... nows through the
comparator). If the comparison i~ nut suc~e&~'
fu l, the comact is open. The <;oml"amlOr'~ out
pul ",U$t always be imerccmncctod.
R~p ~$~ nl.tlon

FRD

The bolt for a comparison has two inputs, IN 1

and 1>12. ""d 1m unlabeled binary output. The
"header" m the box idcnlifie!> the CQmparison
performed (eMP - I, for namplc. stands for
the compari.on of two J1'o.'T numbcn. for equal
(0).

R~presentAtiuD

LAD

In addition to the (unla~lcd) binary input. the

bolt for a comparison function has two input;;.
IN I and fN2, and an (unlabeled) binary output.
The Mlleader" in tbe box identifi~sa cnmparison
operation (CMP for compare) pod the type of

The vuluc5 \1,1 be compared are at inputs IN I

and IN2 and the result of the comparison;" at
the QUtpUt . Ifth~ cOnlpariwn is ~u= ful, the
comparator output sho.",.~ sianaJ state "I"; <}lh
o:rw..e, it is "1)". It mUSt always be intercon
neetod.

TobIe ~ .l (h'c'Ivicw of the ComparilOlll'unctio""

,.

"

'"

\l

Comparison Functions

Uata types

~ amples

T he data type of the input' in a comparison

nmcti"n ,kpend s on that function. For examp le, the input!; arc "ftype REAL in the comparison function CMP > R (compare REAL num bers for g", ater than). Variable, must be of the
same data type as the inputs, When using operands w ith abwlulc addn:,scs, tbe operand
w idths must accord with the data types . For
ex amp le , you can use a ""oro operand fo r data
type INT.

Figure 9.1 provides an examplc for each of the

data types, A comp arison functi on carries uu' "
comparison according lU the characleristics
spec ified .",-en when nn data types arc declared
when using operands wilh ah solutc addresses.
In the cas, of incremental progrmnm.inl!'. you
w ill find the comparison fundi"ru; in the Program E1cmcnts Cata log (with VIEW ~ OVER
VIE>I,; [Crrl _ K] or L'ISERT ---; P ROGRA \l ELEME:"'TS) ulld<'f "Comparator'"

You can find the bit assignments for the data

fom )a!>; in Chapter 3.5.4. "Elementary Dal2
Types".

C om p aris on fu n ction in a run g (LA D)

A compari,on between REAL numbers is not

true if one o r both REAL numhcr, are invalid .
In a dd ition. :;tatus b ilS OS and O V arc set , You
ca n find o ut h ow the comparison nmctions set
the remaining status bi" in Chapter 15. "Status
Bi,,"',

Comp~r ls on

Aording

In

1"'7

'"

Comparison
a ccor din!/; to I) I<,-'T

-Globa l_DS-.
CampYa l'
-Global_DS-.
Campllal2

You can C"fillcct contacts before and afler the

comp ari",n fullction in series and in parallel.
The comparison boxc, themselves can also be

Memory b i' M 99 ,0 is reset if t"e n luc in memory word

othe,""ise it 1> n<>t
CMP - - 1

MW 9 2

You can US<: tbe comparison function in a nong

in place ofa contact

92 is equals to 120:

C MP --1

M99 .0

R)

'N'
'N'

~V

MW92 -

'"
....

..

'"
'N' ..

M 99.0

..
fhe van"bl~ .. CompRc<ult in dam block G lobal_DB ,s
Sct ,I vanablc
'"CmnpVal l";,; less than CompValr ot h~rwi"e it is reset,
"Global OS".
CompResull
C MP ~ D
CMP< D
"Global DS- ,
)f--I
Compv;ol1
"Glab'!!_ DS-GiobaLDS",
CompR" su lt
IN1
.. ..

'N'

Campva~ --L' ~N~'______f--'::C:~:S

IN2

If the V<ll1abl~ HActYal" greater than or equa l to the vanabk IIC"libm. #-Recah
C omparison
a ccording to Rt: A l.. i. ,et ' otherwise it is not
CM P
IIActY"l _
jj Calibra

~R

'N'
'N '

FIgure 9.1 Comp.ri>oll Fuuctiuu Example.

'"

CMP > R

#Recall

,)

IIActYal-

#Calib.-a

'"'

'N'

HRecali

9.2 Description of the C<.>mparison

~onn"ctcd

in series or in parallcL In the case of

comparison fun~tions connected in series, both
comparisons must be successful for power to
flow in the rung. In the case of comparators
connected in parallel, only One ~ompare condition need be fulfill ed for powcr to flow in the
parallel circuit.
You can find further examples of the representat ion and atTangcmcnt of compari son func tions in th e program "Digital Functions" (function block FE 109) in the libmry LAD_Book
that you can down load from Ihe publisher's
Website (see page 8 ).
Compa rison funct ion in a logic circuit (FBD)
You can position the comparison fun~tion at
any binary input of a program e lement. The
resuit of the comparison can be subsequently
combined with b inary functions.
You can find further examples of the rep reselltatioll and arrangcment of comparison functions in the program 'D igital Functions (func _
tion block FB 109) in the library "FBD _ Book
that you can do\vnload from the publi.hds
Website (see page g).

Fun~tion,

with the data 'ype specified in the comparison

function and checks to sec if the two values differ. The comparison is succes sful ("power
flows through the comparator Output or the
RLO is '.J .. ) when the two variables have different values.

If, in the case of a REAL comparison, one or

both input variables are invalid, the comparison
is not suc~essful. In addition. status bits OV and
OS are SCI,
Comparison for grealer than
The comparison for greater than' interprets
the conten ts of the input variables in accor'
dance with the data type specified in the comparison function and chc~ks to see if the value
at input INI is greater than the value at TN2. If
this is the case, the comparison is succe~sful
(""power' flows through the comparator output
or the RLO is 1),
If. in the case of a REAL comparison, one or
both input variable s are invalid, the comparison
is not successful. In addition. status bits OV and
OS are set,

Comparison for greater than or equal to

9,2

Desnlptlon orthe COmpariso n

Functions

Compar ison for equal to

The comparison for equal to interprets 'he
cont~nlS of the input variables in accordance
with the data type spe~itled in the comparison
function and checks to S~e iftbe IwO v alues are
equal. The compare condition is fulfil led
("power' flows through the comparator output
or the RLO is '1) when the twO variables have
Ihc Same value.
If, in the Case of a REAL comparison, One or
both input variables are invalid, the compari,on
is not successfllL Status bits OV and OS are
also sct.
C om paris on for not equal to
The ~omparison for not equal to" interprets the
contcn" of the input variables in accordance

The comparison for great~'t" than or eqoal to"

interprets the contents of the input variables in
accordance with the data type specified in the
comparison function and ~hceks to see if the
value at input tNt is greater than or equ"lto the
value at input IN2, If this is the case, the comparison is successful ("power' flows at the
compar~wT outpot or the RLO is '1 ").
If, in th~ case of a REAL comparison, one or
both input variables are invalid, the comparison
is not .uc~essfuL In addition, status bits OV and
OS are set .
Comparison for less than
The "comparison for less tha n" intcrprets the
contents of the input variables in accordance
with the data type specified in the comparison
fun~tion and ~hecks to sce if the value at input
IN! is less than the value at input IN2. Ifthis is
the case. the comparison is successful ('power'
flows at the comparator output or the RLO is

,. IJ.

195

9 Comparison Functions
If. in the case of a REAL comparison. one Or
both input variables are invalid. the comparison
is not successful. In addition . ' tatus bits OV and
OS are set.

comparison function and checks to see if the

value at input IN1 is less than or equal to the
value at input 11\' 2. !fthis is the case. the comparison is successful ("'power" flows at the
comparator output or the RLO is "1").

Comparison for Ie.. than o r equ al to

If. in the case ofa REAL comparison . one or

both input variahles are invalid. the comparison
is not successful Tn addition. StatuS bits OV and
OS are sct.

The " comparison for less than or equal to"

intcrpre1.~ the contenl> of the input variables in
acco rdance with the data type spec ified in the

10 Arithmetic Functions

10 Arithmetic F unctions

The ari thmetic functions combine two values in

accordance with Ihc bas ic arithmetical opera ~
tions of addit ion, subtrJction, multiplication,
ami division . You can usc the arithmetic runclions on variables of type INT. DINT. and
REAL (Table 10. I),

10.1 Processing an Arithmeti c Func-

tion
Represe n tatio n
A r i l h m ~t1< b o ~

(in <","npl~ : addition with tNT)

LAD repreSllntaUon
-

AO D_t
," 0
OU'

'"
'"'
'"'

F8 0 representation:

ff-

'N,
'N'

OU,
'NO

~rs).

The values 10 be combined are at inputs TNI

and IN2, and the result of the calculation is at
output O UT. The inputs and the output have
different data types. dcpending on the arith
metic funClion. For example. in the case of the
arithmetic function ADD _ R (addilion of REAL
numbers). the inputs and the output a re of data
type REAL. The variables applied must be of
(~c same data type as the inputs or the ootput. If
you use absolute addre ..es fo r the operands, the
operand widths must be matched to the data
types. for example, you can use a word operand for data type INT.

You can find a description of the individual bits

in eac~ data fonnal in Chapter 3.5 .4. "Elemen tary Data Types".

ADD_I

"
-=

output, OUT. The "he ader" in the box ident ifies

the arithmetic function executed (AD!)_ I, for
instance, stands for the addition o f TNT nnm-

I'u n cd on

f-

In addition to enable the input EN and the

enable output ENO, a box for an arithmet ic
function has two inputs, INI and IN2, and an

Th e aritiunetic function is executc<1 if "I " is

present at (he enable input ("power" flows in
input EN). Ifan error occurs durin g Ihc calculation. the enable output is set to " 0"; o therwise,
it is set to "1". If execution ofthc function i~ not
enabled (EN - "0"), the calcolation does not
take place, and ENO is also " 0",

T. bl" 10 . t (ke,,'iew of A ritbmic Function.

ATithmctic function

With data type

Subtraction
M ultiplication

>NT
ADD'
SUB I
MUC ,

D ivision with quotient os res ult

DlVI

Addition

OINT
ADO_PI
SUO 01
MUl DI

REA'
ADD_R
SUB R
M UL_R
DIV R

D iv ision with remainder a. ,,:>ult

'"

10 Arithmclic Functi{)ll5

> Invalid REAL number in a REAL calcula"

IF EN "" '1 " or not wired

tion

ELSE

THEN

See Chapter 15. "'Status Bits". to Hnd out ll{)w

the arithmetic functions Sel the various stalUs
bil'.

OUT :. IN1

:: '0"

Enmples
Figure 10.1 shows an example for each data
Iype , An arithmelic function exCculcS a calculation in accordance with the characterisl;c spec
ified. even ifn{) data types have been declared
when using {)perand, with absolute addresses.

If the MasterConlrol Relay(MCR) is activated,

{)ulpul OUT is set t{) zero when the arithmetk

funeti{)n is processed (EN - 'T'). The MCR
d""s not affect the ENO output.
The following errorS can OCCur during execu

In tbe case of incrc-menlal p[{)gramming. you

win Hnd the arithmetic functions in the Pro"
gram Element Catalog (with VIEW --> OVER'
VIEWS [Orl - K ] or L.... SERT --> PROGRA~1 ELE"
~!E"TS) under "[mcger function" (INT and
DINT calculations) and under "Floatin g-Point
fcl. (REAL cakulalions) ,

tion of an arithmetic function:

I>

Range violation (overflow) in tNT ami

DINT calculations

I>

Underflow and {)verflow in a REAL calcu

lation

The value in memory woro Ivl\\' 100 is divide<! by 250, rhe integer result is stored
in memory word M\\' 102.

Addition
accnrdiog In 1r..'T

DIV_ I

MW 100,~

..

'"
'"
'"

Add.tIOn
according to D1XT

'" 0
M

r-- MW 102

DIV_ I

-,"

MW1~
j IN2
:~1
250

'N

- >N,

"Gklba l OS".
AI1thV"j2

..

..

..

'"0
M

f-

"Glooal OS".
AI1IhReSult

"GIobaL DS" ,
AI1\hVall

ADD_ DI

'">N,

r-

0"'

"Global OS",
A,riIhResu ll

"Global_OS" ,

'"

Add"'on
accordinK 10 RI::AL

'"
'"
'"'

'"'

At1IhV~1 2

'"0

and Factor are mulllphe<!. the prodnct

The 'anable ." Act\al
,ariabte ii Display.

MUL_ R

liActVa l liFactor

MW 102

The -.alues m vanables .. AnthVall and .. Anth\'al1 arc added and the r~sult
stored in variable ,. ArithResult"". All ,'ariable, are stored in the data block.

ADD_DI
"Global_OS".
MthVall

r--

0",
'"0

'"0
OC , -

#Oispay

t"jgure 10. ' hample. of Arithmetic FUDcrio""

IS

transferred to

MUL_R

liActVal #Factor

'"'"
'"

OC, -

'"0

#Oispay

10.2 Calculating with Data TYJl<' II'.'T

A r ithmetic fu nct ion In a r ung (LAD)
Yo u ,",I'n ,",o nneCl ,",ontacts in series and in parallel before th,", EN inp ul and aCler Ihe ENO out put .
The arithmetic box itself may be placed after a
T_branch IlI1d in a branch that leads direcdy 10
lhe left power rail. This branch ewn alSO) ha"e
eontlctS before Ihe EN input and il need not be
the uppel1llost branch.
Dire.:1 conneclion to the len po".er rail mean5
Ihul you can connect arithmetic boxes in paral_
lel. When you conned bo xes in purall el. you
nd II coil 10 terminate the rung. If you ha'e
not provided any error evaluation. assign a
"dummy" op<..-rand to the eoi!. for example a
temporary local dala bil.
You can connect arithmelic boxes in series. If
the ENO output of the pre.:edmg box lead5 to
the EN inpul of the sub!lequent box. the subse quent box is processed o nly if the preceding
box has been completed wilhout elTors . If you
wan1to use the result from the preceding box as
inpul value for the next box, variubles from Ihe
lemporary local data area make ,",onvenienl
inlennediate buffe!"!!.
I f you ammge se,'ernl arithmellc boxes in onC
Olng (parallel to the left power rail. then Further
in 5eries). Ihe boxes in Ihe u~nnost branch
arc pro<:esscd from left to rigbt. followed by Ihe
boxes in Ihe secu",l branch from left to ri ghl.
and su on.
You can find funhe. examples of the rcpresenIlilion and arrangemenl of arilhmetic function.
in the program "Digital Functions" (FB 110) in
the library "LAD_Book" Ihal )'ou cM download from the publisher's Website (see page 8).
Arithmetic funclion In a 10ile circuli ( fBD)
If you want to proces s the arithmetic box in
depend ence on specific ,",onditions. )'OU can
arrange binary logic opera1ions before Ihe EN
inpul. You can interconne<;1 the ENO outpUl
with binary inputs of olher functions; for exam ple, you elin ammge arithmetic boxes in oe:ries,
whereby the ENO O\Jtpu\ of Ihe precedmg box
leads 10 the .'1 input of the following box . If
you wanl 10 use Ihe calculation result from the
preceding box as input value for a subsequenl

box. v8ri"h le. from the ten'poraoy local data

area make co nveni ent intcnn~-di ate buffers.
EN and

E~ O

need nOt be w ired.

You can find further examples oflhe represenI.IIlIon and arrangement of ~nthmelic fullCtionS
in Ihe program "'Digital Funclions" (FB I to) in
the library "H:JD_llook" Ihat you ""n download from the publisher's Website (see page 8).

10.2 C a l culating with Dilill Type lNT

L"'T additio n
The function ADD_I interprels lhe values at
mpuls IN! and lN2 a!i numbers uf dala type
INT. It adds the Iwo numbers a nd stores the sum
III OUlput OUT.
After e.\co;ution of the calculation. status bits
indicate whelher Ihe sum is negative. zero, or positivc. 5tot\lll bits O V and OS
indicotc any range violations.

ceo Ind CCI

INT subtrwCllon

The: function SUB_I interprets Ihe values al

inputs 1..'1 I and ".... 2 as numbers of dala type
L''''. h SublnlCIS the value .t 1N2 from the val""
alINI and Stores the diff~....::ncc in outp ut OUT.
After execution of the calculation. stat us bilS

ceo and e C I indicate whelher the ditTc", nce is

negnt ive. 7.ero, or po,itive. SlUtus bits OY and
OS indicate any range violoti(}ns.
1:-;1" multiplication

The funclion M UL_I interp~ts the values al

inputs I},' I and TN2 95 numbe", of dala type
INT. h multiplies the two nl1mbers and Slores
the prodUCI in omput O UT.
After execution of the calculalion talus bits
indicate whelher the product is
negul iv e. zero. or po. itive. Stalus bits OV and
OS indicate any INT mnge violtllion .

ceo IUld eel

I,,"T division

The function DlY_' interprets the values al

mpu!:> TNI and 1N2 u numbcT"s of data type
INT. It divides the \"Blues III input L'll (d ivi_
dend) by Ille valuc ~l input IN2 (d ivisor) and
supplies thc quotient at output OUT. It is the

'"

10 Arithmetic Fundio"s

iDlcger result of the di vision . The qu()!i~nl is

zero ifthc di,' id~'tld is equal to zero and the divi
sor is not equal to zero or if the ab,ol ute ,alue
"fthe dividend is Ie,s than the ab,olute value of
the divi"or. The quotient is negative if the divisor is negativc .
Aftcr execution of the calculation. status bits
ceo and eC I indicate wb"l~er tnc quoti enl is
negative. zero, of positive . Status bits 0'1 and
as indi~al.C any range violations . Division by
zen> proouces zero as quoti("1\t and 'CiS statu,
hits ceo, eel, OV and OS 10 "] " .

10.3 Calculating with Data

T~'p",

DINT
011\, addition

The f"n~tion ADD _01 interprets the values at

inputs IN I and lN2 as numb~'r:S of data t>pc
DINT. It add, the 1"'0 num~rs and stores the
swn in output OUT.
After ex",", ut;on of the calculation. ,tatus bits
CCO and cel indicate whether the ,um i, negat;ve, zero, or po,i live. Slalus hits O V and OS
indicate Hny range violations.
DINT subt r action

Oii," T dh1'lon "jth

'luo1i~nt

u result

The fun~tion j)IV_ DI int~rpr~t' tbe va lue s at

input' TNI and TN2 as nnml>ers of data type
D INT. It di"ides the value at input L"I (divi d~-nd) by the "alue at input IN2 (divisor) and
~tor~s tho quoti ~nt in output OUT Tt" the integer res ult of the division . n,e quo ti~nt is z~w i f
the di vidend i, equal to zero and the d iyi,or is
oot eqnal to zero or if tnc ab~olntc val ue of the
di"idend is les, than the absolute value of the
di \ i,or. Th ~ qll",i "" t is nq,;:aIiv~' i rlhe divi,or i,
negali'e.
Aft.r execution o f the calculation. starns bit,
ceo and CCI indicate whether the quoti~D\ is
nq:;aIi \'c. zero. or po;;iti ve . Stam, bits O V and
as indicat. any range violations . Division by
z ~rO produces zcrQ as quotient and setS status
bil< ceo. ee l . 0'1 and as to " I ".
DL,\"T

dl'" !~!on

" 'lIh remaindu itS result

The fun~lion MOO_ Dl interprets the va l"", at

inpnts TN I and DJ 2 as numixTS of data type
D INT. It d ivides the valee a t input IN ] (d ivid~'lld) by tnc ,'aluc at input lN2 (divi",r) and
sto,"", the remain der o f th" di " i,ion in output
OUT. The r~mainder is what is le ft oWr from
the dh 'is ion : it doe.' not eorresp<lod to the de<:imal p laces . If the d ividend is n egative, Ihe
remainder is a lso negaI iv ~

Th e function SUH ])1 nHerp""" tn e value, at

inputs INI and IN2 as numbers of data Iype
O fKT. Tt ,ubtraclS th~ va lue at inp ut LN2 fTmn
the value a\ inp ut TN ! and stores tne d ifference
in output OUT

.'uter execution of tbe eakulation, Slam, bits

CCO and CC 1 indi~ale 1}. helher tbe remainder is
negati"e . z ero, or positive . Starns bits OV aTld
as indi cate any ran ge violations. Divisi on by
zero produces zero as ,..,mainder and sets "aluS
bits CCO. CC I, OV ami as to "I"'.

After ex~U!ion of the calculation. , tatus hilS

CCO and ee l indi cate whether the difference i,
negativ~, ~cro> or positive. Status bits O V and
as indicate any rnn!:" violations

10.-1 C alculating \\ith Data Type

REAL

DINT multiplication
Ib~

fUIlction MUL_ Ol interpret> the ,"alue, al

IN I and IN 2 as numbers of data typ~
DINT. It multipl in the two nnmber<; and ;;tores
the produ~t in output OLT.
input~

Aftcr execution of th e calcula,i un, "atl.lS bit<

ceo and CCI indical~ whether th e produce is
oq~ati"e, zero. or pusitiv ~. Stat u, bits OV and
OS indicate any range yiolations

""

REA L numbers are repre,ented interna lly as

Goating_poi nt numbers "i'n tw o number
ranges: One range with full accuracy ("norma lized-' floming-poinl n um~rs ) and one range
with limited accurac y C'd~-n"rmali z ed" tloating _point uumbe rs: al,o see Chapter 3 5.4, "Elementary Data Types"'). S7 -400 CPUs calculate
in both ranges, S7-300 CPUs only in the fullaccuracy range. Ifan 57-300 CPU carries out a
c alcu lmwn wbose resul! " in the limited -aeeu-

10_4 Calculating with Data Type REAL

riley range, zero is returned as result and a runge

"iolation reported
REAL

~dd illon

The funetion ADD_R interpl"ClS the values"t

inputs IN I and IK2 as numbers of dma type
RI!AL It add<! the two numbers aDd stores the
lIum in output OUT.

Aner exccution o f the calculation, status bits

eeo and CCI indicate whether !he sum is negative, "co, or positive. Status bits OV a"d as
indicnle any range vio lations.
In Ihe cast ufan ilk sal calculati on (one oftne
input vulues is an invalid REAL number or you
"tempt to add +- and _), ADD_R returns an
invalid val ue at output OUT and sets sunus bits
eeo, eel, OV and as to "I".
R EAL su blr _Cllon
The function S UB R interprcts the value, at
inpul s IN I and JN2 8S numbers of da1:1 type
REAL, \t subtracts the n"mher at inpm JN2
from the n"mheT al input I", I and stores the difference in ompm OUT.
After execution o f the c.leulatioD, 51atuS bils
eC(l and eel indicate whether u.., difTerence is
neaati,e. zero, or positi\'c, Statu, bits OV and
as indicate any range vioimlions.
In the C~ of an illegal calcul"ion (one of the
input values is an invalid REAL number or yo"
Kltempl t<l suhtract +_ from ...... ). SUB_R
returns ~n invalid value at o"tput OUT and set>
StatUS hi.,. ceo, eel, OV and a s 10 " 1",

REAL

mult lpll ~a t1on

The funetiun MUL_R ;nterp("\~ the values at

inputS I'll and JN2 as numbl.'TS of dala type
RAL. It multiplies the twO numbto,... and sloreli
'he product in output O UT.

After exccution of the calculation, status bits

ceo and eel

Indieate ... Ilcther thc product is

negative, ~ero. or positive. StatuS bits O V and
OS indicate any range violations.
1n the casc of an illegal cal cu lat ion (one o f the
input ,'aluc. is an invalid REAL tHunhcr oryou
attempt to multiply ... and O), M UL R relurns
an invalid ,'alue at output OU T a nd scI> "tatu.s
bit$
eel, OV a nd OS to "I".

ceo.

REAL dl\l.oloo
The function DIV_R int~rprc1.S the va illc, al
inplltS IN] and 1N2 as numbeT:! of dala type
REAL. It divides the number at input I~ I (dividend) by the number m input lN2 (dhisor) and
.tores the quotient;n OUlput OUT.
After execution of the c~lculatioD, status h i,",
ceo and ee l indicate Whe~T the quotien l i.o
nellati~'e, zero, o r posItive. Status bits ceo and
ee I tndtclue any ran ge violations.
In t he case of an illegal calculation (one of the
input values is an im'alid REAL number or you
attcmpt to divide ~ hy 00 or 0 by 0), DlV_R
rctUnlS an invalid value at output OUT and ,ets
SlatUS bits ceo, ec l. OV and OS 10 "I".

'"

11 Mathematical Functions

The following mathe matical function< BN:

available in LAD and FBD:
~

Sine, co.inc, tangent

c>

rue sine, 111"0 cosine. arc tangent

::. Squaring, 5quarc-roOl e"lntction

!>

E~ponential

function 10 base e.
naNrallogarithm

Function
The mathem:nical funcli,JO is cXCl.'uled if "I" is
pTC!<Cnt &llhe enable input or if"po",-e.' nOW!
In input E'1. Tf an error occurs in the calcula
tion, the enable input IS sellO "0"; othe ....;sc it
is SCI to "1". If CX~cullon of !he function is not
enabled (E'1 the calculation dOC$ I\Ot
take place and L'O is also ''0''.

"{n.

IF EN ,,- "1 - or not wired

All mathe1TUlticai functio", procc, .. REAL

THeN

numhe~.

ELSE

OUT ;.. Mfct (IN)

11.1 Procening
Function

It

IF erro r occurred

Mat ht'1II0tlc!l1

The box for a mathematical fu~tion ba.. an

input IN and an output OUT in addilion 10 Irn:

enable input EN aod the enable OUtput F'I10

The "rn:aJer" in the bo~ identifies the mathematical fu~tion exuted (for example. SI:"
~1.Ir>d.. for sine).
"a.h 1>0.
(ia cumple: ,ioe)

ENO :" 0

ENO :" 1"

ENO :- 0'

If the Master Conn-ul Rday (MCR) ;~ acti"e,

output OUT is SCI 10 ~cro "'hen Tile mathemati ,
cal function is processed (J:::o. - "I"). The MCR
docs oot aff..,t tile E"-"O.
The follo,,;ng C11'OTS ~'\lIl occur in a matllemarieal function:
:> Range "iolation (underflow and o"ertl",,')

'"'"0
'"
=" ~
""
="'" '"0 ~
OU'
OU'

The inpul ,-. Iue is al input IN and the resuh of

11\1; tnlIthernalleal funclioo is at output OUT.
Input and OUtpul are ofdata type REAL. Operalld~ ", rel\.,,~...-d with albolu.c addresses must
be double ... ord nrcrands.
See ChnplCT 3.5.4. -'J:Jementary nata T)-p<:",
fQr a d<;S(:ription of the bil S in REA L fOrTnal_

'"

ELSE

..-M Mf" .. _1><>1 1 _

Rt pnsentulon

!.AD rejlreHnltllion:

THEN

!>

:"0 vali d RFAL number as input value

Chpter 1S, "Stan.. Bils", e~pla;ns how the

ma thematical fun~tions SCt Ihe SIRtu! bit s.
Ex am ple.
figure II . I soo'''!O three e~ amples o f matrn:IlllItieal functions. A mathematical function
performs the calculalion ID accordance " ',th
RE.-U even if no dau.typcs have been dlan:d
...hen uSlDg opc-rat>d. with ab.o]ute addR'cs.
In the case nf increm"mal proaramming. you
will lind the mathematical functions in the ProIP"'" Element' Catalog (with VIF.W ~ OVf.RVIE'" [Crr] - K ) or L'SJ:.IlT ~ PROGR"~ I En:'tESTS) und~r "Floating_I'olDt fet.".

11 . 1 Processinll" Mathemat ical Function

The value in memory doubleword MD 110 <:On,,,in. an anille in nldian m!l1lS\lTC.

The sine of this angle ,5 senerated and ~tored in mcmvry doublewurd MD l(")oa.

S in e

EN
IN

MO 110

'"

OUT
ENO

MO '04

S'ljuare

The .quare root of the value in variable ":-'hthValue l" is generutcd Hnd s10TC<l in the

~,

variable 'MilhRoo!"".
SORT

'NO

'N

OUT

"G~al_OB .

"Global_DB" .
MathValue '

Expo ne nl

'N

The

~anable

MathRoot

"G lobaL Oe".

MathValuel

"Re.llh conlalns the i>O"'oeT of e and

SORT

OUT ~ MathROOt

'N

' NO

"E><~nt.

m
/tExponfInl
t"lgu~

'N
'N

m
' NO
OCT

"'Reaull

" GIobaII DB".

'N

"-'

'N
'N

OCT
'NO

#R ..~".. ~

11.1 Il umplci of Mathe-matiul Function.

l\h lhematlul fun e llo n In a runll ( LAD)

YOII can connL"'1 contacts m series and in paral.
le i before input EN and after output ENO.
The mathematics box itsc lfmay be pl aced after
a. T-branch o r in a branch that leads directly to
t he left powcr rail. This branch can also have
conlact s bef~ input EN and need not be the
tlppenno SI branch.
Thc direct connection to the left powcr rail
a llows you to connect mathemati cs bo.~es in
paralle l. Whell eonnectinll boxcs ,n parallel,
YOII requ ire a coil to terminate the ranll. If you
have not provided elTOr evaluation. as siSn a
"'dummy" o perand to the coi l, for examp le a
temporary local data bit.
You can connect mathematics boxes;n series. If
th e EN O OUl put of the prec eding box leads to
the EN inpu l of lhe subsequent box. the subse "
quent box is processed only if lhe preceding
box hat been completed without C!Tors. I f you
want to use the result from the precedillg box 95
the inpu t vulue Cor a subsequent box, variables
from the telllpOrary lcx;pi data area make convenient intennediate buffers.
If you alTllnge several mathematics boxes in
one runs (pa rallel 10 the len power mil and then

!'uMher in series). the boxes in the uppcnno5t

branch a~ the first to be proce!!sed from le ft to
right. followed by Ihe boxC'< in the second
branch from left to right, a nd so on.
You can find funber examples of the representation and ammgemcnt o f mathematical functions in the program "Digital Functions" (FB
111) in the library "LAD_Book" thut you can
download from the p ublisher's Website (s~
page 8).
) Ia th e milleal run et lon In a logIc circuit
( FBD)

If you want to have a mathematics box pro"

eessed tn dependence o n specific conditions.
you can program binary logic operations before
the EN input. You can connect the ENO ou tput
with binary inputs from o ther functions. For
example. you can BrT"IInge the mathematic s
boxes in serie!!. whe~by Ihe ENO output of the
preceding box leads to Ihe EN input ortbe following box. If you want to use the calculation
result of the preceding '00" as input "ai lle to u
subsequent box. variables from Ihe temporary
local dala a~a make good intermed iate buffers.
EN and ENO ne<:d not be wired.

11 Mathematical Functions

You can find further e~amples ofthe represen

tation and arrangement of ma thematical func
tions in the program ""Digiml Functions" (FB
III) in the library "FBD_ Book" that you can
download from the publisher's Website (see
page 8).

11.2 Trigonometric Functions

The trigonometric functions

"N

COS

TAN

Sine,
Cosine and
Tangent

The following mathematical functions

n\'ailable

Two lUlits are convemionally used for giving

the size of an an gle: degrees from 0 0 to 360'
and nodian measure from 0 to 21t (wh e"" II ~
+3. 141 593e+OO). Both can be con\'ened pro
ponionally. For example, the radian measure
for a 90 anglc is n/2, or + 1.570796e----00, With
values greater than 2n (+6 .283185e+oo) . h or
a multiple of 271 is subt11lcted unti l the input
value for the trigonometric function i~ less than

"

Table II.I Range of ate functions

P,rmi..ible

Value Returned

~ogo

ACOS
ATA.."

SQR
SQRT

EXP
LN

I to + 1

- ,,12 to ""TtIl

I 10 +1

o to ~

Full range

S~e

"Computing the sq uare root" .

Computing; the

~q ua re

root

The SQRT function extracts the square root of

the \' alue at input IN and stores the reslilt in out
put OUT. If the \'alue at input IN is less than
zero, SQRT sets status b its ceo, CCI, OV and
OS to '1 " and returns an in\'alid REAL number.
If Ihe value at input IN is ---0 (minus zero), ---0 is
returned.

Example :

The nrc functions (inverse trigonomelric func

tions)

Compute the square of a number,

Compute the square root of
a number,
Compute the exponent 10 b ase e and
Find th~ naturalloganthm
(logarithm to base e).

The SQR function square. the value at input IN

and stOres the result in output OUT.

,,12 to -~ ' 2

11.3 Arc Functions

a"" also

Computing the square

Example:

Example (Figure 11. 2 or F igun: 11.3, Net" ork

4): Calculating the idle power p, ~ U' I sin{<p)

"'"

If the pcrmi%ib le value range is exceeded at

input IN, the arc function returns an invalid
REA L number and ENO - "0" so d sets stalus
bit' CCO, CCI, O V and OS to "'I".

11.4 l\lisccllaneous MlIthcmatlcal

Functions

assume an angle in radian measure as a REAL

number at the input.

Functioo

a~ the inverse functions of the corresponding

trigonometric functions. They assume a REAL
number in a specific range at input IN and
rerum an angle in !he radian measure (Tab le
I Ll ).

c - Ja' - b'

Figure II .2 or Figure 11.3, N~twork 5: First, the

squares ofvariabks a and b are found and then
added. Finally, the . quare root is e.~t,"cted from
Ihe SUIlL Temporary local data are used as inter
m~diate memory.
(l f you ha\'c d.-clared a or b as a local variable,

ASIN
ACOS
ATAN

Arc sine,
Arc cosin~ and
Arc tangent

you must precede it with # so that the Editor rec

ognize, it a, a local \'ariable; if a orb is a g lobal
variable . it must be p laced in quotation marks.)

,
,..-.:>ri< .. Calc u lation 01 ..actlva

~r

MUL_R

/NOItago "CUfT(lonl

'NOI- Jtt..REAL 1
'"
0"'
'N'
'N'

'NO
'N '"0"'
'N

itphl

IIC REAL2

MUL_R

'N 'NO
QU, r-#8_Powe,
'
N
'
IfLREAL2
'N'
Calculati o n of h ypota nu ll

II'I_ REAL1 -

N e twork 5

1- '0'

h~

"
"'-REALI
"'_REAL2

II'I_REALI

,
,
,

FllU n> 11.2 Ex..mplu o f

Math~matical

Comput in g t he u pon., nt to bue

Function. ( LAD)

The EXP function compule> the c_~p<)JI"'lIial

value!O base
2,7 18282e+OO) and the value
al itlpll! IN (e ) and Slon:s the result in oUlpU!
OUT.

fJ-

You Can calculate any expon=tial "RIlle

the fannula

u~ing

The nanu-.llogarilhm is the inverse funcliQn of

tbc ellponcnliai function: lfy - c'!hen x -In 'I.
To find any logarithm, use the fonnufa
log

<l ..

!in.!!
IOlilo
b

whefC h or n is any base. Jf'lou make n " e, you

can find a logarithm 10 any base using the nalllralloganttun:
IOlilb" _ In"

Finding the nalura l lo gatlthm

Th~

LN function finds Ihe natural logurithm 10

base c (- 2.718282c...oo) from the number m
inpUt N and ston:os it in output OUT. Iflhe value
al inpUlIN is leu than (Ir~ual to zero, LN sets
status bill; ceo. eel. ov and as 10 'T' and
returns an invalid R EAL number.

'" '

In the spec ial case for bllse 10, the ("nnuln ;, u

follows:
IS CI "

L~tO

- 0.43 42945 . In"

,os

II Mathematical Functions

...!:'ampk. of moth function.

Hetwort< 4 Calculation of r

cH~. pow~r

MU L_R

<'

#Voltage -

'"

OC;

ftCurrenl

'"

<'0

I- ill_ REAL!

"""

'"
'"

""OCT

liLREAL2
MU L_ R

<'0

"
"CREAL ! itLREAL2

'"
'"

O~

f-- #B_Powe,

'"0

N t twort< 5 Calculation of hYPolanu. .

,,-

'0'
<'

#LREAL! -

/<LREAL2

<'0

'" '0'

<'

'" '"
-

OC; -kt_REAL!

o c;

f-- #!_REA1.2

<'0
ADD_R

<'

'"

OC;

'"

<'0

I- IIC REAL3
SQRT

lfCREAL3

Flgu,"" 11.3 fu.ampb of \fa,), om. tical Function. (FBD)

<'

0 0; - " c

'"

<'0

Conv~-rs;on Fun~tion,;

12

12 Conversion Functions

The conversion functions conV~"n the dala type

of a variable , figu re 12 , I provides an overview
of Ihe data type conversions de scribed ;n Ihis
~hal'lcr.

~'NVI

'"'"

'CD
3 d ee.

1.-/

INT

NEGI

'"
t 2.1 Prucessing

9.

Conversion

'"
0"

Function

OINT

OOR lIRNO.. RND

Representation

RNO, TRUNC

In addilion 10 the enable input EN and the

enable output ENO. the box for a conversion
function has an inpUl IN and a n OUlPU! OUT
The header" in the box ident ifies the COnver
sion flmction executed (for example. I_BCD
stands for the convers ion of lNT to 8CD).
Con.-.nion bu

FBD represontaUon,

I_BC D
eN
0"'
eNO

" , 'co
eN

'"

eN D
OU,

NEGR

Figure 12.1 Overview of the Convc-r.;on I'anctions

You can find th e bit descriptions for the data
forma'S in Chapler 3 .5 .4, "Elcmc"lllary Data
Type"-

(in <",,"'plo: lNTto BCD)

LAD representation;

0 '"

REAL

fFunction

The value to b e convened is at input IN and the

resu lt of the ~onversion is at output O U T. The
data type of th e input and th at of the ()utput
depend on the eonv~"Thion fun~ tion . In the con
versIOn functlUn OJ R (DINT 10 REAL). for
in'l:mee, the input is of type DINT and the out
put o f type REAL. The variables app lied mnSI
be of the ",me data type as the input or the out
put. Jf yon use operands with absolute
addresses, the s izes of the operands must be
matcbed to the data types; for example , you can
use a word operand for data type INT.

The conversion function i, e xecuted if '1 " is

present al the enable input (if ~urrent flows in
input EN). If an CfTor oc~urs during ~on\'c,-,;ion>
the enable output E NO is SCI 10 "0"' ; otherwise,
it is set 10 "] ". If execution oflhe function is not
enabled (EN - "0" ). the ~onvcrsion does nOI
take place and ENO is also 0",
IF EN "''' " 1" o r nOI w ired

THEN

ELSE

OUT:" Confct (IN)

IF errO r occurred

THE N

ELSE

END

ENO ;= 0'
w,\b Con

,"

"1"

ENO

,=0'

"'<'"ion fun<ri""

.. ""

'"'

12 Conve,..,ion Function,

Conwrtinll
INT

numb~ ...

The valu~ in memory double"ord MD 120 is interpreted as an [NT number and

stored in memory doubleword MD 121 as a BCD nurnbel-.
I_BCD

MO 110 -

'"'"

,"0

0'"

MO 122

MO 120

..

I_ BCD

'"
'"

0'"
'"0

r-

MD 111

,
.
The \alue ,n vmable C"nl e"DlNT "lllterpreted as a DINT number and stored
Convcrung
UL\'T Dumber$ a rcal n umber in ,h~ van able "Con" ertREAL" ,
OI_ R
"GlobaL OB" .
ConvertD INT

Con-ertmg

'"

'"0

'"

0'"

"Global_ OS"
ConvertREAL

"Global_OS",
ConvertD INT

OI_R

0'"

'"
'"

r-

~~

"Global DB",
ConvertREAL

,"0

.
The absolute ~a lue "generated from 'anable
I'DlSplay.

RF;AL number.

#Display

'"'"

'" '"0
0'"

#Display

#Dlsplay

'"
'"

'"

#Display

'"0

Figure 12.2 ExHIIlp1eS ofConn1"S'oo FUDclloo.

If the MaSICr Control Relay (MCR) i, ae,i,'c ,

output O UT is s~1 to zero when the convers ion
function is processed (EN - " 1"). The MeR has
TlO effN:t on output FNO

VIEWS [Ctrl - K] or I"SERT """" P ROGRfuY! E LM.-"S) und er "CoD\'erter'",

Not all conversion functions "'\Xl" errors, An

error oc~urs on ly if the permissible number
range is exceeded (I_BCD. DIJ1CO) or an
invalid REAL number if specified (F LOOR.
C EIL, ROUND , TRUNC).

'(on can connect contacts in series and in parallel ocf""" thc EN input and a tter the b~O oUl_
put,

If the input value for a BCD_lor BCD_ 01 con"

yers;on contai ns a pseudo ' etrad, program cx~
cution is interrupted and error organization
b lock OB 12 1 (programming errors) called,
Chapter 15. "Status Bits". explains ho\\ the
conversion funct ions s~t the ,tatus b its.
Figure 12,2 shows on~ example for ~ach data
type, A con"" .... ion function cOn'-ert, according
10 the <pcci tic characl rrislie tyen if nO ds,s
types have been dttlar~ d wh~n using o!",rands
with absolute addresses,
[n thc C"-'" of incr~mental programming. you
will find the conversion funct ions in the Program Elements Catalog (wilh VIEW......,. O VER-

Conn,,;on function ;n a ru n g (LAD)

The cooversion bo~ itsdfmay be placed after a

T_branch or in a branch lhatlcads directly to the
left \Xlwer rail. This braach can alS<l ~a,c con_
Iact, before input EN and it need not be th e
uppermost branch.
With the direct connection to the left po"er rail
you can thus connect conversion boxes in parallel. \\'hen connecting boxes in parallel. yuu
req,,;re a coiltQ terminate the rung. If you have
not providM ~rror evaluatioo. assign a
"dummy" operand to t~e coil, for instance a
temporary local data b it.
You can connect conversion boxes in ",ries. If
the E~O output of the preceding box leads to
the EN output of the subsequent box. the ,ubse quent bo~ is processed on ly if the pre ceding
box has been completed w it hout errorS , If you

12.2 Conversion oflNT and DINT Nwnbcrs

want to use the result from Ihe preding box as
the inpul value for a subsequent box. variables
from the temporary loeal data area make convenient intermediate buffers.
If you arrange several conversion boxes in one
rung (parallcl to the le ft power rai l and then further in series). the boxes in the llppenno, t
bronch are proee"ed first from len to right. followed by the boxes in the sttOnd branch from
left to right. ami so on.
Vou can find funher examples of Ihe representation and arrangemCUt of conversion functions
in Ihe program "Digilal Functions (FB Ill) in
the library LAD_Book Ihal y(>u Can download from the publ isher's Website (see page 8).
Co nversion funn ion in a togic dre ui! (FBD)
If you wanl 10 process the conversion box in
on specific condi tions, you can
arrange binary logic operations before Ihe EN
input. Vou can connect the ENO outPUI with
binary inputs of other functions; for e xample .
you Can arrange conversion boxes in scrics.
w hereby the ENO output o f Ibe preceding box
leads to the EN input of the subsequent box If
you wa!\lto use the result from the preceding
box as input value for a subsequent box. variables from the temJlO1""T)" local data area make
good lemporary buffers.
d~'PC"dence

EN .. nd ENO need not he wired.

You can find further c ~ amples of Ihe represenlalion and arrangement o f con version functions
in tbe program Digital Funct ion~ (FB I l l ) in
the !ihr.lr)! 'FRD_Book" that you can dOWTl load from the publisher's Website (see page 8).

12.2

Conversion of lNT and DINT

Numbers

C ",n \"Hslun from I NT t o DINT

The function I_ Dt interprets the value al input
IN as a number of data Iype TNT and transfeIN it
10 the low-order word of output OUT. The signal state of b it I~ ( the s ign) oflhe input ;s trans ferred to b its 16 to 3 1 of the high_order word o f
outpulOUT
Th e conversi on from INT 10 DINT reports no
e rrorS.
Conven[on from [NT to BCO
The function I_ BCD interprets Ihe value at
input IN as a number of data type [NT and converts il 10 a 3-decade BCD number .. t output
OUT. The Ihree r;g.h l-ju.,\ified decades represent the absolute va lue of the decimalnnmbec.
The sign is in bits 12 10 IS. If all bils arc '0.
the sigo is positive; if all b ilS are '"I"'. the sign is
negative .
If the INT number is too large to be converted
into BCD (> 999), the I BCD function sets staIUS b ils OV and OS . The conversion docs not
take place.
Co nve roion from DINT to B C I)
Tbe function DI_ BCD function interprets the
,al ue at input IN as a number of d ata type DINT
and converts ;t 10 a 7-decade BCD number at
output OUT. The sev en right_justified decades
represent the absolute value of the decimal
Du mber. The silP' is in bils 2R 10 31. Ir " 1I bits
are '0, the s ign is positive; if aH bils are 1",
the sill'l is negative.
If the DfNT number is too large to be convened
to a BCD number (;> 9 999 999), status b its OV
and as are Set. The conversion does not lake
place.

..

Tobt. I' 1 Con ___ ,..;on of TNT and DINT Numbers

D~I .

Type Cmwor_ '0<

Table 12 . t shows the conversion functions for

[NT and DINT nwnber.. Variables o f tbe specified data type or ab solutc.addressed oJXrands
of the relevant si~e must be applied to the inputs
and outputs of the boxes (for ex..mple a word
operand for data type lNT).

Dat. Typ<: fur

Porameter

sion

TNT to DIl,a

, m

~,

Th'T to BCD

I BCD

~,

OUT
DINT
WORD

DrNT to BCD

DI_lICD DINT

DWORD

DlNfto REAL

D>R

REAL

DIN T

""

12 Conwn;ion Functions

Conversion fronl ol:\"T to REAL

Con version from BCD to DL'IIT

The function DI_R inle",rel' the valu~ at inpul

IN a. a number o t data type DINT and eon,'crt'
it to a REAL number al output OUT.

The function BCD_ DI inlCIprelS the value al

input N a. a 7-decade BCD number and convens it to an NT number at output OUT. The
,e,-en right-justitied d""ades represent Ih"
absolut" value of the d~cimal nun:bcr. The siS"
is in bits 2~!O 31. If these bils are "0"-, the sign
i, JXI,itivc; if they an: '1 ", the sign ;,; negative.
Only bit 31 , ~tah-n into account in Ih" conyer
,ion.

Si nce a number in DINT fonnat has a higher

accuracy Ihan " number in REAL fOmlal,
rounding mak~ take plac~ during Ihe con,crsian. The REAL numb~r is tben fOunded to (he
next imcgcr (in accordan"c wilh thc ROU}.,'TI
Iiln~li on).

The Dl R funclion dm's not

r~porr

errors,

12.3 Com'ersion of BCD Num hers

Table 12.2 shows lhe fun ctions fM con,e't ing
Hen numbers, Variable, of the specified type
of absolutc-add,""ssed operand. oflhe rel~"ant
,ize must be applied w the inpul and o utput, of
the
(for example a word opcrn.nd for data
tYl''' 11'<1).

00"",

If th. BCD number ~ontain. a pseudo tetrad

(numcrical valu(: 10!O 15 Or A to F i" hexadecimal), Ihe CPU s ignals a progtammi"g error
,md cal ls organization b lock OB 121 (synchm
ni~ali on error), If th is block is ~ot available. the
CPU go"s to STOP.
The function

Hcn

I scts nO S\aluS biN

12,4 Conversion oCRE.A,L l"llmbers

Th...,.~

Tabl~

12 2 Co."",,ion o f BCD :-.Jumhers

IJMa 1'ype nmvo:r-

[}at" 1'ype for

""

Paramete,

BCD 10 l"'T

BCD_ l

"

]JCD t{, DtKT

HCrl_Tll O\VORTl Dm

.,~

WORD

OUT

lNT

are sev~ral functionS for eonv~rting a

numb", in REAL fonnm to DINT tonrul1 ("onversion of a fraclional va lue to an integer)
(Tab le 12, 3). They diff~r as regards ronnding,
Variables of Ih~ sJ"'C ifi~d data type or absolutc
addr~s>Ni doubleword
operands rnllSt he
applied 10 Ihc inputs and outpul S of the OOxes.
Tabt. 12.3
, ombe
Com'GIS10DofIlEAl" om t C'T ' (DINT"
0

nota Type ConvCT_

Conversion from J)CD to I.:-IT

The function BCD_l inlCrprctS th~ ~aluc al
input TN a, a J - dccad~ Bcn number and conTh~
verts it to an [NT number at output
three right-justified decades repr~".,nt Ihe absolule va lue oftbc dec imal num~r. Th~ sign i. in
bils 12 to 15. If these bits are "0", th" sign IS
JXlsilive; ilthey ar~ .')", the sign is n ~gat i 'e.
Only b it 15 i, taken inlo account in the con\' ~r
Slon.

om.

If the BCD numh~r contains a p.eudo telrad

(numerical value 10 10 15 or A !O f in hexadc~
imal) , the CPU ,ignal. a progra1llllllllg ~".(U'
and calls organ ization block OB 121 (synchron i ~.a.tion error) . If thIS bl ock is not a\'ailabk, the
CPU g""s to STOP
The funCiion BCD_l sets no >talus

bil~,

'"'

Data Tyl''' for

';011 ,,"'ilh Rounding

0""

1'0 "." h igher

CHI.

RFAl

DINT

flOO R

D~"

ROUND

me
REAe

DINT

ial<ger
To no,-l lo",.,.
,n '''ger
To nD.. l inleg,'T
Without TOundinlj:

R ounding to the

P...-.-wxl~

TRu'lC

nc~1

higher

O~"

intq:~r

The function CElL inlervrels the value at input

IN as a number in REAL fOmlal and comerr, it
10 a number in DINT format al output OUT.
CEIL r~tums an inle ger that is greater Ihan Of
equal to lhe number to be convened

12.4 Conversion of REAL Numbcni

T~bl~

12.4 Rounding Mooe, forthe Conversion ofll~.i\ I _ Number<

If the value al inp ut IN exceeds or falls short of

the range penui"ihle for a number in DINT
fonnat or ifil does not corre<pond to a number
in REAL format, CEIL sets staNs bi t. OV and
O S. Conversion do~. nottakc place.
Roundin~

to the n ex t lower integer

The function FLOOR imerpr<: ts the valuc at

input IN as a number in REA L fonnat and con_
vert" it to a number in DtNT fOIDm! aT OUlpU!
OUT. FLOOR returns an inleger lhat is less
than or ~<iual (0 the number to be convened.
I f the valu~ at input IN ~xc""ds or falls shon of
Ihc rang~ permissible for a number in DINT
format or ifi! d<>cs n<J! correspond 10 a number
in REAL format. FLOOR SCI>; ,talu, bils OV
and OS. Conver.;ion does not take pla~c.

Ro unding t o t h e ntll t integer

The funcri"n ROUND interprels the value al
inpul TN as a number in REAL format and .onv~rH it to a number in DINT fonnat at output
O UT. ROUND Tcturns Ibe nexi inl~ger. If the
result lies exactly betw~en an odd and an even
number. Ihc cv~n number is given preferencc.

If the "alu~ ar inpul IN exceeds of falls shon of

range penni.sible for a oumber in DINT
rommt or if il Jocs not corrc'pond to a numf>er
in REAL fonnal. ROUND scts stalUs b ilS OV
and OS. Conv~'TSion docs not take placc.
!h~

:"0 0 Touod in!:

The function Tl~UNC inlcrpn;ts the value al

input IN as a number in REAL format and con"erts il tn a number in DINT format at nurpur
OUT. TRUNC relUn15lhe inr~gercompon~nt<Jf
th~ number to be convene<!; the m.ctional component is "truncatcd" ,
If the value at input TN cxcce<ls or falls shon of
th~

range p.:nnissible for a number in DINT

format or if ir docs nOI COIrcspond tn a number
in REAL format, TRUNC s~ls slatus b its OV
and OS Conv~"",ion docs no! lake place .

Sum mary of con' erslo ns from R E AL

to D IN T
Table 12.4 shows the differenr eff~cts of the
func\ions for convening from REA L tn DINT.
Th~ range - I to ! I has been chns~ll as examp le.

12 Convenion FunCiioru;

12.5 M iscella n('Ou5 Con v('n ion

F un c tions
Other available conve",ion funct;O!I$ are onc's
eompkme!l1 generatIon, negation. and absolutevalue lIeneration of a REAL number
(Table 12.5). Variables of the spedfied data
Iype or absolute. ftddrcss ed operand. of Ike rei
evant ,ize IIlUSI be applied to the inputs and out
pUIS of thc boxes (for example a doubleword
operand for dna type DJNT).

O nc',

cump~ment

Table 12.5 Misc<:lhme<>UO Con"mion rLlnCllOlll=,-_

One's complement
D!l'o'T

I"'T

The function !NV_[ negatcsilie value II inpul

IN bit for bit and ....rites ilto output OloT [SV_
I replace, the 7.C"fIXS ,,~tb ~s and \~ce \"trY.
The function [NV_ , does nO{ signal erron.
O ne', eon' plement DINT
The function INV _01 negates the value II input
IN bi t for bit and writes illo output OUT. INV_
01 replaces the zeroeS with Oncs and vice versa.
The funclion !NV_01 does nO! SIgnal errors.

Negatio n INT
The fUnchOn NEG_I interpret. the \'alue 8t
input IN as an TNT number. cbanges the SIgn
throuih two's complemenl generation. and
...Titt'S the converted .-alue to OUlput OUT.
NEG_' i5 identical to multiplication "'nk -I.
The function NEG_ I iClS italUS bilS cco. CCI.
OVandOS.

Neltllion DINT
The function NEG_D1 inlerprccts tke value at
inp ut IN ai a 0 Th.' T number, change, the .iin
through two' ~ com plcme!l1 generation. and
writes the eonvened value 10 output OUT.

NEG_OJ i~ identical t<l multipli'lItion by - I.

The function NEG_DI sets StaNS bIts CCO.
CCI.OVandOS.
Negatio n REAL

The function NEG_R interprets ,he va lue at

input IN II.> a REAL number. multiplies this
nl,llIlber by -I. and "Tit~s 11 to outp ... t OUT.
NEG_R ehange. the .ian of the manti$511 even
<In an in"alid REAL number I'EG_R docs not
,ignal errors.

The ABS function interprets the \'8.1ue al input

D' ., a REAL number. generates the absolute
n lue from thi, number. and writeS It to OUlpUt
OUT. ABS sets the sign of the mamina to "0"
e,'en on an invalid REAL number. ASS doe.
not signal errors.

13 Shift Functions

13 Shift Functions

T he shift fu nctions shift Ihe contelll. of a vari

able b il by bi t 10 Ihc left Or right. The b ils
shifted olll arc either lost or are uscd 10 p a d thc
oth~r side of the variable. Table 13.1 provides
an o verview of the shift fu ncI;',n .

13 .1 Processing a Shift Fuuction

Repre.entation
In addition 10 an enable inpul EN and an enable
outpu t ENO. the box fo r a shift funct ion ha, an
input IN, an input K, and an Olltput OUT. The
hcader" in the box identifi es the shift function
executed (for examr1c. SHL_ \V 'tands for
shifting a won! v" ri"ble 10 the left).
Shin bQ ~
(i" oXH",]>le : .hi ll ", len

"'~rd

lAD , epresentation

by word)
SHL_W

=,"'"
'"'
=
-

,.
F BD representation ;

'N

,
.. j
-,'.

W
N

.'

,"0
OC,

p lIl have differen t data types depending on the

shift fun~tion . For ex ample, input and OUlput
atc of typ~ DWORD for th~ ,hill fun clion
SHR_ DW (shift a doubl eword variable to the
right) . Thc variable, applied most be of the
.am e dala type as the inp ut Or output. If you use
opelands with absolute addresses . the operand
SiZC8 must ae~ord with the data lypeS; for
instance, you can l'-V a w ord operand for dam
type INT. lup ut N has data type WORD filr
ev~ry shift fu nction .
See Chapter 3.5 .4. "Elem~nmry Data Types"
for a d escription o f the bits ill ea~h data fom,a!.
FUBction
The shift function is Gx<:cukd ,rI' i. present
at [he enab le input or when power" flow,
through input EN END is Ih en " I . If ex ecuI;on of Ihe function is 1I0t cnabled (EN - "0") .
the shift does not lak~ place and ENO is a lso

0.

IF EN == -1 " or n ot wired
THEN

ELSE

.,.

_W

OUT :- Sfet (IN, N)

oc, f--

END:

'"0

wi,!, Sf", ..

END: = "0"

,\Un rune ';""

T he value to be shifted is at inpu t LN. the number of plac es 10 be sh ifted is at input N. and the
",,"ult is at oulPllt OU T. The input and the Ollt

When Iho Ma<ter Control Relay (MCR) i. acti vated . output OUT is set 10 zero when thc shift
function is proce ssed (EN - "I"). Tbe MCR
does not affect OU!Pllt END.

Table 13 1

shift functiOn> set the starns bits.

Ov~rvicw

Shift Fw>cti"IlS
Sh ift left
Shi ft right
S hift w ith silfll
\(otat. left
I{otat. right

Chapter 15. StalUS BilS'"

uf Shift Function,

Word

Double"'Ofd

V~ri~bk

Variah l.

'"'
'"R
,~

.
.

SIll._ [JW

,,~

DW

SliR 01

ROC OW
ROR OW

e~plain.

how the

Ess ml'le<

hgnte 13.1 gives one example each for var ious

shift functions .
In Ihe case of incl\.'IllCn lal p rogramming, yo"
wii! find the shift funct ions in the Program Ele
men ts Calalog (wilh Vlt-W --> DYFRVlFWS [etrl

13 Shift Func tions

Shiftin!:
",ord ..ari_bl ..

The value in memory word MW \3 0 is ' hifted 4 position, t() the left and """,d in
men'o,), word MVi D2.
SHL_ W

'"'"
- '''' "
MWl30 -

Shifting
doubleword
variabl~.

SHL_ W

'"0
0"' : - MW 132

MW 130

W11161J4

: G IoI:>..I_OB".

ShifI?os

Shifting
with sIgn

'" '"0
'" 00' r-"

"Global DB" .
Shil!Off-

"G lobaL
ShiftOn

W#16#2

MW132

" ' "0

SHR_ OW

". '"

" (;lo..,.,I_ OB".

ShiftPo.;

"
"

00'

"G lobal DB".

ShiltOff-

' "0

The , an.ble I"ActVal" shifted. wnh SIgn. 2 posmons to {he nght ancl tmn,rorred (0
the vHriabl. liDi'pla," .
SHR_ I

I>ActV,,1 -

0"'

"
Th~ value ill ymable " Sh,ftOu " lS , lufted fight by " SluftPos p'"",on.
ancl stored
in Shiftoft'

SH R_OW
"Global DB".
ShillOn-

='"'"

'"
'""

'"0
00'

='""'"

SH R_I

r-

JtDispl;>y

#Ac!VaI

W# I 6#2

00'
' "0

Jt Dlspiay

Figure D . l hampl.. of Sh ift Functions

" K ] or I:'SERT -) PROGRAM H EM[YTS) under

"S h i ftlROla {~".

Shifl function in

rung (LAD )

You ~aTl e mlTl e<:t contJ{\S in s~fies and in parnl leI be rore input EN and after output END.
T he shift box itself DllIy be plac~d a fter a Tbranch or in a bnm ch IhHI Icads dire<.'1ly to the
le ft power rai l This branch can also rune conlaC," before input EN and it n~~d not be the
UPl"'ffilost branch .
The direct connection 10 the left pow~r rail
allow. you to connect shift boxes in parallel.
When co nne<;ting boxes in paralleL you requir~
a coil 10 tenn inatc the run g. If you have not proy id ed error cva lual;on. a.sign a dummy' ope<md 10 lhc coil. for example a teml"'rary local
dala h it

You can connect shift boxes in sC"rics . If the

ENO OUlpUl from tb. preceding box leads to the
EN input of the s~bscqm;m box. Ib~ subsequent
is ~l,,"ays proc~ssed. If you want It, use lhe
r",uh from the pr~~cding box as input valu~ for
a ,ub,equem box. variables from the tcmponry
l ocal data area make a con,enienl imcrm~diat~
buffer.
If you arrang e several boxes in one rung (parallel 10 Ihe kft pow" rail and then timber in
series). the boxes in Ihe UppermoSl bran ch are
rroce"ed r;"" 'rom left to right. followed by
the box~s in the second branch rmm left to
right, and '0 on.
You c~n iind furth~r examples "flhe re presentation ,md arrangement of shift functions in the
li brary Dib~tal Fun~tioIlS program (.FB ll!)
in Ih~ library '"LAD_ R""k"' that you can down_
load from the publi'h~r'~ W~hsi {c (see page 8).

1).2 Shin
S h ift fORCll0 4 in a ru nlt ( FIlD)

If you want the shift boJ( processed in depen_

dence on specific condinons. you can arrange
binary logic operations before the EN ;npln,
You can connecl the ENO ourpU! with binary
input. of olh ..... functions; for instance, you can
arrange shift bo~es in series, "'hereby the EBO
output oflhl' """,OOing bo~ leads 10 the EI'- out_
put of the jub.~equent i>Ql(, If you "'am 10 use
the re~uh from the preccrl'"lt box as input valuc
10 a subsequent box. variables from the Temporary local data area make coovenknt inlcnne<li

ate buffen.
EN and ENO nc'Cd not be WiTN.

Yo u can find funhcr examples of the fepre!en_

talioll and RlTtiogernent of shift fu nction. in the
program "Digital function," (fB 11]) in the
library ~FBD_Book" thaI ),OU can do ....TIlo,ad
frorn the publisher'. Wcb:Slle (sec page R).

The shift number al input N :spccitle$ the num_

berofbit position. by which the contCn!S Ire to
he shifted. It can be a constant or a valiable. If
the shin number is 0, the function is not cxe,
<:uled: ifi! is !>fcuter than 31. the outpUt variabl e
contains zer(l following execution oflhe SHL_
ow fUOCl1on.
Shift word ,"ui ab lc tn !h e r ight
The shift function SI!R_W sb ifts the content .
of the WORD variable a! input TN bit by bil to
the right the number of posilioos lipcdfied by
the .}nn number a, input N. The bil positions
~d up by the shift are padded with .tCroeS.
The WORD variable at output otrr contain.
the result.

13.2 Shift

The .bift number at inpul N SJl'C<'ifies the n ~m '

ber o rb;1 positions by which tl>e contCllts are to
be shifted. [I can be a COlmant or a vmiable. J(
the ,hift number is 0, tbe function is nOI executed: ifil is gn:at.,.. than I !. !be OUlpUt variab le
contains lero following execution of the SHR_
W !Unclion.

S hift word VII r t. hle In the len

Sh irt

The shi ft function SHL_W sh ift. (he conlents

of the WORD variable at input IN b i! by buto
the left Ihe numocrofpmitions specified by the
shift number at input N. The bn posiliQllll ~ed
up by Ihe shIft ace padded with :t~s, The
WORD variable al outpUt OUT contains the
result.

Tbe .hift function SHR DW sh ifts the COntentS

oflhe DWORf) variahle &1 input IN bi! by bi lla
the ria:h! the number of position. specified by
II>e shift number at input '-'. The bit positiOn!
freed up by the iihif't are filled wilh "eroes. Thc
DWORD variable at output Otrr conla;ns the
result.

~hin number at inplll N specific. Ihe numberofbil pO.ilion. by which the COll!emS are to
be shific:ci. 11 can be a Con~t.anl or a \ariable. [f
the shin number IS O. the function is nQ! executed: ifi! is grealcr than I!, Ihe OUtput variable
conta ins ~eT"Q foltowin!! execution of the SH L_
\'1 function.

Tbe shift number al input N specifies ,he num

ber ofbi! posi!ions by "hieb the contcnlll are!o
be shifted. It can be. constan, or a vanable. If
the .shift number is 0, 'he fUnclion is oot executed: ifit IS grcatertban 31, the output variable
contain. zero following eXl'<:ution of the SHR_
OW funclion.

S h ift doub lf ..o rd n rl . ble 10 Ibe

Sh tf! word ,'. n able ..Ilh .ign

The

1~f1

The .bift funClion SHI.._"W shifts the comenls

of the O WORD variabk a! input IN bi! by bit to
lhe left the number of positions spcd fied by the
s hift number 81 input N. The bit positiQllll freed
up by the shiA are padded with zeroes. 11le
DWORO vanable at OUtpul Otrr contains the
!"<."Suit.

dnubl~"'ord

... ri. bl~ to t he right

The sh,ft function SHR_I sh ifts Ihe COntenl1 of

the TNT vuiabk a! input IN bit by bil 10 'he
ri ght the ~umbcr of positions spcci tled by the
shift number at input N. Thc bil positIons freed
up by the ,mil are filled ".. ilh tbe signal state of
bit 31 (wbich is the sign of em N T number),
thai is. with ''1)- if tbe number i. positi.e and

13 Shift Functions

with "I " if the numb..r is negmiv~. T he I:"IT

variable at output OUT contain< th~ result.

J 3.3 ROfale

The shift number at input N spec ifIes the numher of bit positions by which the contents are to
he shifted. It ~"n be a ~(mstant or a variable. If
the shift numb<:r is 0, the function is not executed: ifit is grual~T than 15, all bit pos itions in
the output variable comain Ihe 'ign following
e"ccution of the SHR_I fun~ tion.

Rotate doubleword varIable to t h e left

For a numb..r in data format tNT, ,hifting to the

right is equivalent \0 division with an exponenti.,! nWIlhcr to ba.e 2. The exponent is the shift
nLlmber. The result of snch a divi,inn ~"rre _
8ponds to the integer rounded down.
Shift doublew'lrd ,'ariahle ,,;th s i::n

The 8hift function SHR_ DI shifts lhe ~ontcnls

ofthc DTh'T variahle at input ll\ hit by bit to the
ri ght the nu mber of positions srec1fi~d by tile
shi ft numher at input N, The bil positions freed
up hy the 'hift are padded with Ihe s ignal state
of'bit 15 (whi~h is the sign o[ The DTh], num
ber), that i,. with "0" if the number i, po" it ive
and with " I" if the numbcr is negativ e . The
D[NT variabk at oU lput O UT conta ins the
re suit ,
The shift number at input N spccifi~ s th~ num
ber of bit positions by wh ich tb~ contents are to
be "hift~d. [t ~an be a conSlalll or a variable. If
th~ "h,1I number is 0, the function i, not c..'\c cutcd; if it is greal~r than 3 j, all bil positions in
!be outpnt var iable contain the si gn [ol1o"ing
e )(ccution of the SIIR_ D[ funct ion.
For a number in data format DINT, ,hi fting \0
the nght is equivalent to d ivis ion with an e .~po
n ..-n\iaT number to ba , e 2, The expon ent is \.he
sh m number. The resuit of snch B d ivision corresponds to Ihe integer rounded down

'"

The ,hift function ROL DW shifts the content,

of lh~ DWORD variable Bt inpu\ IN bit bybi t to
Ih~ left thc number of po, it ions sp<.'cificd in the
shift number at in put N. The bi\ positions freed
up by the shift are p added with (he bit position,
that were shifted out. The D\VORD variahle at
ompu l OUT ~ontains the result,

The ,hit[ nnmber at input N sp"cifie s the num her ofbil positions by which Ihe content, are to
be shifted. It can b<; a constan! or a variable , If
the shift number is 0, the funnion is not ~x e
cuted: if il i.' 32, the Contents of the input variable me reta ined and the status bilS are ,el , If
the shift number is .>3 , a Ihift of one position is
executed: if it is 34, a sh Jft o f two positions is
executed, autl so on (shining IS carried out
modulo 32 ).
Rotat~

duublcword va rIable to tb. right

Thc sh ift fu nc tion ROR_ DW shills the coments

o fthe DWORD variable at inl'nt TN bit byhi! to
the right the num ber of positions srecified by
the shift num\>er at input N. The b il po,ition,
fre ed up by Ihe sh ift ar~ padded w ith the bi(
positions thaI were shilled out , The OWORD
variable at outrut OUT eonwins the resul\,
The shift number at input N specifi~:l the num_
ber of bi t po,ilions by which Ihe con(~-ots are to)
be shifted . h C,m b.. a constant or a variahlc . If
th e sh ift number i, 0, the function is not ex e cuted: if iI' s 32, (he eonte1l1s of the input variable aN: N:lained and Ihe ,tatu, bit' are sd , If
the shift numb~r is 33, a ,hift of one position is
cxec1l1ed: if Ihe ,hift number is 34. a shift of
two pO., ilions is exc~uted. and '0 on (shifting is
ex ecuted modulo 32) .

14 Word Logic

14 Word Logic

Word logic combine, th .. valu es of two vanabIes bit by bit accordmg to M'D. OR. or
E"dusive OR. Th e log ic o!,<,ration may be
applied to words or doubl='ord <;. The available
word logk operations arc listed in Table 14, I.

14.1 Processing Il \Vord Logic

Operation

TobIe H.l O,-eryi.w ufWor<! Logi c Opcnuion5

Word logk
"P"ratl<>n

With.

variable

ooubJewurd
v"';able

A-," D

"'iAND_ W

WAND_ DW

0'

WO' W
WXOR W

WOR - OW

Exclusive OR

w~

WXOR OW

Fun ction
Repn~~entation

In additi"n to the enable input EN and (he

enable output ENO, the box for a word log ic
oJ)<Oralion has (wo inputs, IN! and IN2. and one
outp"t. OUT. The "header" in Ihe bo" identifi es
(he word logic operation .x~cUled (for .>:campIe. WAND_ W siands for word ANDing).
Word lo~i' bu
(in cnmp le; 1\.'/0 operati"" "'oro b)' "otll)

LAD representation;

WAND_W
ENO
EN

IN1

OUT

'"
FBD ,"presentation;

WAND W

"

INl

OUT

lN2

ENO

The values to be combined are at inputs IN1

and IN2. and 'he result of the operation is al
outp"t OUT, The inputs and the " utput have
different data types. dependin g on the operation : WORD for word ( 16.bir) o!,<,rations, and
nWORD for doubleword (32-bit) op erations,
The applied variables m us t be of the same data
type as the inputs or rhe output,
See Chapter 3 .5.4. "Elementary Data Types".
for a description "f the bits in the vari ous data
form ats.

The word lo gic operation is executed when I "

is pre<~nt m the ermble input (when power
flows thrm,gh the inpu( E"') _If e"eeu!ion of the
operalion is not ~-nabled (EN - "0"). the open!tion does not take p lace and EKO is al,o "0"
IF EN ". "1- or not wired
T HEN

ELSE

OUT:" lN1 Wlog lN2

ENO: - -' "

ENO:" "0-

If Ihe !>1aster Control Re lay (MCR) is active,

output OUT is ,ello zero wben the word logic
o!,<,nllioD is exec utcd (EN - " I"), The MCR
docs not affect the ENO output _
Word I"Sic operation. gene['~tc K result bit hy
bit. Bit 0 of input INI is comhined w ilh bit 0 of
inputlN2. and the ",suit i. stored in bit 0 of output OUT. The same is done witb b it I. bit 2, and
so on, up 10 b its 15 and 31, Table 14, 2 shows the
result formation for a ,ing]e bit.
Chapter 15, --Starns Bits", explains how the
word logic operation' set the SlatuS bits ,
E~amples

Figure 14.1 show. one example for each word

logic o!'<'ration.
In the cage of incremental programming, you
will lind the word logic operations in tbe Pro-

14 Word I.ogic

Tlo bl~ 1~ . :

R~" II Funn.1OI11n
C
Word Logic Openl1u'"
ContC1lf>< ..finput TNt

C:..."enllO nf ,nrut TN2

R~ull w ith AND
Knulr wi,h OR
Reo"l, wi lh EM'\u.ivc OR

gram

,
,
,
,

0
0
0
0

, ,
,
,
, ,
, ,

0
0

Catalog (wilh V!EW...". O VER.

LCn! KJ or INSERT ...". PitOl.iMM Ell! '

meme~! ~

lMCIS before inpm EJ\ and il need not be the

UJ'PCTl'"I'OSI brnneb .

The direct connection 10 the left power rail

allowo you 10 connect won.! logic boxes in par
alld. When conne<:fing bo"c~ in parallel, you
require a coil to \erminate the ruog, If you have
1101 provided ~lTor .. valu&\i011, "S~'1>Il "
dummy" operand 10 lhc coi l. for ex"", plc a
temporary local data bit.

You can ammgc COOlatts in ...ric3ltDd m paral

leI before input EN and a1ler output 1"0.

VOl' can e<mnect word l<>gic boxes in .cries. If

the E:'-IO ompu! from the prcccdinil tx.>x l~ads t<>
thc EN inpm of the subsequent boA, Ihc subo;c
quem 00.' is alwaY" processed. If you w&nl '0
un the resuh of the prcceding hox as input
value for a subsequent box. "art&bles from thc
temporary l<x:a l data an:~ make con"enient
mlc n m:diate bulf~Tll .

The "oro logic bo~ Llsclfma y he p lace<! a fter a

Tbranch or in a branch lbal1cads dirlly 10 lhe
len pow.". ",;t . This brancb can alS<.> bave con

If you ammge several ,,ord loak 1>u"~">1 ;n one

rung (paraUd \0 the left power rniland tben further in series), the bo~e" in the uppennoS!
branch are proceo.,ed firsl from left to riiht. fol

V! ~WS

Mr:NTIl) uodC>" " Word Logic".

Word IoKie In a rung (LAn)

The four high.".<kr b ttl of memory word MW 140 arc .1 10 .-0"; Ihe ""u l, ;.
stored in m<;OlOrv
. w o rd :>.1W 142
WIIND_ W
ENO

MWI40-

W.,6011FFF

OR

'N
'N '
'N'

IOIl:I~

WANO_W

O~ f -

- 'N
J.tw 140 _

MW 142

..

..

..

..

Van ablcs wtoglc'\al l and \\ LoglcVal2 al'<' OR~d bu Cor bu lind tbe ",.ull
oretl in W1.Oj;ICRCi lt'.
WOR_OW

"Globio l OS".
'M..oglcVal j .

~~v~r

'"0

"

'N '
'N'

t: ,du.h 'e-QR 'oglc

"GlObal DB".

0"' I - WLogkReall

/l'lropul tIM. .k

Hgu~

"Gk>l><!ol OS" ,
lNloglcVall "Global OS".
WLOQIeVal2

WOR_OW

"

0"' f-

'N'
'N' 'NO

"Glob31 OS"

WLOQIcRestl

The ,,due i!C11<"I'lO,e<! by comb inin.l! n riabk.,. "lnpuI &nd I/\fask with
Exclush e..()R is w ' "8riabl c ~ ~uff.,.

It c-~----1 EN
WXOR_W
ENO+-- - - - - i
"

O~

'" 'NO I - MWU2

'"

W1f16/l"FFF

INt
lN2

OUT I-- #Su".....

14.1 Eumpko of Word toll'<' ep.ro.t;ons

iIIflput ll'Masl< -

'N
IN1
IN2

OUT
ENO

I-- /ilSuIIer

14." Description oftbe Wurd Logic Operations

lowed by the boxes in the second branch from

left to right, and so on.

spooding bit in both values tn be combi ned is

You can li nd timher ex~mplcs of thc r~pre,en

tation and arrangement of word logic operations in tho program "Digital Function,' (HI
Ill) in the library "LAD_ Book" that you. ~an
download from the publi sher'. W~bsite (see
page 8).

Since Ihe b its that are "0 at inp~t IN2 also .et
the eorre'ponding result bits to '0" regardl e~s
o f what value thc,e bits have at input IN I , we
also refer to these bits as being "masked",
Masking i. th e primary use for the (digital)
AND operation.

Wo rd lo gic In H lo gl~ ci r cuit (FBD)

OR ope r Rt lon

If you. want to have the word logic box processed in dependence on 8pccir.~ condition s.
you can arrange binary logic operat ions before
the EN input , You can connect the ENO outp ut
with binary inpms from other functions; for
example, you can arrange word log ic box., in
seri es, wbereby the ENO output of the preceding box lead, to the EN input of the .ubsequc-nt
bo" , If you want to u,e the result fmm the preceding box as input value for a .ubsequent box.
variables in the temporary local data area make
convenient intcnnediatc buffen.

OR combines the individual b its oflhe v.lue a l

input [}.II with the corre'ponding b its of the
~alue at input!N2 according to OR. A bit >sult
word OUT will be "0" only if the corre'pooding bit in both val ues 10 be combined is "0".

EN and E:--JO need not be wire d.

EIcl u slw OR oper a tion

You ~an fLOd further cxamples of the repre,en tation and amtngement of logic operation. in
the program " Digital Functions" (FB I I I ) in
the library "FED_ Book" that you can download from the publisher'. Web site (see page 8) ,

Exdusi\ e OR combines the individual b its o f

the \'aluc at input [)-ll with the correspondi ng
bits of the value at inpm IN2 according to
Exclusi, 'c OR. A b it iu result word OUT will be
"1 '. only if tbe corresponding bit ;n only one of
the tWO value, to be combined is .' I" . If a bit at
input IN2 i. "I", Ihe corresponding bit in the
result i~ th~ reverse of the bit at the sam e posilion in IN!.

14,2 D escription ofthe Word Lo gic

Opera tio ns
AN I) operat io n
AND combines the individual bits of the value
at input TK I with tbe corresponding b its of the
val ue at input IN2 according to AND , A bit in
result word OUT will be " 1" only if the corre-

..

'" ]"

Since the b its that are ., I '" at input IN2 also ,..,t
the corresponding result bits to " t " regardless
of what value thcse bits have at input INI, we
also refer to these bilS as being "masked",
Masking i. the primary use for the (digital) OR
operation ,

In the result, only those bits w;th opposing signal statCS in IN I and IN2 priOT to execution of
the digital Exclusive OR operatio n will be " I ".
Locating bits wiih opposing signal states or
'"negating"' tbe . ignal states of indiv id ual bit. is
the primary use for the (digital) Exclusive OR
operauon.

Program Flow Control

Program Flow Control

LAD nnd FIlD provide you with a variety of

options forcomrolling the flow of the program.
You ~an elt;t linear program eltecution within a
block or you can Sl!ucture the progr"m with
pn:!.vammable block calls. You can affect pr0gram eltecution;n dependence on "alues calculated at runt in",. or in dependence on process
parameters, or in accordance with your plant
st"tu.s.
TIle Itatuti htU pro,'ide information on the
result of an arithmetic or mathematical function
and on errors (such as a range violation during
a ca leulat;on). You can incorporate the signal
sUItes of the status bilS directly in your proaram
usinjj: contacts .

I!I

SlalUS Bits
Status bits RLO, BR. CCO, CCI and overflow; setting and evaluating the stat us
bin; using the binary result; ENIENO

16

Jun,p Func thms

Jump unconditionally; jump in dependence on the RLO

17

Mint er Control Rday

MCR-dependence; MCR range; MCR

You ~an usc Jump function. to branch unCOnditionallyor in dependence on the RLO.
A funher method of affecting progrllm execution is provided by the Muter Cont rOl RelA Y
(MC R). Originally developed for relay comactor CQIIIrOIs, LAD and FBD offer" solW-lIre
version of this program control method.

You can USe block functions to struCIlU"e your

program. You can U$e function s and function
block5 ag8in and ag5in hy defining block
panmeter .
Chapter 19. "J31ock Parameters". contains the
examples shown in Chapter 5. "Memory Functions", and Chapter 8. "Counters". this lime
programmed as functiun blOCks with block
panllneters. These function blocks are then also
called in the "Feed" example as local instancC$.

no

=~

18

Bl ock Functions
Block type . block caU. block end; stalUS
local dalll; data block TC,ister, using data
operand.; handling data blocks

19

Block Pa rametcn
Parameter declaration; formal parameters, actual parameters; passing parameten; 10 called blocks; Examples: ConveyOr belt, pans counter and supply

15 Status Bits

The status bits arC binary "flags" (condition

code b itsj . The CPU usc, them for controlling
the binary logic opcralioru; ami sets them during
digital proc essing. You can check these statuS
bits or act upon specific bilS. The slatus bit, ",e
combined into a word, the SlaWS word. Ho,,ever. you csnnot scces. this slatus word wilh
LAD or FBO.

LAD to the fm;t contact in a network , an d

HlD to the first binary function input.

Ln

A bitlogi" st~p e nds w ith a binary value assignment (e.g. of a 'ingle coil or an a-'Signme nl) or
w ith a conditional jump or a block change.
These SCI IF C - "0".
Hesu lt of the logic o p era tlon (RLOj

15.1 Description of the St utu s Bits

Table 15.1 shows the available status bits. The
CPU uses the b inary flags for controlling the
b inary functions ; the tl igital flags indicate
mainly results o f arithmetic ami mathematical
functions.
Fi rst c heck
T he fFe status bit 'lc~'TI> Ihe binary logic wi th;n
a logic control system . A bit logic step always
starts w ith /Fe - "0" anti a binary check
instruction, Ihe first check. The firs! check
sets /FC="I " T he fLr>! ehcek eorre,pondsin
TKbie

1 ~. 1

Slams il its

Bina ry Flags

!Fe

first Chock

RLO

Re<uit of logic

STA

Slatu,

OR

Stat u, "it OR

BR

Binary ""uit

0r><r~tion

Dlgltol F1a ~.
OS
Ston."<i o,crflow
OV

Overflow

ceo

Condition code (itala,) bil 0

Condition code ("atu,) bit t

CC I

The ItLO ,talu, bit is th" intcrmediate buffer in

binary logic operations . In (he first check. me
CPU tran,fer. Ihc eheek r~sult to the RLO,
~ombi nes Ihe ch eck result w ith the Storctl RLO
on cach subsequent eh~ck_ and stores the rcsult.
in turn, in the RLO.
You can store the RLO with thc SAVE coi\Jbox
in the binary ..."ul\ BR. Mcmory functions . timers and counters arc conlrolled using the HLO
and cenain jump functions are execU1ctl. Thc
RLO corresponds in LAD to the pow~r (lowing
in the rung (RLO = "I"' is the sarnc as " rower
tlowin[).

StatttS bit STA ~orrespontls to th~ signal ,lale of

Ihe che~ked binary operand . In the case of
memory fttnctitms_the value ofSTA is Ihe , a me
as the writlCIt ,a!ue or (if no wrile op"ration
takes place, for cxarnpJ<: ;fthe R LO - "0" or th e
MCR is acti , 'e), STA corresponds to the val ue
of the addressed (and unmoditi etl) binary operand.

In rhe ca,e if cdg, evaluat ion' FP or fN, the

\'al"e of the RLO prior to the edge evaluati on i.
,(orect in STA. All Nher binary f unctions ,et
STA = " I",
The STA status bit has no effect on the processing of thc LAD or FRO fun n iortS.

nl

IS Stalm Ilits
Status bit OR
Status bit OR stores the re.ult of a fulfillw
series circuit o r a fulfillw AND condition and
indicates to a subsequemly pX:cs,ed paJ"llllel
circuit or OR function that the ~sult bas
already been determined. All other binary functions ,eselthe OR status bit.

1 ~.2

Setting the St al u S Bits

ThI: digilal functions affect statm bit. CCO.

CCI. OV and as as shown in Table \5.2. You
can check. tbese StalUS blls immediately following thc function box.
SIRI uS bits in INT gil d DINT calcu la tin n.

O verflow
Status bit OV indicates a range violation or the
use of invalid REAL numbers. The following
functions affect the OV status bit: ArithmetIC
functiollll. mathematical funclions, som e convers ion functions, REAL comparison functions.

The arithmclic function.; with data fnmllll$ INT

and OiNT set all digital starns bits. A result of
zero scts ceo and ce l to ''O~. ceo - ''0'' and
CC I - "1" indicates _ positi~"C" result, CCO"1 ~ and eCI = "0" indicalts a negative result.
A range violation ~I S OV and OS (please notc
tbe Olher meanina o f CCO and Cel in Ihe casc
of overflow). Division by zero i5 indicated by
all digital status bits being set to "1 ".

You can c heck Ihe OV status b,t directly.

Stat us bits In REAL ukul. rio ns
Srored on, rn ow

The OS slatus bit Siore s a sci OV Status bit:

Whenever the CPU sets status bil OV, il also
scts status bit OS . Howcver. while the nexl
properly e~ecutw operation !"!:Sets OV. OS
remains SCI. This provides you with the oppoTtunity of evaluatina a range vioillion or an
operation wilh an invalid REAL number. even
al a later point in your program.
You can checlc status bit O S directly. A block
change resets Ihe OS status bit.
Sums blls CCO and CC I
(condition code bits)
Status bilS CCO Bnd CCI provide infom18tion
Oil the resull ofa comparison function, an arithmetic o r mathematical runction. a word logic
o peration, o r on Ihc bit shifted OUt by a shift
function.

The arithmetic functions wilh dala formal

REAL and the mathemalical functions sct aU
diaital slatu" bits. A result of7.cro setS CCO and
CCI to "0". ceo - "0" and CCI - ..... indicaleS
a positi\"C" result. CCO - . \ "and ce I - "0" indi_
catcs a ncgative result. A range violalion '1:\5
OV and as (PlellK note the other meaning o f
CCO and CCI in the case o f overflow). An
in\"ahd REAL number is indicatw when HI!
digIta l stams bits arc sel to "1 " .
A REAL number is rercrred to as "dcnotma lized" ifit is repreuntcd with reduced accuracy.
The exponem is {hen lero; the absolute value of
I denormalizcd REAL number ;" Ie" than
1.17!! 494 x 10.18 . 57-300 CPU, rrcal denormalizcd REAL Illlmbcrs lIS though they were
7.cro (also sce Chapter 3.!!.4 , "Ek"1llcnlmy Data
Type,").
Slal u$ bits for co n"enlon ruu ctio ns

You can check all combinations of CCO and

CCI direclly (s~'C' below).

Of the con\'ersion functions, the two'S complements affect all diaital stams bits . In addilion,
the following conversion functions set SlalUS
bils OV and OS in the event of an error (range
violation Or invalid REAL number):

Binary

I>

I_BCD and DI_BCD:

Conversion of It-.'T and DINT 10 BC D

:>

CEIL, fLOOR, ROUND. TRUNC:

Con"crsion o f REAL fO OU>.'T

r~SQ II

LA D and faD usc 5tatu.5 bit BR 10 implemelll

the EN/ENO mechanism for bo~es. You can
abo set, re~Ct or check SIatus bit BR yourself.

222

15.2 Sel1ing tile Statu S Bits

T"b.llo 13.2 S otting the Statu. B it>

I..'OT calcul.tion

DIl'iT c alculotlon

ceo

The ",.uit is:

< 32768
(ADD_ I. SUB I)
<

32 768(MUI.._I)

- 32 768 to

"
,

",

+110 + 32 767

>+32 767
(ADD I. SUIUJ
,. +32 767(MUL_TJ
)2 76H{OJV I)

( )65 536
Division by Uco

"
"0
,

ov

, , ,
, ,

, "

"

CCI

,
",
,
,

", ,
, ,
, ,
, ,
, ,

ceo ce. ov

-to

imalid REAL number

The resuh is:

+ 1 to"'32 767

"

- 1 to 32767
( )32768

-1'0-2147483647
>+2 14 7483647
(ADD D J. SUB 01)
>+214748 3647

(MUL DI)

2147483648(DIV_ DI)

H " 194 967 296

Di v i,ion by >:oro
(DlV 01. MOD 01)

0;

0
0

The rult;s:

CCO

t<,

ceo cu OV

"

0;

,
"
, " , ,

:-a"c -D

CCO

-1 '0+2147483647

0
110_2147483647

( )2 147483648

,
,

Word logic

CC" CCI

OV

"ro

not zero

t"
with shift nOln be. 0

0
0

ce. ov

"

Co> CC,

Th., result is:

" , "
0

0;

0;

,
,
, , , ,
0
0

in,..lid REAL number

The .e>ult is:

ce. ov

gre aler than

Cotlnrslon

. function
Shirt
The shifted out bit io:
0'.

"

1 5 than

" "
", 0 "
, ", ,
0
, 0 , ,
, , , ,

infinite
(division by zero)

2 147483 648 10

'" denOrrn.'l1ized

~ero)

21 4 7483648
(MUL 01)

<

equal

+ infinite
(divi. ion by

147483648
(ADD OJ. SUB OJ)

, " 0;
, ,

+ DOnnalized

" zero
nonnali,ed

<

ce. ov

, , ,
, ,
,
"
,
" "
" ,
", ,
",
", , ,
, , ,
, ,
"
,
,
, ,

CC"

Comp. ri.on

JU:AL c.lculation

The ,e<uit is:

The ,ult i.

0;

, ,

OV

0'

223

15 SlatUll Birs
Slatu. bit. for comparison functions

15.3 Evaluating the Status Bits

Thc comparison funCliom set the CCO and CCI

st alUS bil S. The flag' arc set independently of
the e~ccutcd compari son function.
Status bIts ror shm runctlon,
In the case of the shift functions, the signal Slate
of the wI bit to be $hifted OUt i. tmnsf=d to
suuus bit CCI. ceo and OV are reset.
Sta tu, bib for .. ord IUlle

If the I"Csult of the word IOllie operation is zero

(all bits are "0"), CC 1 is reset: if at least one bit
in Ihe result is " I" , CCI is sel. CCO and OV arc
rcsc\.
LAD
lalion
>0

-1~
> 0

-H~

--I f <0

=:-I~
<>0

--I f "0

--I f UO

--I f ov

--I f --I"f -

'R

--I f Ftau"" 15.1

'"

LAD : You can usc the nonnallyopen (NO) and

the nonnallyc1osed (NC) contact 10 chk the
dillital status bils "nd Ihe binary result . Figure
IS.I shows the check with a normally-open
contact. The check wilh a normally ..dosed conlacl relums the negalW cheek result. You can
handle Ihe NO and NC contaCI5 for e\wuating
the Slatus bits in exaclly the SAme W3y as lhe
"1I0\"T11.11.1 contacts. You can find c~amples of
evaluating the SlalU!; bi ts (FB II S in the Pro ..
aram Flow Control"' program in Ihe "LAD
Ilook" library Ihal you cnn download from the
publisher's Website (sec palle 8).

A cu=nt OOW$, o r the check

FRO
rcprewnlation

is fulfillw wben

I fI fI fI fI fI fI uo fI Ov fI " fI 'R f>0

Resull gn:ateT th"" zCTO

(CCO=O) & (CCI - I)]

Result greater Ihan or equal to zero

[(CC()-()))

<0

Result less than ~CTO

(Cc()-l) & (CC I-o)

..0

Result less than or equal to zero

[(CCI-o)J

<>0

Result not equ.llo zero

[(CCtFO) & (CCI- !) ,,(CCO J) & (CC I=Q)]

Result cqUai lO zero

[(CCD-O) & (CCI-o)]

Evaluating the Statu. ail<

Result invalid (un~)

( CeO-I ) & (CC I" I)]
Overfiow
I lO V" ]]
Slored overnow
[OS- I]
Binary result
(SR- I]

15.4 using the Binruy Result

F OO ' Direct or ncgalC<.i check ing of the digital
stan," bits and the binary result is pos> ib le. Thi s
is shown in Figure 15.1 by di .....",t checking tor
"igTlal "ale "1". The check fo r signal 'tat~ "0-returns the negated check r~sult. The checks for
evaluation of the 'taN.' hits Can be treated
el<aclly the same as the '"nonnal'" ch~cks for
binmy operand,. You Can fmd e xam pl e, of
uvaluating th~ status bits (FB 115 in th e pro.
gram "Program Fl ow Control"') in lh ~ "FBD_
Book" libr"ry that you C~fl download fro m the
publisbds W~b, it~ (see page 8).
In the case of incremental programm ing, you
will find these ~hccks in the Prul,'Tam El ement '
Catalog- (wilh YTFw ~ OVER\ll"T'WS [Ctrl - K ]
or iKSERT -+ PRlX",RA .'1 ELEMENTS) un dC"T"
"Stalus Bi t~" ,

program an a" ign box without binary opera11ds .

P leas e note that tbe SAVE box docs not KTIninate a logic op~ra tion (starn, bitlFC is not se t
to "0") . The next netwurk thus bugins with an
"upcn" logic operation .
The SAVE bux is not pennitled afte r a Tbranch,
Controllinlilthe blollry

LAD and FB I) affect ev en the binruy resu!! in

order to control the ENG output (i-' igurc 15.2).
If cnabk output ENO is wi,..,d. il> signal ,tate i.
the same as that of the BR. In certain cases
(""OR corresponds \0 fWl~tiun"), \b~ LAD or
fBD fun~tion executed sets the bina'Y result a,
follo ws:
HR,- "l"
for MOW<. for the sbin fimctions and for
the word logic operations

15.4 Using the Binary Res ult

15,4,1
Su !n~

S~ttjng

the Binary Result BR

>

th. blnory ",,"It

OR := OV
for the ari thmetic and mathemat;c,,1 fune_
I; on~

LAD representa tion;

FBD represenlaliorl

r~"ull

------1 SAVE I

:>

BR :- OVor"I"
for th e ~on version function s

t>

BR ;- BR of the called bIod,- in

block ca ll s

th~ ~as~

of

SAVI': co il in a Fung (LAD)

15.4.2 Main Rung, EXIE:"oIO Mecbani.m

You store the RLO in the binary result using lhe

SAVE c,,;1. Ifpown flow, into \h~ SAVE coil.
BR is set, otherwise it is ",set. You program the
SAVE ~"j] in the same way a~ II " ,ingle " cOlil
without binary operands.

In programming hmg"ages LAIJ and FHD,

many boxes h"ve an e nable input EN and an
enable output ENO . If the enable input is "1",
tk fun~tion in the box is proces;wd. Wben the
box is process~J correctly. th e enable output
also has signa l state " 1". If an errOr OCClIn< d"ring procc," ing ofa box (for example , overtlow
dtlring execution of all arithm~tic fllItClion).
.ENO is s~tto "'0" . IfEK h"" sigtl al ,tate "0",
ENO j , a),,, 'ct to "0" ,

l'lease note that the SAVE c'o;1 does not termi11atc th~ log ic op"ation (the !FC staw s b it is not
set to "0"). Thi, means that the log ic operat;""
p receding 'h~ SAVE coil is also th~ preced ing
logic operation for lh ~ next network.
Th~

SAV E coil cmmot be programm<Od in conj unction with a T-bran~h.

SAVE hox in a logk cir cuit (FOO)
"\\'ith the SAVE bo" . you Save the RLG in the
binary rcs"lt. If 'he RLO is "I" bdore the
SAVE box, OR i, se t; othenvise, OR is resel.
You progntm the SAVE hox \~c ""me way you

These chamcteri<tics of E'-I an d ENO can be

uscd in o rder to connect se,eral boxes together
in a cha in. wilh the enable output leading to th~
en able input oftb" n~x t box (Figu", 15.3). 11,i.
means. for example. that the entire chain can be
"disabled" (no hu~c, "rc processed if input I 1.0
in the ~ xample has signal ,tate "'0") or the ,..,s(
of the chain is no longer p rocessed if one box
signals an erro .

225

15 Stall>.' HilS

Is ENO switched?

NO

'"

Is EN switched ?

Is EN switched 7

v",

NO

Is EN "1"?

Is EN - - "t " ?

NO

'"

BR corr ...
SPOMS to tunc-

'R

,. "0 "

tion
Fi\:" r.

1~ .2

BR

YeO
BR ,. "t "

corre

BR not a ff9CtBd

(jeneral Schellliltic for SOIling lk Binary Kosuh

ENO in th<'
Block.

Ca~e

of \)s~rwrittc n

The Prow-am .Editor provides the call of your

own blocb wi lb Ihe enablc inpm EN and th e
enable outpu t E).IO. YOll ~an u, e the enable
input EN to ~a11 the block conditionally. You
can use the ENO output, for example, to 'ignal
a group error (signal st<ltc " ' '', if the block ha s

,.... ,.

NO
BR :- ' 0'

spo nds to func

lion

The input EN anu thc outpllt ENO are not block

parameter> bUI Si.<Hemcm sequences that th~
Program "Editor it<elf g.en erates plior to and fol"
luwing an boxes (81~ o in the casc of [unction,
and function b loch) . The Program Editor usc,
lb e binary result 10 ,lore the ., ignal ,tate at.EN
while the hlock i. being proc essed or to ch,'ck
the error /lag from the box.
1~.4 .3

NO

propnly processed; "0" jf an erro, has

occurred during process ing of the block), All
SYS tClI1 block> aho ~ignal group errors via HR .
b~~n

YOl' contro l the ENO output with the binary

result BR. The ENO output has lbc same signal
state that BR has when the block is ex iled.

For examp le, I3R coul d be set to " I"> at the ,tan
of a block. It" an error lh~'!! o ccur> during pro "
ce " ing of the b lock, for ~xampl~ if a result
exceeds the tixed range "0 that further process
ing nlU,t be f'1"Cvcnted, 8et the binary result to
"0" with the SAVE ~oiLlbox and j ump to the end
of the block w h ere th~ b lock w ill be =ited (in
the event of an e rror, the condition mu,t supply
sign"l . tme "{I"), Plea,c notc lhat the RET coi li
box sets the BR to" I" i f you ~X il
block via
coiL-box ,

we

1m,

-it"'
H - - '"
~ MD"1)}.;:::'
'N1
-,. - 'NO
-.tOO-.,,
;~'.., -.I.i!~'

"

ROUND

OIV_ R

'"0
0"' f-#CREAl
#\ R EAL

'"
"

Coo Utett

'"0
OC;

---'

EN
IN

MOVE
::ioliO ~
ENO
. H l
OUT '.MO 3~;

iiLDINT

-"--

c; ~H~~--:;'
~
"
E ND

HIt"rc 15.3 Eumpl e fo, the Series Conn"" ,ion or.t;N and ENO

'"

. '.:

16 Jump Functions

16 Jump Functions

You can usc jump functions to interrupt the lin _

ear flow of the program and continue at another
point in the block. This program branching can
bc executed un~ondit ionally or d ependent on
the RLO .

16.1 Processing a Jump Function

lowing comp ietion of the jump operat ion. The

box w ith tbe jump label must be at Ihe stan of a
network ("LABEL" in tho f>rogram Elements
Catalog) ,
In the case o f incremental programming, you
will find tbe jump functions in the Program
Elements Catalog (with VIEW ---). OVERV!IlWS
[Orl - K J or I,SEl'I,T --;. PRQGRA)'-! EU:.'fENTS)
under "J ump.,".

Representation
LAD

rep r esenta l lo ~

JumpifRLO - " ]"

Dest
---{ J MP)------l

JumpifRLO - "O"

Dastn
---(JMPN}-----j

Entry, Jump

Jab~ 1

FBD representation

JumplfRLO - " ] "

Jump

iF RLO - "0"

Eotr}'. jump h,b.1

A jum p function consists o f the jump operation

in the form ofa coil (LAD) or box ( FED) and a
jump label d esignating the program location at
whi c h proccssing is to continue aller Ihe jump.
The jump labe l is above the j ump operation .

Jumps ~a!lllot be programmed in eonj UIl ct ion

with aT_branch
A jum p lahel cons is" of up to 4 characters that
csn include letters . digits, and the underscore . It
begins w ith lclter, A jump labe l in a box d esignate, the network that is to be processed fol-

Fu nction
A jump is e ither always executed (absolute or
unconditional jump) or ;t is exeeutcd depending
on the re sult ofthc logic operation (RLO) (condit ional jump). In the case of a jump dependent
On the RLO , you Can de<:ide whether the jump
is to be executed if the RLO is " I" or if the RLO
is "0"

You can e .~ccute botb fo","'ard (in Ihe direction

of program processing; in the direetion of
ascen di ng neN.orK numbers) and baCKward
jum ps. The j ump can take place only within a
block. that is. the jump destination must be in
tbe same block as the jump function . If you use
the Master Contro l Re lay (MCR), the jump
lahel must be in the sam e MCR zone or in the
,ame YlCR area as the j ump function ,
The jump destination muSl be designated
unam biguously. that is , you muSt on ly assign a
j um p labe l once in a b lock. The jump destination can be j umped to from several location s.
The Program Editor ,tores the names of the
jump labels in tbe non executable seetion of the
rel evant blocks on the programming device's
data medium. Only the wi dths of the jumps
(jump displacement) are ,tored in th e CPU's
work memory (in the compiled block). When
program modifications arc made online to
blocks in the CPU, these modifications m ust
therefore always be updated on the program-

16 Jump l' unctions

ming d<:vicc's data medium in order to retain

the original label lUlmes_ If thi. update is n ol
made, or ifblocb are tnm,ferred from lhe CPU
to the programming device, th~ nOll -e x~Ulable
bll"". scc, ion< will b. oven,/riucn or del.:ted.
On the di<play or the printout. tIle Ediwr then
generates replacem<'-'TIt symbols for the jum p
la bels (Moo l , MOO2 c'te.).

whose eoil is connect ed to the left power mil

(LAD) or whose box ha< no preceding logi c
operation (FBD) . This jump function is a!wa:,-s
ex ecuted when encout\tcrcd in the program
The CPU intcrrupts the linear fl ow of the pro gram and con (il1\Jes in lhe network d.signated
by the j ump labe l.

16.2 Unconditional Jump

E~ample (ri gure 16. 1 and Figure 16.2): In Ne(work 3, there is an unconditional jump (0 jump
label M2 . After th is Tl ~twork has be~n proce"ed_ {h~ CPU cont inu"s program e:xecution
at j u",p labe l M2 in Network 5. A jump from
anothcrprogram location is required in order to
ptoees. Nctwork 4 .

The uncondit;onal jum p> which is the j ump that

j, alwoys executed, is jump funclion IMP,

'1~~Ork 1 Conditlorlal Jum p

.:,':

'

:i"'~---1
I t/compVall - (N1

CMP~I

tiompval2 -1.""~''-

If RLO

Ml

~-----{JMpH

___--1

: !'I.~.qrI( 2. Jump to "'II (5 not execut"d

1/-" ~lAcl
f-I___________(
.,

.,

. ~!,rk

iH

3 Uncondttlona( Jump

l~:+;;~~~~~~,_~.-----------------------4(~~H
CondlUon ltlJump 11 RLO _

"O~

"
Entry- 01 "'1 2

Flgu ," 16 .1 Jump FunctiOn< Exa mp le (LAD )

228

16 .3

JumpifRLO ~ "I"'

16.3 JumpifRLO="I"

16.4 Jump ifRLO

The cond itional j u mp if RLO - "1" is jump

func tion J.MP, whose coil is not directly con nected to the left power rail ( L AD) or whose
box has a preceding logic operation (FED). The
logic opemtion preceding this coil can be
implememed in any way. If the RLO = "1" (if
th e preceding logic operation is fulfilled). the
CPU interrupts the lin ~ar flow of the program
and continues in the network designated by the
jump label If the preceding logic operation is
nol flllJ11led. the CPU continues program e.~e
cmion in the next nelV.ork.

The ~ond itional jnmp if RLO - "0" is jump

function JM:I'N, whose coi l is not directly connected to the left power rail (LAD) or whose
box has a preceding logic operatioo1 (rBD). The
logic operation preceding this coil can be
implemen ted in any way. Iflhe RLO = " 0" (iF
the preceding logi~ operation is not fulfilled),
the CPU interrupts the linear tlow of the program and eontinll""s in the network designated
by the j nmp label. Iflhe preeeding logic opera.
tim1 is fulfilled. the CPU continu~s program
ex .... cmion in the ne"'tn~twork .

Example (F igllJ"e \6.1 and Figure 16 .2) : If the

compare condition in N~1work I is fll lfiUed,
projj:tam "x""ut ion eontinlles in Network 4. If
the compare condition is not fulfilled, the next
network. which is Network 2. i ~ processed.

Example (Fig"re 16. 1 and Figure 16.2) : If the

adder in Nero.ork 4 signals an error, the jump to
1','ctwork 6 Uump label MJ) is e X""\l\ed. If no
error is signaled. Network 5 is the ne~t to be
processed.

Network 1 Condittonat lump tf RLO.

CM P

#CompVall

IICompVal2

~=l';IN2
N;'~

~ 1~

*~ I

__J___[jM~''e:J
JMP

N.twork 2 If jump to M3 Is not . " e cuted

OutputO
&
InplllO

----l

Network 3 UncondItional Jump

Network 4 Conditional jump if RLO. "0"

#AnlhVa l1 _-l~'N;',--"O~';'}r-_~'~A~
';~,"~R~'~'~____[i9M~'E:
#ArithV,,12 IN2 ENO
JM PN

Ne twork 5

Entry of M2

I
I
{=='=:}______-{O="~"~'J'

Input1 - 1

&

Network e E ntry of M3

I - I
{=='=:}______-{O="~'''~OJ

Inpu12-1
.'t~ u r.

&

16.2 Jump Function. Exam rl e (FBD)

"0"

17 Mo..ter Control Relay

17 Master Control Relay

In contact control systems, a Master Control

Kelay activates or deactivate. a section o f the
control system thaI can consist of one or more
nmgs.
A deactivated rung
!>

dccoergizes all non_rctentive contactors and

!>

retains the states ofrctemivc contactors .

You C3lllot change the stale of the contac(01"$

again until (hc Master Control R~lay (MCR) is
active.

Please nOle thai deenergiz;ng ",ilh the "soft",.are " Master Control Relay is no SIIbslilUtejar

w, EMERGENCY 0,..,.. or safety fUd/ity! Treat

.HaSler Conrroi Relay switching in ",':aClly Ihe
samC \i'ay as switch ing with a memory jimc1ion!
Wilh I,ICRA and MCRD. you de,ignate an area
in your program in wh ich MCR dependency;"
to take efteet. With in th is area. you use MCR<
and MCR> to define one or more ZoneS in
which th e MCR dependency can be enabled
and disabled. You can also nest the MCR zone .
The result of the logic operation (RLO) immcd;at~ly preeeding an MCR zone enables or disables MeR dependency wi th in that zone.

17.1 MeR Dependency

"'lCR dependency am:ct8 coils an d boxes, If
MCR dependency is enabled (corresponds to
Master Control Relay disabled)

LAD representatkm
A.Uv.te MeR .",a

!>

put sN the b inary operand to signal state "0"

(following the midline output. the RLO is
thcn - "0", that is, power no longer nows)

Open ;I.(C(( .one

Cluse MeR ,one

FBD

r ep'a~entat i oo

A.Unt. MCR o",a

Deoetlva l>ICR aITa

a singk coiior assign box and 3 midline out-

t>

a Set and re set coil or box no longer affect

the signal s13te of the binary operand
("freeze it")

t>

an SR 1lOd RS box no longer affect the signa l

state of the binary operand ("freeze it")

t>

a ln1Il,r<:ropcration write s zero to the digital

operand (every function OUlput ofa box of
digital data type then writes zero to the operand Or to the variable)

-------l MCR< I

Additional to the direct innuencing of an oper~

and the RLO is then "0' (power no longer
flows) behind a midline output and aT-branch .

IMCR>I

Some LAD and FBD function. use tn.n,rcr

statement. (inv isible to the user). Since a transfer statement write8 the value z ero if MeR
d~pendency is swi tched on, the corresponding
function Can no longer be guaranteed

IMCRDI

17.2 MC R A rca

Yo" m'lSl exc/ude Ihl.< /hllm"'ng progra m ., ee_

litm.. / i-om MeN dependcn<y at/Wlldse the
CPU ,1'111 go 10 STOP or "nde/in"J nmlim<!
bd'''''io r <'un occur.
r>

Dlock call s w ith block param eters

I>

Acce sscs to block panlII1eters that a ", pa_

ram"'"," types (e.g . BLOCK_ DB)

r>

Accesses to b lock parameter. that ar~ ~om

pon~"Ilts or eiemetlt< or ~ompl ex data types
or UDTs

17.2 :\'ICR Area

You enable MCR dependency in a zone ir th~

R L O is '0" immediately priOT to op ening the
zone (analogou, 10 disabling the MaSler Cootrol Rday ). If you open an MCR z one w ith
R LO" I ( M a'tet Control Relay enabkd). p ro
ccssing within this MCR 7.0n~ take, p lacc wilh_
out MCR dependc n~y . .\1CR dependency is
cffccti v~' "nly within an MCR zon~,
Tn ' hc case of in~r(:menta l programming. you
will tind the MCR nm~tions in th e Program
Elements Calalog (with VIEW --> OV.I'RVlI'WS

Bh><:k 1

[eLrl - K l or b ' SERT --> PROGRAM ELEMENTS)

under " Program C"ntrol" .

Block 2

To b e able to "se the characteristic fearnres o f

Ihe Master C omml Relay. ddin~ an MCR area
\>"ith NlCRA (start) and MCRD (end of the
M e R area), MeR depcn(kn~y i, aClive wiLh in
an MCR area. but not yet ~nabled (F igure 17. I ).

TtIc MCRA coil/box and the MCRD coi!Jbox

a lway!, ,'ann alone in separate n etworks .
If you call a block within an MCR aTca. M CR
dependency is deact ivated in the block callcd.
An MCR area on ly Starts again with \hc MCI{A
co il/box . Wocn a block is c xited, MeR dcpen<Jellcy is ,et as il was before the b lock was
called. regardless of th ~ lI.ICR dependency w ith
wrnch the callc d "I ,,~k W",", cx i ,~d.

Block 3

MCRA

MCRA

Bloc+< call

MeRA

BlocJ(cali

MCRD
MCRD

B lock end

Block end

Bloc k en d

Fi\l:"'" 17.1 MCR Arc. in the Case "f Block Change

231

17 ;"1 _ Conlrol Relay

17.3 MeR Zone

LAD : You define an MeR ;wne with tbe

MClt < coil (~tart) and tb~ MCR> coil (cnd of

doe MCR zone). The MCR< coil r~u1Tl'~ a preceding Ingic opcl'mion: the MCR> coil is connected directly to the left power ra il. Both coi l.
tcnninlite a rung. Within this zone, you control
MCR dependency wilh thc RLO prior to the
MCR< coil: If power flows inlo the e",1. _\.tCR
dependency is di~abled (,n onna" Prlx:es.in.j);
if po" cr docs not flow inlo the coil, MCR
d<.-pendcncy is cnahlcd.

"'8D: Youdcfine an MCR zone with the MCR<

box at the beginning and the :\fCR> boll .1 Ihe
end oflhe :\1CR zone. The MCR < ho~ rcquin:s
a precedi ng logic opcnu;on; the MCR> ho~
stands alone in a network. Within this zone . you
control MCR dependency with tite !U.O preceding the MCR<box: If it i. '"1", MCR dependency i~ disabled (,"normal' proce~sln il); i f il is
"0, MCR dependency is ~nabled.

L&d

representation:

IH
I
t

/MCRzon.

I,

~1 .;

I ..

, 1.1

(MCR<H

(MCR<H :

I
I
I

---l

A block call witbin mn MCR !.One ~s not

emnie the nesting dc-pth II f an MCR zone. The
program in the callII'd block is lIill \1\ the MCR
zone that was open when the block was called
(and is controlled form here). Ho"<c\er. you
must reactivate MCR dependency in a called
block by opening the MeR area.

In Fill"'" 17.3, memory bit~ M 10.0 and M

11.0 eontrol the MCR dependencie,. Wi t~
memory bit M 10.0, you can enable MCR
depe ndCIl CY in both zones (wi lh "0') fCllard-

MeR"'!

t 1.1

---l

MCR<!

S"'i<chi"" "fMC,,,

~""Y

ill MeR ;:QIl' 2 ooly if MCR

2J

,
0

S"';Id:.ing QD ),liCk dopoJODCY III

MCR."""" I and Mt:R...-2

"

(MCR z_1J

{J..teR zone

.~

'supraord inat e zone, you cannut disl,bJe MCR

dependen~y in a ',ubordiMlc" MCR zone. The
Master Control Relay of th e tiTSt MCR wne
controls the MeR .lc-pendency in all nestll'd,

! MCRA!

'I':'
.rl<
,'ifMC"!hpn"
.., "t', 2}
S-;,'l,il..

You control the MCR dqx:ndency of a ne~ted

MCR zone with tbe RLO on opening the lOIlC.
However, if MCR del"'ndcncy ;'; en~bkd in a

FBD rep' .... nt-'Ion '

(MCR.4}-l

You can open lID MCR !.OlIe within llllOth~

MeR zone. The nesting depth for MCR !.Oncs
is 8; that is, you can o~n a lone up to eig:itl
timc.~ hefon: you close a ZOne (Fililure 17.2).

(MCR>H ,:

I MCR> I

(MCR~H

! MCR~ !

{MCRoJ-i

I MCRO !

deponden<:y in MCR rorlO T il

.wi t, ~e<I

otf

17.4 'ktlin& and R..~cuin& UO B;I>I

,.
MCRA

MCR<

F-{.''"<f-{\ M 10.0 --i

[MeR zone 1]

IMCR

ron&

I MCRA I
[MeR zone '1

[MCR zone I I

I]

[MCR

zone 2J

BlOCk call

MCR>

MCR>
MCRD

I MC RD I
" Iluft 17.3 MCR Zone> in Ihe Cau of llIod Change

le55 of iM C sig nal 5Iale of mem ory bit M 11 ,0,

If the MeR d"pendency for zone I is d i, .. bled
WLlh M 10.0 - " \", you can coutr"l the "feR
dcpcudency of zone 2 With memory bit M 11.0
(T~bl c li.I).

17,4 Setting aDd RC5C1 t1ng 110 Bin

Despite enabled MeR dependency, yuu can .et
or rc~"'t the bilS of an JlO I'll'a with Ihc syslem
functions. A requirement for Ihis is Ihat Ihe hits

to be COntrol led arc: in the pro~~ ss_i mage OUlput

table or II procc,,-imaIlC output I" ble ha.~ b""n
defin ed for the UO ar"a to be oontr"UeJ.

Th" syst"m function SFC 79 SE T is a vailable

for :settin g and S FC 110 RSET for =<<!tting Ihe
10 bilS (Table 17.2). You call Ih"'" syslCTll
f"mehons in an MCR :/;on". The system functions are on ly df<!{:ti"e if MeR d"pcm.lcncy is
ennbkd; if MeR dependency i~ disabled. callina these SfCs has no effect ,

TMbk- 17.1 \1CR [kpcndcncy in Lbe ea.., of':'e.<tru MeR Zo...,. (Example)

MILO
'" I ~

''0''

7.<>r>o 1

One :l

!>OO MCR dep..--n<knr;y

Nn MCR dc-pendenC)'
MeR dependoonc)' enabled

MCI!. depeodency """bled

17 MasterCODlml Relay

T~blc

17.2 ParamctCT< of the SFC. fo' Controlling the 1/0 Hi"

P"""ncter

Decl ..... tion

D.ta Type

INPUT
OUTPtIT

~,

on

OUTPUT

POlJ'.'TER

VAC

"

""'U,

RET_VAL

OUTPUT

en

<A

OIJr ~UT

POINTER

INT

Setting and res~t(in& I h~ VO bils aho simulta

neously updales the process-image OUtpUl
table. The 1/0 are affeet~d byte by byte , The
bils not selected with the SFC, (in the tirsl and
in th~ last byte) retain the signal stat~s as they
arc currenlly availablc in the procc" image.

A",isnment. Oc>cription
Numh,,- of bit< to I>e .et
FITor information
Pointcr to the first bit 10 l>e set
Number ofbi" to l>e reset
Error information
PUll"''- t~ the first bit to be res<:t
You call rmd examples of the Master Comrol
Relay and of the SystCID functions SFC 79 and
SFC RD in function b lock FB 117 in the libraries
"LAD_ Book" and "FBD_Book" in the rrogram
"Program Flow Control" that you can download
from the publisher's Website (see page 8).

18 Block Fuocriom

18 Block Functions

In th .. chapter. you will learn ho" to call aDd

terminlLtc code blocks and how to work with
operands from data bloch. The n"xl chapter
then deal~ wilh using blo;;k pl,ramctcrs.

18.1 Block Functions ror C ode Blocks

Slod. functions for code blocks include
instructions ror call;ng and terminal;ng blocks
(F;gure 111.1). Code b!<xl;" (111: called with the
cl,ll box. If functiollS or system functions havc
no block parameters . they can also he called
willl the CALL roil Or with tbe CALL box. In
both cases. a pre<:edinj; logic op.,ration
tnablina a conditilHllll call (call dependent on

lAO rapr. .en !.lOtion

C.11InK on f8 or SFH
whh d... bl""k
a. 1"".1 instanU

D'.

".

- '"IN'

IN'

-- 'N
OUlI -- IN'
IN'

'NO

OU"

--

au"

In additi"n to Ihc block change. Ihe cal l box

alw contll;n. the tmnsfer of block parameters.
Whtn fonclj<m blocks are called. it als<> opens
the instance data block. Th .... CALL coilJbo~ is
00 _
than a change 10 anoth~"T block and is
oruy muningrul (and pcnnis.sib1c:) in the case
of functions and sy.l~m functIOns.
After a block has been lenninatcd, and follow ing the call function, (he CP U contin"," pro_
!,Iram execut ion in the blO<.:k tbnt made Ihc cal l
(tbe ......
block). If an orgnni:r.ation block is
terminated, the CP U returns 10 the operat;ng
$y$tem.

nina

Callin/( an Fe M STC
with CALI. t><>.
with CALL ooil

.,

'N

ENO

C.III"iI an FB or SrB
., 1"".1 'nS\8lnce

["'ponde"t on RJ.n

IN'

OU"

IN2

OtJT2

--{ RET}----i

FBO "'prflSflntation:
with <13 ... bl""k

HI...... nd

,C.

OLn.me

,"0

mm

conditions) is permissible. The block "'ml futM;~

lion RET always requi:, .. preceding logic
ope..al1on.

ComHi on Fe or SFC

with .;m-,-"'-' r.;",~""C"C.C---

wi!" CALL box

CAlL OO~

o.."p<"do,,! on RLO

CALL

-IL-'c:'::.T-,

,C.

FIKure t8.1 Rlocl: Function, fnr Cod ... Block>

EN

OUT1

INt

OUT2

IN2

ENe

-1

'C.

18 Block Functiom
In Ihe case of incremental pn)~lullming, you
will find the CALL coillbox and !be RET coill
box in the Progrtlm Elemems Cata log (with
VtEW --J> OVEll.VIEW~ [Clrl K 1 or L'SlRT--J>

consi~t~

of Ihe call box that CO il hlins the ad~s. or the called bl"d: (here: Fe
10). the enable inPUt [;N, thc enable OIltpul
ENO, and any block puameters. Following
proc~ingoftbc ~"Il function, the CPU OOnlinues progrHm cxec\U;on in the called block. The
block is procc"ed to the end or IIm;1 a bloc k
end function is cn~oumered. The CPU the n
rerums to the calling: block (here: 013 I) arid
cominucs proccssiull this hloc~ alkr the call
A block c"U

rROGRAM I::LlMENTS) under "Pro~ Con-

Irol"; you insen block calls with caU box..,. mlO

your progrnm when you select blocks from --FC/
J'H/SFClSr H bl<.><.:u", '"Multi ple In.tunces" or
"Libraries".

.".

The infonnalion the CPU requires to find iiS

way back 10 the euUing hloci< III stored in the
block stack (lI sUlek), With every new blod::
enll. a new ,t"ck elemcnt is c""mcd that

If a code hlock i~ 1<\ be processed. it must be

"call ed"_ Figure I R.2 g:ivcs an example for caUing functi on FC 10 in organiz"tion blo.>ck OB l.

.. .
"

C_Ili_1l b .... k.
~ .I. "'11_. 1... 11,," block O BI
NetwoJ'k pIior to

~od< ca~

,,

N"twor1<: blOCk call wiII"I p"'ameteo"&

11-- -1""
HH""

Fe 10

~ -- ~

'"0' -- - -1 '

Ii

,, ~

04.0

\"1 _0

... --,
"ro<~,sin!l. oj"blod 1"''''mOl....' CO'ro!sIJQ",h
,,, p1W~,,;n/( of Ih. ~cl""ll'/zr;abl~., durinj{ "'"""'~

'N'

,,-----C"lIfn~ rIt~ Mod M;'~ ""tfPI"",n <If 1M ",,=nt ""rlabl~1

C..l1ln K bk><:k.
~ .~

i'Q

a 'll" nt.",llon b lock O B I

Networl< pnor to bJod<

ca~

Netwo<t<.: DIOdo: caW with

--

pa~

Fe 10

;,
FiJ:;"'"" JIU Exampl. n( a Rlock Call

th. blocio: P''''''''<'''~'

I g. 1 Block Functions lor Code Illocks

includes Ihe retum address, the contents of the

data block register and the address o f the local
data stack of the calling block. If the CPU gocs
to thc Stop state as a result of an error, you can
usc the programming devic e to sec from th~
contents of th e B stack wh ich blocks were processed up to the error_

or ENO. You can only insert a call box in a paralld rung if it is connected directly to the le ft
po"'e r rail.

You can transfe r data to and from thc called

block for processing. These data a rC transferrcd
via block parameters . With th e call box, YO ll
can also call blocks without bloc k paramcters.

.\-1eR dependency is de_activated when II block

18.1.2 Call Box

You use the call box to call FBs, Fes . SfBs aDd
SFCs_ (You cmmot call organization b locks
since they nre event-driven and arc stancd by
the operating system.)
You can Usc the EN input to make Ihc bl o ck c all
subjec t to conditions. If the EN inpul i, connected dirCCI to the left power ra il , the call i,
absolutc: it is al ways ~x~cu:ed. If there is a
log ic operation preceding EN, th~ block call i,
only executed if the prececting logic operation
is fulfilkd. The EI'O output has thc s ame s ignal
state as the binary result BR on e xitin g the
called bloc k.
IF EN "''' "1- or not connected
THEN

ELSE

Called block is processed

Ca lled block
is riot processed

IF called bloc k return s

8R = 1"
THEN

ELSE

ENO :- "1 "

ENO :" "0"

ENO := "0-

You lobc l th e parameters of the called block

w ith thc absolut~ or symbolic operand current
for the call. If a parameter is of data Iype
HOOT... precede this parameter with

> a contact or a rung (LAD) or

> a binary variable Or II binary logic operation
(FBD).
A Boo lean output parameter cannot be combined funhcr,
LAD: You can arrange several call box~s in
scri cs, connecting th cm with each other vIa E~

rBD, You Can connect call bo~cs in ser ies by

connce ting the ENO output of onc box with the
EN input of the next. Th~ E N O OUtpUIS of~ev
eral boxcs can be combined with AND or OR
is .allcd. The MeR is di,Hblcd in the called
b lock regardless of whether the MeR was
e~ ab led or disabled prior lu Ihe block call ,
Wl'en ex ilin g a block, MeR dependern;y
asmme, the same setti ng that il had priur to the
block call
Depe"ditlg on thc block paramet~", you can
modify Ihe ~ontcnts of thc dala block registers
when the b lock change is made _ If the called
block is a function block, the instance block is
always opened in Ihis block v ia the DI rcgiSlcr_
If the calling block is a fu nction block, Ihe contents of the D l registcr (thc in stan ce data block)
are retai ned aftcr thc block caU , The contents of
the DB register depend, amung other things, on
Ihe block paramct~rs that w ere passed,
Calling function block.
You call a fu"ction bl ock by .electing the rele"am func tion block from the Program Element.<
Catalog under "FB Blocks". Pr~n;qu;sitc is that
the function block to be called mnst a lready be
in th~ u ser program_ You write the ins!an~c dala
block belonging to the call above thc box. Both
b locks (function blo<,k and in'tancc data block)
can ha,c abso lU!e or symbolic addresses.

In the case of func tion blocks. you do nOI need

to initial ize all block paramet~rs at th e call. The
unin it; aH~ed block parameters rela;n thcir currenl value. However. b lock parameters saved..,;
po int~rs shonld 21 least be initialized when
called for the first time so that m e ,mingful values are ~ntered here (,ee Chapter 19.3 , "'Actual
Paramclc," '").
You can also c all function blocks with multip le instance capabi lity" within other "'functio"
blocks w ith multiple in'tance capability"' a,
loc al instance , In doing so, the called function
block uses the instance data block of the calling
function block as the storc for its local data.
Prior t(l the call, you declare the local instance
in the static local data of the calling function

18 Block Functionl
block (Ihe hlock you arC ~urrenl ly programming). The local illstancc " called by 5e1eClin g
one o f the available local ill' tances under 'Multiple Instaocel' in the Program F.le-mctU5 Catalog; it is nut D~'CC;;:;aay to ,pecit)t an instance
data block (~e also Chapl.r 18 1,6. "Slatic
Local Data'').
CalliDl:

functl"n~

Hlock

You call a function by seleeling the relc"anl

function under "Fe Blocks in the Program
Elements Catalo~ The function C1lO have an
ab.olute or a symbolic ndru-.,ss.

When you call functions . you

available para11lete l"!l.

mu~l ini(ializ~

all

Calling runetions with a function value tab,

e~l1ing fimel;on->' with
no function value. OnLy the fml OUtput panuneter, corresponding to the functioo valll" _ has
the name RET_VAL.

exactly the.same fonn >IS

Call in g 'Y"ltm blocks

'fhe CPU U]X'l1It;ng system cOIll~ills system
Cunctions (S~C$) and system funclion bloch
(SI'Bs) thai you can u.'<C. The numbe.- and type
of.ystem blocks depend., on the CP U. You can
call all system blocks with th., call boll:.
VOII call a .~ySlc m function bl""k in the 5ame
way 8., 01lC you have wrinen yourself: . et up the
associated instance data block in the work
memory with the !iIIm.. data type as th~ SFB.

,n

You call a system funct'on tht: "ame "'y "-~ a

function you havc written you~elr.
only in th~ C PU or>eraling
If you wont to call sy~t~m bloch during offliIll> progrnmming. th~ PTolP"m Editor
oeeds a description of ~ call imerC....:e 1O ;1 can
initiali~", thc ]lIllIll~t""'. You will fmd t/lli;
interface ~pt;nn under S)slf~m Function
Blocks on the librnry namc-d Sumdard Lihra,},.
From here. the Ptogram Ed,[or copies the imerracc description 10 the omine hlO<'k colltA iner
when you ~,,1L a ~y~tcm block. The interface
description thm ~'Opied then appeDnl us "nor,nal" hlock objCCI.
Syotem

hlock~ cx;~t

~Yl'tem.

The Prognun Elc-men!..'! Cataloa provides the

s)">tem blocks eW'T\:nt!y available ;n the u,,-,c
pmgram WIder "SI'C BI""ks" or "Sfn Bloch".

23l'1

You Cllll , I'Dr ~x amp lc. ~cle~t a sy.tem block

frt)tn Ihe Program Elemenls Catalog with thc
moo<' and drag it to the block c urrently being
procnsed block. wbc-re it i~ then called. AI the
same IUnc, this bl"ck (or. runIC precisely: ils
inl4Tfac~ d.,scllption) is copied imo the block
contninec.
~~JJ,

in

5equtn~~

(FRD)

If you COnnect block boxe. in sequence in 1"00,

and ha'e to "paSs 00" binary signals from one
OOll: 10 tbe nell:l. you must observc the pr<>C<:SiI_
ing s..quenee of the binary logic operations by
tbe program editor, The biruuy operand ~ and
logic operation, arc initially processed prior to
the bolt inputs, starting with the "last' block
boll; the intermediate binlll)' results are saved in
the temporary local dalu (not shown). FolluwLog this, the pmgnutl edttorproces.es tbe boxes
thc-lIl.dves and th~ir binary ompulS , commcncina "ith the "fmil" box.
Figure 18.3 c1ar:itie~ the processing S/: q\l~l1 cc.
The OR box wilh the Ihn;c input~ i~ inittally
procnsrd prior to the rialll block. then the OR
boll: "'ith the twO inputs, followed by the left
block call (~"Ontrol of Pumpl) and CID.1I1y the
righl block eaU (l'um(2). Tile t=>porary local
~arilIble ",_PI Faull wauLd IherefOlre be
scanned [lTSt (DIl Ihe OR box Wilh undelincd
~igna l state) and Ih ~n ~et (at lhe hinary o Ulp\\l of
the first block caU). Thi~ could result in fo !sitlcation of thr result Olf the log;c operation.
&:medy: ust' a globlLl '-ariable- (e .g. a bil memory Or a data bil; ",Ihi. ~HSr. a chang~ in status
al the output of the til'!ll 1>10<:1<. would only be
conSidered in the next Jlrngr~m ~yde "t the
input of the ' econJ block) for pa,;,ing on the
sisnal, or divide tht block calls bcl"een IwO
nct" orl<,;.
18.1.3 CALL Colll8o'l:

You cnn ~all functio!l~ ano.! system fu!letion~

using the CAI.L eoWhol<. II is a requiremet\l
tbut 'he ,~ll~d bLock.s have no bLockpammrters ,
You eM use th., CALL enillbox if a block is 100
Jona or not clear .,nougb fOf you by ~;mJ'lLy
llreaking down"' the hlocl into sections and
calling the stttiOIU one aftcr Ihe other. One sinIIle CALL coiL or bolt is permit1cd per network.

18.1 Block Funelions for Cotk Blocks

~ ~_""C=;-=-~':-~=.:~{:-~'-;'-~..'.'.~
-..:, -:::J[==l~::-::.::. :j:;.;I -....,.. - - '- '1""-"

.. ......
-''-

.. _

H'

.. _

,- -..

........

~. -

..... " ' -

Fl~u""

18.3 Block Call. in S<><tunce (1'80)

LAD: Iftb~ CALL

Ih~ I~ft pOwcr rail,

eo;1 is connected dircetly to

the call is always ex<'<:Uled
(unconditional call). Ifth~re;s a logic operation
precedmg Ihc CALL coil. Ihc call is only executed if Ihe preceding lo"ic Operation is ful
filled. Ib ~t is, if power flows into the CALL
coil . If the prc<:eding logic operation i~ nOI f,d
filled. th~ call is nOt cxccll\cd and the next ne{
work is processed_
FBD : If there is a logic opention preceding {he
CA LL box. the call is executed only wh<-n the
preceding logic operalion is fulfilled. lhal is.
when Rl.O" "1 '" is pr~scnt at the CALL box. If
the precc>ding logic operation is nOI fulfilled,
the call i~ not cxttuted and Ihe nexl nctv,o,k i.
immediately processed.
When a block change is made. status bit OS i.
re$Ct: starns bilS cco. CC I and OV are nO!
affected.
MeR dependency is deactivated when a block
i5 called. The MCR is disabled m the called
block reprole.s of whelh~r Ih~ MCR "as
enabled or disabled prior 10 the block calL
When H block is exited. MCR dependency
Hssumcs the .ame selling il had prior 10 Ihe
block cnll.
Calling a block with the CALL coilibox sa\-es
thc data block regis!e", in the B stack: Ihe block
end restores their contents "'hen Ibc called
block is eXlted. The alobal datil block tlllTCtlt
prior to th~ block call and Ihe instance data
block are also open following th~ block call. If
no datD block was open prior 10 tbe block call
(fnr example. no instance UBlH block in OB 1).

no datD block is open following the block call

cuh~r. regan:ll~s of which data blocks may be
o pen m the called block.

18. 1A Block End Function

You can tenninate processin" in a block prema.

Nrely with Ibe block end function RET.
Condtlloul btod' ud
LAO rOpnl!lenta\ion;

FeD

~Mntation:

--1

RET

Thc block ~nd fune{ion is rc-pre,;<;:nted as II coil

or box requ iring II precedin" logic operation .
Th~ RET eoiVbox muSI be olnn~ in II nelwork.

If the preceuing logic operation is fulfilled. thc

block is eXiled. A return jump is made to Ihe
previously processed hlock in wbich Ihe block
coli look place. If an organiul ion block is ler
minated. th~ CP U .-c:lums to the system p rogram.
Iflb~ preccding logic operat ion is not fulfil1ed,
the next nctwork in tho block is processed.

IF preceding logic operation .". "'"

THEN
ELSe
The block
BR :"' " , "

t. ex ited

The next n elworl< i.

processed

BR

:c '0"

18

OI~k

fWKTions

The R ET roilJbox simultaneously StO~~ the

RLO (whelher power flows or not) in binary
'Suit RR, ~~ardICl!s of whether or 001 the lo~i~
opcrt!iOl1 was fulfi lled. The binary ~ul! "
decisive far coturol1ing the ENO outpUt at the
call box (set! also <-"bapter 15. StaIU. lilts'").
18.1.5 TCnlp"ra ry Local I)ala
You usc the Icmpomry local data to buffer
~su1t~ Brisina during processin~ of a block.
TemporlU)' lotal data are available only during
bloc k proct'llsing; onCe a block ha!l been pT<).
eessed. your buffered data a", lost,
Temporary local data are opcnwd.< wbieh lic in
the local darn stack (L .taek) in system memooy.
The CPU's Qpcraring systcm malu:s the tempo.
rary local data for a code block available when
thaI code block is cal1e-d. When a block i.
<':1, II<:d, Ih<,: value. in the L stack arc virtually
ooineidenta1. In onkr to be able to ,"ake nnsi
ble u<c aflhc local data, you ruu.t f1rst "rit~
them priQr 10 reading. When th e block is lenni
n.,tcd. the L stuck is aS5igned to the next block
ca ned,
The number of temporary local data bytes a
block require~ is in the block header. Reading
the header lel1s the Op"rating sy.tem how many
bytes have tQ be reserved in Ihe L nad: "ilen
the bl()(:k is calk-d. You. too. can tell from the
entry in the block header just how nuony local
data bytt'llthe block requires (using the Editor,
wilh the block open, by invoking F"u.E -+ PROp
DtT1r~~ or in the 51MATlC Manager ","ith EDtT
-+ OIlJECT PROPI:RTIl;S, in ea<;b ea.se on tab
"Oencnd Part 2").
I)t~larln8 tfmpo~ary

local dlltll

You deelarc the tcmporary local data in the dec

I..... tion """I;on of the c<>de bloc k:
I>

I>

under"temp" in the case of inc",meDlDI pro

gramming, or
bet",""n VAR_TEMPand END_ VAR "'the
~a.sc of:wu",e""";eDled programming,

Figure 18.S shoWl' an e)Camp'c for th~ de<:lara.

lion o f leffiP'lrary local data. The variable dif
fen:nce li~s in the tL"IIlPOI1U)' local datu and is o f
data type TNT; the variable b"ffe~ is of data lype
REAL.

'"

Thc temporary local data an:: stOred in lite L

stack order of their dcclaTl'tion in accordance
with their data type.
Sy mbOlic add", lng of t~mporary local d ata
You reference tempomry local data "sin~ their
<ynlholie names. You lI.sign the se nameS in
accordance w ith the rulc~ ror blocklocal ,.ym.
bois.

All operatiO<)l; al10wcQ for bi! memo!), arc also

allo","ed for tempol>Q)' local data. PJea;;c note,
llowever, tbat a temporary local data bi t is I10t
suitable for USe a. an edge memory bit because
il does not retain its .ignal stDle oU!$'dc the rei
e"ant block.
You Can address the tcmP'lRry local data for a
block only within thai block (e)Cecrotion: the
Icmpor,u), local data for the cRlling block can
he accessed via block PlU1lmeters.)

5i,.e "f the L <tack

The 10tal size 01 the L ~tack is CPUspecific.
The availahle number or tempornry local data
byles in a priority cl as., that is. ;n the progrum
ofan organi7lltion block, is also prcQelem'incd.
On on 57300, the number of WI11pQRry local
data bytes i. fc<~ for example Ihere II~ SIO
bytes per priority ela~~ on Ihe CPU 314. On an
57-400. you can specify the number QflC1llpo.
nuy local data byles you w,1I need wh~n you
initialize the CPU. These bytes mUSI be: shared
by the blocks called in Ihl: relevant organi~ti{ln
block as well as by tbe block~ which Ihey ca ll.
Please nOle that the Editor also uses temporary
local data, for in'tan~c for pussillg hl<>ek
param~ters. a fact which gocs unnot iced ou the
pro~g inlerfa.e.
Decl.",,;""

Data Type

A .....

STNtO

ARRAY [1..201

"

LB>~~

BYTE
ARRAY [1..1fiJ
l.IYTE

"1.0
20.0

"t .O

.'tgure 18."
Example oflhe l),;..clar.... ;on otTcmporary Local Data
in an Orgonizotion Block

18.1 Hlock Functions for Code Dlocks

Start in for ma!lon

addresses listed in the variable dedaration table

of the compiled block .

\\'hen an organization hlock is cal1e<!. the CPU

operating system passes start information in !he
tempomry local data . This start ,nformation
comprises 20 byles for every organization
block, and is nearly identical for all OB<. The
start infonnation for the variou, organization
blocks is describ<-d in detai l in Chapter, 20,
"Main Program", 2 1. ""lmcnupt Handling"", 22,
"'Stan -up Characteristics" and 23. "Error Handling".

The operand identifier for temporary local data

is L; a bit is addressed w ith L. a byte with LB,
a word ",ith LW, and a doubleword with LV.
Example: You want 10 rc_,erve 16 byte, oftemporary local data for absolute address ing, and
you Want 10 reference the va lues in these bytes
by both hyte and bit. To do this, creale an array
at the beginning of the local data area so that
addressing b~gins at O. In an organizat ion
block, you wou ld place this alTay declaration
immcdiately b~hind the dedaration for the stan
infotmation. in ",hich CaSe addressing would
begin at 20

These 20 bytes of infomlation mUst always be

avai lable in each priority class used. IfyOll program" routine for the evaluation of synchronization errors (programming and access errors).
you mu,t set aside an add itional 20 bytes at
least for Ihe start information of these error
organization blocks, as these error ORs be long
to the same priori ty cla".

A \'ariab1e in the temporary local dala can although this is an exception - he declared as
data type ANY. You can use this fearnre to mooify the A;'o/Y pointer at runtime (sec Chapter
24.2.5 ..... Variable .. A.'1Y Pointer").

You dedare the start infonnation for an organization block when you program Ih at block. Tbe
infoonation is mandatory. Sample declarations
in English can be found on the Standard
Libra/")' undCT Organization Blocks. If YOll do
nOI necd the stan in formation, simply declare
the f1r5120 byte, as something else. for example
as an array (as shown in Figure 18.5).

18.1. 6 Slane Loeal Data

Static local data are operands which a function
b lock stores in its instance data block

Absolut e add ressing of t~mpo rary loc a l data

Static local data are a function block's " memory". They retain their values umi ll hosc values
are changed by the program.just l i~c data operand, in global data blocks .

Nonnally, you reference temporary local data

by their symbolic names. The use of absolute
addresses is the exception. Once you are familiar with the way data are stored in lhe L stack.
you can comput~ the addresses of the static
loca l data yourself. You w ill a lso sec th~

D",,\arat;on
IN

OUT
'N OUT
STAT
T~

~ll,l u. ~

Nao'e
Man on
Switd
Length
Total
Sctpoint
Difference
Buffer

'"

The number of static local data bytes is limite<!

by lhe data types of the variables and by lhe
CPU-spedfk lcnb"h of a data block.

Data Type

Addrc"

Initial Value

ROO'

0.0
'.0

FALSE

H~'

<NT

INT
DINT
INT
REAL

'"
0.0

" .0

FALS E
0

0
1.#0

0.0

'.0

111.5 Example of the Declaration of1.ocal Data in a Functioo Block

Comment
inpul parameter
Output parameter
UO paramoter
Static local data
Temporary loc,.l dala

I ~ lJlock Functions

Ded arl ng static local data

You declare stalie local dala in Ihe declaration
<ection ofthc runction b lock :
~as"

of in~remcntal pro-

t>

under "<tat" in the

grammmgor

t>

belween VAR and END_ VAR in Ihe CaSe of

source_oriented programming,

figure 18.5 in Chapler 18.1 .5 , "Temporary

Local Data" shows an examrlc of a vari ahle
declamtion in a function block. The block
patameters are declared firsl, then the static
local data, and finalJy Ihe temporary lo~al <uua.
The .tatic local data are stored in the instance
data block behind the block parameters in th~
order of Iheir decl arations and in accordance
wilh their data lypes .
Symbolic addressing of .tutic local dal a
You rcference Slal;e local data wi lh symbolic
I13mes. You assign th e.e name. in accordance
with the rule. for b lock-local symbols.
All the same oper,nioru; iliat ~an a ddress data
operands;n glnhal data blocks can a lso address
statk local data,
Example: T he function hlock '''Totalizd" a<.Ids
an input value to a value Siored in the static
local data and then stores the t01a1 in th e static
local data . A t the nexI call, the input va lue is
again added to (his total, and '0 on (Figure I S.ti
above).
70/"/ is a variab le in tb" data b lock "TotalizerData", the instance data block for the "Totalizer" function block (you can define Ihe names
oCali b loc k< yourself in Ihe Symbol Table_ but
you mu,t stick to the upplicable rule, when
doing so). Th~ instance data block h", the data
struclure o Cthc function b lock: in Ihe example.
it contains tv,'O INT vm;"bles with the name, 1n
and TOlal.

Accessin g .ta tlc data nuhide the fu net inn

block
As a rule, the sta lic loe"l d"ta are processed
only in the function b lock it>;elf. Because they
are stored in a data hlock, however, you can
access Ihe static lo cal data at any time with
'"[)a/a Block Name".Operand Name j ust as you
would a variable in a global data block.

'"

In our lillie example, (h. data bloc k is named

Totali::erData and Ihe data opcrand is named
Tara!. The "ppli~"ble "ece .. instructions might
be as follows:

MOVE
"Total izer
DaH!" .
Total

'N

'NO

'N

W C
MO~

"
o

'"

'NO

ou,

MWW

r- "Totalize,
Deta",
'o~

Loc ul io"a nces

When you call a function block, you nonnal ly
specify the instance data b lock for thaI call. The
function block then stores its b lock paramclc,"
and it' 'tat ic local da la in this imtance dala
block
Beginning STEP 7 V2 , you can generale "multiple inSlan~e"', that is, you can call a function
b loc k as a local instance in another function
block. The static loca l dala (and the hlock
paramCte'"J of the function b loc k called arc
thm a mb,et of th e caHing block's static local
data. Prerequisile is that both lhe calling nmelion b l""k and lhe called function block huve
b l",," wrsi<.Jt1 2, that i" tbat both have "mult iple
in >tance ~ arabi lily". Thi, allows you (0 " nest"
function block calls \IP to a depth of ~ i ght.
Example (Figure 18.6 belnw): In the static local
data of Ihe function block "Eva luation", you
dccla", a variable Af",,,,ory that ~orrespon ds to
th~ function b lock "Totalizer" and has its data
sttuclUre . Now you can call the function block
<"Totali/.er" via th~ variable Afemory, bUI w ilh_
out specifying a data b l""k bec ause th~ data for
Afemory are stored "hinck_locally" in the <tal;c
loca l data (,\Jl'mory is the loca l inSlance of the
function bl"" k "Totalizer").
You a~ CCSg _4emory'. slatic local data in th e
p rogram in runction block "Evaluation" the
same way you would aeees~ slrueture components, which is by sp~ c ifying Ihe structure
name (M~",ory) ,md the component name

(To/an.

18.1 Block Fuucl ions for Code Blocks

FB "Total iHr"

08 "TotaolizerD8t&"

LAO representatIOn:

AOO

ENO

'"
'"
'"

Olin onot.-

f - lITolal

~ 0;;"
L.
F8

"'"

In 'he Data "i~", Ih. (!~J~ M"'-'k , hm,'.' ul!

,n<llvi"",,/ mriabkJ '0 'hat 'h~ variable, <>1 a
local i''''alJc~ OPE'''''' ,.. II" Jh,i, ji,1I "am" .

ENOf-

Simulmneousl)', you su 'he <"" """"".)i,,;:

ab~ol"u addre5SS

liTo\a1

" Ev elu8 ~on "

OS " EvaluaUonOat&"

LAO ,epresentatk>n:

'!~&j

#EM Add

I'

''V''lue~'

I ~e l ete

#EM~O'"

I'

'N

'NO

'"
MOVE

' N

.Memory. Total ---, IN

1
,
,

MOV E

'NO

"'Memory

OU ,

"ResullZ"

'"
"

'NO

-"

"M,

"ValueZ" -

#EM Del
#Oelete

#M .. mory.Total -

F12ur. 1H.6

E~amr l e

, ,

II'Memory

'"
'"
'"
'N

"

'"0 l-

"
MOVE

0-

,"0

MOVE

'"

'"

0" f'"0 I--- #MemoryTotaI'

f-- "Rasu lt2"

of Sialic Local D"a and Local In"8nc<s

' :"';'~

FBD fa <l$<Intation:

'"0

OU, f - .Memory,Total

18 Block Functi(ms

Th e instance: duta block '"EvaluationData" thus

contain, the variables .\femory.]n a"d Mem ory. ro/al. which you can ulso ad<.lress as global
variables. for example as "Evaluation_
Data .Memo"y. Total.
You can fmd Ih is example of the use of a local
in,llmee in function bloch FH 6, FB 7 and FB
8 ;n program "Program Flow Control" in the
libraries ""LAD_Book'" an d "FBD_Book'". [hat
you can download from the publi,her'. \\febsite
(sec page S). The " Feed" example in Chapter
19.5.3. '"Feed Ex~mple" contain. additional
usage of local instanc",.
A b .olute addres>fng of .tat1e 10e.1I duta
As a rule, the slatic local dala arc addressed
symbolically. Absolute addre%ing is the excep_
tion. Within a function block, me instan~e data
block il; opened via the Dl register. Operands in
this data block. and this includes the ;;latic local
data as well as me block parameters. therefore
have DI as Op<.-rand identifier. A bit is addressed
with DlX, a byte with DID, a word with DIW.
and a doubleword wim DID.
Once you know JUSt how data are stored in a
dall. block, you can compute the absolute
addre ..e< of the static local data yourself. You
can also find me addre,s~s in me compiled
block in the variable declaration table . But be
very ~areful' These addresses w"l' addll?3ses
11.,,1 are relative 10 the slart of Ihe illSlance.
They apply unly when you ~all me function
block with a data block. If you call th~ function
block as local instance. the local in'tance's local
data "r<: located right in tbe middle of the call_
ing function block's instanc e data b lock. You
can view the absolute addreoses, for example.
in the compiled instance data block wh ich contains all local in.tances. Select VIEW --> DATA
VIEW when you want to read up on the
addresses of individual local data operands.
Using our example as a basis, the "mable Total
in the function block '"Totalizer" could be
uddresscd with DIW 2 if function block "Total ;~er'" were called with a dala block (also lee the
operands in me data block "'TotalizerData"').
and wim DlW 6 if function block "Totalize,'"
wC1"C called as local in!tan~e in function block
'"Evalu"tion'" (also sec the operands in data
block '"Eva)uationData").

'"

18.2 Block F unctions

fOI"

Data Blocks

You ;;tore your program data in the data bloch.

In principle. you can also use the bit memory
lm"'a for storing data; however, with the data
block;;. you have s ignific antly mOre po'isibilities with regard to data volume. data stnlcmring
and data types. This chapter shows you
I>

how to wone with data operands.

!>

how to call data b locks and

!>

hew to create, delete and test data blocK. at

nmtime

You Can use data blocks in two version." asglobal dala blocks that are not aSiiigncd to any
code block. and as Instance dara blocks mat are
assigned to a function hlock . The data in the
global data bloc"" are "'free" dma thaI every
code block can make usc of. You yourself determine thcir volume and structure directly
through pro!,,'ramming the global data block . An
in_lance data block contains only th~ data w ilh
which the asso~imed function block works; this
function b lock then also detemtines the stru~
and storage location of me data in "i ts~
instance data block.

The numb..r and length of data blocks are cpuspecific . The numlx'ling of the data block
begins at I: the re is no dala block DB O. You
~an use ea~h data block either as a global data
block or as an instance data block.
You muiit rm;t Create (""!el up") the data bhx;kli
you use in your progr~m, either by program_
ming, such as code blocks, or at rumime using
the systcm function 5FC 22 CREAT_ DB.

18.2.1 Two Data Bl,,<k

R.~bt~rs

Ea~h 57-CPU has two dala block registers.

The,e registers comain th e numbers of the Curr<:nt data hlocks; these are Ihe data blocks witb
whose ope rands processing is currently taking
place. Before accessing 8 data block operand,
you muS! open the data block containing the
operand. If you us~ fully-addressed :leeess to
data operands (with specification of the data
bluck. see below). you need not be concerned
,vi!h opening the data b locks or with th~ contents of the dala block rcgis tns . The Editor gen -

18.2 BI<xk Function. for Data Bl<xks

erntes me necessary mstru,;tions from your
specifical;on5.
The Pr08T11tn Editor usu the firsl (lat" block
register preferably for accessing global dala
blocks and me second data block register for
ac"",,,sinll inSlance dma blocks. For th;s rclLSon.
these reglster~ arc given the names "Global (lata
block relPster" (DB register for short) and
"Instance Data Block Register" (Dl rt'gis[er for
short). The lIanuling ofthe registers by the CPU
ill absolutely identicaL J:;ach data block can be
opened V;A one ofthc two regi,tcrs (or al.o via
both simultaneously).

first: You can

affcet only the DB regISter with LAD or FBD.
If you open a data block wi th the OPN coilibox
(sec be low), yo u always open it via the DH register, In LAD and FDD, the instance data block
is always opened via the Dl regisler: this happens with Ihe call boll when the block is caUed.

"0 come 10 the essential point

\VIIen you load a data word. you must spe<:ify

which ofl1le two possible open data blocks contain. thc dalll word. If the data block has been
opened via the 1)8 register, the data word is
called DI:lW; if the d.1l1 word is in Ihe data
block opened via the \)1 register. il is called
J)IW, The other datu operands are named
accordinill y (Tab le 18, I).
Table 18.1

Symbolic access to the data op<.'f'lUlds in g lobal

data block~ requires the minimum system
knowledae, For absolutc acccss or for usina
both data block registcn. you mUliI ob8crvc tJw.:
nores beloW.

I[ is recommended that you addrelIII wua <>pl'fands symbolic.lI)' ,,henever possible. Sym
bolic addressing
~

makes it easier to rt'ad and undeBtand the

program (if meaningful lCTtllll are used as
symbols),

reduces "rite errOr~ made d.u:WII programmini (the ProifWll Editor compares tlte
terms used in tbe Symbol T.. ble and in the
program; "number-switchi ng errors" such
as DaB 156 and DaB 165 that Can occur
when using absolute addresses ctinnO! occur
bere) and

does 001 require programming knowledge at

the machine code level (which data block
bas the CPU opened currently'!),

Symbolic addressing us"'" fully-addre.'lsed

access (data block t0i<'ther with data operand).
~o that the data operand always hn a Imiq ue
addrc .

0.,. Operands

You detennine the symbolic addren of a data

operand in lWO 5tep.!:
[)atab~

Olay

0.[. wurd

111.2.2

Atcu~lng

oflhe dala block in lhe Symbol

DBSI).

\)ala Operands

rOT .ccess-

Symbolic address ing with full addressing.

Absolute addre"';na witb full addreuing

"od
:>

A~signmem

Table
Data blocks are Jobal data Ihat have un ique
addres~ within a program. In the Symbol
Table. you assign a symbol (e.g. MOlorl) to
the ab$Olute addres~ oflhe datD hlock (e.g.

You can use the followina methodS

ing data opcrnnds;
~

1)

Absolute addressing with partial addressing.

2) A.signment ofthc dala oper.:md.5 in the data

block
You define the names of the data OVC,",,,d8
(and thc data type) during programming of
the dala block. The nalOe applies only in thc
'lSSOCiated b lock (il i, "block-local")_ You
can also use the ume name in .. nother block
for another "anable.

I ~ 1I 1oc~

Function.

Fully-addressed aeeHS to data operand .

18.2.3 Opening a Data Block

In the case Df fully_addre<sed acee". YDU specify the data b lock together with the data operand. This method Df addressing can be symbolic or HbwlulC '

You use the OP1\' coi l (LAD) or OPN box

(FB O) To open a data b lock v ia the DB register.

"M7!"OR l- . ACIVAL
IlB 51-DBW 20

MOTORI is the symbDlic addre" tha t you

have assigned to a data block in tbe Symbo l
Table. ACrvAL i. th e data operand you
defined when programming the data block. The
symbolic name "MOTORI".ACTVAL is JUST
a, unique a specificaTion Dfthe data opemnd as
The specification DB SI.DBW 20.
Fully-addressed data access is Dnly j"lOssible in
.onjunction with the global dam block regisT er
(DB register). In the case of fully-addressed
data operands, the Program Editor firs! opens
\he data block via the DB register and the n
accesses the data op<:ratld
You can use fully-addressed acec,s wilh all
functions permissible fDr The data lype of the
addressed d,tla operand. So with b lock parnmeIe,.,;, for example, you can also specify a fullyaddressed data op"rand "' <lemal parameler.
Absolute addressing of data operands
For absolute addressing of dala operand~ . you
must know the addresses at which the Program
Editor places the data operaods when setting
up . You can fim] out the addresses by ourpulting
them afterprog:ramming and compiling the daTa
block. You will then see from The addres, colwoo The absolute address at which the relcyant
..ariable begin,. This procedure is , uitable for
all data blocb. both those you u,e as global
data blocks as wel l as those you use as inSTanc e
data bl""ks (for local instance, see ChapTer
18.2.4. "'Special Points in Data Addressing").
in (his way. you can a lso see where The Program
Ed itor stores the block paramelers and The slatic
local data for function bloeb.
oa(a openmds are addressed byte by b)1e like,
for example, h it memory; the funCTion, used on
{he data operands are abo Ihe same as those
use,1 with b iT memory.

'"

Open dato btock

LAD representation'

",

f--{ OPN}------l

FBO representation:

The OPN coil!box is conneCTed d irectly 10 the

left power rail ,md slands alone in a rung. The
specified data b lock is always opened via the
DB regi,teI. In LAD or FBo. it i.s ooT possible
to open a data block via the 01 regisler with
OPN eoilfbox. (The Dl register u.se, the call box
to open The current irut:mce data block.)
In th~ ca,,, of incf<-'IIlental programming, you
will find Ihe Oi'N coil/box in the PWb'r.un Tilements Catalog under "DB Call".
Th e open data block must be in the work memory at runtime.
In the nCIWOn.:s following 'he OPN eoil!box.
you ean use panial addre,sing to access only
Those dala op"rand, that are locaTed in The open
dam block. If you want 10 copy from one data
block to another, you can, for example go into
Ihe lemporary local data via an intennediaTe
b uffer or (better) usc fully-addressed data operands. Pleas e note : A fully-a ddressed data operand o\erv"rttes the DB regiSTer with "its'" data
block.
EXmlple: The value of data word DEW 10 of
data block DB 13 is to be Iramferred to data
word DBW 16 of data block DB 14. With the
MOVE box, you can only copy partiallyaddre,sed data operands within the currently
open data hlock. For copying between d ata
blocks. you require an intermediate butTer. such
as a local data word (sec Figure 18.7). It is better to use full addre~'ing .
Wh~", you open a data b lock. it re mains "valid"'
until another data block is opened. Under cerlain cir<;umslanecs, you IlliIy not be able 10 see
this via the J>mgram Editor, for example if a
block is changed with the call box (sec Chapler
1S.2.4. '"Special Points in OatH Addressing"').

18_2 Block Flmclions for Data Blocb

~~~'i3'

,
DB 13

Network: 6

~-

DB 13

I O'N I

(OPN}----1

Load from DB 13 and copy into a bllffer

MOVE

' N
'N

DBW lQ

' NO

0"' ~1iIt_WORD

DBW 10

'N
'N

."
#CWORO .~:
~':,;,l

MOVE

OUT -

....

END

::;'[

Notwork 7 ; OpiIn data block DB 14

DB 14
(OPN}---j

I
Networi< 8

DB 14

I OPN I

Copy 1T0m bllller Md transfor to DB 14

~

MOVE
, iIt_ WORD
Network 9;

'"
'"

'NO
OU'

Copy with

DSW 16

Iully--ad dr~uCd

lit_WORD

'"
'"

'"0
DB 14.

OU'

DBW HI

tn the c",~ of a block changc w ith the CALL

eoilfbox, the co"t~'tl lS of the data block r~gist",-,;
au retained . On returni ,,!! to the calii"g block.
lhc b lock change rCston;s the old contents of the
registers .

18.2.4 Slleclal
Chuoges in

lh~

Po int~

in Data Addre"ing

c"nteD" of {he DR

'N
'N

0"'
'"0

O BW16

data operands

MOVE
DB'3,; _
DBW12

MOVE

~egi st~r"

W ilh the following funccion<, the Program Editor g~n eral~' add;t;o nal instruction, which can
alter tb~ e(ITllcn ts oflhe two DB rcgistcrs ;

Full ",]dress;ng of Ja/" operands

Each timc data operand, arc fully addressed.
lhe Program Editor finn op<'"m 1he dats h loc k
and then a c c ~ sses the dala operand. The DB
rugistcr is ovcrW'riUen uach time . This slso
applies to supp lying block parameters w ith
ru lly_addre<sed dala operands .

0813 .
DBW12

M OV E

'"

OU ,

'N

'NO

_~B 14_
DBW 18

....

..
..

.tccess;ng block param~rer$

Access to the followin g b lock parJm~IC'"
changc s the contents of the DB regi<ter: All
block param~tc"" of complex data type in th e
ea3\; o f functions, and ;n/ol1t parameters of
complex dsta type in the case of function
b locks .

C" /linK "-funerio,, block >";th the call box

Bcfor<: the actual function block ca ll , thc call
box ,lares the number of thc current ;n<ta nce
data b lock in the DB register (by swapping the
data b lock regi __ !ers) and op<..'t>s the in <tance
dara block fur the called function block. In this
way, the in<tancc data block associatcd with a
c"l led function b lock j" alway< open. Amr the
actusl block ~a ll, thc ~;,Jl bo x swaps data block
registers again, so th at the current instance datu
b lock is fl\'ailablc "gain in the c,,-lI; ng function
b lock. ill thi s way, the ca ll box changes the contents of the DB register.

18 Block Funclion;;

"0...,,,,-"

DI register in [omelia" blocks

In function blocks, the 01 register always conlains the number o f the current instance data
bloc k. A ll accesS to block parameters or stalic
local data is o"~" the 01 register. The address of
Ihe local data g iven in the Oedru-ation Table of
the f""c!ion block applies on ly when you open
Ihc function block with an inSlan <: c d~ta block,
in which ca;C the data operando begin at byte

Chan ging th e cont~nh of d a t R blo;:ks

at a late r time
In the PToper!ies window of the otiline objttt
container Blocks in Ihe "B loch" rcgi,ler. you
can "~ify whethcr the absolute address or the
symboli c address of the data operand is to have
priority for s"bsequcnt d;;;plays and savcs when
thcr~ is a change in the contents of the data
b lockS for code blocks (hal have already bcrtt
stored.
The default is "AbsolllIC address has priority"
(the same a. in previous STEP 7 ver<ions). Th is
defa"h mean, that when there is a change in the
dec laration, the absolu!e add,,-,ss is rdained in
the program whi le thc symbolic address
changcs acco rd ingly. lfthe "Symbolic address
has priority" default is chos(."n, the absolute
add",,, changes whi lc the symbolic addrcs' i.'
retained.
Examp le: illsum ;ng that data word DEW 10 in
d ata block DB 1 (ontains the symbolic address
of ActVilh,e. In the program, you might adJ ress
this data word wi th

t$l.Daw 10

where "Data" is tb~ symbolic address for data

block DE I. If you would now ad d an a<l<litional da!>! word with the symbolic address
klaxC",rell[ ;mm(Xl ;atcly in front of data word
DBW 10, the rcsult upon the next opening (or
storing) of!he code block will be as follows:
In the case of "A bsoh<te add"".' .' hlls priorily ":
::Oata".MaxC-~r re nt

~ero.

\Vhen you call a functio n block as lo(al

inst"nc~, its data are "in the middle" of the calling data b lock's imtan~~ data bl""k. They contain tbe absolute addre<s of the \c,cal data when
you output the in,tance data block in data view
formal. Each individual variable is then displayed with name and address, including (he
v,mable s of (he local instance called
When yOll program a function block that you
a l'o wam to have avai lable later a, local
instance, you do not yet know the ~bsolut~
addrcss ofthc variable at the time of programming . In this case - JUSt as the Program Editor
does for symbolic programming - (he content s
of address rcgister AR2 lire added to the vari ab le addrc>s. However, this is poss ible only in
the STL programming lang uage.

. A ~ ~Va h:.

DEl. .DEW H

In rhe ca.,e of ''Symhok' address has priority"','

"nat ... " . ActValu.

A, for a cces. !O data operand~ in global data

b locks. tho same appli e, as for acce,,!O global
operands (for instance inputs) for which a symboli c address has been entered in the Symbol
Table . You will fi nd ,ktai1cd information on
this subject in Chapter 1.5.5, "Address Priority".
Note that this "rewiring"' does not take place
automatically since th~ b locks whicb have
already been compiled contain the executable
MC7 code of the statemcn!s vei th lhe absolute
addres . The change is only carried out in the
!1:S~ociated blo~k (with a corresponding mes o
sage) following op~ning and saving again.
In order to carry out the modification in the
complete block fold.r, 'ck~! EDlT ---> CHECK
ELOCK CONS1STENCY with the Blocks objcc!
sclteJ

18,) SY 5tem F unction s for Data

Blocks
There are three system functions for handling
data blocks . Their par~met~rs are dcs~ribed in
Table 18.2.
I>

SFC 12 CREAT DB

Cre ate data block in work memory

l>

Sf C 85 CREA DB
Create data block in ,,"urk memory

:>

SFC 82 CREA OBI.

Create data b lock in load memory

SFC 23 Dt::L DB
Ddete data block

SFC14 TEST_ DB
Test data block

18.3 System

Fun~tion"

for Data Block.

Table IS 2 SFC, for Handling Data B locks

=i;;i;;

rJ!

;:,;;

"

'6"~ ,

, ,

H1
~

, ..

"

,;,

, ,

I ~Y

"

BH 16l'()4

.~ ~

"

,
,

,',

"

"

,
;

block i5 initialized

"

,
,,

IS.J.I Crea tIng a I)at~ Bloc k In

"\\'o r k J\femor J

even i ft he dala block is only pre,en( in the lOad

memory.

System functiom SFC 22 CREAT _ DB and

SFC 85 CREA_DB create a data block in th e
work memory. As the data h lock number. the
system functi"n tak~s the lowest mc number in
(he numbcr band given by the input paramctcrs
LOW l.IMIT and UP LIMIT. The numbers
<pecit1ed at these parameters a r C induded in the
n umber b and. If both valu~s are the same, the
<Ia\a b lock is ~reatcd with this number. The
number of a data b lock already pres~"Ilt in the
user program ~rumo l be assign~ d aga"l. n()\

The output parameter DR NUMBER supplies

(he n umber of the data block acrualJy ~rc "ted .
W ith the input par"mctcr COUNT, you specify
th e length of the dala block (0 be created. T h e
length ~orrcspond. to the number of data byt~s
and mLlst he an even number.
Creati ng th e data block is not the same as call ing it. The current data h lock is still valid. A
dat" block ~reated with this syst~"Ill funcliOTl
contains random data . For meaningfu l usc, data

18 Block Functions

must tirst be w rillen to a data hloek created in

this way bdQrc t h~ data c an b~ r~ad.
The data bloch cr~ated w ith t~ SFC . 22

CR E AT D B and ~5 CRA Oil ar~ "nl)'

pres~nt Tn work memory If a CPU diff~rcn li
ate, bem'een retentive and non-retentiv~ work
memory, lhe SFC 22 CREAT_DB ~realCs a
ret~>y) li vc data block, and the SFC 85 CREA_
D H creates a dall' bloc k as specifierl hy the
AlTR TB parameler. "Retentive" dala block
mean s that is its contents are retaine<:l in the
event ofa w a nn restarT/ho\ rc'lart (,~c Chapter
22.2.4 , " Retentivity").
T he syslJ,;m fu nction SFC 8S CRA_ DB
replaces the SFC 22 CREAT_DB.

A <Ia,a block cre ated by the Sl:'Cs 22 CREAT_

DR and SFC ~5 CREA_ DR dues not change
lhe checksum of the Ll.~er program. not even if it
is WIitt~n or deleted again. If a data block created by an SI'C is i.mponcd imo the o m ine data
mO!llig~mcnt. this has an influen~~ on tb e
ch~cksum.

In the even t of an ~rror. a data block is not erealedo the pam meler DR_ NUMnER paramet ~r
i. assigned Z<.--ro, and an ~rror number i. output
byRT_ VAL

H I.3 .2 Crellt ing a Da ta B lock In

LOlld Mem ory
System functi on SFC 82 CREA_ DB L crcat"" a
data b lock in Ihe load memory. As the data
block number. Ihe syslem func lion take' the
lowe'l tree numlx.'r in th~ numb~r band given
by the input paramcl~rs LOW_ LlMlT and UP_
UMIT. T he numbers .peeiiied at these pommelers are induded in the number ba::ld , If bOlh
v a lues an: the ,arne , the da la block is cre3ted
with th is number. The numix:r of a data b lock
a lready present in Ihc user program cannot be
as<igned again, nOI even if the dala block is
on ly presenl in the work m emory.
The output parameler DB_h'l JM ,uppl ies the
number o f the dala b lock ac.tually created , Wilh
Ih~ in put parameter COUNT, you spedfy the
length of the data b lock to be crea\ ~d. The
length corresponds w the number of dala bytes
and must b e an c"cn number.

n,e data al'~a a<> igned as default 10 the cr~a\cd

data block is spec itie<:l ot input p arameter
SRCBL K. Hen: you can spccify a com plete
<lata block, e.B. DB \ 60 f)T "Areh>,e l. " "anable from a data block, or an ah.olute addc~ssed
dala area as an ANY po;tlkr. e.g.
P# DB 160 DBX I6.0 BYTE 64. The ' OlITCe
rou;;! be a data area in th e wock memory.
If\hc somee acea is smaller than the target area ,
the ,omce area is wr itten completely into the
target area. The remaining bytes of the ta rget
area ue fil led ",;th ~eros . If lhc source area is
larg~'1' (han (h e target arca, the target area IS
written completely; th e remain in g byte , of the
SoUrc e area Brc ignored.
Yo u can ass i!(J1 Ihe roll"wing altrib "tes to the
created data block "sing the ATTRIB parameter;
'>

B it O = "I"
The dat<! block has Ihe Unlinked anribute .
Following transfer to the offline data m anagemenl and reloading into the C P U, the
<.lata bl ock ;s still on ly pccs~'IlI in the load
m~mo ry.

'" Bitl = "j"

The d,ua block has the DB is write-pml(!ded
in /he f' I..C a ttrib ute. Yo" can only read the
val ue. of thi' dala block.
'" Bit2=" I"
n,~
data block
attribllle.

has

the

Non Rei";,,

The other b its arc not "sed al lhe mom~nt , You

can find funhe r infonnation on the b lock
attribllles in C,hapte r 3,2.3. "Block Pro!X'rtie,"
System function SFC g2 CREA_ Dl:IL operates
in ""yn~bruDous mode: you trigger lhe c re ation
proce ss with S'b'l,al state "1 " at iu p "t parameter
REQ . You mavonly access 'he read and written
data are a, again when the Olllplll param~1cr
BUSY has returned to the .ignal , tate "0",
Creating does not call the associaled data block.
n , e current data block is slill Ihe ""lid onc .
A data block is not cre ated in the e vent of an
en'or. the output parameters are a>signed undefined values. and an ~TIo r mc",agc is out r ut by
Ihc function val ,,~.

18.3 Sy.tem Function. for Data Blocks

18.3.3 Deleting a Data Bl(lck

18.3.4 TeSllng a nata Block

System function SFC 23 DEL_ DB deletes the

data block in RAM (work and load memory)
whose number is specified in the input parame ter DB NtJ1.1BER. The data block must not be
open at the time, as otherwise the CPU will go
to STOP.

System function SFC 24 TEST_DB provides

infonnation On a data block whose number you
spec ify at input parameter DB_NUMBER.
Output parameter DB_ LENGrH contains the
number of existing bytes. and output paJ1lmeler
WRITE_ PROT indicates whether Ihe data
block is write-protected.

Data bloch created with the keyword Unlinked

and data blocks on an Flash EPROM memory
card calUlot be deleted with system function
SfC 23.

If the tested data block is only in load memory.

this is indicatw as an error by RET_ VAL: the
DB_LENGTH and WRITE_PROT parameters
ne'e.rtheles. have the corre~t assignn"'nts.

In the event of an error, the data b lock i~ not

deleted and an error number is returned as function value.

If the specified data b lock is not present in the

CPU's work memory, RET_ VAL is returned

with W#I6#80BI.

'"

19 lJJock Parameters

19 Block Parameters

block function. Example: You want to write a

block as an adder that you can use 111 your proiram ~'eral limes with different variables.
YOIJ II1ltIsfer the ,'ariables as block parameters:
in Our example, three input parameters and OTIC
OIJtpUl parameter (Figure 19.1). Since Ihe adder
need nOI Slore any values internally, II function
is suitable as the block type.

This chapter d<:$C:ribes bow 10 use block: paramYou will learn

deB.

d~lare

t>

how to

block parameter5,

t>

how to work with block partmcte1"S,

t>

bow to initialize block parameters and

t>

how to 'forward' block: parameters.

Block parameters represent the transfer inler_

face oolWL-.:n the calHna and the called block.
All functions and function blocks can be pr0vided wilh bl ock parameters.

You define a bloc. parameter a. an input

parameter if you only Check Or load ;IS value in
the block program. If you only describe Il bloc.
parameter (assign , set, ",.et, transfer), you u!e
an output parameter. You must always use a n
illlout para meter if a block pammeter is to be
both ched:cd and overwrinen. The Program
EdilOr does nOI ched: the usc of the bloc k
panullctcr:.

19,1 Block Parameters in Ge neral

19.1.1 Denning th e

8lu~k

Pwramcters

Block parameterS mllke it possible to parameterile the processing instruction in a block, the

.,,,,

Btock ty?!, name .

Fe 12
Nama : Adder

Parameter .

Pr~m

om

Ronutt
FI~ur. 1~.1

Eumple of Block P.ramctcrs

19. 1 Block Parameters in General

19.1.2 Processing t he Rlod< I'aram~te~

In the adder program, the names of the block
parameters 'tand a, p lace ho lders for thc latc,t
actual variab les, You use the block parameters
in the same way as symbolically addressed
variables ; in the program, they are called "formal parameters"
You can cal! t~C "Adder" function several lim ..
in your p rogram. Witb each call, you tran,fer
o ther value, to tho adder in ,he block parametcrs (Figure 19.2). The values can be constant"
operands or vari"bles; they are called "actua l
p'''dmetcrs''.
At runtime. the CPU replaces the formal
param eters w ith the aClu,,] parameters. The
first call in the example a dds the ContentS of
memory words MW 30, MW 32 and IvlW 34
and stores the result in memory word MW 40 ,
The same block with the actual parameters of
the second call adds data words DBW 30.
DB W 32 and DBW 34 of data block DB 13 and
slOres the result in data word DBW 40 of data
block DB 14 .

1/ Fir" oall

-Adder"
Num b_1
Resu lt
MW32- Numb_2

MW30 -

MW34

Nu mb 3

Actual parameter
II Second co11

DB 12.
DBW30

DB 12 ,
DBW34

Numb

Default values are optional and are only possible for function blocks if a block parameter is
stored as a value. This applies to all block
parameters ofdemcnt"T)" data type and to input
and output parameters of comp le x data lype. A
parameter comment can al so b e given.

r-

D812.
DBW40

ADD I

Numb_1 Numb_2

Memory -

You define the block parameters in the declaration ,eclion of the hloc\: when you program the
hlock. Figure )9.3 shows the declaration tables
of a function FC and a function block FE. In
addition to the b loc k parameter>< (IN . OUT, I:N_
OUT), you also declare the temporary local
data (TEMP). the function value (RETURN)
for fun ctions Fe, and the static local data
(STAT) for function b locks. Only the temporary
local data (TEMP) exists for organization
bloc ks OB which arc neither called in the u,er
program nor possess an instance data block.

Illock
par.meter

DB '2,
DSWn _

Numb_3 -

19.1.3 Declaration oftbe Block Parameter.

MW4Q

-Adder"
Num b_ '
Result
Numb_2

r-

'" 0'"
'" ADD_ I
'" 0"' -

-M~

'N'

Fum,.1

~m"m
ADD I

0"' -

MW3Q- IN1
MW32- _IN2
M emory ~,.

II Second call

DB 12.
DsW30
OS 12
DBW32
Memory
DB 12.
DBW34

R.... ult

'"'

ADD_bUT

"""""

-MW 40

'"'
'"
'N'

ADD I
-OUT

Memory

ADD I
-OUT _

DB 12.
DBW40

'"

'"

Figure 19.2 Block Call with Block Paramete..

19 Block Parameters

Fl2U r . 19.3 Empty Dcciarntion T.bles for

~unct i ons

The block parameter name Can ~ up to 24

~haracters in length . II must consist only ofletlers (without nati onal characters such as the
German Um laut). digits. and the underscore.
No distinction is made between upper and
lower case. The name must not be a keyword.

For the dam type of a block parameter. a ll elementary, complex and user-defined data types
are permissible as well as the parameter types
(see C hapter 3.5. "Variables. Constants snd
Data Types").
ST EP 7 stores the names o f the h lock paramete rs in the non-executable section of the blocks
on the programming device' s .'torage medium.
The work memory of the CPU (in the compiled
block) contains only the declaration types and
the data types. For this reason. program
changes madc to b locks online in the CPU must
always be updaled On the programm ing
device's data medium in order to reta in the original names , If the update is not made, or if
blocks are transferred from the CPU to the pro_
gramming device, the non-cxecutable_b lock
sections are ov~rwrittcn or deleted. The Program Editor then gcnerates rcplacement sym
bois for d i8play or pri ntout.

Fe and

~unction

Bloch FB

by specifying th~ data tYP<' and possibly a com ment in th e declaration table u nder RETIJRN
and the n ame RET VAL.
As data type of the fWlc\ ion valt.lc, all elementary data type, as well as the data types DATE_
AND_TIME, STRING, PO INTER, ANY and
user-defmed data types UUT are p.:rmiued , The
data typ es ARRAY and ST RUCT arc no!
allowed.
As the fir<t outp ut parameter, the function va lue
has no spec ial role to play in the LAD or FBD
programming language. It only g ains significance in the SCL programm ing language,
where you can usc the block type FUNCTION
as a '"genu ine" function. Here, a function Fe
can stand in p lace of an operand in a printout:
the function value then rep resents Ih e value o f
th is function.

19.1.5 Initializing Bl ock Para meters

19.1 .4 Dcd ara tion of the Funct Ion Va lu e

When calling a block with block parameters,

you in it ialize the block p arameters with actual
parameters, These can be constants. operands
with absolute addresses. fully-addressed data
operands Or symbolicall y addresscd variables ,
The actual parameter muSt be of the sarnO dala
type as the block parameter.

In functions, the function value is a speciall y

treated output parameter. It has the name RET_
VAL (or ret_val) and i" defined as the first output parameter, You declare the fu ncti on value

You must initia li?c all o f a function', b lock

parameters at every call. In the case of function
b locks. in itialization of individual block parameters or a ll block parameters is op tional.

'"

1<;1.2 Foml,,1 Parameters

19.2 Formal Parameters

In this chapter. you willieam how \0 a~eeSS the
block parameters within a b lock . Table 19.1
shows that it is possible to access block parameters o f elementary data type, components of an
array or structure. and timers and CountC1"S
without re>triction. Chapter 19.4, ""Forwarding" Block ('arameters"
Access to parameters of complex data 1ype and
of paramctcr types POINTER and ANY is not
supported hy LAD or FBD. However. you can
initialize acqu ired blocks or sys1em blocks that
have such pararnc t~"T8 with the relevant variable. You c an find examples of this in the libraries "LAD_ Book" and '"FRO_ Book" under the
program " Data Types" that you can download
from the p(,blishcr's Web5 ite (see page 8).
Block parameters with data type ROOL
Block parameters of data type BOOL can be
individual binary variables Or binary compo-

Table

1~.1

nems of army. and structures . Yo u can chec k

in put parameters and in!out parameters wi th
coutaclS or with binary box inputs. and you can
iniluenee output parameters ~lld in!out parameters with b inary box Outputs . After 1he CPU has
used the aetual pammct~r spec ified as block
parameter, it processes the functions as shown
in the relevant chapters.
Bl()ck paramNers ()f digital data type
Block parameters of digital data type occupy 8.
16 or 32 bits (all elementary data types e~cept
BOOl.). They ean be indiv idual digital vari_
ables or digital components of arrays and structures . You app ly input an d in/out parameters to
digital box inputs. and you write output and in!
out parameters to digital box OU\pUIS.
You exchange values hctv,:een block parameter!; of different types or different sizes w ith the
MOVE box as described in Chapter 6, "Move
Functions".

Accessing!:l1ock. ParameterS (General)

;
O~

,=,

,
,

,
,

type,

DT. STRIl--'G
ARRAY. STRUCT
In dividual binary components
tndividual digital components

TIMER
COUNTER
8LOC K ]C. BLOCKJB
BLOCK_DB
BLOO,_ SDB

,
,

,
,

,
,

,
,

,
,
,
,
,

Possible

yes

'"
M

,..
ye,

"..
,,.,
yes

,"

0"
0"

J 9 Block Parameters

B lo(k param,'len of data type DT

and STRING

B lock parameter. of da ta type

COUNTER

Direct access to bloek parameters of typc DT

and STRING is not po>s ible. In function
blocks, you can "pass" input and output param~ters of data type DT and STRING to parameters of ca lled block.

You can use b lock parameters of data type

COUNTER with all functions as described in
Chapter 8, "Cowltcrs"'. When setting a counter,
the counter v alue can also be a block parameter
of data typ e WORD.

Bl ock parameter. nf data type A R R A Y

and STRUCT
Direct a~CeSS to bl ock parame!= of type
ARRAY and STRUCT is po,sible on a eomponent_hy_componcrtt basis, that is, you can
access individual binary or digital components
with th e relevant operations,
Access to the complete variable (entire array or
entire strucrnre) is not possible and neither is
access to ind ividual components of complex or
user-defIned data type. In fimction block" you
""n "pass" input and output parameters of data
type ARRAY and STRUCT to parameters of
called block!; .
Block parameters of lI~er-deflncd data type
You handle block parameters of user-defined
data type in the same way a~ b lock parameters
of data Iype STRUCT.
Direct acceSS to block parameters of data type
UDT i ~ possible on a componcm-by-eomponem basis, that is, you can ~CCeSS individual
binary or digital compone nts wi th the relevant
o\X-rat ions
Access to the complete variable is not po,sible
and ne ither is access to individual components
of complex or Ilser-ddined data type, In function blocks, you can "pass on " input and oUlpm
parameters of data typ e U DT to parameters of
called blocks .

B lock parameters of dat.a type

BLOCK_ DB
You can transfer a data block via a block parameter of data type B LOCK DR Call this data
b lock w ith the OPN coillbox by lalx:ling the
OP;:"! coil/box with the fonnal parameters .
When opening a data block via a bloc k para meter, the C PU a lway, uses the global data block
register (D B re gister),
Bl ock parameters of data type
BLO CK_Fe
You can traIl5fer an Fe function via a b lock
parameter of data type BLOCK FC Call this
function with the CA LL ~oi llbo; You can uSe
the CALL coi1lb o~ with a formal parameter and
w ith or w itho ut any preceding logic operation if
you are currently programming a function
b lock , If you usc the CALL coil!bo~ witb for_
mal parameters in a function. a preceding logic
operation is not permissible (ab~olU1e call only).
An Fe fu n cti oo lranskrrcd via a block parame ter must not have any b lock parameters.
Block panmeter. of data type
BLOCK_FB
You can transfe r an FB function block via a
blo<:k par.mlctcr of data type BLOCK_ FB .
Direct aec es< to hlock parameterS of data type
BLOCK]B is not possible wi th LAD or FED
functions ,
An FB func tion block transferred via a block
param et~r must not have any block parameters.

810ck para meters of data type TJ:\IER

You can uSe block parameters of data type
TIMER with all functions a s described in Chapa-r 7, "Timers', When a tim er is stmtcd, the
time value can ,,],0 be a block parameter of data
type SS Tl.ME.

Block parameter. o f data type PO INTER

and A..."'Y
Direc t acces , to bloc k parameters of data type
PomTER and ANY is not possible with LAD
or HH) f unctions ,

19.3

19.3 Actual Parameters

When you call a block, you ini tiali~e it, b lock
parameters with con>!ams , operands or vari_
ables with which it is to operate. These are the
actual param<:tcrs.lfyou call the block often in
your program, you usually USe different a ctual
parameters each time .
An actual parameter must agree in data type
with the block parameter: You can only apply a
binary actual parametcr (for e:-;amp le, a m em_
ory bit) to a block parameter of type BOOL;
you can only initialize a block panuneler of
type ARRAY with an identically dimensioned
array variable . Table 19.2 gives an overview of
which operands you can use as actual parameters with which data type.
When ca lling functions, you must initi alize all
b lock parameters with actual parameters.
When callin g fun ction b locks , it is not a manda_
tory requirement Ihat you initializ e b lock
parameters with a~tual paramet"rs.lfyou make
uo specification ala b lock parameter, the (old)
values stored in the instance data block are used
as the actual param<:ters. These can b~. for
example, the default va lues Or the valu es of
""tual p arameters from an earl ier call. In/out
parameter. of complex data type ~annot be
assigned defau lt vailles, and neither can parameter types . You must provide these block
parameters with actual parameters at lea,t allhe
fir.t cal l.

Table 19 .2 tnitialization with Actu~l

A~tua l ParaJT1ete~

You can also use d irect access to aeees~ the

bl ock parameters for the fu nction b lock. Since
they are located in a data block, you can handle
the block pararn~ters like data operand s . Example : A function block with the instan~e data
block "S/a/ion_l'" controls a b inary output
parameter w ith the n ame '"Up '". Following processing in lhe f" nction block (after its call), yo"
can ch~ck Ihe parameter under the symbo li c
address " Sla lion_ t".Up, without having ini_
tialized the output parameter.
Initlalizlng block paramet ers with
dc mcntary data types
The actual param~ters lisled in Tab le t9.3 are
permissible as actual paramcters of elcmentary
daUl type.
You can assign either ab solute or "ymbolic
addresses to input . output and bit memnry operands. Input operands shou ld ~ used only for
input parameters and output Op<'rands for OUIp"t paramete rs (however, this is not mandatory). Bi t memory operands are suitable for all
dedaration types . You must apply peripherat
inputs only to input parameters an d peripheral
outputs on ly to output parameters.
You use the 800lean constants TRUE and
FALSE in LAD and F130 10 sct defaults in the
de~ l aration of block parameters, static local
data or dala operands . Initializing block paramete~ with thes~ const~nts ; s not penniued. You
also cannot Create these con . tants at n contact
( L AD) or at a function input (FBD). If you want

P aram<t~f"

,tructur~ S

of ~I <men tary data I>'pc

"

Cornponetlts of arrays or

"

Block parameters o,thc cal ling block

19 Sloek

ParameI~r1

OUlput$ (proc<'ss ;ma~)

,
,

,
,
<

<

"

,., "
Qy.x

:-t

<

,
<

DID

"

to initialize block pan"nc\~rs with TRLc or

FALSE, you require a variablc that ;s pennanenlJy ass;gne<i signal ,tate "1" or "0" and thaI
you usc instead of the Sookan con'lanIS. Bil
memories are obvious candidate3 for "ariables
ill th is..,.....,.. The following example shows)'ou
how 10 SCI a bil memory pennanenlly 10 signal
Slale "I" or ''0'' &1 Slartup. see figure 19.4.
Parl-add",ssed dala bilS an: nOI pcnnissible as
actual parameters in LAD and FBD. The reason
for this is Ihat the Pro!;ram Editor transfers the
signa I state of every binary actual operand to a
temporary local dati. bi t prior 10 Ihe a"ual
block call. For Ihi~ teuon. it is pos.iblc in LAD
1lIld run to initialize a binary block: input wilh
a log;"; operation. Dunng copying before the
block: call. the u~ignment oflhe dala block 10
thl; dala bil il los\. Even if you open the "correct" dala block in the proiIllm of the called
block prior to aCCe8J;inll Ihe block parameler
occupied by a partially addrcslcd data bil, only
the previously created copy of the 'ignal Slate
will be scanned.

Compl= component name

When I.Ising part-addressed data operands at

dillital parameters. you muSI note thaI when
~~e~ssing the block paramelers (ill the called
block), Ihe currently opened dala block is al!:O
Ihe "co""ct- data block. Sinu the Editor may
in ccnatn cin:umstanus. lucb as during a block:
call or if the block paramcll'I1I have previously
bn acces.>ed, nOI visibly elumge the dala
block:. the use of partially addressed digilal dala
operandi is nOl recommended. Use only fully
addressed dala operands for this rcason.

Temporary local data arc usually symbolically

ncldress.:d. They are located in thc L Slackofthc
calling block and arC declared ill the calling
block.

811

1 '''''If'--'-' ------'-"-'''"''"''--1
1f'-"--'-1
,

(R

BilmX.y

The same a""liel 10 binary in/oul paramet('TS

and OUtpUI paramet('TS: here 100. asSignmelll
with part-address! dala bil$ is nOl pennissible
(the Progntm Editor will not reje meh an
Msigl1lnenl bul in most cases ;1 will result in
crrored functions).

flj;urr 19.J lniti.li,ation WI'"

F i~.d

Signal StOle

19.3 Aeroal P8lllOleler5

If the calling block i. a function hloc k, you can
al r.o U.<e it' .ratie local data,,~ aeruall'arameters
(see Chapter 19.4, Fvrwurd ing Block
l'an'met"'l"S"'). Static data are u~Llally 5ymboli
~ $Il ~ addressed: if you would like to a~sign
. 0solulc addrc%cs via Dl opernnd~. please note
the informal ion in Cba~er IS .2.4. "SpeeiaJ
1'0;1115 In Data A~f08ing.
W ith a block parameter of type BOO!., youean
apply the constant TReE (signal state "1"') or
FALSE (signal .tate "0"), Hnd with block
p~mmcters of digita l data type, you can appl~
"Jl CVll.t~nlS corrcspondinS t<> th e data t~pe .
Initiali/ation wil" eO""'tams ;~ r-errnis,ible onI~
for input I'arameters.
You can also initialize a block parameter ofele
mentary data type with compooenll< of arrays
and 1\CU~tllICS if the componCltt IS of the same
dat.a lype as the block parameler.
I nlt h.lbin{: block parRmctcr~ of
complex data ty pe

Every block parame ter can be of the evmp le.x

type. Vari"b1cs of the .ame Iypc can be Il.'led as
lelUIII OpCrands.

For ini tiali7.inl: block parameters of type DT or

STR ING, in dividual variable~ or eomponems
OfBITII}'$ o r structures oflhe same data type arc
penni~sible.

STRING vari ab les can be of vuri"ble length. If

you have ~l'ec if,ed the STRNG Icn','lh when
deda ring an input or vUlpl:t pbrameler for II
function block. the Editor rcserV(:5 the specified
space in lhe instance data block; if you ha"e not
~pecifitd any length, 256 byles are resen-cd for
Ihe STRIt'G variable. The ma.' timum length of
the STRJ!'IG variable. wh ich you specifY in the
d'Xlurution, mll,' be th~ same for the actual
parumetcr and the rorm~ l parameter. Exception:
Wilh Fe funclions . you spec ify eilher no length
or the standard lenglh of 2~4 bytes when
declnring a ST RING variable: h~re, yon can use
ST RING variables of all kllgth~ lIS aemal
pnrnmetel1i'.
f or initializing block parameten of type
J\.R.RAY or STRUc..'T, variable.'! wi!.b exactly
tbe "",ne structure IlS the block parameters arc
pemllSsibl e.

I nlthll111nlil block parll.n,etu, of UHrdefine d dM la IYJK""

Por complex or eXlcn si~ c dalll SlruClnrcS. Ihe
usc ofllscr. defined data types (UDT." i, I"ommended. First, you defi ne th e UDT and Ihen
you u~ iI, for example, 10 generale the variable
in Ihe datM block or to declnre the block parameter". You can \hen 0""' the variable when initial
izmg the block parameter. Here. tOO, the actual
pammeter (the variable) must be of tbe samc
da!a type (the same
as thc hlDek parameter.

VOn

A complete data block with the .ame UDT type

as the bJocl:: parameter is nol pcrmis~iblc .,
actuul parumeter.
Jnltlali~in\: block p anmctc" of type
TlM"F:R, C OU:'<;T.E:R a Dd BLOCK_II

You mitiHli~e a block panmcICToftyPf' TIMER

with Ii timer and a block parameler of type
COUNTER wilh a counle r. You can apply only
hlock~ without their own panlmetL"Il< Iv bluck.
parameters <>f pammetu types I:JLOCK_f C
und I3LOCKJR. You iniliulizc BLOC K_DB5
with a data block.
Block paramctrnl oftypcs TIM ER. COUNTER
and B LOCK_x~ must be input paramelers.
Inltllilb.in2 block paramete" nf
type POTNTER
Pointers (constanls) and opr""o,ls arc p<:rmi .. i.
ole ror block parameters of parameter type
PONIT:R. The se pointeili are either rang~
pomters (32 -hil pointers) or DB pointe", (48-bit
pomters). The opcnmch ;ore of dcmcnlary dalll
type and can also be full~-.ddrcssed dat.a operands.
Output parameteTh of type I'O INTER an: not
permitted for func tion blud s.
InIlIDl1~lo"

block

parameter~

of

typ~

ANY

Variable.' of all data types arc prnni,sible for

block parametcn; ofpanuncll"T Iype ANY. The
progmmrniog within the I;l<lk-d block detcrmines which variables (operanlh or data types)
mo~t be applied to the block parameters, o r
"hich variab les are feasible. You ca n alsu 'peeif;' B constant in the formal of the ANY poinler

1'Iobl< 19 .. PcnniMiblc Cmnb'""t'''''' wh= Forward,"lI Block l'acameI=

' . 11inr.:.'>' caned
!Xcbral'o" t)'p<
Inrut _ Input
Outpul > Outplll
In/OUt _ Input
In/oot _ Outpul
In/Old _ lI'IIout
C

~Ic" ... _ y

Fe ,ails Fe

,
,

, ,.flJ enll. , ,
Fe

,
,
,
,

Fe caUs HI

,
,

,
,
,
,
,

<!au 'YP<'

,
,

FB calli FR.

'-

,
,

,
,

,
,

..

<.: - c.....,1....... ."...

1 ' - ~_'J'1><'o

TIMER,c:OU(H.R .... BU)"' ,," ""

"P#[data blocl<'}O!'eflmd Data!)-pe NWIlbcr"

and thus define an absolute-addr..,;sed arCli.
O"lpUI parnmctcrs "rtype ANY an: nOIJl'"rmusible for funclion bloclcl<.

Block paramelers of puramctcr types T IMER.

COUNTER and I3LOC t,Uu can only be
pa.~s.ed on from one inpul p3ramel~r to aTlOlber
if the calling bloc!.; is a runetion block. Thc:$C
IUt ..ments an: represented In Table 19.4.

19.4 "Forwarding" Klock Parameters

19.5 Examples

"Forwarding" bloc!.; paramtle~ i. a 'p"dBI

fonn of aC<:CSS and of initiuli.zi.og bloc.!r. p"mmeters. The bloc!.; paramet.. rs "fthe calling bloc!.;
are "forwarded"10 Ihe paTllm~tcrs ofthc called
bLock. The formal param~1~1: of the calling
block then bccome~ the a~llIal panuneter oflhe
~ B Hed bloc!.;.

19.5. I Con "e yor Hell

In general, il is also the case hel'<' thaI the actual

parameter must be of the nme type a. the for
mal paramet ~.,- (thai i~, Ihe relevant block
parameters must agree in their dala type.). In
addition, )'OIJ e~n apply an input parameter of
the calling bloch only 10 an inpllt parameler <.>f
the called block, I.tId simi larly. an on!pUI
pamuleter 10 an nUlput p.a.ratncIC1'_ You can
appl)' an h\l'out paramctcr of th~ calling block 10
Bil d~c1aration types of the called block _
There "re restrictio". with reg"rd to data type.
caosed by the variations in the SlDrage ofbJod
parameter for funct'ons and those for funclion
block . Block parameters of elementary data
type can be p>ss;;ed on without "-'<'tricrion in
accordance with the ",formallon in the previoos
puraamph. Input and output paramelers of~om'
pl~" typc can only be foowarded if Ihe caiJillll
block is a function block.

""

F.l~ n' ple

The example shows tbe transfer of signal states

VII block. paniIIleten. For this porposc, w~ Il$C

Ihe fiwction of ~ C<.lllve-)'or belt ~'01Itrol syslem
described ill ChaptC1' ~ , "M~'Ttlory Funcrions
The conveyor bdl control ~ystcm i, to be programm~,.j ill a (unction block. nnd all input s and
OUlpUts are to be route<.! through block I'armnclers so th"t the function block C"tl be call ed
repeatedly (for severa! conveyor bellS). Figurt!
19.5 .how, the input aod output param~lers for
tile function block. as welluthc "w.tic and tern
porary local data uSC(!,
R

Distriboting the parameters is quite <imple in

this case: All binary operands tbat were inputs
have become inpul parameter., all output, havc
be<=ome output parameters. und all memory bils
have become "atic IOCBI dut". Yo" will al50
hal'e noticed that Ihe names have ocen altered
sliaht!y be<=alL.e only lenet!l. digi~, and Ihe
un(!er$core Ilf~ permined for hlocl.:;.Iocal van_
ablc~

The function bloc!.; "Conveyor_Belt";$ 10 e<>ntml tv.o e<>n'-cyor belt!. f or this purpose, il will
be cal1.-d Iwiee; Ihe 11rst time wilh the inpulS
a~d OUlputs of conveyor belt I and the second

19.5

19 . 5.2 !'ar ts Co unte r :xa mp le

FB "Conveyor belt"

"=, =
,=,
,=, =
,=,
=
'OQ
eOQ

~"

R ""dyIo.1od

c.,.-,U oo"

R~ady_r ..."

B8,,"_,t

B~._mot

Man_oo

f=

,~

BOOt.

En'U,oIt
M fault
STAT
Lo ~ d

,=
,=,
,=,
,=,
" ,=
,=,
,=,
,=

RornovQ
EM_ R . m_
EM_Rem_P
EM_ Lo.o_N
EM_ Loo_P
TEMP

E xamp l~s

PM_Rom_P
PM L"" P
F I~u ,.., 1 9 . ~

F Wlc, iun lJlocl< for 'he Convc'Yor Bolt Example'

tim e with those of conv~yor helt 2. For each

call, the fu nction block require. an instance
data block where it stores the data for the
obta ining eonv~yor belt . The data block for
conveyor belt 1 is to b e called "Beh Daml" and
the d"ta block for convcyorbelt 2 is to be c"l1~d
HcltD ata2"'.
You cau find lbe cx~...: utcd programming ~xam
pie in the library "LAD_ Book " Of "FBD_
Bool<" und~.,. the program "Conveyor Examp le -- that you can down load from the pub lisher's
W~b,ite (see page l\). Tt shows the program ming of function block FH 21 w ith inpm
paramNers, OUtplll parameters and static local
dsts . You can use any data blocks a, instance
b1<x ks: in the ex ample, OH 21 is used fur
'Hdt_ data j " and DB 22 fOT "Bdt_ datal', Tn
Ihe Symbol Table, these data blocks have the
data Iype of the funClion block ( F ]{ 21 in the
example , if "Conveyor_beh" i.the _ymbol for
FB 21).
When you cal1 the func tion block, yuu ,an u8e
the inputs an d outputs from (he Symbol Table
as actual parameters . In lbo, ... casc, where these
global symbols conlain sp~cial characten;, you
must pla~ e th ........ ymlxl ls in q'lOtati<m marks m
the program. Th e Symhnj Tahk i, dcsib'1lcd for
all three examples in th is chapter (fable 19 .6 at
the end of this chapter).

The cxampk dcm01]Sltates the h andling of

block parameters of ~I~mentary d ata type . ~
Parts Counter" cxample fmm C hapter 8,
Counters", i.' the basis of Ihe func tion. The
s ame function is implem~nted here a" a fun ctioll b lock, with all g loba l v ariab les declared
cilher as bloc k pamm <:"',.,. ur as stal ic local
dat a . T he lime,.,; and counters arc contro lled
here v ia individual elem ents.
Timers and COllit ... ,--s arC transferred via block
paramet~" of type TIM"ER and CO UNTER .
The se block parameters m ust Ix; input parameK.,-,;. The initial value, o f Ihc ,ounter (Qua,,'i!),)
and the timer (Dural and Dura2) can alsu be
trans ferred as block parameters; the data types
of the block parameters correspon d here to
those of the actual p arameters .
The edge memory b its are stored in the stat ic
i<x,d data and thc puhe memory h its are s tored
in the t~mporary local data.

You can fi nd Ihe ,ample program in the li brary

" LA])_ Huok-- or "FBD_ Book'" umk r the progmm 'Conveyor Example", lhat you c an download from the publishers Website (see p age l\) .
It con tains fUD ctiou block FB 22 "Parts
counter" and the as.oci at ed instancc J ",,, block

FB"P ""

,=,
,=,
,=, '"
lbanier

F.';"r..d
Fau ll -

Ac krK>w1

COUNT ER
WORO
T IM ER
S 5TIM E
S 5TIM E

=
=

~m

Ou. n tlt~
,~

~. ,

Ou",2

STAT
EM_ LB_ P
EM_lB_N
EM_AC_ P
EM ST P

T E MP
PM_ l B_ P
PM_ LB_ N
' _ BOOl
t S5T IM E

,=,
,=,
eoQ

,=,
,=,
ElOOl
e OQ
,~

S5T IME

FI>!UN 1\1.6

Function Hinck lor the Pwts CQuntor Exornplc

'"

19 Ulock Parameters
''CoumOal''. You can \1.: Ihe inputs. OUlpuU.
limer and oounl~r from the Symbol Table
(Table 19.6 in previous example) as actual
panom<.'Tcrs ",hen calling the function block.

19.~ .J

Feed Example

The ~anw function' de, cribed in the twO previ,

oui exnmpleli can al$o be called as local
instarw;u. In our example. !hi. mccans tNt we
pl"Ojr&m a f\.orw;tion block called "Feed' mat IS
10 control four conveyor belts and COUDT the
con"e~ pans. In this function blod:, FB
"Conveyor Belt" is called four times and FB
PartS_ counter" is caLled once. The call doc,
not take place in each ~ with ill> 0"'''' instance
data block, bm 1m called FBs are 10 SIOK their
data in the instanc<: data blockof~liQn block
feed.

Fiaurc 19.7 shows how tbe individu"l conveyor

belt controls al"<' interconnect ed (FB Pans
counter' is not represented here). Thc start silO'
n,,1 ;~ conn""tcd to the SW'I input of the con
troller for belt I. the "'tidy_rem output i~ con
nected to Ihe Sum input ofbeh 2. elc. Finally.
the ready-"em output of belt " i~ conne<:led 10
the R~m(J'Ift OUlPU' of -Fced'. The same sianal
sequence leads in the l"<'\'ersc direction from
Remo>I over Conl/nue and Reodylood 10 Lond.
8(41_",(>/, L/)(,Irr and IMjauil a~ .epanne eon~eyor btolt 5ignuls; R"5"', Stanup ao<l Slop con-

FUnclloo blo<:!< 'f...o""

!I.Ir.... ~1
L ~""1

-...2"

trol all ':O;1>"eyor belt, via B05,e31, Man 011

and SlQP.
The following program fQl" fUneli on block
Feed' is de'igned in the same "" y. Thc input
and outpUt parameter.; ot"the function block can
be taken from Figure 19.7. I" addition. the dig.
ila l valu~, fo r 'he pan . counter Q,umlil),. {)~r~'
~nd [J"ral are designed as input parameten
hel"<' , We declare the data of the individual con veyor belt controls ami the data of the pans
cOunter in t1J.e slatic local data in exactly the
same way as for a user-delir>eo;!. data ~, i,e.
wuh name and d3ta typ<". The variable Belt l~
is '0 receive the data .trucrure of funcllon block
-COIl\"e)"or Bel:', as is variable "Belt2~, ~tc.;
the ~ariable "Check~ 1"C<:eives the dala stroCIt.ll"<'
ofth~ funetion block 'Pans_counter" .
The program ill the f\.ouction block ~Ians with
the initialization of the ,;gn~ls common to all
conveyor belts. Here, we make Ui~ of the flltt
thu, the b lock parameters of the function bloch
calle<.! as local ill~tarn;c. are stat ic loca\ data in
the e um:nt block and can be lIeuted u sucb.
b lock parameter M,m 'III in th. current
funL1ion block controls ihe M~" on input
paramcters of an four conveyor bel! controls
with a singlc a"ignmenl. We proc:ectl in the
:.ame way wim the SIgnals SlOp and Resel. And
no,,- thc conveyor belt controls an initialized
wi,h the COmmon .ignaI8. (You can, of ~"(>ursc.
also jnirializ.:: These input pe.r&met<TS when the
func,ion blOCK is c:alled.)

n'e

19.5 Examp le.

Tahle 19.3 Declaratiun Section ofl'B 'Feed'

'. p""lara-

M
dre<.'

}bme

-lion

,.ill

StOTt

HOOL

R"",ovcd

BooL

L.
" .

\fan_'tart
Stop

D~L

.""

-..

"

t
om

Re,et

BooL
BOOL

Count
Quantity
Tim
Dural
Dura2

COUNTER
WORD

Lo ~d

BOOL
BooL

Remove

,.,

,.
"
"'.0
0.'

I 4 .0

tni',aJ
Val""
FALSE

FAl.SE
FALSE
FALSE
FALS F

. Comment

:;;'J

Part< have boon removeu truml>eh

Stan C (mv~)'N belts manually

Sl(}p ,',mveyor belt,
Set control to the ba,ic ""ning
Count~r

lOr the part'

W # I6#200

.Numbc:Tofp~tt.

S5Tl/I.IE

"

S5Tlt5S

S5TnfE

10.0

SH"IQS

FAL SE

Load new parts 0010 helt

fALSI::

Hemove parts from belt

"'

....

Stan co nveyor he l"

Timer forthe monitor

:'fo~ j torinii. ,jme fo r part.
Monitoring time for gap

"]"l \l~. R

...

r:IN~OUT
STAT

Bcltl
Belt2
Belt 3
Bd!4

Conveyor_ be lt
c.:m",:yot_bc lt
CO!lveym bel t
Conve yor belt

32.0

Check

1' ...... counter

3R.O

14.0
20.0
26.0

Control for belt I

Control toe ~ It 2
Control for belt :l
Control for bell 4
Contro l fo r counting and munilming

TEMP

The sub,c'luent call, ufthc function blocks for

eotwcyor b elt control contain on ly th~ block
panomelcr~ rUT the in dividual signals tor each
conveyor be lt and the connecti on to the bl ock
param Clers of '"Feed'". Th e indiv idua l ,ignal~
are thc lighl barrioN, lhe commands for the belt
motor and the motor faults . (We make use here
of the fact tm t whl.-'Il" function block i" called.
not al l block parameters have 10 be init ialized .)
v,,'e program the connections between ~he individual belt conlro llers u,ing assigmnenls .

Thc fB "Pans c ou nter'" '" called a., a local

1n s\an~e even if it has no closer c onnection with
the s igna ls of the conveyor belt controls. The
inStaJ1CC dala block for '"Feed" stores the t'B
data ,
The input raratnClCrs Quanli/y, Dura! and
Dura) jor "I' e~d" nc<:d to be set only Ollce , Thi s
can be done u.,ing detimlt values (as in the
example) o r in the re smn routine in on 1()() (tor
example, through d irect "",ignmenl if these
three parameter> arC t.-cated as global data).

263

19 Block I'aramc{crs

I #Ma!-f__"-,________________________'_'~__'~Ma)"--oo_1
#Be~.Mall_on

IIBeltJ.M9

ItBel\4.Man_0Il

)--I

~of'---,--------------------------'-'~eltl ~
#Beltl.Stop

e - --

e --

- -- --{, )--I

L--_

- - --{)--I

#Be~3.S{OP

II'B@it4.S\op
_ _ _ _ _ _--{,
)--I

~ef~~':..-__,---------------'~'~'~'~"_{BaH

f-_____________'~'~.~'~O:,:Ba~
f-______________~'~'~.~"~':,:.Ba~
L._ ___ _ ______ ___~'~'~.~"~',:B9H

1------1"

" ''"
f--H----1
"""

ItBel!!
Ro~dyload ~ #load

tH

#Bel{l(fl_'_'_"'_'_'________________________'__"~'

;r;Belt2SU>rt

( )--I
tlgurc 19.8 Program for he<l example (LAO)
Con,jnued overleaf

19.5 I::.umpid

e"",/n"N:
IIB.1t2

.,-

'NO

'"

ee~_mo l

End_belt

FiK.. ..., I'.s

~m
"B'~_rnot7"

"lMfa>lll2"
Mfeu lt

I1t8ett3(Qadyi<n<l

"B~t2.ConIinufl

f-I- ' - - - -- -- --jl

)--I

IjRIlady-rom
f-I-"'--- - -- - - - i l )--I
_3.Stool1

.. eeN3
'NO

'N
.~.

"lMh"'~"

.,

""'--

'"emo<

_ __ mol)"

Mfault

l",eelt4te~dYload

f-I- - --

- --

#8eH3 .ConUnU9

---<1

)--I

1'8.K4

'NO

"
Conbnue

Rncl)"-,,,m

End_bell

Bait_mol

r-'R~

"lbalY4"

"lMfaul14"

f--'

Mfau lt

..-

~- ,

"

"',

~~

"t.berrt"
lbolrri.,.

""'.
"""""
""""'" -

-- ""~

OtOu<e1 #Oura2 -

"""
"""

'"0

,,- rFeuN

r-

"FlnItllacl"

' FauII""

(LAD)

for FC<."<i Example

M.lan~ .tar1

IIBNll .Man.-,)n

# Belt2.Man on

#8ek3.MaR_on

~.Man_on

IISiop

/l'8e1t1.Stop

#Belt2 .Stop

IlBeIt3.Stop

llBe1t4.Stop

#Reset

IiBen1 _Bnlc_,t

#8eIt2.Ballc_11

.Bett3.BIoalc_u

ItBelt4 BIollc_u

/t6e ll t

"'"

""'""
"'Loom

En<C~t

"/MfauIt1

----i

1IB<IIt1.R&ady_rem

---1

FIKIlI"e 19.9 Progn.ru for Fd

26'

"-~,
~LmoW

MfauH

118e1t2_lWadyIoad

COlt''''~~ o ...,,./~af

Rudyload
Bell_mot

Exampl ~

1l'8e~ 1 .Conlinue

IIB& rod2.Start

(FBD)

#8 ..,t2

"Lbarr2":=~;';
";'~_;O:.:"___':.:':'~m:ojt~ 'Be~_mot2"
Mfault

"/ M/au lt2"

#Selt3 .R&adyload

---1

#Be1t2. Conliflue

80

# Selt3

"Lb",,3"

E~d_b9~

"fMfault3"

#aelt4 . Re~dytoad

Beicmot

Mfault

--1

118..113. Continue

&

#Band4.Start

#B@ lt4
Ready rem Continue
Belt_mot End_ belt
Mla ult

#Removed
"Lbarr4 "
"fMlault4"

~~jset

#Start
"Admowl"
"Lba rrl"
#c<>unt
#QuanUty
#TIm -

#Dural -

Ack~oV>1

"'~,

Finl~hed
Fault _

#Remove
'a9~_mO t 4 '

"Fin ished"
"Fa un"

Lbarr\er
Cou nt
Quantity

Tim
Dural

#Dura2- ': ',,

" -_ _ __ _--l
C
Co~II",,~d."

figure 19.9 Progt"Um for feed I::xomple (FBI))

'"

19 1llo<:k I'lonuneCen

T.bl~

111.6 Symbol

T.bl~

r..... lhe COI!,eyor tielt. PIU"1II COWlter ~nd F~ Example>

."
"

conveyor
com.yor

"
"

"

"j

'"

,"

Program (',"""cssing

Program Processing

This section of the book discusse s the various

methods of program processing.
The main program executes cycl ically. After
each program pU>s, the CPU rerums 10 the
beginning of tb" progr<tnl and e "ecUle, il aga in,
Thi, is the "standard" method o f pro~e,sing
PLC programs,
Numcrou..> system functi()ns suppon the utiliza tion of ~yst~m gervices, such as conlroliing the
rcal_ lime clock or commun ication via bus sy,,lems. In COntra,! to the static se!lings made
when parame lcri/jng the CPU, system fun~
tions ~an be used dyn amical ly at program run
nnw.
The main program can he temporari ly 5U<_
rended t() ali()w interrupt .crvicin g . The vari om Iypcs ()f imcrn'pts (time-of-day imenupts,
time-delay intctnlpts, watchd[)g interrupts,
hardw"re interrupts, DPV I interrupt', "ynd1T()n OU8 cycle interrupts. muh;pro~c~sor ;mcrrupt)
are di vided into priority classes who<~ processing priority you may yourself, to a large d egree ,
J~termine. Interrupt servicing allow s you to
react qu ickly to .ignal, trom the controll e d pro_
cess or implement periodic control procedur~ ,
ind~pendently of the process ing time o f the
nla,n program,
Before starting the main program, Ih c CPU ini tiates a stllrt- up pro;:ram in wh ich you can
make ,pcc ifkalions n:garJing progmm PNccssing, detjne default values fo r variah lc s, or
parameterize modules,
.Error handling is also part of pro1,'tam p ro_
ce,sing. STEP 7 distinguishes between synchro'J<)Us errors, which occur during prlXcs>ing
of a statement , and asynchrouous errors, which
can b e dc\cctcd independently of program proc~s"ing . In both cascs you ~an adapt th~ error
routine to ,uit your needs

20

.\-hln pro;:rllm
Program "tructure; scan cycle contr()l;
respon>e ti m~: program functio"",: mu!!i computing ope ration; data cxch&ngc with
system fun~tions: start information

2t

Interrupt handUng

Time -of_day interrupB; rime-Jeta)' ;tHerrupl,; watchdog interrupt': hardware

interrupt>;: DPVI interrupts; multiprO'-'cssor int<-"rrUpt; "ynchronous cycle intcrn 'pts; h andling interrupt c"~nL'
22

Stut -up characteristics

Power-up, mcmory rcscl, retemi v ity; cold
re,la!1 ; warm l'e<turt; ascena;n module
"ddr~s", parameterize mod !!les

23

Error handlin;:
Sy nchronous errors (programming ~rro"_
acces, errors); handling synchronous
elTor evems: asyn~hronous ~rror'; sysl<-'1ll
Jiagnwtics

'"

20 Main Propm

20 Main Program

The mnin program i. Ihe cyclically scanned

UK!" prol,:ram; cydic ,canninll is the "nonnal"
way in w!>ieh programs exCCUlC in progrnnuna1>Ie logic ~ontrollcrs. The large majority of eOnINI sy~tcm' u.<c only Ihis form of program ex~
cut ion. If eveUl-driven prog.nun ""anniD. i~
used. it i$ in must C<lSCIl only in addilion to the
main pT'Ognirn.
Th~ mll;n prol,:no.m is invoked in Of1j:ani;alion
hlock 00 I. It ..xc:cUles al {he IU"'esl pnorily
level, und elIn be interrupted by aU olh~ IYPO;:'
uf program processing. Thc user program u
executed in RUN mode. which is sci usinlo1lhc
mode seleclor on the CPU', front pane\. With a
1<.>lUIlc .wilch as mode selector, the position i.
II. UN, wilh a kcy_operat.-d .wi t~h , the positions
are RUN and RUN -P. When in Ihe RUN-I' position. Ihe CPU ean be programmed via a programming device. In Ih .. RUN po~ilion. you can
"'IOOVe the key ,;0 thaI 00 One can chanae the
OJl'C'3ting mode w;lhout prop<.T nuthonzsllon;
when me mode .eleclor is at RUN. proll"'JIl$
can only be read.

20,1 I'ro&:rllm Organization

20.1.1 Pru\:rJlm Structure

To nnalyze n co mplex automation task mClm" tu
divide Ih~t task into s!IL~lIer tasks or functi(ln~
in accurdancc wilh Ihe SlnICtun: of the process
In be controlled. You Ihen defin" Ifte individual
luks resulling from lills dividing procCSS by
oclcnnining the functions and .tipulal1ng the
interface 5ignal~ to Ihe process or 10 other msb.
This brnkdown into individual I"".." can be
don" in your program. In this way. Ihe <InICtll":
of your pn~ corresponds to the di",slon of
the automalion Ia.k.

A divided uocrpmgratn can be more easily configured. and cnn be programmed in Sl:Clion.
(even by ."v"nll people in the case of very larac

n,

uocr p.ograIl1S). And finally, bUI not lacking in

imj\OTlanee. (lividing the prolP'am .implifies
both debugging and service Dnd malnlennn~e

The .trucruring oflhe 1,lS~1' program de~nds on

il8 si/c and its function. A dislin~"\iOll is made
betwe ..n th.-..c different ""mcthods":

In a Unear progra m, Ihc eudn: mam program

i. in organirdlloD block OH I. Each eutTem
patb is in a S(Cpa1llle DeNo'Ork. S11'P 1 numbers
the nL'!works in sequrnL~. When editing nod
debuggmg. you can refe~nee e~cry nctwOTt.:
dircclly by ils number.
A pani tioncd progr'im is basically n linen r
pTOIr"'im which is divided into blocks, R~"sons
for di\idin g me program mij;hl b~ b<:e~u>c it is
too long for organizalion block 011 I ()T bccaLloc
}OU ",anI 10 mak.. il mon' relldable. The blocks
are then called in .equence. You Clltl ~ISQ Ilividc
the program in anmher block lhe same way you
",ould Ihe program in organi.tatiuu block OB I.
This rn.-rhod allowl yuu 10 call associaled process-relaled functions rOt procesling from
within OOe and the same blod. The a,dvanl8aC
of this program siruciure is tftal, e'en though
lht: program is lin...r. yoo can sfill debug and
run il in sections (.imply by omitting o r adding
block calls).
A Slruclnred p~ullnm is u!\Cd when Ihe concepn," l fo rmulation is particularly extensive ,
". hen yuu want 10 ,eu~e projp'Ulll fun~tiuru;, or
when complex problems must be soh cd. StrucTUring means dividing the program into S~Clions
(blocks) which embody self-contained funeI;on< 0.- sen e a specific funCI;on.1 purpo5C IItld
....bich e"'change thc fewe.ot po$sible numbcr of
sipls with other blocJts. Assia,nlllg each program s..-crion a specific (proeHI-relaled) fuDC_
I;on '" ill l'f'Oduce easily r<:.w..blc bloc""" ",ilil
simple int.. rfaccs to ,,!her blocb ...hen projp'UTDmcd.
The LAD and run prugranuntng language.
support strucrured programming through fun~_

20.1 Pl"oiJ1lll1 Organization

tions with wbkh you clln C~~tC "blo<:ks" (selfcontained program sections). Chapter 3.2.
" l3Ioc k, '" dise u~scs the diffc~ nt kinds of
blocks lind their uses . You will find a detailed
description of the functions for calling and ending block!! in Chapter 18, "Rlock Functions".
The blocks ~ceive the signal$ and data to be
pl"OC(:~scd via the call interface ( the block
parametcn). and forward the ~sulu over this
!I-/Imc imerface. The optioll5 for passing panlmetCT9 are d escribed in detail in Clu>p1eT 19,
"Illock Parameters".

20. 1.2 Progra m OrgnnlZlll o o

Program organizat ion det~-nnin~i whetber and
in what ordcr the CPU will process Ihe blocks
whkh you have generated. To organi= your
prognun, you program block calls in tbe de.ired
sequence in the sUPraQrdin~te blocks. You
$hould cbo~ the order in wbich the bloch are
c a Uw SO th at it milTOrs the process related Or
funclion.re la ted division of the conn olled
plant.

The following poinl~ of discussion can g ive

only a rouih. very general view with the intention of g iving th e beginner :IOniC idea. on pmgram ~tructuring and on trRllslntin g his control
task inlO reality. Advanced prognllnmen; nor_
mally have sufficient e>;~rien~ 10 organize a
prolP"llm to suit the special con trollllSk a l hand.
A p I'OCH """"'lItcd PrDira m . t r uclure closely
roll",,'s the muclUre of the plant 10 be controlled. The individual program se-clio ns COtTespond to the individual pans of Ihe plant o r o f
the process to be controlled. Subo rd inate 10 thi s
TOugh structure are Ihe scan ni ng of tbe limit
sw itches and operator pancl ~ and Ihe co ntrol of
the actuators and display device. (in different
pans of the plant). Bit memo!), o r global data

"" ,

Ne5llnk de plh

Intertocl<3
Ben control 1

The maximum depth applies for I priority class

(fot the progrom in an orvanizalion block), and
is CPU-dependent. On the CPU 314. for exam_
ple, the nesting d eplh is eig ht. that is. beginning
with one organizat ion block (nesting depth I).
you ca n add seven mOre bloc:ks in Ihe "horizonlal" ,li""'lio n (Ihis i . ca !l ~d nesli,tg). If more
blocks are cal led . the CPU itleS to STOP with a
" Block overflow" ClTOr. Do not forgel to
include ~yslcm function block (SFR) calls aud
system funclion (S FC) calls when calculating
the IlC'Sling deplb.

Belt control 2
Oeta

acq u i s~ion

PI'OCfIU

A data bl<xk ca ll. which is IIClWIlly only the

nJ>C"ill.i or se lecting o f a dala area. has no effect
on Ihe nesting deptb of blocks. nor is the nesting depth affected by callin g $Cveral bloc ks in
success ion (linear block calls).

Oata procnslng

Conveyor data
0.18 preparation

Communication
PU Cllee-r dliled p r Oil r anl Or i anlzAllon

In o\"ianization block 08 I. you should caU the

bloc"" in the main program in such a way as to
roughly organize your PTOiT"'"- A program can
~ Ol"llanizcd on either a process-relatw Or
funCl ion~late d ba.i .

CONTROl
Fill" .... 10 . 1

E~~mple

of PTOgnr.m Structuring

271

20 Main Program

are llsed for signal interchange between different parts of the p laJlt.
I)rogram .tr uctul~ is
based on the control function to be cxecuted.
Init ially, this method of program strucroring
docs not take the contL"Ollcd plant into account
at all. The plant s(rueture firsl be~omes apparent in \h~ Sllbordinate bloch when the control
function defined by the rough strucro", is
divided nmher.
A

function-,..,I at~d

In practice. a hybrid of these two concepts is

nonnally u,ed. Figure 20. 1 sh",,,-s an example:
A functional stmct"re is mirrored in the operat
ing mode pTOb"am and in the data processing
program which goes above and beyond the
plant itself. Program sectioilll Feeding Conveyor I, F~~ding Conveyor 2. Pwcess and Discharging Conveyor are process-related .
Th~

exampk al'" shows the use of difTerent

types of bloch. The main pTOgram is in OB I :
it is in this progr~m (ha( (he b locb for the op erating moo~" the variou, pi<""C cs of plant ~q"ip
meot, and for dala processing are called. These
blocb are funelion blocks with an instance dmu
block"" data SlOre. F.,~ding Coov~yor I and
Feeding Conveyor 2 a.-c identically structured:
FB 20, with DB 20 as ins' ancc dum block for
Fec<.ling Conveyor 1 and with DB 21 as
instance data. block tor Fe..ding Conv~yor 2. IS
used tor con!rol.
In 'he conveyor eonrrol pwgrdm. finlction FC
20 processe, th e interlocks; it scan:; inputs or
memory bits a nd controls FB 20's local da!a.
FWlction block FB 101 ~ontains the control
progr....n for a ~onvcyor bclt, and i, called once
for each belt. The call is a local jnstan~e"u (hal
its local data are in instance data b lock DB 20
Thc same applies for the data acquis ition program in FB 29.
The data processing program in FB 50, which
USC" OR 50, proce>ses the data acquired ", ilh
FR 29 (and otber blocks). which are located in
globa l data block DB 60. fUllction FC 51 pre pares these data forlrans[er. Th~ lransfer is controlled by HI 51 (with DB 51 ), in whid, system
blocks SFB ~. SFB 9 and SFB 62 arc called
Here, too, the SFB, sav~ their instance data in
"s"pllloTdinate" data hlod: DB 51 .

2{}.2 Scan Cycle Control

20.2.1 Proces. Im uge Updatinj!
The proce.s image is part ufmc CPU's intcrnal
system memory (Chapter 1 1.6, "CPU Memory
Areas'). It b~gins at 110 address 0 and end, at
an upp~r limit slipulated by the CPU. On appropriately equipped CPUs. you can define this
limit yourself.
Nurm ally, all d igital modules lie in the process
image addrc.s area, while all analog moollies
have addresse, uuu;idc this mea. If the CPU has
fre~ address allocation, you can lise !h~ configuration tabl~ to dircc! any mo d"le uvcr (be process image or ad~" it o utsidc the process
imagc arCa .
The proce." image ~omi'ts of the proces.inlllge input table (input, J) ~nd the pc<)C~s,
imagc OU'PU\ table (outputs Q).
After CP U re,tart and prior tu thc first execution ofOI:! I , the operating systcm transfers tbe
sil,,"nal statcs of the process-image output table
Ie) the output morluks and accepts the s ignal
slates of the input modules into the proccssimagc input table. This is followed by execulion of OB 1 where n omlally the inputs ar<:
combined with each othet and lh~ output. ar~
enutrolled. Fol lowing termination of OB I, a
new cycl~ begins with the updating of tbe proce ss image (Figure 20.2).

If an error occur,; during autommic Updating of

the process image, e.g. bccau,~" mooule is no
longer access ible. organi,,'diun bl(Jd OB l!5
"Program E,,~cution Errors" is called. IfOB 85
i. nO! anilable, thc CPU gocs to STar.
Subp r uc""

imag~s

With appropriately equipped CPU" you can

d ivi de the process imagc into up to 30 subprocess images . You make this divi,iOIl during
par."mcl~rization of the signal modllies by
def,nin g [h~ subprocess image via which the
modul~ i, to be addressed whe n you ""igo
nddresse,. You can scparm e the division
accoTdmg to process-image input table and proces;;-image OUlpul table.
All module s that you do nO! assib'Il tu one of lhe
subpro~c," image s I to 30 are stored in subprocess image 0, '" hich i, also called the OB I pro-

20.2 Scan Cycle Control

Order of execulic", 10r CPUa up to stllrt of deU"al1l'011998

Start current
cyct ic execution

Start nexl
cycl ic e~ecul i on
Cur ....nt c c ia time 08 1

...

...

...

Ma in ;>rogram 08 ,

'"

"0

Main prog ram 08 1

'"

...

Order of execution for CPU, from stllrt of delive ry 10/1998

Start currMI
cyclic execution

Start next
eyel ic execu~on
Current cycl e time 08 1

PIO

...

I PII

Main progra m 08 1

P IO

...

...
...

I PII

Ma in program 08 1

..

Order of exaculfon for Inte rrupt organization blocks with subprocess.lmege

Start
internJpt handling
Runtim e of the interru

,,,

End Interrupt
hand ling
anlzetlon blcck

Interrupt organ izat ion block

...

SP IOn

inpu' 'aM.

or ,,,PP""C'J,.i,,,,,1P' 0

NO

pm'mage ""'P<" ",bl.

or ,"bp""'." . (ma1<" a

SPIt"

Subp""""'.im"!(e" ihpullabl.
Sub nxe' i"",K' n ",,'pur ,"ble

...
SPtln

proc<Mr,"a~e

Sf'lU"

Figure 20.2 updating Ille Proc".. Image

cess image (OB I_PI) . This subproce .. image 0

is updatcd a"tomalicaUy by the operating sy,
tern of the CPU as pan o f cyclic execution . You
can al>o program the CPU sllch that the auto
mmic updating is switched off.
With appropriately eq"ipped CPUs, you can
also assign the subprocess images to the inter
nlpt org anization blocks so that they are auto
matically updated when th ese O Rs are callee!.
The system functions SFC 26 UPDAT_PI and
SFC 21 UPDAT _PO are ava ilabl e for updating
the subprocess images by the uScr program. In
th e o rganization blocks for sync hronons cycle
interrupt, you usc the sy<lem functions SFC
126 SYNC_PI and SFC 127 SYNC_PO (Chap
ter 21 .8.2, "lsochrone Upd ating Of Process
Image") .

SFC 26 UPDA"f_PI
SFC 21 UPDAT_PO
The system func tion SfC 26 UPDAT_Pl
updates a subprocess image of the inputs , the
system funct ion SFC 27 UPDAT_PO updates a
subpro~css image of the o utp uts. Table 20.1
shows the parameters of these SFCs. You can
also update subprocess image 0 wilh these
SFes.
You can carry out updating of individual subprocess images by call ing these SFCs ," any
time and at any loc ation. For example, you can
define a subp rocess image for a priority cl ass (a
program execution level) and you can then
cauS e this subprocess image to be updated at
the Slan and al the end of the relevant organ iza
tion hlock when 'his priori ty clas< is processed.
Up<lating o f a process image can be interrupted
by calling a higher priority class . If an elTor

27.1

20 Main Program
<>ccu r,; during up<iatitlg of a proc ~", image. c ,g.
i:>ccau,e ~ module c~n no longer b e ac~~,>ed.
this error is reponed yia th e flu"'tion value of
The src.

ZU.2.2 Scan Cyc le Monitorin!: Time

I'rogram scanning in orgatlization block O B I
i ~ monitor~d by the so-calle d "scan cycle mOIliTor" or "scan cycle w"l~hdog:". The default
value for The scan cycle mon itoring time i, I SO
ms . You can change \hi s valu~ in the rang~ from
1 ms 10 6 , by parameterizing the CPU ac~ord
ingly.

if th e mai n program takes IOllger to scan than

\bc specified scan ~yde monitoring time. {he
CPU calls OS 80 ("Timing error"). If OB 80
has no\ lx:cn programmcd, the CPU g<><s 10
STOP.
The sc:!n cyc le monitoring lime indudes the
full scan Time for OB 1. Tt also inc! ",\es the scan
times for high~r priority classes which imenupT
the m~ill program (in the eun-em cycle). Communication p roce"e, ~arricd oUt by the opcr~t
ing 'ystem. su~h as GO communication o r PG
acces s to the CPU (block 'talU"), also increa,e
the runtim~ of the main program. The increa"~
can be rcdueed ill part b y the way you paramcteri~ the CPU ("Cyclic load from commllni cs
tiou " on the "Cycle1Clock m~ m""Y bits" Tab)

Cyd .. statistics
If you have aD online connection from" programming dev ic e to an operating CPU. >d~e(
PLC ---c> JI,10DIILE lN FORMATIO~ {o call IIp a
d ia log box thm contain, " ~' nal tabs . The
"Cycle Time" tab ,how , the current cycle T im~.
as well as the >ilioncsT and longest cycl~ Time .

T:tblc 20 t

Para mct~.,.

h"'-TJ'tSt.cr_'<""""
PART
RCT

V~

FLADDR

The parameTerized minimum cycle dumlion

and th e s~an ~yd~ monitming tim~ aTe also d i, pbycd .
The cycle { ; m~ for the la't cyde and the mi nimum and max imum cycl e time since (h~ PLC
was la,t Slane<! up can also be read in Th e
t~mporary local data in the .Iart informarion
ofOB 1.

StT.tJ R f:_TR TGR

Resta r ting rh e sca n cycle m Olli toring time
An SFC 4 3 RE_ TR1GR SYSTem fundion call
restarts the Scan cycle monitoring lime; the
rimer "" tart, with The new value ,ct via C PU
p~mrn;:tcriz~tion. SFC 43 has n o parame ters.
Operating <y.te m run Umes
The >can cycle Time al~o includ~s the operatin g
sy slem nrn lime" Th~"e are eomp<Js~d of the
following:
(>

(>

(>

>

Sy'tcm control of ~y~lic

cycle- ). fi~ed vaJLLe

s~"nning

("no_load

UpdaTing o f the proces, image; depend~'Jl t

OIl (h~ number o f byres to])., updatcd
Updal ing of the tim~'fS; dc!)<'ndent on the
number of Ti mers To be updaTed
Communications load

Conunurncatiolls functiolls for the CPU include

tbe tran, f~.,- of ",cr progmm blocks or daTa
c x ~ h an g e betwee n CPU modlllc s u s ing system
fu nCTions , The Time the CPU is to use for Tbesc
funCTions can be limi1ed by paramelen z in g the
CPU.
A ll \alueS a t operating 'yS{~'IIl runllme
pTOperties ofIhe re levant CPU.

"Ie

[OT the SFC, rOT ?roc" l.J.na~e Upd:>,ing

5)FC

De.:!aration

D.", TYl><

"" "n
n
"
I

INPUT

BYTE

RETURN
OUTPUT

<NT
WOR!)

C"tlte~"",

n . ""Tiplion
~u mber of the ,ubp",)..-"" image (0 to 15)
Eaur infOTTTllitiun
On an ac,ess error: Tbe adc!ress of tho firS t
hyte to ca",. the e<ror

20.2 Scan Cycle Control

20.2.3 ).flnlruum Scan Cyd., Time, Back_

block ca lled in OR 90 , however, is first scanned

in it s entirety.

ground Scanning
\V,th a ppropriate ly equ ipped CP Lls . yo,", may
s pecify a minimum scan cyd e time _ Tf lhe main
program (inc!",jing interrupts) lak es less time.
the CPU waits unt il the spec itied mi nimum
scan cycle tirn~ has elapsed h efore be ginning
the next cycle by recalling OS I .
Th~

dcfaOlIt va luc fot th~ minimum _,can cycle

time is 0 ms, th at is to ~ay, th~ function is disabled, You can set a m in imum S~an cycle tim~
of fro m I ms to 6 s in "Cy~lci Cl"",k m~mory
bits" tah whe n you parame teri z e the CP U .

The length of a " slice" depends on the ~urrenT

scan cycle ti me o f OR I. The closer O B I 's scan
time is to the m inimum sc an cycle Time . the less
tim<- remains fo r e"eCUTing OB ~o , The program scan time is not monitored in OB 90.
O B 90 is seanned only in RUN modc. It c an be
interrupted b y interrupt and error event" just
li k e OB L The stan i"fonn at;on ;n the temporary local dam (Byte I) a lso tell. whi~h even ts
call,e OB 90 to e"ecute from the beginning:
[>

8 #1 6# 91
A fter a Cl'U restart:

I>

B# 16#92
After a h lock procc,",cd in OB 9 0 wa"
deleted or re placed:

"

B #1 6#93
After ( re)loading ofOB 90 in RU"l mode :

Background . canuin g OR 90
In the int~rva! between the actual e nd o f the
cycle and expiration o f the minimum cycle
time, the CP U executes organ ization b loc k DB
90 "Backgro und scanning" (Figure 20 .3) _ on
90 is cxttuted " in ,li~c ," , \Vben the ope rating
system c alls OR I , cxc~U1ionof OB 90 i, interrupted : it is Then resum ed at the poilll of inlerruption when OB I has lerrnin" ted , OB 90 can
be int<-rrupted after each statemenl, any sy ,\~m

[>

B#1 6#9 5
After Ihe program in OB 90 "'a" scanned
and a n e w b,,~kground ~yd e begins.

Orde r of execution for CPUs up to start of d ..!ivery 1011998

Start current
cyc lic exe cution

Curren t cycle time OB 1

...
...

Main prO>jram OB 1

'"

"0

Contin uation
of execution
in 08 90

Start next

cycl ic execution

Backg round OS 90

Minimum sc"n cycl. tim ..

Order of """cution fo r CPUs from start of de livery 1011998

Start current
cyclic execution

Current c cletlme OB 1

PIO

! PH

...
...

Ma in program 08 1

"i',

0"'

'"

Contin ua tion
of execution
in OB 90

Ba ckground OB 90

,'.'.

.:,;..,:;,';:';::,:

Start next
cyclic execution

P IO

I Pit

08 1

Min Imu m scan cycle tIme

_F igure ! O,3 M in imu m Cycle Du"'ti"n and Baciq;round Sconning

275

20 Main Program

20.2.4 Response TIme

we

Ifthe user program in 013 I work:; with

signa l states of the process "nsg~<, thi, result. in a
response time which i" ,kpend<.'l1t on \he program cxeclllioll limc (. can cyck tim e). Th e
response time lies oc tween one and t\VO scan
cycles , "" Ih,' f()ilowing exrunple explains,
When a limit switch is activated, Cor ins\al1 ce, il
changes its ,jgn~ 1 <late from "0" to " I". The
programmable controller detects this chanl;c
duri,,!> {he subsequen t updating o rt hc process
unage . and scb tbe inputs allocated to the limit
switch to "\" . The progrrun evaluates 1bi:;
change by resetting an output, for example, in
Oro"T 10 switch off the co=sponding motor.
The new signal "t,,{~ o[mc OUtpUI mal ,,-as r<:set
is trmllif~'TTed ~l the end of 1he program ,can;
only lhC11 is the corrcspondinl; bit resel 011 the
,hgital output mn<.luk.
III H bc,\-c~se ,iIDation., me prOl:ess imagc "
updat,,,l immediately following the cbange in
thc limit switch', . igl1,,1 (F igure 20A). Tt would
thcn take only onc cycle for the ~Ievan! output
to respond. In the worst-case simmion., updatin g of the process image was JUSt completed
whell the limit switch signal changed. Tt would
then be ncccs,ary to wait approximately OIle
cyclc for the pro!lflill1lllabk " untroller to d"tect
the <ignal chanl;~ and SCI th e input. A fler yet
another cycle, tbe program can respond.
When so con"i dered., the u ,cr progr3m', c.,~ec ,,
tiulJ lime contain" :on pT<J,edl.l"" in one program cycle (including. for instance. the servic -

Sensor signal chllnge with

immed iato t f~nsf ~r
to process-Image

wg of ltllerrupt<, th e fu nction, cHrried out by

the operating system, such a, updating ti rn ~rs.
controlling the i\ 1PI intaf,,~~ and updating the
p=e<. image<)

The n:,pon,c time 1-0 a change in an inpm signal

can thu, be hem'een o~e and two cycles . Added
to the respo".e ti me ar<: the delays fo r the input
modules, 1he ,w itch ing times OfCOn!3CWN, and
.0011 .

Tn wme instances. you can reduce the re'pon,~

lime , by addre>Sllg the liO, dire~tl)' or calling
program sections on an event-driven basis (proces s imerrul>l)
You C3n 3chieve uniform response lim~S or
equal time imen'als for the prnces, control if a
program c<Jmp<Ju~nt is always process~d a' the
,aJ11C time interval, c.g . .., ~yclic inkrrupl rrogram, Program processing i,ochronous w ith t he
pn,,;cs,ing ~ydc <Jf a PROFIBUS DP mB.<1er
sy,tcm als() rroduce~ calculable r~.po"se time,
(Charter 21.8. "Synchronom Cycle II11"TrupIS"),

20.2.,5 Start Tnfor n'at;on

The CP U ', operatir::g system fo!Wards otaT!
infonna,ion t<J <Jrganiz..,tion bl<.>ek OB 1, as it
,joe, to c,'cry organization block, in the first 20
byt ~s of tempormy local data. You C3n I;~ncra te
the declaration for the stall infom1at ioD your, elf <Jr you Can ,IS" informmion from Swndard
Library undC1' O"g'mi~"tio" Blocks.

... O utput sign" t Mango

Response time _ one eye t.

Ipl,o

'"

-- -

---

User progra m
Sensor sijon,,1 chang~ without
transf" , to prQc~~s~mag o

I ,>0

. --

'"
Transfar to
proce ss-tmage

I PIO

. --

User P"'llram
O UlpU!

'"

si gn~ t

chan~e

Ruponu 11m.. _ Iwo cyclu

20.2 Sc.n Cycle Conlrol

Tallie 20.1 Sum Information for tile OR

.j

!l

~~

Table 20.2 shows this stan in fon"at; on for the

OBI , the default symbolic designa tion. and the
dala types. You can change the d~"S igoalioD at
any time Illld choose names mo: acceptable to
you. Evo:n iryou don't u.<e the stan informanon,
)'l.lu mU$I reserve the finn 20 bytes of tcmporery
Incal data for 'h is ptIrpose (for InSIance in the
form Of a 20--byte IIrray).
In SI MAl"lC 57, all CVet" mc.~sages have"
fiXed ,tNcture whi~h is spedficd by the eVent
clas~. The start information r"r OEl I , for
instance. reports event [litl 6# II a$ a standard
OB call . from tbe contents ofthe nexI b}1e you
can tell ..... helher the main prognlm is in the first
cycle after power-up and is therefore calling.
for instance. initialization routines in the ~ydie
prolt'"R"'.
The priority and 08 numher of the main progmm are fixed. \Vith three INT va lues. the stan
infonnotion provides inf"rmation un the cycle
time orthe last scan cycle and on the minimum
and maximum cycle timC!; since the]a" powerup. The llUl ~"lIlue . in DATEj\l'\D_TIME formill. indicates who:n !he prionty control program re<;ci~"Cd the event for callmg o n I.

Nnle thai direct ",ading of the start in fOTmanon

for an organization block is polS;ble only in that

1:I=16i!'03 -

En!)' OIMT cy<:1e

B# 160f()4 -

ht cyde afler cold

0lJj:ani7..ation block because thut information

consists of temporary local data. If you require
the stan infonnation in blocks which lie o n
deeper levels. call sy"em function S FC RD_
ST?-."FO at the rel~t localion in Ihe program .
S f C Ii RD.SL'I FO
Rudlnlol (Jut start Informatlnn
Syste m fun~tion SFC 6 Rn.S INFO makes th e
~ta" information on (he cu~nt organization
block (that is, the 08 at the top ufthc cal! lIce)
and on the stan-up 013 lUI executed available
to you eV"" al a deeper call1e,"el (T'ablc 20.3).
Output parameter TOP.51 containi 1M first 12
b>1e;; of stan information on the cu rrent OB,
OUtpUt parnmeter START. UP. S I tbe first 12
bytei of stan information nn the llUl Start -up 013
executed. There is no time ~t .. mp in either case.
SFC 6 RD. SlI\rO can nnt on ly be called at any
location in the main program but ;n every prin,ity class. even in an errOr organization bl ock or
in the Start_up roUlin~ . If the 5 FC is called in ~n
intL'lTUpl organization block, for example,
TOP.Sl contains the start information of the
interrupt OB. In the ca~ of .. call at ",start,
TOP. 51 and START.UP_ SI have the same
contents.

20 Main Program
Table 20.3 Paramctcni for SFC 6 RD

SFC

Parameter Name

RET VAL
TOP_S l
START UP
,EV_CLASS
,EV_NUM
,PRIORJTY
,NU>.1
_TYP2 J
.TY PI
.Zl l
_li2 3

"

S l~'FO

Decl ....ation
RETURN
OUTPUT
OUTPUT

D.ta Type
INT

STRUCT
STRUCT
BYTE

m,

om
" '
BYTE

,m
WORD
DWORD

20.3 Program Functions

In addition to pammeterizing the CPU with the
Hardware Conliguration, y(}U can al50 select a
number of program functions dynamicaUy at
runtime via the integrated system functions,
2[1.3 .1 Time of day

Each SIMATIC CPU has a clock which you can

sct and scan u.ing STEP 7 or syst~m functions _
The timc of day is rcpresented in the u'~r program in the format DAfE_At'-' D_T1:vIE. consisting of the dat~ . time and day of week.
Newer CPUs witb firmware version 3 and
higher allio havc thc time status_ You can then
additional ly set a di fference from a time zone a,
",'ell as .ummer/winter time identification_
The following system functions Can be used to
access the CP U clock:
t>

SFC 0 SET_ClK
Set datc and time

t>

SFC I READ_CLK
Read datc and time

"

SFC 48 SNC RTCB

Synchronize CPU clocks

t>

SfC 100 SET_CL KS

Set time of day, date and time status

Vou will find a list of 'ystem function parame_

ters in Table 20 ,4.

Con!eDts. Dc,;criptioD
F.:mr infonnatinn
Slart information for the CurrOn! DB ("'ilh the
same strucNre os START UP ")
S"'rt information for tho last OB started,
E"ent ID and ''''~ nt clao<
Even' Dumo.r
E~ocution priority (number of tho <"""mion leve l)
OB number
!D o[sllw1emem.ry information 2_3
lD o[sllpplemem.ry infurmation I
Supplementary information I
Suppl~m.ntary information 2

Sett ing a nd readin g the t ime of day

Calling the SFC 0 SET_ClK or the SFC 100
SET_ClKS us ing MODE = B#I6#OI or
B#16I>03 set the clock to the va lue defined by
the PDT parameter_ SFC 0 SET_ClK set. th~
win ter time for CPUs with summer/winter time
idemification. With the 5FC 100 SET_Cl KS,
you can use the SUMMER Ilarameter 10 define
whether the time is the winter time (with " 0") or
the summer time (with " I ").
The current lime is r~ad by SFC I READ_CLK
and output in the CDT parameter. The time has
the format DATE_AND_TLVlE when sellin g
and reading, i.e , therefore contains the date an d
lime,
Modul. time. toca l time
The time present On the CPU is the module
time. This is decisive for all timcd processes
which control the CPU, such as run_li me
mctcrs. suming of time_of_day interrupts or
cntering of lime stamps in the diagnosli ~s
buffer and OB start information, You Can set
and read the module time using the system
functions for the CPU clock.
CQrrespondingly desi gned CPUs addilionally
save a "time Slatus. This contains a correclion
value which reslll" in the local time wben
added to the module time. The correction value
is set in interval s of 30 minutes, and can also be
negative (CORR pammetcr of SFC 100 5 ET_
CLKS) ,
The loca l tim .. can be used to display time
zone,.

20.3 f'Togram

Tabl.20.4 Si'C Parameter:. fm

tb~

CPU Clock

SFC

Parmnet:::r N_c

Declamtion

Dan'l)'p

Conte~l6. D_r;l>lio~

",

mT

m,UT

DT

Date a"d time ("ew)

RETURN
REnrRN

mY

Error lnfo!"Illation

TNT

Of

Error information
Date and lime (curre nt)

INT

Error informa1ion

BYTE

Operatin~ rnoo~

V~

ROT VAC

CDT
RET V~
MODE

"W"

~Unclion.

OUTPUT
RETURN
INPUT

fI# 1Mit)): Only set time

B" 16;;02 Only ,et time ""'n'

1l# 16i'03: Set time and lime .tarns

POT

OT

CORR

iNPUI
L"IPUT

S UMMt:1I.

INPUT

llOOI.

I!-.PUT

ilOOL

RETURN

'NT

ANN_

RET

V~

L"T

Time s tat us
The time status is set whell parameterizing the
CPU with STEP 7 or w ith the SFC 100 SET_
eLKS . The time of day and the time statU.'< ean
be read using the SI'C 51 RDSYSST vi a the
system stams list (SSL_ID - W# i 6#O 132 with
IND EX W# I6#OOO8). The slaWs v<mable
includes:
p.

The correction value (bits 2 to 6) in the

30- minute intcf'lal
Tb~

to>

The ,ummer/ winter time identitication

(bit 14)

[>-

The

sign of the cotre<:tion

allll ou nc~ ment

v~juc

(bit 7)

p.

hour (bit

I ~)

T he ."mmerlwinter time identijjco.lion shows

whether the local tim~ calcu lated from Ihe module time and the correction value is the ,tllnmer
time (with " j n) or the winter time (w ith 'D') .
If Ihe announcement hOllY bit has th~ stams "j",
the switebovcr from sununcr time to winter
time i" carried out althe next change in hour.
Using the time statu, infOrlnation, a local t ime
can be generated from lhe module time ill ordeT
to cOnl",1 timed pn:><:esses in the u~er program.

Dc tim'd t;mo
Differe nc e f,om ba<;e time in O.5-hour inter
"ah from -24 to +26
Summerlwint.r time id.nt;fjc~tio"
CI" - s um mer tirn~)
Announcement of time ,witchover: a " 1"
indic"'e' that" ,witch is made fmm mmmcr
time to w lnter time or vice vcr,~ the ne'~'
time 'nat th~ hour change"
Error informatiOll

Loadable ,tandard blocks help you to hand le

the ""mmer/winter time <witching of the local
time in th~ user program, in particular the starting "fl ime-of-day inK"fl"ur>ts depending on Ihe
local time (_ee further below IIndeT, "u>adable
time-of-day b locks").

Time synchronization
In an automation network wi th sev<'-"ral
STM"ATTC stations exchanging dat<I with one
anot..'>.eron subners, it is possible to synchronize
the clock.<; of ~11 CPUs. You parameterize the
n
cloc k of one CPU as the "Masterciock , and ~et
Ihe interval at which the synchroniation is to
be carried out. You parameteriz e the blocks to
be synchronized as "S lave c1<><.:ks".
The synehroni'lalion can be carri ed out within
an S7 stmion over the conmlUIlication. bus
(ba ckplane bus) or between "Iation~ over the
MPI bus . This is carried out at th~ parameteri ~~,<! interval aUlmnatically wh~"Il (he master
e lock is set for th~ tlrst tim~. Jfyou set a
clock with the SFC 0 SET CLK or SFC 100
S ET_ CLKS, al l other clocks in the subnetwork
are automat ically synchronized to Ihis value.

==

20 Main Program
By calling the SFC 48 SNC_ RTCB in the mas clock, you can synchronize all slave b locks
independent of the automatic interval.

0-

I'B 61 SET- SW- S

Switch over s ummer/winter time with time
status

If the master clock does not have II timcof-day

status, the slave docks are synchronize" with
the winter time. The correction factor is zero,
the local time then corresponds to the mod ule
time.

0-

UDT 60 WS RULES
Rules for switching over summer/winter
time (e.g . time for switching over)

If the master clock works with II time_of day

status, the ~omplet e time status is transmined in
addition to the time. Therefore the same local
time (the same time zone) exists On all CPU, in
the lime network.

A CPU's system clock start, runn ing On power-

lCT

20.3,2 Read System Clock

up. The system clock keeps running a s long as
the CPU is executing the restart routine or is in
RUN mode. When the CPU goes to STOP or
HOLD. the current system time is "frozen'".

If you initiate a hOI reSlan on an S7_400 CPU,

Set time ,.. rn g STEP 7

When sett ing the CPU parameters, you Can set

the synchroni?,.ation mode (ma'ter, slave or
non~) ,md the synchron ization imerval in the
attribUies window on the "Diagnosticslclock"
tab). The correction value set hue is used to set
the clock accuracy.
You can set the time and tbe time StatuS using
STEP 7 if the programming device is connected
online to II CP U. Sekct PLC ..... DlAGJ','Qsncs/
CUSTOMtZE ..... SET TIME OF [)A Y. III the
enhanced d ialog, you can set the local time as a
differencc from the module time, and defIne the
mmmeriwinter time. The time status is shown
in the <'Status" box.
Loudable timc--of-day blocks
The program Miscdloncou.<Bloc", in the Sla".

the system clock stans running again using the

saved value as its starting time. Cold restart or
wam, restart reset the system time.
The sy'tem time has data format TIME,
whe~by

it can asswne on ly positive values:

TIME#Oms to
TI!I.1E#24d2 0h31m23sM 7ms.
In th e evcnt of an overflow, the clock stans
again at 0. Newer CPU. update the 'yslcm
clock every millisecond, older S7_JOOCI' Us
every 10 milliseconds .
SFC 64 TTl\IE_TCK
Read srste m time
You can read thc current system time with system function SFC 64 TIME_ TCK. The RET_
VAL parameter contains the system time in the
TIME data fomlat .

b-

FC60LOC_ TTME
Determine local time

You can usc the system dock, for example, to

read out the current CPU runtime or, by computing the difference, to calculate the time
hcme .. n two SFC 64 calls . Th~ diffe~n ee
~tween m'o valu es in TIM E fonnat is computed us ing D INT subtract ion.

b-

FC 61 BT_ LT
Convert module time into local time

20.3.3 Run-Time "Ieter

dard Library contains loadable hlocks for han-

dling summ<..-r/w inter time s wi t~hing and the

local time in the user program

b-

(>

0-

FC62LT_BT
Convert local time into moduk time
FC 63 S LTTNT
Sett ime-of-day interrupt to local time
FB 60 SET_SW
Switch over summer/winter time

'"

A run -time meter in a CPU counts the hours.

You csn u,e the run_time meter for such tasks as

detenll ining the CPU runtime or sscet1aining
the runtime of d.-vices connected to thai CP U.
The value on tbe run-time rueter is also retained
following e oold restan. failure of the backup
voltage. and following a memory reset.

20 .3 Program Functions
Table 20.5 Parameters uflhe SFC. for the Run_Time I>letet

.,

'"

,.
"
The range of values and the number ofron-timo
me= per CPU dcpend on the CPU, The rang e
is 16 b its (2 15_ I hours) or 32 bils (2 31_ 1
hours). When the CPU is at STOP or HOLD,
the run-1ime meter also .10pS running; wh~n Ihe
CPU is rcstallcd. the run-time m eter must be
restarted
When a run-time meter reaehe, the maximum
time d "ration , it StOp, and reports an overflow.
A run-time met ~r can b<: ,Cl to a ne w value or
reset to zew only via an SFC call ,
Thc fol lowio g system functions are a vailab le to
control a run-time meter;
D-

SFC 2 SET_RTM
Sel I 6-bit run -time meter

can be initialized us ing a ~onstant or a variable

(as can all input parameters of el ementary data
type). The PV parameter (data type fNT) is
u,ed 10 set the m n-lim e m eter to an initial
va lue. SFC 3's-Sparamctcr starts (with ~ ignal
siaic "I"') Or stop, (with sif,,'nal _.tate "0") Ihe
selected run-time meter. CQ indicates whether
the run-tim e meter was ruoning (signa l stale
.. I ") or stopped (signal State "0'') when
scanned, The CV parameter record, the hours
in INT format.
By aSSigning Ihe MOD 6 parameterofS FC t u t.
you can control a 32- bit run_time m eter as fol lows :
B#I6IiOO

Read current meter value

B# I6#01

Start at last meter value

B 1t 16 ~02

Stop meter

B#1 6#04

Set to value specified in I'V

B#I6#05

Set and stall at value speci fi ed

Table 20.5 shows the parameter for these system functio!l.'l .

Sol- l6#06

Set and Slop at va lue "pe<:ified in

The NR parameter stan ds for the number of the

run-time meter, a nd has the data type BYTE. It

You can al so u'e the SFCs for a 16_bitrun_time

m eter to control a 32_bi t run_time meter. The

D-

SFC 3 CTRL_ RTM

Start or stop I 6-bit run-t ime meter

D-

SFC 4 R.EAD RTM

Read 16_bit run- time meter

SFC 101 RTM

Adjust 32-bit run- time meter

ev

'"

PV

281

20 Main I>rogram

laner then rcsronds ns with a l ,,-b it range uf

vnlu es.
20 .3.4 C omprc .. inK C P U

M~moQ'

Multiple del etion and reloa ding of bl""k:;,

which otlcn ""cur during on line hlod:. modification, can resu l' in gaps in thc C PU's work
m "",,,ry a nd in the RAJv1 load m emory which
decrea se the amuunt of USllblc space in mem _
"'y When yuu call the " C ompress" ti.lll ction,
y ou start a CPU program which tills these gaps
by pusbing the blocks togethcr. Yuu can initiate
the "Com pre,," f unction via a prOb'TammiJ1 g
dev ice c OIlllect cd tu the CPU or by , aUing ,yste rn fu nction SF C 25 C O :-' fPRES S. n , e
p aramete r< for SrC 25 are lisu:d in Table 20.6.
The compression p roced ure is d llitributed over
several program cycles The SFC reHlI"f"
RU SY - "I" to ind icate that it i< still in
progress, and DONE - "I" to indicate th at it
has cumpleted the c umprc>sion uperation . The
SF"C call1lot comprcss whcn an ex ternally initiated cu mpression i< in progres., when the
"Ddetc B lock" ti.mction is active, or when PG
func tio n s ore accessing the block to be shifted
(for instan ce thc I:Iloek Status function).
Nute th m block:; of a particular CPU_specific
maximWll lenglh cannot be compressed. so that
gaps would sti ll remain in CPU memot),. Only
th c Comp rc.s function initiatcd v ia thc PG
w hil e the C PU is at STOP closes all gaps.

20.3 .S '\Vait in l: a mI St opp in g

The syste m fun ~'1ion St C 47 WAlT hait, the
program sca n fur a specified period of time
SfC 47 WALT has input parameter WT of data
type tNT in whi ch you c an spec ify the wailing
timc in mi croseconds !fl').

Tab le 20.6 Panuru:tcr. for SFC 2S COl\-lPRLSS

Th e maximwn waiting time is 32767 I's; the

minimum waiting time ,urresponds to the exe,ution time or the system function, which is
CPU_spec ific.
SFC 4 7 can be interrupted by higher_pr ior ity
e\'~'DI.S. On an S7-3OO, mis increase.> the waiti ng
time by the "" an time ofthc higher-priority interrupt routine.
The system function SF C 46 ST P tenniruttes
the prollram ,",an, and the CPU gocs to STOP.
S'FC 46 STP has no parameters.

20.3.6 M uitip r oc csslll: " 'lo de

The 57 -400 en ables multiproccssing. As many
as four appropriate ly des igned C PU s e"n be
operated in onc rack on th~ ,ume P bus and K
bus.
An S7_4{)() station is automatically in multipro
ce s> or mode it you arrange more than one CPU
in the ~entml rack in the Hardware Cunfig uration . The slot.> ~r e arbitrary; the C P Us arc d is tinguished by a Dumber a"ib'Dcd uut"matically
in ascend ing order when the CPU, are plugged
in. You can also assign this number your>d f un
lhe "Multieomput;ns" tab.
Thc configuratiun ,l,l;i fur all the CPUs must he
loaded into th~ PLC, even when you make
chang~s to only one CPU .

After assi gn ing parameters 10 tbe CPU,> you

must assign each modul~ i1l the station to "
CPU. This is don e by parameterizing the moduk in 'he "Addrcss~," tab under CPU Allocation" (Figure 20 .5).
At th ~ sam, time Ihal y<>u assign tbe Tnodule's
address area, you also assign the module's interrupts to this CPU. With VTEw ---> FlL TER --->
CPU No. X - .\10D ULES, you can empha size tbe
module, ~s>igned to a CPU in the config uTation
tables.

20.3 Program Functions

P....,.,,"~ ,

lJtth><IJI " .v tnt~"upI

'I

III00S ' 1

p- .E"" pttIC . . . " , , !:!"---

Figure

20.~

12 I

Module Assignment> in Mul,iproces>or Mode

The CPU s in a multiprocessing ne1,,'ork all

have the sam e operating mode. This meanS
para 'neteri ~e d

t>

The y m'-'5t al l be
same restan mode:

wi th th e

t>

They all go to RUN simultaneous ly;

"" They ~ll go to HOLD when you debug in

single-,t\.l' mode in "ne of the CPUs;
"" They all go to STOP as soon as "ne of Ihe
CP Us goes to STOP.
When "nC rac k in the slation fails, organization
block OB 86 is called in each C PU ,
The user program s in thcse CPUs execute indepcmkm ly of one another; they are not synchronized.
An SFC 35 MP _ALM call start, organ ization
block OB 60 "Mu ltiproce ssor interrupt" ' in all
CPUs simultaneous ly (sec Chapt~,,- 21 ,1 . "M ul tiprocessor Imcrntpt"j ,

ey of the time acqu isition is C P lJ-dependen!

and the times arc ~pec ifi ~-J in microse~onds. If
there is no value pending for a requested time,
- I (O Wit I6#FF FF FFFFj is returned ,
Principle oftime mea.urement
In the operatinli\ system of Ihe CPU, a timer
runs wilh a relative time in m icroseconds from
o to 2 31 _ 1. A t th e rran,ition from STOP to
RUN . the timer is started. runs 10 the upper 1im_
it. and then start s a gain from zero.
The OB stan even!, the beginning and end of
OB execution. an d the intclTUption" caused hy
h ighe r-priority OBs are caprnred in thc operating system. T he data of th e last compl eted OB
execution that was current allhe time of calling
the SFC 78 is stored
SFC call outside the OB to be measured
applying the SfC. a d ist inction is made
b ctween a call in Ihe program of the requested
OB aud one o utside the requested OR. E",am pie: The SFC 78 is called in the OB I and is assigned a value " f 30 in the para meter O B _ NR.
The la:;t captured times for OB 30 are then read,
Specifi cation of the synchronous error OB with
the numbers 121 and 122 is not penn is s ible because these be long to the priority c lass ofthe error-c ausing OBs and tbus to their pr<>gmm
Wh~n

20.3.7 Delermlnlng the OH I'rfIj;(ram

Runtime
The system function SFC 78 OB_RT determine, the runtime of in dividual organization
blocks over different time periods. This enables
you 10 detennine the time load (utilization) of
the u, er program.
The operating sy st em of a CPU designed for
this purposc log, Ihe run! ime~ of the indiv idual
organi~alion blOCks and m ak es them available
for readi ng vi a Ihe SFC 78 OI'_ RT. The acel.lrS-

F i gur~ 20,6 shows some examp les o f calling

SFC 78 outs ide th e OB to be mc" sur~d, The ini -

20 Main Program

Parameters oflhc S l-"C 78

INPUT

[NT

OUTPUT

nTKT

\ial values after a ST O P-RUN transition

(c xarnple(Dl ,

tim.", .'" to be

a~ - 1

prionty cla"es

Interrupt"'n by 06
01 highe, p riority

IRUN .

I
I

v. tu in ,o.. SfC 71

p" . . m.

' ....

Fig",,",, 211.6

'"

Ca llin ~

O'n
s tart ' '''luest
(OS_NOa xx)

seconds between the stan request and (he en d of

process ing for Ihe last "omplct"d ""cculion o f

(j)

SFC780a ii

LA ST ET indicales the tim e p"riod in m ino-

S FC7 6 calt outsid e the organ(2alion block to be mM$O'ed

l tD

O'n
processing

includ ed in LAST_RT

(@).

L A ST RT indic ates the nl!)lime in m;""" ec onds o f the laSI co mr leled 0 13 e"ecution (ex am pl es (%) 10 @). The -'n et" runt imes arc output. lnterrur t tim es cause d by OBs wilh higher

Sl OP

a~ nOI

I
I

II I
II I II II

II
I

SFC 78 outside tho orson ;n,;on h lock 10 be measured

I I
I
I

I
I

II II

ZO.3 I'roaram func.ion$

tak~s place out,ide the OB in tht'SC
the value is alwa)" zero

Ihe 013 10 be measured (e:ump!CS@IO@). In

lem.tpl limes cause<! hy higher prinrity cla"e,
are included m LAST_ET (@).

e~amples,

NEXT_RT indicates the time from the next OR

.tan !\:qllC>1 10 callin!> of the SF<: in mkro.",,
o~ds if fllrtbcr. IInproceued stnrt reqllcst& are
fK'nd~. In the ~~sc of the eUrRmly supplied
CPU" NEXT_RT i, not ealcll[ared IUId the val
ue is al""'~5 -I.

CUR_T indicate , the rel ative lime in microsec

onds (~Wtus oflhe counter in the operating sy,
tem) of the start I"filucst of the OB. After initial
ization Ct JR T {(D) conLain~ -I. On comple.tion of OB eunnion, CUR T i~ let to zero .
Since SfC 78 i. can.-d out.ide the OB in these
exampk~ ;1 cons.-quently OUtputS zero at thi.
()artlmelcr.

S FC u llin th e pr ognm nr th e 08 10 be
mCll~ ured

CUR_RT indicates the effective execution time

of the O R W1ti l calling "f SFC 7g in microsc~
onds. After initialization CUR_RT (CD) con
taiDs 1. Anercomplelion ofOa execulion, the
vallie in CUR_RT is IrllmfermJ to LAST_RT
and CUR_ RT i. set to "",ro. Siru."l.' the SFC call
laJ.:c~ place outside th" oa in these exampk-s,
the value i. alway. zeTO.

S.F C 7~ can al,o he call ed in the program of the

01'1 t() be measured. The parameter O B_NR i.
then initialized with ~t'To and the ()arametcr
RfT_VAL returns the c~nt OB number - in
Ihe C~ of error fr..., e~eculion . The limes for
the O D in which SFC 78 is ea ll .-d an; read.
When calJ..iDg in one of the . ~nchrooous e-rmr
0135 witb the numbers 121 and 122, this is the
data of the OR causing the error.

CU R_fiT indicates the time period from the OB

sian request to calling of SFC 78 in mieroscc
onds. After ~ompletion of OB c~cc"ti on, the
value in CUR ET is transfen-cd to LAST ET
and CCR_RT i:, <et to ~ero. Since the SFC-call

SFC78 eellinlide t!le organization bInc:k ID

~E'

In......,p1lon ~ OB
of high prio rity
o,~

processi,,!!
oe~

SUrt requNt

SFC78 call In \tie

O8JOt (OB_NO.oO)

~.Iuo.

fijjul"C 20.7 shows some examples of calling

SfC 78 in the program of the OB 10 be mea
gured. This elln be dire<;tly in the on program

'.
r--1
, _ __ _ __ _ _ _ _ __ _ _!Il_.L_______

,i

iI
I , ,,

II

I , I ,I I, I

I '

o'il~ni:<ati()fl

block 10 \>0

moowred

"

____

,I'

'J! I1

I'~

m~ .. urcd

I' ..

I"

Iff

j .:"'

:':
I

110 I" 111

'" 111, Ife7. poramo""

Fljl.ore 20.7 Calling SFC is withlll rho

De

20 Main Projram

, ,

Prot..,tioo level I

o r in one of the blocks called there . The initial

values after a STOP-RUN transition are - I.
LAST RT indicates thc ruonroe in mt<:roScCo ndl; of the last completed OB e"ceution (e,,_
ample . . and @) _ I f the SFC is called
again in the OB to be mea.ured. -I i. o utput
(e ~ampl c is)}. The "n~t" rumimes IltC" outpUt;
interrupt times caused by h;~er priority classe.
are oot inoluded in LAST_RT (">lample ).
LAST_ ET indtcates the time period in microseconds betwccn Ihe request aDd the end of pro-

cc""ing for the la81 completed e"eeutiDn o f tbe

O B 10 be measured (e>lamples ([l and@) _This
also applies for the fi rst call of SFC 78 in the
O B to be mea.urcd (@). If the SFC is called
again in the OB to be measUNld. - I is output
(ClCample It). LAST_ET abo contain;, tbe interrupt times caused by higher Priority classes

(@).
CUR_T indicates the rdative lime in micro~
o nds (statuS of the counter in the operating system) o f lbe Sla" request of the OBs. "'hen - as
in the following ex .. mpln - the SFC 78 i.
called within the OB. On completion ofOB exec ulion. Ct: R_T i ..,t to zero.
CUR RT indicates Ihe effect"'e ""eculion 11mc
a fthe OB in microseconds uotil cBlhni ofSf C
7 8. After completion ofOB ex e~ution. the value in Cl,-R_RT;s trans fcm:d 10 LAST_ RT and
C UR R T is set 10 ~ero. Int~rTUpt lim~s cau~ed
b y higher priority clas...,s ftre nol included in
C UR_RT {@ andlt)).
CUR_ET ind icates the tune pe-riod from the DB
SIan rc:quc~1 to tlllling of SFC 78 in mierase<:oods. A fle-r comp l~t;on of 08 e~e<:Ulion. the
value in CUR_ET is transferred to LAS T_ET
and CUR_ET ii set to zerO. CUR_ lOT IIlso con lains Ihe ruJ1\ime~ of the higher_priority OBs
Ihat inlerrupt the OB current;y to be measun-d.
time from the ne"t DB
stan request to caJlmg of the SFC in microscc-

NEXT_RT indicale5

'"'

th~

ondj if funhcr. unprocnsed stan re quests are

pending_ In the ClUC of the currently supplied
CPU!!. NEXT_RT is nOI detenn;ned and the
v.lue i. alwaY5 - I .

20.3.8 C haai'ng I"oiu", pro tection

The user program in u CPU can be protected
against access ;n three protection level, (see
Chapter 2.6.2 ... ?t-ol~ini the User I'Toal1lm").
ProJntm-dri,-cn touling between protection
Ie-.els I and 2 IS possible ",ith the syStem function S FC 109 PR O T ECT. You can fin<J the pa rameters of thIs system function in Table 20.S.
CaUing SFC 109 PROTECT is only effe..:tiv" if
you ha\'e set Protection level I with the hard_
ware configuration. 11 remairu; inef'fe<:tive if
Profection I"vel 2 Or 3 is set, or if. password
has been ente,..,d in Protection levcl ] in conJunction Wilh the oplion Can be revoked by
paS5"ord
The prote ction leve l IiCt wilh SFC 109 PROT ECT ,..,mains unchanged if:
:. 'he CPU goes 10 STOP due 10 a (program)
error. an SfC 46 STP call, o r operator inler'enrion.
Co

the CPU ;~ baltcry-backed and the mai n.

supply is ,..,sI0red. Or

Co

a reSlarl is carried out (S7-400)

In all otber caseS. ProteClion level 1 is set in the

c:UC of an operating mode mm.sition. Even if
you switch the mode selector to STOP, Protec_
tion level I is (,..,)sct.
VOIl can d etermine the Current prole<:!ion level
online in the SIMATIC Manager wi th .elected
CP U ami P L C ..... DLAOl'OST1C/SETfL"O"'" OPERAT1:"G MODE. In the program. you can scan
the protection I""el w1\h the SFC 51 RDSYSST
via the systcm st3rus list W"16>f02J2 with the
1!Ide" W"I6><0004,

20.4 Communication via Distributc<i 110

In the case of a CPU with key loc k switch as

mode selector, you can remove the key in the
RUN pos ition and permit read access only by
the progmrnming device during operation. In
th e case of a toggle switch as mode sele<:tor.
this is not possible. In this case. you can call
SFC 109 PROTECT in the restan organizat ion
blocks 10 activate Prote<:tion level 2, that is,
write protection (read aCCess only) when
swi tching on the CPU
With SFC 109 PROTECT. you can change the
protection level during operation without operating the mode selector. Thu . for example.
with SFC 109 PROTECT you can (re)set the
protection level to I wilh M ODE W# I6#OOOO depending on the signal state of a
binary variable, in order. for example. to reload
program sections . Then you re_activate write
protection w ith MODE - W#16#OOO1.

20.4 C ommunication yi a
Dis t r ib uted V O
Distributed lIO is understood to be m odules
connected over PROFIB US DP Or rROFlNET

'0.
With PROFtB US Dr, the DP maSter communicates with the DP sla vcs assigned to It OVer the
PRO FtBUS sub n etwork. With PROFINET 10,
it is the 10 controller which exchanges data
with the 10 de vi ces assigned to it over the
InduSlrial Ethernet sub neN'o rk.
Th e data tran sm issio n is carried out 'automatically", you do not need to be invol ved. You
configClre and address the d istributed VO using
the Hardware Configuration tool in a manner
similar 10 with the central modules . From the
user program. yOCl can address the inputs and
outputs in the stations of the distributed lIO just
like the inputs and outputs of the central modules.
20.4 .1 Address in g PROFmUS DP
The d istributed modules (slations, Dr slaves)
with PROFIl:IUS DP are assigned to a DP master in" manner simi la r to how the centra l modules are assigned to a CPU and controlled by it.
The DP master with all 'its" DP slaves is

referred to as the DP master system. Several DP

master system s can be present in an S7 station .
Newer DP m asters can handle tWo operating
modes : DPVI and S7 -eompatible . "S7--<:ompatible" corresponds to the previous mode . With
this, you can operate all DP standard slaves
according to EN 50170. and additionally the
"D P S7 slaves from Siemens which could
al ready send interrupts to the DP master. In
DPY I mode, y ou can additionally used DP
slaves which exhibit the new properties according 10 IEC 61131, such as increa~cd diagnostics
and parameteri7.ation capabilities resulling
from the acyclic transmission of data records or
the use of new types of interrupt. New sys tem
fu nctions for traru;mission of data reoords. as
wcll as new interrupt organization blocks. exist
for the.e new "DPYI slave s".
Like the central modules. the DP slaves occupy
a ddre.se, in the lIO area of the CPU (""logical
a ddress area") . The DP master is as it were
"transparent' to the addresses of the DP slaves;
the CPU " sees' the addresses of the DP slaves,
meaning that the .. e must not overlap with those
o f the central modules. nul e ven w ith Ihose of
DP slaves in olher DP master systems assi ..",ed
to the C PU.
Every DP slave has three addresses in ~ddition
to th~ node addre ss , a geographical address. a
module staning address and at least one diagnostics adJ",ss (Fi gu'" 20.8).
Node ad d ress
Every node on the PROFBLBUS subnetwork
has a unique address, the node address (station
number) in that subnetwork that distinguishes it
from Ihe other node s o n the subnetwork. The
station ( the DP master o r a DP slave) is
accessed on PROFIB US with this node
address.
Please nol e that there must be a gap of at least I
between the addresses of th e activ e bus nodes
(e.g . in tbe case ofDP ma.ter and nodes in cross
traffic) . STEP 7 takes this into account when
assigning node addresses automatically.
Geu graphlcal a ddress
The geographical address identifies a module
slot. With central modules. the gcographical

20 Main I'rogmru

..tl~ otIr)
. Idd ....
(Dlllln"
__

@.
_ _-

Module< DP ......

_.

SIoto

..
/

Slot ~

"M
;;B~

""VIo1u8I" .kot
(not pI"l)....,.,. ",,;0''''')

SIolO_..",,,, _

1020 Sla!icn
101 9 '

,,~

E837

'" .,.,
"'",
.,.,

""""Io" ".1klI!

SI<>/ 2 ecn/a;n. 1M bu. Im..-h>oo

In ..""" modui<>

1M).

"',,_.

SJgt>III_s . . U _ In 0/01 4 and

A8 506 00& .. 0
AB~!

B\"U \

00

Mod ....... nlnll add . ...

(&11_

"'.Y)

addrC!;8 comains (he number of the raek ar.d

that
the sl" t. Wi t~ PROfIB US DP, th~ geogmphicill addres~ conluins (nc numher of (he
DP nlll&(er ays(em. the "UII;"" numlJ.er lind the
slOl number.

"r

Slol numbering of a 01' ~la,c depends OD its

typc. If il i. integrated u~il1g a GSD iilc. the
entri,,~ in the GSD file determine Ihe sl"t a t
which the 110 modules Slart. Tn lhe ease "fDP
standard slaves, the 51015 for 110 modules begin
al 1. Slot DWJlhering ofllll S7 sla'e is ba.cd on
the 5101 of an S7-300 $Ultion. S1015 I (pow.,r
supply) and 3 (c"pan~ion interface module)
rellUlin empty. Slot 2 (CPU) corr~jpond.$ to the
interC8.(:c module (header modul~) of the modu lllr DP Slaves. The ~ignal modulcs (SM) are
poo.;itioned stanin& at s1014.1n addition. there is
Ihe vinual" slol 0 (nol physically present): this
representS th" comrlete statiun.
It is similar with intelligent Dr slav~s. In th is
casc. the tnmsfcr memory i. the mtet"f..cc to the
Dr> ""'stet". Confi&UT8.lion of the transfer memory _ whicn you CftlT}' OUt with thc Hudwar..
ConfillUralion tool genemtes areas" hieh corl"C"<pond to modules or .lms. These ~jOtS do not
l"C"aUy l:JIil;t. and one th~refore speaks nf vir_
mal" slolS.
Virtual ,101 0 I"C"preSCtllS the: DP <18tioll. virtual
lot 2 lhe bus interface. in this case !be slave

CPU a> the heRder module oftbe DP slaw.

From vinual $101 4 o"ward<. the user data "r~as
are pl\:scnt in lhe transfe r memory; th ey COlT"'spond to the si&nal modules. The virtual slot. in
the transfer memory are ~sem hy both Ihe
mILSter and ,lp'e CPLs.
The defm.ition or virtual <lots malte. It possible
to dire~t1y a~.ign diagno>1ic. tlnd intemJpt
events of the mlcrfllce module "r the station
(see further below ~Diagnosties lidd .... ss ..). Thc
srsTem funcTions SFC 5 GADR_LGC and SFC
49 LGC_GADR a1"<" available for converllion
from the &eograrhical "ddr~ss to the iOllieal
nddr~sscs and vice versa. and (he '}"Ilem functiOn! SFC 70 UEO_LOG and SFC 71 LO,,_
GEO ar., al'O suituble for PKOFINET 10.
NOle that DP slaves which are iocorpor:a.,ed inlO
the hardware confillunltion through ~ GSD m",
according to EN 501 70 of ver!\ion 3 or latn
(DPV I) c an suv'"' the user data staning at <lot I ,
Lo~ica l

a d dress..

module starli ng a ddl"l's

You use the logical addre.s t" ~ce~s th~ user
dati' of a station, Each byte "f the user tiura i~
unumbiguou.ty identified by a logica l uddre~s.
The logical address corresponds to the absolute
liddTcs<: a ,;ymbol (Dame) Can be assigned 10 it
.0 that it i~ easiertoread (symbolic addresi!ing) .

20A Communication via Distributed 110

The ",,,,Ilest logical ad d,ess of a module or station is the mooulc starting address (sec also
C hapler lA, "Module Addresses").
Dia::nostic,; addu ..
Modules an d stations which can deli ver d iagnostics data and d o not h ave a u ser dats address
themselves are identified by the diagnostics
address. The diagn"sties add..,,. occnpics one
byte ofIlO input in th e logical addre " .." lum e .
In the d eb ult sening, STEP 7 as,igns the diag nostics addro" starting w ith the high~ ,t address
in the 110 "re~ of the CPU. You can change Iheo
diagnostics addr,,"s. Th~ addre" overview io
the Hardwm... Configuration tool identifk, the
diagnostics addre ss by a star.
Signal mod ules or u'~r data areas in \he t",ru;f~"T
m~mory of intellig~nt DP slave, ha"e logi~al
addresses, also for scanning d iagnostics data.
Thc complete station delin"Tll its d iagnostics
data via one diagnostics addres, which is
"",i;;n~d to virtual ,lot O. With modu lar and
intelligent op s laves, the bus interface can
del iver it' d iagnostics data v ia the diagno>lics
address oislot 2.

'1l"'-

Figure 20.9 shows an ~Xllmple of the dia ..

tics addre,';e , in a OP master system A co m_
pact DP slave pos~es,c" one diagnostics
addre.s for the compl ete s"'lion, a modular DP
slave po,sesses one diagnos tic s addre ss for the
stati on and onc fOT lh~ interface module . \Vith
intelligent DI' s laves, there is also a d iagnostic s
address [or the OP interface.
Th e d iagnostics addresse, are ass ig ned in
descendi ng order starting w ith the highes t 110
address. For example, \he UP interlace of the
CPU J I 7-2PNIDP is aSSlg:D ed the diagnostics
addres. 81 91 , the PN interface the addre ss 8190
(not shown in Figure 20.9), and the virtu al slots
o and 2 in the tra "sf~r memory the addrcsses
RI89 and 81 8R. It is similar w ith the ma,ter
CPU: the diagnostics addrcsscs Start at 16383
for the DP im erfu ee and continu" w ith 16382
tnr the MI'VDP interface (not shmnl), 1638 1
and 16JHO for th e virtual slol:l 0 II1ld 2 of the
tirst intelligent DP 'lave. 16379111ld 16378 for
the second 01' slave etc. The diagnostics
addre,ses for th e np slaves are a ss igned hy the
Hardware Configuration tool in the sequence of
coupling to the DP master system.

In th" user program , the diagnostios data are

scano ed using system b locks . The system TImetion SFC 13 nPNRM DG is " v"ila bl~ for this
with conventional 01' >tandard s laves. The SFC
S9 RD_REC is used w;\h OP S7 slaves in orde r
to read the data record OS 1 w ith the diagnostic .
data. DrYI s lav es a.., able to provide more
eompreh~n,ive d iagnost ics data wh ich can be
rcad with th e system filllction block srn 52
KDREC. Th e modules are addressed by m~an"
of the logi cal module starting addr~ss of th~
user data or by means of th e d iag no",ics
addresses.
Transfer me m ory o n in telligent DP .Ia,cs
In the cas e of eornp",:1 and modular DP sla.ves.
the addr~ sse s of \he inP <llS an d OUtpnts are
locat~d together w ith the addresse, for tbe cen!nil modules in the address volume ufthe mal<ter CPU. In the ea , e of intcllig~ m ,Ia,cs, the
maste r CPU has no direct ae~eSS to the input!
output m odules of the UP sl ave. Every imelli gem Dr slave therefore has a tra n.fer m emory
whosc size depends on the CPU used. TIle
transfer memory can be divided into several
areas of di fferent len~>th and dam ~onsiSlcney.
The indivi dua l areas then respond like modules
whose lowest address i~ th c module starting
address. From the viewpoint of the master
CPU, the intclligem DP . lave then appears as a
compact or mod,, 11lC 01' s lave. dcpt.."Ilding on
the division (Figure 20. I 0).
\Vh~ n configuring thc slavc, you ~an configure
the individual areas of th~ !nmsf~r memory as
inp ut,; or outputs wi th the "module starting
address" and the area length. Exception; if the
CI' 342-5 01' provide s the DP interfac~ tor the
intelli gent slave, the divi sion of its transfer
memory is only configur~d when coopling to
the DP ma ster system . The addresses o f the
transfe r m emory must not overlap with tho.e of
th~ eentrol m odules in the intclligent DP slave.
Tf the addrcsse, are present in the process
image . the areas can b e handled by the o,cr program l ik~ inputs and outpUI:l, o\hcrw isc Hke
periphcral inputs and outputs. If the s lave C PlJ
possesses panial pro<:ess image . you can
assign a partial process image to each area.

When coupling to the DP master SY"tem, yon

supplement th~ configuration a t the master e nd
by the " module starting addresses" from the

20 Main l'ropm

Mu~'

CPU ((1120Pf

CP m..

t.,

'" -~~':.c:~"~"'~'~~~. ,-~.~,,=~====::t

' J
n...... """ .....
moootor CPU

--.
;" IhrI

.wit~the

..

<l> -,~-:-.

S ...... CPU (311 .JPNlOP)

_algent OP ...""

LL.. \

OPIro_

819>'

1$381 '

SIo"UI/IIIOn

8189'

1&380'

Bu.in>:o<f_

8188'

'
"
I ::r-'"

The use, prognrm

inlhrlslaYeCPV

I,

"""llIg.nt OP I I.""

"""" wrtrl _

.d<I,Mse.
SI.,.. CPU jJ14(:2 0P

---

OPin_

The...." .."""."
inlhrlslaYeCPU

L_ "'"~~'"','-,~;.".".""""",-",~",-,-,I ;:J
Mo~ul . ,

OP .ro ....

L______J---"*'"

OP~

1~75'

r,

S\o lIIIon

..

(D U<Io t-iIoIodI<c bo'I.

"'~_ biolrirr
_ ia ....
~of"" _
'" "'"

addresse_

(Jl EIdIr bu. 11m............ d . . . . _ ' " - . . . . ,,'1ri<II is

OM ......

obi' p<rperIr" of"'" iat<rlace ill ....

- _ I M > {_ _ k ""\',.- ... io

- _ uI> {_

~-"'"

1bo

"n.

<!jot "'" "Orin.: io.

c?\.).

...-

1_ . -1... _ - , -

II> 1b< .....,., orNI ;,. t.... _ _ Ira,......"""'"

"""'""lOt

II<Idrno wlriob ..... in .... '*'i'

"rib<
"",i,", ill tho ~ ... b (rlooblo oll<k ttrc: DP .1,,".
<tali"" in til< Iranl""" confiJU"""'" 01 "'" DP ..... "rf .

---_......_.

.,,-,-~

F----~----..Ii

""

The _
... iJlM> urrl"o 100" Jio;ooon
_ ... wlti,h ..... in .... ob,o;:t _ n i .. ~I"" .... ,;on
in th. "Moo." ",b (rIoob!< '1I<k 110< "lW' Ii"" i. tiro

.II,-.UU).

r ... ___ _

.~

- -"...
- .-'-:;'~=:
__

----~.

~-

20.4

B 05

via Distributed 110

system

\. _~I!~_

Int~,r,,,;,,

"_""~~~:;::::,"~'~':;I~I. _ 01DiagDPnostic.
add ... "
{ntarfaoe

Tran.f. rmGmory

'"

Communi~at ion

(lOOP m.aot&r)

" '' - _ - '

DP "aU""
~~===~~2F: Dia~noslic"

0/

add","

Di09"",,1;0 " lIdd","

of bu. ir.tillfOC8
(oJav. C P U )

UO<Irdata . "'."

T",n.11t, m<lmo<y from

".wof

mnl ~ ' CPU

T.... n.f.' ....... mory from view of . Iave CPU

Figure 20. 10 Trnmkr Memory em inldlilr<nt DP Slaves

v iewpoint of the master CPU and by the trans_

mission dir~et;on. You assign inputs on the
s lave ., ide to outputs on \he maSter side and vice
versa. If the addresses are within the p t oeess
im"g~. the areas ~an No handled by the U.~er pmgram like inputs and ou,p"ts, othe rwise like
peripheral inpm~ and outputs . If the master
CPU possesses partial pro~ess image_ , you can
also ass ign a partial process image to each area.
from the viewpuint of the ma,ter CPU. the
"dd",,!<es o f the transfer memory must nDt
overlap with ad~sscs or other modules in the
(ce ntralized) S7 stalion . neither with the
add",.ses Df the c<,."11tral modules nDr w ith the
addre sses in Dther DP master systems ass igned
to thu ma.ter CPU.
Yo" alw define the diagJ105!ies add",",c, fwm
the viewpoint of the inte lligent 01' slave. during configuration of these. You determine the
diagnostics addresse" from the vicwpoint ofthe
master CPU during coupling o f the inte lligent
D P slave 10 the DP master ~ystem.
D ata eon . i.tcn cy
Data cDm i. tency means that a b lock of USer
data is band ied a ll t ogcther. DP slaves can
exhibit consistent dma areas, either as a result
o fl he wnfiguration infonnation in th e OSD ftl e
or - as with the transfer memory Df an intelligen t slave-through CDnfigW"8tion by the Hardware Configuration tDOI. In the Dbje<:l properties of the D P sl ave, one can set the data cDnsisteney tD "Unit'" (byte or word) or "Total" (~on-

figured area) on the "Configuration" mh. These

data are tak en intD considcratiDn by the Dperating system, e .g. during Updating of the (partial)
proees. image (see Chapter 1.5 .3, "Consistent
User Data").
As the user, you m",! enSCIre thc con. is tency of
the transmitted d1lm in the pmgram. If thc data
are a comprises one, two or f<Jur byte", transmit
the data as bytes. words or doublewDrds using
the load and transfer instruetiDru; or the MOVE
hox 'Vith an area lcngth of 3 Dr more tha n 4
byte s. usc the system funetiDn. S FC 14 DPRD_
DAT and SFC 15 DP- WR- D AT in order to
transmil the data betwe en the user m cmory Bnd
the transfer memory. H the addres.e s of the
transfer m emory are in the process image , use
th~ address area for inp ut" I or output. Q on the
RECORD parameter of the SFCs , otherw ise the
addrcs. area for periphera l inputs PI or peripheral outputs PQ. The system f"netions a re u sed
in bmh the mer p rogram of the s lave CPU and
in the uscr program of the m~sler Cl'U in Ordcr
to B~ce" the data .
The cDnfigur~d data areas which are transmittcd with the 'ystem funet iDns are present com pletely in the pmccss image (with n ewer CPUs)
so Ihat you can also access them using IDad and
transfer instruction, or the MOVE: oox. Note
that Y<JU may destroy the data c<.>ru;;stcncy in the
proce"
StaMing from the user program of the slave
CP U, you can trigger" process interrupt for a n
address arCa of the tmnsfer m~mory "sing the

'"

20 Main Program
SFC 7 DP_PRAL, and a diagnostics or process
interrupt in the master CPU using the SFB 75
SALRM.
20.4.2 Configuring PROFIBU5 DP

General procedure
You configure ilie distrib uted I/O on the
rRO F1BUS DP in essentially the same way as
the centralized modules. Instead of arranging
modules in a mounting rack. you a"ign DP Stations (PROHBUS nodes) to a Dr master system. The following order is recommended for
ilie necessary actions'
I) Creale a new projec t or open an existing
one wiili the 51MATIC Manager.
2) Create a PRO FlBU5 subnetv.. ork in ilie

project with the SIMATIC Manager and. if

required. set the bus profi le.
3} Usc the SIMATIC M anager to create the

mas\<."! slation in the project thaI is to

accommodate the DP master. e.g . an 57400 station.
If your system contains intelligeot DP
slaves. you also cr~ate th~ relevant $Ia\'e
stations at lhis point, e.g. S7-300 station;; .
You start the HardWllre Configuration by
opening the master station.
4) With the Hardware Configuration. you
place a DP master in the master station.
This can be. for example, a CPU with int~

gral DP interface. You assign the previously

created PROFIBUS so.lbnctwork to the Of>
interface and you then have a Dr master
.ystem. YOo.l also define the DP mode in the
"Mode" tab: DPVI or 57-comparible. You
can also configure the remaining modules
later. Save and compi le the station.
5} If you have created an 5i "Union for an
intelligent DP sl av~. you open this in the
Hardware Configuration and you '"plug in "
the module with th e desired DP interfac~,
c.g. an S7-300 CPU with integral DP interface or an ET200pro basic modo.lle 1M 1548/CPU. If you set the DP interface as "DP
81ave", asslgn the previously created
PROFlBUS subnetwork to the DP interface
and configure the user data interface from
the viewpoint of the DP slave (transfer

292

m~mory). You can also configure the

remaining modules later. Save and compile
the ,tatioo

Proceed m the same way for the remaining

stations int=ded for intelligent Dr slaves.
6) Open the master station with the DP master

system and use the mOuse to drag the

PROFlBUS nodes (compact and modular
Dr slave.) from th~ hardware catalog to the
DP master system. Assign node addresse s
and, if necessary, set the module starting
address and the d iagnostics address.
7) If you haye created intelligent DP slaves,

drag th e relevant icon (in th~ hardware catalog under "PROflBUS DP" and '"Already
configured stations') with the mouse 10 the
DP master system.
Open the icon and assign the already configured DP . lave e'Connect"), assign a
node address and configure lhe user data
interface from the viewpoint of the DP mas_
ter (or from the viewpoint of the cemral
rna~ter CPU). Proceed in the same way with
every int.llig~nt DP slave.
8} Sa"e and compile all stations. The DP mas_
ter system is now configured . You can now
supplement Ihe configuration with centra'ized modu les Or with further Dr slaves.

You Can also represent the DP master system

configur~d in this way graphically with the Network Configuration tool. Open Network Configuration by. for example. double_clicking ana
s ~b nel\\ork . Select VIEW --+ DP SLAVEs/IO
D EVICES to display the slaves. You can also
create a DP master syslem (or mOre precisely,
assign the nodes to a PROFIBUS subnetwork)
with the Net".. ork Con figuration tooL You
parameterize the >lations after opening them
with the Hardware Configuration. lIere too,
you must first set up an intelligent DP slave
before you can integrate it into a DP master S)"5tern.
Con llgurlng Ihe DP master
You must have created a project and an 57 station with the SllI.1ATlC Manager. You open the
57 sta tio n and create a mounting rack (see
Chapter 2.3, "Configuring Stations"). Now
drag the Dr master module from the Hardware

20.4 Communication via Distributed

Catalog to the ~onfigUJation table of the mouming ra~k. You may already have sele~(cd a CPU
with OP connection. In the li n~ below. the DP
master is displayed with a conn~ction to a OP
master system in the station window (brok ~n
black _andwhite bar) .
When placing the OP master module. yo u
select in a window the PROFlBUS subnetwork
to which the DP mast.. r system is to be ,.,sign..d
and the node addre" to be ass igned to the DP
master. You can also ~reat e a n~w PROFffilJS
subnelwork in Ihis window.
In the "ModC-' lab you also defi ne the Dr mode
with wb ich the Df> master is to work. This
modc applies to the complete DP master ~ys
tcm.
If there is nO Di' master system a"ailable (it
may be that it is obs~ured behind an object or it
is outside th e visible area). create one by selecting the DP maSK"!" in the configuralion w indow
"nd tJ'en ~deeling INSERT ..... MASTER SYSTEM
You ean change th~ node address and lh~ con nectiotl to the PROFlBUS subnetwork by
selecting the modu l ~ and then making your
changes with the "Properties" button on th e
"General" tab under EDtT ..... O,HECT f>ROPRTIES.
CP 341_5DP as DP master
Ifa CP 342_50f> is the DP master. place it in (he
configuration table of the station, 'elect it and
then EDIT ..... OBJECT PROP ERTIES. Set "01'
Master" 00 the "Mode" tab .
The "Addresses" tah shows the user data
addre.s occupied by the CI' in the address area
of the CPU. From the viewpuint of the master
CPU. the C P J42_50P is an -'analog module"
with a module starting address and 16 bytes of
user data.
Only DP standard slaves. or DP S7 slaves that
behave like \)P standard slaves, can be conn.. cted to a CP 34 2-50P as OP ma,tcr. You "an
find the suitable 01' slaves in the hardware catalog under "PROflBUS OP" and "CP 342-501'
as DP master" Selee( the desired slave type and
drag it to the OP ma"er system.
The transfer memory as OF master has a mall ;mum length of 240 bytes. It is transferred as
one with the londable bloch FC 1 DI' SE}.!)
and FC 2 DP_RECV (included in the Sta"dard

[/0

Library under (he Communication Blocks program).

The data
memory.

cons ; st=~y

cOver, the entire transfer

You r~ad the diagnostics data of the con nected

DP slaves with FC 3 DP_DlAG (e .g. stalion list,
diagnostics data ofa spec ific station). Fe 4 OP_
CTRL tran,fers control jobs to the CP 342_50P
(e.g. SYNCIFREEZE command. CLEAR command, set operati ng stale ofthc CP 342-5DP).
If you select CPU o r CP 342-501'. ViEw .....
ADDRESS OVERVIEW shows you a list of the
as,igned addresses, inputs and/or OUIPUt>;. You
can also SCfcen the existing address gaps.
Config uring

co mp a~t

DP , Ian'.

Tk compact 01' slave, are to be found in the

hardware calalog und~r "PROFIBUS DP" and
lbc re levant sub-catalog. e.g . ET200B. C lick on
the OP , lave sel ected and drag it to Ihe icon for
the OP master systCtn.
You will see the properties sheet o f the station:
here. you set Ihc node address and any d iagnostics address. Then the OP slave appears as ,m
icon in the upper section of the station window
and the low,,"!" ",~tion contains a coofigunuion
table for (his stalion.
A double-click on the i~on in the upper section
of the station windu'" opuns a dia log box with
one or more tabs in wh ich YOLl fiet the desired
station properties. In the lower .ub-window.
yo .. then ,cc (he input/output addresses. Double-cl icking on an address line shows yuu a
window wbere you can change the su ggested
addre'$e$.
The lower sub-window shows optionally the
conf<guralion table of the selected OP slave or
of the master system (Ioggle with the "arrow"
b utton).
C onfigurin g modu la r UP slaves
The modular OP slave~ can be found in the
hardware catalog under -'PROFIBUS OP" and
the relevant sub -catalog, e.g. ET200M.
Click on the selected interface module (basic
module) and drag il to the icon fur Ihe Df> master system. This SCreenS the properties shecl lor
the stalion; here. you set the node address and

20 Main I'rogJ1lI'l

any diagnoslic~ addreSl<. Thcn the DP slave

appean as an icon in the uppu section of the
SUllion window and th e lower sc~tioD coma ins
configuration table for this station.
Now place the rruxl ules that you can find in the
hardware catalog uml(', 'he .felected inlnfo",
module (!) in the configW"lltion table. Dm:bleclicking"" the line opens the propcttie. shcct
of the module and allows you !O pruameteriu
the module.
Thc lower sub-window shows eitherlhc canfig-

un"ion table of the selected 01' sia"c or of the

nUI.Stcr system (toggle with the "arro,," bunnl\) .
I'ad.:inf{ addn:.ssC$
Digital cl..xtronic, modules witlJ 1"0 Oit channels... c.g. ET200S or FT200pro, initially OO;<;UPy uDe byte in the configuralion table. After Mil
modules have been configured. you can US" the
"I'ack add..."ses' bunon 10 remOve the )!:ap5 betv.cen the bit channels oflhe selected mudules
und thus occupy fewer addresse.'. The addres,
nreu for inputs, "utpul~ and motor starters a...,
packed separately.
Please note the following special fea=. of II
module:

"pitcked~

I>

I>

Slot assigmnem is no 10:lger possible ; Ihe

CPU cannot determine a geographical addre&.' for th;" module .
No module ~ta1Us informulion for (his mod
ule can be r~ad .

> lnterrupts cannOI he assigned

to a "pacKed"
For thi~ reason. a d iagno;;\k, address is assigned for thJ.s module (iodicaled
by italic. and &. star III the oonfiglffillion table). You can ~ceive intenupt infonnation
.... de' thIs add~.
addres~.

I>

"Pack add...,ues" an<l "loservn:rnov~ module intcrropt- arc mutually cxc 1m i,-e.

Cunfig uri"l: It CPU "lth integral DP

interflloce u an inldU&enl OP ,IaH
With an appropru<lely equtpped. CPU. you clLll
p.a.ramcterizc tbe .Ialion ellher a..~ a DP IIlllliICf
station or as D Dr s13~'e station. Before the Slation can be conn..xted as .. Dr slave 10 .. DP
maSter system, il mUSI be create<l. The procedure for doing Ihis is uactly the same a, that

,9<

for u '..-.anna l"' sl.8tion: insen I n S1 Stllti<m inlo

the project using the SIMATIC MllTlager MId
open the Hard",,,,.., ubJe~t. T>rng a mountU1Q:
rack to the wind"w in the Hardwa,.., Configuralio n aod p lace tbe dcsin:;d modules. For con tiguring the Dr slave. it is enough 10 place Ihe
CPU; you can add all other mudules later.
Wb<.:n insertin g the CPU_ tbe propetties shetl of
the PROFIBUS interface is screened. He"" you
must ft'Uign ft .ubnr;1W<>1'k. 10 Ihc DP ;n.ufate
and you must assign an addn'ss. If Ihe PROFI.
BUS subnetwork docs nol )'ct exist in the
project, you call ,"c alC u new One with the
"New" b unon . This is the subnetworK to which
the intelligent .lave wiU Inter be conn ected.
You can open tb~ propenieuh""l of the interface
by scle<:ting the DP in1Cl"fa.ce and then Enrr .....
OI:llFCT PROPEJl.TIES or by double-dicKing on
the interface. On the ~Mode~ tab. select the
o ption "'DP Slave". Now you can tonfigure the
user dam interface un the "Conflguration lah
from the viewpoint " f lbe UP ~lavc. Select MS
(master/.lave confillur~tion) $S lh~ mude, Ktld
detine tbe structure >md a<ldrcsscs of tbe tnmsfer intetfllce from the ~icwpoint of the slave
C PU (Figure 20.11). Chapter 20.4.1 ...Addre ...~
ina PROFJBUS DP~ pro'icics information on
the user data interfilce under "Transfcr memory
011 intelligent DP 5Ia,"es.
H

The sizc and .troc!Urc ofthe mmsfcr memory is

CPU-spilic. O n the CPU 315-211P, for exam_
p~e, you can divide the entire transf", memory
into up to 32 addrcS5 a reas tl1<lt you can acccs~
:>cparately. Such an add,..,ss "rea Can be up to 32
b~tc<\ in ,ue. The eotire trltnSrcr memory can
ha"e u p 10 244 input ad<Jr-.,:IS<;5 and 244 uutput

addres5C5.
The addreSS<'.

drf~ hc-re :ott located in tbe

add",,,, volume of tlJe ~Iave CPU. ThC$e
addresses must not o\erlap with a dcire,sc:i o f
centralized or distribu tw modules in the f)P
91ave station. The lowest address o f a n address
a,n is the "module ~Ianjng address".
Th~ uscr program in the .Iave CPU gels di agnostiC! infonnarion rrom Ihe Dr IIlaSler via the
dialV'osri cs add...,ues specified on thi, tab.

You lo;nninatc configuratIOn of the intelligl'UI

DP ~l"'e with STATIm< ..... SAVE _"'''D C0\1P1LE.
<':onn~~ting the intelligcnl OP . lave into the DP
ma.ter syslem is dcscribc:d below.

20 ,4 Communication via Distributed JlO

... ..".,,,~, , .. ,0."", 'I

-"~~-.~

11"_.. '

,- ,,-

--.
-.-

I~'

....

jop

ie-

"
"

I>I-.-~~

.oj

10

...,

1"'-

f-." ""'"

""

_090

I'
I '~'

I"

"I

.
--._....- ,

~-

_ .,

~--

"-

--

11
, . .. R

"

'"
"
"

FIgure 20 .11 Configuring the Tromfer Memory of an ImeHigent Slave "';th Im.gml DP Interface

Co nfigu r ing a n ET20 0pro

an int.'U1ge n t DP sla\'e

a.

Configuring an ET200pro station is very simi

lar to eonfigw-ing an S7 -300 ,tallon. Insen a
SlMATIC 300 station in the SIMATIC Manager under the project and open the Hardware
object
In the Hardware Configuration, drag the obj(X:t
1M! J4-8 CPU from the hardware catalog under
"PROFIBUS DP" and "ET200pro" to the free
w ind ow. or seleet it by double-dicking. On the
displayed propenie, sheet of the Etherne t interface, set "not networked" ,

EDIT ----> OBJECT PROPERTIES in the case ofa selected interface X I, or double-dick the MPU
DP interface to open the Prop~nie, window. On
the "G~neral" tab. selcct PROFIB US as thc interface, and in the Propcni es window of the
PROflBUS interface select the Slation ad~ss
and the PROFIBUS subnct . If the PROFIBUS

,ubnet does nOt yet exist in the proj(X:t, you elUl

create one "'ith the "New" button. This is the
subnet to which the intelligent slave will later
be eOWl~ 'I~d.
On the "Operating Mode"tab, seIc~t the option
"DP Slave" The meanings of the addresses on
tbis tab and of the addres, on the "Addresses"
tab are described in Chapter 20.401. "Add ressing PROFlBUS DP" under , "Diagnostics address",
Now you can configure the user data interface
on the "Configumtion" tab ftom the viewpoint
of the D P slavc , Sclect MS (master-slave eoofiguration) as the mode and define the structure
of thc addresses of the transfer illlcrface from
the viewpoilll of thc ET200pro CPU (Figure
20.11). You can find information on the user data illlcrface in Chapter 20.4.1, "Addressing
PROFIBUS DP" unde r, "Transfer memory on
imdligem DP slave,".

'"

20 Main Program
In the ~ o f Ihe 1M 1$4.8 CPU, yoo ean di
vide Ihe enlin: transf.. r mfll'lo1')' imo I lOlal of
32 addn: ,9 . n: as thaI you can ace ..... $oCpBralely.
Such an address a...,a cln be up 10 32 bytes in
size. Th e entire transfer memory can enComp;l8s up 10 244 input addresses and 244 OUtpul
addn:llse8.

The loully defIned addn:nt'S are wilhin Ihe addre.~ vo lume of the ET200pro CPU. These add..., sseJ musl nol o verlap uddresses of The cen
Iml or di~tributed modules in Ihe ETIOOpro 'Ia lion. The luwest ad<IrI:!.:I of an address 1n:3 is
the " module 5tarting address".
Further COnfIguralion of the ETIOOpro sliltion
is carried Out in the same ,,"ay as that for an S7300 stalio n wilh fixed slol addressing. You can
o nl y arrange Ihe modulel Ihal can be found in
the hardware catalog undu l\.lI54-8 CJ>I;.
You terminale confilluration of the inlelhlletlt
OP slave wilh STAno,," ~ SAVE M.'D COMPILE.
ConllC<,:linlllhe intellia;ent DP slave inlO Ihe 01'
ma.sler system is de.cribe<! below.
Conflllll ring I n IMI$I!CP (; ..
an Inteiligeni DP sl t
If you Wa nt 10 generate an 1"2ooS as an inte llige nt D P $I ave, flISt insert a SIMATlC 300 ~Ia
lio n under the proj""t in tbe SIMATIC Manager
and open the Ha,rI...arfl object.
Now dnlg the obj"'" IM/JI/CPU umkr
"PRO FIBUS 01'" and "ET200S" in the liardware Ca1alog to the free window or seleci it by
doubl e-~Ii~k ing on il.
If the 1M I 5 IIC I'U does not bave an ).11'1 jnlerface.the attributes window oflbe DP interface
is displayed. SeleCI the node Bddress hen: and
the PR OFtl.lUS mbnelWQ1'k (or generate onc
and assign il \() the 01' interface).
You will iICe a confiiUT8lion table like the ooe
for a S IMATIC 300 ~talion. The inteHillenl 1).1
15 1 of the ET200S station is present be",
instead oflhe CPU .
Double-clicking on the lVl 151 Hne o~ns the
window for \he 1M pro~rtics; double-clieking
on the DP interface opens the propcTlles "'indow of the interface. If you have not already
done so, 'el the node addresses and the PROFI -

".

BUS $Ubnetwor1.: on Ihe "Gen....I" tab (Selecl

"PROFIUC"S" in Ihe "lmerfaceOO bo~. and click
the '"Amibute." bUlIon).
Set the address ranges for the user d~ ta interface from the viewp<Jinl of tbe OP 51Bv~ al thi.
point. Th~ maximum 5ize of the user data area
is 32 byte. of inputs and 32 bytes of outputs for
the 1M 151 CPU. You ~Bn d ivide this area into
eight sub-areas with di fferent data consistency.
The slave program receives diagnostics infor_
mation from the Dr maSter via the diagnosti cs
a~ss.

Funher CQ1'IfIgumtion of the ETIooS 5t&lIon is

carried OUt in the same way as for an S7_3oo
stallOR wilh fi xed lilot addrcss inll . You Can o nly
arrange tbe module$ listed in the Hardware Cataloll under "ThO[ 15 I!C PU .
Scl""t 5TATIO:-; ..... SAVE M."IJ COMP1LE to conelude confIgurinll the intelligent DP sIH~e. Imeir8tion of the inte llillCDI Dr slave into tbe DP
lPast ~ r ~y~te m iii de~cr i bed fim her bc low.
C<m fli\uring In S7-300 stado n ... IIb
C I' 3'(l-SDP a. all inttlJige nl . Ia,e
[fyou insert an 57.300 ~t ation in the SI~1ATlC
:.,ianager. open Ihe !Iardll"a,.., ohject and confiilurc a OOnonn~I" 57-300 station. Among oth er
things, you lrnmge a CP 341-5DP communicatiOnli processor in tbe eonfiguration table.
When in.minll the station, the properties sht
oflhe DP interlace appears; the subnetworl: to
whit:h the intdligent DP ,lave is later to be connected is 10 be assii'!oo to the 01' interface he re
and you must aloo ,uian tbe nod<: address.
To opm tbe propC1"lleS "indow, ,..I"t the CP
342.5DP and tben Eon ..... OBJT.CT PROPERnts. ordouble click On the CP 342.S0P. Selc~t
the option '"OP Slavc" on the "'Mode" tab .
The "Addres~" lab 5hows the user data inlerface from the vi"""'potnl of the .Iave CPU (Start
ing address and 16 bytes in leDgth). The size o f
lile Imusfer memory on the CP 341-501' as DP
sln"e is up to 86 bytes. and you can divide this
into different address IlI"cas aft..,. connection to
tbe master system.
STATION ..... SAVE M'D Cm{PILE Icnninales
CQ1'IfIliuration of the intelligent OP $)8ve.

20A Communication via Distributed t/O

Co nn e cting an int ell igent DP slave

to a DP master
You must have created a project and configured
Dr master station and the intelligent Dr slave
(in each case al lea,t with the Dr imcrface).
The DP master ami tbe DP s lavc must be configured for the same PROFffiUS subnet;v.'ork.

Open the ma.tcf station; u Dr master system

(brohn b lack-and-while bar) must exisl, if not.
create it with Ix ,I;RT ---> MASTER SYSTEM .
In the hardware catalog under "PROFIBUS
Dr" and "Configu red Stations', you will fmd
the objects that represent thc intell igent slaves :
"CPU 3lx" or "CPU 4 1:><" represC11ts S7-300 or
$7-400 slations with an integral DP slave,
"ETIOOpro/CPU" and "ET200S!CPU" reprcS~'T1t stations which were configured as DP
slaves, and "S7-300 CP342-5 DP" t epresents
57_300 ,tations with CP 342-5 as the DP slave
i~tetface module. Select the desired s lave t)--pc:
and drag it to the DI' master system .

CPU, ET200pro or 12005 as DP slave

Dragging to a Dr master sy,tom Or doubleclicking on the DP slave opens tbe properties
sheet. The slaves already configured for this
PRO FIBUS subnetwork are listed on the "Connection" tab. Sclc~t t~c desired slave and click
on the "Connect"- bUllon . This causes the active
connection to be carried oUl at the bottom ofthe
same dialog box .
On the "General" tab. yow set (he diagnostics
addr~sg oflhe DP slave from the viewpoint of
the master station
On the "Con(ig"ration" tab, you now set the
addresses of the user data interface from thc
viewpoint of the DP master. The output
addresses on the master arc the input addresses
of the slave and vice versa. Chapter 20 .4.1.
"Addressing PROFIBUS DP" contains mOre
infonnation on the user data int erface un der
"Transfer memory On intelligent DP slaves"-

CP 342-5DP as DP slave
You open the properties shect by dragging to
the DP master system Or by d<Jublc-dicking on
the DP slave. The slaves alftady con fi gure{! for

this PROflBUS subnetwork arc listed on the

"Connection" mb. Select the desired slave and
click on the "Connect" bulton. The active connection is then sho"'ll further down in the Same
dialog box.
'Vhen the DP slave is selected, its configuration
table is shown in the lower section of the . talion
window. Now you structure the transfer memory: select the "Universal submodule" rrom the
h ardware catalog (un der the CP used), drag it to
a line on the configuration table. or select a line
and double-click on the "Universal submedul e'. You p lace one un iversal submodule for
each individual (consistent) addrcss area in the
transfer memory: the maximum number is 32 .
To open a window in which you define the
propertie;; of the addre ss area, select the universal submedulc and then EnrT ---> OBJECT PROP_
ERTIES. or double-click on the line in the table ;
space. input or output area or both . Detcnninc
the staning address and the length of the area .
The addresses defined here are located in the
address area of the master CPU. An area can b e
up to 64 bytes: the maximum overall size of the
transfer area is 86 bytes.
If a CP 342 -5DP is the DP master, structuring
of the transfer memory can be omitted because
the CP 342-5DP transfers the entire transfer
area m one ptece
When d ividing the transfer memory. you
arrange the address areas together without gap'
staning from b}1c 0. You acce$S the ~'T1tire
assigned transfcr memory in the slave CPU
with Ihe loadable blocks FC I DP _ SEND and
FC 2 DP _RECV (included in the Standard
Library under the Communication Blocks program).
The data cons istency covcn; the ent ire tran.fer
memory.

On th~ "General" tab, you set the diagnostics

address of the DP slave from the viewpoint of
the masler station. The diagnostics data are read
with FC 3 DP_DIAG (in the master station).
Chapter 20.4.1, "Addressing PROFIBUS DP"
contains mOre infonnation on the user data
interface under "Transfer memory on intelligent DP ,laves".

20 Main J>roaram
Conngu ri ng

Ih~

DPID P coup ler

The DP/OP coupler connects two PROFIIlUS

subncts. It is configured as a modular Of> slave
in caeh ofm., two liubnets _

f>rcrcquisHe: Both subnets, each "jIb a DP

maSlcr system. muSl bc configurcd. Open one
ofthe Slalions w,lh Ihe DP master. In tbe hardwart' catalog under "PROFIBUS Dr" nnd
"Network component .... you will find Ihe DPI
DP coupler. Release 1 that you can dralillo lhe
DP masler system with the mouse.
The properties sheet of me PROFlBUS inler_
face appeaJ"ll on wlUcb you set the node addre$li.
You II<:t the diagnostics address and funhe. paramelers on the "Parame!en;~ tab in !be object
propenies oftbc DPIDP coupler.

With a $elected DPIDP coupler. the configuralion tablc for the t"'!!.'i fer memory appears.
Now "Coon.,.,t" the desirt'd modules listed in
the hardware calnlog under DP/DP coupler into
the configuration table. without gaps and s1arting u\ SlOt I. You ~an set tbc universal module
to the desin:d number of inputs and outpUts.
The uscr data addresses tha! you spedfy in the
module propenic! are in the addro:ss are. of the
opened Dr master CPU .
Configure lhe seond pan ofthc DPUP coupler
in lhe .same way. The structtIfl' of tbe tfamfer
memory must agree with that of the first part.
Please note that inputs on one side are outputS
on the other side. and vice VcrM. The addresses
in bolh parts of the DPIDP coupler arc oriented
to the address assignments of the relevant mas
ter CPU and can differ from each olher.
Configuring t he DP/AS-; lin k
You eonfi auTc lhe DP/ AS-Interfaee link like.
modular DP slave_ Yon will find th~ moduks
that yoo can drag 10 the DP master system.
such as the DP/AS-i link 20 below. in the hard
W8n' catalog under "PROFlliUS 01''' and ';DP
ASi", Then yoo set the propcnie! of !he DP
section aod configure the AS-i sla,es dcp<.:odina on the link on the propenics shel'! o r
in the configuration tabie_
The AS; master sy5lem with the ASi sl."es is
not displayed as a subne. by the hardware confiiUTRt;on.

'"

VP/ASj Link 20
"Drag'" the Dr AS; Link 20 from the hard""arc
cataloa to tbe bar ofthc PROFlBUS DP master
system. In the displayed windows. define fiTSt
the pn:SCt configuration ( 16 or 20 bytes), and
!hen Ihe node addre", .
On the DP/A S-i link 21), you eRn define 16
bytes of inputs/outputs as the selpoim configu_
ration. with an addi1ional 4 bytes for control
conunands . In the latter case. the lower s""tion
of the windo,,' in the Hardware Configuration
suggests 16 bytes of u.ser data with addressc5 in
the process image and 4 bytes of comman<ll
with addresses from, c.g. S12.
Sel""t the DP slave and then EDIT --+ OBJECT
PROPERTIES, or double--click on the DP slave, to
opcn a window in which you Can ehanae Ihe
addresses suggested by the Hardware Confign_
ration and also set Ihe subprocess image. provided you have a suitable CPU.
Select the DP slave and then EOlT --+ OIIJECT
PP.OPER TIES, or doublc--click on the Dr slave. to
open Ihe slavc propenics window. On the
"Parameterize" tab. you set lhe parameters of
the ASi slavC'S. with 4 blls for each slave.
DP 'AS-i Link Ad"anced
"Drag" the DP AS-i Link Advanced - e.g. the
double rnast~ 6GKI 41S-213A20 _ from the
hardware catalog to !he bar of the PROFlliUS
DP master system. [n th.., displayed window. set
the propenics of the PROFIBUS inK.,.face. A
~onfigurntion I8ble with the AS-i inlerfaces and
AS-i slaves for the two masters appears_
Now selthe address area under which you want
to access the ASi slaves from the user proilfMll.
EDIT ... OBJECT PROPERTIES with a se lected
AS-i master interface (in the COnfiguralion table), or double-click on the master hne to open
the propenic-s dialog. On the "Diaital Addresses" mh. set the start address and lhe area lengths
reserved for inputs lIDd ootputs. This tab also
eontD.Jru the "Pack llIld "Son huttoM with
"lUch you can optimize the ad<ircss aSlli gnments after yoo ha'-e coofia;ured the AS-i
sla\cs.
H

No", "drag" the placeholder for lUI AS; slave

positioned under the link frorn the hardware

20.4 CommunicauOll

ViM

lJi'lJibuted IK>

-'._':,=~=::;~~::::r'~'~'~'~=====::~n
II_ ~

:I

Ill_ I, ,. 3

e-o '

~-

~-.-

--

r ll'--~""""''''''

.... R_"'.....

-,

_ F""

"0.0 , ."

calaloij to Ihe configuration lab le . R~at Ihis

procedure for all scheduled AS_i .Iaveo.
EOIT-I> O!iJTT PROI'F.RTTE~ with a selected
AS-; !lav'" (in the configuroliOD lable). Or double-click on th'" slave linl' 10 oJ>C'o the properties
dialog. Sct the slave proJX'nil'5 on Ihl' ''Configuration" lab. Clid "Selection- [0 view all the
AS-i sillves Jtnm,.."II to the HllI'dwarc Configuration (Figure 20. ]2).
20.4 .3 S p, clal Functions for PROFlBliS 1)1>

Gsn tIIn
You can "post ;nstal!" DP slaves that arc 001
included in the modulI' Cala]og. FOT this purposI'. you requi...., Ihe type file taIlored to the
sla~'e (O SO file. General Station Description.
device database file). From GSO ,'enion 3
onwards, DP slaves in.talled w,lh a GS O file
,uppon Ihe DPV I functionality. Sele\:\

OPTIONS -I> INSTALL GSD FILS in the Hardware Configuration and specify the directory of
Ihe aSD file or another STEP 7 project in the
window thllt ..ppears. STEP 7 accepts Ihe GSD
file and displ ays Ibe slave in thc hardware catalog under "PROFIDUS DP" and "Addil;onal
Field Devices-',

STEP 7 save. the GSD files in the di,..".,tory

, .. \Step7\S7DATA\ GSD, The OS O files deleted
when inslalling or imponing al It IDler lime arc
slor~d in the subdirectory ",\tiSD\DKPx. FroIO
h~re, they ~an be restored wilh OM'!O}.'S -I>
INSTALL aSD FILE.
Conn ~urlng

SYNClFR[Zl: grollps

The SThC control command caliSCli the DP

51Bv.",. combined as a f'OUp 10 OUlput their oulput stales s.imuhanoollsly (synchror>ollsly). The
FREk:ZE conlrol command causes the DP
slows combi ned as a group to "freeze" the cur-

""

20 Main Program
rent input signal s!ates simu ltaneously (syn
ehronous ly). in order to allow them to be then
fetcbed cyclically by the OP master. The
UNSYNC and UNFREEZE control command,
revoke the effect of SYNC and FRE EZ.E
respectively,
It is a requirement that the OP ma<1er and the

OP ~laves have the relc \'am functionality. from

the object pcoperties of a 'lave. you can see
which command it s uppons (sele ct DP s\ave.
EVIT --c, OUJECT PROPERTlS. "Generar' tab
under "SYNCIFREEZE Capabilities"),
Per OP master system . you can form up to 8
SYNCIFREEZE groups that arc to e"ec ute
either the SYNC command or the FREEZE
command or both. You can assign any DP slave
to a group; on thc CI' 34250Pofa spe<:ific ver
sion. onc DP slave can be repre,ented in up to 8
gcoups.
When you call SFC 11 DPSYCJR. you cause
tho ...set pcogram to output a conunand !O a

8m"P (see Chapter 20.4.7. "System Blocks for

Distributed 110"). The DP ma ster then sends
the relevant command simultaneously to all DP
slave, in the s!",c ifi ed group
You configure the SYNCIFREEZE group 8ft~r
configuring the DP master system (aU DP
, lave, must exist in the DP master system) .
Selecl th~ DP ma<1er system (broken black
andwhite bar) and sel ect Elll'f --c, OBJECT
PROPERTIES. In tbe wllldow that then appears,
you first establish on the -'Group Propenies"
tab the group commands ' 0 be executed (Figure
20.13). then you assign the DP slaves to the
individual group s on the "Group Assignment"
tab.

Here you select each of the DP slaves listed

with its node number o n~ after the other and
, e lect in each ca ,e the group to wh ich it is to
b~long . If a DP ,lave Cannot exe~me a specific
command. such as f REEZE, the groups tbat

, .. ,",. , 'H ~ ~""".~

-,

0_

'" '"'''''' 1"'-,,,,

- 1

p~

r_~

-.._,-,
I,

13

-,
-,

p~
p~

i''''''

"

... ..... ~ ..... _

, ,

'" ""EZE

"-=

p ~

p ~=

F7 "'0;:

rv

P .n.C

'" "''''''"

.,., .

~~~
~

""IZr

!iI'" ' " ,0'1.'

Figu .. 20.13 Configuring SYNC ""d FREEZE Groups

"'"

~x

~~~~~

13

20.4 Communication vi"

contain this command Cannot be s~lected, e.a.
all groups with the FREEZE command. Tenninate conJiaurinll of the S'0oIC/FREEZE groups
with OK.
Please nOlc that when configurina bus cycles of
the same length (c-q~iJ istant), group s 7 and 8
acquire u ~pccia l meaning.
Co unll u rlng PROHBUS PA
For confi"urinK a rROFffiUS PA master system Ind for parameterizing the PA field
devicn, UK the Ilardwarc Configuralion 1001
(STEP 1 VS.l SP3 Dnd lat~) and thc SU>1ATlC
PDM optional ,olm"n: (with an earlier 'er1ion
of STEr 7). With the Hard".,.re Confi&uration,
you build up the connection to tile Dr master
syStem with the DP; rA link: in the Harowan::
Catalog under " PROFIBUS DP" and "Of>IPA
Link'", draa the I:YI 157 interfac~ mooule to the
OP master system. With the OP slave, a PA
m~ stcr system is simultaneously created in its
own PROFIBUS suhnetwork (45 .45 kbi tsls); it
is indicated with a broken black-and- white bar.
The OPIPA coupler transfers the data unmodi_
fied and uninterpreted belween the bus systC1l)S; for this rea.;;on, it is not parameteriud.
The PA field devices ace addressed by the DP
m!ll>ter. They can be incorporated as DP standard slaves into thc Hardware ConfiaUTlltion of
STEP 7 via a GS D file. Following thi . you will
fllld the rA field device. in the Ium;Iw.re catalog uude!" "rROFIBUS DP" =d 'Other Field
D"Yices".
C onfiguring direct dala exehanllc
(slaH-Iu-slave ~omn' unlcation)
In a OP mailer sySlcm. the DP master h8~
exclusive control ovcr the slaycs assigned 10 it.
With appropriately equipped stations. lUlotb~r
node (master or inlellii:eIlt slave, refe~d to 8:i
the - ",ceivC1"-- or "sub'ICribcr") Can monitor the
PROFIBUS subnetv..ork to learn whicb input
data a DP slave ("'scllder" or "publisher-') 15
sending to "ilii" roaster. This direct data
""challge is al50 call ed "lmcral communication-. In principle all Dr sl""es from I specific
reyision level can function as senders in direct
data cxehanlOc.

Di~tributcd

1/0

You configure direct data exchange with the

Hard,,-sre Confivuration in the I'ropcnies willdow of the DP slave (rec~ivcr) ",hen all the 81atiolU on thc PROFIBUS subnetwork arc con_
nected. O~n tbe re<:eiyer station and SClcctthe
Dr interface and then EDiT ... OHl&:T PROPEI!: nFS. The "Configuration" tlIb comains the
transfer interfac e betw~n til e DP slave and the
Dr n,aster. Click the "New" button. a nd set OX
mode (direct data exchange) in tile con figuration windn ... which i. displayed. Al50 defme
the parameters for the Dr parmer (sender) in
the same window.
You can al'" USC dire<;t data ,,",chanae betw~-(."JI
two DP master systems on lbc:: $&IIIe PRO FI BUS subnetwork . For example, the master in
master <y>;tem 1 Can monitor the data ofa _la"e
in mISter system 1 in Ihis way.
C onfiguring co nstant bus cyelc tlmt'll
and hochron ~ mode

Eq,,;d;u,mce
Normally_ the OP maSler control tllc or $lay1.'8
IJsia;ned 10 it cyclically without a pause. With
S 7 Communication, such as when the PTOIo'Tllmmma deyice executes modify function!! yis the
PROFIBUS subnety..ork.. this ellll ",suit in
""riations in the time intervals. If, for example.
tile outputs arc 10 be modified yia DP slaves at
a regular inter>'al, you can SCI cOllStant bus
cycles with the "PP'op, iately equipped DP
muter. For this purpose. tbe DP master must he
the only Class 1 maslo.--r on the PROFI8US subnetwork. Constant bus cycle time behavior is
po .. ible with the bu. profiles "or " lind "UserDefined" . The PROF!BUS subtle1 ,"US1 not be
project-wide and no IT ~ystCtn or Ci R (Config_
uration in Run) object may be connected.
If you conftgUre SYNC!FREEZ E gmups in
addition to Ihe constant bus cycle time, pleas.:
nOle the fonowing:
:>

For DP slaves in group 7, the DP masler

automatically initiates , SYNCIF REEZE
command in every bus cycle. Initiation per
user program is preYCDted.

Co

Group 8 i. used for the constant bu, cycle

time signa! and is disabled for DP . laves.
You cannot configur<: con~t .."t b",. cycle

'"

20 Main Program
time if you have a lready configured slaves
for group 8.

Isochronous mode
Reference is mOOe to isoxhrone mode if a program is cx,..;uted in synchronism with the
PROFIBUS DP cycle. In conjunction with constant bus cycle times. this results in reproducible response times of equal length to the 110
that include distributed signal acquisition. signa l transfer via PROflBUS and program execution including proxc.s image updating. The
user program executed in i'oxhrone mode is
present in the organization b loxks OB 61 to OB
64. The system functions SFC 126 SYNC_PI
and SFC 127 SYNC_ PO are available for
updating of the process image in isochronous
mode (see Chapter 21 8. "Synchronous Cycle
Inturrupts).
Figure 20 .14 shows the timen; involved in isochronous mode. is the lime required for re ading in the process values. It contains the execution time in the input modules or electron ics
modules. and, in the case of modular DP slaves.
the tr~ru;fer time on the backplane bus. At the
end of 11, the input information for tnmsfer using !he global control command is avai lable.
Then the equidistance time begins. It is the time
betw""n two global contro l commands and cncompasses the transfer 10 the subnet as well as
the execution of the isochronous interrupt OB .

-----

To is tbe time required for outpUlling the pro cess values. It begins ""1th the globalcontrol
command and comprises the transfer time on
!he ",bnet as well as the proxessing time in the
output modules or electronics modules. In the
case of modular Dj> sla"es, tbe transfer time on
the back--plane bus is also added. The re sponse
time in the case ofisoxhronous mode is the tOlal
of the limes n, equidi,tance time and To.
Correspondingly dcsigned OP ,laves allow a
reduction in the response time thanks to overlapping iso,'hronous mode. This involves overlappin g updating of the inp ut and OUlput signals
(overlapping of 11 and To). In this case, you
must deactivate tbe cbeckbox "Times Ti and To
ideotkal for all sla'-es ' 00 the "Equidistance"
tab , and enter the individual rimes for the participating modulcs. If isoxhronous modules
have both inputS and outputs. overlapping of
and To is Dot possible .

Configuring ri,e isoehrono"s mode

A prerequisite for configuration of the isoxhronou, mode is the equidi stant behavior and the
corresponding functionality of the participating

tsochronous mod" os

Main prog ram

---

---

Matn program

0'

---

---

\ OC

GO

-- -- ---- -

Between completion of the execution of Ihis

OB to the next global control command there
must be lime for execution of the main pro_
gram.

\1

I
SlaY<!

11

--

ISta"e 0

Cyclic
data transmission

Acyclic
Acyclic
services

1~~I ~nE ~~enSla~ 11 ~ ~

ISlave n

Reserv&ci for
equidisrance

Output

Input

"

DP cyet. tima

'0

Rupcnse Um a with tace-hrcncus mod.

Change in sensor slg nllt

lit the modu l8 termina l
Figu.~

- - - ------

2 0. 14 Re.poru;. Time with Iwchrone Mode ond Con"ant Bus Cycle Times

Output at the
modu le termtn al

20.4

r-T.....
, .., ' -"'0

""'

Commu~ i cat io~

" i" Di.teibuted [/0

__

1>'-'" "" _ ...-""' _,

.LBo 10 ( . - """",,_l
( ....; . = m ........

= ...

-,~

<><-

J I --

ftg ure lO. 1S jsochrono u. mMe:

o,'ervi ~w

of DP ,Ian pWp"r1ies

D P components. Following configuralion of

the DP master system with appropriate mooult:s
(CPU w ith integral DP interface as well as
ET200S and/or ET200M DP interfa~es with the
input/output modules), as,ign the priority. the
D P master system and the partial proceos
images to the organization block in the CPU
propalies on the "Synchronous cyc le imermpts" tab .

age thut has been assigned to the isochronous

or ganization bl""k in the CPU peoperties . Set
the partial process image for the module in its
peoperti". dialog box on tbe "Addresses" tab
The isochronon, modnles must be made known
to the DI> imerface module. In the properties
window o f the DP .lavc. a~\i va\c the option
"Synchronize DP slave to constan! bns cycle
time Of> cycle" on the "lsochrone mode" lab.
H"re you also select tbe modules or electron ics
modules involved in isoehron ous mode.

To sw itch on the constant bus cycle times and

jsochrone mode, m ark the DP master interface
in the CPU and .dect EDIT -4 OBJECT PROPE flTIES . In the disp layed dialog box, click the
'"Properties " bunon i.n the "General"' tab . In Ihe
properties w indow of lhe PROFlBUS interface.
select the "Netw"rk setling'" tab. Note that the
constant bus cyc le times properties can only be
set with th~ bus profi les '"DP " and "Us~r-de
fined" . Clie k the '"Options" bUllon an d the se lection box" A ctivate constant b us cycle times"
in the oplions window which is then displayed.
For isochronous mode . specify addi tionally Ihe
time~ Ii and To. Either seleClthe "Time< Ti and
To same for all s laves" Or set the limes individually in the slave properties.

To update Ti and To, select the properties oflhe

D P ma5ter system, then the (suhnet) properties,
and th e Opti ons" bnllon on the 'Iernork settings" tab. Wbenthe "Recalculate" button is ac_
ti vated. STEP 7 upJates all time, involved in
isochronous mooe . Yon ca n modify the suggested equid istance time but no! below the displayed minimum time. The "'Details" burton
shows the individual proportions ofthe eqllidistance time . Plea,e note thai the cquidistance
time increases tbe more programm ing d evices
are cOlUlecled direelly to the PROFlBUS subnet and the more intelligent DP slaves arc in the
DP master system .

a~h module partic ipating in isochronous mode

must have an address in the partial p roce ss im-

EDn -4 ISOCIiRONE MODE g ives you an overview of all componenls involved in isochro-

20 Main Program

nouS mode and Ih~ releY" tl l parameters (Figur~

20.15). Tflhe checkbox '"Times T i and To sam e
for all slaves" under ." elw ork s~tting," and
"Ortio ns" has bc<'-"Il deacli vated. yon can sel the
update tim,," individually for ca~h sLwc (pre
requisite fo t overlapring isochmnoos mod~)
Sebo l Ih e DP <lave in the '"lsochrone mod,"
w ind ow. "Edit p ~nuneters" provides you w ith a
dialog window fo r ~",,'eri ng the individual urdat~ times and (he modules involved in i';oeMono"S mode.

2004.4 Addres. in !;!: PROFl.'\'ET 10

Tn a manner <im ilar to how centtal modules are
assigne d 10 a CPU and controlled by it_ th e dis tributed lll(xiuk s Wilh PROFIN ET 10 (Slation.>.
TO devices) are a" igned 10 an 10 <;<mtrol kr.
TIle 10 eonno!ier with a ll its'" 10 de,-iecs is
ref~TTed 10 as a PROFTNET 10 'ystem.
Like ~cIllrai modules. Ihe 10 d~viecs occupy
addresses lD the C PU's I/O area (" logic~ 1

_odd,...

(.,.rt of ,p ... ",. . .)

address arca) . The 10 contro!kr is SO to say

'transparent" ror the ~ddresses o f the 10
devic~ , : tbe CPU "",cs" tbe addresses ofth~, 10
device> so that these addre,.,es mllst not overlap
"ith lhose oflhc central modules, not even with
those of DP sh,'es in the DP ma't~r systems
as,ig ned to th~ CPU.
Eaeb node operaTed on The Indu,triai thcmc~
h as an TP "<kin,S.>. This i, as~igned dllring configuration of<hc TO ~<Jntroller. The IP addresse s
for th~ 10 device, are derived from the I t'
add",% "r the 10 controller. In addition, all TO
device i , assigned a device name, a device
number (node nwnber), a geographical addres~
(slot) and at least one diagnos~ies address (Fig-

ure 20.16) .
i\lAC addr....

The .\1AC addres> is an addn'" ass igned to lhc

d~\'ic~ whic h is g loba lly unambiguous. Tt con-

~ ...... ' ... ua" . ,ot

(net ph""",,,,, ",_nil

S'<)\ 0 "'0rM6nlS
\

10 d Ie. (ET 200M)

02 ( ~.

"

-'-"r~'

eemplo,. ,"'on

tr~

""M'toce.

~_.__

e,M'

~~,

,p "''''' ' '

X~ .'" !II_
Pf>.ro"" """"

D","oo nu"'''',
(ato;""

,!

n"mb~~

' 'Skl!OX,

Lov''''' odd,n
.
aocr,,,,")

Srot OX1 P'

(""'" <lata

(~"")

S ~ot

~SIot2
,
r Sio! ,

ct''''

;CpuI 01

D;,;:toI 00'''''' DO

2004 CmnmW1ication via Distributed

va

aelers and cons ists of len .. rs. digits, hyphens

and dots.
The name of the 10 system can be appended to
the d evice name, separat.. d by a dot. To do so.
s~lect "Us e name in TOfDeviceiControlier" iu
the properties oflhe PROFINET 10 syst~'IIl..
Nod... ddr ....

The .ubn<:t oddr<:,. is pro.ent left_justified in t~~

!P address . nd i. !!cnrnl1ro by AI><-ni~ tho IP odd",,,
with tlle subnet ma.>k.

Figure 20.17

Exomp l ~

Supplementary to the device name. the HardWare Configuration also assigns a dC";ce number to each TO device which is independent of
the IP address and which you can change. You
can usc Ihis device number (station number) to
address the TO device from Ihe user program,
e.g. as an aemal parameter on a system block..

of 11' addr.ss struCture

G col:raphicaT address
siSls of three bytes with the vendor ;dentifica.
tion and three bytes with the devic e identification. The MAC address is usual ly printed On the
device, and is assigned to it during the configu_
ration procedure (ifnOl alre~dy done in the fac
tory).

The geographical address identifies a module

slot. With central modul..., the geographical
address contains the number of the rack and
th at of Ihe slot. Wilh PROFmET 10, the geographical address contains the number of tbe
PROFJ}."'ET 10 system. the 8lalion number, the
slot number and possibl y a subslOl number.

lP addO'",

The "virtual" s lot 0 (not physically present)

repre sents the 10 device . From slot I onwards
are the user data and diagnostics dala. The sy,...
tern functions SFC 70 GEO_ LOG and SFC 71
LOG GEO are available for conversion from
the geograpbical add",ss to tbe logical
addresses and vice versa .

Each node On the Industrial Ethernet subnet work which uses the TCPITP protocol requires
an 11' address. The IP addr~ ss must be unambiguou. on the subnetwork. It is a"igned once to
the 10 ~ontroller for the nodes ofa PROF1NET
IO system. Basedon Ihis. the Hardware Config uration assigns Ihe 11' addresses to Ihe 10
devicn in a,cending order.
The IP addres, i, four bytes long, each being
separated by a dol. Each byte is represent~d as
a decimal number from 0 to 255.
Th~ II' addr~ss comprises the address of the
subnetwork and the address of the node. The
s ubnctwork mask defmes the share oflhe network address in the 11' address. Like the lP
address. it consists of four bytes whieh can
assume a value of255 or O. Those bytes with a
value of2.5S in the subnCt\<-'ork mask defme the
subnetwork address. Ihe byte. with a value of 0
define th~ node address (F igure 20.17).

Device name, device

numb~r

During the configuration process. you assign

the 10 controller and e ach 10 devi ce a device
name whieh must n01 be longer than 127 char-

Logtcat address, modulc s tarting address

\"ou u.e the logical add", .. to Rccess the use<
data of a slation. Eaeh byte of the user data is
unorubiguously identified by a logical address.
The logical address corresponds 10 the ahsolute
address: a symbol (name) can be assigned to it
so that it is easier to read (s)mbolic addre>sing).
The smallestlogica] add",.," ofa moduI~ or station is the modu le Slalting add", (sec also
Chapter lA, "Module Addresses").
Dl a gnoslTu "ddress
Modules and stations which can deliver diagnostics data and do nOI have a user data address
th~mselves ar~ identified by the diagnosli~s
addre" . The diagnostics address occupies one
byte of petipl1cml inpul in the logical add",.,
volume. In the default .etling, STEP 7 assigns
the diagnoslics address starting with Ihe highest

aoddrH, in the 110 area of the CPU. You can

chanae the dbgnQli1ic$ address. The address
~'erview in the Hardware Configuratioo tool
Idenlifies the diagnostics address by a star_

In the example shown (Fiaure 20.16). tbe MPL

DP inlerface of .he CPU 317_1PNIDP is
assillncd diagnostics address 8191. lite P'< 10
intcrfpce is assigned add,..,S$ 8190. and the 10
eonlroLler is assigned address 8189. In the 10
device. the intcrfa<.:e (,lot 0) is as.igne<! diag_
nostics address 8188. The power module docS
nOt have its own user daTa. and is ass igned the
addre,,!!l g?
In the user program. the dillll"OSTics data are
SCIlnncd u.ing sysTem blocks. Witb a dia!!Dostic
;nteTT1lPl, foc example. the SfB 54 RALR..M 15
u$Cd which read. the supplemmuuy inlermpt
infonnation. You can SoC"" Ille diagnostics dalB
record DSlusin/!the SfB ~2 RDREC

20A.S Conflgurin/! PROFIN ET 10

General proeed u ....
You configure tbe distribuTed LO an PROFI
NET 10 essentially in the 5BIlH: way as tbe centn.liud modul cs_ IDJltea<! ofanat:lging modulei
in a mounting rack. you assign 10 devices
(n<.>des on the [ndustrial Ethernet subnctwork)
10 PII.O f lNET 10 system. The follo"ina
order i. ",commended for the necessary
!\Ctioll~'

I) Create a neW projeCt or open an existinll

One with Ihe SL-'-1AT[C Manager.
2) Create a IndU$tri.1 Ethernct subnet"-'ork in
the project witb the SIMATIC ManagCl".

3) Use the SIMAT[C Man'8C1" to creale !b~

Sialion in the proj~t tbat is toaccommodat~
the [0 controller e .11. an S 7-300 Station_
You stan the Hardware Configurauon by
o""tUng the station.
4) With the Hard".re Coofigutation. you
place an 10 connvller in the .tatiOIl. This
can be, for elIampl~ . CPU w;lh integral
PN interface. You assi"" Ihe p",,"~ously erealed Ethernct subneTwork to the p~ illter_
face and you then ha"e I PROFTh.'ET 10
system. Impon or modify the propowd
device name and Ihe [P addre .. in the "Gen-

;0'

etar' tab. You can also configure the

remaining modules laler. SD"e and compile
the stalion.
5) Using tbe mouse. dtag Ibc PROFTh.'ET
nodes from tbe hard""are catalog to Ibe
PROFl}.'T [0 system. Assign tbe de"ice
names. ""ith 1M nllll1bn" (su,lion nwnber) if
applicable.
0) If you use IRT commurucation. create a
new sync domain. accept the plU1lcipating
PROFINET 10 systems. lind set the properties of the relevant devices.

7) If you use IRTtop. you mUSt configure the

net","Ork topology either in the Hardwa~
Configuration di1'tt\ly lllhe pon (inurlace
cono~tion) or centrally with the topology
editor.
8) Save artd compile aIl5u,tions. The PROF!-

NET 10 SYStCIn;s now confiprcd. You can

now supplemenl the configuratioo w ilh
cCnltalized modules. with DP master sy'telDJI or further 10 devices,
You can al<o represent the PROFn-.'ET 10 syslem configu.-ed in this way graphically witb the
r-ctwork Confii"ntlion tool. Opell Network
ConfiJPlTlllion by, for example. double-dicking
on a subnetwork. Selecl VIEw ..... WITH DP
Suns,10 DEVICES 10 display the 10 devices.
You can also c,..,ate a PROFINET 10 system (or
more preCIsely, assign Ihe nodes to an Eth~met
sub~t"ork) with the Network Configuration
tool. You panlmeterize the stations after openina them with the Hardwa~ Configuration.
8<:fore loading the c(mfilluration data. Ihe de.
'~ce name must be assigned to each 10 device
('"'naming" ). In STOP mode. load the cOnJtgoratioo t1au, onto the CPU that acceplll paramcters
such 1$ the IP addrest. With the Hardwa~ Con_
fiauranon. load Ihe data ofth~ currently opened
5t1\l'On (PLC ..... OO"''NLO,,-O); with the NeNork
Configunltion. VOlI can send the data to several
stations. for ex~mple. with PLC ..... Dow}Jl.o ... n
TO c\'"Rl!.BT PROJF-CT .....

ST,,-nO~S

ON THI!

S1..'B'TI.

AI startup. the CPU uansfCT1 Ibe configuring

informallon to the 10 d~'iecs and monitoI"'i thc
paramcterization. The 10 dc\"ices also ~ceive
their IP address with the paramcters. Following
successful paramettrization. the user data ~re

20.4 Communication vi. Distributed 110

select he.-e whelher the sy~lem name is \0 be
pan of the device namC for the 10 contro lle r
~nd 10 device, . You can access the 57 subnetwork 10 uSIDg the .. Properties ... ' button.

then exchanged cyclically between the 10 con

troller lind 10 device, in RUN.
Co nflg urin!;:: the 10

eo n troU ~r

The Update time" lab sh<:lws the time span cal.

culated by STEP 7 within ...hieh the 10 cODtroller has exchanged all data with illl [0 devices.

You must have created a project and an 57 sta

t,on with !he STMATIC Manager. You ~n the
57 stalion and <.:~ate a moumirltl ".ck (5
ChaptCT 2.3. "ConfigunPg Stations,). When
posiLioning II CPU with PN intcrfa~. cOler the
II' addresses and the jUbnC1Work mask in the
propenic~ window which is displayed. and nel
work the interface l() an exitting or n(wly cre
ated Ethernet mbnetwork . After clicking the
"OK bullOO you will be provide<! with a
PROF INET 10 system in the Station window
(black/white dashed rail).

Chanac the device name of the 10 controller

w,th the PN 10 interface ~Ittted aoo EDIT -->
with the "Propcnics' bIDto!l you will be provide<! with a window for
chunaing the IP add,....s. the subnetwork mask
and the conn oction l() an Ethcrnet subnetwork.

OWECT PROPERTIES;

Conflgurlng the 10 de ..lce

The 10 devices can be found in the bardw,,",
cat_loa under " PROfTolET 10 IlDd lbc c0rresponding subcatalog, c.II. IIO.

If there is no PROFINET 10 syscem available

(it may be Ibat il is obscured behind an objttt or
is outside \be visible a~a), c~ate one by selcct
ing the PN 10 interface in Ihe configurution
windOw and then scleet;n!> rr-SEIU -+ PROFI.
NET 10 SYSTEM.

Click on the required interface (bllsic module)

and d reg ;t wing the mousc 10 tbe symbol for
the I'ROFTNET TO .ystem. Duuble click 00 th e
10 device to obta in the prupenics sh""t of the
st!'ltion on which you can ~t the device name
and number. You ellD change the proposed lP
address by clicking the Ethernct ..... button.

Mark the black/white rail. and select EDlT -;

01lJ1iCT PROPERTlliS. Aniit'! a name and an 10

sYltem number (from 100 10 lIS) in the Gen_

eral" tab of the propenics window. You eao also

.~-

_Pf'KlFItIII._ .... *"'"' _

IU'II(.M.I'fIOff<1 Kl _ _ .... _ ......_

_ ..
.....,
_ _ vzo

,_

.1_

""'1'0"'" "..... , ,,..

x,

"
c-._ !

Flwu~

20.18 Conliguri0H tho PK/P:-I couplo:r, Connection ""d cluro"<Ie, i,tlc, of tbo tTan.fo:r in1o:rface

20 Main Program

Now position Ihe modules which you lind in

the hardware catalog unda Ihe required interface ( !) in the eonfig ...ration lablc. Double dickillg on th~ line opcus the propenie, ,heet ofth~
module and permits you 10 sct the modul~
parameten;.
PNfPN cou p ler ko n figuricrcn
The PN/PN coupler C0!ll1e<ot5 each of two in_
dustrial Ethernet 8ubnets 10 " PROflNET 10
system. In each of the two PROFINET 10 systems, one half of the PNlPN coupler appears as
an 10 device. With the configuration, you bring
togClhcr the two 10 devices and panunetcrizc
Ihc PNIPN coupler.
Prerequisite: The two PROFINET 10 systems
a re set up. The preferred method of configuring
is to ,tan with the "X 1 side" of the PNIP:N cou pler. Open the relevant s(ation (Figur~ 20 . 18).
You wi!l find the ,ymbol of the P:-VPN coupler
in the hardware catalog WIder "PROFINET 10"
and "'Gateway". Do ...b le-clicking on the symbol
when the PROFINET 10 systcm is a lready selected accepts the PNIPN coupler into the confi guration. EDlT--> OIlJECT PROPERTIES with
the PNIPN coup ler selecI~d shows its
properties window wilh the fac ility for s~t!ing
the device name and tho dovice number on Ihe
Ethem~t subne!. You can change the 11' address
with the "Ethernet..." burton .
In the configurat ion table Ihal is displayed
wh<'-"Tl the PN/I'N coupler is selected, the slmion

is located m the tir<;t line in slot O. In Ihe object

properties of the station. select the di~b'!lO'li~,
ovents 10 be reported on tho "Parameters" tab.
Tho diagnostics address of th~ stalion is on the
"Adtlre..ses" lab.
On the "Cotltlection" tab, set whether the "Xl"
or the " X2" side ofthe coupler is currently configured. If you have start~"<l with the "X l side'"
of the coupler, aJld if both subnelS to be connected are located in one project, YOli do not
need to set a nything else on the "Connection'"
tab.
[n the object properties of the interface on slot
X 1. the "Addresses" tab contains the diagllOStic, a ddress of the interface, and the "10 Cycle"
tab conta in, information about the update time .

30~

To configure the Inm, fer memor)" position the

univer;ul mod ulo, (found in the catalog u nder
the P:NfPN coupier) without gaps ill the configuration table Starting from SIOl 1. In the properties of the univer;al m odule. set the I/O type
(input area Or output area or bolh), the relevant
sian address, and th~ area lenglh, a, well as Ihe
assignmcut 10 the process image. You can d ivide the transfer memory into a tOlal of 16 areas
whose data ar~ consistently transferred . Save
the previously completed setting, with STA-

n o" ...... SAVE.

To configure the second side of the PNIPN coup ler. open the station on the other Ethernel subnet and position the PNIPN coupler from the
hardware catalog on the PROFINET 10 system.
Open Slot 0 of the PKII' N coupler, and set the
connection panner (the already configured Se<;tion of the coupler) on the "Connection" mb . If
(he subnet is in the same project, the structure
of the transfer memory is transf~rred consistently. :Now you CaJI adapt the addr~sses according to your specifications and .>e1 the remaining paramelers of the coupler.
If the two subn~ts are located in different
projects. you must Stru Cture the transfer memory manually in bolh cases. Please note that an
input on one side must correspond to an output
on the other side. an d v ice verSa. With different
projecl~ , you must as> ign the dev ice nam~s for
both sides oflhe PN/PN coupler online.
On the "Connect ion'" tab, you can al~o c lear
down the connection belwcL"Tl the subnel~ again
(enter "- - - - -.. und~r "Subnet").
Configurin g t he fEfPB lin k
You can lind the IE/PI:! link PNlO it! the hardware catalog under "PROFINET 10" and
"Gateway". Double clicking on the symbol
with the PROFTh'"E T [0 system previously
selected outPUIS the propertie, window in
wh ich you can set Ihe e[)!mection to a P ROFIBUS subn~twork and tho node number in this
subnetwork in the "Parameters"' lab
EDTT --> OBJECT PROPERTIES with the [EII'B
Jink s~le cted displays its prope rties window
with Ihe facility for sctting the device n ame and
number on the Ethernet subnetwork. You CaJl
change the IP address "sing the "Ethernet ... "
button .

lOA Communication via Distributed I/O

The TF)PB link is quasi Ute DP ma,ter for the

"",,!>ordinate" DP master ,ystem. You posiuon
the DP slav", from Ih" hardware catalog on this
master system, and a"ign them w ith tbe
desired pwpertie, (see Chapter 20A ,2. "Con
figuring PROFlB U S DP")
Tho DP slaves require a d"vice nu mh er in order
to address Ut~m over PROFINE T 10. You can
make the m>signment, between node n um ber "n
the PROHBUS and device tHlm bcr On the
PROHN T in th~ properti'" window of~he lEI
PB link
the "Device num~r." tab. As standanl, STEP 7 uses Ute PROFlBUS addres~e~ as
th~ d~vice numb<., (indic"ed by a s tar on thc
d~vi~~ numb<;r). Sck~t a DP . lave in Ute h s\,
1IIId ~liek the "Change" button.

The IE! PEl link is able to pass on lime -of-day

.elegrams and parameterizati"n data records .
You can make the ,ettin&.~ for .hi s in the. propeni" , window in lhe "Optio"," lab.
Configuring the IT/AS_; link
You will find lhe symbol of lhc lEIAS-i link
PNIO in the hardware catalog und<.-, "PROF/ NET 10". 'Gateway" and "Singk master" or
"Double mast", " . Double_clicking on the lInk
symbol wh~n the PROFlNP.T 10 syslem is alread y scl""ted position, lhe link at the 10 system bar.

20A.6 Spedal Functiolls for PROnNET 10

GSD flies
You can "POSt instaU" 10 d"viccs that ar~ not
in cluded in thcmodule cata log. For this p"'pose,
you require the type file rilored to the 10 device
(GSD tile. Generic Station Dcscription) . Su itable for 10 device s are GSlJ nle s of version 5
or later in XML format (GSDML O"n"';c Station Description M arkup Language).
Select OPTIO~S ..... INSTALL GSD FILE in the
Hardware Confi.,'urntion 1IIId spedfy lhc directory o f the GSD file or anoth<.-, STEP 7 projcct
in the w indow that appears. STE P 7 accepts the
GSD lile and displays thc TO device in the hard warc e atalog und~r "PROFll'ET 10" and
"Additional Field Device," ,
STEP 7 saves the GSO files in the directory
__ IStep TlS7DATA\GSD , T he GST> flies deleted
when inst3 11ing or imporling aI a later time ar"
stored in the subdirectory ... \G SDlBKl'x. Fwm
her~, (he y ~an b e res!Ored with OPTIONS .....
INSTAll GSO FILE.
Real_t1me commllnkulion with PROl' L,' F.T
PROFlNET 10 offe", several t)'f\"s of data

transfer:
(>

Non-time-critical dIlta such as configuration

and diagnoSlic , information is transferred
acyclicallywilh the TCP.i J? communication
;tandard.

t>

User data (inputloutput information) is ex ch ange d e)'cli~ al1y between the 10 ~ontrol
ler and the 10 device (r~ al-lime RT) within
a deti ned tim~ p<:riod - tb~ update time.

'>

Time-cri.iea\ user data , for II1o.ion ~"",rol

applic3tioll'> for example, i, tran.< ferred
with hardwa re support isochronously (ioo
ehronous ,c31 t ime lRT).

EDIT ..... OBJECT PII.Ol'hRTIES w ith the lliIAS-i

link .,dectcd shows ill< prop"rtics w indow wjtb

th" facility for setting the dev ice name and the
devic" number on the Ethernet suhne!. You can
change the IP addre." with tb~ .. Eth<.-'Illct .....
button.
T he lElAS-i link effectively funclio ns as the
AS-;-Master. The AS -; mast<.-' ,yst"lll w itb the
AS_ i slav"s is not displayed a s a subnet by the
Hardware Configuration , If the lE/ AS -i link is
selected. you receive th~ configuration table in
which you "plug in' th~ AS-i slave, that appear
it> the catalog lImier the link symhoL
TI,e configuration ofth" AS_; mas\er sy'tem is
described in Chapter 20.4 .2. "C onfiguring
PROHBUS DP" tmder "Configu ring tho DP!
AS-i link".

A pcrrmmcnt commU1l1Cal!01l channel is re,erv~d on the Ethernet subnet for IRT COffilllU'
nica\iol1. RT corrununic"tion - cycl ic data ex change bcn.vecn thc 10 controller a nd 10 devices - and nonreal_time TCPIlP communication
take place ill parallel within the update time. In
th i. way, all three conununicmion lypeS can c xist in parall cl on the s ame subnel.

20 Main Program
Stnd

~yde

time/updau time

Cycl ic data exchange is handled within a speci lk time frame, th e send cycle time. STEP 7
caJculal~s the send cy~le I1me from me configu ration infonnation on the PROFINET 10 systern. T'hesend cycle time is the ~hon= possible
u pdate time. This is tlw tim~ p...""'Tiod widun
which each 10 device in the 10 system ha~ exIlhanged it. user data with the 10 controller. 111<:
actual update time for an [0 device can be a
multiple o f the send cycle time. You can incrense the update lim e manually. in order to!"Cduell the hus load. for example
'''Il update ti me;$ the same length focall 10 devices in me 10 system as <tlJldard. Under cerlain cin:umSlances. you can reduce the update
lime f"" individual 10 devices if y{)\1 increase
the lime for other devices wbose u~er data Can
be eXllhanged non-lime_critlcally.
You can configure the send cycle time (without
IRT conununication) centrally in the Properties
dial og box ofthc PN imerfaee on tbe PROF!NEr' tab, or in the Propertiel dialog box of the
PROF[NET 10 sy~tel11 on the "Update time"

"".

This tab also IislS the [0 dc,ices with Ihe liPdM~ times. You can lncreas~ Ihe time for an 10
device by .dc ~ling it and clic king on the "Ed,,'
hunon. or you can sel th e lime in the Properties
dinlug box of the 10 de"ice On the "10 cycle"
lab .
In addition to tho: upda!C~ time. ~ou can j("[ the
watchdog timer in thc device properties. This I~
the produci of the update limo: and the Xumber
of accepled updale cycles ",ith missing 10 dala '.,
If Ihere is at least one synchronized d~vice in
thll 10 syslem, th e send cycle time is determined by the .ync master of the sync domain
and C311 only be modified in the properties of
the sync domain, Select tbe [0 system in the
Hardware Confii\lT8tion or thc subnet in the
Nctwork Configuration, Schect EDIT .....
I'ROF INET 10 ...." DoMIUN MA ....AGnIENT. It
can tben no longer be modified at another localion.

'"

Real time
Rca l time ( RT) means that a syStem processes
extemal events wilhin a defined time. If il re_
sponds p~ictabIy. il is called deterministic. In
RT communication. transfcr takes place 01 a
SpeCIfic limc (send cycle time) Wilhill a dcfined
interval (upllarc time). PROF~ET 10 allows
Ihc use o f nanda. ."d IlIlN,ork components for RT
communication.

If nOI all dam to be exchanged is transferred

"'i!hin the planned lime fl"'Jmc. due, for example. to the addltion o f new nem'ork ~ ompo
nen's, .orne d ata i~ d istribu ted 10 o lher send frequencies . This can resu[1 in all incre3'>" in Ihe
update timc for indi,.. d uaI IO devices.
Isoc hrono us rta l tltne
lsocbrooous real time (IRT) il bardware-$\Ippon ed reaI_time communlC:at;on desi gned, for
example. for IDOuon control applications. IRT
m~~~aae frames are deterministically lransmit.
led ,i3 plaoned comlllun i~at ion palhs in II 'pc<:ifie-d order. IRT communicalion therefoTC requ)reS nem'ork componcnts that suppon Ihis
plaoned data trllnsmission.
Isochronous real t;me 1$ avat lable in m'o ~' er
sioru lhal differ in their behavior wilh regard 10
network exparn;ions. for example:
t>

In the case oflRTflex ( RT Clas~ 2). the SCt1d

eyelll lime is automati cally stepped down.
This m ean s that the data is ,listribut ed
aCrOss several send cyclc times if all the data
10 be cxchanaed is not traosferred within
one send cycle time, This increases the updale nme for ind"iduallO d evices.

t>

In the case of IRTtop (RT Clas. 3), transfer

of ..11 10 data within Ihe update lime calcu.
lated by the system;s iI'''' .... nleed. If the configw-acion is challaed 18ter. the update time
;3 nOI automslically adjusted. In the con. isteney ch""k. ST EP 7 draws yout attention to
me fact that the update limc has to be adjusted manually.

To be able to confillW"e IRT communication. set

up .. IXW sync domain <lee below) and determine a sync master 10 hlllldle thc synchronized
distribution of the IRT messaae frames to the
sync sla, es. IRTtop requires a topoLogy configurat;On (see Topology Editor be low) and Ihus ~

20 .4 Communication via Distributed TlO

defined structure that takes accollnt ofthe IIan,mission properties oflhe cables and the SWilch_
es used.
Syne dom a In
A sync domain is a group of PROFINET 10
nodes that exchange synchronized dala wilh
each other. One node (this Can be an 10 contro lleror an 10 device) assumes the role ofthe sync
mastcr, and the others are Ihe ,yoe slaves.

A sync domain can contain sevcral 10 systems,

but an [0 "y,tcm is always assigned entirely to
One single sync domain. Several sync domain,
can cx i,t on one Ethernet subnet
When an 10 system is configured. a specia l
sync domain is automatically created: the synedomain -default. All configured 10 systems. 10
controllers and 10 devices are first located in
\he sync domain syncdom";,,_d~!,,ull.
Create a new sync domain for IR"T communication, and transfer the 10 syste m (from the $)'ncdoma;n_dej"U/I) to the ncw sync domain. Not
all devices of an 10 system have 10 be synchronizcd. of in olher words. exchange data with
lRT communication. \Vhen configuring. the
unsynehronized nodes are first also managed in
the sync domain, at runtime only the synchronized nodes remain in the sync domain.
Cu nfigurlng 8 new .yne domain
1'n.-'rCquisite: You have configured the Elhernet
,ubnet with one Or more PROFThYET 10 systems. The nodes invo lved in lR"T communication must also SUp)"Klrt this function (Figure

20,)9).
To create a new sync domain. ,elect Ihe PROF!NET 10 ,ySlem in the Hardware Configurat ion
orlhe subnet;n the Network Configuralion. and
select EDIT ..... PROFrNET [0 ..... DOMAIN
MIINIIGIlMU-'T. "The "Domain Managcment"
window that appears shows the sync domain
syncdo",ain-defrwll aod all 10 systems on the
same suboet that arc located in the sync domain.
Create a neW sync domain with the "New" bUIton, a<sign a name, and select an 10 system
wilh the "Add" bulton. lfyou wam 10 add further 10 systems, repeal the procedure. 10 systems added to the newsync domain are no long-

er a component part of th~ ,yne domain syncdo",,,in -de!all 1r.

The 10 systems Oflhe sync domain and the bus

[lodes of the sel<>eled 10 system are di splayed.
Now select a device, Ihen "Propen ies Device",
and set the synchronization type (sync magter
or sync slave) and the RT class (RT. IR"Tflex or
!"TRtop) in the paramcters in the Properties w indow. Proceed appropriately with the other bus
nodes . Only onc device can be the sync master,
and all otber devices are sync slaves. A sync
domain may comain either devices oCthe classes IR"Tflex and RT, or devices of the classes
IRTlop and R"T.
Sele~t the send cycle time in the "Send cycle
ti m e" fie ld, and select the pro)"Klrlion o f bus
communication reserved for IRT with the 'Details" h emon . Confirm with "OK" 10 save the
,eltmgs.
Topology Editor
"The "Topology Editor allows cabling eonfiguringof devices on the fndu'itrial Ethernet su bne!.
The logical connections between the PROFINE"T de llices are configured with the configuring tools Hardware Configurat ion and Network
Configuration , "The "Topology Editor is used to
configure the physical conneClions wilh Ihc
properties Le nglh and Cable type for dctermining the si gnal runtimes , Use of the "Topology
Editor is a prerequisite for using IRT communicalion (isochronous real -time) .
The physical eOlUleClions belween devices on
the Ethernet subnel are point-to-point conn<>et;ons . "The eonne.;tions on a PN imerbce are
~al1ed portS. The Ethernet cable ~onnC<.1:i a device port with a pon On the partner devicc.
To enable several nodes to commu nicate with
e ach other. they are connected 10 a ,witch thai
has several connections (ports) and Ihm distribute, signals. There are a lso S7 devices fealOring
a PN interface thm has two or more ports sepa rated by an integral switch. With this interface
you can cable communication devices in a line ar bus topology wilhout eXlernal ports.
You can configure Ihe connection of two ports
w ith the Hardware Configuration. In thc configuration table, select the pon and Ihen EDn
..... OBJECT PRQPF;RTlF;S. On the ""To)"Kllogy" tab
i" Ihe Properties window, you can now dcter-

3I1

'-' __

rl,"_iO-----c~,.

'.1

mine .Ile p!ll'tn~..- port ~no;l cdi. the properties of

the cable.
A I'N inK..-face can h..,,, ~\'ernl por1~. Ifan nisting pOrt is DOl configured 8S such (does O(,)t
OPp"Dr H' a s ...brnodulc in the STEP 7 environ
ment) it is referred to '" a dei""ll pori. It i. Ib""
no. di.spl .. yed in the configuration t.. ble. and
any in.e~onn~etioru; are nut loaded on.o the
mooule . Default portS can oniybc handled "i.h
the T~~hnology Editor,
Before you call .he Topology Edi .or. lIse Ihe
Hardware O ,m figurdlion or the Netwo ..... Configur;l.Iinn .0 ~onfigure the communication
partners on the Etherne. subDn mclU(hng the
D..ceOSlll)' switches. In the Hard",,,", Conflll"ratioD. "p"n the S7 .t8lion with the 10 comrol

312

I..T.elect Ihe PRO FlNET 10 .ys.cm and .hen

~Iect EJ)rr ~ PROFP.-.' ET 10 --+ 'TCPOWGY.
In Ih" Ket worl< Conliaunllion . ..,It an Ethernet SUbncl and Ihen EDIT --+ PROFINET 10--+
TOI'QLOOY.

Th" wble .'Iew sho" he port pairs of all configured acti'e and passive compoDentS iD thc
in.erconnections table With fihCT selling . you
can dIsplay an pons. or only w inle~nnected
pons. or only the nOIlinterconnected ports
(figure 20 ,20) ,
You cnn Sel the connec li on to the partner port in
the objec t proptnifl o f llle pon. You can clear
<Iown aD in.enwnnlion hy ..-Iectina .he port
and riah1-clid,ing on D1SCO:>'N"Ecr PORT I:-.TER_
CO"'~~CTJO.'I

20 .4 Communication via Distribu!ed I/O

''''- 1-

- 1-- -1

--

... '---

- .-~ ~

Figu..., 20.20 Tabular and graphical vicw ,,1' the TopoloaY '[.d itor

If there is a conn~ction to the plant, you C8n use

lhe "Onl ine" button to cbeck whcth ~r the devic eS configured oilline are available and whJt
their statu~ is. Tbe comp~rison is base<l on thc
d evice name, the IP address and lhc device ru .
The data det.,nnine<l onlin., is displayed in the
co lumns "Statu," ,md " Attenuation value".
In tb~ /o:mphic view. the topology window di,play, the devices, their ports and the int.,r<:onncctioll. The eon ftgllr<:d devices ar~ eli'played
in the oftline view, and the acrnal devices a,'ail able in lhe plant arc display~-J in the online
view, provid ed the", is an onli"c connection to
t h~ plant.

To facilitate editing, you can "dose " the rcpresentatioll uf ~he stations, hid<: the thllffihnai 1an d
the ca.alog of the passive components ("Options" hutton and "Option,., tab), a"d cnla1"gc or
red""e the view by .crolling wi th the m idd le
mouse key.

1'0 i n!~'TC"n"cel two ports. select a port and dmg

a c onnection to the partner port while holding
down th (.' ri ght mouse key. You ca n disconne<..i
a port by , electing the connection wilh th e right
mOllS., key and then selecting DrSCOl'v"NH:r
PORl

Il,"TFllCO"N ~C TlON.

On the Offline/ O"line comparison tab, the topology ~onfigured otl:1ine is shown alongside
th" topology dCkrmin<:"d online tor compari!<On
purposes. Alllhe stalions and modules are displayed ...- i\h !hcir ports. rele"ant partner port
and cable dala. In this way, you can ch~'Ck the
configumtioll w ith the connections and cableS.
and supplement missing 'ystem compon~"ts if
Tcquired.
A ,election can be made with the relevam fi ller
se tting, . In the overviews the d~Knnined dift" .. enccs, c.g. the module" that the Topolog y
E dilor conld nOt assign, are highlighted ill color. You can now undertake manual assignment.

313

20 Main Pwgtarn
2 0.4.7 S}'ste m Blocks fo r Distribut ed lIO

t>

You c an use the following b locks in C<Jnj unction w ith the distribu ted lIO,

SFC 11 DP SYN_F R
Send SYNC/FREZ command s

t>

SFC 12 D- ACT - D P
Activate/deactivate distributed station

t>

SFC 13 D PNRM_ DG
Read diagnostics data from a DP standard
.Ian,

:>

SFC 14 DPRD_ DAT

Read use r data

t>

SFC I S DPWR DAT

>

FB 20 G ETIO

Rea d a ll input. of a station

> FB 2 1 SET IO
Write to all outputs of a station
0

FB 22 G ET IO]A
Read so me inputs of a station

FB 23 SET IO PA
Write to some outputs o f a stati on

SF B 75 SALRM
In itiate interrupt

SFC 7 DP] RAL

Initiate process interrupt

Tab le 20.9 Function block

",,,,",,,,,,c",,,.,,,,,,,

Writ~

t>

us er data

SFC 103 D P TOPOL

Determine bus topology

You c an ii nd the parame ters of tlle b locks in the

Table s 20.9 (FIl). 20 . I 0 (SFB) and 20 .11
(SFC).

the oii.Slti;'lI1ed L'O

in

th~ANY

20.4 Communication via

The loada!)le function blocks FB 10 to FB 23

have interface. compliant with PNO (PROFI I'IUS lntemational) and Can be u&.,d in conjunction with 01' standard ~l avC$ l1nd 10 devices .
You eRn fI"d the blockll in the Su",d"rd Library
~upplied with STEP 7 in llIe program Commll_

nicarion Bloc/es.
You Can usc all listw system blocks with
PROf"lBUS 01', me system functions SFC 12.
SFC 14 RJld SFC I ~ ~rc SUItable for PR.OFINET
10. In order to read diallOostics data with
pROFlNET 10, u,;c the SFB 54 RALRM .
With lJPVI mode sct and DP 5]avcs ..... hieh support Ihe DPVl functionality. you can USc other
syllem bloch [0 paramClenze Rnd read the
diagnoone data (S<."C Chapters 11 .9.3. "Reading
additional Interrupt Infonnation" al>(! 22.S.
"Para~terizing Modulc$'.

t' 8 20

I/O

The d e$tination area specified with the IN ,

PUTS parameter must hi: e~actly the sa~
lenQ:th as th e contlgured length of the input area
rend that is also output wilh the LEN par..metcr.
FB 21 SETIO
' .... rl l., 10 aU OUlpUl S ofa statio"
FB 21 SETIO uses SFC IS DPWR O AT \.0
con>1stcndy write all outpUt data or all data of
an OUtput area ofa Dr standard slave or an 10
device in the ease of modular ~tation". The
nallt-hand word of the ID parameter contain .
the sIan address Of lhc output Hrc" to be written

w.
The source area specified with the OlITPUTS
parameter mUSI be exactly the same lengl~ all
me ~onfigure<l length or the OUtpul area to be
wnnen 10. This is why infonnat;on in the LION
parameter is im::k"ant.

G~:TIO

Read _II Inputs of a 11>I1Ion

FB 10 G ETIO USeS SFC 14 DPRD OAT to
eomistemly read all input dRtB ofa DP standard
slave or an 10 device or.lI dala of an input area
in the c ase of modular S,,"lions. The right_hand
word orlbe ID parameter contains me tan addrc:lS of the input ~8 \.0 be read.
T.hl~

Oi~lribu[ffi

10.10

Par.tm~'"

Mtlle SFB 75 SALRM

FH 22 GETIO pA
Read ~Om~ Input. of a .Iallon
FB 21 GEnO~PA usc. SFC HI UBLKM OV to
consiSM1I\Y read some or the input data or
SOIne of the data of an inpul area of a DP mlDdud slave or an 10 dcvice in thc c~ ofmodular $tal;onS. The righI_hand word o f the ID pa-

'T~II>I<

lO.t1 Parameters

fDl" SFC.

U..,d Refcrrnce 'he n;Jtribu,~d LO~~~~~=========

to

.,
,,

.,

,.
rqIC.,....

'"

rameter contains thl: start addrus "f the inpUt

S FB ?S SAt.R."

area. the OFF SET parametC'f contain$ the num-

InItial(! l !lt~rr u~t

ber of tbe first byte to be read , lIOd the LEN parametcrcontainsthe nUIl'1bcr of byte,
The input bytes In be read m"-~I be addrcsSw. in
the pro<:e$s image of lhe input in order 10 usc
the FB 22 GETlO_PA. Ifpossib1c. it is prtfmt
ble 10 usc a partial process image. Plea~ CTlsure
that the OFFSET lUld LEN paramclcn do nol
violate any bound~ries with n~illhboring d~ta of
otber ~lations.

Irtbe de~tinallon ana !!pCCified by 1M INPUTS

parameter i. smDlIer than tbe input are~ ~ad.
the fu"ctiononly transfers a, many bytes as can
be "'TitleD to the d~SlinatiOD ar\:a. Ifthe destination arca is IUllcr, only the fi""t LE:>' hies of
the .rea are wrinen to. In bOlb cases, no error is
indicated on tbe F.RROR pnl"ll.metn ERROR
"nly ha~ signal 51ate .. ," if an error i< TCp<lrted
whcn calling SFC SI BLKMOV
FB l J SETIO]A
Wrtl~ so me o ut pu ts to . J1 al lo u

FB 23 ScIlO]A uscsSFC gl UBLKMOV 10

consi~t~!\!ly write sOme of the Output data of an
output area of a OP st.andard slave or an 10 <leviceor some oflhe data of an uutput area in the
ca~ of modular slations. The right_hand word
oflhe to paramelercontains the start addr"~ of
the "1I1p"t a....,a. the OFFSET parameter contains the oumber of the Ii""t byte to be written,
and the L8" paramet...- COIItains the num~ of
bytes,
The Olltput byt~' to be wriucn must be ad_
dr<oss<--d in the proce.. image of the outpUt in Ofder 10 uSC the FB 23 SETIO_I'A. If possible. it
i~ p~f.-rable to USe a partial proc"~ i ma~e.
Please enSlll"e that the OFFSET and LE!-< ps_
rametcn do not violate any boundarie; with
neighboring mota ur otl\.er stltiOfu.
If tl\.e SDuJ'l:e Bru specified by me OUTPUTS
parameler is smaller than tbe Output =~ 10 be
written. the function only tran.fer. as many
bytes 15 the source...-ea comaiDs. If the source
arca is larger. only the first LJ.N b}1eS """ tran5_
fem:d. In both cases. "" error is indicated 00 'he
ERROR parame!"". ERROR only has ~ignal
stale "I" if an errw i~ rep<lrtw when calling
SFC gl BLKMOV.

With SFB 7S SALR.M. you ,n;tiale. diagnostic

intcnupl or procc-s. inlerrupt in the or masle-r
.lioeiated with an ;ntellil!~nt slnve from the
USI:r program of that slave. Vou deline the type
ofintemJPI U5in~ the ATYPE parameter.
The interrupt requeSI is initiated wilh REQ "1", the DONE, BUSV. ERROR and STATUS

par" rneters indicate the job statuS. The job is

complete (BUSY - 'O) ....ben Ihe interrupt OB
ill IlK DP m.a~tc:-r bas bceo e"calted.
The transfer mem"ry between the DP master
and tilt- intelli&ent DP slb,e can be divided into
llldi"dual address llTCas that represent individ_
ual modules from the viewpoint of the maSter
CPO. Yoo can initiate an imenupl;n the ma~ler
for each of these addr~S9 areas ("""irmaI" mooules). Vou specify the address area with the ID
pardmetcr which you o<:cupy ",ilh a u...- data
address from the viewpoint of the sl ave C I'U.
Bit 15 contains the 110 identificut i",,: "0" corre'ponds 10 an input address. "I" to an OOtput
address. The Man mformation of the intenupt
OB then OOtItains the IMkIresses of the module'" initintinll Ihe interrupt fr<)!\1lhe viewpOint
ufthe rnm,tet CPU.

Use the AI\lfO paramel<:T to \J1Inlfcr supplementary interrupt information which you ha,'e
Ii( fined and which caD b<: evalnaled in the interNp! 09 of the master CPU. The reference to
Ai'-l'O i, Il.~an A/'."Y poi-ntertoa data arcll. The
length orlhe sent informalion is defined by the
LEN p"'lImcter and by the area lenllth nf the
AXY poimer (the shorter length i~ de<:i~ive).
The first 4 bytcs ~ displ.yed in the start information of the interrupt OB in the ma~tC'f CPU in
byte,; ~ to II (the vatiabk OHxx_POr~T_
ADDR for process interrupts, lhe data record
DS 0 r"r the dillgno5lic imerrupt). The complete supplementary interrupt infonnation ClIn
be read in the master CPU using SF IJ S4
RALRM.
S f C 7 DP _PRAL
Ini tiat e a prucc.. ln ttrrupt
With SFC 7 OP_PRAL. you initiate a pro<.:eu
inrerrupl in tbe OP rna",r associated with an

20 Main Program
intelligent slave from the ">SCI" program oflhat
slave.
At the paNimeter AL_INFO you transfcr Bn
interrupl 10 defined by you that tS traIlsfeITed to
the Slart information of the int~rrupt OB called
in the 01' master (variable OB",,_pOI}/T_
AOO R). The imenup. request is initia.ed with
REQ _ "I"; .he paramcll;~ RET VAL lind
BUS Y indica ., the job status. The job is complete whe n the interrupl 08 in the OP mllstcr
has been e xe.:uted.
The transfer memory heTween the DI' master
and the intelligent 01' sl.,e can he di\"ided intO
indi\"id ual add...,ss areas that represem individual modu les from the vie ...."J>Oim of the master
CI'U. The lowes t address of an address """a is

taken R~ Ihe mooule starting a ddre ... You can

inili ate a process intemlpt in the maSter for
each of thesc address arell$ (""virtua.l"" modules).
You specify an address ~a at SFC 7 with tbe
parameters 1010 and LAO DR from the v,ew_
point o f the slave CPU (the UO ID and the Startmg address of the slave side). The stan information of the imerrupt 08 then contains the
addresJCS of the ""module" jnitiatina the imerrupl from the viewpomt of me master CPt:.

SfC 11 DfSYN_ FR
Sy;o;C/t""REEZE comm a nd.

~nd

With SFC 11 DPSYN_FR, you srnd the commands SYNC, UNSYNC, FREEZE and
UNF REEZE to a SYNC/fREEZE i'OOp that
yOll have configllred with the Hardwa~ Configuration. The SE!'-.'D is initiated wim REQ " I " and i$ completed when BUSY - '-0- is signaled,
In the paramet ~r GROUP ncb group occupies
one bi t (fro m bit 0 - group I to b it 7 -afOUp 8).
Tbe commands in the parameter MODE are
also organized by bit:
<> UNFREEZE. ifbi! 2 - "I"
t>

FR EEZE, if b it 3 - 'T'

t>

UNSYNC,ifbit4-"\"

t>

SYNC, ifbiI5 - ~I"

In th is manner you can use just one call to .send

5e veral commands c,'en to Kveral groups.

In this w.). SYNC mode and F REEZE mode

On !he OP slaves are rUSt switched off. The
inputs of the DP slaves an. scanned in $CqUence
by the OP master and the outputs of tbe O P
slave! are modified: tbe DP .bves pa.. the
receive<! output signals immediatciy \0 the outputtenoinals.
If you Want to ""free~e" the input signals of se\"eral DP slaves at a specific time, you output tbe
command fREEZ E to the r~levant group . The
input siana!.s then read in sc-quence by the DP
master have the sianal states they bad when
frozen'. These input signals ""Iain their value
until you OUtput another FREEZE command to
cause the DP slaves to read in and hold tbe current input signals, OT until you switch the OP
daves back to the "nonna]"" mode with the
UNFREEZE command.
If you want to outpUt tbe output sianals of K " el1l1 DP sluves ")"Dcbronously at. s~cific time.
lust Output the SYK"C command to the ...,levant
group. n,C addreued OP slaves then hold the
current signals at the output terminals. Now
you can u-ansfer t~ desired signal statt'S to the
DP sla'cs. Fonm.in~ th U1Ulsfc-r. you output
the SYNC eommand I,ain; thi.'< cauRS the O P
sJa,'cs to switch the receIved outpUt signals
sin\\I\taoeously through to the outpul Ic n ninals.
The accessed OP slaVe! then hold the signals at
.he outpUt telIDmal. until you switch through
the ncw output signals " ..ith a neW SYNC 00I!1mand. 01" until you switcb the OP sllves back m
meLr "normal" mode with the UNSY"NC command.

S FC 12 D_ACT_ DP
Act h 'a tud ea ct! \"Ile d lstrlbut.. d UlOlLo n
SfC 11 O_ACT_DP deacli'll.tes and activates
o f the distributed UO and allow. sc anning of the deactivated or activated StatuS. A
distributed station can be a OP sl,,'e or an 10
device.
~talions

SFC 12 0 _ACT_ DP;I called in the cyclic prognl1n: callin g in the !"estLUt TOutme is not suppnMcd. The SFC operateS in asyn~hronous
mode. i.e. processina of a job can ext~Dd over
sC\eral program cycles. A "1'" at tbe REQ
parameter stlllU an acttvation or duCti~1ItiOD
job. As loug as the B1.:SY pammeter is '"I", ,be

20.4 Communicatioo via o;.lributed ItO

par~mCler must remain 'T', The job bas

finished if BUSY - "0".

ferred and th. relC'.ant ove.t10w bit iltheo set

After deactivation. ~ confii/ured (and exi.tin!':)

station is no longcr addrened by the DP master
or the 10 controller. The output terminals of dcactivat~"<i outpul module$ callY
Of a substitute yalue. The process i.mag< of the input> of
de,Clh"Dted input modules i, SCI 10 .-o~.

The parameter RECORD wriles to the area in

",hich th. read dala are stor.d, Variables of dala
lype ARRAY and STRUCT or an AXY pointer
of datil type B'YTE (e.g. PI:'DBzl)...
BXy.xBYTEnnn) are permissible lIS actual
panmetcn.

A dCHcthlited .lave can be: lIlken otT th~ bus

Plea.e note !lUll the SFC 13 OPMRI\CDG i. an

a.ynch.ronou. syslem functi(m. It must be proceilsed unlll the BUSY parameter liillal.. the
,Iatu. '-0". The SFS 54 RALRM is avai lable
with lW'wer CPCs whi ch providel the data in
synchronous mode. i.e, inunediRtdy following

REQ
~en

without an error mC'SSage: h ""ill not ~ reported

as faulty or mis:>;ng. C a lls of tile asynchronous
error organization blocks OB 85 (program exe_
cution error.;, when the u~c.,. data of the d~aC1i
vated slave IITC located in an automatically
updated process image) and 08 86 (stanon failUfe) ..sc. After deacnv,tion, you must no
longer .~e .. the DP ,I","e from the program,
sin<:c direct access will lead to an LO access
=or with e,lIing of the OB 122 or. when reading a dutllwcoro with SFC 59 RD _REC or SFB
52 RDREC, the OP slave,. S!iIlaled !U being
non,existent.
With SfC 11 D_ACT_DP. ~'ou reac tivate a
deactivatw OP slave. The DP slave is configured and pammeierized by the DP mllSlC'I"Of 10
controller in the same way as during .. slatioo
l'CitoU.. On :octi"nion. the .syncbronou. error
OBs 85 llIld 86 are nOi ~ed, [fthe panunelC1"
BUSY"" ",gnal Slale '-0.' follo"'inl! '~ti\lI_
lion. the OP ~Ia,e can be accened from the user
progrum.
With a cold restan or wano reSl~n. the CPU',
opetllling sySlem automatically ICti,'ales the
deactivated DP slave. An S7-300-C PU waits
with stan up until all nalions.u. acti'~lcd. An
S7-400 CPU starl!i up and repons I/O ac~cu
errors until the stations ltave been &i'lIIO<!.
Wil\! a bot restart. the: DP slave stalUs is
retainO<!.

the call.

S FC 14 DPR D_DAT
Read use r dala
SFC 14 DPRD _OAT reads consistent u_ dala
with a le1li1h of 3 bytes or greater titan 4 byteS
from a DP slav~ or an 10 devicc. You specify
the l~ni!h of th. data consistency when ),ou
pa1'1lmeterize Ih. 'Iation,
Th~

panlmeler LADDR contains tbe module

itarring address of the user data (input area) .

The paraaN:ltt RECORD "'Tltes to the area in
"hich the =d data arc ,~, Variables of data
type ARRAY and STRUCT or an AI'Y poinleT
of data type BYTE are permissible as actual
parameters (e.j:. P>10BzOnXy.xBYTEnnn).

SFC IS OP\VR_DAT
\\'rll",

u~r

dala

SFC 15 DPWR_OAT ",riICS COD3ist~""1 user

data with. Itflgth of .3 bytes or j:ft"alCr than 4
bytes to a DP sla\"t oran 10 devi<;c. You specify
the lenath of the data consisICncy whm you
panmetenze the station.

SFC 13 DPI\IR:\! DC
Read dlagno. tlc data

Th. panuneter LADDR comaills the modul e

~taning add~ss of the uscr data (outpul area).

SFC 13 DP),IRM_DG read~ diagnostk data

from Ii OP slave. The u.ad procectuu. is inilialed
with REQ - "I". and is tel1llioaled ... hen BUSY
~ '-0.' is returned. Fuoction Hlue RET_VAL

""hlcb the u.ad data are 'Iored. Vllriabln of data

type ARRAY and STRUCT or an ANY pointer

tben cOlltains the number of bytes read.

OI:po:ndi"il on the alave, diBl,'nO$tiC data m.1.y
compti.e from 6 10 240 byte . Iftheu. are lDOfe
than 240 bytcs, the I1nt 240 b~'es are tr1UlS-

in the data.

The parameter RECORD writes to the area in

of dall type BYTE are perrni$Sible lIS acOlal
parameters (e.g. f'liDBzDBXy.lIBYTEnnn).
If pmpheral OUtput. (PQ) arc addresocd ""hose
addresses a~ in the process imalle of the oulputs (rIQ), the process image is tracked as with

20 Main Program

the transfer instruction (STL) or the MOVE box

(LAD, fBD),
SFC 103 DP _TOPOL
Determine bus topology
SfC 103 DP_TOPOL uses diagnostics r~pc" t
erg 10 determin e Ihe bus lopo logy of the P I'
ma'l~r system whm ~ ID you spec ify in the D P_
TO panuneter. Octenninalion IS tri ggered by
REQ - "1" and has beeu comp lelM when
B U SY - "0". You can abort dcte mtination of
the topology usin g R - " 1'".
If an CITor wh'ch prevents d et Mminati on orlne

bu.. topology is signaled b y a diagnostics

repealer. it is a shown in the D PR aIld OrRl
parameters. If se ve ral diagnostics repeater:;; sig_
na! errors, the error message n f lhe fma oue is
displayed. and the complete di agnOSlk s infor_
mation can be read with SFC 13 D PN R.\1 DG
The e rror infonnation in the D PR! parameter i;;
differentiated between lemponuy and p " =ncnl faults. Temporary fau lts . such as a 100,,,
contact, may b c difficult to identify and m ay
disappear nn th eir own. You must climir.a,,,
permanent faults before you "a li lhe SFC 103
OP_TOPOL a gain to detcnnmc the topo logy.

5tMATIC 51.t8lioo
Glbal data table

:. FI : I

prog'''''' i~ ..... CP1J

u.."

CycIU: "...

~ ra t l ","

tI>e <1<1'" ,.,.Ithoot 8

:J

20.5,1 Fundamentals
Global data communication (GO communi cation) i, a co mmunications s t t'\i cc integrated
ioto Ihe operating system of the CPU and used
for exchanging small volumes ofnon-time-eritkal dala via the MPJ bus. The lnIn, ferab l" glo
bal data include
t>

Input. and outputs (proc ess im ages)

t>

Memory hilS

t>

Data in data blocks

> Timer aod coun ter values a s data to be

5tMATtC 51 st.atlon

oe"

Cydl~ :

.,.

-:j

.. .. =

60161

GloOooI

-"""'.,"

..

..

Subn

Ftgvn lO.21 Global Data Com,mmica,ion

,~nt.

<I.'. tab<o

':;;::,.' _._." : I tI

PfOI1f3rt'1

\IS<t<" ~O\j,am

20.5 Gl obal Data Comm unication

..,""'m trarlr..fS

u .~,

ev"", trill'P _ ' T,IO!lm., ,.,."" S FC _

in

--

,eo

After cailmg lhe SFC 103 OP _TOPO L, the

det.tmmed data are ava ilab le on the diagnostics rcpealer and Can be read with !he SFC 59
RD REC or SFB 52 RDREC. The data compris~ the IOpology of the bu s , egment (nodes
and c able lengths), the contents of the segment
diagnoslic' b UITer (last ten events w ith error
in fonnat ion , location and cause) and Ihe ,ta lis_
tics data (information on ' he quality o f the bu,
sy stem)

.,.

l..
_ $," 11"_

-""

n,. o.,.",tinQ . y...m "'001.<$

do", ",1U""" U_

Pf'O\Iram

.lo----j

20 .5 Global Data
It is a requirement that the CPUs atc networked

wgether via the MPI interface or connected via

th e K bus as in the 57-400 mouDling rack. All
CPUs roust ex;st ;n tbe Same STEP 7 project in
order 10 "" able to configure GD comrnUIlica lion.
The cyclic GD communication ;;ervice does not
rcqui,.., an op~raling ~ystem : there are system
functions avaibble for e,'ent-dri"cn GD communication on the 57-400.
Please nole that a receiver CPU does not
acknowledge ,..,ceip! of global data. The sender
the,..,fore docs not receive any ",spons~ to tdl it
if a recei"cr has received data and if so. which
one . However. you Can screen the communication status between two CPCs "' well as Ihe
overall status of all GO circles ofa CPU.
Sending and ,..,ceiving global data is controlled
with what arc known as scan rates. The,. specify the num""r of (user program) cycles after
which thc CPU sends or receives the data.
Sending and receiving takes place synchronously betwe<cn the sender and the receiver at
the cycle conllo1 point in each casco i.e. following cyclic program e"ccution and ""fore a new
program cycle begins (like process image
updating. fOf c"ample).

GO drcl e

The CPUs that ."change a shared GO packet

form a GO circlc. A GO circlc can"" any of the
following
:>

The one-way connection o f a CPU that

scnds a GO packet to several other CPUs
that tben receive that packet.

[>

The two-way cotulcction bem'cen two

CPUs wbere each oflhe two CPUs can send
a GO packet 10 the other.

[>

The f'xo_way connection between three

CPUs where each of the three CPUs can
send one GO packet to the other m'o CPUs
(S7-400 CPUs only).

Up to l~ CPUs can exchange data with each

other in one GD circle. One CPU can also
beloog 10 several GD ~irc1es. See Table 20.12
for the resources of each ind ividual CPU here.

GD packet
A GO packet comprises Ihe pach1 hca<k-r and
one ot more gl obal data elements (GD elements):
[>

:>
[>

:>
[>

Data is e"changed in the form of data packets

(GO packetS) between CPU. grouped into GO
cirde"

:>

Packel header (8 bytes)

ID of I"GD element (2 bytes)
User data of I" GO clement (x bytes)
ID of2 nd GD clement (2 bytes)
User data 0[2 00 GD element (x bytes)
etc .

Each GD element consists of2 bytes of de scription and the a ctual net data. 3 bytes are required

Table 20. t 2 CPU Resource, for Global Data COIIlmun;ca"on

CPU 312
CPU 313

CPU 31-1

Comm uni~alion

20 Mllin Program
in the GD packet \0 tran8f~r B m~mory byte. 4
bytes B' requi,d for B memory word, and 6
bytes for a memory doubleword . A Boolean
variable o<oeupi~s I byte of net dala; it therefo~
rcqui,s the same space as a byte+sized "arlttble. Timer and counter valuei wltb 2 bytcs
eacb occupy 4 bytes each in the GD packet.
A G O clement can .lso be an address arca.
MB 0:15, fo r example. rt'Jlrellents the a,a
from memo ry byte MB 0 to MB 15, and
D B20.DBW I4:8 represents the data area
located in DB 20 lbat .tart!! from data word
DIlW 14 and comprises 8 data words.
The maximum .ize o f a G O packet is 32 byte~
on lite S7-300 and 64 bytes on the S7-400. TI:.r
maximum nwnbcr of net data byte, per packet
is reacbed with tlte transfer of on 1)' one GO element that cODlaifl!l up to 22 bytes on the S7-300
and up 10 54 byte!! on the S7-400.
Oat.

con.j.t~ncy

Tile data consistenc y covers one GO elem ent. If

a GO clement overwrites a C PU-specific vari able, the areas specified in Table 20.12 apply
l f a GO clement is grelter than the length oftbe
dat. cOllsistcncy, blocks with consistent data of

i' ..~----------- Up

the 'levant length are formed, starting "ith the

first byte.
lO.!'i.2 CO llfi gurini GO CO OlmuniutiOIl

Requi rement.
You must bave created a project. th".,.., must M
/I.I PI subneM'ork IVlilable and you must
ha~e configured the S7 st,tiOttll. The CPu. Bt
least. must be a vailable in the stations. Under
the "l'Topertie," b ulton of the MPI interface. on
the "General"' tab of the properties window of
t~e CPU (double-di ck on th e CPU line in the
Hardware Configuration or o n the line Wilh the
MPI interface submodul c), you can ,et the MP[
Id<ln:$, and select the MP[ subnetwork with
which rhe CPU is COlIDected.
811

Gl obal da t. tlIble
You configure G O cOlDmUllicatioll by tillillK
ou t a table. With the icon for the MPI subnct"W ork scl~ ct~d in thc SIM AT! C Manager or in
t~e Network Conflgurotlon. you can call up an
emplY table witb OPT10-';S ...... DEFL'lE GLOBAL
OATA. Select the 51allon in the left half of tbc
project selcctioll window that rhen opens. alld

to 15 CPU," ------------,~

."
GO circle 1

GO circle 2

GO cirdo 3

GO cItde 4

Hp&Wlll
,,

Hp"cke!l ~

~pacl<.t 2H

,,
,
,
Hp~tr-:

"'Ku re 10.12 Example ofOD C;n; leo

"

'.

p,"ek6t ' I
..

~'
i

i.

Ipacket3H

,,

l O.S Global nala Communicalion

scl~el Ih~ CPU in Ihe righl half. This CPU is

Ilcccpled imo the g lobal data tDble with OK.
PrO<.:~~d

in exactly the same way with the other

CPU~ panicipaling in GD corntn ...nkation. A
global duta table can contain up to I S CPU col-

umM.
To config ......., data transfer octwecn CPUs.
scl~cI llIe first line under Ibe send CPU and
sp<:<.:i fy the add",,!! .... hose value is to be tranSfcm:d (terminate wllh RETUR:,").

GO 10

fQllowing error-free compiling, ST EP 7 completes the "G D I D" ~Qlumn. The GO ID shows
you bo" Ihc transferred dOli arc strucrured into
GO circles. GO ,,""ckets and GO clem,'nts. For
example. the GO ro "GO 2.1.3" carrcsponds '0
GO cir<:le 2. GO packet 1. GO clemcnt 3. You
c;[.ll; llIen find the rcsourc~ assiaruDenl (num"""
of ( ;0 cireles) per CPU;n the CPU column of
the global data table.

GO stat u)

Wilh EDrr --lo SE:-.IDER., you dcflTc Ihis value as

Ihe value to he .~nt. indicated by a p-rcfixed
cllaracler ..",. and sh<1ding. In tbe .arne line
under ite<:eiverCPU, you enler Ihe.t~ thai
is 10 accept th'" value (the propcny Mitecei"",'"
is sel as <kfauh). You 1IlII)' 115., timer and
coumer (unclions ooly as sen<.krs; !he ""eelver
ml1St be an add""'. o f word wtdth fo.-ueh timer
or counter function.

compiling. you can enter the

for the communication ~talU. into the
global data table with VIEw ..... GO STATUS.
The o,en.U stalUs (GST) shows Ihc .tatu.~ of all
conununicatioIL> COIDlC<'tions in Ibe table. The
!talUS (GDS) shows the St:alu~ ofa communications connection (a mm~milled G O packet).
The ,latus is shown in a dcubleword ;n each

A line Can contain several r:ei" cr< but only

one sender (Tablc 20.13). After filling Ihi' in.
you select GO TAilU --lo CO~lPn.L

SCln fMC,

.-. ner compi ling (phase I J, Ihe system data cn:ated are suffieienl for global data communication. If you also configure the GO Status (Ihe
. tallU o fthc GD connecl;e>n) nnd thc scan rates,
you must then compile the GD tDble for a ,ec_
ond lime .

Follo" i" a
addl"C'~"'s

~ a se.

The GD eomrnunicalion Krvice ....,qu i",s a significant ponion of execu tion I;me in the C PU
opC1"Bting .y"em and demands transm,ssion
lime on the MPI bus. To keep this "communica\;OII!IIOIId" 10 a minimum, if is ]IOIIsible to <peeifY I "SCaD ,,!.tc. A &can rate specifies the nul1\ber of pt"Oaram cycle" after which the data (or
mQl"~ pre<: i~e1y. a GO pack\<t) are 10 be scnl or
received.

Table l O.13 J:;urople of a GO Tobie ..1m Status .nd S"", R.,."

323

20 Main Propm
S incc !he d aLa are DOl updated in ." cry pTQjp1UI1
cyd c Wilh a ,c;:an rat~, you ~houLd a~'oid ,ending time-c;:ri(ic;:al data via this form of~ommuni
cPtion.
A fler the fir~t (error-frce) compilation. you elln
use V IUW ..... SCAN RA TFS (0 define Ihe scali
fIIles (SR.) yourse lf for each (iD packel and
each CPU. The scan r~t<: is set as .Iandard in
such a way that with an "emp ly" CPU (110 user
p rogram) the 01) packets are sent and r<;<;eived
approJl:imalclyevcry 10 m...lfa user program is
then loaded. the time interval increases.

Yo u <;Qn elUer the can rates in the area between

I IltId 25S. !'Iease oote. that as Ihe scan mIn
d ecreasc. the oommunicalions load On the C !'U
in<;rea~. To keep the communications load
with in tolerable limits. SCt the scan ..... te in the
send C !'U in such a waythallhe product of scan
nlle !lnd cycle time on Ihe S1-3OO is jOruterthan
60 ms Knd vn thc S1-400 grealer than 10 tnl. In
the receive CPU. thi.~ prod""t m ust be les~ than
tb l'l in the 5end CP U to avoid the los! of nlly
( llJ radets.
Wilh scan rate O. you

~witch

off data ellchpnllc

OrlM rel<:vant GD packet if yo" only want to

" .",)(] Of"

rcccivc it evenl-driven with SFCs.

AlleT eonfigurini the GO .ta~ tmd the ""an

t"8lCS. you must compile thc GO table for a seco nd time. Then STEP 1 enters the compIled
<.bla in theSystctn data object. GO cornmllDie~
tion becom Cl< e ffective wh~"I\ you lran ~fcr the:
GD table to the coone<:ted CPU. wilh PLC -+

20.S.3 System F.. .. ct loIlJ ror

GD Communicatio ..
In 57 -400 S)St~-m5. you can al$O eontrol G D
commuoication in you r proanun. Ad ditionally
o r alternatively 10 the ,yclic tran~fer o f global
data, you Can se nd 01" receive a GO r ac ket wi lh
the following SFC s:
t>

S FC 60 GD_SNO
Send GO packet

t>

SFC 61 GO RCV
Re<:eiYe GO pac ket

The paramete", for th~~ S FCs are li~ted in

Tahle 20.14. The pn:~uisite for the usc o f
the.e SFCs i5 a con fi~ured global data table.
After compiling Ihi~ tPble, STEP 7 ~ho"" you..
in 'he '"Gn identifier" coluntll. the numbers o f
Ihe GO cirele, and Gn P'lckets " 'hk h you need
fOT panun<;ler a",i8mn~Dts.
SFC 60 GD_S:-m COler! Ih c GD p~ckcI ; n tbc
$ygt~m m emory of Ihe CPU Bnd initi"te~ tranSfer; SFC 61 GO_ReV felc hes the GO packet
from tbe system memory. Ir .. Ij<;lIn rate greater
than 0 has b~cn specified for the GO packet in
the GD table . cyclic trarufer MI"" tllkcs placc.

If you wanlta eusuTe data consistency for the

entire G D packet when tnilnsft:ning wim SFCs
60 and 61 you must disable or delay higher_pri_
ority intCTIUpt, and asynchronouJ erro,.,. o n
both the Send and Receive side during processing of SFC 60 o r SFC 6( .

noWl'1.0AlJ TO '-10l.llJLIO.

00 commtmi calion a lso becom~s eft\~live

when Ih e Sy#em Jaw obj~cl . t:hat contain s Kit
hardware ~ellin85 and par~meter setl"I&~. i~
tralllferred.

324

The SfCs n.~d not be called in pair,: "m illed"

oper"tion is &1"" po,s ible. f or e ~~mp1c. y'm c an
Uje SfC 60 GD_SND 10 have cvent-dri "cn
lrIIllsmisston of GO packet s but tben receive
cyclically.

20, 6 S7 Basic Comm uni~at;on

20.6 S7 Basic Communication

20.6.1 Station- i oternal S7 Ba,ie
C OO"" u" i ca thm
Fundamental.
\Vi~h 8tati o,, int~mal S7 bas ic communication.
you can exchange data bClVI"ecn programmable
modules with in a SrMAllC station, The eomm unication. fu nctions requir~d her~ nr~ SFCs in
the o!><,rating 'yst~m of me CP U. Thes~ S FC <
eslablish the commwl ication connection<; them_
sdve<. if n""""ary. For this reason, these sla'
tion-internal connec tions are nO! <:l>nfigun:d , in
the ~Ot1n""lion table (, 'CommWlication via 000 oonfigurffi OOllllCC"liOru, ', SFC communication),

Station-internal S 7 bH ic comm un ication can

tak~ p lace. fo r ~ "arnpl e, pamll~ 110 cy clic data
exchange via PKOI' I I>U S IW between the rn ft,tCT C PU and the slave CPU, w ith data transfer
being evenHiri \ '~n (F ig\l rc 20 .23).
tb~

A ddre ..inl:

nod,-. <onntio n,

Nodc identification is deri,,~d from the L O

addrc8<: at the L AD DR parameter, you 5!><,cify
the moduk , tar\ing addre ss and at !.h~ IOID
param eter, you s!><,cify wh~ther thi, add,~ s> is
in the input ar ea or the output area .
Th ese system functioru; ~ slablish the n~ c essal')'
corrununication conncctions dynamically and
they clear the <:ullllc<:tiuns down ag~ i n follow-

51MATIC 57 .1alion
u .....

20.23

St a'ion - l n ' ~TIlal

Yo u can use one syst ~m fun ctiun for different

communication eonnec ti(ln' by modifying: the
block r arameters at runtime. An SFC cannot
interrupt it,d. A program ,celion in which on~
of (h cs~ SFC. is " <;e<.\ can on ly be modified in
the STOP moM: following this. a cold or wa,m
restan m " ' tthcn be exccutc<.\ ,
U s~r

dNta . duta consistenc),

These SFC , , ran8fcr u p to 76 byte, as \lSer data .

Re~ardlc >s ofthe direction oClran . fer. the op<:ratiJ:lg sysl"m of a CP U arranges the u ser data in
b l<xks that are consi, tenl within thcm8e1ves.
The length of cOllsistent tran "f~-rred data i. a
C PU -,peci fic , an ab le. If two CPU, exchange
data. tile block size of the "'passive"' CPU is
d ecisive fo r dam coru; i,tcn~y,
C onll l;::u d n g st ation-infernal S7
b :ts!c communicatlon
Sta tion-internal S 7 ba sic cornmuni callon is a
sp ccial ~a,c ;n !.h at it n:qui res no con ljguring
,;nce data tra nsf~r i< handled via d ynamic connection<, You 8i mply w;~ an ~x i sting T'R O F1 _

51MATIC 57 slillo n
M"d'.l~~

in ll><t CPU

On .. w~y C1>nrMc'i<>n:
In \he ~ _
. fnm' fo, is with
SFC C<II I in u,"" p<09<~ m

Fi~u""

ing comp letion of the j ob (pwgro", mable) , If a

co" nc.:tion buildup CStl1\ot be executed due!o
lack o f resom'ces e ith er in the ,ending device or
in tk r~""ci vin gc dcvi <:(.' . "Temporal')' lack of
rcsourc ~ s"' is , isna]ed. T ron <fe r m u, t t~ cn be
reinitiate<:l. There can only be onC conn""ti on
bet"'cen two corrununi<:ation partners in ~ach
direc tion ,

O_ w~y

In II",

'ys"'~

.,

.,.",.,..,Uon:

~ ng

>tatic<\. the "P<""t;,..

f1otohoo. 0' write. """ d ota

.:J

S7 Basic Cmnmu:::ica<ioo

325

20 Main Program
Tobie 20. 1~ SFC PanMC,e" for Slati<m_ln1<.>rnaJ S7 Ha.ic Communica1ion

,.

aus .ubnerworJ,; or you ereale one either in Ihc

S IMATIC Manager (select thc Project objcct
and then INSERT -4 SUfI'llTWORK ...... PROF!BUS) or in the Nctwo,\': Configuration (see
Chapter 2.4, ''Configuring the Nemork").
Rumple: you have confil!:urcd distributed \;0
with a CPU JI52[)P as maSter. Vou usc
anotheeCrU 31 S-2DP as an "iotelligeot- sl.,e.
You can now use station-inlemal S7 basic com
mun ication from both controllers to read ""d
write data.
20.6.2 System F u nctIons fo r Shll ion . [ntcr.
nal S7 Ba~lc Co m m unicatIon
The following sy~ICnt funclions handle data
transfers between two CPL"s in the .ame Sill
tion:

S FC 72 I_GET
Read data
SFC 73 I PUT
Write datn
SFC 74 I_ABORT
Di.connecl

The parameters for thcse SFCi arc listed in

Table 20.15.

s.c n

t _G ET
Itu.d data

A job is initiated wilh REQ " "1- and BUSY "

"0" (Ii,.;t call"). While Ihe job is in progress.

326

BUS Y is set to '"j Changes to Ihe REO

panunctcr no longC!" have any e!fccl. When Ihe
job is completed, BUSY is reset to '0". tfREQ
is still "1 "", the job is immedi"tely resta rted .

When the read procedure has bc<:n initialed, the

o)Wrating system in Ihc panner CPU assembles
and .eods !he requested data. An SFC cnll
moosfers the Recc"'e dalll to the destinal ioo
area. RET_ VAL then ihows the number of
bytes transferred.

If CONT ;s .. 0. thc conmtuoicalion link is

broken . If CONT is .. ''1'', the link is mn ;n
tained. The data are al$O r~ad whcn the comm u
nication paroler is in STor mode.
lbe RD and VAR_ADDR parameters describe
Ihe area from which the dalll to be ltallsferred
11K to be r.."d or to which the receive daJa are 10
be wrinen. Actual pIIrllmeters may b<:
addresses. ,-ariahles Or dalD &",a5 add,..,s~ed
wi,h an Ar-'Y pointer. The Send and Reccive
data arc not checked for iden tica l data types.
SfC 73 I PUT
' ''dte d a ta

A job is inlli&lcd with REQ - "I and BUSY.'O~ (first cal!""). While Ihe job is in progres.
nUSY is ,et to .'\-. Ch:mllcS to the REQ
parameter no IoniC, ha"e any effect. Whim Ihe
job i.completcd, BUSY il reset to .'0". IfREQ
is still T'. the job is immediately reslancd.

20.6 57 aask Communication

ZO.6.) St.tlon-Exteroal S1 Basic
Cornmunleatlnn

When tbe write rro.:edu~ hu been initiated.

Ihe opcnoting system transrcTS.lI data from the

source area to an internal bulTer on the first call,

and sends them to the partner in tbe link. Thett,
the receiver writes the data intO) data area VAR
ADDR. BUSY i. then set to ''0'', The data ~
also ....T1nen "ben the receiVing panner is 11.1
STOP.

Fundal1l~otal.

The SD and VAR_AODR paramete", descriM

the ana from which lb. dala Ln be transferred
are 10 be read arlo whIch the =l'ive data are \0
be ",rinen. Actual paramelus may be
OOdreS'el. variables or data are .... addressed
with an ANY pointer. The Send and Rcw;,"e
dati are not checl<~ for identIcal data types.

\\"iib station-external S7 basic communication,

)"011 ean ha,c event-dri,en data excbange
between SUtotATIC S7 stations. The staliol1'l
mU5t be =ttted to each other vi. an MPI
rubDe:\<o"OR:. The communications functions
reqllired for thi,
SF Cs in the operating system orthe CPU. These SFC, establish the communication eonne<:l ions themselves, if nessary. For this reason, these station,ex ternal coonections are nOl coofigllrW via the conn<>etion
table ("'Communication ,il non-configured
connections'").

S FC 74 CABORT
DiJcanno:'C t

Slation-cxtr:mai S1 basic communication can

c:<tecute e.... em-dri'-en data D"losf.".. for UaU'lple,
paralleIlo C)"C[jc global data communication.

RI;:Q _ " I" breaks II. connection 10 the specified

commun ication parmer. With l_ABORT. you
can break only Ihos.e connec:tions u lablisbed in
th~ lime nation with I_GET or I PUT.

Addnutng tbe nodes, en nncetlno,

The.e lim,tions address nodes thai arc on the

ume \11'1 subnetwork. The node identification
is denvcd from tbe :-'-W! address (DEST_ ID
pantmctcr).

thejob is inp~,. BUSY is ~~t to ~I.

Chanies to the REQ p~ter DO longer ba"e
any cff~. Wbm mc,jobi$ completed. BUSY is
reset to "0". If REQ is still'"!". the job is irnmediateI>' n:.taned.
Wbil~

StMATlC S7 station
I",_,=,,.=.m='"=~=c:~,,
o...--~~IIon:

______ 10, ....

,c~~;;;;;~

....... c.Iing SIrion. ".........

These system functions set up the required

communication links dynamically and - if
5(lt'Clllcd - break them when the job has been
c:o:ecU!ed. If a connection cannot hi: established

SIMATIC S7.tatlon
CPO.!
"in""CPO.!

_SFCaillin..- ........ "

:J_._. ~~~~ -.

- '1~

rwo. .... ycon....::tlan'

.. 111\ SFC _In _ _ "'"

T..... _

o.w

I. .~ ~~ .o---.....~I

FI8U~ 2a . l ~

;;::l
,

c; ._

~
~

u_" .......

_ 0 1 ' cOOH_IiOo"
... \he d ...... it ....- . 1M ..............
oySIem WdIft
1M dew.

ct"-

rwo. ...y conIMC!ion:

l .....foorwlttl SFC <OIt '" _ _

~5

.:J

Station_Ex mal S7 Basic Commllllkotion

20 Main Program
because of a lack of rt:so~s in either the
sender or the rccci"er, ''tcmpoolTY lack or
rcsoun:e~" i, reported. Thc InInsrer must Ih=
be retried. Belween two communicatiOD partners. there can be only <)fie conne<:tion in each
dircrtion.
00 a transition from RUN to STOp, an active
conncctiolU (all SFC. except X_ RECV) are
cleared .

By modifying the block parw.n~L<.."ffl al run lim~.

you can ulilize a "Y"tetll func tion for diITcrent
cOImm)l1ic~lfion links. An S FC may IlQ\ interrupt iu;elf. Yo" may modifY a program section
in which one o f Ih~ sn :. is w.ed only in
STOP rnnde; a ~01d Or W~rm ,""stan mUSI then
be exe<;Ulcd.

20.6.4

fo. St a tlon-E .. urnal S7 Sade ComnonnlCIIllon

S!'",~m FuneTioo~

The fullo,,"ing syslem functions handle data

t ransfers tx-n\"ecn ptu1n<,rs in d iffenlilt stations:

SFC 65 X SEND
Send data

SFC66X_RCV
Keceivc data

SFC 67 X_ GE"l
Reat! data

> SFC 6K X_ I'UT

Wrile dala

SFC 69 X_ABORT
Dtscouncct

The parameters for these SFCs

Tnb!.; 20.16.

U..er d a ta . data con.bl .. ncy

I'r~

liste d in

'fhcsI: SFCs transfer a m~.~imum of76 b)'l~"" of

user data. A CPU's opcnuing system combines

\he u~er dala into blocks consistent within
themse lves. wilhout regurd to the direct ion of
\ral1sfer. The length of consistent traLl5fcrred
data is ~ CPUspecific variable.
IF two C PU, e.,<change data via X GET or X
PUT, 1M block si7:e of the "pas,j;,'e" CPU
decisi ve 10 dala consi.t~"T1ey of the truusf~rrcd
data.

is

In tho: ease of a SE:-I[)/RECEIVE

al l <bill ofl call an: consIstent.

conn~":lion.

SF C 6!1 X_Sl:S U
Send d>lla
A job is initialed ,,";th REQ = " I " and BU SY "
''0'' ("'fiThI call") . While the job is in progrcs~,
BUSY i~.et to "1 "; changt:s to .he REQ param~
cter now nO !(mgL"!" have any dr~"CI. \Vbeo the
job terminate., BUSY is sel b ack 10 ''0'". IfREQ
is stilt "1". the job i. immediately re.lltlc d .
On the fir<;1 call. thc opc: .... ting. system U"ansk.....

U data from the $(IU"", area to all intcnlal

buffer. Ibm lran.fers the data tn the panner
CPU.

CIHt lil,:.urinl!; .... tlon -u t~rna l S7 ba.lc eUmmunkat lon

eommun;eft!;on is a
special case in Ihat ;1 requiTes DO configuring
since dalD tran<fer i5 bandIed via dynamiC eonn~ct;oIl S. You simply usc an e"'stin" MI'l subnetwork or you ~...eale onc.
Staliol\_.;ltt~..,..,al

S7

ba.~ic

Example: you have a d;vidl.-d S7-400 mouDtina:

rack wilh OIle CPU 41 6 in each sectiOD.ln !iddi_
tiOD, you tOnll<'<:t an S7.300 .tation with a CPU
314 vin "0 MPI cable 10 One of the S7-400s.
You confiaufe a U three CPU. in (hc Hardware
Configural;ou. for elUU1lpk as '"networlwd" via
an MPI ~ubnetworl<. You can now u~ stalionc xtemlll S1 basic commuDl.~alion rtnm all Ihn.-e
cootrollers 10 e.~changc dbta.

J2H

BUSY h "1 " for the dumlion ,,(Ihe send pmce_

dl'rc. When the p!UU1cr has signa led thllt it has
fetched the data. BUSY is sci II' ''0'' and the
send job ttmllinated .

I(CONT is - "0'" the connectiun ;s broken and

the respect;"e CPU resources arc avail ~ ble to
Olhcr communication links. If CONT i~ = '" I" ,
thc connectioo i~ maintained. The REQ_ LD
parameter ma.lcs It J"lo<~ibie for yoo to assign an
TO 10 Ibe Send data ",hieh you can e,aluale
with Sr-C X_Rev.

The SD parameter describes the

ar~a

from
wbich the datn to be .,Ilt a1"C to be read . Actu"l
parameters m~y be addresses, variables. or data
areas ~d<.lrcsscd with an A."IY pointer. S~-ndand
Recei,e data are nOI cb""ked fnr matching data

"P".

20.6 S 1 BMic Comm unication

'ill

SFC 66 ;'CRC V
Rffetn d.t.

11>e Rehe data II.re pll(:cd in an intemal

buffer, Mult Iple packets can be put in II. queue in
the chronoloKicllI order of tbcir arrival

Use EN DT r -0" to cl>ed: ... hether or oot <,!.aLi

w= =ei\"~; if so. NOA is .. , .. , RET VAL
.hoW!lthc number ofbytC$ ofReive <,!.ata, ami
REO_ JI) i, the same as tbe corresponding
parameter in SFC 6 5 X_SEND_When EN_OT
is ~ "j", the Sf C tl>lll>fers the fU'S t (ollkst)
packet to tbe dt stination afN; !-'DA is t!>en '. I"
and RET_VAL M10"'5 the number of b}1es
transfetTed. If EN _DT is "I" but there arc no
data in thc internal queue. NOA is "0"_
On a cold or "'ann restart. all data packets in the
queue II!'I: ..qCl:lcd,
In the C\"C1\t of a broken eonn~oo or restan,
the oldesl entry in the queue. if already Mque_
ried" ",it h E:.I_DT a 'il. is re1aiMd; otherwise.
il is rejCl:ted li h th e other que ue <mu;e,_

Send and Receive daLi .~ not che.:kcd for

matchioa <,!.atal)1'C"_ Whfll the Rccci"e <,!.at. are
irrele\ant, II. 'blank" A}.l' pointer (N IL
p()inter) as RD parameter io X_ RCV i~ pennissibl.,

SFC 6' X_G ET

Re ad data
A job is initiated with REQ - ~I " and B USY ''0'' ("first ~al1 ") . While the job is in progn;ss,
BUSY is .Ct to " I": changeS to the REO parameter now no looger bavc any effecl,
\\lhen the job tc-nn'nates, Bt)SY i. set hack to
''0'', If REQ i till "I", the job 1!l immediately
rc;;tarted,
When tile ~ad procedure has be"" imtiated. lh.
operal;na syslem io the pwtnc-r CP U assemble,
and sends tltt' <,!.ata required under VAR_
ADDR. On an SFC call, Ihe Rcive dala are
emered in the oonrul1ion area specified al the
RD parnml'1er. RET_ VA L then shows the nurn\)(,r ofbyt~s trnnsf=ed,

1be RD parameter describes the area to "hich

IfCO!'.'T i. "0", the oommunication link ;1 bru-

the Rci"c <,!.ala "'" to be wrinen_ Mn..l

panunnets =y be ~.~ "ariables, or dal&
area~ addre5Scd with an ANY pointer.

hn, If CaNT IS "I", the oonnection i. m,in.

tained. The tbl& "'" Ihen lTad even when the

communicalion pann.r i. in STOP mode.

20 Main Program

The RD and VAR_ADDR paramete,.., describe

the area from which the data to be sent arc to be
read orto which (he Reeei v~ data are lO be written. Actual parameter< may be addresses. variables, or data areas addressed with an ANY
pointer. Send and Receive data are not checked
for matching data types.
SFC 68X]UT
Write data
A job is initiated with REQ - "j'" and BUSY '"0" ("tim ~al1"). While the job is in progress.
BUSY is set to "1": changes to the REQ p:,mmeter DOw no longer have any effect.
When the job terminates, BUSY I S set back to
''0''. IfREQ is still " 1". the j ob is inunedialely
restaned.
When the write procedure has been in itialed,
the operating system transfers all data from the
source area spe<:ified at the SD parnmeter to an
;memal buffer On the first call, then se nds the
data to the panner CPU . There. the partner
CPU's operating system write, the Receive
data to the data area specified at the VAR_
ADDR parameter. BUSY is then set to "0".

SFC 69 X_ABORT
Disconnect

REQ - .. \ .. break> an existing connection to the

specificd communication partner. The SfC X _
ABORT can he use d to break only those connections established in the CPU's own s(;,t;un
with the SFC~ X SEND. X _ GET or X_ PUT.

20.7 S7 Communicat io n
20.7. 1 Fu n damenlals

\Vith S7 commuu ication, you transfer largcr

volumes of data bet\vun SIMATTC S7 SIalions.
The stations are connected to each other via a

ce"

tto \>l ~

1., :'!1'
~I
-I ~I=
~
t''''

, ~=rvrn 1"1

CPU
o",,_y co",,_ellon:
In the C~ ~ litlg station, ""no!<or I. wfV\
FBISFB ""' . in UOOf

The RD and VAR_ADDR parameters describe

the area from which the data 10 be sent are to b~
read Or to which the Rece ive data are to be "Titten. Actual parameters may be addresses. variables, or data areas addressed with an ANY
poi nter. Send and Rece ive data are not cbecked
for matching dala types.

SIMATIC S7 $t$lloo

StMATtC $7 su.tlon
Co.mectioo

The data are written even if the cOlmnunication

partner is in STOP mode

Connection 13b le

":'";.::0
u ....

in the CPU
o" ....... y conrr.crion:
In l~. de"vertng
p<

, ~tm

program

"''''

.""ion,"'"
operati"ll
tile

letc!tes or _

d~ta

j""
Two-way co.on. clion;

f.' wtth FBlSFS cal if1 u.er p;og"""

"
j

T ........

..<-~...

-"
=
- "
SfB

- 12113

Sub"'"

MPI. PROFI BUS, I""""'", E'he,".,

~'il!u r.

20.25 S7 Communication

II

20.7 S7 CommWlicntion
8Uhnern oM<:: !hi> "an be an I>fPl subnern or!<. I
sulmctworit or aD Ethernel _ubnel_
work. !hi: communi~-.t1i(>1U connections are
'!alic; Ihey an: configllred in Ihe connection
lahle ("CQmmUIlicalion yin cQnfigu",d connecTionsn).

rRormus

With the 57-400. the ~"<JmmunlcaTion, function,

are sy,L.:m !Unction bloch 5FB. integnu~-d in
Ih. OJ"-"TlILmll ~y~lcm ofth. cru . Thc a~!-OCI'
alCd installCe data block i> localed in the uS"r
memory. ffyou w"nl to use 57 communi~al;on.
cupy The inlcr(~ description ofthc SFD, from
the Standard Llbrar)' umkr System FUMri""
Blocks to th~ Blucks container. gcncrale an
in"ance data block for e,",h call and call the
SFB with the "">ocialcd instance dam block.
With inC"'lIlcnlal input. you can alw ,ciCCI the
StS from Ihe prog!U1l\ ckm<;"nt catalog and
ha,.. the instance dal.!< block gencrated automati.:.lly.
Wilh the S7. ]OO. the communi.alion functions
are standard nmcnon blocks FD which :'ou Cln
find in the Sta~d(J,-d Library under Communication Blocla. Copy the funcliQll bLocks you wisb
To usc ;nlO thc ~"()!lTaioer Bloch and th..... u.~
tb<.m just like Hnormal'" fuoction bloch.
Confl llurlnll S7

eommllnk~tlQn

The prc~u;~;Te far die 57 commu.nieaTion is"

confillured conn~-.:'ion Illble in wbeh the ~vm'
municatian lwks arc defined.
A communication link. is specificd by a conne<.:lion to rar e~ch communication partner. STEP
7 as;;igns the con nection ID~ when it compi les
thc conneCL;On tabl... Uw the HlocaIID"to initialize Lbe FD or SFB in lhe module from \\hiCh
the connection i. 'iewed. and tbe """rcm.01~ 10"
to initia\i<c lhe FE or SF8 in !hc partner mod
ule .

The same

logl~....t conne<:TiOD can be u.cd far

different' 5cnd!Rec";,c ~UcSIS. To di<IIngllish
bcTWCCll IM-m. you mUSL add I joh 10 To the
connectIon 10 in ordC1" 10 define th~ relaTionship be"'.... n the Send hlock and Re<:eivc
block.

parmer clIO he eslabli;;hed. lnitialiulion blk"",

place m tJx, CPU IMt ",,"c;,es the anributc
"'Aeli,-c connection buildllp - Yes" in The can
ncction ,,,]:)Ie. You call 111<.0 communicaLion
blocks u..ed in cyclic operaTion in a r<:!Slnn OR
and mitialize Tbe paratnClel"i (pro~ided they "re
""aillble) llS follo\\s:

> REQ "' FALSE

t>

Jl) -local cannlion lD fiom Lhe COIUWcIlolltabk ( <.lata Iype wo~n \v# 1 6~~xxx)

> R_ ID - jub II> " h ich you can design for a

pair o fblocks (datalype OWOMO
DW-I6><xxxx xx.'I..\)
,. PI NA 'IE

ARRAY[I __9) OF CHAR)_

The block> must continue LO he caUed in I program lOOf! unril the OO'ffi parnmcTer h.as ~i"al
'wc 'I~. The partmClers ERKOR and !iTA
TUS IIhc informnlion ~unccminlO the elTOJ1l
lhal ha"c o.:~urred and lhejob '1"luS.

You do nOt need to 'WilCh the daTa are"" aT

",stan (cone"", Ihe panunclCf'S AOIl R .x,
RD x and SO >;). E>;c~"f'Iion in S7-400 sy.
Icm'i: wnh SHJ- 8 USE"O. SFB 9 UR.CV, SFD
14 GET and sm J 5 rUT, the communication
bun'c'" for t:t11lJamccin& can,ish:ney are created wben called ror the fm! time, and Ihese
Miloe Ihe maximwn data quanlity pcr transfer
M.n further call .
C~

ellc opcra lion

In cydie opermioll. you CII IThe cornmunic:ttiun

blocks absolutely and you conTrnl data Tnm~f...

\ ia the pafILmeters REO and EN_R. You mu)1
cvaluate the re.ults in the NDR. DONE,
ERKOR mol STATUS J')BrImet<"N ;nUTIed;aTcly
rollowlDll cach Pm<:essinll of a commW'O icBliOIl
bloc\. since they are on ly valid up 10 the n~~T
call.
\\~th

the S7-300, paramC1C1'l1 ofdalB Type ANY

(SO_I. MO_ 1. AOOR_I) can only be supplied
with fllas and data as the address_
20.'.2 TWa-Way

t nili.ltUll ion
57 communication m",,' be iniTialized at RSLart
.so tru" Lhe cOIln~-.:lion to The commllni~RTion

variable WiTh thc contents

P-=.PROORAl>I" in ASCI I ~<>dino: (c_g_

D.". K~"haD l;:e

For ",'o-",Iy data e:wh.nlle. you require fJOC

SE~"D blo.:k and OIle RECEIVE blo.:k "ch al
the ends of" connection. 80th blocks carry the

20 Main l'ropm

Tab'" 20.17 FB/SFB P"",met=< for Sct>dtng and Rc<:",ving Data

"""e

BOOe

WORD

SD_2'J
SI)_] t)

"

,
,,

Bom

New .Jata fetched

"'''''

ErT(>1" occurred

'00
Second Send II/"Ca
Third Send ""'"
Fourth Scr.d area

RD_ 2 Il

S~cond Ht(;~he .rc~

1U)_3 "

Th ird Receivt

OUT

cortne>clion lO s thll' are located in the cOnDec,ion table in Ihe $ame line . You cattalso u.~e sevCOI l " block pa in; which are !hen d;s';n\li~hed
from eac h other by Ihe joh ID.
Thc ruUuwin SFlls arc a~ailable for ." ....,,"'y
du'~ inlCTChange:
~ FIlIS FIl R USEND
Uncoordinated send ing of a data p.d';~l uf
CrU-specit1c lenglh
to

FliIS!'"A 9 U RC V
Uncoord inat ed recei vin g ofa
CI'U_~r<-..,i{k kong!h

d",~

packel of

J>

F BlSF B 12 BSEND
Send ing ofa dam hlock of up 10 J2 or 64 KB
in leng,h

J>

FIlISFIl IJ DRCV
Rcccivinil of a data block of up 10 32 or 64
K.D in lenglh

FI:lISFH li lind FRI SFB 9 or FB /SFIl 12 .. nd FBI

SFB IJ nillst always be lL'led "" a pair.
T" c parametel"\l fOT ,h",c S H 1. 8'" li~led in
h bl" 20. 17.

~rc~

Founh Roce iye area

FB g USE-"':U a nd FD 9 LKCV

S . ' H 8 l.S .~ND and S . 1:I 9 L" RCV

l:ncoordinaled . .. nding . "d r K e;';n/!

The SD_x and RD_x parameleN aTC used to

specifY the vari .. blc 01' Ihe arc" )'Oil wanl 10
transfer. Send area SD ~ DlIlSI corro~pond to
the rcspe<"Tive Receive area RD It. Usc
p"rameters withou t gaps. I>.:jfinnin!l wilh 1. No
value s need be specified for tlllneeded pa\'8meters (like an FB> not "II SfB pnrllJnClc,"" n~cd be
US5igned value ,).

'h"

A posilive edg~ at the REQ (Te quc~.) p"r ~me\cr

staru Ihe ru,.'a exchange, positive edge al the
R (TC'ct) parameter abom il. A 1 in the
EN_R (enable recej"e) J"lT&meter .ignals that
the p;lrtner is ,-"ady to n:cei\e data, -0 can be
used 10 abon a current job.
When the KDR parameler has ""umcd the
valu e J following the dala transfer. call th e
bloc;': "!lain - this lime With EN_ R _ 0 _to
p",veD1the recei . <; area from beinlO oyerwnncn
by new dat a during the <t'L" evnlllMinn.

20.7 S7 Communication

!.oitializ. the ID parameter with the connection

ID. whi ch STEP 7 enters in the connection table
for both the local and the portner (th~ 1\''-0 IDs
may ditTer). R_lD anows you to choose a specifiable but unique job 10 which mll>! be identical for the Send and Recei,,~ block. This anows
sev~-ral pain; of Send and Recetve bloch 10
share a single logical conne~\ion (as each has a
unique to).
With the S7_4OO, the system function blocks
accept the acmal value< of the ID and R 1D
parameters into their instance data block onthe
first calL The first call c<tabli,he, lhe eommunkation relationship (for thi, instance) umilthe
next warm or cold start. With the S7 _300. you
can change the assignment oflhe ID and R ID
p;t]1l.meters follo",ing each completed job. With signal state " 1-' in the DONE or NOR
parameter, the block si gnals that the j ob terminated without error. An eITor, if any_ is flagged
in the ERROR param~ter. A "alu~ other than
zerO in the STATUS parameter indicates eilher
a warning (ERROR - "0") or an error (ERROR
~' I") .

FB 12 BSE ND a n d FB 13 BRC\'
S FB 12 BSE:"n and SFB 13 IIR C\'
Blo ck -o ri ented s~ndl n g and ,"" c .. i,in g
Emer a pointer to the fil'>t byte of the data area
in parameter SO _x or RD_ x (the length o H m,
act ual pararn~ter detennines the maximum size
of the communi~ation buff~r when called for
the first time_ it is not evaluated w ith the further
calls); the n umh<"r ofbyles of Send or Receiw
dBta is in the LEN pa",mcter.
Up to 64 KB (3 2 KB with non_ integrated iDlerface) may be transfe"",d; the data are ,raru ferred in b loch (somnimes ~alled frames). and
the t",n,fer itself is asynchronous to the user
program scan . The LEN pammeter is updated
following each recei"cd b lock.
A positive edge at the REQ (request) parameter
starts (he data ex~ha.nge. a positi"e edge a'the
R (reset) parameter abort' it. A " I " in the EN_
R (enable receive) parameter signals that the
partnet IS ready 10 reeeive data. "0" can be used
t<J abort a current j ob.
When the NDR parametcr bas as,umed Ihe
value -'I" following the data transfer. call the

block again _ this time with H..J_R "0" - to

prevent the recei "c area from being overwri lt en
by neW data during the data evaluation .
E

Initialize the iD parameter with the connection

iD, which STEP 7 enters in the connection table
for both the local and the partner ( the two IDs
may differ). R_ ID allows you to choos .. a 'PC~
ifiable but unique job TO which mLlSt be identical for the Send and Receive block . This a!low ,
se,-eral pairs of Send and Receive blocks to
share a single logical connection (a. each has a
unique 10).
W ith th e 57_400. the system function b lock<
accept the aClUal values of th~ 10 and R_ ID
parameters into their iDStan~e data block on the
first call. The fil'lt call establishes th e conununication rdationship (for this instance) until the
next warm or cold SIan. With the 57 -300. you
can change the assi gnment of\he ID ami R_ ID
parameters follov.i ng eacb completed job.
With sigoal state "I" in the DONE or NOR
parameter. tbe block signals that the job termi nated without error. An eITor, if Bny, is nagged
in the ERROR paramet~r. A va lue other than
zero in Ihe 5TATUS parameter indicates eithe r
a warning (ERROR~ 'il") or an eITOr (ERROR

_ or).
20 .7.3 OD e- Way Data Exe hang..
In one-way dala exchange . the eonununication
block oall is located in only one CPU. In t h ~
partner CPU_ the operating system handk< the
necessary communication function< .
The following blocks arc available foronc-way
data int~rchange
~

FB SFB 14 GET

Read dala from a panncr CPU

> FB/ SFB 15 PUT
Write data to a panncr CPU

Table 20.1~ lists the parameters for the, e

blocks.
The operating system in the parmer CPU collects the data read w ith FH/SFB 14 ; the operating Sy<l~m in the panner CPU distributes the
data written with FB /5FH 15. A Send or
Recei ve (user) program in the panner CPU is
!lot required. The partner CPU can prov ide the

333

20 Main Program
Ta b l~

20.18 iFS ISPS Paramete", fOj" Reading .nd Wriling Dala

ID
DONE

ERROR

S1ATI..'S

"" "
"
" "
"

"

INPUT

WORD

OUTPUT

ROO'

Job terminaleJ

OUTI'U>"

ROOt.
WORD

Error occurred

OUTPUT

J"b iit.im
Second data area in p'rTn~"T CP U
Third datil arc. in partnej" CPU

'0

RD 2 1)

Sc"""nd Receive area

Third R~c.ive ar
Fourtb Receive "'OH

'0~3

1)

"
""

required communications ,ervic es both at

RUN" and ST O P. The size of the transferred
c onsistent data blocks depends on the (sernr)
CPU used.
A positive edge at parameter REQ (reque st)
starts Ihe dala in terchange . Sctthe ill parameler
to Ihe conn<""Ction [0 emered by STEP 7 in the
cOImection table.
With a " 1" in the DO:'-lE or :'-lOR parameter, the
block signals that the job te rminate d withoUl
error. An error, if any, is flagged with a '" I" ill
the ERROR parameter, A value other thall ZerO
in the STA T US parameter i;; illdicative ofeilher
a warnillg (ERROR = "0" ) or an error (E RROR
~ "]"). You must cvaluate the OOl\-:E, NOR.
ERROR and STATUS parameters ~ft~r el'ery
block call ,

Use the ADDR~n parameter 10 spe~ ify the vari~ble or the arCa in the partner CPU from which
you want 10 fetch or to which you wanl \0 send
th~ data. The ~reas in ADDR n mu,t coinc.ide
w ith the ~reas specified in SD ~n or RD_n. Use
the parameters without gap', beginning with I.

kW
A.,.'iy
A },'Y

,"'

Se<:<>nd Send area

n .ird Send arca
Fourth Send =a

Unn eeded paramet~rs nced nOI be spec ified (as

in an FB. an SFB docs not have to have values
for all parameters ).

20.7.4 Transferring Print Da ta

SfB 16 PRlNT a llows you to trallsfer a format
description and data to a p rinter via a CP 441
communications processor. Tahle 20.19 lists
the param~t~rs for Ihis SfB.
A posi ti ve e dge at the REQ parameter stans
the data exchange with the printer specified by
t h~ 10 and PRN_ NR parameters, The block
signals ~n error_free tran s fer by setting DONE
to "\ " . All error. ifany, l S fl~ggcd by ~ '"/"' in
the ERROR paramete r. A value oth~r than
zero in the SlATUS parameter is ind icat ive of
ei ther a warning (ERRO R = "0'") or an error
(ERROR - ' "1") . You must evaluate the
DONE, ERROR and STATUS parameters
after every b lock call.

Enter th~ ch aracters \0 be printed in STRING

fOIDmt in the FOR1l1AT parameter. You Can

20.7 S 7 Communi~ ..ti(>1)

WORD
ERROR
STATUS

OUTIUT
OUTPUT

'00'
WORD

Error occurred
Job .tatu.

Second vwioble
Third ,..nable

integnlte as many as fOUl format descnpt;ons

for variables in this string. defined in parameIC1"5 SD_1 10 SD_ 4. Use the parameters wilhoul
gaps, belllnnin!> with I; do not sp~iry values
for unneeded pammelers . You can tran~fer up It)
420 byl"", (Ih~ sum of FORMAT and all "arisbln) per print req uest.
21l.7.S Control FunCTions
The following S FS. are available for conlrol
hni Ihe communication partner:
I>

(>

(>

SFS 19 START
E.",eute a COld or warm restan in Ihe panner
contrOller
SFB 21l STOP
Switch the panner controller 10 STOP
SFB 21 RESUME
EKecuI" a hOI rcstan in the panner comrol'
["

These SFBs are for one-way data exchange; no

U5er pmarom i. required in the pnnner de\"ke
for Ihis purpose. The parameters for them are
listed in t.ble 20.20.
A positive edlle at the REO parameu,r SlaTU the
data exchange. Enter as m parameter Ihe connection ID "hleb STEP 7 entered in the eonn~tion lable.
With a MI" in the DOI\'E parameter. the block
signals that the job tenninated without error. An
error. if any. is flagged by a "I" in the ERROR
rnnun~ter. A valu~ other Ihan zero in Ihe STATUS purameter is indicative of eilher a " 'aming

{ERROR'" '"()") or aD error (ERROR - 'r).

You mus' evaluate Ihe DON E, ERROR and
STATUS parame,crs afte-r e'"t'ry block call.
Specify as PI_NA:-'-ffi an array vnriablc with the
eonlents "P_PROGRAM" (ARRAY [ 1..9] OF
CHAR). If you do nOI a"ign IhC A RG parameter. a Warm start is triggered in the partner controUer: ifhC" is a5si~cd 10 ARQ a cold SIan il
trigaered if permissible in Ihe pan"er C01IlrolIer. The IO_STATE parameler is currently irrele'1IIIt. and need nol be u,igncd a value.
S FB 19 START eX~Ules a cold or wano restart
of the parmer CPU. Prerequisile i$ Ihallhe pan_
ner CPU is 81 STOP and that the mode Kkctor
t$ posilioned to enher RU>! or Ru>!-P.
S t-8 20 STO P setS the panner CPU 10 STOP.
PITrequisite for error-free ex:ution of this job
request is that tI,e panner C PU is not al STOP
when the request is subm itted.
S Fa 21 RESUME ex:utes a hOI reSlart Of lhe
panner CPU. Prorequisite is Ihul the parlner
C PU is at STOP. lhat Ihe mode selector is sel to
either RUN or RUN-P, Bnd thaI a hot .... stan is
penni5sible althis lime.
20.7.6 :'olonitorill ljl FUlled..,ns
The following syslem blocb are available for
moniloring funclions
(>
SFB 22 STATUS
Check panner stalUS
!>

SFB 23 USTATUS
Receive partner SlalUS

20 Main Program

l .. b le 20.20 SFB Paramelers for Partner Controll er

"
OUTPUT

M"

"
.

OUTPUT

BOOe

Error (){; urrcd

IX - 0=

~y

~y

'ro_

IX_OUT

"

BYIT

" '" "

With "C" a. the value. cold "art

js triggered in Ihe p8r1n<r controller. ifpermi"ible
IITelennt

Tab le 20 21 SFB Paromotero for Querying Statu

Parameter

Pre",nt in
SI'II

REQ

".
"
"
"
""
"
"

EN_ R
ill

NDR

ERROR
STATUS
PHYS
WG

LOCAL

(>

(>

(>

Declaration

Dat. Typ'"

Contents. Doocription

INPUT

""
"
""

INPUT

BOOe
BOOe

S.." data eXChange

Ready to receive

INPUT

WORD

Connection ID

OUTPUT

New data fflched

OUTPllT

Booe
Booe

O~UT

WORD

Error o<curred
Job,tatu.

IN OUT

A~

Phy,ical statu.

lX_OUT

ANY

Logical 5tatus

IN_OUT

A"Y

Status of an S7 CPU as pa"ner

"

"
"

SFC 62 CONTROL
Chock statuS of an SFB instance
FC 62 C CNTRL
Check stalus of a connection

SFC 87 C_DlAG
Determine connection SIan,s

The parameters ofthcsc b locks arc described in

Tables 20.2 1,20,22 and 2023.
The following applies for these sy.lcm blocks:
ao error is indicated with "1" at the ERROR
param"'1~'T. If the STATUS parameter has a
value not equal to zero, thi' indicales either a
warning (ERROR - "0") or an error (ERROR "I'').

SFB 22 STATUS
Ch ee k the st atus of the partner d e " ice
SFB 22 STATUS fetches the status of the partner CPU and d;<play< it in the PIIYS (physical

'"

status). LOG (logical status) and LOCAL

(operating Slatus if the partner is an S7 CPU)
parameters,
A positive edge at the REQ (reque>!) parameter
starts Ihe query. Enter as 10 parameter the connection ID which STEP 7 ~'T1tcrcd in the connection lable.
Wilh a " I" in the NDR parameter. the block signals that Ihe job terminated without error. You
mUSI evaluate Ihe NOR. ERROR and STATU S
parameters after every b lock call.

SFB 23 USTATUS
R ecclve the natus oftbe p artn er device
SFB 23 USTAl'US receives the slatus of the
partner. which it sends. unTcqucsted, in Ihe
event of a change. The device staN' is dis,
p layed in the PHYS, LOG and LOCAL parameters.

20.7 S7 Communication

Tabl, 20 22 'Paramet=< of the Block< Fe. fi' C CNTRL and src 62 CONTKO)

~:-BK

"

SFC

OFFSET

"C

Fe

RETVAL

REnJR"

ERROR

SIT

oun'tTr

,m

STATUS

FC

"C

I STATE

SFC
src

' _CONN

I STAniS

C_CO~

FC

C STATUS

"

SFC

,=c

d.,. block

rt-.l'I Jf

BLOCK DIl

instance

I N~UT

WORD

Numkr of the local instance

L,",PUT

I "c

,om

INT

Error ;ntormat;on

Oun'UT
OUIT",

WORD

~.rro' <iele<:ted
Statu, wora

OUTPllT

IWTf.

src

OUTPUT

Bool

sec

OUTPUT

,=c

Ii.,

Block 'YI'<' iJenu

AOLual ",ILl> identifier
ConmTtion ,..,'"

,~

("1" - ~onnc"tion e~i",)

WO~D

in<tance

OUTPUT

,=C

OUIl'I.l

WORD

A" ''" '" the EN_R (enable f~cei"e) p"ramet~r

signals that me parln<:r i, Tcady 10 ....c~i,c data.
lnitiali~c the TO parameter w ith the co nnection
10, which STEP 7 enters in the conne~tio!}
table.
With a "I'" in Ihe 1>.'DR paramC.,cr, the bloek ,ig_
na ls that the job terminated without error. You
mmt eva\t13tc thc 1'.'DR. F.RRO}{ and STAI'US
paramc tcr. after ~,'ery block call.

SFC 62 CONTROL
Ch~cll the ~r!ltu ~ of 9 ~ommunicarion
instance
In S7-4-()(l 'ystems. SFC 62 CONTROL det~r
mines 1he Slatus of a commnnication instance
and the associatcd ~onncC1ion in the loc" l ~on
troller. Enter ,ne SFB', instancc data block in
the I_DB parameter. II the SFB is called JS
local ;n, tance, 'pe<:ity the number of the local
instance in the OFFSET parameter (zero" hen
no local in51ancc. 1 ror the (irst local inSlaoce, 2
tor th~ second. and so on).

Wi\n signal slatus "1 " at tho EN _R paramc'~r

(enab le to receivc), tne Sta\..s of Ihc commun ication in,tance is displayed which is spee itied

STATUS p"rmnde, fo, communic.,;on

Cotllle<lion "atu'
~ - connection exi,ts)

eI

Co~jon

""tm

al lhe' DB parameter. You mmt evaluate the

NDR. I:RROR and STATUS par-unctc,.,; after
"wry block call.
Th " parameters '_nrP. , STA:IE, ' _ CONN
;lnd I_ STATUS prO" ide illformm;on con cerning the statu., of the local commonication
instance.

Fe 62 C_ C:"<TRL
Check thc ,tatm of a connection

In 5i-300 sy<1em<, Fe 62 C_CNTIl.L determinc~ tn e status of a connectiou in the local

device. En tcr the connection ID in the '0
pru-amd er which STEP 7 dcf mes in the connec lion table fo r the local device.

With si gnal "atu, "I" at thc RN_R parameter

(enahle 10 receiv e), the actual connection ,(a~US
is di'played. Th~ ERROR ami STATUS par-.m el-Crs must be eyaluated foUowillg each block
~all.

Thc C _ COt-<"N and C _ STATUS parameters pro,ide information on the acrual ""mnection Sla-

tu,.
337

20 Main Program

SFC 87 C_DIAG
Iletermlne thc connection .Iatu.

job with signal status hJ" and the REQ param_

eter. Tfthe job cannot be executed inunediatdy,
the SFC returns the signal stmus "0" on the
BUSY parameter, othen'hse BUSY ~ "["
means thaI the job is in progress.

The system function SFC 87 C_D1AG determines the a~tual status of connections wilh a
r,xed configuration, i.e. all 57 connections and
a ll fauIt-tolernIlI S7 ~onnections. With each
call, the SFC 87 C_ D1AG reads the conne ction
data from the operating system and enters them
into the uSer memory for cvaluation. The SFC
then aeknowledges that read ing has taken p l ac~
in the operating system so that a change in status since the last read operation can be
recorded . If you wi,h to monitor the connec_
tions pennancntly. call the SFC at r~gular intervals. c.g. cvery 10 secon ds in a lime imerrupt
organization block.

Table 20.23 ,hows the parametcrs of SFC 87

C DlAG.

SFC 87 C_DIAG can work in "l'ario", operating

modes which you Can sel using the MODE
parameter;

> MODE - 8#16#00

Tbe SFC acknowledges ,"<,ading out, witb
out copying the conne<:lion data.

"" MODE - B#161101

The SFC copies the connection data and
acknowledges reading out.

SFC 87 C DlAG is a system funclion which

operates in asynchronous mode. You trigger a

IIData

con_~e<"!

OClOL;

cc<>_busy
<:en e=or
ca"J_ inde><
=_6tatus

BOOL,
~,

>==

Sl"BY COl<

DLS_PCON

=0
-,

DIS

[1 . . 12]

WORD;

OJN_lP
s:rAT_OJN

~he

c~~ect 1 on

data

I/n-i gger j ob
I Neb running
IIError informa~1cn of SFC
I /~r ot field eleme:-.t ~ read by SFC

1m;

-,

bloCk with

OF STRUCI"
IJ

/ /C=.r-"ct:ion

~tatus

BYTE;

//Connectian

BYr"E,
BYTE,
OClOL;
8l"1>,

IIPa rtial connect i on number

IIPa reia l connection nurnb~~
I 1C"han~ in ... ~at:"",, in f ... ult
/ /Chan9'" in .. ~at-,~ of conn.
IIRe"erved

BYTB;

!/~&erved

BCOL,

producti~ connecti on
of standby connect i on
tolerance
(.. i~hout ta'~l t tol e rance I

o!

You Can usc your own expressions for the names of"ariables and compone nts.
The call could then be as follows, for example:
CALL C DIAG
~O

=,
PEr_VAL

00"

"-"'"
=-

'"'

, ~ oon_data.oon_~,

,.

Bi/16/102,

,_
".
:_
:_

con_ data .oon_arror,

cou_data .COI"l_buey,
cou_ "",,ta . co'L1t:>dex,
cou_ """ta.corL,,t.atu3) ;

Figu,"" 20.26 Progrornminll Example ofth" SFC 87 C_DIAG

20.8 IE cmnmUJ1kation

"
I>

I>

MODE - 8';161102
Th~ SFC only cop;e, th~ COun~"tiOil data if
they have changed, and acknowlcd~es reading om - even ifno cha0i:cs hi"e occtUTCd.
YlODE '" B# lbI'03
f he SFC c(I,ne$ the conn..,l;on daTa" !Ihom
admo" kdgmg.

87 C_DlAU tnon,milS the acmal

from the opemTinj; sy,t~m
into the de~ t inntion area spccifkd ;n the
CON _ ARR paramctCT. The d~.t'nntion arca is
II. field of .,mclures: a field COnlpon-.::n1 contaim the data for 0Il~ conntt1;OT1 . The number
of field elemcnl~ ($IrUCI~) must corTbpond
10 the nomber of pomble connccl;()n "l. Figure
20.26 ,hmn the pos.iblc ,lruc<Ul'e of a corresponding ficld variable with the cOIlll.c\ion
data.
The

S~C

~onnection <iali

The field with tlw connection data h not

arnmg..o according to the connection llh: the
indi~idual tonne~"tiOll> c;m b.-, a,"gned in any
rnlUlJlct to the field el..."enIS. FIeld elellK....m
with inva lid connections c"",, al$O be "",,.itioned
belween field elcmcnt~ "itn valid connt'<;lions.
Th e d ala of a conne.;tion nre cousiSH;nl wi lh
nne ano mer.

ZO.8 IE co m m unlca lion

20.11.1 Baslc5

With "Open communkalion ,'ia Industrial &lb

em~'" (IE communica.ion for don). yoo transfer data bc.wun 1"0 de"ices connCCted to the
cmcrnet ,...bnc: . Conununication cllIl b.-, implemented using the prutorols TC P na.ive in ;te.
cordance with RfC 793, ISO-onTCP lD a<;<;<)1"'

dance with RFC 1006. or UDP in accordance

w i.h RFC 768.
Th~ communi cation fu.uctinns arc loadab lc
function blocks (Flh) contained in lh.. Stan.
daro LibruT)' of STEP 7 und .... Cmnmuni<:atlon
Blod .... included ore user-ddinetl data typ<:S
(UDTs) with the Sirurrure of the connection da
til .ud .he addNc .. of lh1: WTIImunication fl8rt.
ncr.

Cnuflgurinl: IE comm u ni cation

Tbc follo"ing are ",qll;~ before data
traIl,f<..."-,,d "im ro communication;
t:>

call

be

In .he case of the protOCOls TCP native aud

ISO-ollTCP. ~ conneclioll must be ~SUlh
hshcd to the commUnic"lion pmtner (cnn
nccl;on-oriented prol,-""olS) or

I>

In the case of the protocol UDl', a eOUtle<:

rion mu>1 be establiShed 10 .he communica
tion 13)er of the CPU operating "Yl'tem
('Oconn~c.ionl.",'i prnlOCOrO), The parm .... is
t!>en addn::;;sed when the "'levanl [mlct'..,n
block is called.

The cOOlle<;tion is coniig\1rw via a dal~ area

(nol \I.ina th~ con"ection table). The nC<."(:!ISIlI)'
dati. ~UUCtures ar.. "on.-d in the u .....--defined da
ta lYPe loTlT 65 Tro:-S_ PAR that the function
bloch use fOT establ"'hin~ and cic".uina down
the COOll""I;OII, Thc dala contain the connection
10 !hal Stale' a specific connection and the liS'
s<)C;a.e<l Ii.lllction bl",,~ ca ll s, and the informa
t;on on the proto;;ol wed.
8tahlishment of the oonnectiuo I<) the partner or
.settIni lIfl or the conununkation access point h;
hoindled by !be funcrion block f lJ M TCQ:-I that
)00 call in the main progmm ..,rboth panncrdevic~~. T>6U1. ca.n ~ trapsf~,-red in parallcl in b<.>lh

20 Ma in Pmgram

CPlJiCP "":~

.,...on,

o~

03t& ""nsfer I'Oth

tiD P !>"'locoI

:'J"
__1 -:1'
__
\;6 Jt~ ~
CO,

671GB . . .

, :J

.'

I'lgu..., 20.27 IE couunuuicatioD

directions over an c~' a blj<h ed connC~';()T" Sev_

~ra! cOll1leclion'; ~an exi<l oU one physical lin".
The function block PH M T OTS_ CON ",lea,s lh~
corUlcclion dov.'ll again and 'hus relea.;;e, the resour"". used (Figure 20 .27).

immediately after each exttldion .ince they

only remain valid unti l the next call.

With the funclion bJocb FR 63 TSEND and FE

64 TRey' you can tnUlskr dat~ wi lh lh~ NO\oeols TCP native or ISO-on-TCP. Dat~ twn>fer
wilh the UDP protocol requircs the f"ne tion
blocks I'B 67 TUSEND and FB 68 TURCV.
Whcn calling these function blocks, specity the
address of the partner device in a data a,...a, The
strucrnre of this ",Idres' is in the us~r_defined
data type UDT 66 TAD!)_I'AR.

Bcfore data can be U-ansierred with IE communication. a cotmection must be e,tablished w ith
thc partner device ( in thc c~se of TCP native
and ISO -on- TCPI or wi th the communication
laycr of the operating system (in thc case of
UDP) . The following blocks are available fur
this purpose:

20.K2 ESlablisblnl: lind clearIng

d",,n .>nn ~cttons

I>

FB 65 TCON
E"abli,b cOTIDec\ion to the communication
partner or thc communication laycr of the
opcrating 'yst~m

""

FB 66 TD1SCO:'>l
C lear down connection

Calling fuuction b locks

Thc fUnClion blocks for IE communication
work ~synchronou8 Iy. that is,joh execution ~an
take several prol,,'T,,m eyde8 under certain drcumstances . You can call thc c0ll111l1mication
blocks in the main program and control d"la
u-an,k"T wi th the parameters REQ and EN_R.
You mu,t evaluate the results at the p"rameters
DUSY, NDR, DONE, ERROR and STATUS

HO

[>

UDT M TeO "" PAR

Stmcrure for the counection data

You can tiud the parameters o f the function

blocks in Table 20.24. The <.ie,ign of thc data
structure is ,bown in Table 20 .25 .

20.8 IE communicatiun

To bl.10.14 !'I",me'er< fur Fa 6S TCO r- and FA M TDJSCO~

BUSY

65

66

ourPIJT

ERROR

65

OU11'UT

STAn;S

6~

66
66

Job bt'iDa ptOC..K<l (-Ii"'" hu bt' .... compl.1.ed (""(1"1

Emr. oc.:urred (II -I~)

OlJTrtJT

Job f~u'."""" onformalion in !he .~.., ofl!Rl!.OR

UDT 6S TCON P.....

,.s ,.
""""""",," """
""
,
000'

WORD

..,he " ..

,.

"

remj taddr_

"

"'m_....p_
i<Ucn

,,-

rem_ mbn",

J4 ,u

SO-

"

",ference

B ~16'101

Conn"""""
!)"pC
Tcp1 P na"v.
n-l~1
(coml"'ibih,y m<><Ic)

..

"

a# l6/j l 1:
R ~16oi 1~ :

8"164IlJ:

TePIll' nat;'.
ISO on Tel'

um

'1'''''

"

pano.tn"'' ' l""oU""l'_'d

llYn:

BnlM02

Leni'h of

.m

l1'116::00

CUrTmlly "'" uoed

IIYlE

S ~!6.oo

l.enJlb of 'he add",,, of ' he romot. ''<In,, ,,,,';on

point; _

.m

B!f16"OO

with VDP

L""i!lt ofpaamelerrern_ .... pJd:

IIA<!d. "iii! UDI'

DO"<
S ~ 16>oOO

AI{RAY [ 1..6)
OFLWTF

6(B~16"OO)

C"""ntlY!lot used

",m_"addr

ARRAY [l .6]
Of BYTE

6(R~16"OO )

rem_....p)d

,"RR/,S [1..l6]

16(B# 16ioOO)

Ii' addfc" uf t11e re[l1o'e ron""",iun pOint; no.

u ... d IO.i.h UD!'
I{emo,. port number or relllUU' rs,\P;
"'" u>oed "ith UDP
R.ttek and .Iot of obe 10.::11 CP;
"'" uoed whh UDp
\1 .... be ""&/1..0. W~16l'OOOO

" "

.."" "

C~ti'""

V. 1IIe ""'!ole: \\ ,, 16WOOO1 to W 16o(tFFF

rem_,ub_

,,"

l'!~~~~~;;;======

,ice (_ TtIaIWIJ

l",,"l_tsap_

~,

W :< 16=OO(IO

orSYTE

n.,,_otI<I<h

.""

ARRAY [1..61
Of IWTE

6(8"'16fIOO)

WQR!)

W .. 16IIOOOO

20 Main Program

F'B 65 TCOK
E ~tll bUsh ~onncction

FWlction block FB 65 TCON cr~atcs the prereq uisites for IE communication . The parnmeters
required forthis arc located in a data area that has
the structure of the user-d~fllled data!)pe UDT
6~ TCON_ PAR.
VvbCIl using the protocols TCP native and ISO
on TCP, a conmx:lion is establi.hed to the communication partner. The station for which -'A ctive connection serop" i, entered e,tab1i8bes the
connection. Thcpartner stlltion must then be designated as )lassive_ This designation is independent of the d irection oftnUlsf~r of the data,

FB 6 6 TD ISCON
E!tablbh ~t1nne~titln
Function block f B 66 TDISCON te""inales
the pr<"requisites for IE communicat ion, It
clears doY.-n the connection to the communication partner ur de let., s the communication access pumt.
You des ign ate the communication connection
by assignin g m e ID parameter. The specification must correspond to the v ariab le id in the
connection data,
In the initia l state. the parameters REQ, BL' SY,
DONE and ERROR ha"e s ignal ,ta,e "0 . Vuu

start conne ction cle ardmvn with

on the REQ pammeter,

II

rising edge

The connection is monitored and maintained by

the operating system of the CPU, In the eve nt of
a break in connection, the active panner a t_
tempt. 10 re-establi sh the connection without
having to caU FB 65 TCON again. FB 66 TDlSCON clears down the communication cunneeti on in STOP mode of the CPU or in th~ case of
POWER OFFION.

Wh ile the j ob is running, BUSY = "I " . The job

has been ,uccessfully comp leted when BUSY ~
0". DO NE - "I" and ERROR ~ "0". If the job
conta ins errors, BUSY - "0. DO'KE - "0 and
ERROR - "1". The error is then specified at the
STATUS parameter_ BUSY, DONE and ERROR are rese t to "0 when REQ is returned to
" 0".

If thc UOP protocol is used, fB 65 TCO!" s~ts

up a local comrr",mication access poin t that re;>resentS tbe connection be m'een the u,er program and the communication layer of the operaling .ystem. No connection is made to Ihe connection panner

lTDT 65 TCON PAR

Structure of the connecti on data

You designate the communication connection

by assigning the LD parameter, The spec ification must corrcspond to the variab le id in the
connection data. You spec ify the ~onnC<' tion
data with the puinlcr at the CONl'." CT param_
e te r,
In the itlitial state, the parameters REQ, BUSY.
DON E and ERROR have signal St at e '0" , Vo"
start connC<'tion setup wiIh a ri<ing ed ge on th<"
REQ paramelcr.
,"'hile the job is running, BUSY = " 1 _ The j ob
has been s"cccssfully completed when BUSY "0'\ DO"'IE ~ " I " and ERROR - "0'. If the j ob
contains errors, BUSY - "0, DONE - "0" and
ERROR - " 1_ The error is then specified at the
STATUS parame ter. BUSY. DONE and ER,
ROR are reset to 0 when REQ is re rumed to
"0 "

'"

The user-de tlned data ty pe UDT 65 TCON_

PAR contains the structure of the connection
data either for the commun ication connection
to the partn er device (protocols TCP native and
ISO-on -TCP) or for the conntttion to the comm unication layer o f the local operating system
(UOP protocol) ,
Vou require a data block w im this structure for
each cOlluection . For each connection. yoo ~at1
use your own global data block b ased on the
UDT. or y ou ean combine the data blocks in a
sh ared global data block.
The assignment of the variables depends on the
protoc ol and the devices use d (see Online Help
o f STEP 7)_ UDTs with differen t defaults are
stored in the library:
UOT
> UDT
> UDT
> UDT
> UDT
> UDT
> UDT
0

651: for TCp a cti ve

652: for TCP passive
653 , for ISO-on-TCP active
63 4 : for ISO-on-Tep passivc
655: for ISO-on-T CP active with CP
656 ' for ISO_on_ TCP passive with Cl'
657: for open UDP local

20.8.3 Oa'a runder " -ith Tel' n.th'e or

ISO...,n.TCI'

connection data. You can specify the ~nd trUlllbo~ with Iht pointer allhe DATA parameter.

The following function bl""'ks a.., available to

you for data lrarufor Wiln Ihe connec:lion-on_
emed protocol' Te l' nati>'e and ISO-on- Tel':

In the innial Siale. Ihe parsrneten; REO, BUSY.

to-

Fa 63 TSEND
Send data with loile c:onntion

> FB64TRCV
Receiw data "~th loiic

c:onn~

Dm,E and ERROR ha,'c signal state '-Q'" Stan

the data IllUlSfer ,,-jth a nsinll edge on the REQ
parnmeter. On the initial call wllh ~ 1 ",lhe dala
is fetched from !he aTea specified with the DATA panl!n~ter. The number of bytes <pCCificdat
the LEN param~tcr IS Sent. Their maximum
number depends on th-e c<>DI>e<:lion !)'pC:

You c~n find the paramelt., of tnis function

blocks in Table 20.26

You have to establish tnc connection to the panIlCT station with FB 6S TeON ~fOR Irnnsftrring the data (see Chapter 20.8.2, "Establishing
and clearing down connections'). Data can b<>
eJ<changcd simultaneously in both dtrt'C1ioos
ovcr the connection with FB 63 TSEND and fB
64 TRCV.
FR 63 TSEND

Send d.ta " 'it h 10llit <oonutlon

The function bl""''' FB 63 TSEND ~nds data
with the prolOCols Tel' n.th~ or ISO on Tel'
via an existillil communication conn~ction.
You can designate the communication c~_
tion by u,igning the If) parametcr, The specif,_
cation must ag= ""h the variable id in the

,-Tabl~

While tht job!J running, B USY - "1". The j ob

h-IIlI bttn 5U~ccssfull) eompleted ,,"hen BUSY ~
'-Q"'. OOl'o.'E ~ .. , ., and ERROR - '-Q" , If the job
routairu TOn;. BUSY - "0". DO'IE" ''0'' and
ERROR ~ MI". "fh<, error is then spified at the
STATUS parameter. BUSY. DOl\E and ERROR In ..,.,,,t 10 "1)" when RJ::O is returned to
"1)" ,

The data in .he send ana can then be modified

allain when either OO:>lE Of ERROR ha. signal
'tate "1".

20 26 Pamnc1 ..... fur FB 63 TSEND&Dd

.
FB 64 TltCV

~Q

""
rn
LEN

00""'

,UR

BUSY
[RROR
ST...TUS
RCVP_LEN

DATA

with FB

DllIlarion

Data I)'po:

BOO,

(:""'''''10, Lksc:riptiucl
S...,., data transfer ( ..ilh n5m, cdll")
FIl rudy 10 r~c<i, . (with "1")

WORD

Rc(oemu,,, LO <omttt,llticabon c:oon.<Iloo

".
" ,,.,"' '00'
"
,m
"
IIIIIfIina
BOO'
".
""'"
BOO,
"
"
""'" -,"" IN_OUT

...
..
....
..

""'-~

INPUT

1r-.'1'UT

l'umi:>er o(b)~.,

OUIT",

Job
("OM) or .~"'Ul"" without mwt (MI")
Sob runninll (""OM) or oomplmd (~ l i

OUTPUT

OUTPUT
OUTPUT

10 b. ><111 Of

r=i"t<j

Job being P""'~ ("I "') or has been oomplotM ("'0")

Error 0C'C\IrTt<I (&t -I i
Job <tatus. tmJr iJtfonnalion in tho .au of ERROR "

OUTPUT

WORD

0",""

~,

S\lmh<!- ofbyte< ICI'IIlIlly r... i,-t<j

Al'.'Y

SCIId Qf ~ei'-o mailbox

20 Main Program
With each s"bseq"~nt cali, another data blo<:k is
received

F1l64 TRey

Recc;,'e datA "ilh logle c()nncction

The function block FB 64 TRCV receives data
w ith the prolocols TCP nalive or ISO on Tep
vi a an exiSling communication conn=tion ,
Designate the communication connection by
assigning the 10 parameter. The spec ification
mu.<I agree with the vari able id in the connC~
tion data , Spcdfy the receive mailbox with the
pointer at the DATA paramctcr,
If the LEN pan/meIe r has 0, th ~

I~nglh sp~cified

in the DATA pamme t~r is used. Alief a data

b lock has been receiv ed. the numb"r of bytes
receivcJ is made a,'ailable on the RCVD_ LEN
parameter, and KDR is set t" s ignal sta te "I".
With t~C protocol Tep "mive, neither the length
of the mess.agc mme nor its stal1 or enJ are
transferred , So that the number of bytes sent i,
correctly received, the LEN parnmetcr at the fCceive mailbox must be assigned the ~ame value
as the L[,~ parameter at the send mailbox
If a larger value Ims becn sele~ted for th~ LEN
at the recci,'e mailbox, part of the fo llowing
message frame (from th~ nc"t job) w ill a l,o be
recciv eJ, NDR is only set to "1" when the pa ram eterized length has IX;<:n ",ached.
If a smalk-r value ha< been se lected for LEN,
NDR is s<:t to "I" when the parameterized
kngth is reachcJ, anJ the RCVD _LEN p arameter is "ssi~.'ned the number of received bytes .

In format;"n ab""t the length anJ end ofa mes_

sage mme is sent with the protocol ISO-on

TCf'. If LEN at the receive mai lbox is largcr
than at the send mailbox. the Sent data are received, KDR is set to " I ", Md the number ofrece ived bytes is " ritten in RCVD _ LEI'. If LEN
is ,mailer. an error mes.age is issucd: ERRO R
- "1 ". STA11JS - W#IMg08 8.

FB 64 TRey only receive. d ata when the EN_

R parameter ~"S signal state "I" .

"'"'0

While the job is ru""ing. B US Y The job

has be~"I1 succc>sfully completed when BUSY '"{)"'. ND R - .')"' and ERROR - "0". Ifthcjob
contains errors. BUSY - "0". NOR - "'0" and
FR ROR - "' 1", The error i, thcn spccifi ed at Ihe
STATUS parameter. BUSY, NOR and ERROR
are reset to "0" when EN R is returned to "0",
The data in the rcceive mailbox is consistent
when NDR has signal ,'atc " I " .

20 .1\.4 Data tra ns fer with UDP

T he foll"w iT1g blocks are avai lable to you for
data transfer with the connectionlcss UDP pro-

10col.
>

FB 67 TUSEND
Send data w ith UD P

Ta ble 20.27 Parameters for FB 67 TUSEND and FB 68 TURCV

fa"mt"te!":>

"0
1\'_

m
I.EN

DONE
~,

BUSY
ERROR
STATUS
RCVD LEN
DATA
ADDR

'"

Deebration
TNPUT
TNPUT

Data tYJ>'-'

" '"'"
"
". '"
"
" "
" "

""<IT
""<IT

WORD
INT

OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT

'OOC
BOOC
BOO'

'"
" '"
" '"

OOTI'UT
Th'_OUT
JK OUT

"ith I'B

" '"
.

,om
,om

BOO'

wo=

! Con'=';, Do'criplion

"l ~

""

A~

ANY

..

Start data tnlnSfer (with rising cd g~)

FE roady to rcc~ i " e (with"l '")
R~fcr=ce to the communication point
Number ofb;~cs '0 be .on' or received
Jot> runni ng (,il") or executed without erro,. (" t .. )
Jot> running (,,0") or completed C'l >0)
Job being proces;;ed (" I '") or has been completed ("0")
Enor occurred (at "' I ")
Job stanIS. crTor information in the ca<e of eRROR "lumber (}f b)1~' actually re<:eived
Send or =eivc mailbox
Pointer to the add .. " of 'he ,ender Of receiver

20.8 IE cOllllDWlieation

FB 6STIJRCV
R<;:<:el~e data with UDP

Uf)T 66 TADD_ PAR

Data ~trucrnre for th e partnor address

Table 20 ,27 shows the pa ramete~ 'Jf the function blocks, and Table 20,28 lihow~ the .truetun,: OrlM UDT
Yw ha~e to establish" C01U1lIon to the communication layer of the openlling system wilh
fB 6S TCON before UVlsfeninll the data (see
ChKpt.". 20.8 ,2, "Establishin8 and clearing
down oonnlio",'I, The K,Jdress of Ihe COlD_
munication partner is located in a data area Ihat
h~, the ,tru~t "r.: uf UDT 66 TADf) _PAR,

.. B 67 TUSl:"D
Se nd data wi th UDP
The function block FB 67 TUSEND ..,nds data
with the UDP prumco!.

The assillI\ment or the 10 parameter dcsillI\lltcs

Ih e connect ion betw""n the user program and
the communication layer of the operating 'y'_
tem, The value must agree with the variable id
in the con nection data , Specify the scnd mail.
bo~ with the pointer 3tthe DATA parameter,
The informatioD on the commuDicatioD parmer
is located iD. data area to ,.,h ich the poinler al
the ADDR panu:nctcr poinlS, With eacb new
$end job, the addr<:ss and thus the panner can be
changed without havina to redefine the commUDicalion aCCess point with FB 65 TeON,

"0'. DONE - .. ,'. and ERROR ...'0", If the job

contalll$ cnoT'S, BUSY '" .'0", DONE " ''0'" and
ER ROR .. .. \ ... Theerror is then 'peci fied at the
STATt:S rarametcr, BUS Y, DONE lind ER
ROR I\fC re,etto "0" wh~n REO is returned to

"0" ,
The ([,ata in the send area can then be moditied
again ",'hen either DONE or ERROR has signal
state ,'.

fB68T URCV
R~~~IH dlllM wilh UDP
The function block FE 68 TU Re V receives data with the UDP prut<><:ol.
The assignment of the I[) parltmeter designates
the conDcction between the U$CT proaram and
the communication layer of the openoting s)",tern. The ,'alne must ai:f'X' with tbe variahle iJ
in the eOllIlCClion dsla. Specif)' tile receive
mailbc.>x "'~Ih tbe pointer at the DATA fl'll'aDX'-

'cr.
The infonnation On the communicatlDD partner
is located in a data area!O wtti~h the pointer a,
the ADON. parumeter points,
The number of bytes to be rece ived i, oct at the
LEN parameter ( I to max. 1,460), After a data
block ba" been received, the number of bytes
recehed IS made available on the RCVD_LEN
pllnometCT, and NDR i. 5eltO signal stale " I',
Data is only received wben the EN R parame
tel' has signal stale "1'",
-

rtlmo:to:r, On the initial call with ",.', the data i\

fetched from the area ipe:cilied witb the DATA
parameter. Thenumbero f bytes ~cificd at the
LEI\ pan.mctcr ill sent (I to mu, 1,460),

While the job is running, BUSY _ "I", The job

has \'Iccn succnsfully completed whl'D BUSY "
"0", NOR ,," I" and ERRO R " "0", Ir the job
contains ('TY()1'5, BUSY" "0", NDR" ''O~ and
ERROR " '1 n , The C1T\)I' is then $pifted at the
STATUS parameter, BUSY, NDR and ERROR
.n: n:,;el to ''0'' wben ES R is returned to ''O~,

While ,he job is runnina, BUSY " ."'" The job

hal bn snccessfully oomplcted when BLSY -

The data in the =-~ivt\ area is

NDR hu signal state "I",

In the initial . tatc.the parameters REQ, BUSY,

DONE aDd ERROR have signnl "tate "0", Stan
data tr.n.fcr with a rising edge on the REQ pa.

consi~leDl

wbm

3"

20 Main Program

20.9 PtP communication

UD P (User Data Protocol)

Connection bUlldup is nol camed out with
UDP. The communication partner is spc~ified
at the ADOR parameter of the send b loc k (IP
address and 1'011 number). The receive block
.hen supplies th~ (I' address and the pol1 mun
ber of the sender at the ADDR parame'er.
The user-defined data type UDT 66 TADD_
PAR contains lhe struC.ure of the address infor
mation. The pointer at ADDR points to 3 da,a
arca with this structure .
W ith UDP. information on the length Bnd end of
a message frame i~ tran"f~ITed. [fLEN at the n;
~eive mailbox is larger, the sent data i, copied
to the receive mailbox. NDR is Set 10 " 1"", and
the number of received bytes is written in
RCVD_LEN. If LEN is smaller, an error meso
sage is issued: ERROR - " 1". STATUS W#16#8088 .

UDT 66 TADD _PAR

Data s tructure ufthe PQrtner addre ..
UDT 66 contains the stru~ture o f the panner address in the ~a'e of transfer with the UD P protocoL The ADDR parameter at the funct ion
blocks FB 67 TUSEND and FB 68 TURC V
points to a data area with th is stru~rurc

S.nd or eUent statton

UMI, program", the CPU
ASCII dr-Iv., "" 3~0!4R:
No SFS.,.. ' in the ~ ... r prog,am
.,.,..,uo,..... Iranofe,.

_
.,. -~ ==~;" _ 1I~'

:J

__

.... -.--J-

oo ",.

- ,,"

RK~12:

An SFa "-",, in In.

In. "ansfe,. A

~_ p~ram

"
-,
'
;
:
'
:
'
E
:J
a lso required.

conlrol.

.ynchroni='' ' DB i.

'~I -

~ ~:J . ~

Fla;:urc 20.2H Point.to .point Connection with S7300c

",

with S7-300C
20.9.1 Fnn d amelUal.
\\'hcn u,ing point -IO-point communicanon
(PtP), you transmit data over a .crial interface
10 a communications partner. e.g. a printer or a
SIMATIC $5 station. With cena;n S7300 compact CPUs, an RS 4 22/485 imerface (X,27) is
alre ady int egrated.
The communications connections arc specified
using the Hardware Configuration tool when
parameterizing the CPU's imerface properties .
ASCII mode , the 3964(R) procedure and the
RK512 computer coupling arc avai lable as
transmission protocols .
The communications function, are system
function b l ocks $FB wh ich are integrated in the
operating system of the S7.300C CPu. The
instance data blocks for these SFBs are present
in the user memory. The SFBs do not test the
parameters . if parameters are set incorrectly, it
may occur that the CPU goes to STOP. If you
USe the u-ansmi ssion protocol of the computer
coupling. " synchroni>:ation dala block ;s addi
tionally us~d (once for all computer coupling
SFB, in the user memory. Figu re 20.28).

Recetver statton or serv.r ... Uon

CPU
Use< p"""am In tn. CPU
<><-otino
.,....."

ASCII (1,iyw or 3!<0!4R:

An SF6 <oil "' ]h. u.er PfOIII'Im

"""trot. ,n. " . n.f ....

~".i----< ~
-.,..
-"""'-

B
S:l

~-

Cun fl~"rlnII'tP

commun;cy!lo n

lO.!U ASCn driver and 3\164(R) I,n)<ed " ,..,

Conf'gurntion tool to set the

pro\o<;ol in Ihc prop<.:r1ics windo'"
of the poinHo-poinl interface:
u~

Ihe

H~rdware

You can send and ,..,ce iv~ dala v,a the poinl-Iopoint cQnn~~lio n wh~n usinS Ihe ASC I1 driver
or Ih~ J964(R) procedure_ The following system function b locks are requll"<'d ;

Irnn~mis~ion

I>

ASCII mode
'f'he data are mmsmined as AS('U charneI~, The Ilanlimis>;ion is nOI acknowledged_
Sening ohignalassii'UJlC1llS and tnln'lmis--

:>

$ion parameters ~uch as baud rate. parity.

endof-Ie"t characler.

(>

SF13 60 SEND PTP

Send data "~th ASCn drive!" or 3964(R)
pro<.:edu,..,
SF13 61 KCV_PTP
dala with ASCII
procedure

Rec~ivc

t>

po

39 64 (R) pro<:wut'C
The data arc SCn! to the communications
punnC'!", and positively ncknowledged by
Ihi$ when recrived corr:dy. Setting of signal liS,ignment'l and tnlIl~missioD patamc_
lent ~och as baud rale. parily, block cheek.

po

I"r=<:n. in SFB

"0

IN_R

LAJ)OR

00"

""
'"'" ."
W

".
""
."

!IIDK

ERROR

'" " "

'" "- "., "" --

STATUS
SDMi
ROM]

<EN

"

Da:la..n",,,

SF B 62 RES_RevS

Table 20.29 ~bo"", the parameten Or!Moe system function bloch_

s~'n 60 S EN O]TP

Send d"t~ .. llh ASCIl driver or 3\164R

prundure
The iystem function blo<:k. srn 60 S E N\}_
PTP is u'~'(1 to send a data area 10 communication~ panner. Use th .. Hanlware Configunotoon tool 10 oct the transmission protOC<l I and
th .. transminion panometCl"$. Specify Ihe area
of dala to he tnlnsmil1e<i using the SD_ I
parameter. The length of the InInsmined data
Mea depends on the interface parameters. c.g .

Wilh The 3964(R) and RKSI2 lransmi~.ion protocoill, the communication, pouners must have
<lirr~-renl priorities in order 10 ddine lhe
sequence when ,..,quests tn transmit .'" sent
imu '''mcous 1y.

or J%4(R)

Dekle re,eive buITer with ASCli driver or

3964(R) procedure

RKSI2 computer coupling

D;ol& tnln5mission can be coordinaled by socalled ~ommun icatinn nag~. Data ree .. ipt
und th~ retching of dat a are acknowledged.
Setting of signa l assignments and transmis.ion paralJ1clcr;; such aj baud .... ,~, panty.
block cheek_

,-~

driv~'"

Data Typ.:- CQDICUt5, Oescripli""

Tnii<'" job ,,~th 5ianal taI ... Ml M

"'~u<

no,,,
""'"

TNl'tif

",X>c

Reccl"e CDlIblc
With MJ". ,he job i,

INPUT
OUTP UT
OUTPUT

WORD

Submodule odd",,,, of int",face

ROO'

Wi,h hi". 'he joh ;' .. ill ",,,,' ina

Wilh "' ]" . lIle job bas bc:-cn cumpl<'tod ",;,h
oot fauh
With Min rault ba< oooun-ed

I"PUT

Olm'u<

DUO!.

""'"

.bor1~

OUTPUT
INMOUT
INMOUT

WORD
A'<Y

Error inf<>rmarinn

Al'-'Y

Send mailbox
Recci,c lIilIilboA

TN_OUT

lNT

Numbcr of fran<mmod bytC5

20 Main Proaram
send up 10 lenglh specified by Ibe LEN panlmclef, or send up 10 an end-of-text cbanlcter,

S I-' R liZ RES_R eVB

Dele te r~h"e b uff" r ... ilh
3964R proeed u n

"scn d rl n

r or

With the ASCII driver, you can send lelellnlms

up to a length of 1024 hytes. SFB 60 SE~D_
PTP trnnsmils thc data in co""iSlenl blQCk. of
206 bytes, You mu.t n01 change Ihe data in the
~end Brea while the trunsmission i. runninll'

System function block SfS 62 RES_RCVIl

dektes the receive buffer of Ihe point-to-point
;merfa"e. A telegram received during the delele
operation i , exempted from this.

Sending is triggered by a tisinll .ignal edat' on

the REQ parameler. Wilh signalJ .tatu~ " I" on
the DONE parameter, the SFB signals llml the
job has bc<:n compleled succenfully. In the
event of an elTOI, the ERROR p"",mcter is SCI
10 "I" and the error information OUtpUI in Ihe
STATUS parameter.

Deleting is trigg~Ted by the <isin!! sill"al edge on

the R E;Q Jl'in>meter. Wilh ~ilOIlUI status "I" on tM
DONE parameter. the SI'B signals thai deleting
""" succe5sful. In Ihe event of an error, the
ERROR parumeler i. SL1 to "I~ and the error
informalion output in the STATUS pammetCT,
OOKE. ERROR and STATUSareonlyset forone
call at a time.

You ea" abon a ClltTent send job by meanS of

sign.1 statU! " I " on the R pa",meter, and reset
Ihe call instance to the basic state.
S,,'8 61 RCV_PT P
R eceIve d AIA wll h ASCIJ drin r O) r J964R
pr O)(cd urc
The system function block SFl:l151 RCV_?TP
;s used to rece;vc a d ata arca from a communi.
cati",,~ partner. Usc the Hardwarc Coniiguration tool to set the transmission prOlQCol and
the InlnSm;58ion paramelCTS. The received d".
ate enle~d into the ~a spedficd by the RD_I
parame ....T , The numbel- of received byles is
pnsenl in the LEN paramcter.
S1"'13 6 1 ReV _PTl' recdves the wna in conslslenl bloch of 206 bytes. You must nOt aceus
thc dalll in the receive a~a while the transmission is ronning.
The CPU's ;\1!cmal receive buffer has a size of
2048 byles, In the parameter sell;nas of th~
interfnce, you can al.o define whether you wish
to u~e the complete length oflhe reccive buffer
for data rece ipt or 10 limit Ihe nuruber of
r .....,eived tcle~m.'I.
A aignal Slatus "l~ on th<; FN_R pommeter
ernobles d!l1J, rcce;pl. The "'DR pammelCT has a
signal statu!> -I" ifnew da1J, have been receIved
5~es;sfully. In the event of an error, the
ERROR panlmete, ;8 SCt 10 'T' and Ihe CTTOI"
infonnation OIJIpUl in the STA11JS parameter.
You can abon a eUITCIII send job by meanS o f
signnl status "." on the R parameler, and re~el
the call instance to the basic state.

""

You can abon a eUtTent send job by mcans of

signal starus hl_ on Ihe R p.rametCf. and reset
the call instance 10 Ihc bIosic state.
20,9. 3 RKS I2 cornp ultr couplinll
With the point_to_point conneclion, you Can
send and rc.:eive data wuh applicalion of Ihe
RIO 12 computer coupling. The syStem function blocks required for thi, bre:
:>

S FB 63 SEr-'D_RK
Send data with RJ(j 12 compuler eoupl;nll

:>

SF Il 64 FETC H_RK
FCich data with RI(j 12 comp uter coupling

.. SFB 155 SERVE_RK

Rccei~'e data and make available wilh
RK512 cOmputeI coupling
Table 20.30 shows the pammelers of these
I~m fun<.:!ion hlQCu .
Sp~clnc atl o"

~y"_

of t ran sm lulon . r r.

SFB 63 SEND_RK sends from the area specified by SO_I, and addrencs a data block area
in the partner device. SFB 64 FETCH RK can
access all address areas in the partner device.
and S10Ies the fetcbed dala in Ihe data block
atea specified by the R D_ I pammett'1',
5FB M SERVE_RK can saVe received data in
a data block, and make daa available from all
address areas. The pcnnissible u$;pmcms for
the parameters are li.led in T"ble 20.31. Certain
values.re only meaningful in conjunction with
a SIMATIC S5 slation as Ihc pnnner device.

20.9 PH' communication ",;th S7_)OOC

Table 20 .311

,>

63

64

CPU

>,

SyncllronualloD data block

The system function blocks ofthecomput~r coupling work together with a .ynchronization data
b lock in addit;"n to the in,tance data block, and
thi' ,}nchronizes and comrols Ihc activities of all
"ompulcr coupling instances. The synch roniza_
tion data b lock is present on"" in the user memory. You ,hould create ;1 as a global data b lock
with a minimum Jengm of 24(J bytes. Ent<:r Lite
number of the data block in th~ SYNC_DB
parameter.
Coordination with communication flags

Rf"<:eipt of dat~ using the computer coupting

can be coordinated by eommun ieatwn flags. A
communication flag is a b it from the flag

address area F. Use a communication flag for

each transmis sion job, and specify it. addres' in
the R_CF _BYT and R_CF_ BIT orL_CF_ BYT
and L_ CF _ BIT parameters.
Iflhe local CPU is the client, the system func ti on block SFB 63 SEND RK i. used to <end
data and SFB 64 FETCH RK to fetch data.
Wh~n sending and fetching dnta from the partn~r CPU, the address o f the communication
flag i8 also included. Ifthi. communication /lag
in the part oer CPC has the signal ,tatuS '"0", the
partn~r CPU permits importing of the dala
package inlo the uSer memory in the ca.C of a
send job, and reading of the data pa~bge from
th~ u,er memory in the case ofa felCh job. Tbe
communi~ation nag is then set by the commu-

'"

20 Main Program
Tabl~

20 JJ Specification of Transmission A ",a

Pamtt.l>w;,' 'j ,

7:i1JC;

...

SI'Il64

S,nd da",

f<'" b u. ...

SFBM

~elT'

Pt<,..Wo.n
"f Jot"

m.

Oto 4

~,

C~

D.X

D,X.M ,
E.A, T. C

TY P!:',

CHAR

INT
INT

o to 255

o to 255

0 105 10

Ot051O

I)

10 2S!

Otol024

Ot01 024

,
,

DB}"O
DBl--'O
R OFFSET

,_

OFFSET

m'
~

.\1<aning

'SFB 65

0104

- CPU

"

SFB 6J

.-

,-

U M,
A. U

to n

>inglo_pTOec,"O!" mod~
0
num""r of CPU in multiprocessor mooo
D ~ d,ra blod. DB
X - exte nded dala block [)X
,1 _ fla~ memory "c~a
E - pmce image of inputs
A " proce,s iTIUl~~ of output>
T - t im er valoes
Z - counter val"e.
K umber of dal<O block (irre levant
with M, E. 1>., T and L)

c,

I to n

First byte with data block, (m u",

be an e' -en add",,,)
f ir;l byte w ith M, F. A, T . ndZ
T d~l"nm length

CPU-,peclli c

nications fimction to ind icate lhal lhe dala

rransm is"ion ha..; tak en place_ The data can lhen
be edited or preprocessed by the user program_
!f th ~ communication n~g is reSet by lhe u.er
program. lhe data transmission is (:nah led
again. The conilllllIli~ation flag in the partner
CPU therefore p<:rrn il' control o f d ata transmis . ion_

if lhe !()C s! CPU is the s~rver, the dSla a....,

received by SFB 65 SERVE_ RK it rhe client
sends data, or made available if the clicnt
fetches data. On lhe SfB, param~t erize lhe
loca l cOmmunicalion nag (in the ,erver) with
which you then control the rece ipt or provi;; ion
of data in the uSer pro!lf'lIIl. The SFB indicates
in t!1c L_ CF_ BYT and L_ CF BIT pacamclcrs
w hich conmmnication flag is used for the CUIccnt ly exe~ uled job and has becn set to '" I '" . t'o llowing processing of the data (fetching or p rovision again), reset the commun ication fl ag by
the program, lhns enabling processing of Ih(."
n=l transmission job.
SFB63S F.:'W _ RK
Send dara with RK512 computer coupling
Thc system funct ion block SFB 63 SbNU RK
is used to sen d a data arca to a commu nications

350

partner_ Cse t.ne Hardware Configuralion too l

to s~ t!he transmission p mloco l an d (h e transm is sion parameters _ S]X~ify the data arc" tu be
sent in the SD , p arameter. Enter th e length of
lhe ,en! dat a area in the LEK parameter. Note
lh m the number o f bytes must be e,'en.
SfB 63 SEKD_RK only l"'~n'mj" the data if
the commu nica tion nag in the communications
partner h.." the signal starn, "0'" _A Ie!cgram can
be up 10 ]024 by tes long, The <lam are transm itted in COns iSlent blueks of 128 bytes . You mo,t
!lot change the data in lhe send ar<:a while a
tmnsmiss ion is laki n g p la~c.
Sending is triggered hy lhe rising s ignal edge on
lhe R E Q param etcr. W ith signa! statu., ") "' on the
OONE pammeter, {he SFB signal> that thc joh
was comp!ek"(\ ,u~~c,"ful!y. In the event of an
~rror, the ERROR param~ {~-r is set to '", .. and
(he e tTOr infonna{ion 01ltput in the STATUS
parameter_
YOll ean abo rt a CUTTent send j ob by me ans of
"ignal statos " )"' on lh e R pammet~.,., and reset
{h~ call instance to th~ basic stale _

20.10 Configunotion io RUN

SFB 64 F"ETCH_RK

tnllIsmission is oontroUed by u communicalion

}<'1.'tch d"t& with the RK 5 12 co mputer eou_

flag in Ihe U5er program.

]>lIn~
!iy~teIll function block SF8 64 FETOi_
RK is used to fetch a data. area from u commu -

The

nications parmer. U.e the Hardwan: Configu

rallon tool to set the tran smiSSion protocol and
the transmission parumetC1"S. The fetched data
are entered into the a...,a specilied by the RD_ I
parameter. The number of received b)1e; is
pres~.., t in Ihe LEN pammeter.
SFI:I64 FETCH_RK ,,,,Iy fe tches the data if the
communication flag in the communications
pannCf has the si gnal SI~tuS '""0". A telegram can
be up 10 1024 bytes long. The data are transmit_
ted in oons;stCflt bl""'ks of 12g bytes. You must
nOI change the dalB in the !II:Rd area while a
transmlnion is taking place.
You cnobk the fetching of data by means of,ignul5taWS "1" in the EN_R ]lnram ~tcr. Si~'llal
.t8lU~ "1" in the NDR p urameter indicales Ihal
new data have been fetched liuccessfu ll y. In the
event of an error, Ihe ERRO R parameter is sct
to " 1" anod the error infonnulion output in L;,e
STATUS parameter.
You can aborr a cur...,111 fetCh job by m ..ans of
signalstatuB '-In on Ihe R PMramcte . and fe.el
Ihe e~ll instance 10 the buic stue.
SFB 65 SERVE_RK
Rfef lvf datA ~nd mRk~ M~ M l1Mh lc with the
RK512 c"mputer c"upllng
The system function bk>ck Sfl:l6S SERVE_RK
hili the server functionality fOT the RJ(5 12 com
puler coupling. II accepts I dati an::a sent by "
eommunic",ion~ pal1 ner. and makes B data lITell
available "'hi eh is felched by a eommuoieation ~ !lartner. TIle received dUln, or data made
avai lable. are entered in lO the area specified by
the L TYPE. L DBNO und L OFFSET
paramel.. rlI. The nu--;"bcr o f lrensmir.c:d byte, is
present in the LEC<>I paramcl~'T.
SFlJ 6S SERVE_RK Iransmii5 the data in consislent bl"",,,", of 128 byte~. You must not aeees.
Ihe data in the mtnsmission area while a tranSmi~sion i~ taking place. Coordination o f d~ta

You cnuble process ing of Ihe job by sign al staNS "j" in th .. nCR parumctcr. Signal Stat"s
"1" in Ihe NOR parameter indi~Bu,s that new
da\.a have been ""cces~fully rec .. i,ed o r
fetched. In the event of an error, !be ERROR
pan.metc:r ;5 Se1to "1 ~ and lbe error in fonnation
ourput in the STATUS parametc:r.
You

~un

Slatu~

abon a current job by m .. ans of signal

'"]"' on the R

p~r~mctcr.

Imd resel th e

call instanc e to the basic state.

20.10 C onfiguration In R UN
Confiiuration in RUN (CiR) means that
chanlles to the system can be made dwing operation. Thi. functionality permits you to change
Il,e configurat ion o f the dislrib tncd I/O of an
S7-400 station Wilhout Ihe CPU enlering STOP
or hll ving to be .et to STOP.
The ]"IO~ible chang~..,. induOc the add ition of
compaCt DP sla\',,'<, ET200M !>l8tions and PA
master SY$tcms to an exi~tinll Dr ma~"1"r systc:m. Ihe addilion of modules 10 T200M ~lB_
rion . tmd the addilion of PA slaves (fiel d
d~vlces) to exisling PA master ~y"em'. All
objecls adder! d uring runtime ean also be
removed all" in (Figure 20.29).
Pr..requtsites and hmJlalions Clt,st ill add1l101l to
th.. faCI that all involved devices must be able to
handle Ihe CiR funcrionalny. For example. Ihe
PROFIBUS OP m3SlcrsyslClO must be 8 mOnoll\II,tet" sylilem and musl nOI cxhibit constant
bus cycle times, tbe useofintelligetu DP .laves
is nol p.. rmi .,iblc in the !lSSOdUled stal'nn co,nponents, and the module paramctent must be
saved on Ihe C PU.

Component., ""Ih and withoul Cil{ fu nct io nality can be mixed: however. changes are only
possible on componentS wilh CiR capabil ily.
During n.-con.figumtiOlL processing is mtcrrupto..i
for a dton period (typically 1 liI, can be progranli1lW). The time can be kCJlI short if only a
f~"W

change>; /Ire alway. came<!

QUt.

'"

20 Main Program

Configurat ion in RUN (CiR) is

possible for .e,'eral DP mastcr <ySlL-rrl"
PA master s ystems and lOT 200M stations,

Place holder for subsequently added OP sla,-. ,

(contains the mal[, numbor of a,lditional slaves and
the uppcr limits of the additional uSer data volume)
module
Place holder for subsequL..,lly added modules
(oontain, the uppcr limits of the additional
u'er ,bta ,'olume)
DPIPA

coupl" ,

",,",,,,,",,,,1 dovic..$)
Pboe holder for subsequently added PA slaves
(c{mtain< the max, !t umber of a,lditional field devices
and the upper lim its of the additionalll!icr data volume)

20.10.1 P rep a r ation o'-Changes I"

Configuration

required input and output bytes by c licking the

control box "Enhanced selling ''',

ConfiguTC an S7-400 station (CPU w ith [lIllI'

ware release V3.1 or later) with at least one
PROFIBUS DI' master system using the Hard,
ware Configuration tool. Then add the Ill'
slaves and - ifcnvisagcd the dunilllY valn .. s
fnr later system expam ion (CiR object under
PROF IBUS DI' in the hardware cBtBlog) , Set
the later ma}<ltnum eonjjguration in the propertie., of this dnmmy value. The Hardware Configuration tool cale(llate. 244 input bytes :md
244 ,"'tput bytes for each additional DP s la,-c_
In reality, far fewer (lSeI' data are nsnaHy
J"Cquired, You can change thc IOtal of all

y,,,, Can also provide srace in an ET200M station for later expansions . Add a station with an
imerface module JM I 53-2BAOO-OXBO or better to the DP mastor system, and acti vate the
checkbox "Module replaeemem during runt_
imc" on t.he "Special" lab in the propertics of
the station, The active bus modules r.. quired to
caoy out Ihe mOdule replacements are d is played ill the boltom window area (they are
required Tor the mechanica l de.<ign. but are nOl
configured ). It i. recotn m~n dablc to fit the
ET200Jl.-l stmiDn with active bus modul es up to

20. I 0 Confil"",tion in RUN

Inc p lanned configurnlion since Ihey must nOt

be ;n""ned or removed during nmumc.
You ean now insert modules into the EnOO~1
station and - if you wish to carry OUI laler
upamiolL'l ~Iso a dummy dire<;tly following
lIlc las. configured module (the objt CiR
mod,"e under the used 1M 153 in Ihe hardware
cata log). Set the required number of additional
input and OUlPUI byles in the properties of the
CiR module.
If you wish to "-"tend a PA mastcr system connted to tbe OP mastef:lystan. ust an 1M
OAA82-OXAO or better .... hc OP/PA link. A
dummy i, also provided for lhi$ for subsequent
e"pansion wilh field devices (CoR objl!C/ under
the used 1M I ~7 in Ihe hardware ealaIoa). SCI
lhe required number of additional InpUt and
OIltput bytes in the propoenies of tbe Ci R module.
With the CiR-capable 01' master syStem
marleed and by using EDIT ..... ?>1ASTER SYST"-"
~ ENABLE CIR CAPABILITY, a CiR object is
aencrnled on the DP master syStCfIt and on
every subordinate PA master ~yslem with CiR
capability. A CiR module is insened InIO each
ETIOOM statton with CiR capability. All CiR
objts and CiR modules an: deleted -.gain
using EDIT ..... MASTER SySTEM ..... DISAIILE
OR CAPABlLrrY.

n7-

20.1 0.1 C hllnge Co nfigura tion

You can DOW ~hanac the confiiUf'llion within
lIle limit!; specified in the CiR elements, and
load again in RUN . P0$5iblc modifications arc:
I>

I>

Adding of~ompW and modular DP slaves

to an e"i,lin& DP master systcm (Ihe added
slaves musl have ~ higher PROfl8US
address than the largest addrcM previou;;ly
used)
Otanging of assignment of partial proce..
image with existing DP slavcs

I>

Adding of PA slaves (field devices) 10 an

ex isting PA mastcr system

I>

Adding of DPIPA couplers aftcr an 1M 157

interfu~e module
Adding ofDP/PA links indudlOg PA mastCr
system 10 an ex;sling DP master syStem

I>

I>

Adding of modules to an ET200M station

p.

Changing of module parameters in an

ET200M station (c.g. n",w or modified
assignment to a partial proces, image, activation of previously unused channels)

:> Cancellation ofabo.e-mentioncd modificatiODS (starring at the higllnt Bddre.,..,,; for

modulcs and slaves)

The tOl81 of configured (real, immediately
used) addres~es IIDd thc addresses for future use
must not be g~ater than the quantity frameworX of the DP master <i$ checked durina eOllfigurllli), but em be larger than the quantity
framework of the CPU (is only cbecked when
convcr1ing' into specific slaves or modules).
During a Cdt proc ess, the configuration ~an be
on a =imum of 4 DP mastcr syStems. Un<Jer eertain conditions il is recommendable or even essential to carry out the CiR
process more than oncc. If, for example. moduleS or ,la\'cs are to be replaced by others, thc
coI5J101lding component must be rcmov~"4
first. and the r.-placement added in a second
CiR process.
~hanged

10.10.l Load Con filCuration

The (inirial) loading of a configuration with
CiR dC11"lenl$ or uith a modified CiR configu_
ration is carried oUl with the CPU in th", STOP
statuS. In order 10 ~he<:k whelher the CiR capability is ulw present. you should subs.equemly
load Ihe CiR configuration _"lin in RUN. TeslIna for CiR eapo.biloty usinll STATION .....
CHECK CtR COMPATIBILITY is not 100% posSi_
ble omi~. I'or example. the CiR synchronization timc cOIlld be limited by the SFC 104 CiR.
To k~ the CPU in the RUN stams during the
CiR process. you must make sure Ihat intCTTUpts
from unknown components are ignored. A corTCSJIOIldina program mUSt be present in the following organization blocks:
I>

,
,

Process imtmJplS OS 40 to 08 47
Timing error 08 80
DiaanOSlic interrupt Oil 82
Hot swapping interrupt OU 83
Program I!"xurion fault 08
Rack failure 08 86
J,O atC(!5S fault 08 122

8~

20 Main Program
When adding m odules or slaves, you .hould
first load the configuration and then th~ matching u.er program . Whcn removing modules and
,laves, lirst load the aJaplcd U'le. program and
then lh~ ",od;:fi~"<I contigueat;on. Adding or
rcmov ing rea l modul~s or ,Iave.< tm..~t only be
carricd out foll"wing loading of UlC modified
confi guration (whcn the DlTF LED on the C PU
has gone off) _
'Vilen R-parameterizing modul es you must frrst
load a user program which no longer addresse,
the ao;.~ociated modules or no longer cvah,ate,
their imcrrupts _Then I"ad the moditied c"nfIg uralion, change the hardware if necessary. and
lo ad the ul;<.... program a daplcd to the moditica tion_

20.10.4 CiR Syn chroni:tRtioD Time

FoU"wing load ing of the new configuration
imo lhc CPU, the new data are checked and
imp<ln~d ;IItO th e curren t configuration if corteet. This importing requires a c~'r\ain time. lhe
so--called CiR syncbroni:tati"n tim;: Process
execution is inK-rrupted during lhis period.
The CiR synchroni:talion time is calculal<:d
from the total of the Cil{ s yn~hronization
times of aU UP and Pi\. mast~r systems
iml, lved. The synchronization time for a ma, ter system de p"nds on the CPU used and on
the real and p lanned VO volumes in lhis masICt system. This time is indk ate<j by the HmdWaJ'C Contlguralion 1001 in the prop~rtics of
the eiK object in th~ master syslem. The WOTSI
case is always calcula1~d, so thai the acmal
CiR ,<ynchronvatioll lime is ,hon~r. The 'Y"chronization limC is lOOms if only mod"le<
are rcparameteri:ted_
The CPL' compares the ca lculated C iR synchronization lime w ilh the p~-nnissibk upper
limit , whos~ default setting is 1000 m . Yo"ean
cha nge thi, "prer limit l.I,ing the Sl'C 104 CIR
If Ihe calcu la ted CiR synchroni7.ation time is
gn;ate r lhan this upper limit, lhe ~hange in configurat ion is nol carried out .

354

20.10.5 Effect. lIO Program Execn tioD

ExecUlion of the user program is stopped during tlte CiR synchronization lime . All process
images retain thelT lasl va1"",. TIle SlMATIC
limer, and Ih e CPU cloci:: continue. Any interrupt'! whi ch occur are only processed al the end
of tlte CiR ' yncmonization time_ Communicalion Wilh a connected programming device is
limiled; only the STOP conUlland is accepted.
Following syn"hroni~alion. th c CPU slarts the
organizat.iol1 block all ~o "Timing ~rror" with
lhe value W#I6#350A in the firsl word of the
,tatt inronnation (vHriables OB80J'V _CLASS
and OBSO_fLT_1D). Tho r~quired CiJ{ syn chronization lime in ms is presenl in the "ariablc OBSO_ ERROR_ INFO.
lfmodule. are 10 be repammet~ri / ~d, Ihe CPU
lh en slans Ih", organizalion b lock OB S3 "Hot
s wapp ing in1~nupt" with the value W1l16#3367
in th~ f,rst word of the sl.art infomlation (varia bles OB83_ EV_CLASS and 013~3_FLr_ m).
The rnodul~, are subseqn ently reparameterized_ It ca ll occur that the a>soc iatcd modules
do nol deliv er va lid vall'CS in the meamim".
Follow in g rcpa.rameterization, lhe CP U starts
II", all 83 again, lhis tim~ with W~ 16#3267 in
lhe flI SI wwd of the ~Iart in formation. FauUy
reparameterization is signaled by \\'# 16#3968.
Th ~ associated modules arc Ihcn cons idered as
not avail<,ble. The d<:s~ri bed proc edure; s execUl ed in cach maslcr 'ystem which is affected.

20 .10.6 Control CiR Process

You can use the SFC 104 crn 10 b lock lh~ CiR
proce" in th~ us~... program, 10 limit it for a cert~in period. OT 10 enable it . The Sl'C parameter;
"rc li.ted in Tnble 20 .32 .
MODE ~ B#16#OO deJiv~'l's lh~ eurremly yalid
upper limit for the CiR ">~lchron i zntion lim e
MOUE - B#16#0 1 _,ets the CiR s)llchronizalion time to the default value 1000 ms anJ
e n ables ~x~culion of th~ C iR prnees ._ MOUF D#16#02 lIl1condhi onally d isables the CiR pro<:CS$, MODE ~ 13#16#03 only disables it iflhc
C iR synchronization lime calc"laled in the
CPU is gr~aKT than Ihal spcci tled in thc FRZ_
TL\1 parameter

20.10 Conf,gura.ion in RUN

Tobie 26 ..32 ParameterS of tile SFC 104 CI R

,;
BIII6/!IOO:
S "15itIOL

S"I6Kl2,

,""lomIT--tru"'__tiS"I~);

21 Interrupt Handl ing

21 Interrupt Handling

Intenupt handling is always event-driven.

When such an event occurs, the operating system intemlpts scanning of the main program
and calls the rouline allocated to this particular
eVCllt. \\'hen this routine has executed, the
op..'t"ating system resumes scanning of the main
program at the point of inte!T'Uption . Such an
interruption can take place after every operation (slatement).
Applicable events may be interrupts and errors.
The order in which vinually simultaneous
interrupt events arc handled is regulated by a
priority scheduler. Each evcnt has a particular
servicing priority. Several interrupt events can
be combined into priority classes,
Every roUline associated with an interrupt event
is written in an organization block in which
additional blocks can be called . A higher_prior_
ity event interrupts execUlion of the routine in
an organi'~a\ion block with a lowe r priority. You
can affect the interruption of a program by
high-priority events using system functions.

[>

[>

[>

)0

Hardware interrupt
An interrupt from a module, either via an
input derived from a proce," signal or gen erated on the module itself
DPVl interrupt
An interrupt from a PROFTDUS DPVI
slave
Multiprocessor interrupt
An interrupt generated by another CPU in a
multiprocessor network
Synchronous cycle interrupt
An interrupt from a PROFTDUS Dr master
synchronous to the DP cycle

Other interrupt evems are the synchronous

errors which may occur in conjunction with
program scanning and the asynchronous errors,
such as diagnostic interrupt' The handling of
these events is discussed in 23. "Error Handling",
Priorities
An event with a higher priority interrupts a pro-

gram bcing processed with lower priority

21.1 General Remarks

SIMATIC S7 provides the following interrupt
events (interrupts j:
[>

[>

Time-of-day interrupt
An interrupt generated by the operating system at a speci fic time of day, either once
only or periodically
Time-delay int errupt
An interrupt gl-"Ilerated after a spec ific
amount of time has passed; a system function call determines the instant at which this
time period begins
WatChdog interrupt
An interrupt generated by the operating system at periodic intervals

SFC 41 DIS_AIRT and SFC 42 EN_AIRT (see

356

because of another eVent. The main program

has the lowest priority (priority class 1j, asynchronous errors the highest (priority class 26),
apart from Ihe stan_up routine. Al l other events
are in the intervening priority classes. In 57300 systems, the priorit ies arc ftxed; in 57-400
systems. you can change Ihe priorities by
parameterizing the CPU accordingly.
An overview of all priority classes, together
with the default organization blocks for each, is
prcsente<\ in Cbapter 3. 1.2, "Priority Classes".
Disabling interr up ts
The organization blocks for event_driven program scanning can be disabled and enabled
w ith system functions SFC 39 DIS_IRT and
SFC 40 EN_1RT and delayed and enabled with
Chapter 2 I .9, "Handling IntCTYUpt Event, "j.

21.2 Timc-<J f-Day Interrupts

Curr~n '

sign a l . tat e.

In an int~rrup1 handling routine, one of the

r,-"<\uircment s is tha' you work with the CU!Tent
signal states of the [10 modules (and not with
thc signal statcs ofthc inputs Ihat wcrC updated
at the start of the main program) and write the
fetched signal states direci to Ihe VO (not waiting until the process-image output table is
updated at the end orthe main program).
In the case of a few inputs and outputs for the
internJpt hamllit1g routine. it is enough to
access the 110 module. di=t with load and
transfer operations (AWL) or with the MOVE
box (lAD. FIlD). You are recommended here
to maintain a st rict separat ion benveen the main
program and the interrupt handling routine with
regard to the lIO signals .
If you w:mt to process many input and output
signals in the interrupt hand ling routine, the
solution on the S7-400 CPUs is to use subprocess im" g~s. \\'hen assigning addresse" yo"
assign each module to a subprocess image.
With SFC 26 UPDAT]! and SFC 27 UPDAT_
PO, you updat e the subprocess images in the
user program (sec also Chapter 20 .2 . I , "Process
Image Updating").
On new S7_400 CPU" you can assign an input
and an output subprocess image to each interrupt organizati on b lock (each interrupt priority
clas,) and so cause the prn<;css imagcs 10 be
updated automatically when the interrupt
oceurs _
Sta rt in formacio n, tempor ary local data
Every organization block deliv<.-'TS the start
in fom lation in the fi rst 20 bytes of its tempomry local data . You can generate the declaration of the stan infomlation using own data
yourself. or you can usc the temp lates from the
Standard Library under Orga";"ario,, Blocks.
In S7-300 sy,tems. the avai lable temporary
local data have a fixed length of 256 bytes per
priority class. In S7-400 systems. yow can specify the length per priority class by parameterizing the CPU acconling!y (parameter block
"local data"), whereby the wtal may nol exceed
a CPU_specifLc maximum. NOIe that !he m ini-

mum number of bytes for temporary local data

t"r the priority class used must ~ 20 bytes so
a, to be able 10 accommodate the staT1 information. Specify zero for unused priority dasses.
Note that you can only dirc<.-1ly read Ihe .tart
information of an organization block in lh~
block ilself. since temporary local data are
involvcd_ If you alw require values from the
start infonnation in blocks which arc located in
lower call levels, call the system funclion SFC
6 RD_SINFO at the CO!Te'ponding point in the
program (see Chapter 20_2_5. "Slart Information") .

AClual interrupt informat ion

B)1es 4 to II of the staT1 information in the
interrupt organization b lock contain the information specific to the triggered interrupt. In
many ca<;cs, the components triggering the
interrupt deliver additional information which
you can then r~ad in the interrupt organization
b lock using the system function b lock SFB 54
RALRJ>..l (see Chapter 2) .9.3, "Reading addi!ionallntcrrupt (nformation").

21.2 Ti me-of-D a y Inte rrupts

Time-of-day interrupts are used when you want
10 T1'" a program at a panicular time . e ither
once only or periodically. for instance dai ly. In
STEP 7. organization b ln<;ks OB 10 to OB 17
arc provided for servicing time-of-day interruptS; wh ich Oflhcse eight organization blocks
are actually available depends on the CPU
used.
You can configure the time-of-day internJpts in
the hardware eonfigurlllion data or control them
at rtInlime via the program using system funclions. The prerequisite for proper handling of
Ihe time-of-day interrupts is a correctly set real time dock on the CPU.
Table 21 . I shows the start infonuation for thc
time_of-day interrupt . The du.mmy val ue ""
rcp""scnts the number of the associated interrupt organization block 10 to 17.

21 Inkrrupt lIandling

Performance characteristics during _.tartllp

Int~rrupt.

21.2.1 Handling Time-of-Day

During a cold re,tart or warm ""'Iart, the op~"-

ating system clears all sell ings mad~ wi tJ,
SFCs, Selling' made via the hardware con figLlmtlOn data are relatHcd. Un a hot re start, the
CPU resnmc~ servicing of the lim e-of-day
interrupts in the fi rst complete ,can eye le of the
ma tH program _

Cen ... r~1 remarks

To start a time-of- day interrupt, you must fi rst
set the star! ti m e , then activ~ te the interrupt,
Y"u can perfoml the two a~tiviti c, separately
via the h~rdw~rc configuration data or us in g
SFCs , Note tbal w hen activated via th e hardware configuration data , the time -of-day intcrntpt is started automatically follow ing parameterizati on of the CPU ,
You can start a time-o t-day interrupt in lWO
",'ays:
t>

<>

Single-shot' th e re levant OB
only at the specified tim~, Or

j<

You can query th e status of Ihe time -of-day

interrupt.'< in lhc st"rt -liP OB by ca lling SFC 3 I .
and subsequ<:r>tly c a n ~c l Or re-Set and rca~ ti vate
the interrupls. The time-of-day interrupts a""
service d only in RUN mode.

called o nce
Performance characteristic. on error

PeriodicalJy: depen d ing on Ihe parameter

lISsignme nts, the re le vant OB i. started
every minute. hourly. da ily. weekly,
tnonthly or y early.

Following a single-shot limc-of-day int~rrup t

OB call, the timc-o r-day interrupt is ~~ neckd
You can HI,,, cancel a time -of~day interrupt
wilh SFC 29 CAN_TINT.
If you wnnt to un~e again use a canceled tim e
of-day inlcrrupl, you must set Ihe s tart time
again, then reaClivate the interrupt
You can qLlery the statu, "f a timc -ot:day internlpl with SFC 31 QRY_ TlNT.

If a tim e-o t: day interrupl 013 is called but was

not prognuIlmcd, the operating system calls UB

S5 (program e.~cclltion error). IfO B 85 was not

programmed, the CPU goes to STOP.
Tim~-of-day

interru pt. that were dc sdcc led

when the CPU was parameterized cannot be
servic ed. even when (h ~ rekvan!
is avai l_
able. The CPU goes to STOP.

as

If you a~tivate a time-of-day interrupt on a ~in

gk-shol basis, and if tbe start time has a lready
passed (from the real-time do~k'" point of
vicw), the operatin8 syslem calls OB 80 (liming

Thble 21.1 StarllnfQrmatio n lo,- Time-o f- Dav [nterrup"

Byte

VariabLe Name

Il.!a Type

Ileseription

Cnnt.nt,

Olhx EV CLASS

IlYTE

b.nt elMS

11,,16#11 - UP

~,

BYTE

Start ,oquest for the

interruplOl3

B "'I6'!'II- OB.ll

O BH PRIORiTY

BYTE

Priority cla"

lJefault value 2 for all tim e -nf.day

mtefTUl'''

BYTE

all ,,-umber

B# 16"""

BYTl'

R e se,Ye <l

BYTE

Re,cned

WORD

lnt",",'~l with OBs

called p<riooi(-a l1y

Se e dc><cription of
S~C lH SET

I}lT

I{esen:.-d

'"
DII1'Io_A.'I'D -

R C;<Tved

OExx STRT

,
,
,
,

OBx~

OB NUMBR

Olh,x J/FSERVllD

O B xx RESERVED

6 .. 7

O lh ~ _ PERIOD_ EXE

8.. 9

aBxx RLSERVl';O

OBu R ES ERVED

"

""
xx

-',

08",,_ DATE TTlvfF

T IMF.

''''''"><'Dc, th e OB numbe" 10 to 17

OccUITc'ncc of
C'"Oo.t

~\'~nt

,m,

Call c<l time ofOB

'.'

11.2 Time -of- Day Intcmlpls

is nOI available, the CPU goes

when more tban 12 interrupt cwnts with the

same priority ","cur .imultaneously.

If you adivate a lime-o f_day interrupt on a periodic basis, and if the start time has already
passed (from the real-time clock '. point of

The -'Acti\'c" option a ctivate, automati c Starting of the time-of-day interrupt. Thc "Execution" option screens a list whi~h allows you to
choose wbether you want the OB to execute on
a single-shol basis or at specific interval,. The
final parameter is the sian time (date and time).

error). IfOB
to STOP,

~O

view). Ihe time -of-Jay interrup1 OB is executed

Ihe nexl time {hm time period comes due
If you set lhe real-time clock ahead by more
(han approx. 20 s, whether for the purpose of
corre<:tion or synchroni Ultion, thus skipping
over the Slatl lime for the time-Qf-day interrupt,
the operating system call. OB 80 (tim ing error),
T he time_of_day interrupt OB i , then executed
precise]yonce.
If yo ... set the real-time clock back by more than
approx. 20 s. whether for the purpose ()f correc t; ot) or syn chronization, an activated time-ofday interrupt OB wi ll no longer be executed at
the il1stam8 which are already past.

If a time_of_day imerrupt OB is still executing

when the neXt (periodic) call occurs, the operat ing system invokes 09 80 (timing error) . When
OB 80 and the time-or-day imerrupt 09 have
executed, lhe timc-otCday interrupt 09 is
restartcd

\\'hen it save, the hardware configuration,

STEP 7 writ es the compiled data to the System
Data object in the offline user program Rlocks.
From here, you can load the parameter assign ment data into the CPU while the CPU is at
STOP; thcse data then go into force inunedi ate ly.

21.2.3 System Functio n, for Time-of-Day

IDt~r rupts

The following 'ystem functions can be used for

time-of-day interrupt control :
"

SFC 2g SET_T INT

Set timeof-day interrupt

"

SFC 29 CA'-I_T1NT
Cancel time-of-day interrupt

;>

SFC 30 ACT_T INT

Activ.te tirne-of day interrupt

t>

SFC 31 QRY_TrNT
Query time-of_day interrupt

Dlubling, delaying and enabling

Time-of-day interrupt 09 calls can lYe disabled
and enablcd with Sl'C 39 DlS_IRT and SFC 40
EN _IRT, and delayed and enablW with SFC 41
DlS_ AIRT and SFC 4 2 EN _AIRT.

21,2 .2 Conligudng T1m~-of- Day Intprrupu

with STEP 7
Th e time-of-day interrupts arc confi gured vi"
the hardware configuration data. Opcn the
s.cle~ted CPU with EDIT ~ OalECT PROPERTlES and choose the "Time_or_Day" tab from
the d ialog box
In S7 -300 controllers , the processing priority is
permanently set to 2. In S7-400 controllen;, you
can set a priority between 2 and 24, depend ing
on the CPU, for each possible OB; priority 0
deselects an OR You should not assign a priority more than onc~ , a~ interrupts might be lost

The param eters for these systo m functions arc

listed in Table 21.2.
SFC 2g SET _T1!\'T
Se t time_af_da)' inte~rnpr
You determine the ,tart time for a time-of-day
interrupt by calling system function SFC 28
SET_TINT SFC 28 selS only the 5tart time ; 10
start the time-of-day interrupt DB, you mu",
ac{ivat~ the tIme-of-day int errupt with SFC 30
ACT_ Tl1\'T. Specify the ,tart time in the SDT
p arameter in the formal DATE_AND_TThlE,
for in'tancc DT#1997-06-30-08:30 The operating system igoores seconds an d milliseconds
and sets thC8e values {O 7ero. Selling tho start
time wil l overwrite the old start time value, if
any. An active time -of-day interrupt is can_
celed_ that i~, it mu,t Ix: l"\:acti,"al~d

21 Interrupt Hamll i,,!!

Table 21.2 SFC Paramete rs for Time_of_Day interropts

"ME

\\"#16#0401
\",#16>11001
\>,"#16111201
"'.-"#16#1401

SFC 30 ACT_TiNT
Activate t1me-of-day interrupt
A time-of-day interrupt is activated by calling
system fnnction SfC 30 ACT_TINT. When a
TOD interrupt is activated. it is assumed that a
time has been set ror 'he interrupt. If. in the case
of a single-shot interrupt, the SIan time is
already past, SFC 30 repons an error. In the
ca.~e of a periodic stan, the operating system
calls the relevant OB at the ncxt applicable
time. Once a single-shot time-of-day interrupt
has been s<.-'fViced. it is, for all praeti~al purposes, canceled. You can re-set and reactivate;t
(for a different start time) if desired
SFC 29 CAN_TINT
Cancel time-of-day Interrup t
You can delete a stan time, thus deactivating
the time_of_day interrupt, with system function
SFC 29 CAN_TINT. The respective 08 is no
longer called. If yo" want to use this sarne time of-day interrupt again. you must fIrst set the
start lime, then activate the interrupt.

SFC 31 QRY_TlNT
Query tlme-of-day Interrupt
You Can query the status ofa time_of_day interrupl by calling system function SFC 31 QRY_
TfNT. The required information is r~turned in
the STAruS parameter.
When the bits have signal state 'T', they have
the following meanings'

TOO interruP I disabled by operating system

1 New TOD interrupt rej(X;ted

2
3

4
5

TOD interrupt not acti vated and not expired

( - Reserved-)
TOO interrupt 08 loaded
No disable
(and following: - Reserved_)

21.3 Time-Delay interrupts

A time-delay interrupt allows you to implement
a de lay ,;mer indep,,,,dcm ly of the standard timers. In STEP 7, organization blocks OB 20 to
08 23 are sct aside for time-delay interruplS;

!1.3 n"",. Ocl aylnremrpt>c

Tlohle 21.3 sun Inr""""tiOll roo TUM-D. lay IDle""",'

IIY'O-

v.ti~\)~

'1.mo

0.1.a TJipe

De<criplion

Con""n"
fl#l ~~ 11 _ lIT' evonl

OB"" FV CLASS
OB"-'._STRT_INF

BYTC
BYTE

Event. 01
5t"" requ.e.t for lho
inlc"fTllpt OB

OBu_PRlORITY

n YTF

I'riorily clhS

Ikfioult "~l","" J ~o 6

BYTE

011 """,lin

(OB !O '" OU 23)

R"16or<x

'Ynl

Rc>e1""\"ed
R......".,...J

WUW

lob idcnl,/iC"tion

,
,
,

ODu RESIlRVtO

~,.7

U"~ .

8.. r I

Olhx_DTI),1E

"flME

expired d.\~y time

12.. 19

ORu_DA1F._Tf\.fF.

DATE_
A)\."l)_ T1:>'"!E

Oc(:lU1ef\Ce of .,,<."n!.

o ,~

o.~

OR KUMBR
RS" IIV F.[)_

51G:<I

,, ",..

"

...

B#I6<:21 _ 00 20

.
Se, ~ .",ripti"" "f
SFC 32 SRT DINT
s deSCription ~f
SFC J2 SRT_OlNT

Call lim. of OR

tile 011 n"""""" :!O 10 23

which

"r

"~tua\ly

the,e four organiuti<m blocks are

avai lable dcrend. on the C PU used.

The priont;c, fOlr time_delay i" t~tTupl OBs are

programmed in thc hardwMe configuration
d~ta.

Table 21.3 M10Wli the ~UI" in fonna.t;on for the

dnu.... delay inlcnuplS. The dummy value x."
repn::~m. tbc number of Ihe associoted intcr_
Npl orgaru/.at;on block 20 10 23.

21. 3.1 HAndling Timc- OcJMY Inlcrrupls

GcnerMI

r~marb

A limc-delay interrupt;~ '!lIfIed by calling SfC

32 SRT_DlNT; thi. system fUllC.ioDalso pas.cs
the delay inte .....-al and the number of IlIc
&ele<:!<>cl organization bluck w the ope .... ting
sYStem. When the dela y interval has expired.
(h~ Oli;$ called.
You Can canc,! servicing of It time-<lelay in!.<;TruP!, in which case the a~jlX:ia!Cd OR will t\O
lon ger be called.
You can qne'Y!he Slatus of a !i mt-deLay interruP( wi th SFC 34 QRY_Olt-,..
rHf"nn . nc~

characlernllu during ..anup

On a cold restan or warm ~.UI". the open"ing

sy~tem dclclC" all progt;lmmcd S\:n;ngs for

tim~.<Jclay

interrupts. On a hoI n::'lISn. the sc(t;nl,ls are remine<! umil pnK:c.lsed ;n }tUN
mode. whereby !he 'residual cyc le'" ;s cOlUl led
as part o f lhe ,(art-up rout;nc.
You can <tart a timc-<lelay inlerrupt in the Slan up ........tine by calling SFC 32. When thc delay
inl""alllas expired,!he CPl; mUSt be in R\.N
mode in oro", 10 be able 10 Cx~te tb<' rdevam
olllani2arion block. If lhis i~ nol the CllSe, the
CPU w~it!\ \() call !he organization bl"",k until
the slnn- "p routine has terminated. then calls
!he limedelay interrupt 08 b<:fo...., the first nctwork i" Ihe main program.

\' Hr(lrma n cr chan<.... erilltJrI on t r .... r

If no tim..-dclay in1ctnlfll OB hils been proI:Il"mmcd.. tJo. opcralinl,l ~y"lcm call5 OB 85
(pT(>gram exec ulion ~"fY()T). Iflhere is n o OB 85
in Ihe user program, lhe CPU goes 10 STOP.
If the dday imerva l has cxpi<ed and !he a,"oci a!~'<J o n i ! .Iill cxccutinj;, Ihe oremling .ystem
cal 11 on IIU (timing erro<) or goes to STOP if
!h~"", is no OB 80 in !he user program.
T ime-delay interrupt. whieb

"'en:: deseleciCd

during CPU paramet~riza.ti()n cannOt be ser"i~l!d. c,'en when the respeclive on has bttn
prOl:lf&mm<:d. The CPU goc~ to STOP.

361

21 Intern,ptJ-l"ndling

Dis a bling,

dehl~ing

21.3.3

and enabling

Sy~tcrn FUll~tlons

ror Time_Delay

Interrupt.
Tb e time-deJay interrupt 08, can be disabl~d
and enabled w ith system functions Sl'C 39
nls IRT and SFC 40 EN lRT, and delay~d and
Clw bied with S.I'C 41 DTS_ AIRT and SI'C 42
EN AIRT.

21.3.2 Configuring Time- Delay

with STEP 7

A time-delay interrupt call be controlled with

th~ following system funet.ions:

Int.~rrupts

Time-delay interrupts are config llred in thc

lwrdware configllTation data_ S imply open the
selected CPU with Eun --;. OBJEC"J PROPERTIES and ~hoose the "Interrupts" lab from the
dialog box.

0>

SFC 32 SRT DL"IT

Start tim e-delay inter11ll't

"

SFC 33 CA" DINT

Cancel time-de lay intern,pt

0>

SFC 34 QRY_DINT
Query time-dclay int.enllpt

The pa rameter, lor these sy.tem t\lt1ctions are

listed in Tahle 21.4.
SFC 32 SRT DINT
Stan Time-dduy interrupt

In 57-300 controllers, the priority i, I'ennanently preset to 3. III S7-400 controllers, you
can choose a priority belween 2 and 24,
depending on the CPU, for e ach possible 08:
choose priority 0 to deselect an OB. You should
not 8s>ign a priority more than once, as interrupts could be losl if more than 12 interrupt
evet){< wi th the same priority OCcur ,im"llaneu"sly.

A time-delay interrupt i. Rt8rted by calling system function SFC.n SRT~DTNT The SFCcall
is also the .tart time for the programmed delay
;lI1crval \Vhen the delay interval ha.> expired,
th~ CPU calls !.he p rogrammed OB and passes
the time delay value and a job identificr in lh ~
start information fot tllis OR 'fhe job iden tifier
is ;;pccified in the SIGN parametcr for SFC 32:
you can read the same "al ue in bytes 6 and 7 of
lh~ start infonnalion for thc assuciated timedelay inlerrupl OB. Th~ time Jelay is ~et ill
increment;; u f 1 ms. Th~ accuracy of the time
de b y is also 1 IDS . .'-IOlc that execution of the
time-delay interrupt OB may its e1fbe dclayed

When it <lives the hardware configuration,

STEP 7 writcs the compiled datll to the Sy.<lem
Data Object in the oillinc user program Rlods
From h~rc, you clIn trallsfer the parameter
assignment dat" w h ile the CPU is lI! STOP: the
data take effect immediately.

T.ble 21.4 S'FC PaTIlmekrs for Time Delay Internlpts

I ,i

'

I "ON

ti

Error

31>2

infom1at~

21.3 TIme-Dclay JnlC1'TUpb<

T.blf 21.3 S/art Inf""""';",, (If 'fime-Dday Interrupl$

Job j

SI-C 32

which of these four OTgl1l1lution blocks are

IOlUany available dep"nd~ on the CPU used.
The priorities for lime<lday interrupt OBs are

programmed in the hardware configuration

time-delay interrupts. On a hot restan, the settings are retained until proce~~ed in RUN
mode. wherehy th~ residual cyc le" is counted
as pan oflhe stan_up routine .

data.

You can <tan a timc-delay interrupl in Ihe ~lat1_

Tahle 21.3 shows the sum infonnation for the

up routine by calling SfC )2. When the <klay

imetval ha~ eJtpired, the CPU mu5t be in RL"N
mode in order to be able 10 eJtecute tile relevant

t;me-d.la), intenuplll. The dummy ,-aloe l<X

rep~nlS the number of Ihc associated imer-

rop' orpnizalion block 20 to 23.

21.3.1 Handli ng

Tim~.Oel~y

Interrupts

Gen enl .... marks

A time-&Iay ;n,errupt is 51aned by calling SFC
32 SRT_ DTlI<"T: this system function also pas..e.
the delay intclVlIl and til<; number of the
SclCC:led organization b lock 10 the operating
~)'$Icm. When (he delay imelVa! has expired,
ll1e 0 13 is called
You cun cancel servicing of R time_delay imer_
rupt, in wh ich case the associaled O U will no

longer be called.
You can query the
rupt

statu~

of a time-delay inter-

with SFC 34 QRY OT'\'T.

Perronna nce characteristics duting sianu p

On a cold lestan 01 warn, !"eStan, the o~rating

system deletcs all proiPl'mmed ~ctting< for

organization block. If !his is nOI the ca"". the

CPU waits to call the organization block until
the start-up routine h", tcnninated, then calls
tlw timedelay interrupt 013 before the firllt network in the main program
Performanct charaNens tics (In .rror
If no tlme-delay interrupt OB hu be= programmed. the operating s)'>'tem calls 0 8 85
(progrum execution error). IftheI"C is no 08 85
in th~ u= program, thc CPU 1I0000s to STOP.
If the delay interval has expired lind the I!s'!OCialed 013 is still eXe\:uting.!he uperating system
calls 08 80 (timing error) ur goes to STOP if
there is no 013 80 io !he llser program.

TImc-dday interrupts which w<:Te deselected

dllnng CPU parameteriuuon eanlWt bC' serviced, even when the respect.ve on has be=
proanmmcd. The CPU g~s 10 STOP.

'"

21 lnlerrnpillandling

21.4.1 Hand ling Walehdolli nlerru pts

Trlg"lI"rlnl:; walchd"lt Inlcrru pl~ In lin S7-300

OR

,,
,,

Time

Int~rvat

I'1!tic

"m,

..

,
,

Priority

Trlglj,erlng watchdog Inttrrupts In an S7-41)0

"
""
"
""
""

You define a watchdoa interrupt when you

paramelerize the CPU. A watchdog interrupt
htlS thr~ paramelers: the mterval. the phase
offset, and the priority. You Can set all Ih~.
Spc<:ifiablc values for imerval and phase offset
an;: from I millisecond 10 I minute. in I -milli.
second increments: the priority may Ix- seilO a
value Ixtw.,cn 2 and 24 or 10 :cero, de?"nding
on Ih., CPU (zero mean s the walchdog ;nt.,rrupl
is not active).

UP 10 RUN. The call in!t8nl for a watchdog intCTT\Jpt OB is Ihus the lime interval plu5 the
phase ofJSO:I. Figun;: 21.1 .hows an exampl., of
Ihls. In the left SO'Ction. no phase offset is !let.
and consequently stan of processing ofthc low'
er priority organization bloc\.; is delayed by thc
cum=nt processing time of the higher priority or
gan;7.8tion block in cach casco

In an 87300. there i. n limiled choice of watchdOli interrupts with fixed priority. depending on
the CPU. You can ..,1 Ihe imerval in the range
from I millisecond \0 I minule. in ' _millisec_
ond inerem=ts. by parameterizing Ihe CPU
accordingly (;m interval of SOO IlS on the CPU
319 from finnwa~ version V2.6).

STEP 7 provides the organi:rotion blocks listed

in Table 21.n, in their maximum confIgurations.
PII.~e

nffse l

The phase 01Ise! can be used to process walch

dog interrupt programs in Ihe precise lime
frame even ifth.,y have the same time inteJ'\"lI1
or a shared multipl.,. U$e of Ihe pbas., offs.,1
nchieves II highcr int.,rv8] accuracy.
The stan time oflhc lime interval and the phase
offSet is the instant oftraosition from START

""

PI(X",.sing
of higher_

'"

'm.

"
.
,, m,
,~

Sooms
ZOOm.

,~

"",,20

, m,

m,

tOms

Om.

""
"

If. on the other hanu. a phase shift is configured

and il i$ greater than the maximwn processing
lime of thc higher-prionly oraDnizatKID block.
Ihc lower_priority organization block is processed in the p~isc lime frame.
Performancr characl('rlsticl during Slartup
Watchdog intemJpts cannot be serviced in the
Start.up OB The time intervals do not begin
l.tnlil a transitinn is made to RUN mod.,.

Without ph.... off,at

o m~

"' "

With ph... o"'.t

priority OB

PhBseoff"1

n.., ..., "fiM Iow<-t_priority OB .. dt.iftod by

the
"I~u~

'"

pro<.c";'" ,ome of'he higher_priority 09

21.1 Example of Ph... Offs.et for Walchdoa TmemJpll

W; th .... ffici ... tIy hiah

pri"";ty

olf.. ~ the I"",.,..

OD >tartS exactly .11hc rime i""'ral


21.5 HanlwareJnlemlpU

Puformanu ch a no:ttrlsllcs On er ror

When ~ same W3tcho:log lnl<:mlp' ;s generated
AJlllin willIe the associated wa tchdog inleTTUpi

handl;"1!: 08 ;5 still

c~ecllting.

Ibe opaafing

system calls OB 80 (timing error) _IfOB 80 1I.as

not been prognlmmcd, Ihe C PU g",," to STOP.

The operating system saves the watchdog inle"

"'Pi that was no! ~rviced .(!Vicina il at the

nex t opportunity. On ly one unscrviccd walchdog imcrTIlpt is saved per priority class. ",garo1C$8 of how many unserviccd watchdog inter.
rupts accumulate.

Watchdog lnlcnuplS Iblll wom: lk"lccted when

the CPU was parameterized cannot be serviced,
even when the =5pOfIding OB is .".il.ble.
The CPU joes 10 STOP in \his casco
DlsabU nv-. delaying a nd en a bling
C a lhna Qf the walchoog interrupt OBs can be

disabled and enabled with system funcllOns

SFC 39 OIS_IRT and H e 40 EN_IRT and

delilyed and enabled w ith SFC 41 DI S_A IRT

and SfC 42 EN_AIRT.

2 1.4.2 ConflKurlng Watch dog InterruptI
" 'llb ST EP 7

Watchdoa inteJnlpts an:: oonfigurW via tlte

hardware confiiUJ"lllion data. Simply open the
oel~ted
TIi;S and

CPU wilb EDIT

--t

From hcff. you can load the parameter assignment data into the CPU while the C PU is al
STOP: tbe data take effe<:t immediately.

OBJECl" PROPER-

choose the "Cyclic Interrupl" tab from

Ihe dialoll box.

In S7-3OO controllers, the processing priority is

21 .5 Hard war e Inler r upts

Hnrdwa~ interrupts are used 10 enable the
immediate dCte<:lion in Ihe lI"r proaram of
e\"t'11IS in tbe controlled process. making it possible 10 ,"".pond with an appropriale inlerrupt
h.andlinJ. routine. STEP 7 provides organiution
blocks OB 40 10 09 47 for """'kina hardw.",
inttmlplS: which of these ciabt organizalion
blocks "'" aetually .,-ailable, hOWeVCT, depends
on the CPU.
Hardware intarupl bandlmg is progl""mmed in
the hardware configuralion data. With system
nlOctiom SFC 55 WR_PAR,VI. SFC 56 WR_
DPARM and SFC 57 PARM MOD, you can
(~)paramcteri~c the modules with hardwn~
interrupt capability even in RUN mode.

Table 21.7 shows the start information for the

process intcrrupt . The dummy value:tX represcnt~ the number of !be associaled interrupt
organizatlOll bloct 40 10 47.
1 1.! . 1 Ge nerarin i: . Hardwart Inlen-u pl
A hardware intarupt i. IIcnenucd on the modules ..itb this capability. This could, for ~am
pic. be a d.igital input module thaI detects I signal from the process or a fUnction module that
generates a hardware interrupt because of an
activity taking place on Ihe module.

pcrm8nently sct to 12. In 57-400 controllers,

you mny sc t " priority between 2 and 24 for
each p<lnibl~ DB (CPU-spcc ific)~ priorilY 0
de"If.l(:ls the OB to wbi ch il is assigned. You
should nol auilln a priority more Ihm once. as
interrupts miahl be I"", if more than 12 internIp{ cwnts wilh tbe same priority oc""'" simulwu:ously.

By deflult. hardware interrupl$ a~ dtsubled. A

parameler is uscd to cnable servic ing ofa hardware interrupt (Slati c parameter). and you can
specifY whelher the hardw= inlerrupt should
be generated for a coming e~ent. a leaving
".t'11I. or bolh (dynamic parameter). Dynnmic
paramclCT"S are paramelen ..... hich you can modify.1 runtime using SFCs.

The interval for each 09 is sc1e<:ted under

In an intelligent DP .In.., equipped for this purpose. you ean initiate a process intelTUpl In 1M
maSICT CPU wilb SFC 7 DP]RAL.

Exeo;ulion'. the delayed call instant under

"Phase Offsct~.
When n \e$ Ihe hardware configuration.
STEP 7 wrileltlte compiled data to the S)"~le",
Dala object in the omine user program Blocks.

The hardwB,"" interrupt i. acknowledged on the

moduk when the o<ganizalion bloct containing

the service routine for thaI interrupt has finished execuling.

21 Julerrupt Handling
T.b l~

217 .Stan lnlonrullion for Han1warr Interrupts

Data Type
BYTE

B,)'I"_ . '''-'''ri;>hle 'NKmc

0
OB~ ev CLASS
OBxx - STRT- INF

,
,
,
,
,

6 .. 7

I3YTE

OB,,", PIUORITY

OB NUMIW
OBxx RESERVED
OHxx >0 FLAG
OB~

IlYTe

OHxx_ MDL ADDR

IWTE
BYTE
B~E

WOHD

n.::.ciipt;<>tt
Event cia"
Stan request for Ihe
interrupt OB
Priority C~"\5'
DB numb-cr
ReseT"ed
I/O id~nti fi<'a tion

Module

Conte"t<
B1I1 (,# I I ~ UP event
1311161141 - 0B41

Defauh .alu~> I n to 23
(013 40 lO 47)
B'I161txx

.
B".I(,#54 _ inpu'moouk.
input s" bmo<l<,le
BII 161>55 - output module.
out put submooule

'''~rting.

add",,, of compo_
o~nl; In);!':c"";n);

8 , II

OB",,_POIN"I

12 .. 19

OBxx DATE TWE

~OR

DATE

intC1"nlp'
Intc"ITupl informalion
OccuITcm'c of

AND T IME

O\ ' ~ n l

DWORD

Call tim e ofOll

xx "'pre sents the OB nurnl>er< 40 t" 4 7

Rc~nlution

nn

th~

S7 -300

If an cvcnl ",",CillO during "x"cution uf u hardware inlCtT>lpt on which ilsel f would trigger
gencralion oflhe same hardware interrupt. that
hm-dwarc inte rrupt will b~ lost when the eV"m
Ihat lriggered it is nU lung<.--,- prc""nt following
acknowledgment. It make. no diffcn,nce
whcther th" event comes from thc module
whose hardware interrupt is currently being
serviced or from another moduk.
A diagno'lic interrupt can b e generat"d while a
hardware interrupt is being 5ervieed. Ifanoth.".
hard ware interrupt oCcurs On the ,arne channel
between Ihe time thc lin;t hardware interrupt
was g~-neroled and th" ti me Ihm interrupl was
;lcknowledged, the loss of the laner interrupt is
reported via a diagnostic inlerrupt to system
diagnostiC-'.
R~sol"tion

event occurs o n another chamle l on the same

module or on another modulo:. the up<:tating
system restart:; thc 08 as soon as il has fin ished
cxecul1ng.

21. S.2 Servicing Hard""IT Inte rrupt.

Qun)'ing int errup t inf"rmatiou
1b~ stan address of th" mod"k that triggered
the hardware interrupt is in bytes 6 and 7 ofthe
hardware interrupt 08 's start information , If
thi , address is an inpld ;lddress, byte 5 of thc
,ran infonnatio n cont ain, 13 # 16#54; Olherw i'"
it contains 8 # 16#55. Ifth" module in qu"slion
is a d ' gilal inplll module. hyl"s ~ to 1 t contain
[h e Status o f Ihe inputs; for any other typ-e o f
module> Ihes.c bytes cunta in the interrupt status
of the module.

on th e S7_400

If during execution o[ a hardwarc interrupt OH

an e"~-nl occ"r< on Ihe same channel on the
sam e module which would trigger Ih" .ame
hardware interru p l. that inlem,pl is 10<1. If the

Interrupt handllng lo th" start-u p routine

In the stan.up routine, the modules do not generate hardw are intcrrupl.>;. lnterrupt hanilling
begins wilh th e transition to RU N mod~. Any

21.6 DPVllnterrupt.

hardwar~

interrupt. pend ing at the time of the

tran sition are 10,t.

go into force im mediately following loading;

the parameter as> ignment data for the modules
take effect after tbe next start-up.

Error handUng
If a hard ware intcITUpt is generated for which
there is no hardware interrupt OB in the " ,e r
program, the operating system calls OB 85
(program e ~ecution error) . The hardware interrupt is acknowledged. If OB 85 has not been
programmed, the CPU goes to STOP.
Hardware interrupts deselected when the CPU
was parameterized cannot be serviced, even
when the Olh for these inK"mJpts have been
programmed. The CPU g008 to STOP.
Disabllng, delaying and

21.6 DPVl Interrupts

PROFlBC"S DPVI slaves can trigger the following interrupts in addition to Ihe Iypes previollsly known with SIMATIC S7:
l>

Status interrupt. e.g. if the DPVI slave

enanges its opernting mode: the interrupt
organization block OB 55 is called,

I>

Update intetT\lpt. e.g. if the DPVl slave has

been paramNerized over the PROFIBUS or
dire<:tly; the intetT\lpt organi7.at ion block
OB 56 is called.
Ven dor interrupt if an e vent eDvisaged by
tbe vendor occur. in the DPVI slave: th e
interrupt organization block 0 8 57 is calJed.
Tbe ev~nts which can trigger the interrupt
are dofined by the vendor of the DPV]
, lave.

~nwbllng

Calling of the hardware interrupt OBs can be

disabled and enabled with system funCions
SFC 39 DIS_IRT and SFC 40 EN_IRT. and
delayed an d enabled with SFC 4 1 DIS_AIRT
and SFC 42 EN AlRT.

21.5.3 Co ntigurlng Hardware Inlerrupts

witb STEP'
Hardware interrupts are programmed in the
hardware ~onfiguration data . O!>"n the selected
CPU with EDn ..... OBJECT PROPERTtES and
choose the lnt<.-'ITUpts tab in th e di alog box.
In 57-300 systems, the d efault prio rity for OB
40 is fixed. In 57-400 sy-;tems, you can choose
3 priority between 2 and 14 fnr ~very possible
OB (on a CPU-spe<:i fic basi.); priority 0 de,elects execution of an OB. You should never
assign the same priority twi~e beea,,~e inte1"rupts can be lost when more than 12 intemlpt
events with the Same priority occur simultaneous ly.
You must also enable the tri ggering of hardware intemlpts on the respective modules. To
this pUrp<Jse, these modules are parame\erized
much the same as the CPU.
When it savu~ the hardware configuration,
STEP 7 write, the compiled data to th~ System
Data objoct in offi ine user program Blocks.
from here, you can load the parameterization
data into the CPU whi le the CPU is ;n STOP
mode. The parameterization data for the CPU

\>

The origin of the interrupt. the interrupt specifi~

and the length o f interrupt infOlmation additionally avai lable ~ spe<:ifi(>ci in the start infonnation of the DPV 1 interrupt organization blocks
(Table 21. 8) . You can read the supplementary
interrup' information using SFB S4 RALRM
(5"",, Chapter 21.9.3, "Reading additional Interrupt lnformatiOll'').
Performance cbar.Clerl.dcs dllrlng startup
PROF IBUS DPV ] slaves can also generate
interrupls whcn the master CPC" is at STOP. In
this state. the master CPU ~annot call an internlpl organization block: process ing of the
mis;;ed interrupts is nOt carried out when the
CPU en ters the RUN state
However. the rcce iyed intemJpt ~vents are
ent~re<l into the diagnostics buffer and th~ module statuS data. You can read the module status
data using the system function SFC 51
RDSYS5 T.
Error handling
Ifthc corresponding DPV I interrupt OB is missing in the u~er program wben the DPVI interrupt

'"

21 Interrupt l landling

is Kknowledgllflhe DB IIj is I'lOl: pres"'t, tbt:

CI'U CDter.i the S T O P ~t.alc.

is tri~...TUd, the Opt"r3ting sysu:m calls the 0 1l 8S

(prognun "",<:cutlan fault). T1Ie DPVl intenupt

T .bl t

2 1 .~

Stan In formation

rO<' VPV 1 Inlerrupt.

6~1.

Vat,.ble Name

Data Type

ik>eripliun

,
,
,

OBxx_ EV_CLA SS

BYTF

E,,~nt

OD.u STRT_ INF

BYU:

Sian "'que", f"nhe

clan

I Contents
6#1611 1I -

lt1' .vCnl

R1I16"xx

O'u
OBu]R10RlTY

,m

Priority cla~!

B"I6#02 - defaul. "aluc

Olh ... OU _ :-:UMBR

[lYTE

OB number

B"I6'<x:<

BYU:

Rc"",,'cd

OB"",_IOJ'LAG

"""

L'O itktlufic.UOD

WlI 6!lS4 - input moduk.

input submodulc
B"I6/,~S - oulpUt module:.
oulpUt ~ub<nodulc

6.,7

OBu_MOL_ADOR

WORD

!>1OOulc Itan;",
addre ssofoompo!!e<l! tt1iiefU'i Ihe
Wlerrupl

OBu_LEN

OYT E

!. onJilh of intorrupt
<Iota rccord

OBu _TY PE

BYTE

[(Ientille.uon of
ioterrupt .ype

0 1l1Ol_ KESERVED

"

OBu_SLOT

BYTE

SIo. number of
~O",p<Jnen l triuer.
;"II.he interrupt

"

OBx,,_ SPJ:C

BYTlO

Sp<.cilkT

B'jJ6<irOO B"I~I B"16!iOl B:: 16I:()) B"I6!t04 ~

8 "'16"03 B::l6:06 ~
a rt l6!:Oi .. IF B ~ I &:<20 .. 7E B~IMt7F -

"

Olh~_O ATIi_TL\tlo

xx ~n\l

'"

tho OB number> 55,

DATE
AND_TIME
~6otr

Occurrence of
event

"'""1'>'<'<1

Bi", I and 0:
00 re~n.d
0
UP .."em
0 DOWN e"enl wi,h error
DOW"< evenl w,th funilcr e<mrs
Bit 2:
o no addi'ional tdcn ..... kdgment
required
additiooal acknu",l<:dgmcnt
required
BilS 3 to 1: rescn-cd

,, ,,

12 ..

",.crv.'<I
diai<>'lic IntCTTUP'
han:lwatc LIl'em.tp'
removal Interrupt
itucrtion In,omup1
...IUI interrupt
up<btc interrupt
n:scn..:d
"cndor InlCTTUPI

Call tunc uf OB

21.7 M ~hiproccssor Interrupt

O;.ablin.::, delaying anti enabling

Ca lling the DPY I interrupt ons can be ,\isable<! and enable<J using SFC 39 DIS_TRT and
STT 40 EN_lin respectively, and delayed and
cnabTc<I nsing SfC 41 mS_AIRT and SFC 42
ENj .. IRT res pectively.
Conllgurlng OI'VI intcrrupb "ith STEP 7
T he DPVI interrupts are configur<:d using the
Hardware Configuration tool. Open the
selected CPU using EDIT --; OBJliCT P!!.Ul'U{
TIES, and sel""t the "Imermpl'" tab in the properties window which is then displayc<l.
ThedcfauJt priority i. 2. You can sct thcpriority
betwcun 2 and 24. Pri ority 0 deselect, the interrupt. DPV! interrupts which have been de .,.
Jcctcd catinO! be executed, even if the eorre8p<Jnding OB is present. The CPU then enters
th e STOP stmus.
You nH>l't additionally parameterize interrupt
Ifi ggering on the corre'ponding DPY I sls,-e .
When ",ving the hardware con r-gun.tion,
STEP 7 writes the compilc<l (lata into the Sysfern dam object in the oHline user progratn
Blocks ; from here. yon can download the
paramc!cri7--'ltion data 10 the CPU when in lhc
STOP staIDs. The parameterization data for th e

Start Information for

Ih~

CPU are immedi atel y efleetive fol1owing

down loading, tho,e for the DPYI slaves following the next SlJrtul'.

21.7

l\1ultipro\!~ssor

Interrupt

The multiprocessor interrupt allows a synchro_

nous response to an event in an CPUs in m ult i-

proceso;or mode. A multiprocessor in~crrupt is

triggerNi using SFC 35 MP_ALM. Organi zation block OR 60 , which has a flxed priority of
25, is the OS u,ed to service a m ultiprocessor
interrupt.
Table 21. 9 shows the assignments or the ,tan
infonn atiofl for lhe muiti-pr(X;cssor interru pt.

General remark.
An SFC 35 Io.-1P ALM call initiatcs execution of
the mult iprocessor interrupt OR Tfthe CP U is
in single- processo, mode, Oil 60 is "lart~,j
immediate ly. In multil'rocessor mode, OR 60 is
started simultafleously on aU participating
CPUs, that is 10 say. even the CI'U in which
SFC 35 was called waits before callin g OB tiO
until aU the other CPUs have indicated thaI they
are ready.

Multi-pmce.",r Interrupt

mterrup ~

interrupt

'"

21 In terrupt Hand ling

Table 21 .1 0 Parameters for SFC 35 .\1P ALM

TIle mult ip rocessor interrupt IS not pro

g ram med in the hardware configuration Jata: i1
is already prese n t in every CPU with mull ieom.
pllting ,apability. Desp Ite th is fad, however. a
sufficien t numher of local data bytes (at least
20) m llst still be reserved in the CPU's "Local
Dam" ta b unJcr priority cla ss 25 .
I'erformancc ch,,,acterlst.lcs d u r ing st" rtllP
The m ultiproec<sor interrupt is triggered only
in RUN mode. An S FC 35 call in the ,tart-up
routine terminates a fter remmins error 32 9 29
(W # 16#!!OAI) as funelion value.

21.8 Synchrono us Cycle In terrupts

Re rc rencc is maJe to isoehrone mooe ir a prog"nn is executcd in "yn~hronism with the
PROFIBUS DP eyck In co njuuction wit11 co nstant bus cycle times, othi s results in reproJ ue
ib1e ,." sp"ns ~ times of equal length to the 110 .
The user program cxccuteJ in isochronc mode
i, pre'~nt in the organ i ~ation bloch OR 61 to
OR 64. The system fi.lIlcliom SFC 116 SYNC_
PT aod SFC 127 SYl\' C 1'0 arc available for
updating of the p rocess ima gc in isoch ro ne
mode.
You confogure isochronc modc using the Hard-

Perform an ce ehurllcteristlcs on {'rro r

If 013 60 is Sli ll in progress wIlen SlOC .>5 is
recallcJ, th c system function remrn, error code
32 92 8 ('';'lIt16#~OAO) a s function value . 00 60
is not slaTted in any of the CPUs
T h u unavailability o f 0 1> 60 in one of the CP Us
at the time it is called or the d isabling or delayiog o f its ex~c lltion by ,ystem functions has no
ctlc ct, nor does SFC 35 repon an error.
Di.llbling, delaying and enablin g
The mu lliprocessor OB can be disabled and
cnab leJ wiLh system functions SFC 39 0 15 _
TRT and SFC 40 EN_TRT respectively. and
Jclayed and ena bleJ wlIb SFC 41 DIS_AIRT
anJ SFC 42 EN _AIRT r~sp~etiyel y.
S f C 35 MP _ALM
,Vlultipl"flce..or Interrupt

A mult;proce"or interrupt is tri ggered w ith

system funel ion S FC 3 5 MP _ALM . Its parameters ar~ li sted in Table 2 1. I O.
The JOR parameter allow, you 10 forward ajob
idenliti~r. The sa me value can be read in bytes
6 and 7 of 00 60's start infom lation in all
CP Us .

tool (s~.., s e~lion. "Configuring ~on't~nt bu, cycle times anJ isochrone
modc" in Chapt.,,- 20.4.3. S ~cial Functions for
I'ROflli US DI'"). Table 21.1 I shows you the
Win informalion for the synch ronou, cycle interrupt,. The dummy value xx represent' the numb~r of the ~ssociateJ interrupt organizatiou block
wa~e Configu~ation

61 to 64 .

21.8 .1 Processing Ih e Sy n chronous Cyele

Tnte rrul)tS
Thc synchronous cycle interrupt is triggered by
thc Global Control ~ommalld of the 01' master.
S~ehronous ~ycl~ interrupts are only procc,s"J m th" up"",t ing mooe RUN. An syn.
chronou, cyde inten upt in the STARTUP,
STOI' or HA LT states is rejec ted. The number
ofUB calls which have not yet been executed is
present in the stan informalion of the isochro ne
mode 00 whcn called for the fIrst time in R UN
mode.

Error han d ling

Han synchronous cycle interrupt arrives befo re
the associated synchronous cycle inl~"IT\.1p! 0 0
has been eompletcJ, a timing error i. signaled.
This can oc~ut i f the user program dwells 100
long in an ,ynchronous cyc le interrupt O B or if

To bIt l1.1 1 !>I.... Informa';"" fOJ Synchmtl""" Cycle In,tmlpII

0''''

1\ ;

execution bas been imc""pled for 100 long as a

resull of program compOncnLs of higher prior_
1ty. Tbe Of) called by Ihe "\00 carly" interrupt
is n:je<:ted. and ,he OB RO "Timing elTor" is
called. A reaction can then be made here 10 the
timing error. The number offailed synchronous
cycle interrupts is output in the next processed
synchronou~ cycle intcrrupt OB ;n Ihe stan
info.
In the eyeDI ofan error. the DP mastercanomil
the Global Control cOJ1UlUnd (Ge) or send il
offset. This '"(}C violatioo is displayro in tbe
sIan information oflbe neXI 5yncivonous cycle
h\1crrupt DB which is called correclly.
R

D isablin g, delayin lil Mod en , bll nK

Call ing oftbc syDChronouse~le interrupt DB.
can be: disabled and enabled "'ith the 'Y<tem
funelions SFC 39 DiS_ IRT and SFC 40 EN_
IRT respectively, and deuyed and enabled with
SFC 41 D1S_AIRT and SFC 42 EN_AJRT
<"Cspectively.

21 .8.1 h ochronc UpdatlDIil O f P roceu

Ima gt

The Hardware Configurnuon tool Can be u<cd

10 IIssiiJl partial process iltlllges to an synchronous cycle iuterrupt DB . ThC!.il images an: not
updated automatically The system functions
SF C 126 SYNC PI and SFC 127 SYNC]O
m u st be used 10 updale the inp uts and "utputs
respectively. Updating is canied 0111 in i5OChlOne mod., and with data co",i~len~y. The ....0
SFCs mwn "Diy be called ,n an syncllronous
cycle interrupt DB. Direct acceu 10 tbl'SC partia l process IIlliIges should be avoided.
Ta ble 21.J2 shows the parmr>eler$ of the SFC
126 SYNC]l and SFC 127 SY)1C]O.
Th e pmial process im.ges are nm IIpdMC<! if an
errQr is dCIe<;lcd . Excepliooi:

"ITQ,

I>

Ifan ac~ess
oce,," when updati ng
pani,1 process image of the inputs.
inputs of faulty modnlQ ' " 5\to ''0-;
OB 8S "'Program execulion error" is
ealled.

I>

A ~OI'IsisU:ncy warning is generated if it was

not poMible 10 trnmmi! lIN:: complete data

the
tbc
tbc
not

21 Interrupt Handling
Table 21 12
With SFC

~arame t e",

of the SFC. for lsochrone Updating Of Pmce" Image

Oedaration

Data Type

Contents. Ue'CripliOll

,~,

INPUT

BYTE

RFT VAC

RFTUR.."""
OUTPUT

,,~

Number of partial pmcc", image

1j"'16#()1 to B"16'l1E
Error information

Parameter
N;'lJOe

'"

126

m
m

'"

t 'LADDR

WORD

coru;i"l<:nlly to the outputs. How~ver. (he

datil ofinJiv;dllill.~l av('s are consi,rent.
~

If an a~~~"S error occurs when updating th"

panial process image ot"the outputs. the data
of the faulty modules are not tran<milled:
thcy rcmain unchanged in the partial pro~ ~ ss IIllage. Updating of th~ unaffected
Illodules is d istributed between two DP
cycles (coru;islency warning).

2 1.11.3 Configuration of Synchronous

Interrupts with STEP 7

C~'de

Configurat ion of synchronons cycle inl~rr\.lplS

i. carried out using the Hardware Configuration
tool. Open the sclected CPU with EDIT ...,.
OIlJECI' PKOPUtTlFS and select the "Synchronous cycle inlCrrupts" tab in thc prop~rtics window whi~h IS thcn displayed.
The der:",1t priority is 25. You can set the ptiority between 2 and 26. Priority
deselects the
interrupt. Synchronous ~yde interrupts which
I",vc bc~n 'ksc lected cannot be "ccuted. even
if the corresponding on is pre,em. In addition.
you assign the isochronous DP master system
and the involved panial process images to the
intcrrupt OB.

You must also set lh~ constant bus cycl .. tim es

and isochrone mode on the corr"sponding 01'
components (sec section . "Con figuring c<Jnsl;.tn l bus cycle times and isochrone mode"' in
Chapte r 20 .4.3, "Special Functions fo r PROFT_
B US Dr").
When saving the hardware configuralion.
STEP 7 "'TItes the ~ompikd data into the object
System data in the om inc user program Bloch;
You ~an down load the parameteri /ation d"ta 10
the CPU from here in th e STOP stalus. The
parameterization data for the CPU arc immedi_

Ln Ihe event or on aecn, error. the add", .. of

the fIrsl byte caminl! the ~rror

ately effective following downloading. thrn;e

for the DP components following the next stllrmp.

21.9 Handling Inter ru pt Even ts

The sy,lem functions for d isabling, delaying
and ~m,bling affect all intetTllplS and all asyn ~hronous "rors. System functions SFC 36 to
SYC 38 are provided for handling synchronous
errors.

21.9.1 Disabling Hnd EnHhllng in terrupt .

The follow ing system function' "rc available
fo r disabling and enabling interrupls and a syn chronous errOl">:
~

SFC 39 DIS_ IRT

Di,able intermpts

> SFC 40 EN TRT

Enable disabled interruplS
Table 2 t . t ) lists the paramel .... r' for the se sys t~m funct ions

SFC 39 DIS_IRT
Disabling interrupt.
Syste m fimction SFC 39 DIS_ IRT disables servicing of n .... w interrupt, and a,yn~hronous
errors. All new intctTllpI" "nJ asyn~hronous
~rrOrs ar~ r~jecled. If an im~'1TUpt or a,ynchronous error O~curs following a Disable. the organi:.:ation block i, nOt executed : if th~ OB does
not exi.'!. th~ CP U docs not go 10 STOP.
The Disable remains in forcc ror all ptiority
classes until it is revoked with SFC 40 E N IRT.
A fter a cold or warm restan, all interrupts and
asynchronous erron; arc e nabled.

2L9 Handlme I.IIrerrupt Events

Tobie 11 .1J SFC Porame\erI for In.errupl HondIinS

The MODE and OI:l_NR parameters are used 10

specify which interrupts Rnd lI~ynchronous
errors are to be disabled. MO DE - B"1 6#OO
di""bll:$ lI l1 imarupts and asyno;hrunom errors.
MonE '" R"16itOl disabletl an inlcnupl cl ....s
w~ first OB numm is spified in the 08_
NR parameter.
MODE-B/*16#Q1 brnlOB_ NR s
40 disables all hardware int~mlpl S; all - 80
wOllld dj""hle all asynchrono l15 C1'rors. !>10D"E
.. BII 16#02 di .... blcs the interrupt OJ asynchro_
noliS error whose OB Qumber you tflltred in the
OB_NR parameter.

21 .9. 2 Oelaying and Enab llnLo: In t~rruptli

The f"'llowiEcg ~Y"cm functions an: available
for dcLayinll and cnablinll interrupts and asynchronous ClTOTS:
:>

S FC 41 DIS AlRT
Delay interrupts

:>

SI'C 4 2 EN_AIRT
Enable dciayed interruplS

Fore~ ampk,

Reprdk-s. of a Disable. the open.ting syslem

CfltCT$ each neW iOI~"1TUpt or asynchronom error
in the diagno<!ic buffa-.
Sf"C 40 I';N"_IRT
Enublln2 d isab led IntHrup's
SyS\~-m funcliou SFC 40 E~_IRT enables the
inlomupll' and asynchror>Oui error< di~abled
wilh SFC 39 DIS_IRT. An intcrropt or asynchronous error occurriog aflLT the Enable "'ill
be serviced by the associated OJaILization
block; if that organizalion block is nor in tbe
user program. tbeC P!: goes to STOP (except in
the cUe ofOB 81 "Pov.cr suppl y erroI1:i"').

The ~ODE and Oll_I'R pM,melers srecify

which imerrupIs and asynch!\ln",us errors are to
be mabled. MODE " B'i 16-""iOOenables all intcr_
ruplli and asynchronous ~"TTQn. MODE WlI6iI01 enables an interrupt class whose first
OB number is specified in lhe: OI:l_NR parameter. MOnl: .. 8#1 61102 enable~ the interrupt or
Bsynchronom error whose OB numhcr you
entered in the 08_ NR parameter.

Table 21. lJ lists !.he parameters for these sys_

tem functions.

SFC 41I)1S_AlRT
Delayl n \l lnterr upts
Sy~tem function SfC 41 DIS_ ATRT dcl.ys lbe
servicing of higher-priority new imcmlpTs aod
asynchronous CrTors . Delay mcans that tbe
",peratln\: system saves the interrupts and a,yncllronou5 errors which occurred during The
d~lay and ~crvices thcm when !he delay interval
ha~ expired. Once SFC 41 has been called. the
pn!1P"""' in The current organi7J11 ion bloc'" (in
the currenl priority class) will not be inlcrroptcd
by a higher-priority intcmtpt; no intcrropts or
asynchronous =OI1:i arc lost.

A deJay remains in rOT!.'C until the currCllt 01:1

has tCTm inated its excc ulion I)r unlil SFC 42
E:-J_AI RT is called.

Vou can eaU SfC 4 1 s.c:~eraJ limes in 5UCCCSsiOll. The RET_VAL parameter sho"'s lhc number o fcal1.i. You IDU" call SFC 42 po:<:isely the
same nllmber "'f times as src 41 in order to
reenable the inlerrupt~ and asynchronous
errOrs.

21 Intcrrupt Handling

SI"C 42 EN_A IRT

EnMb ling delayed interrupt,
Sy.tem function SFC 42 EN A fRT rocnablc.
the interrupts and async'hTO"ou~ ~-n-OrS delay"d
with SFC 41 . You mu,t call SFC 42 p rccbdy
the same number of times as you caUed SFC 41
(in the current OB). The RET_VAL pam m eter
show. the number of delays ,till in force; if
RET_ VAL is = O. the interrupts and asynchronouS ~TIors have been reenabled.

If you call SFC 42 w ithout having fIrst c alled

SFC 41. RET_ VAL contain8 the value 32896
(W#16#8080).

21.9.3 [{eadlng addirinnal IntcrrUjl!

Infor mal io"
The system function block SFB Sot R,.\LR M
reads addition"j interrup t information
if
present - from the componcms (modules Ot"
.ubmodulc.) lnggeling the inten-upl . The SFI:l
is called in an imcrrupt organization block or in
a block called wilhin this. Procc>sing of lhe
SFO S4 RALRM is carried oul syn~hronou,ly.
i.e. the requested data arc present in the output
par..metcn< immediately following th~ call.
Tablc 21.14 lists !h~ block paramete rs of th.
SFB 54 RA LRM .

T~blc

The SFB 54 RALRM can bas ically be called in

,,11 organizati011 blocks or ex"",ntion levels for
aU ~venls . Tfyou eall it in an organization b lock
whose start event i, no! an interrupt from the II
O. correspond ingly less informat ion is available. D ~~ndi ng on the respcCli v ~ organi zation
b lock and the component, triggering thc imerrupl. different information is ~nlered into the
targe, areas .pccifkd by the TlNFO a nd
ATNFO parameter~ (Tabie 21 .15).
The target area TThTO (task information) contain, thc complete Stan information in bytes 0
10 19 of the organization b lock in which the
SFB 54 RAL&\1 was called. in<kpC"lldcnt of the
n esting depth in which it WaS call ed. Therefore
the SFB 54 RALRM partiaUy replaces the SY8tem function SFC 6 R D_ S1NFO . Adm inis tra tion information (e .g . wh ich componcnt triggered the interrupt) is pre",nt in bytes 20 to 27.
The [argct area An-TO (interrupt information )
contain8 th" header infoIDlation (e.g. !he number of receiv ed bytes of supplementmy interniP' infonnation or the type of interrupt) in
by":s 0 [0 3 ami the component-specifIc additional intcrrupt in fonnation itself in b)1es 4 \0

223.
The assignment of the MODE paramekT
Mfine s the operating mode of SF B 54
RAL&.'\t. W ith ",lODE - O. the SFn shows

2I 14 Paramo,"r.< ofSyst= Function Block SFB 54 RALRM

ramm~ter

Declaration

DataT~

Comem~.

MODE

INPUT

INT

Opa.lin mode :

,m

INPU T

DWORD

Module <taTting: aJJ",,, uf component to I>< "'lUled

MLE."i

INPU T

<NT

.\-I .... imum n u mber ofh ,~e, of .upplementary intc-rrupt injimru.lion 10

be scanned

,~W

INPU T

BOOL

TRU E - a n eW interrupt has been receiveJ

SlATUS

OUTPIJT

DWORD

Error i<kntitication

OUTPUT

DWORD

Module

OUTPUT

,,~

Number of h)-~e" of received supple mentary interrupt infortlliltion

~"
~"

THfj(d orea for O il start info rmat ion and adnlini.lnltiun intonnat io n

LEN
TIN,"

OUTPUT

A1NFO

OUTPUT

p.,,,,n p'ion

,t:artin~

or".

show, t he component trig~~ rin g t h~ in terrupt

1 - "Tite< all output paramet er<
2 - ch~ c b whether tho .d~cted com po""nt ha.
trijlS~",J Ih~ mtc-rrupt

aJdrc", of componen t triggeri ns tho interrupt

Target
for beader infortnation and .upplemen tary interrupt
infurmation

21.9 Hand1ina lmelTUpt

E~cnts

l)r.blt l l .H
Admmi.tn

By""

0", 19

"

,.

Header inf",,

SUl)I)lemeotary

nonmfurwo
000

="'"

.... t.""

!j}1e$

By"'"
010 3 )
'

",~
4 to 221 I'

20 to 27
~,

inmrurt1.

,.
"

you tile component lrigg~ring Ihc intClTUpl in

tbe 10 pantmeter; NE.W is a... ign! TRUE.
With MOT> ,... I, all output parameters are
writ\l'Tl. With MODE - 2, you check wheth~r
the comp<lnent ,pc~ifi~x1 by the F_ ID pammcteT "'11~ the on~ tril!l!cTing the iut~'TTUpt. If Ihis
is the cue, th~ NEW parametC'T has the value

TRUE, and all other OUTpuT par.tU1CtCT1t are

wriTten .
In oniC1'TO work correctly. the SFB 54 RAt.RM
requin:s its own instance data for each call in
the \'.rlOUS orga nization block~, e.g. an own
instance dam block in c"ch casco

22 Start-up Characteristics

22 Start-up Characteristics

22.1 Gen eral Remarks

22.1.1 Operaling Mode.
Before the CPU b egins procc ,sin;: lhe main
program following power-up, it executes a
slmt- up ro"t;ne. START_UP is one of the CPU's
operating modes, as is STOP or R1.JK. This
chapter describe s the CPU's activities on a Imnsi tion from and to START-UI' and in the restan
routine itself.
Following power-up <D, the CI'U is in the
STOP mooe ( Fi gure 22. I). If th e mooe seJeetor
un the CPl}'s front pa nel is a t RUN or RUN-P.
the CPU switches tu START-UP mode@.the n
10 RUN mode @ . If an "unr~coverab l e" error
occurs while the CPU is in START-UP or RUN
mode ur if you position the mode selector 10
STOP, the CPU reUlm. to the STOP mode

The u"er program is tested with breakpoints in

single-step operation in the HOLD mode . Yuu
can switch to this mode trom both R UN bnd
START-UP. and return 10 the origina l mode
when yuu bburt the test 0 Yo" can a tsu s~t
the CPU to the STOP mode from the HOLD
mode@.

\Vhen Y<J" parame terize the C PU, you e an

define restan characle rislies with the "Rest an"
tab such a, the maximum penniss ible amount
of time lor the R eady s igna t. from the modu les
following power-up or wbether th e CPU is \ 0
stan up "hen the configurmi<Jn data d<J not
coincide with the a e lual configuralion or In
whm mode the CPU restart is to be in .
SIMATIC 57 has three reslart modes. namely
cold rena,.t. ",arm re~t",t and hOI restart. On a
cold restan or warm r~start, the main program
is ,dways processed from the h~ginning. A h ot
restan reSUmes the main program at the point <Jf
interrupt ion, and "fin ishes " the cycle
S7 CPUs supplied be fo re 10/98 have wann
restart and hOI restan.

You can SC,1n a program on a single_sh<Jt basis

in START_UP mode. STEP 7 provides organization bloc k s OF! t02 (c<Jld restan). OB 100
(wann restart) and O B 101 (hot restart)
~xpressly for thi s purpose . Sample applie"tions
are the paramet",ri :.:ati"n ofmodul~s unlcss thi s
was already taken care of by the CP U, a nd th e
progranllning of de fault, for your main progmm .

Power-up

-----<D------+

STOP

+----@-- ~~==H=O='::O::::,

__--'"--+

L -_ _ _ _ -.------~~------H!,:ure 22.1 CPU Operating :"'[ode<

RU'

_____~

22.1 Genenll Remarks

22.1.2 nOLI> Mudt

The CPL ehaoac, to the HOLD mode wilen

yOUtt'!<t lhe ptUpm with breakpoint~ (in "~'n
Gic-$ttl1 mOlkn, The STOP LED Iben lights ul1
and tile RUN LU) blinks.

In HOLD mode. the oUlput modul~. ar~ disabled. Wriling to the modules affects the modul~ memory. but docs 1I0t switch the sianai
stute~ "'oul"' to the module output.!<. The module! arc POI rnablcd until you exit the HOLD
mode.
In HOLD mode. C'O'erything ""vin~ to do with
timiog i~ discootinued. This includt'!<. fOf example. the prucCS3ing of ti"",rs, clock memO!)' and
runtime meters, cycle time monilorina and
minimum scan cycle time, aoo the ... rvicing of
Iime-ofday Wld tim<;-delay inlerrupl~. Exceplion: the re31-lime clock cOIltinues 10 function
normally.

Every lillle lI,e progfCssion i. made to the ne:ott

statement in te~1 mode . the timers for the dura(m of the single SICP run " little further, Ihll,
simulating a dynamic behavior similur to "normal"' program s.:anning_

in OB 102 or in OB 100. you mu.t load tile signal slatc~ from the module using direcl access.
You ean th~'1l SCI !be inputs (transfer !hem. for
IDstance. with load statements or with Ihe
MOVE box from addrc"" lIll:a Plio address
area
then wor\:: with the inpllts.

n.

On " warm restart, Ihe "old'" procc5~-imagc

it'pm and process-image OUlput tables, w hich
wcr~ valid prior to power-down or STOP. lire
IIsed in OB 101 and ;n the remainder of th~
cycle, AI the end of Ibal cycle. the processimage output table;" U1UISferred to module
memory (but not yet switched through tu the
external outputs, sioee the output modules are
still disabled).
You now bit'" the option ofparumclCri?ing Ihe
CPU 10 clear !bc process-image output table
ltJld the module memory at the end of !he wann
reSlan. Before ,witching 10 08 I, the CPt:"
revok~s lhc Di&llblc signal roo thai the signal
stale, in Ih~ mooule memory arc appl ied to the
external outpu".

In HOLI) mode. the CPU i, capable ofpa.:ilvc

cOl1lmunication, thaI is, it can receive

glob~l

data or take part in ihI: un ilateral el<change of

data.

If the power fails ",-hile the CPU is in ~IOLI)

mode, bant;l)-bachd CPlJ~ go to STOP on
power recov~ry. CPlJ& withou! backup balLcriC6
~XOC\lte lin automath: wann n::<tart.
22. 1.3 DluhUng the Outpnt Modulu
In the STOP lind HOLO moJ~s, moouk. a.rc
disabled (00 (OUtput disable) .ignal). Dir.abled
output mtxlulC6 oUlput a 7.ero ~ignal or, Wtbey
tn..'e the capability, tm: rcplaccmcm value. Via
a vurfuble table. yuu can control oUlputS 011 the
modules "'ith the 'Isolate PQ" function. eVeIl in
STOP mode.
Durilli restart, the oetpul moouks J\."lIUIin dlSablee!. Only when the <"yelle scan ~giJU are the
01lll1U1 modlllt:S CIIabkd_
On a cold !"CSlan (Oil 102) and warm restl'"
(OB 1(0). the process images and the module
memory lire cleared. lfyou want to ,~an inputS

00 a cold restart. the CPU caUs organizal ion

block 08102; on a "'arm restart. it call~ organization block 08 100. In the abKocl! or 013
100 or OB 102, the CPl; begins cyclic program
e~eeulion immediately_

a \'.. ~rm renart, Ihe CPU cDII~ "'Baniution

block 08 101 on a single-.hot basis befote procer.sing the main program, If Ihc....-: is no O!J
101, the CPT; begin' scanninll at th~ point of
inl<"TIUption,

On

The start inform"tion in the lempornry local

daIS has the ,arne form81 for the roIOtatt organization blo<:ks: Table n .1 .hows the SIan informatiuD for OB 100_ The reason for the: restatt i.
shO"Oo'l1 in !he =tart ro:qu~t (Byte I):
B1#16~1

Manual wann re!ltar1 (OS 100)

tJ.>Il61182 Antomatic WlIrrn restart (Oa 100)

81116/183 Manual hot rest:ar1 (OS 101)
B.~ I6wM4 AulOmatic hot re,11ln
(O t! 101)
BII16.'.185 Manual cold restart (OB 102)
1311-161186 Automali ceoldrc~lart(01lI02)

22 SlImllp Characteristics

The ""robcr orthe stop ""ent and the additional

information define the TeSta" m","" precise ly
(tells YOII, for cxample. "bethera manual wann
resta" was initiated via the mode ~elector).
With (his infnnnntinn. you can develop an
~ppropriate e,ent_...,lated restalt rolltine.
NOle thpt no a.ynchrunous system blocks can
be proces.e<J in the s(anup program o f an S7300 C I' U. YOII can , et or re, et outp utS in the
proces~ iml!ge in (he st artup program. hut thc
tran~ mi!<Si on to thc output module~ only take<
pl ace when transferring to RU:-.r mode.

22.2

Pow~r-U p

In

the following

iMtaneC!l:
~

When the CI'U is

When (hc mode se!cctor is set froDl RUN to

STOP
W hen pn " unrecovemblc' erIor occurs duro
ini,l progrum scanning
W he n ~~tem funC Tion SFC 46 STP is exe
cuted
When reqll<'sted bY:ll communication func
t;<>n (~top request from the progIllmminil
device or via communication fUllction
blocks from another C PU)

~
~

switch~d

on

lbc CI'U cntc~ the reason ror the STOP in the

d iagnostic buff"T. In this mode. you ean

, ..

In STO P mode. the user pt\I,,'1"ftITI is not

scanned. The CPU ...,tric,c. the sctting~ - ei(hcr
the ,,,,lues which YOIl ell(e\"ed in the hardwacc
c<>nfiguration dala when you para.nteleri~ed the
CPU or thc defaults - and s~ts lh~ modules to
(he spceifi<:<.l initi al _,(alc_
Tn STOf' mode, (he CPU can rcc..,ivc g lobal
data, ia GD conununication and carry out pas_
si"e unilateral communication functions. The
rcaltime clock keeps runninll.

YOII can parumeterize the CPU tn STOP mooe,

for instance you can also SCt tbe MPI ad dress.
\r.'Insfer or modify the llser program. and execUie a CPU memory l"CSet.

22.2. 1 STOP Mode

Th e C PU goes to STOP

read the Cl'U infom.at;<)n with a prognunming

device in order to localizc the problem.

a\~o

22.1.1 Memo ry Ren t

A memory resct >ctS the CPU to (he in it ial
state". You Can initiate a mcmory ~sct with a
pT\)gramm ing device o nly in STQPmode or with
(he mode sdeclOr: hol d the switch in the MRES
position for at l~a'l J seconds then relense, and
ancr a maximum of J ~onds hold it in the
MRES position again for ~l lcast 3 5econds.

The CPU ernses the entire u.cr program both in

work. memor), aod in RAM lood memory. System memory (for insUlDCC bit memory, timers
and counters) i. also cras~..J . ...,gardles~ of retentivity sening'_ With :II miero memory card. the
cont~nt. of the load memory are ...,tained during
a memnl")' reset.

"

22.2
The CPU S<:1lI the paranlCrers for .11 modules,
including irs 0,,"'11. ro their derau!! values. The
MP[ parameters of the first interface are an
ucq>rion. 'f1lcy are not changed so thar. C PU
whose memory luis been reset can srill be
addressed en rhe MPI bus. A memory reset alsc
does DCr affCCl rhe diagnosric buffer. 1M reol
Lime clo<=k. or thc runrime merC1"S.

If. micro memory card or. memory- card " 'ith

Flash EPROM iJ insem'll. lhe CPU copies the
user program from rhe ,l"\Cm(Iry eard to work
memory, Th. CPU .lso copies an)' config ........
tion data ;. finds on the memory can!.

22,2,3 Reltorln\: the raclIlry ... lIlng,

In 1M case ef M\O'er CPUs.. you can rCSIOl'e the

factory settings with "Reset 10 faclory set

ting~".
I>

I>

Procc-:d as follow"

Swilch off the supply "oltage and Tl:move

the micro memory can! or the memory card.
Hold the mode selector switch in the MRES
pooitiQn and switch the supply voltaiC on

again.
I>

If the LEOs Sf (57300) or INTF (57-4(0).

FRCE. RUN and 5TOP flash slowly, reJeas<,
the mode ;;electol' switch again. set ;1 10
MRES again within 3 s. and hold it in this p<>sinon.

t>

Wait until onl)' tile Sf or INTF LE D flashes.

Durin& this lime period (apptfU. 5 s), you
can abort the
procedure by relusing
the mode ..,Iector.

p(nIo~rUp

22..2 .4 R t lenlh"lly

A memory area

t~

retentive when its eonlem.

a: !"Ctained c"C1I "'-Mn the mains pO...... is

switched off IS ,,-el l IS on a IJ'Insirion from
STOP m RUN following power. up. In the ea""
of th. CU~II\" 57.300 CPUs. mentivil), i5
implemented .... ith & mien) memory card. In lbe
ea'. of Lhe S7400 CPU . bailer')" backup is
required fur J'l:ttlltivity.
Reten!ive memory =85 may be Ihose for bil
memory. timers, counters and data blocks. The
1<'D8th of the reLtIlliv. areas dcpcnd~ on the
CPU. You can $pecify the nnmber of rel""r"'e
memory bytes, timers and COunteT5 via lb.
"Retcntivity" lab w!>crt you parameteri7.e the

CPU.
Tbe contents ofdauo blo<=ks in the RAM cun al
so be rctCTIli\~. The nallable retentive ...... i.
CPUspecific . You can doflll. tbe retentivity of
a data block with Ih. block propeny NOIIRe.
ra;" (S Chapter 3.2.3 , MBlo<=k l'1opcnin'.
With the 57300 wilh micro memory card. th.
bit IDCmones, timers and eounlers SC1 as ret""
ti"e
welT as the user prognm and user data
aTO saved on the micro memory card. where
tbey an retent". C"CTI without a haUeI)'
backup. With.,..11m ~wt. !he non memi"c
bit memories. time", and counters are deleted.
The conrents of data blo<=ks declared as MTIOfI
rctenlin" are initialized during. warm resUU1
(loaded with the inilial "a1ue< from 10M! memo
ory) or set 10 lmt if a load memory objecl is nol

&.

~"""t.

I>

If the SF or INTr LED shews a continuous

light, release the mode selcclQr switch,

The CPU searlS up withoul banery backing and

all LEOs li ght up. It exccute~ a memory reset,
then selS!he MPI address to 2 and the MPI data
rale 10 1f7.~ kbilli. As "'-ell as the mrnKll')' rc~I. the real time clock is set ro the start dale
and the Operalln& hOUB counter and diOJUlOStic.
buffer a: deleted. FollOWIng this, Ihe CPU en
ters the evem " Reset 10 f~ctory s.lIings" in the
diagnostic. buffer. and go<=s to STOP mode.

Witb the S7-400, a battery backup i. required

for retentivity. A cold R:SWI. delete. all add>ns
areas, and loads Ihe USCI' progrnm and the (con
figured) user data from load memory inlo work
memory. With a warm restart. the ,.IUI!$ of the
bil me.oories. timers and countC1"S !let as retco
tive are retained: the user program and tbe user
data remain unchanged .

On the "Restart" tab of th. crus, )'ou can

.ffecl a restart with the follo,,'ing settings:
t>

ResHII1 when Ibe ~el configuration;s nOi the

same as Ihe .croal ~onfiguralion

22 Start-up Char""tcri,tic,
A r~ start is ex~cu!ed even if the paramClCr_
ized hardware configuration d=s not agre~
with the actual configuration. Exc~ption:
thc cunfigurcd PROFTBUS DP interfaccs
Ill ll,t a lways be pre8ent and ready for opemt,on .
~

Rc,cI uutpulS on hot restart

The S7-4OO CPUs delete all proc~ss - image
output tahles and all peripheral outputs during a hot restart .
Disahle hot restart at mannal restan
A hot restart based on manual input Or
munications job is not pennissible.

com-

Re&taT1 following POWER UI'

De finition of the type of restan following
power up

Monitoring time for ready signal of thc

muduks
If the mon itoring time for a module times
out. it is considered to be non -e xistent. The
response of the CPU thcn depends on th e
sctting "Startup when set configuration nOt
same as acrnal configuration. Th~ re sult is
entered in the diagnostic, buffer. This mon itoring time is important for switching on
the powe!" on expansion racks or distributed

22.3 Types of Restart

22.3 . 1 START-LIP Mode
The CPU
cases:
[:>
[:>

cxccu!~s

a restm1 in the following

\Vhen the mains power is sw itched on

\Vhcn 'he mode selector is set (key lod
SWiICh: tum from STOP to RUN o r RUNPl. or the toggle switch changed (switch
from STOP to RUN)

On a reque,t from a commnnication nmction (initiated from a programm in g device

or via communication function b locks from
another CPU)

A ma"",,1 restart is in itiated vi~ the mode se lector or a commllllication function, ,m alltomalle
restan by switching on the mains power.

The rcstan rom ine may he as long as required,

Btld there i~ no time limit on its executioo; the
scan cycle moni,ur is not active
During the execution of the restart rouline, no
inteTTUpts wi ll be serviced. Exe~ptions arc
errorS Ihat are handled as in RUN (call of the
r~kqmt ~nOr organization bloch).

I/O.
~

M onituring time ror tn.nsf~"1Ti ng the param-

eters to the modules

If the monitoring t ime for a mudu le times
out. it is consid e red to be non- ex ist~'nt. Thc
respunse uf 'he CP U then depends on the
sett ing "Startup when set configurat ion not
same a" actual confignration". The event is
entered in the d iagnostics burrer. (In Ihe
event of this e rror. yon can on ly paramelerize ti, e CPU w ith a higher monitoring timewithout memory reset - if yon transfer the
system daw of an ~"II1pty" proj ect in which
the neW value of the monitoring time is
entered. so that the module pa rameterizatiun
is completed within the "old monitoring
time.)
~

Moni(Qring lime for hot restan

If the time between pow"," ofTand powe r on
or the time hetween STOP and RUN is
greater than the monitoring time, a hot
restart is not carried out. The specification
o ms swi!ch~s the monitor off.

In the restan romine . the CPlI updates the time!"s. the TUn-time meter. and the rca l-timc clock.
During restart, the ontpU1 moo"l",s are disabled.
i .e ., o"tpu, signa ls cannot be 'ransmitted. T he
OnIput disabk is only re,oked at the end of the
restan and prior to starting the cyclic program.
A res tart rout ine can be aboned, for instance
when the mode sele ctor is aelua!<:<i or when
there is a power failure. The aborted restart routine is then executed frum the beginning when
the power is switched on . If a cold restart ur
""ann stan is aborted, il muSt be executed
again. If a bot rcstart is aborted, all restart IYPCS
are p08sible.

fib'Urc 22.2 shows the activities carried out by

an 57-400 CPU during a r~st"rt .

22.3.2 Cold R ..S{an

On a cold restart. the CPU ~ets both itself and
the modnles to the programmcd initial st ate.

n.3 Types of Re\;lart

HoI RHtafl

Dlsablt

-""'''''

...

lnitializll

W.nn It"torl

~.

QUIpOJ!

fI'ItIduIes

.........

Reset pooc;els-im&Q&

""'

Cold Rutl"

"""

0UIpUl !I1oCId<Ji<ls

-....
-.....

R..... t~

08101
HotR. .1M

=~"Kr~

,-

~0UI P<l \$

p<O!SI outputa

, .~

FIe ... ! al u"", da19

non-relOOU.. datil

IniOOWze modules

--~
06100

08102

w."" A_tlrt

Cold It.....rt

~-~
m.ge
Inl'\IIlIIble

-.~

~l

-""".-.,...- II

outpUt

Warm Restoon

'" _

.. /

''''''-______r.-.

-'0

001

modules

,o.

:"'O$f&r proce$l-

r ---'

Update

prooest..

INoge ~put tabIt

.. . . . . .
0",

( STOP )
rl~" ...

2l.l CPU Ao!;~iti<s i')uring R.start (57-100)

22 Stan.up Characteristics
dclct",s all dala in tbe system memory (including the retentive data), ",ails OB 102. and then
executes the main program in 08 I fr(lm th'"
beginning.
The current program and the cum:nt data in work
memory are deleted and with them also the duta
blocks generated by a system function: the pro
gram from load memory is reloaded. (In contrast
t() tnen1()ry reset, a RAM load memory is not
deleted.)

22.3.3 Warm

On a Wann restart, th", CPU sets both it<elfand

the modules to th", programmed initial . tate,
ernse. Ihe nonret",nt;"e data In the system
m~mory, calls 08 100. and th~n executes the
main program in OS I from the beginning.
The cUlTe nl program and the cllrrent data in
work memory arc retained, and "Iso the datH
blocks generated per SFC.
:-.tanual wa r m

I'Ihnua l co ld f"t'Sfan
With neWCT CPU~. a cold reslan Can no longer
be tnggered mll.n ually .... ing the mode selector.

Wi th older CPUs, a manual cold '""'Stan is triggered using the mode selector if the switch is
hcld in the MRES position for at least 3 5 before
transferring from STOP to RUN or RUNP.
A manual cold restart can also be triggered by a
~ommun;cations funelion from a proinumning
device or by a system block from another CPU.
In thj~ "''". the mode switch must be at RlN
or RUN_P.
A manual cold rcstan can always be initiated
unless tbe C PU requestS a memory reset.
Autonul\k cold rHlart
An automatic cold restan is initiated by swnch
ing on the mai ns power. Tbe cold restan is exe
cuted if
!>

the CPU was not at STOP when the poWCT

w~s switched otT

eo the mode selector is at RUN or RUN-P

eo the CPU was interrupted by a powu outage
while ueeuting a cold '""'~tart
eo "Cold restart" on "stan followlni POWER
UI'" i~ parameterized
When operated "~thout a backup ballery. the
C PU e:<ecute$ an automatic non-ret",nti .. e
wann rest~rt. The CPU startS th", m",mory reS\'t
automatically, then copies the user program
from the memory card to work memory. The
memory card must be a Fl ash EPROM.

R~S larl

r~nan

A manual warm reStart is

lowing instances:

;nit;~lcd

in the fol-

eo

Via the mode selector on the C PU on a Inm sition from STOP to RUN or RUN-P (on
$7-400 CPUs with <cstart type switch, tbis
is in the CRST position)

po

Via a communiCali()n function from a PO or

"~th an srs from aoother CPU; the mode
,clCClOrm U5l ]x, in the RUN or RUNP pos i.
lion.

A mallual wann restart call always be initiated

unkss the CPU requests a memory rc~cl.
Automa tic warm rCSlan
An automatic wann resUirt is initi ated by
switcbing On the mains power. The wann
rC$!an is e:<eculed if
:>

the C PU was not at STOP IOoheo the power

was switched off

I>

the mode sel",ctor is al RUN or RVNp

I>

the CPU was interrupted by II. pow",r outage

wh ile executing a wann restan

I>

"Complele restart (warm restart)"' Oil "start

following POWER up" is rmramctcrized

lfth .. re is a testan type switc h. it n."TJUIins without effect in the case of automatic warm restart.
Ir t.hc CPU contains s. micro memo!), card, it
reaclS exactly like a CPU wilh backup battery_
Wben operated without a mIcro memory card
and withoU! a backup battery. the CPU executes
an 3U!omaric nonretentive wann restart. The
cpe starts the memory reSet automatically,
then copies thc uSer proinlm from the memory

22A

A hot rtan is po"sible only on an 57-400.

0,

On a STOP power outage, the CPU saves al l

intnrupts as "'1:11 as the intcmal CPU rt'gi.ten
that all: imponant to the processing of the user
program. On a hot restan, it can th=fore
rt'sume at the location in the program at which
the intemlption (lCCurred. Thi. may be the main
program, or it may be an intemlpl or =or handling routine. All ("'old") interrup\.l art' saved
and will be serviced.
The S<K".lled """,idual cyclc. which c?ueod.
from the point at which the CPU rt'sumes tile
pn::li='! following a hot resta" to the end of the
main ~ counu lIS pan of the restart. No
(new) interrupts are llerviced. The output modules an di!Jllbled, and an in their initial State.
A hot restart i. pmnittcd only wllen!hert' ha,'c
betn no Change5 in th~ ~r program whIle the
C PU was at STOP, iu.;h as modification of a
block".

By parurtt1erizing the CPU accordingly. you

can .pecify how long the interruption may be
for the CPU to still be abLe 10 Ul:Cute. "'"llf11l
relitart (from 100 milliseconds to I hour). lfthe
interruption is looger. only a cold or warm
reStart is allowed. The length of!be intnruption
is the amount of time be""een exiting of the
RUN mode (STOP or power-do""n) ..00 reentry
into the RUN mode (following e;.;ecution orOB
101 and !he resIdual cycle).
Mlnull IIot ,."llrt
A manual oot R"Start is init iated
t>

]fthc mode selecto. was at RUN or RUN-P

""hen the C PU ""as switched on by m(wing
the mode selector from STOP to RUN or
RUN_P when the,..,.tart $w itch i. al WRST
(only possible on CPU, with =tart type
switch)

t>

Via I communicatIons function from. pr0gramming device or with a system block

Module Address

(SFB) from anothcrCPU: the mode SC'lwor

mUSt be at ItUN or RUN-P.

card to work memory. The memory card mmt

be a Flash EPRO:-'1.

22,].4 1101 Retllrt

~rtaininj.

A manual hot remIt is poSsible ol1ly whc~ the

hOI rt'stan disable wu revoked in the "R ~start"
tab when the CPU WaS plnImctcrized. The
c'\l'ie o f the STOP must have ~n a manual
activity, eith",. vi. the mode selector or through
a communicati on function; only then can a
manual ....arm rt'start be e~ectl\lld while the
CPU i. ~t STOP.

,\utomatk hOI r .. tarl

An automatic hot rt'start is initiated by switching on thcc mains pow",.. The CPU executes an
automatic hot restart only in the following
Instances:
t>

lfit was nO! at STOP when .wi tched otT

t>

If the mode 5Clwor was at RUN or RUN-P

when the C PU was switcbed on

t>

"Hm rt'start"' on ~Slart following POWER

UP" il parameterized

t> If the backup batt~ry is inserted and in

working order
The position of the restart switch is irrelcvant to
an automatic hot restart.

22.4 Ascertaining a Module Addrl'1i$

Sianal modules. o. to be more cxact the u",r
data on inpulloutput modulcs, ~ Bddresscd in
two mannen: you use the logical ~dd"u in the
UilC1" propm to a~ the inputs and outpuls.
Tlli. colT"sponds 1.0 thc absolute addreu, and
~ be made easier to rt'ad by uling symbol$.
The smallest logical addrees is the ~
address or module Starting address. The CPU
uses the googmphieol add~ to address the
modules. You rcquill: the j:oographical address
if )'00 ",i.h 10 fmd OUt the slot number of the
module. lbis applies similarly to the user data
on 5tatiOM of the distributeO 1/0.
You can use the following system blocks 10
ascertain the &CQgf1Iphical addll:ss from ~
lOllieal address and vice versa:

22 Stan-up Characteristics

I>

SFC 70GEO_LOG
AS(:~'Ttliin logical base addres~

I>

S FC! (1AOR_LGC
A5Ce.181n logical addre~s of a module
channel

I>

S}-C SORD_LGADR
Ascertl<in "jj logical addresses ora module

I>

SfC7 ) LOG_GEO
Asccnaill geographical address

J>

SFC 49 Lei('" _ G AOR

Ascenain $101 address of a module

Table 22.2 shows the parameters for Ihese syslem bloc ks.
The SFC ~ GAOR LGC, 49 LGC_GAOR and
SO RO_ LGADR Ita"e 10 lD amJ LADOR as
~'Ulwnon parametcr!! for the logical address (address in the 110 area). 1010 is either
8 #16,1:54, whieh stand. for the pt'ripherul
inpuis (Pis) or BII I6#5 5, which .Iands for the
pt'ripheral OUlputs (PQs). LADDR ~"llIuins nn
1/0 address in thc PI or PQ area whkh eolTt'~pollds to th.., sp"cifi..,d challn~ l. Tflhe channel
is O. it is Ihc module Stan addr~ss.
With the SfC:s 70 GEO_LOG and 71 LOG_
GI:::O, the logical ad dress is on its own in the
LADDR parnmeler. A difl~remiation is made in
bit IS as to whether the address is assigned 10
an input (m 0) or an output (= I).
For lhc: ....J<Jrc~~es determined using the~ sy~_
t<:;m block$. an MSilPllDcut must hne been
made using the lIardware Configuration tool
between logical addre~s (module ~ta"ing
address) and ,.I<>t address (location o f module In
a rack or in a .u ti o n oflh., dislributed (10 ).

b~

address of Lbo;; submodule. With SURSLOT - 0, th .. diagnostics address ofthc module o r station is rerum~d,
SFC 70 GEO _LOG replaces Lbe SFC ~ GADR_
LGC, and Can be lL'\d in conjunction with
? ROFINET 10.

SI-'C 5 CADR_ LGC

Ase,," ~in th c log ical
ch annel

~ddrc.,

of a module

S)"'tem function St'C j GADR_LGC rcllllIlli

the logical address ofa channel when you specify thc slot addres, ("geographica l" address).
Enter Ihc numbo.rofthe DP maSler ~y~lem 10 in
the SUBC'I" T10 parameter if the module
belongs tn Ihe distributed VO o r D_ 16#OO i(the
nlodu[e i. pluall~..J imo the central rack or an
expansion rack . The RACK P"llImcter specifies
the number of the r4ek or, in the case of di>lributeJ 110. the numb~-r of the station. If the module has no suhrnod,,1e slol. enter Rft 161100 in th e
Sl-BSLOT paramcI"r. SUIlADDR conTain, th e
addrc," offset in the module's u~cr ,l~ta
(W,J l 6#UOOO. for ~xample. Siands for the mod ule ,taT! address).
SI'C 71 CJ,:O_ L OG
Asce r l"Ln Ihe g .... g .... llhlul.ddress
Systcm function SFC 71 G EO_LOG relUJ1I.S the
geographical ~ddress of a moou!e or station if
you define thc logical base liddres5. The value
in the AREA parameter dcHnes Ihe ~ystem in
which ' he module is used (Table 22.3).
8fC 71 GEO_LOG replaces the SFC 49 LGC_
GADR and can alsu be used;o B~sociatiOJ\ wi th
PROFll'.'ET 10,

SFC 70 LOG_ CEO

Alcertaln the [oa:kal ha . .. add rus
System runeli"n SfC 70 LOG_ GEO ~rums thc
logica l ad dress of a module or station. Thc
8$sig n menl Of Ihe MASTER parameter indicates whelhc-r the station Or module is in~~T!~d
in a rack (X"nLra l design) Or whether the s\$lion
is opCrtued in H j' ROHH US or PROF~"'ET s)<.tern. UI><;: Ihe SLOT parameter to specify the
slot Dumber in the rack Or station. and thc SUBSLOTpHl"\lmctcr forthe "umberol"the .ubmo<!ule. T he LADD R parameter th .." rctums th<l

S FC 49 LCC_GADR
.o\sccnain th e ~ IOI .ddrcn o f a module
SFC 49 LGC_ GADR retutlu Ihc slot ad<Jrcs~ o f
a module when you specify an arbitnuy logica l
mooule addres;; . Subtr-.. cllOg the addr.::ss offset
(parameter SlJBADDR) from the specified
user data addre3S gi'es)'Oll the modulc statlin g
addre, . The value in Ihe AREA parameter
spccifi~s the "Ys!cm in which the mod,de is
operated (Table 22. 3).

22.4 A:;cer\ainiDg a Module Add,CjS

- crul-alL'O
- PROFffiUS DP

22 Slarl-up Characteristics
Tab le 22.3 Meaning of Output ParameteTS "f SFC 49 LGC- GADR and SFC 71 LOG GEO

AREA

System

S7_400

,
,
,

S7-300

Meaning of output parameters of

SFC 49 LGC GADR
RACK - rack Dumber
SLOT - . 10t numl>er
SUHA DDR _ differeuce from base
addreo<

Meaning of outpm parameters of

SFC 71 LOG GEO
MASTER - Q
STATlO:-; - r.ck number
SLOT - <lot number
SUBSLOT - Q
OFFSET - difference from base address
\Vith PROFtBUS DP,

DiS!ri b"ted

~CK

00

Low byte - ,motion number

High byte - DP master system 1D
SLOT - slot number
SUBADDR - difference from base
address

,=.
"
"Q=.

RACK - rock number

SLOT - . lot number of adapter ~ ..in g
SUBADDR - oddress in S5 area

"
"

I>lASTER - DP ma"cr ,y "~ m ID

STATION - station number
SLOT - slot number
SUBSLOT-O
OFFSET - di ITer=~e frum base .ddres,
W;lh PROFINET 10:
MASTER - PROFlNET 10 system ID
STATIO", _ " otion numb<:r
SLOT - . lot number
SUBSLOT - subslot number
OFFSET - diifet'Ctlce from base address
MASTER - O
STATION - rack number
SLOT - . lot number of adapter casing
SUBSLOT - O
OF FSET - address;n S5 area

1M3 area
IM4 area

SFC 50 RD_ LGADR

A. eertain Hil logical addresses fur a module
SFC 50 RD_ LGADR returns all logical
addresses for a module w hen you specify an
arbitrary address from the user data area.

deviate from the default. To specify parameters,

ope n the module in the hardware confi gurat ion
and fill in the tabs in the d ialog box . When you
lransfe the System Data. obj cct in the Blocks
contailler to the PLC , you lin"' also trans fcrring
the modu le param eters.

Use th e P EADDR and PAADDRpammete rs 10

detine a n arc a of\VORD components (a wordbased ANY pointer. for example P# DBzDBXy." WORD nnn).

The C P U transfers the module paramcters to

the module automaticall y in the following cases
:>

On reslan

SFC 50 then shows the n umber of entries

returned in these area s in the RECOUNT and
PACOUNT parameters.

:>

Whell a mOdule h as been plugged inlo a

confi gured slot (S7-400)

1>

Follo wi ng the "return" of a mck or a distributcd 110 station.

22.5 Parameterizing Modules

22.5.1 Ge neral rema r k!; Ull pHrarne_
terlzing module.
Most S7 modules Can be parameterized , that is
to say. values may be sel on the module which

St atic and dynurnic module parameters

The module paramcters are d ivid ed into static
parameterS and dynamic pammete rs. You can
set both parameter types omine in the Hard-

=
22.5 Paramct<!'li.zilli Modules

ConfigWlllion. You can al!.o modilY tile

dynamIc parameLCTS al runtime b y calling '11)'1tern block. In lhe a.1aM routine, the para""'IL""
SC1 on ' he moduk~ u. ing "Y~lem bloc k& are

"'1m'

ovcrwrincn by the parameters ,..,1 (and

,torw

on the CP U) via the Ha rdware Configumtion.

RD_REC, lhe numb<."I" of transmined byle. is

presenl in RET_VAl. In Ihe C\'ctlt of ... error,
Ihe nmr code i. prt"Sctlt in Ihe error infortna
lion.
Mod ul . And data record addreul nll

The parame ters for the signal Tll0<.lul es are in

two dat R record ~ : the .Iati~ paramcl~rs in datu

r~cQTd 0 and the dynami e para meter< in claIM
record l. You Cnn lnln sfcr hath dala record s to
{he module with tystem function SFC 57
PARM _MOD, dsUl record 0 or 1 w jlh s)'Stern
funcliOll SFC S6 WR_f)PAAAI . and only dalll
!"'Oro 1 ",nh Sf C 55 WR_PAR.',,1. The data
recorus must be in the system da\.a blocks OIl tile
C PU.
After parumclcrizallon of an S7-400 modul e,

cerned . Ui\e the m odule . tart w.!drc~s. With

mi~ ..-d modu!e5 having input and outpm " ~U,
Ule the lower area sran addl"\!SS. If you assigned
Ihe same ,Iar: address to both the input BOO O\llput .....,as. u.e the identifier for an i'lpUI Bddn:ss.
Usc th~ liD "Ientifier reganl l~" of whether you
"'am to e ~ccu:e B read or wrile op~rnlion.

The mcxhllc stan address is panrneterizcd

the spo.-.;ified va luci do DOt go ;nlO foree until

bit 2 ("Opu!>!;" g mode') in byte 2 of diagnO!>lic
daln = Qrd 0 1m. ;wo umed 'he
"RUN"
The d iagnosti c data record 0 can he read wilh
system fun ction SfC 59 RD_ REC or ~yst~m
function block SFU 52 RDREC.

e'ther using W IOlD and lADD R par81m1<m:

or - witb nt'Wer ,y<tem bloch - using the
LADOR on its own. In Ihl case. bil 15 deter
mines whelher an input e'O"') or output (" I ") ;~
involved . (With the .ystem function b lo<: k.1
SFB 52 RDR EC and SFB 5~ WRREC, this il
the parameter ID .)

A,y nc hro no ul pr""e.. lng of system b lod "

Enter the data record number in thu REC>JU M

or INDEX parameter.

val""

Apart from the ly5lCTn function SFC H R()

DI'ARM. the system blocks ror module param-:
eteri~.ation and lnuwni""ion of records wort
nynchroooLl$ly. u cculioo ofw funct:i(ln cov,
1'" IK'ven.1 ealb , and i. uiggcn:d by the block
parameter R!;Q - ~ 1-. ~uring I'r<:>CI'ssing oftlle
job. the RUSY pIITlImctCT is al - I", ~d the error
in fonnalion has !he value Wi!l161t7001 (job
being processed). Tile error infonnalio'l is i'l
the RET_VAL P[lf"4IDCICT for the ')"ltem func _
tions. lind in byt~~ 2 and 3 of the STATUS
parameter for the ~y.tem func tion block s.

A certa in job fo r a module is specified by the

modu le " arting address aDd the data record
numbet-. Asluni III BUSY - "1" , a renewed call
for the samcjoo witll R" Q = ' "\" ba. no dfeet.
and the error infonnation i . ..... to WIf L6If7002.
If an c:rror """Un! wt.cn lriggcriog an job, thi, is
signaled by the error in formation. and BUSY
remains "i)'".
If the job b33 been completed. BUSY ba~ Ihe
"atus ''O-. If the job is completed without error.
the error information has Ihe value
W;l16i!1OOOO; with the system funct ion SfC 59

AS fur M addressing fOT data It1In .fcr iii COil-

Usc the RECORD parameter with Ihe dala type

A..... Y 10 define an area of BYTE ~otnponen!S.
This may be a variable of typf: ARRAY.
STRUCT or unT, or an "-'''0' pointer u f type

BYTE (for example PIoDEkDBXJ\x BYTE

nnn). If)'ou u.., a ,ariabll', il must be a "COlD'
plete" variable: individual lIlTlIy or 5\(U~1 .."":
components are nOt penniMible.
rcrm !~ !lhle

dat a record n um ber.

DOla reCQrds with Inc numbers 110 24 0 nrc permi!! ihle for the system fun~lions for mod ule
parameterization. The . peci ti ed data reco rds
muSl be pres ent in the sy.tem data in the case of
SYSI<;m block.~ SFC 54 RD_DPARM, SFC 56
W"R_DPARMandSFB 81 RD_ DPAR.

System fu""ion SFC 58 V.'R_RC can pruocss

data rc<:ord< in the range 2 to 240, SFC 59 RD_
REC In the range 0 to 240. System functi on
blocks SFB 52 RDRC and SFB 53 WRR EC
traMmit data !"e<:ords with numbers 0 10 2SS.
Data r""QTds 0 and I ba"e a ~J'CciaJ s'Vnif,cBuce
witb SThIATl C S7:

22 Stan-up Characteristics

r>

Data ,..,cord 0 : reading ufdiagnostics data (4

bytes) and w ri ting of static. module parame ters

r>

Data record 1: rca ding of diagnosti~s d~ta

(dala record 0 and funh ..r data) and ,wi t ing
o f dynamic module paramet<:N

"

SFC 57 l'ARM :vIOD

Pa rameterize nwdu1e
SFC 102 RD DPARA
R .. ad prffielined paramelers

The parameler; for the listed system bloch are

de'e rib~ d in Table 22.4 ,

A d at a recurd can be up to 240 bytes long.

SFB 81 RD DPA R
Readiug preddin ed pa rameters

Module pa r am eterizat ion with

I' ROFU.' ET 10
Connuction of d istri buted 110 oyer PROFTh:"ET
IO requi res an .. xt~nded quantity fram ..work for
th .. mo<.l u l~ paramelerilalion compareJ 10
PROFlBUS DP. and n~w syst~m block< are
provide<! tor Ihis, These ne w system blocks Can
,..,plaee thc previous blocks , Fib"-ure 22.3 pro
vides an overview uf th~ system bloch for
module paramet .. rization,

22.5.2 Sy5tcm Blocks for Modul e

Para m eteriza ti on
Th~

followi11g sy'tem hloch are available for

parameterizing modules:

SFR 81 RD DPAR
Read predefined parameter:l

Sy,t.. 01 function block SfB Xl RD Di'AR

transmits the Jata r<'Co rd ,vith the number specified in the INDEX param .. ter from the corre,ponJing SOU system data block to the destination an:: a specified at lhe REC ORD parameter.
The transmissi on is carried ou t in asynchronous
mode. and can be divided ~n.v en sev.. ral progrom cycles; (he BUSY param ctcr is " I "' during
the transmission, Following 8uce~,"ful transmi"ion , th~ VALID param~t.,,- is "1" , and lh~
LE~ param~l~r contains the number of transmitt~d data bytes

..

The read data record can now be evaluated or

modified. for example, and written into lhe
module u>ing SFB 53 W RREC
SFB 81 RD_DPAR replaces SFC 102 RD_
D PA RA and SFC 54 RD i'AR.\,1.

r>

SI'C 54 RD DPAlUvf
Read prcdefUleO parameters

SFC 5 5 WR PAR M
Write dymuni" param eters

SF C 102 RD Dl'ARA
R~ a ding prldelined param et e rs

SFC 56 \VR nPARM

Wrik predcfmed parameters

System function SFC 102 RD_ DPARA transnUts the data record with the number specified

C PU's memory

Module

Load memo
,S OB

(SFC 54)
(SFC 102)
S FB 81

.','::
,"

/
(SFC 56)
(SFC 57)

(SFC 55)
(SFC 58 )
S FB 53

1....-_/
(SFC 59)
SF B 52

,,_...J

'--------/
F1gu re 22 .3 Sy<1cm Bloch for M,><lul~ P;u-am eteri ntion

The b loch

printed in bold
')'1'" rcp l",'e
the pa,-" nnhc,iz"d

blo.;ks 000" .
th,-m, lUlU Ulll

ah.o l:>e used

'o g.<.h~' with
PROFlNLT 10,

Tlbi.

n .4 Pan.mc'= of S~'lcm Blocks for Mooule P.....met.riut;OII

in the RECNUM parameter fmm the corresponding SOB !ystcm d"ta blod: to the destination area spcdfi\XI at the RECORD.
The tran;lmiSJion is c""';ed out in asynchronous
mode. and can be divi<kd belWttn 'c'era1 program cycle,; Ihe BUSY parameter ;$ .. , . during
Ihe tranlmiuion .
SFC 102 replaces the SFC S4 RD_D?AR.\1
wbicb works in synChronOUi mode.
SFC 54 RO_ DPARM
Readin.: p N! litfioed p.r.mtlcr.
Sy",cm function SFC S4 RD_ DI'ARM transfe"
the Will record with Ihe number specified in Ibe
RECNUM parameter from Ihe relevant SOB
sy.tem data bluek 10 the destination area
fied at the RECORD parameler.

'pee"

The transmission is carried oul in asynchronous

mode; the system function i ~ processed unt;lthe
dot" record has ~n transmined. Since read ing
is from load memory, tile rdatively long pro--CC'I~ins lime "'ith large data records may depcDdinS on !he application - be considered as
inconvenient. In tbis CUI; use the SFB 81 RD_
DPAR or the SFC 102 RD_ DPARA whieh extcute~ this fllnction in asynchronom mode.

You can now. for example. evaluate or modifY

this read d;llli record and writt it \0 the module
"'itb SFFl 53 WRREC or SFC 58 WR_ REC.
SFC 55 WR_PAR!>I
Wri t1ng dynamic para metus
SySt<ml function SFC SS WR_ PARM IransfCfl!
the data record addressed by RECORD 10 \I>c

22 Start-up Characteristics
module specified by the IOID and LADDR
parameters. Specify the nu mber of the data
record in the RECNUM parameter. The data
r~""ord may only contain th~ dynamic modul~
parameters . it must not be data record O. If the
module parameter, are prese nt in the associated
SDB, thcy must not be identified as static
Wh en the job is initiated, the SFC reads the
entire data record: the transfer may be d istributcd over several program scan cycles. Thc
BUSY parameter i5 '1 during the transfer.

22.5.3 Block. for Transmitting Datu

Rl""Cord.

The following sy.tem blo;;ks are avaIlable for

transmining data records:

> SFB 52 RDREC

Kead data record

> SFC 59RD]EC

Read data record

> SfB 53 WRREC

Write data record

> SFC 58 WR_ REC

write data record

SFC S6 WR DPAR.M
Writing predeflned parameters
System function SFC 56 WR_DPARM transfel1l the data record with the nwnber specified
in Ihe RECNUM parameter from the relevant
SOB syslem data block to the module identified
by the IO ID and LADDR parameters.
The transfer may be distributed over several
program s,an cyd~ s: th~ BUSY parameter is
'1" during the transfer.
SFC!l7P'-\&"\1_1\100
Parameterizing a mod ule
System fun ction SFC 57 PARM_MOD transfcrs all the data records programmed when the
modulc was parameterized via the Hardware
Configuration.
transfcr may be distributed over several
program sean cycles; the BUSY parameter I S
" I ,. d llring the transfer

Th~

The parameters of the listed sy,tem functions

are described in Table 22 ,5 and thosc o f the system function blocks in Table 22.6 ,
W ith an S7 -3oo CPU, you can pro;;css up to
four write jobs and four read jobs simultaneously per DP segment. With an S7-400 CPU,
up to eight write jobs and eight read jobs can be
simultaneously active per DP segment. You can
simultaneously execute a maximum total of 32
write jobs and 32 read jobs on external DP segment5.
SFB51 RDREC
R~ad in g u da ra record
SY5tem function hlock SFB 52 1U)REC with
'1 at the REQ param eter reads !he data record
INDEX from the module and stores it in the
destinat ion area REC01U). Th e destination
a rea muSt be longer than or at least as long as
the Jata record. Use the MLEN parameter to
spec ify how many by tes you wish to read.

Ta ble n.s ParnmC1ets for Sy<!= Function. U",d fOf Data Tro.nsftl

,;

J<><J

22.5 ParamC\crizina Modules

The transfer may be distrib uted over several

progrnm scan cycles. The BUSY parameter is
" 1" during the tran sfer.
A signal status "I" at tbe VAL ID paramC\crsignab thll the data n:cord has been n:ad without
faults. The LEN panL01eter then indicale, the
number of Inlnsmined bytes.
In the event o f an error. the ERROR parameter
is S<.:t to "I " nnd the error information output in
the STATUS parameter.

The 5ySt~"tTl function block SFR ~2 RDREC

contains the functionality of system function
SFC 59 RD_REC, a nd can replace the laller.
S FC 59 RO_R EC
Rudin" Mdata ftCo rd
When the REQ pllramct",. is "1", SFC 59 RD_
REC n:ads the data record addressed by the
RECNUM panuneter from the module and
places it in d~ti""tiOIl an:a RECORD. Thedesfination a",a must be IOllger than or at least as
101111 as the data re<;ord. If the trllIl.fcr is completed without error, the RET_VAL p &nomCtet
contains the number of bytes transferred.

The 1Ta",[cr may be d istributed over ".,veral

pr(laram SCaD cycles; the t3USY parameter is
"]" during the trarufer.

S7300 deJi\"cttd prior to February 1997: the

SFC n:ads ~s much data from the specified data
record as the destination area can accommodate. 1bc size of the destinallOll area may oot
el(ceed that of the data reconI.
SFB 53 W kREC
Writing a data r ecord
Sy~lem function bl""k SFB 53 WRREC with
,.\'. at the REQ parameler writes the dala record
INDEX from the SOUt1:e ~rea RECORD to the
modul~ Use the LEN parameterlo sped fy bow
many b}1tS you wi~b \0 wrile.

The tralllifcr may be dislribut~-d ovcr several

program scan cycles. The BUSY pailItnC1er is
"I" during the transfe-r.
A sipl statu, .. ] al the DONE parameter sign.:l.\s that the data record hu been wrillen without faults. In !he event of an error, the ERROR
parameter is set 10 "I"' and the error infonnatioll
OlltpUt in the STATUS p arameter.

22 Start-up Characteristics
The system function block SFB 53 WRREC
contains the functionality of system function
SFC 58 WR_REC, and can replac~ the lattCT.
SFC 58 WR_REC
Writing a data record
SFC 58 WR_ REC transfers the dala record
addressed by the RECORD parameter and the

nutnber RECNUM to the module defined by

the 101D and LADDR parameters. A 1" in the
REQ parameter starts the transfer. When the job
is initiated, the SFC reads the complete data
record.
The transfer may be distributed over several
program scan cycles; the BUSY parameter is
.. j " during the transfer.

23 Lrtor Handling

23 Error HandLing

The CP U rcpons ~-rrOts or faults rlete<:ted by the

module, or by the CPU it>elfin different way s,
t:>

Errors in Hrithmetic opemtions (overflow,

invalid REAL n"m~r) hy 'C1ting status bits
('tam, bit OV, for exm,,]>le, for H numeri c~ 1
overflow)

The CPU's ""crating system generates a syncm-onous errorwhcn an error occur<; in immediate conjunction w itn program ;;canning. A distin ction is nmde between two error types :

"',,'T

A progrllmminll error is pre , em if execution

of the program i, faulty, Such errors include
BCD convers ion errors, errors with indirect
addressing : addre"ing of missing time," ,
eount"r, or b lo cks. Organization h l""k OB 121
is called in the evem of a progranmling error

> Errors detected while executing the

program (synchrono .... errors) by ca!l jtl&

organization blocks 0 9 121 an d Oll 122
t:>

23,l Synchrouou s Errors

Errors in the programmable controll er

which do not relate 10 progniln scanning
(H,yncrn-onous errors) by calling organiza_
lion blocks 08 80 to Oll 87

The CPU s ignals the oceurrt.-'T1ee of an errOr or

fault, and in wm e CH,es the c alISe, by 'ieUing
crror LEOs on the fron t paneL In the ca,e of
unrc<:ovcrable errors (such as inval id 01' code),
the CPU goes directly to STOP,

An acrcS! error (PZF) is p 'es~" t if an attempt

is made to acce" a faulty or non-existent m odule Or an 110 a ddress not known on the CPU.
TIle operating system reacts in dillercnt man_
ners dercnciing On the type of access:
:>

lhe 110 access is from the user program. In

this e,,",c, lhc 110 acec>s error organization
b lock 011122 is called.

The PZF (}Ccurs dnring a!l\omatic updating

of a (parti al) ptO<:css image. With S7-300
C PUs the defaul t "'sponse is thaI an entry is
not mad~ into the diab'1l0stics buffer and an
OB is llClt called; S7_400 CP U, enter each
PZF into the diagnostics buffer and 't<m the
OR g5 With neWer CPU., thc response to a
PZt ' can b~ parameterized (sec "Program
~xccution errors 08 85" in Cnapt<:r 23.3 ,
"A,yn~hronous Errors").

T he contents of this bu ffer are r~tained On

STOP, o n a tncmoryresct, and on power failu re,
and can ~ read out following power n:covery
and e xecution ofa "tan-up routine using a pro_
gramming device.

The PZF occurs if a p artia l process image is

u.pdated by" system function. The error and
the address of the first byte s ignaling the
error are then retwned in their param~1crs
(system functions SIT 26 UPDAT_ PI, SFC
27 UPDAT_PO, SFC 126 SYNC PI and
SFC 127 SY NC]O).

On the ne w CPUs, you can u,e CI'U pararn"tCT_

ization to sel the llutllh<-. of ent ri es the diagnos_
tics butler is to hold.

Tf the corresponding organization block OB

121 (lr OB 122 is not present when a synchronous err(lr event oceurs, the CPU eUlers the
STOP status.

With the CPU m STOP mode, you can "'~ a

programming device a nd the CPU inlonnation
functions to read ant the COntent< of the blr>ek
,lack (8 s tack), the interrup t stack (1 st.ack) and
the local data stack (L stack) and then draw
concl usions as to the cau., e of clTOr.
T he sy"em diagnost ics can dete ct error~ifau jts
on the modules, a nd ,",'mers these error'> in a
dia gtlo>tic bulfer. Informati on on CPU mode
transitions (s uch a, the rea"ons for a STOP) are
a l'!O placed in the diagnostic buff~ .

23 ETTQT lI .... dl ;ng

Sian Inronnatioo rOT the Synchronous Enor 000 12

'~~~';';';'~i~~~~~=======
1
..
Fe: Bi;I6#8C

,
,

Bn aCCen
Brte acceSl
.....ord access

DoublewOTd ae,en

,,
,,

,,

Process.,m"e ,npu' table I

OUtpu' table Q
Memory bit" M
Global data block DB
Instance da,. block DI
Temporary local
L
local data orthc
Proce"imal~

doa,.

> Errorcd odd.e.. (~t rood/write oeeeSf)

~ Errorcd orcll (in the ca.., of arca error)
~ Ineomct number of tbe block. timer/cO\101er 1I.,,<:tio{)
01)

12~:

Tab le 23. 1 showl the Start infonnation for botll

synehrQnoU$ etTOr orgalli7.alion blocks.
The S7400 CPU5 di ..ingui,h bctwc~n tWO
types of acecss clTor: acce,s 10 a Don'cxislem
module and inva lid access attempt to an exist
ing modu l ~ (acknowledgment delay QVZ). [fa
module fai ls during operalion, that module is
marked "nonexistent" approximately 150 p.s
after an ace~SII auempt, and an 110 access error
( PZ f ) is rccponed on every subsequent allempl
to aCX:e8S Ihe module, The CPU also repons an
110 access error when an attempl is made to
acecss a non-cxistent module. rccgardlcss of
whether the attempc was direct (vii the I 0
arca) o r indirect (via the proo;css imaae),
If an access elTOr oc<:urs whcn writing the
pc:riphcnll outputS, an 57-400 CPU tracks the
outplU procci>'ll image, an 57-300 CPU diX's not,

'"

Ad<Jrt' 31 which the error occtuTe<!

A synchronous elTOr Oil hDS thc same priority

(class) as the blm:k in which the elTOr occurred,
The accumulators and addn:!i~ registers of
aiynchronous error 08 comain the values
present in lhe block eau$ina the error at the time
of aooning, The data block registers are
deleted: lbe condition code word hilS an undefined content
l\OtC thac when a synchronous error OB is
called, ils 20 bytes ohlun infonnalion are also
pushed onto the L Slack for the priority class
Ihat caused the CITOr, as arc the olher temporary
loo;al data fur the synchronous etTOr OB and for
all blocks called in this OB, The area reserved
for the temporary local data must be designed for
this in e'CT)' ass:o<:ialed priority class (program
ex~cution level): (fixed setting with 57-300
CPU" adjustable with 57-400 CPUs du ring

I
Tobit D.l SFC Pan",.,.".. for Syr><:hronvus Em>r H.ndlma

pnmc::rization of (he CPU in the "Memory"

tab).

11 ;s similar ,,jth !be block

depth. The
nesting depth per priority ~1'!I pmnissible for
a CPU ;~ the Iolal of lhe nesling depth of the
"normal" proces~ing and tile nesting de-plh of

> SFC l7 D:'1SK FLT

Urunast. synchronous error
(rc-mablc DB call)

nffilflg

'he synchrom>us error processing.

In the case of 57-40(), anQlh~ synchronous
error Oil can be called in In <mvr OIl. The
blo<:l: nesling depth for. synchronous error DB
Ii 3 for 57-400 CPUs and 4 for 57-300 CPU~.

p'~~~",""

t>

SFC3SREAD_ERR

Read ror register

The operating sysTem enters the synchronous
error in the diaiUo.tic buffer without regard to
the use of.ystem functiOlt$ SFC 36 10 SFC 38.
The par"meteB for t~'" system functiom are

hoted in Table 23.2.

You Can disable and cubIc I synchronous error

OB call with !;)'Stern

function~

SfC 36

MSK~

FLT. SFC 37 DMSl<:JLT andSfC 38 READ_

ERR.

23.1 Synchronous Error Handling

The foUO"';ng system functions ~ pro"i<kd
for handling '<}'DChronous errors:
po

SfC 36 MSK_FLT
M1tSk synchronous errof$
(disable OB call)

B.2.1 Error Fille rs

Th~.",.or

lilleB are used W control the system

!Unctions for synchronous error handling In the
prograuuning error fil ter, one bit stand, for

each programming error det~lcd; in the access

error fiher. ODe bn s!ands for each acc~n OITOI"
deucted. Wben ~ou define an error filter. you
$C:t the bn that stand> for the syndlrooous error
you "'aD1 to mask. unmask 01 query. lbc: error
IilteB ",turned by the ~tem fllll(:tiQM show a
"1" for synchronous =on that an: Ilill masked
or which have occum:d.

T.b~

1l.J ACCeM Error filter

Thc BCCCSll CIT(>T filler i. shown In r .. blc 23.3;

'hc Error Cu<.!c ~olumn show. ,h~ contcnt~ of
variabl.., OB I 22_SW _FLT in {he .tan infonnlllion forOB 122.

The pl'Ogrammin\l. error fill~r is shown in Table

23.4; ,he Em:>r Code cuhmm shows thc ~un-

'ents of variable OBI21_SW_FlT in thc Slart

information for OB 121.
The error fi1t~r hils nut li~ted in the tabks arC
no, relevant 10 the handling of synchrnnou,
ClTOU .

Table U.4 ""Q&l1Ul1lnina Em..- FilleT

"

Ii

,,

'"

23_2 Synchrooous Error Ilandlina

U..2.2 Mn king Syncb ronous Error.

System function SFC 36 :\iSKJlT dis.ables
synchronOlll error OB calls via the error filteTS.
A ."]". in the error filten indicate~ lIle synchronous erron for whicb the OBs arC nOI 10 be
called (Ihe synchronous ClTOI"S are masked').
The mask ing of synchronous errors in the error
fihers il in nddition to the masking stored in the
optt1ltinS sYltem's memory. SFC 36 returns,
function value indicating wbether a (stored)
masking ,Ircady exists on at least one bit for the
masking specified at the input parameten
(W~ 16l100(1).
SFC 36 mums a l~ in the output parameun
for all cum;lItly mllSked errors.
lfa masked Ii}TlChro"""s error event ocrurs. the
resplive OB is not called and the nror is
ente~d in the error register_ The Disable
applies to the current priority c1as.s (priorily
level). For example . if you we' to disable a
synchronous I.'ITOr OB call in the main program.
the synchronous eITor OB would still be ca llw
if the t'\TDT were to occur in an interrupt service
routine.

U .%.3 Unmukinl: S)"ncb.ronOIlS Er ron

SYSlem fulll."tion SFC 37 D~1SKJLT enables
lhe s}TlChronou5 error OB calls viii the error fil
1m. You enter a ~l~ in the filten; to indicate the
synr.:hronoul nron; for whi~h the OB~ 81e once
again 10 be callo-d (the synchronous errors t.rI!
"umnasko-d). The entries com:.ponding 10 the
srx:cifi~d bits B1<' deleted in the elTor ftgister.
SFC 3i rC\ums Wli l6#OOOl as function value if
no (Itor(:d) ma!king al",ady exists on at lust
one bit for the unmasking sp<:cilied al the inpul
parameters.
SFC 37 rerums a ~ I in the OUtpUI paramelers
for all cwn::-nlly masked. nrors.

If an unmasked synchronous error oceurs. lbe

respeclive OB is cal~ed and the ~enl enlered in
the mor "'';<ler. The Enable applielto the cur
rent pnority cia" (priority level).

23. 2.4

Rud ln ~

th e Error Reghl er

SyStem func lion SFC 38 READ_ERR reads thc

in the error
error reiistcr. You mus' enter a
mt~t1 10 indicate the "JlIchronous erro~ whose
enlria; you ",anl to read. SFC 38 r<.1untS
WtO 16it()(l(l1 as function value wilen the ""Icclion slN'cilied in the input param<:u,n ir.duded
at least one bil for ",mcb 00 (<lore(!) masking

extsa.
SFC 38 ",rums a ~l~ in the OUlput paraml:lCTS
for Ihe ~lected errors when these errors
o<:cum:d. and deletes these: errors in the mor
tl:1I;5t ...... wben they a,e queried. The synchronous errors that are reponed arc thOle in the
current priority cla" (priorir;. le"el).

2).2.5 En tering a Su bstitu te Value

SFC 44 REPL_ VAL allows you to entcr I ubstirute ~alue in accumulator I from within a
synchronous error OB. UK SFC 44 when you
ean no 10nilCT read any values from a module
(fot inSlance when a module il def..-.:twe).
WhC1l you program SFC 44, OR 122 ('seceS!
error") is called every time an attempl is nude
10acCeS! the module in quenion. When roucall
SFC 44. rou can load a .uhslituto ~alue inlo the
accumulator; the program. scan il then resumed
wilh the sub~lirut~ value. Table 23.~ !iils the
par1lmeters for SFC 44
You may call SFC 44 in only one iynchrooous
errorOB(OB 121 orOB 122).

23.3 Asynchronous Errors

Asynchronous elTOfli are errors ..... hich can
occur independently of the program ~can.
When an asynchronous error OCCUf!\, the operaling syslem calls one of me organization
blockli listed below:

013 80 Timing error

DB 10 Power ~upply error
D B 82 Diagnoslic imerrupt
D B 83 lo scrtln:movc module inierTUPI
O B 84 CPU hanl ..... >rn: fault
OB liS Program execution error

013 86 Rack r"ihJrc

0 13 87 Conunonicalion error
O B 88

~55ing ~bort

The OR 82 call (dia),'T1oSlic interrupt) is

described in delail in Chapter 23.4. "Systent
Diagnostic,",
On Ihc S7-400 H, Ih'en are three additional
asynchronous errOr OBs'

O R 70 110 redundancy "Iron;

OB

CPU redundancy erron;

013 73 Comnmn icDiions redundancy errors

The call of these nsynchronous error orgam"a_

\inll blocks can be dinh1cd and enabled .... ilh
iY$tem functions SFC 39 DIS_ un and SFC 40
EN rRT, and dclaycd and ~'lliIbled with $) >1~'lIl
fWicuons SFC 41 DIS_AlRT and SFC 42 ~N
AIRT.
TIming

ermrs on 80

The Of"'rating system calls organization hloc);-

on 80 when onc of me following errors OCCUfli:

> Cycle mon itoring time excdcd

(>
O B requesl .mw (the requested 08 is still
executing or an OB was requc.led tOO frcquellt ly within a aivell priorily class)
J>

Ti me-of_day interrupt error (fOD interrupi

time paslix:e$uSC clock was ,;ct fOr-l'ard or
aner Imnsiliun 10 RU ~ )

If no OR 80 is avaihlble and a timing error

occurs. the CPU goes to STOP. The Cl'U al,o

398

gocs to STOP if the OB is cal led" second tinlc

in the s!mle program s~al1 cycle.
Power s upply

~ rron

OD 81

The operating system caU, organization block

0881 ifone ofth~ following ClTOn occun:
one ba~kup banery in the central
controller or in an expan.ion unit is empty

:>

1\1 !I!!m

Co

No bunery volUige in tbe ccnlnol conlruller

or in un expansion unit

(>

24 V supply failed in centra l eontrolll!ror in

Bn

expansion unit

on 81 is

caU~d

for in,uming and outgoing

events. Iflh",e is nO OB 8 1, the CPU cun linue.
functioning when a power supply ~'lT<.>I" UC~Ufli.
In!H'rU"'mo .... modllie Interrupt 08113
The "P<'ntting <ystem monitors Ihe module configuration once per second. An entry is made in
the dia!l:nOSlic buffer and in the w~tet11 status
list each tim~ a module is insened or removed
in RUN. STOP or START-UP mode.
In addi tion, me o~nlting '}"Item calls organi_
zatioll block OB lB iflbe CPU is in RUN mode.
Iftbcrc is no OB 83, tbe CPU goes 10 S"I"O I' on
:m insen. remo~e module intcrrupt.

As much as a sccond ~an pass before the insert!

remove module interrupt is gcnel1lted. As p
~suh. ,t ;s po~"ble that 1m access elTO!" or an
CTTOr rcia Ullg to tbe updating of the prochS
imI1ge could be reponed in ,he interim between
removal of a module and g~"IIeration of the
interrupt.
If B .<uilable module is inscned into a CO'ltjgured slol, the CPU autOtnUlically parameleri~es
lhat module. using datu records already siored
un that CPU. Onl)" men is OB 83 called in order
10 ~i8nal thai the eonnecled module is ready tor
operation,

C PU hardwan faulU OB

8~

The o~rating system calls organization block

OB ~ " hen an interface I'TTOr (MPI network,
PROFIBLS DP) oceUIlI or di""PPCIlfli. If Ih~=
is no OB 84. CPU...... ith older opemting sy~
tems 110 to STOP on a CPU hardwa..., fault.

Projtnl m u e.: ut ion uron 01$ 85

Rack fl.lI ur e O B 86

The opcr&ling sy>;~m eaU~ OIi"nizat ioll block

The open";ng .y~tcm can, oJWIDiation block

OR 86 if it detects the fa.ilul"C of a rack (po'" cr
fai lu~, line: break:, defective 1M: not with S7300j, n DP master ~y~tC!D or a di"ributed 1'0
,tation (PROFm us DJ' or PROF1NIiT 10).
0 13 86 is caUed for both incUIJling and leaving

Oil K5 "lien one oftM foHowing errors occun:

to>

SlaTt r~u c .t for an Qrga nization block:

which has nol occn Irnu.l.xI

to>

Error ",",cunni whi le W <>pI.Taling ~ystem

wa~ accessing a block (for irulance no
inSlance do.la block when a system runetion
bloc k (SFfI) was cal lcd)

to>

110 a.'ecss error while executing (automatic) updating of Ihe (IfOCes!l ima\:c on the
system side

On the S7-400 CP Il>. 08 8~ i~ called at liD liO

access .",.or on me ' ystem .idc. i. e. when updating tM procc~s image in each cycle. n.e sub.lilute value or zero i. wn enlered in Ihe rdevt&lll
byte in Ihe process-image ;npul table at evcry
update.

On the S7-300 CP Us, 01:l8S is not called in th~

event of an I/O acee.. <:rTIlr during automatic
Updat ing of tbe pl"tlC""" itruoll". AI the firsl
."TTOre<i ac~~ W suh~t itute " aluc or urn is
CJ"Ile<ro in me re!evant byte; il is then no 10llger
updated.
With apl"lropria\ely equ ipped CPUs, you c;1ll
use CI'U parnmele rinl.lion 10 in nucnce the call
mode or OD !lS in W evenl of an 1,0 access
error on the ~y5lCm side:
[>

:>

8S ;5 called e..ery l i~. The affected

in put byte ;s overwritten wim the substitute
v81ue: or with zero cllCh tinle .

01:1

0 885 is called in the: eveot of/he first error

,,ith me annbulC iO)ming"'. An .fleeled
input b>lc i. on!> overwrillen with the sub, tirute value or Wilh 1.cro the forsl tim~: follo wing Ih[j ;t is n<.> lonaer updated . If the
error is then oo"""clcd. Oil 85 is called wim
the anribute "outgOiDIO": r()I1()"'ing
updated "normally-.

[>

Ihi~,

it is

013 8S i. nOI caned in m~ ~venl of an ~~~css

error. Affected input byt~s W"C o.. erwritten
once: w;lh the sU[Ktitute: .. alue OT 7Cro, and
then no longer up<bted.

lJ lhere is 1>0 0 8 85. lhe: CPU goes 10 STOP on

a program c~ecutlOn error.

=0.

In multiprocessor mode, Oil 86 is "lied in all

CPU~ if" .... ck fails.
Ifthcre h no O B ~6.me CPU go." to STO P if
a rack failure ocrun;.

Comnlunkatl on error 08 87
The operating system calls organizalion block
013 87 Whl-n a communication error occurs.
Some e~amplcs of communicatioo errors Arc;
to

In,... l,d ftame identification or mmc length

detected during alobal dala communiC/u;OD

t>

Srndi"i of diaiiI"'Qjjlie emrie, not roniblc

to>

Clock

I>

GD stalUS cannot be C1Ilc-rcd in a <lata bl"", k

')lnchroni~.alion error

If the~ is DO 08 87, thl: CPU goes to STOP

when a communication errOT occurs.
P roctss la a: abort 08 88
The oremting fj"llem calls organiUlion block
OS 88 wbi:n proc.-ssing of If. block in the: USCI
protram is ~borted . Possibl e reasons for ar"l
abort includ e:
to

Wilh a

.ynchmn<l\l~

block nesting depth

errur, the

pe-rmi~sib!e

j~ t':<CC<.-dcd.

> With a block call, the {>C'nni,.ible Dc.ling

deflth i,
to>

c ~c~ed.

A fault ha~ ""curred when aUOCMli ng thu

local da'" of a block.

lfibere is no OB 1I!1, 1be CI'U gocs 10 STOP if

a processing ahun occurs. The CPU alw g~
to STOP if the OB is culled in priori ty class 28.
110 redundan cy error OB 70
The operating sy~tem ofao H CP U ~all$ orga
nization block. o n 70 jf a redundaDCY loss
occurs on PROFmUS DP. c. . in the cvent ofa

2.3 Error Handling

bus tailure Oil the active DP master or in the
e vent of a fault ill th~ interface ofa DP slave.
If 00 70 docs not exisi. the CPU continu~s to
operate in the event of an 1/0 rcdl.mdancy error.
CPU retJ undancy e r ror OD 72
The operating systcm of an H CPU calls organi~atlon block OR 72 if one of the following
events OCcurs:
Redundancy loss of the CPU
Compari son error (e.g. in RAM , in the PIQ)
St,,"dby. m~ster changeover
Synchronization error
Error in a SYl\'C submodu]e
Update abon

t>
t>
t>
t>
t>
t>

[fOB 72 does not exist, the CPU continu~s 10

o perate In the event ofa CPU rcdundancy error.
Communic.. tions redundancy

ctl"flr

OB 7.3

The operating system of a fault-tolerant CPU

calls th~ organization bl ock OB 7.3 when the
reduudancy of a fmllt.to1crant S7 connecti on is
lo>t for the lirstlime. [f at \caSt one fault.toler_
ant S7 conntttion signals a loss of redundancy.
thc OB 73 is nOt called again wh~n there is a
funhcr loss o f redundancy.
If Of! 73 docs not exist. the CPU continues to
operate in the evcnt of a communication:;
redundancy error.

Modules with d iagnostic capabi lit ies distingui sh bet'Vttn programm able and non-pro
grammable d iagnosTic events. rogrammablc
diagnostic even,s are reported only wheu you
have sct the parameters necessary to e nable
diagnostics. Non-programmahle d iagnostic
evt"nts [I re always reponed, regard less of
whether or !IO! d iagnostics have beeu enabl ed.
In the even! of " reponable diagnostic event,
t>

T he fault L ED on the CPU goes on

t>

Thc diagno.ric event is pas<ed on to the

CPU's operat ing syst em

,. A d iagnostic lnterrupt is generated if you

havc set the parameters enabling such interrupts (by defau lt, d iagn osti c intcm'pts an;
d i sabl~d) .

All diagnost ic events reponed to the CPU oper_

ating syst em are e ntered in a diaKn";'lie buffer
in the order in which th~y oc curred, and with
date and lime stamp. Th~ diagnostic buffer is a
battery-bHchd memory area on the CPU which
retains its eoutents Cven in the event ofa m<..-lfl ory reset . The d iagnos1ic bufter;s a ring buffer
whose si.ze d epends on the CPU. When the
d iagno stic buffer is full. the oldest entry i, overwritten by the newest.

You can read OUI the d iagnosti c b"ffer w ith a

programmiug device at auy time. In the CPU 's
S),stem Diagnos,ic5 parameter block you can
specify whether you want expanded diagnostic
enlIies (all OB calls). You may also spcci fy
whether the last d iagnostic entry made bcfore
the CPU goes to STOP should be sent to a speci lic node on the MPI hus.

23.4 Syste m Diagnostics

2.3.4.1 Diagnostic Events and
Diagnostic Buffer

23.4.2 " 'ri ling Us er Entri<s in t h e

Diagnos tic Bu ffer

System diagnostics is the detection. evaluation

and reporting of ~ITOrs occurring in program_
mable controllers. Ex amples arc ~ITors in the
user program , module failures Or wirebreaks on
signaling modules . These diagllostic e\"enls
nmy be:

System f"Hctiou SFC 52 WR_ VS_\1SG wri tes

an entry in th e diagnostic b uffer Which may be
sent to all nodes on the MP I hus Table B.6lists
the parameters for SFC 52.

t>

D iagnostic interrupts from modules with

thi s capability

t>

System errors and CPU mode transilions

t>

User messages via s)";tem functions

"'"

The entry iH the d iagnost ic buffer corresponds

in fornlat to that of a sy stem event, for ins tance
tht" stHn illfonnat ion for aH organizmion block.
Withi n the penniss ible boundaries, you may
choose your own even t 10 (EVENTN parameter) and additional information (INFO I and
1"fF02 parameters).

23.4 System OiagnostiCll

Tabl.23.6 Parameter< for SFC 52 \\'R_ USMSG

"
The event ID i, identical (0 (he f1NtlWo byt..
of th e buffer cnuy (Figure 23.1) . Permissible
for a user enny ar~ the event classe, 8 (diagno
tic entries for signal modules), 9 (standard user
events). A and B (arbitrary user event ,).
Additional information (INFOI) corresponds
to byte, 7 and 8 cfthe buffer entry (one word)
and additional information 2 (INF02) to byte;;
9 to 12 (one doubleword) . The contents of both
yariablcs may be of the uscr', own choice.
Set SE:t--'D to "j" to send the d;agnostic entry to
the relevant node . Even if ,ending is nOl possi
ble (be<:ause no node i. logged in orbccause (he
Send buffer is full, for example), the enny is
still made in the diagnostic buffer (when bit 9 of
the event 11) is set)

23.4.3 Evaluating Diagnostlc Interrupts

When a diagnost ic interrupt is incoming or outgoing, the operating system interrupt' scanning
of the user program and calls organization
block OS H2. If OB g2 has nOl been proEvent 10

115114113112111!1O!91 B171615 141312 111 0I

~ Wl'',' _txaQ..,.,,, """or

EVMt

~umb8r

"'- ~

.....m

'------ ,.,':.:.~'~":.:"'~.:""~-----'
l (i(J()

EVMt bits

~r.ot'1C ~mr)'

PROFIBUS OPV I ,laves can aho generate a

diagnostic interrupt if th e ma.ter CPU is at
STOP. A di.gno.tic interrupt triggered with (he
CPU at STOP is acknowledged, but not processed. Calling the organization block OB 82 is
nOI carried out subsequently when the CPU
goes to RlF.<.'.
Table 23.7 shows the start infonnation of the
diagnootk interrupt OB 82. In the first byte of
the start information, B#16#3~ stands for an
incoming diagno,tic interrupt and B#I6#38 fOT
a leav ing diagnostic in terrupt The sixth byte
gives me addre5S identificr (B# 16#5 4 standi; for
an input, BII16!i55 for an output); the ,uhsequent rNT variable contains the addrel;s of the
module tbat genemted the diagnootic interrupt.
The next four bytes contain the diagnostic
information provided by that module.
You can use system function SfC 59 RD_REC
(read dam record) in OB 82 to obtain detai led
error infonnation . The diagnostic information
are consistent until OB 82 is exited. that is.mey
remain frozen'. Ex iting of OB 82 acknowledges the diagnostic interrupt on the module.

' , ' _ In,.",.t ",ror

Eoftnl cia:

gnmuned, the CPU goes (0 STOP on adiagnostic imerrupl. You can disable or enable Oil 82
with system function SFC 39 DlS_IRT or SFC
40 EN_IRT, and delay Or enable it with system
function SFC 4 1 DIS AIRT or SFC 42 EN
AlRT.

for.ignot modulo

t OO' _ Sa",,>m "...,.."..,nl

' 0'0 . Attn.. . - . ~1""
, 0" At tho ",Of.

"'w.t""

Figu,"" 23.1 Even, lD for Diagnostic Buffer Entrie,

A module's diagnostic data are in data records

DS 0 and DS I. Data record OS 0 contain, four
bytes of diagnostic data de.cribing the current
Status oflhe module. The contents of these four
bytes are ide nt ical to the content, of bytes 8 to
11 of the OB 82 stan infonnalion. Dam TCcord
OS I contains tbe four bytes from data record
OS 0 and. in addition. the module-specific diagnostic data

'"

23 Error Handling

Table 21 7 Slart Informalion of Organizalion Block OB 82 (Diagnostic. Interrupl)

"~

",
,
,
6 ... 7

..0

"'
i:i

"'
"'
"

,"

,,'

..

OB82 EV CLASS

BYTE

B#I6#38 ~ DQ\VN eyenl

1l#16l<39 ~ UP eyem

~m

'YTE

ETTQTc<><I ~

~
~

~ ~

..

~~

10.6

10.7

11.2
)1.)

11.4

11.5

WORl)

Module slarting addres of mod uk

~
,

BOOC
'OOC

Front

BOaL

Module not pararneteri7ed

~
I

,_m

~ ~T

~
~ ~HT
~C)'CT

..

'.
1.
Bil 4 channel information pr.,ent
Bit 5. u'er information p~,e n t
Bit 6 <ii"!!TIo>tic' interrupt from proxy
Bit 7 ,..,,,,rv.. d

C(}mmuni~alion,

BOOe
BOOe
BOOe

statu.

fa ult

l>lodukm,=1

f.iled

Flat banef)

..

~
f"jlur~

BaaL

Proccs.or

IJOaL

EPROM roul!

BOOL

RAM faul!

BaaL

ADCIDAC fault

~
OT

;ro;

..

Timwu' has

BaaL

'OOe

-;;om

ii-' " ~;
~
11.6

110 i

OR

R.,erYcd

R=

-;;om

,0;
10. 5

BYTE

,
>D,
,
10.4

..

..

,,

~'"'',
.

iIi

~
lime of, i

23.4 Syot"'" Diagnostk"

Wh~n

u,inl!: ~ CPU with DI'VI cllpability and a

SZI. ID

COf1'<:spoooina ,lave. you can U'jC thc system

function block SfB 54 RALR:>t to obtain fur

ther inforrnation on thc diagn.tmle interrupt.
23.4,4

Readln~

the

Sy~lcm ScMtu~

List

system $JanlS Ii." (SSL) de!cribe. the current S13tll<l of the programmable controller.
Usi ng inforonation funclion~. the list C1l;) t>e
rc"d bul Mt modified. Since the complete Sylit,m starn,U" is e"tremely larl!:e. r d ing is car_
ried out in subli.1S and subli.t eJltnoels. Subli.1>o
lin.' vinuallil;I~, .... hicb mellllb tblot lhI:y are made
a~aiillbk by Ihe CPU operating system unly on
request.
The SSL In ex ists in orner tn identify a ,ublist.
Thi. contain. the module type cIa .. to whi~h
the liil applie~, the number of the subli$t
e"tract, aod the aetual SSl .ub.ist oumber(figun: 23_2). YOtl Ire providc4 with thc desired
infOlmation together with Ihe index which
specifi~, an object of a subl i~t. A S standard. the
CPU provides infrn"lllui on on the au:om8tion
system, but n... and CI' modu les can alSQ use
tbis 5crVlce in ord.,.- 10 make informatiml mvail_
able (see module doc:umMltalion). The p!}'I~ib!e
,ystem nntu) li.ls for a CI'L are described ;n
the operotiOll)j do~criplion .
ReMdi ll g lit e huder ;nfonnHtlon
U!;e the SSllD WII16#OFxx 10 ~8d the header
infomlSlil,)ll of Bn SSL subli.. t witholll Ihe usoe ialed data ~co rd (xx SS!. suhlist number).
The SSL_H EADER. N_ DR parllm eter (number of daJa <ords) then returns the maximum
po;t.iblc number of data records of the .-ubli.t
CAtnoet which th .. module can deliver with all

Ta bl~

23.H

~""""Cl<:rs

0000 - CPU
0100 - 1M
tOOO~

fLl

1100 . CF'

Figu .. 23.2 SI1U<Iur<: ofSSL ID

SSL jub. With dynamic sublists, tile va lue Cll.n

be gn:atcr than the actual number which can be
read. The length of" will n:cord i. specified in
SSL_HEADER. ' ....ith thl' dalll in til<! heade,
infurmati on. it is possible ql. 10 creale 1l sufficiently large data buffer for th e associated SSL
,ubh.1 ill the .u>.rtup_
S I'C 51 RDS YSST
Read SS L . ubll51
Use .y.tem ru,,"'ion SFC 5] RDSYSST to read
a ,ublilt Of' I subli,t extract or the 'Y"lem Statu.~
lisl (SSL). TIle param~'\c"" for SFC 51 arc liMed
in T~blc 23.&.
REQ '" "I" in;l;ale~ lhe read opct1Ition. Wld
BUSY - ;'0" 1~11, you when it Il;I.S been ~om
pleled. The op:rating syMe m e,Ul execute severnl asynchronous read operalions quasi ~imul
llIIIeou,ly; how many depel<l~ ott Ihe CI' U
being U$cd. If SfC 5 I repuns a lack o f
rewurce< via the fun~1ion vlllue (WIII6#8085),
you must resubmit your read request.
Th~ cont~Dl$ of parameters SSL_ IO IUId
R'-I)EX arc CPU -d~pcndem. If the INDEX
panuneter is nol required to provide infOl'lDlllion, iu ~s'i&nmem i, irrelevant. The SSL_

for SFC 51 RDSYSST

""

23 Error Handling

HEAD ER p aram e ter is of data type STRUCT,

with variah l",s LNGfHDR (data type WORD)
a nd
N_DR
(WORD)
'is
compo]]"'nts.
LE NG fHDR co]]tai]], th'" kngth of a data
record. N_ DR the number of data re~onb read ,
Usc Ihe DR param et er to spc~ify th", variabk or
data area in whi ch SFC 5 1 is to enter the data
"",unts . For exantple, PitDD200.DBXO,O
WOlli) 256 wo"ld provide an area uf 256 dam
wo rds in d ata hloek DB 200, bt:ginning with
D AD O. If the a rea provided is of insufficient
c a pacity, as many data recurd s as possible will
be e ntered. Oniy complete data re~urd , are
transfem:d. Th e spccifi~d ar~a must he ahl e to
a~~ommodatc at least 011e data record .

The Web server a lso suppons thc Terminal Service of \Vindows ,u that thin -cli e nt ,oimions
can bc u,~d w ith mohi1e devi ces or lIM! sta t;ons w ith the thin -clienl opliun llmier Windows
CE. In this case, ,p~eifythe address in the I'}fin
hllp.-!Iaaa.bbb, ccc.dddihasic.
You call navigate to fu rther information from
the 5taIT pase of the CPU. Plcase nute that the
information ollcred is "ati c and you h" v~ tu
prov ide fur up dat ing o f t he screen content yoursel f The c ur,..,nt intormaliun frum the C PU is
nse d for printing OU1, r~gardless of what is on
the display.
Note : P.-oteel your Web server against un anthorized aCCeSS by mean s of a f'irewall ,

23.5 \Veb Ser ver

C PUs w ith 311 Ethernet interface can have a
Web server that provides information from the
CP U . Tu rea d out the infonnation v ia the ~um
p any 's intranet or th e Internet, yuu require a
;>" eb browser, such '" Internet Explorer, Versiun 6 .0 o r highe r, th at displays the infomtalion
on HTML p ages .

23.5.1 Activ ating the \Veb

the lP address ofthc CPU in the Object l'ropertics of the PROF~ET intert3ce on the " (j~ner
al" tab.

Sen- ~ r

Yu u can a c tivate the Web se rver when parame teri"; ]]g the CPU with the Hardware ConfiguraI.ion . Whe]] a Cl'U is sde~ tcd. EDIT --;. OBJE CT
P PQP r.RTl ES selects th~ "W~b" tah 0]] which
you activate the VI/e b server and s~l ect the la n g uage fnT th e me,sage texts and the entries in
the diagTIuslies buffer. 11 is also pu"ib l ~ tu >elect severallanguages, depending on the mem ory capacity of the Cl'U.
Th e lang uages installed with STEP 7 arc a,,~il
abk You c an establish agreement w ith the languag e' in'talled in thc proj~~t in the S1MAT 1C
M anager: Sel ec t OPTIU~S --;. L ANGtJAC,E FOR
DISPLAY DEVICES and dcfin~ the languages ,
Th e W~b s~rvC1" is rcady for usc afkr the contigurmion data have bc~n loaded onto the CPU.

23.5.3 \V.. b information

The W",b server can provide the following information in a suitably e qui p ped CPU:
"

Start page with general CPU informalion

"

Identific ation data

>

Oiagnostics buff,,'!

"

M"ssages (without ack nowledge faci li ty)

[:>

PROFINET

interface

v Variable status
> Vari"ble tahle,
The first p age pro vid ed by the Weh server is the
Welcome page. From here, cliCk on ENTE R to
reach tne Stan pa ge . If you want \0 skip this intra page in future, activate th~ option "Skip TnIrO",

Start and identificatio n

Tht" Stan page ,hmv8 ynu general infonnation
and th e ,tatu, ofthc CPU at the tim~ of th e q uery. The Tdent ification p age conta ins the key data ufthe CPU. such as the p lant designation. location desi g natiOll, aIld order number.

23.5.2 Reading !lut We b infor mation

To d ial ~h e CPU in the Web brow,,,,", enter th e
l P a d dress ufthe CPU in the "Addrc<s" fldd in
the fonn hllp:llaaa ,bbb.ccc.ddd. You can find

Dia g n osti cs hu ffer

You see the contents u f the d iagnosti cs huffe r
on this page. Sel e ct the number of diagnostics

23 .S Web Ser.,..,
buffer "'lItries per display interval. Detailed in
formalion about the selected event is di splayed.
You can select the display languagc in the lOp
right window. Jf the selected language is not
configured, the in formation is displayed in
hexadec imal code.
Mc~sage.

Messages are displayed in chronological order,

including the date and time . You cannot ac
knowledge the messlges via the Web browser.
You caD search for specific information with
filter selling'. With sort functions. you can sort
the me age., according 10 message number or
,tatu._ Detailed information about the ,elected
message is displayed.
You can ,elect the display language in the top
right window. If the selected language is not
configured. the information is displayed in
hexadedmal code .
PROFINE:T interface
Infonnation on tile PROFINET interface i,
fOUDd on the p;<ges "Parameters" and "Statistics"'. The YiAC address and the IP address are
displayed. for ~xample, as are statistical analy,es of . em and =eived data packages.

Variable sta tu s
You can monitor the status of up to 50 variables
on this page. Wh ..'lI you specify the address of
the variables and the display formal, you rCc~ivo the value of the variable _
You can select the di splay language in the window "1 the top right. When specifying addresses, please note that the mnem011ic, for English
(eg. I for input) differs from tho"" "fother Ian
guage. (E for Eing ang"' in German, for example). S)1Itax error, arc indicated in red.
Variable tables
The Web server allow, you to monitor up to SO
variable tables with up to 200 variable, each.
fhe memory space avai lable in the CPU might
not Ix sufficient to make use of all the possibil
ities . If variahle tables are displayed incomplete. reduce the memory required by the mes
sages and symbol comments, if pmisible, use
only one language, and keep the number of
variables per ts.ble low.
Select onc of the configured variable tables for
display. f irst. you must prepare the variable tao
ble for use by the Webser"er. If you select EDtT
~ OBJECT PROPERTIES whL'lI a ,'ariablc table is
.elected, Or if you create a Dew variable table,
the Properties window operu;. Emer VAJiolVEB
as the family "n the '"~neral- Part 2"' tab, or
alternatively, activate the Web seITer'" checkbox.

'"'

Appendix

Appendix

This section ofthe book contain, useful supplements to the LAD and FBD programming languages, an overview of the COntentS of the
STEP 7 Block Libraries, and a function overview of all LAD and FBD element'; ,
t>

You can also provide bloch with LADIFBD

program w ith block p r otec tion. For lhis
PUfl'O,e, you use the sour~e -oriented Editor
in the STL programming language.

The "LAD Book'" and "FBD BOOK" libraries

each contain eight programs which are essentially illustrative examples of LAD al1d FBD
representations , Two extens ive cxamples show
the programming of functions, func tion blocks
and local in,tances (Conveyor Example) and
the handling of data (Message Frame Exampl~). The m~mory requi~ments a~ approximately 2 MB.
To try Out an example. set up a project that cor_
re'ponds to your hardware configuration an d
copy the program, including the ,ymbol table,
from the hbrary to the project. Now you can test
the example online.

t>

You can use a funher function ofSTL. indIrect add r essin g. to transfer data arcas in the
LAD and FB D programming languages; the
addresses of these dala areas arc then nOI
calculated until runtime. The "LAD Book'"
and " FRD_ Book" libraries which you call
download from the publisher's Wcbsite (see
page 8) each contain a "Sample Message
Framc" showing how to sel up and transfer
data areas.

t>

The standard ST EP 7 package in cludes

block libra r ies with loadabk functions and
function blocks and with block headet> and
inwrfacc descripti ons for sys tem blocks
(SFCs and SFBs).

t>

A function o" crview of all LAD and FBD

functions completes the book.

S u pplem ents 10 G ra phic Programmin g

Block Protection; IndireCI Adcires.ing ;
Message Frame Example

You can download the archive libraries " LAD_

Book" and "FRO_Book" from the publishcr's
Website (sox page 8), You retrieve these librar.
ies under the SIMATIC Manager w ith FILE --+
RETRIEVE. Select the archive from the dialog
iield displayed. You define the destination
directo ry in the next dialog field. In general,
libraries are located under ... \ STEP7\5 7LIBS;
but you can choose any other directory, fo1'
exa mple ...\$TEP71S7PROJ, which nomlaUy
com ains the projects

Bl uck L ib r a ri es
Organi~at ;on Blocks, System Funct ion
Blocks, rEC Function Blocks. 5 5-S7
Converting Blocks, TI-S7 Converting
Blocks, PID Control Blocks, Communication Blocks

26

LAD Fu nc ti o n O ""'r vie w

All LAD funclions
F B D Function O \"c lO'icw
All FBD func tions

2~

Supplements to Gnphie

l'T<l~mmini

24 Supplements to Graphic Programming

Blocks container; select the block(s) from

wh:cb you want to create a source file.
Cunfirm wilh '-OK".

24. 1 B lock Protection

The kCYI',ord KNOW_HOW_PROTECT represents block pro:c<..1ion. Youeannot view, print
Or moditY I block with this attribule. The Editor
only di'plays the block header and the ~Iara
tion table with the block paramet=<. In w~e
oriemed input, you can protect any block. yourlClf ,,ilh K..'<OW_HOW]ROTECT. This
means thalnoQne , including yourself, can view
the compiled block (keep the SOurc. file in _
sa fe plilCe!).
You can enter the KNOW_HOW _PROTECT
block protection with STL, and it must ~
so urceoriented. To do so, proceed &ii follows,
I)

2)

3)

the block under LAO or FBO in

the usual " ay. Later. this block "ill M
overwritten in the Il'ler program 810d:s by
tl>l: block with the k.eyword. If you "'lIlIt
to rclain the (original) blod: (strongly TeeO1nmended wben entering block protection), you CIIIl lIore the block. in, for example. P (LLieT--<:reated) library before en
tmng the key"mrd. You can also store
your emiR us..r program in this way.

4)

The entries for a code block arc in the following

order:
~

Keyword for the block type (FUNCflON.

FUNCTION_B LOCK,ORQA NIZAT ION_
BLOCK) with specification of lhe addf"CSl\.
Thi~ may be followed by the block tit le
(startin& ~ith TITLE..... ) and the block
comment (starting with II... ).

I>

Block. attribute>; (dcpendillg on whether you

have filled in fidds in the I'roperlics pale
fOT the block and, if so, how n:llmy).

I>

Variable declaration (seventl sections with

tht keywords VAR_ult ..... E:-<D_VAR):
depending on whether you h.ave dc<.:lared
block-local variabks and, if so. which ones.

c>

Projram. starts with BEGIN .nd end! with

the keyword for Ihe end of the block (for
cxampk ENDJU NCTTON_BLOCK).

C~a te

Create a SOurce container. If then: is no

object Sm",:es under the S7 program (on
thc same level as the u, er program
Blocki). you must create on e: Sele<:t the
S7 prog"u" and mert the object SOI"-CU
with lNSF.RT -+ S 7 SOFTWARE -+
SOURCE FOLDER.
Generale an STL SOUrce from the block.
Cbangc 10 the EdiloT (via the task.tw, for
t"umple, 0' open any block in Blocks Il!ld
thl'11 close il again) and .el~t the menu
item FILE -+ GE~ERATE SOuRcE. In the
dialog form displayed, .," your projel:\.
lCle<.:1 the object Sources. and aSiign a
name for the wurce file under Object
Name . Confinn with OK". The next dIalog form snows you all block. in the

Open the source file (for example by 00...ble-<.:Iicking on the source file symbol in
the SIMATIC Manalleror ~ith the Edilor
and Fu.E -+ OPE-'1). You now see the
ASCIl source of you. lA DIFB O block. If
you have ~usly KlectW $evenl
block~. these blocks will be LImInlled in
order in the source file.

The entries fClT a data block. are in the followUlg

order:
I>

Keyword fOJ the block type (OATA_

GlOCK) ",th specification of the addrcss.

I>

Block attributes (depc-nding on w!>ether you

hale filled in fields in the Propenits ~le
for the block and, if so, ho", many).

:>

V~riable declaration (>1arting with STRUCT

II11d ending with END_STRUCT) or, in the
ca8e of instance data block!;, \~c i>dd~~! of
the a~S(}l: iated function block.

."

24 Supplement. to Graphic Programming

Do

5)

6)

Variable initialization, sraning w ith HEG TN

and emling with END_DATA _BLOC K.

t>

Area pointers; these are 32 bits long and

contain a sp<.-<:ific operand o r its address

You ente r the ke}Word KJ'\JOW J IO W_

PROTECT in the source lile, in ib own
Jin~ in ea~h case, following the block at tributes and befor~ the variable declmation. If you have c,..,ated a source from
several blocks, enter the keywords III all
selected blocks. Finally, Slorc the SOurce
file.

Do

DB poinlCrs~ these are 48 hits lon g and in

addition to the area pointer they also contain
the nnmber of th~ J ata block

Do

ANY poimers; these arc 80 bits long and, in

addition to th e DB pomte r, they contain further informat IOn such as the data type of the
operaud

Compile the souree fIle w ith FII.I' --'>

COMPILE. The compiler create, H block
with the specified blo~k anributes (i n the
creation langu age STL in the case of code
blocks: the creation language 1S not signilicant hcre .ince KNOW HOW PROTECT means the block Can no longer be
viewed or printed out). The compiled
(n~w) block is in user program B /nch and
replaces the (old) block with the same
number.

Vou can set the program editor using OPTTO:---: S

--'> CUSTOMIZE on the "Source, tab so that it

automatically generates a ,ource whcn sa,-jng a

block. You can use the "Run hutton w g~'lleral<:
new sources from eJ<isting b locks.

24,2 Indirect Addressing

With the programming language STL. you have
a method o f acc e,slng operands whose
add r~sses arc not calculated unt il runtime. This
is also possible to a limited degree in LAD or
FBI): Yon can wait until runtime to define
which data areas yon want to copy with SFC 20
flLKMOV.
However, first som e useful informatiOIl on
point~rs.

24.2.1 P ohuers: General Remark.l

For indirect addressing. you require a data format that contains the bit address as "ell as the
byte address and , if appli~able , th~ operand
area. Thi s data fonnat is a pointer. A pointer is
also used to point 10 an operand.
The re arc

thre~

types o[pointers:

24.2.2 A rca Pointer

The area pointer contains the operand addres .
and. if a pp li cable, thc op<:rand a rCH. Without
operand area, it is an area-imernal pointer; if the
pointer also cont ains an operand arca, it is
rcf~"1T~d to as an area-crossing pointer,
The notmion for constant rcpr",cntation
follows:
PIIy.J<

for an ar ea -internal pointer

e ,g. Pl"22.0

P"'Zy,,,

for an a rea-cros,ing pointer

e,g. P# M22.0

IS

as

where" - bit address. y = hyte address and Z ~

area. You sp<:c ify the operand ID as tbe area .
The contents of hit J I different iates the two
pointer types.
Figun: 24.1 shows HIl pointer type s and their
cOn!~nts 'IS provided by STEP 7.
The area pointer has, in principle, a bit addn:ss
thaI must always be sp<:cificd even with d igitHI
operands; in Ihe ca,c of digital operands. specify 0 as th~ bit address. Example: Yoo can U,e
area pointer P# M22.0 to addres1 m~mory bit M
22.0. but also mcmory byte MB 22, memory
word l'vf\V 22 Or mcmory doubleword M D 22,

24.2.3 DB Pninter
In addit ion to the area po inter, a DB pointer al,o
contain, " d ata hlock number in the form of a
positi,-e TNT number. [( specifie s the data block
if the area pointer points to the global data ()r
ins tance <lala area. In all other cases, the lirst
t,"o bytes contain zero.
The notation of the pointer is familiar to you
from full addres>ing ()f data operand,. llere
also. the d~ta hlock and the data operand are

242 Indirect Addm,ing

Aru4nlerruol poI_

, , , o

0 0 0 , , , , , , , , , , ,, , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
0

~,

0"

0"

8yte acl<!res.s

,
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, , ,

A,,, ,c.ol.lng point..

,,,0 0 ,,, 0

"""",.-

0 0

8 8 n+2

eMl

00

o,

Byts n+l

!-

lS-10

1S-10

lS-10

By\e n+l

""

Type

""

8yte

Byte n+5
Byte .. of!

SytII n"2
8)'11 .. +3

n ~3

I-- '"" -

1-- ..... -

B)'II n+4

I--

Byle ... ~

8yte nH

number -

Byte .. +7
Byte .. +8

f-

,, ,,

0
0

,, ,
,, ,, ,
0
0

Ouantity -

""0 """

num!l8r -

I--

r-

Ouantity -

f-

f-

16#0000 -

f- 16)000

'''.
,""'"

potnter

Byte .. *9

Perlphtl ral UO (P)

Inputl (I)
Outputl (0)
Memory bits (M)
Glob, 1d e ... (OBX )
Inallonee deta (DIX)
'J
Temporary local cata (Ll
Temporary local data
J)
ofilia prM""" ........ b1od< (V)

' ) NoIwIlto ~_ .. soI/Ig

2)0nIy wIlto _
... _
.....-

1--- -

f-

OUlntity -

161JOOOO -

1----

Type In thl ANY polnllr:

El ementary
dati typ. .

Campi..
dall ty pe.

"" C"'"
"'"
' ''
"'" 0''''
""" ,'-"" mo

OWOR'

OE DT
13 STR ING
Par,mat type.
17 BLOCK_FB
18 BLOCKJ'C
19 BlOCK_DB

DATE

10 TIMER

Zero pointer

OC

TIM:
$5TIM E

00 NIL

.m

BOOL

WORD

OA

"

FI~u",

f-

r- .... -

Add,." , a:

0
0
0
0

ANY point

101' lImerslcounte.. 101' bIocQ

Byte n

Byte .. ~2

Dala block

S~8CSd...

ANY polnll.

ANY point"

Byte n

0"

8yte acldfes!l

fo, dillo typu

DB pointe,

8illOdd''''''!

~~ ~~~fE~8

14.1 Stru<:tI.On: of the Pointers in STEP 7

'"

24 Supplement< to Graphic Programming

spec iflCd, "epam ted by a p<:!riod. P#D ataBlock.

DataOperand

Examples:
'>

Example: I'#DB IO.DBX 20.5

You can apply Ihis poimer to a block paramet~r
o f parameter type POINTER in order to point to
a data Op<:!rand. The Editor uscs lIlis pointer
typc inkmally to transfer actual paramet ~rs.

> P"M 16.0 BYTE 8

Area w ith 8 bytes beginning MB 16
I>

PilE 18.0 WORD 1

luput word IW 18

I>

1'# .1:: 1.0 BOOL 1

24. 2.4 A:\fY Poio t er

In addition to the DB pointer. the ANY pointer
also contains the data type and a repetitIOn factor. This makes it possible to point to a data mea
The ANY pointer is available in Iwo variants .
For variablcs witb data types and for variables
with parameter types. If you point to a ,a riahle
with a daw typ". the ANY pointer conta ins a
DB pointer, the typ", and a rep etition factor. If
the ANY pointer points to a var iable witb a
paramete r type, it contains only th~ numbt.r
instead of the D B pointer in addition to the
type. In the case of a timer or counter function.
Ihe type is repeated in b yte (n+6); byte (n+ 7)
contains BII 161100. In all o ther ca.ses, thes~ two
bytes contain the value WIl16#Q000 .

P"DB I I.DFlX 30.0 INT 12

A.rea with 12 words III DB II beginni ng
DBB30

lupu t I 1.0
In the C38e of paramet~r type., you write the
pointer as follow>: L#Nmn bcr Type Qllantity
Exampl~s:
~

L#lO TIMER 1
Timer function T JO

Li'2 COUNTER 1
Cowlter funct ion C 2

The Editor th~'ll applie., an ANY pointer that

agrees iu type and quanti ty with lIle specifications in t he co nstant repres~ntation. Please nole
that th ~ operand address in the Al\'Y poimer
must al.o be a bit address for data typ~s .

The first byte of the ANY pointer contain, Ihe

syntax lD; in STEP 7 it is always JOhn. The
type specifics lIle dat~ type uf lIle variables for
which th e ANY pointer appli~> . Variables of
elemcnlary data type. DT and SlRll\' G
rece ive the type shown in Figure 24. 1 and the
quantity I.

Specification ofa constant A?\'Y poinK"T makes

sense if you want to access a data ar~a for which
you han, not decl are d any variables. In princi ple, you can also apply variables or operand, at
all A,,Y pararnCt~'!. For eXJm p1e, th e rt:presentation P# I 1.0 BOOL I is identical wi th
"r 1.0 or th~ corr~ ,pon ding symbolic address.

If you apply a variahle of data typ~ ARK"Y or

STRUCT (also UD T) at an ANY param~ter.lIle
Editor gen~rates an ANY poin ter to the field o r
the structure. This ANY pointer contairu the ID
for BYTE (021,~,J as lIle type, and the byte
length o f the variable as the quantity. n,e data
typc o f the individuul field or structure eotnponl.-"Uts is not sign ificant here . Thos, an ANY
po int~"T points with double the number of byws
to a WORD field. Exception: A point~r to B
fi eld comisting of component' of data type
CHA R is al ~o created w it h C I JA R type (03h~x).

IfYOll do not specify any o.!cfaults when dcclaring an ANY paramc t"r at a function hlock. the
"Editor aS8igns l0h<:x to the syntax II> and OOh<x
to the remainin g byte.,. The Editor then r~prc
, em, this (empty) ANY pointer (in the data
yiew) a. follows: P#PO .O VOl D 0.

You can a pply 3n ANY pointer al a block

parameter of parameter typ~ At'lY if you want
to point to a variable or an operand area . Th~
eonsmnt represe ntation for Jata types ;s a, follows :
P #[DataBl oc k.]Opemnd Type Quantity

24.2.5 "Variahle" AJ.'lY Pointer

\Vhen copying .... i th S}' C 20, you specify in the
SoUTCC and destination pam meters either an
abso lute-addr~ssed
area
(for
ex am ple,
P#DB 127.DBXO.0 BYTE 3 2) or a vari able. Tn
botb cascs, th~ source area and th~ destina\ion
ar~a are In.ed during progmrrml ing (variable
indexing is nO! possible ~ven for array compo ne n(8). T he following method i, availahle for
runtime modification o f a data a rca ~r~alCd al a
block p'mtmet~r of type fu"\,JY:

24.3
You C~~l~' variable of data Iype A)\."'Y in I~
temporary local data and usc this 10 initialize an
ANY pMIIImeter. The Program EdilOrihen doe~
not generale &n ANY poinler (as it would if you
trt"aled 8 different variable). but use;; lhe A~"'Y
var iable in the tempomry local data as an AI\'Y
pointer to a jOU!"l:e or destination ~rea. The
ANY variable ;1\ the temporary local data is
s!nlcrured in the same way as an A"IY point;;r~
you can now modifY the individual entries at
nlnlime.
This pro<:cduu functions!lOl only in the case of
SFC 20 SLKMOV but also willi block parameten oflYP'-' ANY in other block!!.
The "LAV_BOOK" and --FBD_Book" libraries
which you can download from the publisher's
Website (IC<; page II), e~eh contain a --Messase
Frame E~amp\e" program, which in turn both
contain an e:<ampk of the "variable" ANY
poimer.

Blwf~ptiOD.ofthe

l\I~nal:'

"M ......!:" FnI.ITIC:

E.umpl~'

frame dAta

The eump1e sbows how you can define frequently occr.ming data. "mClUres IS yOllr own
dala type ,nd how you use Ihis datH 1)'1)<l "'ben
declaring variab les a.od parameten.
We construe! II data ~!or<: for incominll and outgoini me,s~gc frames: A Send m~ilbo~ wilh
Ihe llnltlUre of a mc>sage frame. " Rece;ve
mailbo~ with Ihe S>IIIIe $lnlClUrt". ~nd a
(~~ei'e) ring buff~r Ihat i~ to provide inlc-rmediute 'I()ralle for incoming message fr8me~.
Since the data struclUJe of the message thune
occun [requmdy. "'"C will define il as II user
dcfinro data 1)"1'" (UDT) frame. The nru:IU#
jram.. contai1l'l a frame header whose ~tnK."\UI\! we
alsu ,..ant to~"C 3 name: 10. "The Send mailbox
!IDd the R~h'e mailbox are 10 be data blor.:b that
each eOl'tain a ~-ariable ,,~th the StnlCtUl"e of the
from ... Finally. there is 31so II ring buffer. II da13
block with an array 1."<lIlS;';ting of eighl camp<>nems 1M! also ha~e the same d<ila structure "'" thr;

frame.

24.3 Drlef Description of the

,;MesSilge Frame Example"
This ~umple deals primarily wilh 1>0\1.' data is
hlmdlcd, .nd IS broken down as follo".,:
I>

Messa~'C frame data. sbm,", bow 10 bll!ldle

data SlructUl"C$

I>

Time-oC--d.ay check. shows how to handle

system blocks omd .nmdard bloch

I>

Editina Ihe m~ssagc ihlme, .,ho~ the use of

SFC 20 BLKMOV wilh fLxed addresses

!>

Indirect L"Opyina o f the dala area. shows an

"indirect copy" function using "variable"
ANY poinl~-rs

I>

Sav~

message fram~, shows Iheuse of~indl

~rop)'mi'

Figure 24.2 $1>0\1.... the program and dala structure for Ihl' example.

You can find Ihis program und~ "MesSll~'e

f'rumc E~nmplc" in the libraries LAD_.I:look
and HID 1300K which you can download
from the publisher's Website (s~ page 8).

Tlm .... of_da~ ch eck

The c~ample sho ..... s how to handle s)'st~ and
standard hlocks (e"aluating etTOl'S. copying
from lhe library. renaming).
The timc-of--d.ay chn:k function U 10 output the
nme-of-day in Ihe integral CPU re~I_lime cluck
as a fi.w.~lion ,alue. Forlhis~, we requiu
the system function SFC I READ_eLK. ",hieh
rt"ads the dale and Ihe time-of-day from the
rt"al'lin>~ dock in Ille DATb_A)o.,' D_TIMf. or
oT data fonnal. Since we only want to reoo the
time-of-day. w. also rt"quire the IEC function
Fe H Dr TOO . This funClion felches the limeofday in-the TIME_OF_DAY or TOI) formal
Imm the DT dala fonnat.
Error e>..,/ualion

1bc ~ySI~m functioDli signal an error via binary

resuh parameter tJR II!Id v,a function value
RJ:.. VAL An error oeeu...-ed if binllt)' result
13R :"0'; Ihe function value is then ,ItO nega""e (bit 15 is ~). The IEC ,tandard functions
signal all error only via the bmary rt"!;ull. Bolh
types of ~rror evaluation an: shown in the
example. If an error was encountered. an
invalid ~alue is output for the time-of-day. In
nddilion, th~ binary result i. a ffected. Aner the

'"

24 Supplements to GIaphic Progranuninll

0861

DB"
MeaSUllld values

Send ms_b

Valuoel(1 .. 4J
V8IuII92[1,,4J

ldentinll'

Numbo'

Va lulIs3[1,.41
----_~

Va lulI&4[1,41

08"

0.101

DB"

Flee: malib
ldentift....
Number

"""

Figure 24.2

f)at~

F"C S2
CopyOata

Str\>Cture for the Me,,,,!!" Frame OAt.

time-o(-day check function has bet:n called.

you ClIO Iben;forc also U~ the binary resull 10
see ifan error ha~ occurred.
Offline programming of system fimctiollS

Adore ~ving the input hlock. sy,tem function

Sf C 1 and sU\ndard f unc tion .Fe 8 must be
included in the amine user progTam. 80th fun~
t;ons are included in the STEP 7 standard pack3i1e. YOI.l will find these fl.lnctions in the block
hbrnrie5 provided. (for the system functiuns
intearated into the CPU. the library cuntmns
only an interface description, DOt the actual 5~
tern functions program. TIle function can be
called offiil"lO ,-is litis interface de-scriptiOll; tbe
imerface de5Cription i~ n01 transf~-rred 10 the
CPU. Loadable function-; such as the lEe funclions are available in the library as exa:utable

E~aml'le

will fmd all interface descTiption~ for the ~Y"

tern functiollS.lfyou ~till have Ihe project win .
dow or your projec.t opc-n, you CUll displHY Ihe
two windows .ide_by_.;,",c with Wt~IlOW -+
AII.R........ uE -+ VtRTICAl..LY and drag" the
selected ~y$lem functions 10 10 yuur program
usinr; the mOuse (sele<:t Ihe SFC with the
mouse. h old the "'OliSt key down. drag to
Blocks or into ilS open window. and drop).
Copy standard fu nction FC 8 in the sume way.
You "ill find it on the lEe Fmlclion Blocks
library. Fe 8 ;5 II loadablt function; it therefore
reserves user memory. in contrast to SFC I.
If a standard function block is called under
"Libraries in thc Program Flcrnent Catalog
u$ing the Editor. it i. aUlomlllically copied into
Blocks lind entered in the Symbol Table.

program~.)

Renamj"K .uondorrifimcrions

Select the Stondarri Library with FII..F -+ OPEN

under the SIMATlC Manager and op<..'11 thc SysWm 1""'lcl/rm l1/ock.< lihrary. Under Blocks, you

You can rename a loadablc .tandard function.

St"'kclth" standard functi"n (for example Fe 8)
in the proj""t "indow and dick onc~ (aga in) on

24.3 Brief ~scrip!ion of the "M"",agc frame Examp le"

the dc~ ; gna!or. The name appears in a frame

and you can spe<:ify a new addr~,s (for example, FC 9~). lfyou p!\:ss the F\ key ",h ile ~h c
~tandard function (n.:namcd to Fe 98) is s1ili
,clc<:\ed. you w ill nc-'cnhclcss recdve the
online help for the origin"! standard function
(FC 8).

If an ident ically addressed block c:fists when

copyi"!!, a dialog box appear,; wh~,c yo" can
choo,e bet'W'een uverwriting and remuning.

Symho/ic

add",,'~

You. can assign name8 to the system function'

and the 'lanciarJ functions in the Symbol Table
so that yu u can al"" a<;ce" th~s~ fun~ti()m 'ymOOlically. You can assign these names freely
within the pennissible limits arplicable to
block name>, Tn the example. the block name in
each case is . elected as a symbolic name (for
~rter id~n\ification).

Editing the IDI'<UIlC frame

The data block S~nd Mail!> L. to ~ filled with

the dam for a message frame. We use a function
hlock that has the ID and the con,ecutive num~r stored in its insmnce dam hlock The net
data are .tored finally in a glohal data hlock;
they are copied into the Send mai lbox with syslem fun~liQ!l fjLKMOV We u~c th~ limc-orday check funelion 10 take lhe lime-of-<lay from
the CPU's real-time d ock .
lhe [!CSt nCMmk in the function block fB
Generalc_Ftame transfers the 10 stmOO in the
instance data. h lock to the frame h eader. The
consecutivc number i. incremented by I I and
is also tnlIl,[cmd to the frame h eader.

The >econd network conmins the READ_eLK

fun~tion call that mkes the lime-ot~day tro m the
real_lime clock and emers it in Ihe frame header
in nME_ OF_DAY fonnaL

Byte t

Byte 0

woro ,

16#10
F i~D""

SoType

24.3

Sln!L~UTC

SoNu m

FB Generul,,_ Fram c ;" programmed in sucb a

way that it is ~allc d via a signal edge to generate
a message framc.

Indir ect cuPling of a data

ar~a

The c~ampk ,hows the editing and u"" of a

'variable" A NY pointer w ith graphical progmm elements.
lbe wpyData function cap ie, a data a rea
whose address and length you can set a,
required via b lock parameters . The individua.l
block parameters corrcspond 10 the individ""l
elements or an ANY pointer (see Chapter
24 .2.4. "AI\'Y Pointer'). The specifications in
the block paramcters must bevalid values; they
arc not eh~cked (SFC 20 BLKMOV signal, a
copy error in its function value parameter.
wbich is lransferred to the CapyDala fnnction',
function value parameter),
Essential elem~'DlS are the two temporary variables SoPain/,'r and DesPainl"r, which are af
daw-Iype ANY. Thq contain th e ANY pointers
far Ihe ,ystem function SFC 20 TlLKMOV.
SoPo;nkt points to the .ource arca of the data
to be transferred and De,<raimer points 10 the
destination area. Figu'" 24.3 shows the strueNrc of the S"Pvinla variable; DesI'aimer has
the same SlrucNre. The individual bytes, words
and doublewords of the ANY variabl es are
acce>scd via their ah.wlute nddre>ses ,

Area Pointer

Ward 4

"'0'

of Ihe Variable S"Painla

In the sub,equcnt networks, you will sec a

method of copying selec led variable.' at runtime with the syslem function SFC 20 BLKMOV and w ithout u,ing indirect addre~';ng. It
i~ therefore also not necessary 10 know the
absolute address or the structurc of the variabl~s. The principle i~ extremely simple: The
desired ""py funet ;on is selected using com pari"'n functions. The numbers I to 4 arc petmis,ihle as seleclion criteria ,

!1

..

"""

.~

SoByte

SoBlt

413

24 Supplements to Graph ic Programming

SAve message frame
The example shows the use of the CopyDalo
function (copying a dala area with programma~
ble address),
A message frame in the data block Rec~Mai!b
i. to be wrinen to the next location in dam block
Buffer. The block-local variable Entry deter-

mines the location in the ring buffer; th~ value

of this location is used to calculate the address
io the ring buffer.

'"

The ,,/'y variable has a value range of from 0

to 7. In the first network. a comparator determines whether EntlJ' ;ii less than 7. If this is the
case, Entry;s incremented by 1 in the next network. otherwise it is set to Zero. EntlJ' multiplied by 16 gives the absolute byte address of
the next enlry in the ring buffer (the data structure Afessageframe consists of 16 bytes).
The CopyDala function, which copies the mes_
sage frame from the Recei,c mailbox (data
block DB 62) to the ring buffer (data block D8
63). is ca lled in Network 3.

25 Block Libraries

2S Block Libraries

The STEP 7 Basic software includes the Stan

dard Lihrary which contain, the following
library programs:

,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,

Organization Blocks

25.1 Organization Blocks

(Prio - o.-fauh priority class)

00 Pri o Designation

System Function Blocks

IEC Function Blocks
5557 Converting Blocks
TJS7 Convening Blocks
PID Control Block.
Communication Blocks
Communication funclion.
Miscellaneou. Blocks
Time syncbroni2ation and slamping

f urther supplied libraries are STMAT1C_

NET_Cr, wb ich contai ns I ~ communications
blocks for the CP module. in the library pro
gram, CP 300 and CP 400, Redundant 10
(VI) with blocks for module redun<lancy, and
R~dundant 10 CGP witb bloch for the redun
dancy ofindividual module channel .
You can copy blocks or interface dcscriptions
into own projects from thc library prograIm
descrilx><l.

10 2
II

12 2
13 2
13 2
2
16 2

"

Main program
Timc-{)f day interrupt 0
Time-{)f day interrupt 1
Time.of.day interrupt 2
Timeofday interrupt 3
Timc-{)f.day interrupt 4
Time-{)f.day interrupt S
Time-{)fday int~rrupt 6
Time--of day interrupt 7

OB Prio Designation
20

21
22
23

3
3
5
6

Time. delay
Time delay
Timedelay
Tim edelay

30 7
31 8
32 9
33 iO

Watc hdog
Watchdog
Watchdog
Watchdog
II Walchdog
Watchdog
II Watchdog
Watchdog
15 Watchdog

interrupt 0 (5 s)
in terrupt 1 (2 s)
interrupt 2 (I s)
interrupt 3 (500 ms)
interrupt 4 (200 ms)
interrupt 5 (1 00 ms)
inteITllpt 6 (50 ms)
interrupt 7 (20 ms)
interrupt 8 ( I 0 fiS)

16
17
18
19
20

interrupt 0
in terrupt I
interrupt 2
interrupt 3
interrupt 4
interrupt 5
interrupt 6
interrupt 7

"3635 "
37
3S
40
31
32

33

interrupt 0
interrupt I
intcrrupt 2
interrupt 3

"

Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
22 Hardwa,..,
23 Hardware

""46

"

55
56

57

25 IV!u!t;processor interrupt

47

DPY I status interrupt

DPYI update intcnupt
DPY ! vendor interrupt

25 Block

Librarie~

IEC rimers a nd LEC

DB l"rio De~ignation
6i
62
63

SynchronoUll cycle interrupt 0

SynchronoUll cycle interrupt I
Synchronous cycle interrupt 1
2S Synchronous cycle interrupt 3

""

'" "
" "
"""
'"
""
70
72
73

8J

Technology syn chronous interrupt

8S

87
~,

Priority class error I)

O P error n
Communications eITor
Pm<:essing abort

12l I)

Prio -

I)

Background processing

Proaramm ina error

110 access error

C T UD
TP
TON
TOF

SFB N ame
8
9

""

PRINT

20

21

STOP
RESUME

"

STATeS
USTATUS

START

CONTROL

CPU clock and run _time meter

87

C_ D IAG

,
3

"

"100
101

."

Tn il i"te cold or wann stan

in the purtner
Set panncT to STOP
Initiate restart io Ihe
purtner
C heck status of partner
Rccei,"c status of partner
Osignation
Check communications
stut us
Determine connection
statu s

Desi gllatioll

SET_C I. K
Set clock
READ_eLK Read clock
S ET_ RTM
CTRL_ RTM
REA D_ RTM
SNC_RTCB

Set run-time meter

Modify run-time meier
Rcad run-time meter
Synchronize ~lave clocks

TIM EJC K

Read syslem lime

S ET_eLKS

SCI t ime and clock status

RTM

Designation

Read dala from panner

Write data \0 panner
Write data \0 printer

PUT

62

Offdc!~y

GET

25_2 System Function Blocks

Pul se
On dclay

Uncoordinated Rnd
Uncoordinated receive
B loc k-orienled $C'nd
Block-oriented receive

SfC Name

SFC Name

Up counler
()Qwn counter
Upldown counter

USEND
lJRVC
l:JSE:"O
BRCV

"
19

23

28 III ",~ .. n

CTU
CTO

Osignation

S7 t ommunkat\on

13

W,um reslart
Hot
,""start
10 1 27
102 27 Cold restan

,
,,

"

100 27

12 1

1/0 redundancy error

C PU redundancy eITOr
Communic ation redundancy error

26 Time error l)
26 Power supply fault I)
26 D iagnostics interrupt' )
26 Inse rtlremo'"e-modulc interrupt \)
26 CPU hardware fault IJ

'" 26
"88 "26
"29

SFB Name

~ounl c n

Usc roll_time meter

S7 basic communlcMtlnn
SFC ","ame

Dcsignation

65

X SND

66

X _ RCV

67
68
69

X_GET
X_ PUT
X ABORT

Send dllia eXlemally

Receive data e}!:temally
Read dala externally
write data el<temally
Abon e:l ltema) connection

72

I G I::' T

73

I PUT

74

I_ ABORT

Read data intemaUy

Wrile data illlemally
Abort imernal connection

25 .2

Global data communicati ons

Drum

S}'C l\'amc

Designation

SFS Name

60

Send GD packet
Receive GD packet

32

61

GD SND
OD_RCV

S7_3i10C polnt-to-poi nt coup li ng

"
62

63
M
61

Control opcnlting mode,

onH -CPU

SFC Name

Designation

SEND RK
fETCH]K
SERVE_RK

28

Sct tim~-of-day intemJpt

Cancel time,of-day
imemJpt
Activate time-of-day
mterrupt
Query !ime-of-day
mterropt

ANA LOG

Send data (RK 512)

Fetch data (RK 512)
Receive and provide
data(RK512)

30

ACT_TIi\"T

"

QRY _ TTi\"T

n
D

SRT DINT
CAN DINT

34

QRV_ DD.'

35

MP_AL""

mcasu r~m~nt

30

Cumrul puls.e-width
mod ulatiou

"

Mask synchronous erron;

MSK FLT
OMSK FLT Unmask 'ynchronous

fu nction~

Designation
Position ing with
analog output
Pm;itioning wilh
d igital OUIPUI

"48

Integra ted functiom CPLi 31213141614

SFS Name

Designatiou

39

HS COUNT High-speed counter

FREQ.MIS Frequeuey met<:r
Control 'Counler AlB"
HSC_A_S
Control Positioning"
'OS

4>

CONT_C

SFC Name
63

AS CALL

Interrupt ove nts

29

Control counter
COUl\L
FREQUENC Control frtquen~y
PULSE

H CTRL

SET_TI::-"
CANJINT

"

30
38

II -CPU

90

DIGITAL

29

Drum

Send data
(ASCn, 3964 (R))
Receive data
RCV]!'P
(ASCn, 3964(R))
RES RCVS lRlctt receive buffer
(ASel!, 3964(R))

Designation

SEND l'TP

SFB Name

49

Designat ion

Designation

Integral S7-JilOC

"

Function Bloch

SFC :\ame

SFB Name

6<J

DRUM

Syst~'1n

CoDlinuo us dosed-loop
control
Step-action control
Gen~ate pulse

'"

39
40
4>
42

Trigger mul!ipnx:eSSClr
alarm

READ ERR

,="
Read event ,tatus rcgi ..er

DIS
EN
DIS
EN

Disable interrupt ~ve nts

Enable interrupt cvent.
Delay interrupt events
Enable intetnIpt events

lRT
IRT
AIRT
AJRT

Add ..... ss m od ules

SFC Name

De,ignation

"

GADR LOC Detennin~ logical addre

LOC GADR Dctcnnine 'lot
RD LGADR DClcnnine all logical
addresses

70
71

GEO_ LOG
LOG_GEO

5
50

Designation
CaU "ssembler block

Start time-delay interrupl

Cancel lime-delay
interrupt
Query lime-delay interrupt

Detennim logical address

Detennine slot

'"

25 a lock Libraries

Dah. record trans fer

Dist rih u ted 110

SFB Name

Des ignation

SFB Name

Designation

52

Read data record from a

DP slave

54

I{ALRM

Receive intcrrupt

75

SALRM

Trigger interrupt

RDREC

53

WRREC

Write data reeord to a

DP slave

81

RD PAR

Read predefined
parameters

SfC Name

54
55

Designation

"

RD DPARM Read predefined parameter

WR PARM Write dynamic parameter
WR DPAH2vl Write predefi ned
pmameter

57
58
59

PARM MOD Pardm~terize module

WR REC
Writ e data r,ord
Read
data record
RD_REC

102 RD DPARA

SFC N am e

DP PRAL

Initiate hardware interrupt

11

DPSYNJR

SYNC/FREEZE

12

D ACT_DP

Dcactivate or activate
DP slave

13

DPNR-'1_ DG Read diagnostics data

14

DPRD DAT

15

DPWR OAT Wri te slave dm.a

103 DP TOPOL

P r oce .. ima ge updating

D~,ignation

26

UPDAT_ PI

Update process- image

input tab le

27

UPDAT]O

Update process-image
output table

79

80

SET
RSET

126 SYNC

Set 110 bit fie ld

Reset ri O bit field

"

127 SY NC PO

Determine bus topo logy

Creat e blo ck-rel at ed m ess ages

Read predcfined parameter

SFB Kame

SFC Name

Read slave data

Update partial process

image of inputs in
isochrone mode
Update partial process
imagc of outputs in
isochrone mode

"

NOTifY 8P Messages without

acknowledgment display
A L AR-'1
Mess ages w ith
acknowledgment display

"
"

ALAR.VI 8

;0

NOTIFY

37

AR SEN D

33

SFC Name

Designation

RD_S1NFO

Read start information

51

RD SYSST

Read SYS ST Sl.Ib li sl

52

WR U SMSG Entry iu the diagnostics

buffer

Messages wilhout
accompanying values
ALAR.v! 8P Messages w ith
accompanying values

SFC Name

9
10

17
System di a gn os tic.

D~signalioo

"

19

'"

Messages w itholU
acknowledgment display
Send archive data
Designation

EN_M SG
DIS M5G

Enable mes<;agcs
Disable messages

ALARM_ SQ Me"agcs that ~an be

acknow ledged
ALA R M S
Messages that arc always
acknowledged
ALARM
Dctenninc
a~knowledgment status

- ,c

READ

"

106 DEL 51

Read dyn amic system

resources
Enable dynami~ sys1.Cm
resourCes

25., IF:C Function Block'

'"'
<0"

ALARlI.-CDQ Me"age, that can be

acknowledged
ALARM 0 Me"ages thaI ~re ajv,(ays
acknowl edged

Co!'}' Hud bloek functluns

SFC Name

Designalion

""

BLKMOV
FU.L

Copy data area

P",-as:;ign dar" ar"a

"

CREAr DB

Create data block m

work memory

23

DEL DB
TEST DB

Delete data blocl::

Test data block

"

25.3 lEe Function Blocks

String functions
Fe

Name

De, ignation

"'"

LEN
LEFT
RTGHT
MID

Length of a STRING
Let] section ora STRING
Right s~~tion ofa STRING
Middle section of a
STRTNG

"
"

CONCAT
fNSERT
DELE TE
REPLACE
FIND

Concatenate STRINGs
Insert STRINC,
Odele STRING
Rep lace STRING
Find STRING

I STRNG
or STRNG

Convert TNT to STRING

Convert DINT to STRING

32
26

"
"

.,

CO:\fPRESS Compress

Enter suhstilll1c valuu

8'

UBLKMOV Copy data area

wirno"l gap'
CREA_DBL (iencrate data block in
load m~'lnory

'"

25

82
83

'"
85

REPL VAL

m~mory

READ DBL Read load memory

WRIT DRL \Vrile load memory
Ci{A DB
Cr~a\c data hlocl:: in
work memory

38

STRNG_I

"

STRNG OJ
STRNG R

39

Designation

D_TOD~DT

6
7

01 DATE

30

SST! 'JlM
TIM SS TI

Convert SSTIME to TIME

Convert TIME to S5T1M E

.1,
.13

AD DT TM Add TIME to DT
SO DT T\1 Subtract TIME from DT
SR_DT_DT Subtracl DT from DT

STP

"
''''

WAIT

Wait for delay time

OB RT

Determine OR runtime

CiR

ConfigllT"tion in RlJ).<

Changing program
protection

SFC Name

Dc,ignation

III PN IN

Update input.

Update output<

Pi': OUT

'" PN DP

De,ignation

DT TOO

30

Reuigger cycl~ lim~

monllor
Chang" to STOP .Itatc

Blocks rur PROFfNET ClJA

Convert STRNG 10 DINT

Convcrt STRIKG to
REAL

Combine DATE and TOO

to DT
ExtrnCl DATE from DT
Extract day-of-the-week
fmmDT
Extract Ton fmm DT

RE_ TRI(jR

<09 PROTECT

Convert REA L to
STRJNG
Conwrl S'I1tlKG to TNT

nate and time fn nctluns

3.1

7<

SnU~G

'C Name

Program contro l
SFC Name

,
;J

DT DAY

Compari!(ln ~

Fe N=,
9

28

Update DP connections

"
"

FQ DT
:\'E DT
(i'T_DT
OE DT

Designation
Compare Dr for equal to
Compare OT for
not equal to
Compare DT for
greaK'I than
Compare OT for
g~a\er than or equal to

2S.s TJS7 Convertin!! Blocks

SO

RAD 16

9<l
91

RnG SCHB Bitwise shift register

REG_SCHW Wordwi:;;: ~hm rC "iS1C"T

92

REG FIFO

OJ
94

REG_ LIFO

(FIFO)
Stack (LIFO)

DB_COPY I
DO COl'Y2

Copy data area (di"'cI)

Co py data area (il\di~ct)

96

RETTN

"

LADEN

Save scrntchpad memOl)"

(S515SU)
Load scratchpad m~mory
(S5155U)

98

COD_ llS

""

COD 32

"

16bit fixcJP<'int
~l!are root extractor

BulT~r

BCDbinary conversion
8 decade!
Bin3ryBCD convcrsion
8 decades

Exponentinl function with

ba~c e
124 ZEHN_H_'" ExponllTltial function with
base 10
125 A2_H_ A 1
Exponential function with
any bas<:
123 E_H_N

25.5 TI - S7 Convcrtin2 Bl o c k s

Name

80
81

LEAD_ LAG Lead/lug algorithm

DiSCfet ~ control time
DCAT
intcnupt
MCAT
Motor control time
mtenupt
Index matrix comparison
IMe
Matrix scanner
SMC
Fvcnt ms!kable drum
DR uM
Col leet/distribll1e table
PACK

"'
83

"'

"
SO

Ana loll functions

Fe

Name

100 AE_460_ 1
101 All. 460_2
102 AE_463_ 1
10) AE_463_2
104 AE_464_1
105 AE_464_2
106 AE_466_1
107 AE_466_2
\ 08 RLG AA I

109 RLG_AA2
110 PER ETl
III PER

En

O<:~iptation

Fe Name

Analog input module 4~O

Avalog input module 460
Analog inp ut module 463
Analog input module 463
Analog input module 464
Analog input module 464
Analag input module 466
Analog input module 466

80 TONR
81 I13LKMOV

84

ATT

Anaiag output "'Mu le

Analog output module

83
86

FIFO

PTIOO distributed VO
IIT100 dilrib uted 1/0

MMt h functlonl

Fe

Name

Designation

III
113
114
115

SINUS
COSIl\'US
TANGENS
CaTANO

Sine
Cosin<:
T,mgcnt
Cot""t:: cnt

116 ARCSIN
117 ARCCOS
Ilg ARCTAN
110 AReCOT

Arc ~inc
Arc co~inc
Are tangen!
Arc cotangent

120 LN_X

Natur.llogarithm
l<lgarithm to base: 10
Logarithm to any base

121 La_X
122 B_LOO_X

82

RSIlT

83

SET

"'

88
89

TllLJIND
LlI'O
TIlL
TBL_ WRD

90

WSR

"02

WRD_TBL
SHRB

9l

SEO

"
"

ATH

""97
98

HTA
NCO
DECO
BCOCPL

DlTSUM
100 RSETI
101 SETI

99

Dcsignation

".

Desillnation
Lalching ON delay
Tnmsfer data are~
ind irectly
Relet process image
bit by bi\
Set process image bit
by bit
EnltI value in tahle
Output first val ue in table
Find value in tahle
Output last value in tQblc
Execute tahle operation
Copy value from the tab le
SaveualUm
Combine tnble c\~ment
Shift b it in bit shift register
Bit pattern for 7'i~gment
display
A SC JI hCl'adccim ~ I
conversion
I ! el'adc~lmal.ASCI1
conversion
Least ,ig:rificant ,et bit
Sct bit in word
G~ncrate len,
compleme nt
Count sct hits
Rc~et PQ byte by byte
Set I'Q bytc by byte

" I

25 Tllock Libraries
W 2 DEV

IOJ
104
105
106

COT
TEL TEL
SCALE
UNSCAlE

Calculate standard
dcvim ion
C<'l!Tl;wcd data table<
Table combination
Scale values
Un~cale values

For DP staudard sl!lv~s and

PROFINET 10 devices

FB Name

20
21

25.6 PID Control Blocks

'B Namc

Designation

41

Continuous control
Step COntrol
Generate pul<e
Continuous temperature
control
Step temperature control

42
4l

"
"

CONT_C
CONT_S
PULSGEN
TCONT_CP
TCONT_S

22
2l

FB Name

6l
64
6S
66

67
68

1S

Uncoordinated send
Uncoordinated reeeivc
Block~oriented scnd
Alock-oriented recci,'c
Read data from partner
Writ'" dam to partner

FC

Name

Desi!lnation

1
2

Dr SEND
DP RIXV
DP mAG
DP_CTRL

Send data
Receivc data
Diagnost ic s
Control

62

C CNTR

Scan connection Status

TSEND
TReV
TCON
TDISCON
TUSEND
TURCV

Designation

USEND
URCV
BSEND
HW;CV
GET
PUT

9
12
II
14

Read in put<
Sct Olllputs
Read inputs consi<tently
Sct OUtputs oon~i~tently

IF: cmnmuniclltion s

25.7 Communication Blocks

FB Name

GETIO
SETIO
GETIO]A
SET!O]A

Designati on

UDT Name

"

TCON_PAR

66

TADDJAR

Designntion
Send data
Receive dutu
Establish connection
Cancel connection
Send data via UDP
Receive data via
UD'
Designation

Data structure for

connection configuration
651 TCON rAR TCP_conn_ active
652 TCON]AR TCP_conn....passive
653 TCON_ PAR ISOonTCP_,onn active
65< TCON]AR ISOonTCP_'onllJ)ass ive
6" TCON]AR ISOonTCP_conn
_CP_active
656 TCON]AT ISOonTC1'_conn
CP""pllssive
617 TCPN]AR UDP _local_opeJ1

661 TADD]AR

Address structurc of the

communication panncr
UDP rem_address Hnd

PO"

25_8 M'KfliaueolU Iilorks

2S,K Miscellaneous Blocks

FC

Fe

Name

Designmion

60

LOC_ TlME

Read local lime and

swnm~r

61

BT_LT

62

LT_ HT

63

S_ LTlNT

ILl

Convt'rt modult' rime

into local t;nlt'
Convert localtinx
imo module lime
Sci Lime imCTTUpt
accordillillu I<>cal time

FB

Name

Designalion

60

SET SW

"

SET_SW_ S

62

T1MESTMP

Switch over
SUn>mt'I'lwinter lime
S .... ilCh ov",.
summC1'/winlC1' lime with
limt'stalUS
Send lllCssagCS with
time stamp

U DTNwne

Designation

,
4

.
8

""
"
"
43

N~,

Designation

DP SEND
OP_ RECV
DP DIAG
DP_CTRL

Send data
Re.:eive data
DiBgn05tics
Control

AG_SI::."1\'D

Send daLa
(rROFIBUS FDL and
Industrial Elho.'1IlCl)
AG_RECV
Recti,'t' data
(PR O FIllUS FDL and
Industrial Ethernet)
AGJOC K Di sable data exchange
(ln dustrial Ethem~1)
AG_1J?;'LOC Enable dala t'xchangc
(lndustrial EthernC1)

fTP C O NN

WS RULES

~Iion

to

FTP STOlt
FTP RTR
FTP_DELE
F'TP QUIT

SC1'Id data block to .scroe.

Send file to elicnl
{klete file on 5Cl'\'C'
Cancel connection

C_CNTRL

Scan eonn(X:t;on status

UDTName

60

E..'Ilablish
~~,

Rul~

ror summcr/wint.er
Iiitit' JW;lehinll

Designalion
FILE_DB_ HEADER

Llbnry prol,tl"am CP 40f)

25.9 SIMATlC_NET_C P
Llbnry p ..... gr am CP 300

F.

,
,
,
3
4

6
9

12

13

""

"

N.~

IDENT
READ
RF.PORT
STATUS
WRlTE

Det; i lllU'1ion

FMS communications:
Identify pIIMDCT
Read dat.a from panner
Transmit variables
Request stahl.
infonnntinn from partner
Write data In partner

eUT

Uncoonlinated send
Uncoon:linared receive
nlock-arientcd 5Cftd
Illock-orirntcd receive
ltelKl (\ata from pIIrIner
Wrill' datu to parblt'r

IP CONF

Send config uration

USEND
URCV
a SEND
BRCV
GET

F.

Name

,
,,

lDEl'<,
READ
RF.PORT
STATUS

W RJTE

"
FC
,

IP_(.'ON f

Send coll/lt'Clion
configuration

Name

Designation

AG_RECV

AG_LOCK

AG SEND

Desil1nalion
FMS communi cations:
Identify partner
Read dau. from partner
Send vanablej
R~esl statull
inronnat;on from partner
Write data 10 partner

Send dalll
(PROFIBUS FDL and
Industrial EltternC1)
Rccei~e data
(PROFIRUS FDL and
Indu.sllia! Elttem et)
Disable data excbange
(Industrial Ethernet)

25 Block Libraries
8

A G UNLOC Enable data exchange

(Industrial Ethernet)

'"
"

FTP CONN
FTP STOR

Establish connection
to server
Transmit data block
\0 server
Transmit file to client
Delete file On server
Cancel connection

"

FTP RETR
FTP DELE
FTP QUIT

"

AG LSEND Send data

(TCP connections)
AD LRECV Receive data
(TCP connections)

43
44

60

UDT Name

Designation

RED INIT
451 RED_ DEPA

'"

Initialize 110 redundancy

Trigger depassivation

25.11 Redundant 10 CGP

S upport of redundancy for Individual
module channels

FILE_ DB_ HEADER

FB Name

Designation

450 RED IN
'5 1 RED OUT

Read reduodant 110 signals

Output redundant 110
signals
Diagnose redundant (/0
Read status of redundam
110

Library program Red_TO

Designation
FB Name

"I

FC Name

Library program Red_ tO

Support of redundancy for modules

RED IN
RED OUT

'"

Diagnose redundant 110

Read status of
redundant 1/ 0

Designation

25.10 Redundant 10 (VI)

4"

RED DIAG
452 RED STAT

Read redundant 110 signals

Output redundant 110
signals

452 RED DlAG

452 RED STAT

FC Name
450 RED INIT
RED DEPA

"I

Designation
In itialize 110 redundancy
Trigger dcpassivation

26 Fuoction Set un

26 Function Set LAD

26.1 Bask Functions

Memory

Blnuy ch""'ks and comblnatlun.

fun~ ti on.

Sin,. cuil

NO <""toct

MldU ......up.n

NC .......

r
Il.o,ot <Qil

Bi ..... 'Yoper_

'.
--.-

I' 1>----1

.::;_ Slnary Operand

SR NIx

<.

'' ' ,

"

Timer fune!i"m

a'' .

,'

~.

MSbo.

"'
,
" a,.
,

,.:: ;.;
""

~'-

....11h'. ... gein

th.po..... _

J n61~ld" .1 .1'IlI'llf'

S""" Iii with

I~ne

Mesa coil

NC <:OIl"",t

,/

( 81)

mod<

NO """Ioc~
1'00111 fd lt<'
,,,f ... oPl"" ~

'1IY>8I" 01"1"'''''
O\llllltior'l

-".....,

-1'1

II

Timer op<!f8.nd .

V1

With the timer Cbaraclcti ,tics:

-,

S_PULSE
S_PEXT

SP Pulse
SE Extended Pulse

8_0D1

SD ON dela)'

5_00TS
S_OFFDT

55 Stored 0'< delay

SF OFF delay

425

26 funct ion 5<-1 LAD

26.2 Digital Fu nctions

Transf"r fun"Uons
MOVE
EN
ENO-

Comparison functio ns

ou,

'N

=''NN''

Counter function.
Counter op.narK!
S_CUD
- CU
Q~
-

CD

-_ S
pv

cvf-

CV_BC0rR

Counter operand

Count up coil

--{(,cui

Cu"'" down coil

Count .. r operallO

--{('co)

w;,lI~t

Rose't'(Iit

-{('scI

Cw",

Counler~nd

--{(RI

accord ""IIO

equal ' 0
nO! equalw

-,

"'NT

REA'

- 0

- R

~,

~o

~R

>0
_ 0

>R
_ R

<0

~O

~R

-="""'
-,
areat"
or "
'0
than
equal
len 'han
Ie.. 'han or
equal to

<,
<-,

I
I

Counter opetlInd
Sec ~'" coil

Compare for

A rhbmetk functions

I
AD0_I

=
=
- 'N'

" rhllmetk: b ...,

EN
IN1

Counter operand

NC contact

-{IIf----

Counter ope rand

--{(,1f----

Wilh the cOllnte r c haracteristic s:

Up,ldown counter
Up counter
Down COIIn{C'

'"

ENO
OUT

Calc ulation
Addition
Subrr""tioo
Multiplication
Oivi5ion

Moo"'"

accordinj to

'NT

D!NT

AOD_I
SUB_ I

ADD_I)[

MUL_'
01"'.'_1
~

SUB_ OI
MUI __ DI

Dlv_o r
M OD 01

REAL
ADU_R
SU8 R
MUL_ R
OIV_R
~

16,1 Digita l

Mathematical Functions

Shift Functions

'"

M.tb hox

~' unet;ons

ENOrOUT

Shift bOI

SHL W
EN
ENOl-

=,,~,---_O_U~Tr-

SIN
CO,

Sine

SHL_ W

Shift word left

Co , ine

SilL_OW

Shift doublcword leU

T~

Tangent

SHR W

Sl1 iff word right

"'"

Am ,inc

SHR DW

Shift doublcwOTd rigM

ACOS

Art cosino

;>ffi -

Sl1 iff word with sign

ATAN

Art tangen,

SHR OJ

Shift doublowOTd with ' igr<

'OR

Finding the square

ROL_ DW

Rotate left

SQRT

Finding tho square root

ROR DW

Rotate Iiiht

EXP

F..tabli , l1 ing the exponent

u<

Finding the logari thm

Convcrsiun Functions

I BCD
-EN
ENO IN
OU T

Com'CT>ion of OINT ' 0 REAL

Word Logic

Word l<>gi< b<J~

'"'
"'oro

WAND W

AND

WOR W

OR word

WXOR W

Ex<iu,ive OR word

WAND OW AND doublcword

WaR_OW

Com'c"iOD of UCD

WAND_ W
EN
ENO
IN'
OUT

ORdoubleword

WXOR OW Excl usin OR d""hl""'ord

"

with rounding
CEIL

(0

next higher number

FLOOR

(0

ne~t

KOUND

to next whole m,mber

lower numoc--r

TR UNC
INV OJ

DINT one '.

NEG Dl
NEG R

DINT nega tion

427

26

FUD~lion

Sel LAD

26.3 Program Flow Control

Mas ter Control

Stulus Bits

MeR orea

Re,ult lP" "t~ r

than zero

Aet inte

>0

"""11-1-

"""1 1-1-

Rc,,,ll gf'<'ater tha n

o r equ~l lo ""'"
Res ult less than
uro

Reb}'

De.c\i"~t<

f--jMCRAi--l

MCR HrCa

f--j(MCRD)I---1

O~ "
MCRw n e

---{MCR-<))-----i

Clo se
MCRzonc

f----{MCR)-----i

<0

------111-1Block Functions

Ro:.s ult le than

or equ~1 lu >e'"
Rc.ult nol equal
to . e m

--jI l-l<>0

"""111--

Ca ll i" g"
fun c tion block
"i(h dota b loxk

=~ O

Re.ult c'luHI 10 zero

Re.uH in , ..u ~
(unordered)

O v e rflow

Slore ~

overflow

Binary f8 u lt

SAVE c oil

-"""111--uo

-"""111--

fu nction "bl<><k
wit h d au, block

OV

-"""111--os

-"""111---

C~llinj,: " functio n

#nam "

b l""k or a 'y>1cm
fu nction b lock
as loca l in stallce

EN
ENO
IN 1 OUT 1
IN2 OUT2

BR

-"""111---

C alling 0 fUDction

---iiSAV')f--!

IN2 OUT2

Ckllin. u

Jump Functinns
J ump if
RLO "I "

RLO - " 0"

Entry,
j um p label

CC>

EN
ENO
IN 1 OUT 1

Call ing a
system funct ion

Junlpi f

Calling a s)'S!<IIl

SFCx
EN
ENO
IN1 OUT1
IN2 OUT2

cC>

non.parameterized
fu nc tion

--{ CAll)f--I

Colling a
non.param ete r i7ed
system [wnctioo

--{ CALl)f--!

SFC )(

D.. slina~on

---(JMPN))-----i
De s tination

RET coil,
block end

",">
cL.t. hloc k

c on dit i on~ l

--{ RET )f--!

DB>

f---li DPN )f--j

27 Fuuction Sot FBD

27 Function Set FBD

27.1 Basic f'unctions

Binary Check< a nd Combin ation.

Momor)' FunCllon.

~ f,.,
~ f'OR
~ f&

A.N 1I funotiDD
Bir.ary operaoo

----1 I

Olt function

Bin8ry <>perand

-------1

1/

I--

E.du,lvc-O R
fno<lioD

Binary operaoo

-------1 s I
Binary operafld

-------1

R...,

Bina

operand

--1

Ch .... for
.lgn. I ..... "1"
Cb .... for
d;n. 1
n<!l0tlon

-4

".t. "n",

'R

Sit box

Timer Functions

Binary <>perand

as box

RS
-

a
Po,it"" odge

orlbcRJ,o
Nl1Iath'c Ig.
of lb.

RJ.o

Edge mern<>ry bit

----l

I--

lodlvldnal clcmeots

Tomer operand

sran oox with

:::j ", " I

limo moo.

T""..r ope'and

Reset oox

-j

Check luner ,ran"

T""", operand----rTimer operand

With the timer

~haracteristics:

S PU LSE
S PEXT
S onT
S ODTS
S_ OF FDT

se
se
SO
SS

se

--ct..-

""'
K
Extended Puis",
ON delay
Stored ON delay
OFF de lay

27 Function ScI FBD

Transfer

27.2 Digital Functions

~unctions

MOVE
EN
OUT

MOVE box

'N

Co mpariso n Functio n s
CMP = .. I
tNl

Compa rison bH

ENO

'N'
Counter F unctions

Com pare fo r
Count ..r ope rand
SCUD
cu
CV
CD CV_ BCD

Counler box

Individual clem e n ..

Count up

bo~

Count d own box

Set connter box

w ;!b ~ou n '

Reset box
Check
coun ter Slatus

Counte r operand

--1

<NT

"'NT

REAL

= ,
>,
>- ,

- 0
= 0
>0
_ 0

- R
= R
>R
_ R

<D

<R
<-,

-,

eq ua l !o
no! eq ual to
greater than

greater than Or
equal !o
less than

according 10

k than o r

<,
<- ,

<-D

equal to

cu

Cou nter operand

--1

CD

A rithmetic func t ion s

Counter operand

:::j

PV

SC

Ar hh m~tlc

box

=
-

EN
IN1
IN2

Counter operand

-l

Counter operand
Count .. , operand

----r---cL...
l NT

With the counter characteris tics:

it"

Up/down counter

Multiplicati o n

Up counter

Di vision

Down counte r

M odu lo

DI V ]

O UT
ENO

f--

27.2 Digitalfnnction.

Malhemadcal

FUDctlon~

Shift Functiuns
Shlfl bo.

MOlb bOl

Si ne
Co,ine

ACOS

Arc <o.ine

SHL_ W

Shift wmd loft

SIlL D W

Shift duubl~wo<d left

SHR W

Shift w ord ri ght

SHR DW

Shill do ubloword right

SIlR !

Shift word with sign

SI IR....[)I
ROL OW

Shift doublew e>rd wi,h ' ign

RUR IJW

ROl<l le righl

R(}"'~

left

Word Logk
Con~eNion

Fu nction s
WAND_W

'"

Connr>.ioll bOI

IN1
IN2

OU T ,"0

OUT
ENO

,',',

...

~~.,

M'ITI word

'DO
Conv~"ion

UR word

ofl"'T 10 BC D

helnsi' " OR word

WA ND

10 INT
to ON!'

"
CEIL

to nexl higher numbc.,.

H.ooR
ROUND

'0 no" lowe r number

TRUNC

.... EG VI

tu n ex' whole number

ow

WOR_DW

W:XOR OW

A N D <ioubic",,,,<i

OR doubl. word
hclu.in OR douhlowmd

27 Function Se t FBD

27,3 Program F low Control

Status HIts

Block Fuoctloo s

Result greater

>0

I---

>-0

I---

<0

I---

Result Ie.. than

or equal to zero

<_0

I---

Re<ult not equal

to zero

<>0

I---

Result e qua l
to zcro

--0

I---

th an zero

Reoul! KICatCr thlUl

or e qual to zero
Re<ult Ie ..
tbon zero

Result invalid
(unordered)

UO

Overflow

OV

Stored overflow

0'

C heck hinaty result

Sav e bin ary re.u lt

'R

C a lling a
function block
w ith data bloo;k

C" llin~ ">Y",C

"Ill
function block
"' ith da ... block

Call in G a
function b lock or

I--I---

a system fun~ ! io n block

I---

Ca ll ing a
fu nu iotl

~>

local instan ce

I---

-------4 SAVE I

Jump if

Calling a . y ste m
fu nction

Jump if
KLO - "0"

E ntry,
jump label

JMP

----i JMPN I
Destination

Master Control Kelay

Activace
MCRarea

"'""

MCR u mc
Clo,"",
MCR ,.one
D<......,tivate
MCR area

Destination

-------1 MCRA
-------1 MCR<
-------1 MCR>
-------4 MCRD

OUTt

- 'N'

'"0

C al ling a
non p a l"ame<e!u e d
fune, i<>n

'N' OUT2 -

- 'N

'C.

OUTt

'N '

OUT2

SFCx

-- ' N

r'" 'NO rr'N'

-------4

OUTt

OUT:;>

'C.
CALL

Callin g a
non . param elO rized
syS\em fu n Clion

---l

CALL

Con ditional
bloo;k end

---1

Rn

a~.

a,.
---1 a'N

data bk>ck

'"' 'Na
-

Destination

-------4

- 'N

Jump Function.
RLO - " \ "

#n ame

SFCx

I
I

lnde"

Index

programming FED 112

programm ing general 73
programming L AD 11 0

A
Actual parameters 257
Address priority 77
Addre.sing
absolute 117
indirect 40H
symbolic 11 8
AND funClioo \36

pwpenlcs

ANY pointer

description 410
introduction 165
Arc functiom 204
Archiving proje<:ls 56
Arithmetic functions 197
status bits 222
ARRAY (data type) 126
AhcI.--rlaining a module
Assign
OOx (FBD) 146

.ddr"",

AsynchmDous errors 398

A utomation License Manager

reset box 14g

,elba" 148

C
383

50

B
Background scanning OB 90 275
Binary fl ags 22 1
Binary logic opcmtioru; 131
FHD 134
Binary result 222
EN/ENO 225

SAVE 225
status hit HR 222
B il memory 48
Block funct ions for code blocks
Block l ibra ries 415
m ock p arameter'S 252

forwarding

10 1

protection 103, 407

structure 1()()
transferring 83
types 99
Bo,
a<sign bo" 146
memory box HID 148
mcmoryhox LAO 144

235

260

Blocks
checking block consistency Ill5
companng 76
COlT'ting interfau 104
<k<cription 98
opening 106
programming description 106

CHAR (data ty(X') 122

Checksum 58,98
Clock memory 48
Coil
!,<"et coil 142
set coil 142
singk coil 142
Cold rc<taM 380
Combining connections 70
CommenlS multilingual 80
Communication
distributcd I/O 2g7
global data cornmunie'l1 ion 320
IE cOmmUnica liun 339
introduction 35
PlP communication 346
S7 ba, ic comm uni~atiun 324
S7 communication JJO
Communication error 08 87 399
Comparison functions 193
COlllpr<.:ssing
SFC 25 COivWRESS 282
us\.'<' program
84
Configuration in RUN 352
Configuration table 59
0Jnfiguring stations 58
Conn~cting a PLC
81

Index
Conncclion lable 65
Conneclions
configuring 65
loading data 68
Controlling 110 b its 233
Convers ion funclioll$ 207
~tatuS bils
222
Counter functions
lEC counters 186
S TMATT C counters 182
C PU hardware fault~ OB 84
CPU infonnution 82
Creating projects 54

system blocks 3 14
Down counting 185
DP maslu system
configuring 292
description 29
direct data exchange 301
equidi'itant bus cycles 301
in network conllguration 64
isochronous mode 301. 302
DPVI intelTUpts 367

398

D
Oata b lock
funct ions 244
monitoring lind modifying data
addresses 92
omine/online 84
open 246
programming 113
regiSlcrs 244
windows and views 11 4
DDta operunds 245
Dala Iypes
complex 125
elemcnlary 120
subdivision 120
uscr-do;:fi ncd 128
DATE (dahl. Iype) 125
OATE_ AND_TrME(dalatypc) 125
[kvice name, device number 305
DillgnO!l ing hardware 86
O iagnoslic inlelTUpt 013 82 401
DiagnoSlics address 44
PROFIBUS 01' 289
PROFINET 10 30~
Digital flags 22 1
DTNT (data type) 122
DINT ehleulution 200
statuS bilS 222
D irecl dala exchange see DP master system
Disable output modules 377
D istributed VO
addressing PROFIBUS DP 287
addressing PROFINET 10 ,,)<
configuring PROFIB US DP 292
configuring PROF1NET TO 306
introduction I'ROFIBUS DP
introduction PROFINET TO 31

"

.J<

Edge evaluation
description 152
Editor
FBD clemcnts 112
LAD clements 110
program 73
symbolic 71
E).I/ENO mechani sm 225
Enabling peripheral OUlputs 90
Error handling 393
Example
binary scaler 154
conveyor belt 260
conveyor connol I ~6
counter control 188
cdillng the message frame 413
reed 262
indirect copying of a data area .\3
message frame 411
parts eOUlller 261
save message frame 414
time-or-day check 41 1
Exclusive OR funclion 138
Exponentiation 205
Extended pulse timer 176

F
Fault-tolerant SIMATIC 24
First check 221
Forcing variables 88
Fonna! parameters 255
FUllction set
FBD 429
LAD 425

G
Gateways 68
Global data communicution
Global data table 322

320

Index

SY't~m function hlocks 416

TI-S7 conv~-rting blocks 421
Lood memory 26
Local data
static 241
temporary 240
Local instances 242
Local time 278
Logarithm 205
Logical addr~ss 44

GSD fi1~s
for PROFIBUS OP
for PROFTNET 10 309

'"

H
Hardware catalog 59
Hardware config uralion 58
Hardware in\errup1.S 365

I
IEC counler functions 186
IEC fundious
library 419
lEe tim~'r fllllctions 180
Indirect addressing 408
Input' 46
Tnsewremove module in terrupt OD 83
IN T (data type) 122
IN T calculation 199
status hits 222
Interrupt handling 356
DPV I imerrupt, 367
general remark> 356
hardware inl~rrupis 365
multi processor inlerrupt 369
synchronous cycle imcrruplS 370
time-delay imerrupts 360
limc-of-day imerrupts 357
watchdog interrupts 363
IP address 305
Isochronous mode 301

J
Jump functions

227

L
Language smting 79
Libraries
commnnication blocks 422
creating 56
general 53
IEC function block:; 419
miscellaneous blocks 423
organization blocks 415
overvIew 415
PID control blocks 422
re<iundant 10 (V I ) 424
mlundant 10 CGP 424
S5-S 7 converting blocks 420
SIMATIC_NET_CP 423

398

Main program ODI 270

Master Comrol Relay (MCR) 230
Mathematical function. 202
status bilS 222
MelJl(Jry hi" 48
Memory box
FBD 148
LAD 144
jI,lemory card 25
Mc'1Ilory /'uncti ons
FED 146
LAD 142
Memory re set 378
Micro memory card 25
Midlin~ outputs
150
Minimum scan cyele time 275
Modifying variabl e, H8
Module time 278
Modules
ascertaining addresses 383
monitoring and modi fying 61
parameterizing 3H6
start add!\:ss 44
Monitoring variables 88
MOVE box 162
Move funclions 161
Multilingual texts 80
Multiple instance .,e" Local instances
Multiprocessor
ullerrupt 369
operation 282
Multiprojeet
adjust projects 69
creating and Mit ing 57

N
NCcontaet 131
Ne gation
conveNion fun(.1ions

212

435

Inde><
normally closed (NC) eontact
NOT conlacl (l.An) 134
R LO 13<J
scanning ror "0" (FBD) 135
Network
configuration 62
templ~les
IW
NOeontl1ct 131
Number range overtlow 222

IJ I

o
off-delBY limcr 179
on-deIIlY timer 177
Onl ine help 54
Open data block 246
Operating modes
HOL D 377
RESTART 380
RUN (main progrnm) 270
START-U r 380
STOP 378
Opcrnt;ng modes of the CPU 376
OR functi on 137
Organ iz:nion blocks
ltSytlehronous erron; OB 80 to OB 87 398
background SC:;IlUling OB 90 275
detemlining runtime 283
diagnoMic interrupt 013 82 401
in tem.lp\~ Oil 10 to DB 64
356
main prugnun a u I :no
overview 97
redundancy error O B 70 10 73 399
rc.\tartOB1OOtoOBI02377
syDCh runou~~OB 121,OB 122
393
OutpuL\ 47
Overflow 222

['
Parallel eiro;uits 132
Parameter types 128
Parameterizing modul es
!'cripliClllI inpu!.!l 45
Peripheral oulpulS 46

3~6

Pointer
IOcnera11\."lIlI1rkll 408
Power supply crror.s OB 81
Prioriry classes 95
Process image
description 46
isochrone updating 371
su bproce~~ image~
272

436

398

updating

272
abon 08 88 399
PROFIBUS DP
addre~~ing
287
configuring 292
isochronous mode 302
PROF[}'' CT 10
add ressing 304
configurin g 306
send cycle time/upd"tc time 3 10
~ync domain
3I I
topo logy editor 311
PROHN ET 10 systCtn
de~cription
JI
in net ... ork configuration 64
Program cditor
FBD ~lcmeDts 112
gcncr~1
73
LAD dements 110
Program ~lcmcnts catalog 108
Program exe<;UI;on errors OS 85 399
Program length 97
Program organization 271
Program processing m ethods 94
Propttm staru.~ 90
Program ~trucrure 270
J>rogrommin8 code blocks 106
Progmmming daU! blocks 244
Programm.ing net works 108
Project
arcbiving 56
ero:ating 54
genC11lI 53
objKt h ierarcby 52
Project ve rsions 57
Protecting
user program 2116
P1P comrlllmica ti uD 346
Pulse timer 175
Procc~~ing

R
Rack failure OB 116 399
REAL (dat.a type) 124
REAL calculation 200
starns bits 222
Rcfcr~'Dce data
78
Resct 1:>ox 14K
Reset coil 142
Rese! function 148
Response time 276
Restart ehaructcrisricS 376

lnde ~

Restart tyl"'s 380

Re.ult of the l"gi~ ope.-at;on 221
negation (FBD) 139
negation (LAD) \3 4
Retentive on-delay timer 178
Retentivity 379
Rew iring 76
Rota!~ funct ion;;
216
Rounding 210
RS memory function

348

SFB 62 RES ReVB

349

S5-S7 converting bloch

libraries 420
S5TI1.IE (data type) 124
S7 ba ,ic ~ommunkatio"
external 327
internal 324
S7 conununicatioD 330
S7-300 station 20
S7-400 station 22
Safety-relalcd SIMATIC 24
Scan ~ycle monitoring lime 274
Scan cycle ~Iali~tics 274
Smsor type 119
Sencscircuit, 132
Setbox 148

SFB 63 SEND RK 350

SFa 64 fETCH RK 35 1
SfB 65 SERVE RK 351
SFB 75 SALRM 316
SFB HUSEND 332
SFB Xl RD_DPA.R 388
SFB 9liRC 332
SFC 0 SET_eLK 278
SFC 1 READ_e LK 278
SFC 100 SET eLKS 278
SFC 101 RI M 281
Sf C 102 RD DPARA 38~
SFC 103 DP _TOPOL 320
Sl'C 104 elR 355
SFC 109 PROTECT 286
SFC 11 DPSYN FR 318
SFCI2D_ACT_DP 319
SFC 126 SYl\C PI 371
SFC 127 SThC PO 31 1
SFC 13 DPMRM DG 319
SFC1 4DPRD OAT 319
SFC 15 DPWR OAT 320
SFC 2 SET_RIM 28 1
Sf'C 20 BLKlvlOV 165
SFC 21 FILL 165
SFC 22 CREAT DB 248
SFC 23 DEL DB 248
SFC 24 TEST DB 248

Set coil 142

SFBOCTU l H7
SFB 1 CTD I S7
sm 12 BSEt-.n 333
SFB )3 BRCY JJ3
SFB 14 GET 334
SFB 15 PUT 334
SFB 16 PRTh, 335
SFB 19 START J.1fi

SFC Z5" COMPRESS

SFC 26 UPOAT PI
SfC 27 UPOAT PO
SfC 28 SET TTNT
SFC 29 CAN TINT
SF C 3 CTRL RTM
SfC 30 ACT TD., .
SFC 31 QRY_TTI\'T
SFC 32 SRT _DINT

fBD

150

LAO 144
Run-time me!er

280

SFB 61 ReV PTP

Sf'B2CTUD 187
sm 20 STOP 336
SFB 21 RESUlvIE 336
SPB22 STATUS 3.17
SFB 23 USTATUS 337
SrBJTP 180
SFB 4TON 180
SfB 5 TOr 180
SfB 52 RDREC 390
SFB 53 WRR EC 391
SfB 54 RALRM 374
SFB 60 SEND]TP 348

282

273
273
.159
360
281
360
360
362
SFC J.1 CAN DINT 363
SFC 34 QRY_D1NT 363
SFC 35 MP _ ALM 370
SFC 36 MSK FLT 397
SFC 37 OMSK FLT 397
SFC 38 READ ERR 397
SFC 39 DIS_IRT 372
SFC 4 READ RTM 281
SFC40 EN_lRT 373
Sf C41 mS_AIRT 373
SFC 42 EN_AIRT 374
SFC 43 RE_TRlGR 274

SfC 44 KEPL_ VAL 397

SFC 46 STP 282
SfC 47 WAIT 282
S FC 48 SNC_RTCB 278
SFC 49 LGC_GADR 384
SfC5GAf)R_LGC 384
SfC SO Rf)JGADR 386
Sf CSI RDSYSST 403
SFC 52 WR_USMSG 400
SFC 54 RD D?ARM 389
SfC 55 WR PARM 389
Sft.: 56 WIt DPARM 3'XJ
SfC 57 I'ARM MOD 390
SfC 511 WR_REC 392
St "C 59 RD_REC 391
SfC 6 Rf)_ S I}.'FO 277
SfC 60 GD_SND 324
Sfe 61 GO_ReV 324
SFC 62 CONTROL 337
SfC 64 TIMP.JCK 280
Sf t.: 65 X_SEND 32N
Sf C 66 X Rev 329
S FC 67 X_GET 329
Sfe 68 X_PUT 330
SFC 69 X A[JORT 330
SfC 7 f)1'_PRAL 318
SFe 70 LOG_GEO 384
SFC71 GEO_LOG 384
SFC 72 I_GET 326
SfC 73 I_ PUT 327
SFC 74 I ABORT 327
SfC 711 OB_RT 283
SFe 79 SET 233
SFC 110 RSET 233
SfC 81 UBLK.c\.tOV 165
SFC 82 CRSA_DBL 248
SFC 83 RRAf)_f)RL 165
SFC84WRIT_DJ3L 165
SFC 8S CREA_DIl 248
SFC 117 C DlAO 33~
Shift function~ 213
stutu~ bill!
224
SIMAT IC counter functions 182
SIMATIC manager 50
SIMATIC timer funcrion 170
Single coil 142
5101 ulklres~ 43
Source Iiles
up<Jaling or generating 76
Squa~-root extraction
204
Squaring 204

'"

SR memory function
FDD 149
LAD 144
Stan infnnnation
DPV 1 interrupts 368
hardware intemlp'" 366
inl("fTllpt handling 357
mam prugrnm Oil I 276
multil)rocessof interrupt 369
r~stan
377
synchronous cycle intenupts 371
temporary local data 241
time-delay int~rrupts 361
time-of-day interrupt. 358
watchdog interrupts 363
Static local data 14 1
Status bits
binary result BR 122
description 211
e'<aluating 224
fir<t check 221
OR 222
overflow OV 2n
RLO 221
. ening 222
Status 22 1
stQrcd Q"crflQW OS 222
StQred overtlQw 222

STRIl\G (dam type) 126

STRUCT (darn type) 128
Subnel5 37
Subpmces~ images
272
SymbQllable 71
SYNClFREEZ 299
Synchronous cycle intemJpts
Synchmnous errors 393
System blocks
<.k.criplion 49
SY$tcm clock 21W
System diagnostics 400
System functio o bloclul
libraries 416
System memory 21

370

T
Temporary loc~l data 240
TIME (data type) 125
Tune of day 278
Timc S1amp conflict 104
TT'AF. OF DAY (darn tyfl<:)
Timebn<ed rcadion

125

off-dclay timer SfB 180

on-delay ti mer SFl::I IRO
pul. etimerSFIl 180
Tint,,-delay intern,pt s 360
Time-of-day interrupts 3~7
Timer charactcnstic.

elltended puliSC timer 176

Qff_dclay timer 179
o n-del ay timer 177
pulse rimer 175
retentive on-delay timer 178
Timer functions
IBetim.,rs ISO
SfMATIC timer. 170
Timing errors OB 80 3911
Trigonometric functions 204

U
UDT (dala type) 128
Up counting IllS
User blocks 99

t:ser data area 45

L'ser data types 128

liscr program
co mpressmg
load R3

~4

prQte<,1.ion 82
tcsting 90

v
Vari able dedarntion tahle
Vari able table 87

100

W
3112,3113
Watchdog interrupts 363
Word logic
description 217
status hils 224
WQn. memory 27
WRrm rcstarl

439

Ab~viatioru;

Abbreviations

Al

Analog input

CAD

Ladder diagram

AD
AS

Analog output

Me

Memory card

Automa1!on system

MCR

Master control rday

AS-l

Actuator-sensor interface

MMC

Micro memory card

BR
CFC
C'
C'U
DB
01

Binary result

Multipoint interface

Continuous function chart

MP]
DB

Organizati on block

Communications processor

0'

Operator panel

Central processing unit

'0
"C

Programming device

Data block
Digital input (module)

PS

Power supply

DC

Digital outpul (module)

RAM

Random access memory

0'
OR

Distrib uted 110

Result of logic operation

EPROM

Erasable prograrnmabk
read-on ly memory

FB
FBD
Fe

Function block

RLD
SeL
SOB
SFB
SFe
SM

FEPROM

Flash erasable programmable

read-only memory

FM
1M

Data !"e<'ord

Function block diagram

Function call

Function module
Interface module

Programmable controller

Structured control language

System data block
System function block
System function call
Signal module

sse

System status lisl

STL
UDT
VAT

Statement list
User data type
Variable table